MASTER 
 NEGA TIVE 
 
 NO . 92 -80588 
 
MICROFILMED 1992 
 COLUMBIA UNIVERSITY LIBRARIES/NEW YORK 
 
 as part of the 
 "Foundations of Western Civilization Preservation Project" 
 
 Funded by the 
 NATIONAL ENDOWMENT FOR THE HUMANITIES 
 
 Reproductions may not be made without permission from 
 
 Columbia University Library 
 
COPYRIGHT STATEMENT 
 
 The 
 
 makin 
 
 reproductions of copyrighted material... 
 
 Library reserves the right to n 
 ', in its judgement, fulfflhnent 
 on of the copyright law. 
 
A UTHOR : 
 
 SHEPPARD, JOHN 
 GEORGE 
 
 TITLE: 
 
 NOTES UPON 
 
 THUCYDIDES 
 
 PLA CE: 
 
 LONDON 
 
 DATE: 
 
 1857 
 
COLUMBIA UNIVERSITY LIBRARIES 
 PRESERVATION DEPARTMENT 
 
 Master Negative # 
 
 BIBLIOGRAPHIC MICROFORM TARGET 
 
 Original Material as Filmed - Existing Bibliographic Record 
 
 88T43 
 ES3 
 
 ■■■■^■[•■"■■MVMni^"*^ 
 
 ■PHH»-*^MJ"."i^ 
 
 Sheppardp John George, 1817-1869. 
 
 Notes upon Thucydides, original and compiled, by- 
 John C. Sheppord... and Lewis Evans... Books I and 
 II, London, Parker, 1857. 
 
 viii, 286 p. l^i cm. 
 
 Restrictions on Use: 
 
 TECnl^IcXrMTcROFORNfbATT 
 
 FILM SIZE: ?^J2!Jr^l_ REDUCTION RATIO:____^/^ 
 
 IMAGE PLACEMENT: lA /IW IB IIB /? 
 
 DATE FiLMED:______ir^^/^/,:l^l INITIALS__^f2i2 
 
 HLMEDBY: RESEARCH PUBLICATIONS, INC WOODBRIDGE. CT 
 
BlULlOGllAl'IllC IRREGULAlUTlliS 
 
 MAIN ^ 
 
 ^p g 
 
 Th V rv,:v y^j 7 
 
 IiiMioiU:ni2liicii:ic iVulnnlion in ilu' Ori ^ liial DocuinciU 
 List volumcij and piij^cy aflcclud; include naiiuiJinns^mtHion il lUniin^ bui lu vvud luxl. 
 
 PagG(s) missiii[^Viiul available:. 
 
 09 
 
 ^ \-^. l-/(i 
 
 1^^^ /^n 
 
 Volumes(s) missiii^/iiut availabld; 
 
 IllcglblG and/ or damaged paj^e(s):. 
 
 Pnge(s) or voluines(ij) iniununibercd:. 
 Bound oul of setiucnce:. 
 
 PagG(s) or illusUalioii(y) filmed from copy borrowed from; p 
 
 LUa\X^ [ i vv 
 
 Hfyy (/ 
 
 Other : 
 

 1 
 
 
 
 r 
 
 Association for Information and Image Management 
 
 1 1 00 Wayne Avenue, Suite 1 1 00 
 Silver Spring, Maryland 20910 
 
 301/587-8202 
 
 Centimeter 
 
 1 2 3 
 
 iiii 
 
 Ml 
 
 llllllllllllllllllllllllllllHllllllllllll 
 
 A 
 
 TTT 
 
 8 
 
 iliiiiliiiiliiiiliiiiliiiiliiiiliiiiliiiiliii 
 M M I I M I I I II I I 
 
 10 
 
 iili 
 
 11 12 13 14 15 mm 
 
 mmIimiIiiiiImiiIiiii lllllllll lllllllll 
 
 TTT 
 
 I 
 
 Inches 
 
 1.0 
 
 I.I 
 
 1.25 
 
 1^ 1 2-8 
 
 2.5 
 
 HI'-— 
 
 
 1^ 
 
 2.2 
 
 luuu 
 
 2.0 
 1.8 
 
 1.4 
 
 1.6 
 
 MONUFRCTURED TO fillM STfiNDfiRDS 
 BY APPLIED IMAGE- INC. 
 
t 
 
 NOTES UPON THUCYDIDES 
 
 BOOKS I. AND II. 
 
 t 
 if 
 
NOTES UPON THUCYDIDES 
 
 OIIIGINAL AND COMPILED. 
 
 BY. 
 
 '\y 
 
 [ 
 
 JOHN G. SHEPPARD, M.A, 
 
 MBAD MASTKE OF KIDDEBMINSTEE SCHOOL; 
 rOBMBBLT PKLLOW OF WADHAM COLLEGE, OXFORD^ 
 
 AND 
 
 LEWIS EVANS, M.A. 
 
 HEAD MASTER OF S A If D B A C H SCHOOL; 
 POBMBRLT FELLOW OF WADHAM COLLEGE, OXFORP. 
 
 BOOKS I. AND 11.^ 
 
 LONDON: 
 JOHN W. PARKER AND SON, WEST STRAND. 
 
 1857. 
 

 s 
 
 1 X 
 
 PREFACE. 
 
 « 
 
 THE present publication was suggested by Mr. Dawson Turner's 
 Notes on Herodotus, and is intended to supply those wants, 
 I the existence of which the very large sale of that useful volumi^ 
 
 seems to indicate. It is perhaps well to state thus much lest the 
 y reader should misunderstand the character of the work, and be in- 
 
 duced to estimate it by a standard which it does not affect to 
 reach. It does not, for instance, deal in conjectural emenda- 
 tion, it does not contain a digest of various readings, or any- 
 5j^thing like an apparatus criticus for Thucydides, and it leaves 
 ^untouched, or only briefly notices many matters, which a per- 
 . feet edition of an historical writer ought to discuss. What 
 "^it attempts is something more humble, but at the same time, 
 Q^we trust, not altogether useless; for it endeavours to furnish 
 University Students with that amount of information which their 
 Second examination may be regarded as likely to require. What 
 Shis amount exactly is, under present circumstances, cannot very 
 V^asily be estimated. The period usually devoted to the preparation 
 r-for a University degree, when compared with the immensely in- 
 creased requirements of the various examinations, will, to the 
 ^tudent at any rate, appear but brief; and the arrangement of the 
 "Relative claims of different authors upon his time, is perhaps one of 
 the greatest difficulties with which he has to contend. If, for in- 
 stance, he desires to raise himself to the standard of philosophical 
 acquirement proposed by Mr. Pattison,* and of historical knowledge 
 by Mr. Froude,t how is he to find leisure for that careful and critical 
 study of the classical authors which Prof. ConingtonJ has so truly 
 described as the only useful way of practising such study at all ? 
 
 We do not presume to answer a question which must in some 
 measure perplex those much more competent to enter upon it than 
 ourselves ; but we venture to say that thus much at any rate is 
 clear. The very conditions of the case render the examination, 
 under such circumstances, of what commentators have written in 
 
 Ik. 
 
 
 3 
 
 > 
 
 i 
 
 Oxford Essays, 1855. 
 
 t Ibid. 
 
 X Inaugural Lecture. 
 
 7089H 
 
VI 
 
 PREFACE. 
 
 PREFACE. 
 
 vu 
 
 various languacrcs upon the text of Tluieyclides, nothing less than 
 a physical imi)ossibility. And yet, unless we are prepared to sur- 
 render much of what hitherto lias been included under the ' idea' of 
 scholarship, an accpiaintance to some extent with the lal)ours of the 
 great scholars of this and otiier ages, and a i)ractical imitation of 
 their ' method; is surely necessary to any one who aspires to be 
 called by that once respected name. 
 
 One help towards overcoming the difficulty might perhaps be 
 found, if competent persons were to collect, within moderate 
 compass, so much matter bearing upon the various works, or por- 
 tions of works taken up for examination, as would afford a reason- 
 able amount of incidental information, and at the same time convey 
 an adequate notion of the way in whicli these subjects have been 
 treated by the great masters of classical criticism. 
 
 This accordingly is what we have tried to do here : imperfectly, 
 perhaps, but to the best of a judgment tolerably instructed by ex-' 
 perience. If these notes do not contain much less than what 
 candidates for the second University examination will require, they 
 may perhaps ftiirly deprecate criticism for not containing more. 
 
 Persons who exercise their wit upon the pursuit of classical 
 studies, are fond of declaring that the chief duty of the editor of a 
 classical work consists in abusing his predecessors. Happily, to an 
 editor of Thucydides this is impossible. To pass over, for the sake 
 of brevity, though scarcely perhaps with justice, many earlv com- 
 mentators of great learning and varied merit, the names of Poppo, 
 Arnold, Goller, J^loomfield, and Kriiger demand the sincerest 
 respect from any person whose lot it may be to labour in the same 
 field of knowledge. Poppo's great work is tndy a monument of 
 erudition constructed with materials gathered from every possible 
 source ; Arnold's affords a treasure of historical and geographical 
 knowledge, and though certahily deiicient in the more strictly 
 critical portion, must ever remain an admirable specimen of sound 
 sense, good taste, and eloquent language. Goller has the German 
 fault of over-subtlety, and sometimes confuses himself as well as 
 his readers; but he has done much for Thucydides, and merits the 
 highest praise. Higli praise also must be assigned to the industry 
 of Dr. Bloomfield, whose laborious and voluminous edition is par- 
 ticularly valuable for its references to later Greek literature, and 
 the historical writers who have imitated Thucydides. It wou'ld be 
 no small merit in any writer to follow respectably where others of 
 
 »• 
 
 K* 
 
 such ability and learning have gone before him. But Kriiger has 
 done more than this,— much more. We cannot mention the name of 
 an author from whom we have learnt so much, without declaring 
 that his edition, in respect of acuteness, soundness of judgment, 
 and general accuracy, seems to us to occupy one of the highest, if 
 not the highest place among Commentaries upon Thucydides.* 
 
 Of Translations we have consulted three :— Mr. Dale's ; a Ger- 
 man Version, latelv published by Engelman at Leipsic ; and the last 
 French Version, by M. ZevoH^ (Paris, 1852). Mr. Dale's work is 
 too well known to require any notice from us. If we have men- 
 tioned it occasionally for the purpose of expressing difference of 
 opinion rather than agreement, this arises from the nature of our 
 relative offices, and not from any desire to disparage so able a per- 
 formance. The Translation published by Engelman— so far as we 
 are competent to form a judgment, embodying, as it does, so much 
 t-aret'ul exposition— is even of a still higher character, and deserves 
 to be classed as one of the most successful, among the many suc- 
 cessful attempts of the kind for which Germany is distinguished. 
 
 M. Zevort has produced a readable version in a lively manner, 
 but what he himself states generally, is at any rate true of his own 
 language : ' Thucydide ne sauiait etre traduit a proprement parier.' 
 The French idiom offers no countei-part to the massive dignity of 
 the Greek, and M. Zevort has himself so well appreciated the diffi- 
 culties of the style with which he has had to deal, that we shall, we 
 think, consult the interest of the student by referring him to the 
 able Preface prefixed to his Translation. 
 
 The learned Editor of Notes upon the Apostolical Epistles, Dr. 
 Peile, has kindly placed at our disposal a few remarks upon several 
 difficult passages, written by him many years ago. Of these we 
 have made some use, and should have made still more, had it not 
 been from the hope that he may himself some day be induced to 
 give them to the w^orld in a more expanded and complete form. 
 
 These, then, are mainly the sources from which the following 
 notes, where they are not original, have been drawn. There are 
 of course others, such as Mr. Grote's great Work, Cramer's Greece, 
 the Fasti Ilellcmci, and Mr. Jelf's edition of Kiihner, which it is 
 
 * The edition of the first two Books, by the late T. K. Amokl, seems so 
 entirely a work of the scissors, as not to require a separate mention. Even 
 where Mr. Arnold's own opinions are expressed, they appear much too hastily 
 fonned. 
 
 I 
 
Vlll 
 
 PREFACE. 
 
 unnecessary to particularise. We hope that we have written with 
 care, but we know that many faults, both of omission and commis- 
 sion, must occur in a work of this nature, even when performed 
 by scholars very far more accurate and able than ourselves. To 
 any one who will kindly take the trouble to point out such errors, 
 we sliall feel sincerely grateful, for it is only by co-operation of this 
 sort, given, as we trust it would be received, in a right spirit, that 
 we can hope to effect anything truly and permanently useful. 
 
 ' Le moi est hai'ssable,' says a distinguished Frenchman ;* and 
 therefore the occasional recurrence of the personal pronoun in the 
 following pages may to some persons be offensive. It will be found 
 in those portions of the Work executed before I had the advantage 
 of any assistance from my present Coadjutor, and in various scat- 
 tered remarks, which had long been in preparation. Upon the whole 
 it seemed a less evil than perpetual circumlocution ; nor could I in 
 any other way have expressed my own judgment between conflicting 
 opinions with sufficient simplicity to be satisfactory to myself. 
 After all, quite as much presumption may be latent in a periphrasis 
 as in a personal pronoun, and the latter ap})eai's to keep up more 
 clearly that unity in the various elements of a Commentary, which 
 it is hoped they may exhibit from having been moulded into form 
 by a single mind. 
 
 The notes to the first two books are here given in a separate form. 
 Those to the next two are far advanced, and will, I trust, speedily 
 follow. These will form a Commentary upon that portion of our 
 author generally taken up by students as one subject for the second 
 classical examination in the University of Oxford, and for this ob- 
 ject they are primarily designed, but they may perhaps also be 
 found suited to the use of the higher classes in schools, for which 
 purpose, indeed, they have been already employed. 
 
 I subjoin a short Appendix on the Aorist usage to which re- 
 ference is frequently made in the Commentary; and some few 
 remarks upon a celebrated passage which could not conveniently 
 be comprised within the limits of a note. 
 
 J. G. S. 
 
 * M. Philar^te Chasles, Etudes sur L Antiquity, p. 2. 
 
 I 
 
 t 
 
 NOTES Ox\ TIIUCYDIDES. 
 
 BOOK I. 
 
 Chapter I. — (a.) 0ovkv8i8t]s. This simple statement of their name and 
 style appears to have been adopted by the ancient historians to identify their 
 works. Cf. the preface of Herodotus. Kriig. adds Hecatceus (cited by De- 
 metrius Tf. ipfi. 2) and Ocellus {hei Klcm. Al. vi. p. 741) cf, Dio. Chrys. 53, 
 p. 555. The formula recurs v. 26, where see note. In summing up the years 
 of the war, he simply uses his name. But when spoken of as General — iv. 
 1 04 — his full official style is given, and his Father's name appended. 
 (vv^Ypa^e. The compound verb implies the compilation and arrangement of 
 materials. So Sallust ' con scri here' and 'componere.' Sail. Hist. i. i. 
 US ^■iroX^(iT]0'av. — JIoic they carried it on — i.e., its details and method, and 
 therefore more than 6v iir., which some have suggested. Cf. ra ^Tretra ws eTro- 
 \€fi-j^drj i^rjyrjffo/jLaL, v. 26, Jelf, § 899, 7, €V0vs Ka6i(rTa|j.€Vov — 
 
 as soon a.s it was set on foot, cf. Jelf, 530, 2. We must understiind that he made 
 notes and collected documents from the very first. The regular composition 
 was the work of a later period — probably in part of his exile. Miiller {Hist. 
 Lit. Greece, p. 485) is of opinion that all he wrote at Scapte Hyle was only a 
 preliminary labour in the way of memoirs. He did not commence the actual 
 arrangement of particulars till after the end of the war, when he was again 
 residing in his own country. This is shown partly by the frequent references 
 to the duration, the issue, and the general connexion of the war, but especially 
 by the fact that the History was left unfinished. Cf. i. 13, 93; ii. 13, 65; 
 V. 26. 'He lived to complete six books entirely; to the seventh, as some 
 think, his final touches are wanting; the eighth is altogether unfinished.' Am. 
 See Appendix ii. IXirCcras. The intermediate sense of the word 
 
 signifying ' expectation.' No idea of hope can be implied here, or in such cases as 
 Soph. Ajajc vv. 606, 795, Trach. iii. The scholiast therefore was right in 
 his remark, AttiVus, ov /xdvov iirl dyddif) dW aTrXu)? iirl rfj tou fi^Wouroi iK^daei 
 X^erat. The Kal preceding iXiriaas is generally supposed to involve a repeti- 
 tion of ^vv^paype. Kriig. renders, * and after he had therefrom formed the 
 expectation' dltoXo'ywTaTov twv irpoY. Tliis substitution of the 
 
 superlative for the comparative seems to take its rise from the anxiety of the 
 writer to say a thing more strongly than the common forms of speech allow. 
 It has place, therefore, where very strong emphasis is intended, and is cognate 
 to the idiom where two superlatives are coupled together, — e.g., irXeta-rov 
 ix^iffTrji, Soph. Phil. v. 631 ; 'Most Highest' in our version of the Psalms. It is 
 very common in Greek. See /jL€yi<TTr]v tQv irpb avTrji i. 10. dvofxacrrdTaTa ruvtrplv 
 
 o 
 
 B 
 
* '•I 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book I. 
 
 Chap. 2.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 yevSfxeva, i. II. ixi-ylaTt) 5^ rdv irpb aiV^s yey^vrfrai, i. 50. ixiyiarov b^ twv 
 TTplv Kivdvvov, vi. 13. See for instances Jelf, § 503, 3. But the idiom bus a 
 deeper root than the peculiarity of any special language. Livy wrote, Bellum 
 niaxime memorabile omnium quw unquiim gesta sunt xxi. i, and Tacitus, C(ete- 
 rorum Britannorum fugacisaimi, Af/ric. 36. Accordingly, too, we find in 
 Milton, ' Adam, the goodliest of his sons since born, the fairest of her daughters 
 Eve.' The importance of particularly noticing such a form of speech arises 
 from its application to the famous expression, TrpwrdroKO^ ttjs Kriaews, Col. i. 
 15, which on the same principle signifies, * born before all creation.' 
 aLK\i6Xovris T)o-av — * ivere in a state of vi(/our, or at the acm6, or highest point 
 of their strength,' — implies slightly more than the final verb -(JK/jLa^ov. Cf. note 
 on dva/j.i/J.vr]<TK6iJ.€vos, Sheppard's Theophrastus, p. 121. Bekker reads -^ffav 
 quasi -^Kxav (* weder Thukydideische noch Attische* Kriig.) upon the strength 
 of such phrases as Uvai. h tovs iroXifiovs. But Pop. rightly remarks, Thuc. 
 would surely have written rjeaav here as elsewhere. opwv — the condition- 
 
 alizino- participle, equivalent, as usual, when without the article, to 6ti eupa, 
 ' because he saw. ' 8iavoov|i€vov — having it in (or passing through) their 
 
 ftiinds — thinking of it. .Reference is made to Syracuse and the Dorian states 
 of Sicily ; perhaps also to Argos. 
 
 (b.) K£vT|<ris K.T.X. * This was by far the greatest stir (or commotion) that ' 
 ever arose among the Greeks^ and a very considerable portion of the barba- 
 rians, or, so to speak, the greater part of manbind.' ws etTrfti' may also be. 
 rendered 'propemodum dixerim,' ' I had almost said.' Cf. Jelf, 864, i, and 
 for irXeTarTov avdpihirwv see Jelf 422, B. Kivrjais like our word 'movement' (cf. 
 the 'movement party'), seems to be applied by later writers at any rate, to the 
 internal rather than the external relations of a country. * Thucyd. expressly 
 calls this war greater than the Persian, ch. 23, and no other war except the 
 Persian could witliin his knowledge enter into comparison with it.' Am. 
 8tj, when added to a word, intensifies its meaning and directs attention to it. 
 Hence its use with superlatives. See 6X^7015 677, *ftiv indeed,' i. 33. Jelf, 723, i. 
 Pap^dpuv. According to Poppo, the Thracians, the Macedonians, several of 
 the Epirot tribes, the Sicilians, and perhaps also the Persians. 
 p^pci TivC. Tlie phrase signifies an appreciable and therefore considerable 
 part. Cf. ch. 23 c. So also the Latin 'aliquot.' rd ^dp irp^ 
 
 ai)Tu>v. Inasmuch as Thuc. contrasts (c. 3 and c, 12) ra irpb tQv TpuiKuv 
 and TO. p.€Ta to, TpwiVcd, Poppo considers that these words mean the wars 
 between the Trojan and Persian wars, as well as these two themselves, while 
 the waXaioTepa refer to those before the Trojan war. cvpciv — * make 
 
 out,' on dSuvara, cf. infra, ch. 7 a. TCKp.iqpiov. Consult Arist. 
 
 lihet. I. 2. where it will be seen that reKpnQpiov is the hifallible proof (a posteriori) 
 as distinguished from ariixuov, the mere indication. c&v k.t.X. 
 
 The construction of the relative is not clear. Some with Schaefer, repeat the 
 preposition f/c, ' from the proofs, from, which it happens that I feel confidence.* 
 This derives some support from a passage in Isoc. iii. 2, ravra ^k tQv Ipyuv 
 &v Tis ovx TjTTov fi rCiv \6yu3v iri(TT€Vffci€v. Others again, as Kriiger, consider it 
 a mere case of Attic attraction, wv for cis or &. ' From the 2^roofs which it 
 occurs to me to credit,' — i.e., I am led to credit — (So Krlig. 'Ichfindemich 
 veranlasst.') — upon carrying my investigations as far back as i^ossible. This is 
 
 
 simple and preferable. Cf. Herod, iv. 16, 6(tov rjixeTs drpcKius iwl /xaKpdTarov 
 oloi T iyevo/JLcda aKoy i^jKeadai. ov-p.^'yoXa. Connect the two 
 
 words by a hyphen, so as to form a single term. * / hold them to have been of 
 no importance.' The distinction in meaning between this collocation and con- 
 necting the negative with the verb (as D. has done), is not in the present 
 passage great. But it is desirable to observe that Thuc. has a tendency to the 
 use of the 'particula infinitans,' as logicians call it, and that such compound 
 negatives are not rare. ovK-dueidt^duTuv, ch. 5. ov-daXdcraioi, ch. 7. ovk- 
 d(r<paX€is, ch. 6. ov-dLaXvaiv, ch. 137. Is to. dXXa. ' Caiteris in 
 
 rebus' (Betant. Lex. Thucyd.), all matters not included under ttoX^/xous. A 
 favourite formula. Cf. ch. 6. 
 
 Chapter II. — (a.) <|>aCvcTai. With a participle expressed, or understood 
 is the Latin ' constat,' * it is clear,' 'it is an established j^oint,' and is to be dis- 
 tinguished by the younger student from SoKet, which states a matter of surmise 
 or opinion. (See ch. 3, ad init.). With the infinitive (paiperai it is slightly 
 different — it seems to be, not it evidently is. tivwv del irXciovwv — 
 
 * by some icho, as it might happen, from time to time were more numerous.' The 
 idiom is of frequent recurrence though more usually dci is placed between the 
 article and an adj. or part. €p.irop£as — 'traffic by sea;' f ( r traffic 
 
 by land must have been common, notwithstanding the fact of their communica- 
 tions being somewhat restricted by distrust. 'EXXds. Herodotus 
 wrote r^s vvv 'EXXdSoj tr pbrepov 8^ TleXacryirjs KaXevfi^vrji, ii. 56. This Kriig. 
 says is to be modified by what Thucydides asserts in the following ch. — i.e., 
 Pelasgian was only the name of a predominant tribe. See Grote as referred to 
 ch. iii., note (b.) 
 
 (b.) vcp.op.€Voi, rd avTwv 8<rov aLirQt,i\v. 'Cultivating each their own land, 
 80 far as to get a living of it,' — i.e., only cultivating it to such an extent as to pro- 
 duce the necessaries of life, cf. Jelf, § 666. Tr€piov<r£av xpT)|jidT«v — 'stock,' an 
 amount of moveable property over and above what was required for daily use; 
 this is the force of vepi in similar words. Cf. Trdv rb tt^plttov dKaipop. 
 Yfjv <|>vT€vovT€S — referring more especially to vines and olives. Tlie word 
 Kriig. remarks is the propier one to express planting in contradistinction to 
 dpovv and aireipeiv, and yij ir€<f)evT€vp.h-q (Hom. 0uraX/a) is contrasted with 
 dpdcn/JLOs and ffTbpifios. dSTjXov 6v — 'it being uncertain.' (Cf. the same 
 
 phrase, viii. 96.) Matth. calls this the nom. absolute. Most grammarians are now 
 inclined, with Kriiger, to regard it as an accusative arising from the idea of 
 duration or extension of time. See Matth. § 564. Kost 131, v. 4. Jelf's 
 Kilhner. § 581, 700. dT€ixi<rT«v dp.a ovtwv — and they being at 
 
 the same time without the defence of walls, sc. avrCjv, to be supplied, as often, 
 from the context. dva"yKa£ov — ' necessary sustenance,' raro generis 
 
 communis est, Pop. ov j^oXeirais diravCoTavTo — made no dif- 
 
 ficulty in abandoning. 
 
 {c.) r\ vvv 0€o-<raX£a KoXovp-^vt]. Pop. remarks that these assertions are 
 confirmed and illustrated by the accounts of the movements of population given 
 in Miiller's Minyce and Plass's History of Ancient Greece. Arcadia was to 
 Greece what Wales was to England, and Brittany to France : a rugged district, 
 inhabited by a rugged race, which offered no temptation to foreign invasions. 
 
 B 2 
 
NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book I. 
 
 (d.) ap€Tf\v~'bonltatem,f€rtilitatem.' Pop. dper?) is simply 'excellence.* 
 The nature of the excellence is determined by the adjunct. It cannot surprise 
 us that the word came to signify Kar i^oxv" 'moral excellence' or 'virtue.' 
 Notice the etymology among a martial people from "Aprfs, as Virtus from * Vir.* 
 On tJ<e jfoqdneKs of the soil, Kriig. refers to Herod, vii. 129; Xen. Iltll. vi. i, 
 II ; Strab. ix. p. 430. ri<rC. Tliis is in general understood to refer 
 
 to particular individuals. Kriig., however, understands it of tribes, or states, 
 thinking this interp. necessitated by iyyiyvofieuai <tt. iw. It docs not, how- 
 ever, seem unreasonable (T. K. A.) to translate, * gvowinrj up to a (jrcatcr extent 
 among particular jiersons. ' 
 
 {€.) T^v Yovv 'ArriKriv— Attica accordingly, or at any rate, yovv is a parti- 
 cularizing, and also corroborative particle. The y€ brings down the statement 
 to what follows by directing special attention to it, and the otV expresses con- 
 formity with what precedes. Cf. at yovv &\\ai OLToiKtai, i. 38. Ik toO 
 lir\ TtXcio-Tov. Tliis, by the Schol. and others, has been connected with oiaav, 
 as though the latter were equivalent to ehai. But it is better, with Am. and 
 Pop., to take the words ;>er «e, and make them a single adverbial expression 
 nearly equivalent to i^ dpxv^—from a very long time back. For €k . . . oiVav, 
 cf. 8t.iL dvTi(Txo^<^<^''^ c. 7. XfTTToyttav. ' Attica was not considered, 
 even in ancient times, a fertile district ; its rocky surface is covered with a very 
 thin crust of earth.' Niebuhr, Vortrage fiber alte Lander und Volkirkunde, 
 S. 92 ((luoted by Engelman). It seems to have been a light soil, ' tenuis argilla,' 
 suitable for the olive. Virg. Georg. ii. 180, 212. Poppo refers to Dodwell, 
 vol. ii. p. 5, and Kruse's Hellas, ii. r. We may add BuLckh's Pub. (Econ. 
 Athens, \). 40. It was from these circumstances that agriculture was so highly 
 valued at Athens. Xen. (£con. 4; Aris. Pol. vi. 4. ol avToC. Goll. 
 quotes from Wyttenbach, * Locus communis in Atticorum laudibus et orationi- 
 bus quod avroxOoues fuerint.' Hence the custom of wearing violets (tWr^^am) 
 and golden grasshoppers in their hair. Cf. infra. It will be enough to refer the 
 student to Vhito 9 Menexenus, Aristoph. Vespce, 107 1, and the celebrated funeral 
 orations by Demosthenes and Lysias. Kal irapdSciYfia toSc k.t.X. 
 The enormous controversy which these words have occasioned is well known. 
 Perhaps we shall best enable the student to master it by ])lacing the several 
 points of dispute before him. (i) What is the \670s? (2) What is meant by 
 is TO. aXXa t (3) W^hat is the subject of av^rjdijvai ? (4) What increase is implied 
 in av^rjOijuai ? With respect to the first there does not seem any reasonable 
 difficulty. Thuc. had never asserted in express terms 5tA rds fieroiKias k.t.X. • 
 but in the previous part of the chapter he had described the general insecurity 
 of property, and the /xeravacrrdo-ets which resulted from it, and as a consequence 
 of them he added di avrb oiVe ^l€yi^il. irbXeuiv laxvov oifre ry dXXrj TrapaaKdjrj. 
 This therefore must be considered as the Xoyos repeated in the words 5ta ray 
 Mer. (2) ^s rd dXXa is sometimes rendered * in all other respects," as at the 
 close of ch. i. But 'other' than what ? It is not easy to see. Nor had Thuc. 
 made any such assertion. What he said was, that the other parts of Greece did 
 not increase owing to their unsettled condition. It is better therefore, following 
 the second Scholiast, to consider it as ' in its other parts.' (3) Poppo once sug- 
 gested, and Haack adopts the idea, that ttjv 'Attiktjv is the subject of av^rjdrjvai. 
 
 I 
 
 Chap. 3.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 ", 
 
 * on account of the immigrations, Attica did not increase in other respects (wedth 
 and power) correspondingly with its population.' But it is impossible to force 
 this meaning from o/xoiwj ; and if it were, it is contrary to fact, and also contrary 
 to the whole argument. For, having represented throughout frequent change 
 of population as the great obstacle to progress, it would be absurd to confirm 
 his argument by asserting a similar want of progress where the population was 
 permanent. Other editors therefore supply T'qv'^XXdoa as the subject of av^-q- 
 Orjvai — though the word has not been used, and can only be extracteil from the 
 context. Or it is possible that av^rjdijuai may be impersonal — in which case the 
 meaning would be the same — 'that there teas no similar increase elsewhere.' 
 (4) While some suppose a general increase in material resources to be implied in 
 av^r]6rjvaL, others, as Peile, consider tiie increase as confined to population. 
 This he thinks established by ch. 12, where what in connexion with ijavxdaaaa 
 is described by av^-qdijvai, is afterwards expressed by d-rroLKlas e^iire/xire. The 
 whole will then i-un — And this which follows is not the least proof of my state- 
 ment, that 'twas owing to its migrations (n. b. the reason placed in the promi- 
 nent part of the sentence) that Greece in its other parts was not similarly in- 
 creased, for out of the rest of Greece, those who, ti'c. ydp, as elsewhere, intro- 
 duces the proof intended by r65€ — as just below ^rfXol bi p-oi /cat t<58€ irpd -ydp 
 rCov TptoiKuu. Peile quotes Arist. A v. 514, 6 d^ Seivdrardv y ecriv LirdvTuv . . . 
 6 Yotp Zfi'S. I should myself rather prefer the impersonal usage of av^r)6Tjvat, 
 for I think Thucyd. purposely means to speak ratlier vaguely of districts which 
 were not then styled Hellas at all, and in some cases perhaps not subsequently 
 included in it. We must add, that some editors, as Pop. and Gcill. strike out 
 the is, thus making rd dXXa sc. ttjs 'EXXdSos the subject of av^rjdrjvat, and 
 giving exactly the same sense as above. This is neat and simple. And I think 
 we may urge in its favour that common formulae like ^s ra &XXa are apt to run 
 in the head of transcribers, and to slip from their pens when anything like them 
 occurs in the copy. Ulrich (quoted by Engelman) very ingeniously reads fieroL- 
 Ki'iaeLS for fieroiKias is. The change in uncial letters would be insignificant. 
 And Plato's authority in three places {Ajwl. 40. c. ; Phad. 117. c. ; Laws, viii. 
 850, a.), is cite<l for the word. ^i^aiov. 'Understand ri (cf. Kiihner, 
 § 421 ; Jelf, 381) or rb dvaxf^p^'^v irap. 'Adrjv. (cf. Matth. § 568).' Pop. 
 
 [i.iiX,<a in — 'still greater,' i. e., it was already greater than others simply from 
 its tranquillity, but became yet more so from the influx of foreigners. 
 *I(i)vCav. The tenn is used by a sort of irpoXrixl/is, for, as GiiU. remarks, the 
 country ac([uired the name from the settlement of these very Ionian colonists in 
 it (cf. ^eXevovuTa, vi. 4). 
 
 Chapter III. — (a.) aa-QevdoiV. Here as in Herod, i. 143. Pausan. vii. 17, 
 
 * political inability,' resulting from the absence of Treptovaia x/)?7/AdTa;v. Bloomf. 
 irpb-TTpoTtpov. A not uncommon form of Pleonasm, as may be seen by com- 
 paring (with Pop.) irpoiypaxj/a irpCiTov i. 23; TrpoirefxxfavTes irpdrcpov . 29; 
 irplv irpooiayvojTe i. 78. 8ok€i il\€v — Kal clvat. Pemark the varia- 
 tion from the indie, to the infinitive. 6rt is omitted before the indie, to give 
 vivacity to the narration. The passage quoted by Jelf, § 804, 6, from Thuc. 
 "V. 37, yvovs Srt . . . . 5ia<p6ap7)a-op.ipovs avrovs for lna<fi6af7icovTai. is not 
 
NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book I. 
 
 ,% 
 
 exactly parallel, for there, as a long ellipse occurring between 6ti and its verb, an 
 anacolouthon not unnaturally ensues. An exactly similar case to that in the 
 text is quoted by Pop. fr. Plato Laches. 184, B. 
 
 {b.) ToL [Uv — 'durhif/ the times before the Trojan war.* The words are 
 used like rb d7r6 rovde, t6 wdXai, and similar expressions. Pop. quotes rd irpb 
 TOVTUP, Dem. de Cor. § 188, (Edip. Col. v. 291. The whole question con- 
 cerning Hellen, and the meaning to be attached to the mythus, is too elaborate 
 to be discussed here. The student will do well to consult (J rote Pref. to 
 History, and vol. i. p. 137, as well as the remarks with which vol. i. concludes. 
 See also Thirlwall, vol. i. p. 79. Kal irdvv ov8^ clvat — ^ never 
 
 even to hare had any existence at all.' In what follows, Pop. makes out the 
 construction by supplying ^Ov-q, the phrase Kar ^Outj being taken adverbially, 
 so that it becomes /car' Idyrj (tributim) &\\a re (dfTj Kal t6 U€\aayiK6i> fdvos 
 Trap^X^<^^°-'" I^ ni'^'Y 1^'^ (juestioned whether Goll. and Kriig. are not right in 
 regarding Kar' lOvr) here, and Kad' cKaffTovi a little below as virtually accusa- 
 tives and subjects of the verb. As examples of a similar accusative we have 
 '0 XtAc/as Kara re ^dvrf .... Kal ^vfiTaat, rdbe irapeK€\€V€To; and again as a 
 nominative, eudvfxeljde Kad' e\doTous re Kal ^vfitrauTes. iTrQ.yo\Liv(t)V. 
 
 It is a common brachylogy to find the pronoun supplied to a genitive abso- 
 lute from a word in the sentence itself, or in that preceding it (Jelf, 894) ; 
 or when the gen. part, is wholly indefinite, the pronoun is without difficulty 
 supplied by the mind, or the indef. words -rrpdy/xaTa, dvdpuToi, as Thuc. i. 
 116, iirayyeXdevTuv (Jelf, 696, 3.) The peculiarity of the present case is the 
 change of subject from icrxvcdvrojv, ' when they grew powerful, and people 
 called them in.' sc. as the Britons Hengist and Horsa. The word appears 
 to have acquired a technical sense, for we find it ii. 68, v. 45, and in Herod, 
 viii. 112. rfi 6p.iX£<2L fiilXXov — ^ more from intercourse than from 
 
 any regular compact ;' fidWov enim saepe sic ponit ut altera pars comj»ara- 
 tionis intelligenda sit, viii. 81, 140. Pop. and ch. 5 a, 8 c. Others, as 
 Kriig., understand ^ more than informer times.' It has been suggested also 
 that /zdXXov may signify 'magis, magisque,' * indies srepiua,' or, as we say, 
 * more and more every day. ' &irao-iv i?|8vvaTo lKviKfj<rai, sc. 
 
 "EWrjvas KaXeladai — could not win its way to become the received name for 
 all also. Thuc. repeats the same phraseology, itrl rb fivBCoSes fKveviKrjKbTaf 
 i. 21. Pop. cites an imitation by Pausanij»^ ii. 29, 3, irdaiu i^evlKrjae, and 
 also Tac. Ger. c. 2, * Nationis nomen non in nomen gentis evaluisse.' 
 TCKp.Tfpiok — fr. TeK/jLTjpiov, a word of Thucyd. own. Kriig. 
 
 (c.) ou8a}iov Tovs ^vpiravras cl>vd|ia(rcv — sc. "EWrjvas. Pop. But we may 
 simply say, ' has nowhere called them by a collective name' Kriig. remarks 
 upon this that llaveWrjves II. ii. v. 530, is undoubtedly spurious. 
 TOVS ja€t' *AxtXXc«s. Cf. II. B. V. 684, 01 5' (Ixov <i>diy)v r)d' 'EWdba 
 KaWiyvvaiKa, ^lvp/j.i86ves 5' ^KaXevvro Kal "EWrjva Kal 'Axaiol. dva- 
 
 KoXei. Bl. remarks the d»'d here has an intensive force, as in dvaTreldeiv 
 &c. Willi this Pop. agrees, who renders it * nominatim,' * honoris causd.' 
 Undoubtedly this force of the word arose from the j>rimitive meaning of 
 di'd, *over and over again/ as such repetition would occur in encomiums. 
 It is not impossible that the primary meaning may be the true one here. 
 Cf. Soph. PhU. V. 8cx>. ov [Li\v ovSk Pappdpovs — ' neque vero 
 
 Chap. 3.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 ' 
 
 i 
 
 barbaros quidem.' Nor, moreover, did he either speak of ^dp(3apoi, because 
 not as yet had even the Hellenes, I fancy, been separated off into one counter- 
 name, the representative of a counter, or antagonistic notion, sc. * not Greeks.' 
 All mankind were distinguished into Greeks and barbarians— Plato, Politic, p. 
 262, D— and the fonuer were by nature, ipso facto, the enemies and masters of 
 the latter. See Dem. c. Mid. 14; Plato de Rep. v. p. 470, c; Isocrat. 
 Panath. c. 66, and Ar. Pol. i. i, 5, 8ib <f)d(nv oi iroirjTal ^ap^dpwv 5' 
 'EWTJvas dpxetf eiKbs. Eurip. Iph. Aul. 1379. 0'*^^ metaphor is derived 
 from a counterpoise, or equivalent in the balance.) dvTCiraXcv 
 
 seems rather out of its place in the collocation, but this, as Kriig. remarks* 
 may be justified by the emphasis which it requires. It is no contradiction 
 to this sUtement that Hom. //. ii. 867, calls the Carians pap^ap6<pu}voL, for 
 there no national appellative is intended, —the word only has its original 
 reference to unintelligible speech. See Nitzch. Od. 1. 180. SeeNiebuhr, vol. i. 
 pp. 27, 28. ' Nations whose languages were more nearly akin than Latin and 
 Greek, would still speak so as not to be mutually understood, and this is all 
 Herodotus wa»» thinking of. That there was an essential affinity notwith- 
 standing the difference, is probable from the ease with which so many Pelasgic 
 nations ripened into Hellens, as well as from the existence of an element nearly 
 akin to the Greek in the Latin language, the Pelasgic origin of which seems 
 unquestionable.' Compare 'Nomen Latinum,' 'Nomen Italicum,' &c., with 
 iv 6vona. 
 
 (d.) 01 8* ovv ws ^KacTToi— kXt]9€vt€s. After careful consideration of all that 
 has been written upon this difficult passage, I conclude that Thuc. meant to 
 say, * The Hellenes received their name first of all by separate communities, — 
 i.e., such as spoke an Hellenic dialect intelligible to one another, were so called, 
 wherever found ; — subsequently all such were collectively embraced under one 
 great distinctive appellation, sc. Hellenes. But during neither of these periods 
 did they enter upon any great common enterprise.' We must translate. The 
 several Hellenic communities then {olv resuming what had been said), first so 
 called separately city by city {such, that is to say, as spoke a dialect intelligible 
 to each other), and afterwards collectively (sc. so called) did not, li-c. I cannot 
 agree with Peile that ol ^Kaffvoi are the same with Kavd irdXeis. The oi 
 iKacTOL refer botli to Acard TroXets and oi ^vixirairre^ { = 2vhen they came to be 
 united), and the two latter expressions imply different periods rather than 
 different persons. Poppo's version is not very clear. ' Ii vero qui pro se 
 quisque et oppidatim, quotquot mutuo se intelligebant, et omnes una postea 
 Hellenes sunt vocati.' On d>$ ^Kaarot, cf. Jelf, § 714, 2 c, §870, 4, and on 
 odv, Jelf, § 737, 3. In the existing s+^te of linguistic and ethnological science, 
 it was not unnatural for Thucydides, and Herodotus i. 57, to imagine that the 
 Pelasgic and Hellenic were generically distinct dialects, and that consequently 
 the races who spoke them were generically distinct also. The contrary is now 
 known to be the case. Read, as above, Niebuhr, vol. i. p. 27. 
 o-rparcCav may surely be considered as a cognate accusative after ^vvrjXdov, as 
 (TTpaTeLas e^^XOov, c. 15, without supposing, as some do, an ellipse of eis. 
 See the instances quoted, Jelf, § 558, r. irXeCw is Attic Greek for 
 
 irXctof, as Eurip. Herac. 258, tov QeoO irXeioj (ppopQv, Bl. It seems to be 
 analogous to xpctctj/ xPV<^^°-h ^^^' cogi^at. So irXeiara XP1<^^°-'-} v. 105. 6Xi-)a 
 
8 
 
 NOTES OX THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book I. 
 
 &c. xPV<^^^^y Kriig. Translate, 'because by this time they were making more 
 use of the sea.' 
 
 Chapter IV. — (a.) Mtvws. Read Grote, vol. i. ch. 12. * Cretan Legends. 
 Minos and his Family,' Tliirhvall. i. p. 144. iraXaiTaros ^KTT|oraTo —like 
 
 the Latin 'primus adeptus eat' — * was the first person whom we hear of as hailing 
 acquired.' Kriig. says Thucyd. preferred the form TraXairaros, though most 
 MSS. here, and in i. 18, have TraXatoraros. 'EXXT)viKf]s,— 7r/)6r6po»' -yap 
 
 KapiKTj iKaXecTO, i^chol. Kdpas €|€Xdoras. Herod, (i. 171) appears 
 
 to contradict this, by asserting that the Carians or Leleges lived in the islands 
 under the protection of Minos, and did not pay tribute. But Thucyd. qualifies 
 his own statement by i<p' 6aov rjdvvaTo, and we may suppose with Arn. that 
 Minos treated the Carians very mildly, note.vpelling them altogether from their 
 homes, but allowing them to amalgamate with his own settlers. The Dorian 
 and Ionian colonies at a later period completely cleared the islands, sweeping 
 away all vestiges of the ancient race and their language. Isocrates ascribes 
 this e.vploit to the Athenians, Panegyric, c. 16, ras KuxXaSas vi)<Tov^, wepl ds 
 iytvovTo TToXXai Trpay/xarelat, Kara t7)v Mfcw tou Kprjr^s Bi'vaaTeiav, rai/ras t6 
 TeXevTULOv virb KapQv *caTexo,ueVa5, €Kl3a\ovT€s eKcLvovs, ovk i^LdnioaaadaL rdj 
 X^po-^ iTokpLTicav, dXXa rous fiaXiffra ^iov tCjv 'EXXtji/wj' hioixivovi Kari^Kiffav eli 
 avrds. to tc \x\ot\.k6v — * Piracy,' in the abstract. Pop. and others 
 
 have noticed that the re here, as elsewhere in Thucyd., appends sentences to 
 propositions already complete, more commonly than in other writere. Yet 
 even here the appended clause is a sort of epexegesis, or carrying out of what 
 precedes, the suppression of piracy being part of the same act as the expulsion 
 of the Carians — tr. 'and therein cleansed the sea of piracy.' See on the whole 
 question, ch. ix, a. tov Uvai. The infinitive with the article in 
 
 the genitive to express the final cause of an action. See Jelf, § 492, who 
 quotes Caesar de B. G. iv.. Naves dejiciendi operis a barbaris missae. The old 
 grammars supposed an ellipse of 'iviKa, Matth. 540-1. Tr. for the sake of his 
 revenues coming in to him more freely. * Sic et4Tr€iaipxf<^0ai et iffvXeiv,' Pop., 
 and cf. ii. 13, irpoffLovrdiv. There is a similar use of the Gen. in N. T. Cf. 
 iirt.<XTilXai. rod airix^<^^°-'-7 Acts xv. 20. 
 
 ^ i.e. fxaXXov rj irpdrtpov. Cf. v. 8r ; viii. 9,' 
 
 Chapter Y. — (a.) (xdXXov 
 Pop. avTwv dSvvaTwTarwv. The negative here is a privative, as 
 
 in oi) yLt^7aXa, ch. i, dvrjp ov p-iyai, viii. 100. Fuit 'this privative force really 
 belongs to the original negative notion, as may be seen when these words are 
 resolved into their full fonn, as dvrjp 5s ov fi^yas iffTiv,' Jelf, § 738, 2. i. Tiie 
 whole expression is what is called a 'Litotes,' i.e. a figure of speech where less 
 is said than is meant, and therefore, perhaps, as in Irony, more implied. In 
 such cases, the negative, instead of being prefixed to the noun, precedes its 
 article, or governing preposition. rots d<r0cv^<ri Tpo4>T)s— ' support 
 
 for the needy.' Kriig. collects several passages where 6 daOtui^i means ' the 
 poor man,' as opposed to ' the rich.' Of these one is sufficient, 6 r* dadcyjjs 6 
 TrXovaioi re, Eur. Supp. 433. Kara Kw^as olKOvp,^vas. This may 
 
 either me:in (i) that the towns were little better than villages, i.e. that 
 they consisted of straggling houses, constructed upon no regular plan, or (2) that 
 
 Chap. 5.] NOTES OX THUCYDIDES. 9 
 
 the towns actually consisted of an aggregate of villages, as indeed was the case 
 with Sparta, cf. ch. 10 a. This Pop. thinks is confirmed by ch. x. ' Any society 
 of men united together as one Commonwealth under the same laws is called 
 in Greek ttoXis. Thus a 7r6Xis may be a mere collection of huts in a forest ; or, 
 like Laced»mon itself, a number of straggling houses unenclosed by walls,' 
 Arn. Tov pCov rbv irXcio-TOV kiroiovvro—* they were in the habit of 
 
 viak in g the greater part of their livelihood/ the English idiom coincides w-ith 
 this use of woulffdai, which is by no means uncommon. Kriig. compares dir6 
 yewpyias rhv fiiov Touladai, Xen. (Econ. vi. The younger scholar will observe 
 that /Sios is not fti?;— animal life— but social, and moral life, or, as here, the 
 '>ncans of living. al<rxvvTiv ^xovtos—' not yet involving any shame,' 
 
 'carrying with it any shame: The phrases <pd6uov ^x^lp, .^sch. Prom.Se^, 
 pLOfKp'qy Ix^iv, Pind. hth. v. 61, are similar, upon which Hermann {ad Vig. p. 
 753), remarks, In his locutionibus omnibus ^x^'" retinet suam vim, sic ut notet 
 — 'conjunrtum quid cum quo me,' quoted by Krug. 01 iroXaCct 
 
 Twv iroMiTwv— ' The old among {i.e. of) the poets = the old poets.' See for the 
 fact Od. iii. v. 71, where Nestor asks the question of Telemachus. Hymn 
 Apoll.y. 452. Indeed, the custom belongs- naturally to a rude state of society. 
 Ccesar, B. G. vi. 21, says of the Germans, * Latrocinia nuUam habent infamiam, 
 quje extra fines cujusque civitatis fiunt.' Similar statements have been made 
 concerning the North American Indians and other savage tribes. Zevort 
 instances the Kazzias of the African Arabs, and we might refer to the Scotch 
 ♦ Han yings.' Yide Lay of the Last Minstrel, WiUiam of JJeloraine, &c. 
 KoXws^ Well rendered by Bloomf. ' handsmnely,' in the sense of ' dexterously ;' 
 as handsome is derived from the low German 'handsaem,' 'handy.' He also 
 aptly quotes Spenser (given in Johnson's Diet.) ' under it he may convey any 
 fit pillage that cometh handsomely in his way.' The Schol. has e^aelSQs, 4>CXav- 
 ep67rw°; Dale has 'cleverly,' Engelman, 'geschickt;' Zevort, ' Les pirates 
 
 habiles.' 
 
 (b.) Tds irucrrcis k.t.X. Some (e.g. Bothe and Owen) have very naively 
 objected that it is not the poet who asks the question, as though a writer 
 were not in such matters to be identified with the characters of his work,— 't» 
 the enquiries nvade from those who lauded anywhere, always putting the same ques- 
 tion,' or, in their questions . . . always asking. See /cara rrvaTLv, ch. 136; 
 Jelf, § 583, 74. When in ch. 10 Thucyd. saya "Qpvpos TeiroivKe k.t.X. he 
 does not n\Lan that Homer made the Greek fleet. d c'wriv— transi- 
 
 tion to the oratio recta. See Jelf, 886, d. Here oiK-6yeM6pTWP is to be taken 
 as one word— making no reproach of it, cf. ch. i a. Krug. remai-ks that, owmg 
 to this close connexion, we have re- ovk, and not oC're. ^irtfieX^s— 
 
 those whose business it might happen to be that they should know— i.e. because 
 tiieir interest required it. Bl. quotes oU imp-eXh ravra dS^vai, Xen. Mem. 
 
 iv. 7. 
 
 (c.) T^ iroXaCo) rpcJirw. Most editors understand this of piracy and free- 
 booting. ' Krug. observes that we have a reference to rrjs TraXaias XTjo-re/as 
 immediately afterwards, and that the words vaXai,^ rpdwip viperai are not very 
 appropriate for the description of a social habit, a mode of living. He therefore 
 believes the allusion to be to Kara Kibpas olKiiadai. AoKpovs— 
 
 'AKapvdvas. Grote, vol. ii. p. 388, says, 'These were undoubtedly the most 
 
lO 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book I. 
 
 [J Chap. 6.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 II 
 
 backward members of the Hellenic aggregate. Though not absolutely without 
 a central town, they lived dispersed in villages, retiring, when attacked, to in- 
 accessible heights, perpetually armed, and in readiness for aggression and 
 plunder wherever they found an opportunity. There is no information respect- 
 ing them from the commencement of the historical period down to the Persian 
 Thuc. i. 6 ; iii. 94. rh <ri8T)po4>op€i<reai— ' The wearing ^ 
 
 war. 
 
 weapons'— i.e. continuously, and when engaged m peaceful occupations. Bl. 
 quotes from Dr. Clark— 'Among the Circassians the labours of the plough 
 become a warlike occupation, and the sower goes to cast his grain attended by 
 his sabre and his fusil.' 
 
 Chapter VI.— (a.) 4<ri8tipo4>op€i. KrUg. says that we have the act. voice, 
 and not the middle, as in last chapter, because i) "EWas cannot be conceived of 
 as wearing weapons for itself ;—' for its personal protection.' 
 d<|>pdKTOvs olKi\a'iis—' domicilia non rnunita.' Sunt TroXeis drdxiffToi. Cf. vi. 85. 
 Pop. There seem to be no historical grounds for supposing that dwijling' 
 homes ever were fenced. The position of ^i/i^Oj? must be noticed. ' Thei/ made 
 their daily icay of livinrj habitually with arms'— ^vt^O-n is what Dr. Donaldson 
 calls a tertiary predicate, Gr. Gr. p. 200. This nomenclature will be elsewhere 
 discussed. Kriig. makes the whole equivalent to 7/ S/aira, ^v inoLr,aavTO fifd' t 
 6irXu}v, ^vvrje-ns ^v. This would make ^vv-qdy) a simple predicate, which does not 
 seem to be what the author exactly meant. Jelf, § 458, 2, seems to express it 
 more correctly. ^They made a habit of wearing arms in their daily life.' 
 <nip€vov €<rTl TttvTa ttjs'EXX. ?Tt ovTw v€ji<5fi€va. * These parts of Greece, by 
 being so inhabited still, afford a proof : Dale's version—' Those parts of Greece 
 which still live in this icay, are a proof ,' from want of attention to the absence 
 of the article before vefiS/Jieva, is incorrect. iv rots irpwToi. A n idiom 
 
 much discussed. . Jelf, § 444, «. considers roU as an instance vi the article used 
 for (or rather retaining its original force of) the demonstrative pronoun, and 
 compares €k tov, hence, irpb tov, before, &c. ; yet translates not ' horum,' but 
 * omnium primi: In § 139, 4, he seems to adopt the explanation given below 
 as that of Arnold. Matthite, § 290, also says that the article appears to be 
 used as a pronoun in tli«»^)hrase iv rois, and draws two conclusions, (i) that the 
 formula iv rots sUnds by itself, and is not to be joined with the superlative 
 following (2) that rots is neuter because the superlative even in the fem. is 
 sometimes used with it. He subjoins that hardly any explanation of the 
 phrase can be given to suit all passages, since usage has given to it a greater 
 extension than it originally had. Arnold's explanation is that of Hemsterh. ad 
 Luc. t. i. p. 170, i.e. iv roh is to be. coupled with the dative superlative 
 (understood) of the word which stands in the superlative and nominative— e. f/. 
 iv Toh [TT/jwrots] irpQTOi—'jird among the first; i.e. the very first. Kriig. and 
 Madvig think that the ^mrticiple was originally supplied, and that when iv 
 Tols came to be used adverbially the gender of the toU was no longer con- 
 sidered. Kriig. accordingly interprets this passage iv toU [KaTadffiivois] Trpwrot 
 KaridevTo. Hermann noticing the idiom {ad Vig. p. 765) explains, iv rots toiov- 
 Tois oiVt, AtaXio-ra TotoOroj- ' in iis qu(e talia sunt maxime talis.' Yet certainly 
 in several places where the phrase occurs, a qualified, and not an exaggerated 
 superktive is required. Cf. in. 17, 81 i vii. 24, and Arnold seems right ia 
 
 i 
 
 translating- 'amon^ the first," one of the first' -'hni we suppose not neces- 
 sarily the very first,' says Peile. We may doubt whether this be not the very 
 meaning to be assigned to iv rots irpdiTois as contradistinguished from iv tol% 
 TrpQroi. dv€i|i4v^— as the Latin Mistinctus' refers primarily to a 
 
 loose method of wearing the dress, and is therefore applied to a lax and luxurious 
 mode of Ufe- N. B. the position of the article with the noun, and cf. supra 
 ^vvridv. KttV ol irpco-pvTcpow .... <i>opovvT€S. Difficulties have 
 
 been made concerning this passage, because a luxurious mode of livmg was 
 no reason why they should cease to wear linen tunics, but the contrary. 
 Thucyd. meant to say that the wearing of such tunics up to a late date was 
 a proof of the existence of greater luxury among the Athenians. For the 
 short period which had elapsed since the cessation of the practice was a proot 
 of its long continuance, and its long continuance was a proof of luxury. We 
 may join did. rb aj3po5iaLrov to ou ttoX^s xpo^os iireibi] and tr., 'And the elder 
 members of the wealthy chtsses among them, not till very lately (owing to thmr 
 luxurious way of living) left off wearing,' ctr. ov iroXvs xpovos 
 
 l'K€^.^ must be compared with ov roWa ^ttj iireidv, at the close of the ch. and • 
 d^pi r d<p' oO ch. 14, whence it is plain that the phrase was used parenthetical y, 
 and almost adveri>ially, like our own 'it's not long since,' * it's no great while 
 A writer, speaking of us, might say, 'Tlieir older men, not till very lately 
 (owing to their old fashioned habits) left off wearing pig tails.' Krug. takes 
 Sid rb dSpob. in clese connexion with <t>opovvrei, meaning, I suppose, ' awd i« s 
 no longtime since their old men left off wearing, from luxurious motives, linen 
 tunics. But this, with the existing collocation, seems to me unnatural. 
 avTois Kru<^. well remarks is not the same thing here as avn^v. Am. 
 excellently exj^esse^ the difference in his version. It is not long since they sain 
 
 I • ji J / ..,.^ r.^ A-r KowBvXov. The exact nature ot 
 
 thetr elderly men leave off, <Lc. Kpu»pv/vuK . 
 
 this mode of dressing the hair seems to have puzzled the Scholiasts, who might 
 reasonably have been expected to know more about it than we Some imagine 
 it to have consisted in rolling the hair from the temples round the head m he 
 shape of a crown. The verb dvadeladac, however, seems to indicate that the 
 hair was gathered up to the top of the head, and there fastened upon a pin 
 nmde like a grasshopper, so forming a sort of horn-and Suidas indeed ex- 
 pressly says as much. Winckelman admits that it must have been a bunch of 
 hair formed in some such way, and resembling a bunch of ivy hemes. And 
 the etymology, .pc/^uXos for Kopvf^^vXos, seems to indicate this, ^^e cannot 
 Appose that it was nothing more than gathering the hair at the back of the head 
 as may be seen in the Greek statues, for this would be nothing ^-tinct-e o^ 
 remarkable. See Diet, of Gr. and Rom. Antiri. for mode of dressing the hair 
 under 'Coma.' The heads of Apollo or Niobe there given ..«y illustrate a 
 KPu,3v\os Aristoph. refers to the custom, Nub. v. 984, ^7«'^- I33i, and 
 ^Ciri., V. 12 . Mitchell on Arist. Vesp. 230, supposes that the Athenians 
 imit'atld the Egyptians, who wore the chafer, their favourite symbd m a 
 similar manner. The custom, Krug. adds, continued up to the battle of 
 Marathon. Cf. Athen^us, vi. 51^-, who quotes Heracleides Ponticus, XXovpyr, 
 
 Zav olroo,Yo, ol r^v iv llapMv. ..K^.a^es ^dxr^v. Like the violet crown, 
 
12 
 
 NOTES OX TUrCVDIDES. 
 
 [Book I. 
 
 Chap. yO 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIBES. 
 
 13 
 
 7 
 
 it was intended to symbolize their in,li«e„ous ori-i„-botl, the violet »„,! fi 
 g^sshopper Wing regarded aa the chilJ-.n of tl,e°eartl. B In, .rl": 
 tha tweanng lu.en garments eould not in itself constitute luxu.1 and Ta 
 tte must have been the .„a.Xo, mentioned by Athen.us xii. p."^^ , Id L' 
 
 Spt' P k" "; "'' •""*'•'"•*'•"' ''--V probably b'o,™w d from 
 Egypt. But Krug. observes that there was a Muxu,' even in wearin,, linen 
 tun.cs, wh,ch were ver^ costly [Voss, Mylhol. Hr. iii p .f,, ffT a. ?«, 
 custom would necessarily be considerc/effemina.e, fo^ w;'L™\::' ^.td" 
 
 LI; T. r ,"'" ""'" "■""' ^y "'« Athenian won.en. 
 he f ', f reading was I, tpau ; but the e<lit«rs now universally eive 
 
 the fonner, wh.ch .s contained in several MSS., and is sup,,orted by a"^!!" 
 as It IS from iuepaoj, o d fut of ^'v^/^, . Tf . 1 • '•"'"-'* 'V 'i"'^'<>fe% 
 
 as ^l.a„, Proropi'us, It "L7^„„„ "'" """" ■" ZT'^^^ ^i^^"' 
 
 t^nently remarks, 'II est pen probable, en effet, ,iua une epoque of les Ath.!„ien, 
 
 lir et ! ■' ' ■"; '"'""•" •>"' ""ri'™^ «""* I" '» f"i« bcaucoup .1; 
 
 loisir, et des nchesses que le Comn.eree seul pouvait procurer ' See howc^^ 
 
 on the other side Bekkers LVcur.u. in the Charides '' 
 
 {c.) H^pici ^o-fliiTi. 'A sober stiih of dreu, and suiK.blc or covformahh to 
 
 ZL. ^J""«'-/°"fi""» "t length. The Laconian hin.ation was worn the 
 
 irnrsLTi" if t r^r ^ '^''" '^'n -^ '>■« — '... .-/- 
 
 certainly seems to indict that Thucyd. didVt'blt irt7e:::te„r:f 
 equahty m property at Laced^mon. Indeed the opinion ..pectin, thlre 
 d.v, ,,„ of property by Lycurgus, an.l the banishnant of gold and sifver fJm 
 the state, rests upon the authority of Plutarch, an.l, a., is \«11 known he isX 
 no means trustworthy. The reader «l,n.,l,l l„. .11 '^"'»n, ne is by 
 
 5.0-5.;] on the othei side ^'--''H'J- a" means consult G™te [ii. 
 
 dropi^d 1,1. giulle in the race, and was consequently victorious. His ex- 
 ample was purposely followed by Acanthius the Lac'd^monian, and hence 
 arose the praetiee of running without girdles. But as these c rcuuistances 
 are supposed to have occurred in the fifteenth Olympiad, it is eviden ttW 
 great latitude must be aUowed to the e.xpr..s..i„n' o! ,:xxi V, Or we 
 m.ay adopt the hypothesis of Biichk, [/,mri;l i „ .„ , ,, „ -, 
 
 r rTr tt "'"'- ^-^^^^y^^^^^^^rtss 
 
 but that he other athletes, to whom the belt was no pi^ctical incoive 
 mcnce, did not discarf its use until shortly before the tin e of Th.rrdel 
 
 butt 7'T "'■■''..^'"■^y''- '^ »■" »P-''i"« in reference to the OlJ J c 
 but to the other public games. Miiller, in his J>oriu„s. u wrong in slZ: 
 that Thucydnles is contradicted by Plato Jiep ^ „ ,.-, f„, pi f , ' ^ 
 assert tliit tho r'„*.„ .1 \, ^' 1 ■•--• *"' ''•"" 'loes not 
 
 assert that the Cretans were the first to leave off their girdles but simnlv 
 
 that they were the first to commence gymnastic exercises ; ^ ^^1^ 
 yj.a.... .,^ro.^, K,?r„, ..„.a U Aa..aa.M6..o._and tlat ZXdoe' 
 not necessarily mean naked, see note in Shcppard's Tk.,j,kra^^^ t^ 
 
 p. 204. H Tb <|>av(pcv. Poppo's exposition appears best, dTroSiivrcs 
 
 KoX is TO (papepbv irpoeXOdvTis. Such a 'seiisus prgegnaus ' of the participle 
 ia by no means uncommon — there is no desifjn implied in the expression. 
 
 ACira * Some think that XtVa is the dative from to Xittu, gen. — aos 
 
 j;it — ai; the qi being by every day pronunciation shortened to XtTra, and then 
 
 ' (\aiov is the adj. of Ada, so that Xtx' Aaty is 'with olive oil,' but the quantity 
 
 and the elision render this very doubtful.' Jelf, § 113, 10. It looks much 
 
 ^ more like an ace. from Ai^ps, gen. Xt7r6j, which may have existed as well as 
 
 f Xi/36s. Hence XiTrrofxai, and XeXififxevos * ready anointed for the combat,' and 
 
 I XeXi/xfikpoL fidxvs, ^' T. C. V. 380, ' eager for the fray.* 8iatwp.aTa 
 
 * belts across the body.' This may throw some light on ffr^pvoiP Sm/xTrd^ P. V. v. 
 
 ^ 65. loTiv ols. Jelf, §817, 8. AOXa TtecTtti Kal K. T. X. 
 
 Krii*^. writes that the construction ought to have been ddXwu nde/xkvujv sine KaLj 
 
 for Thucydides does not mean to tell us that the barbarians had games, but that 
 
 they wore girdles at them. This is true : yet there are many cases in which 
 
 jcai is not a simple copulative. We may express it in English — 'And even now 
 
 the barbarians have games ichcre they wear the belt.' 
 
 {€.) ojiotoTpotra 8iaiTw|i€vov. This Jelf, § 552, f. resolves into the adverbial 
 f accusative like /x^rpLa ^rju, Ion 632 ; ovd' dXTjdij fwcrt, Plat, licji. 495. C 
 
 Kni''. connects iroXXd with bpLOibTpoira, and explains upon the principle of 
 a cognate accusative, so that StaiTWj/rat TroXXd hiaLT-qp-ara 6p.oc6TpoTra is 
 equivalent to TroXXd 5iaiT7}fxaTa & Siairuivrat bp.oLbTpoird ianv. He compares 
 dvTLTraXa va.vjj.ax^'iv vii. 34, 5-71, 4. For the fact he refers to Herod, vi. 58. 
 
 Chapter VII. — (a.) irXwiixwWpwv 6vtwv. The plural agrees with a noun 
 understood, implying some indefinite notion. So in English we say, 'Things 
 are looking better,' and so on. Render, therefore, ' When things began to admit 
 < more of navigation,' — i.e., ' when navigation became more general,' said not of 
 
 a particular case, but generally. Cf. irXuipubTepa ey^vero, ch. 8, and dSvvaTa 
 i " tJv, ch. I , which latter means that the subject comes under the category of things 
 
 impossible, and is thus more general and indefinite than the sing, ddvparop ; 
 tr. one of things imjiossible, rather than, in more positive terms, an impossible 
 thing. llXcit/ios, says Kriig., is from the Ionic TrXww as TrXwi^u) i. 13, 4. 
 Bekker has 7rXt6i/ios, ' but Lobeck ad Phryn. (writes T. K. A.), after showing 
 that TrXdoifios occurs ^sch. de falsd Leg. p. 337, and Theoprast. Char. iii. says. 
 Si qua est igitur lectionum discrepantia Atticis utique prior scriptura adserenda 
 videtur.' ircptovcrCas. This is of course in exact contrast to 
 
 TTcpLovaiav xRVf^^"^^" oi'/c ^xoJ'T'fS, ch. 2, which see. avTois rots 
 
 aiyioXois— the beach itself, — i.e., the very beach. dircXdixpavov — 
 
 * cut them off from the main land,' sc, by a wall across the neck of the isthmus. 
 This imi)lies the subsequent occupation of the ground. Cf. iv. 45. iv. 113. iv. 
 102. See the case of Potidsea and its walls, i. 56. ^Katrra — ' in 
 
 each several case,' 'relatum ad incolas, ut paulo post dv(^Ki<T[xivoL.' Pop. 
 dvTi<rxov<rav — or perhaps with Kriig. and Poppo's conjecture, the pres. part. 
 dj'Ti(Txoi/(Ta»'. The construction I should compare with €k tov iiri irXeieTov 
 ovaavy ch. 2, where see note. Tr. on account of the long continuance (or wide 
 prevalence) of piracy, avrix^iv is to hold out in the sense which we give to 
 the word as equivalent to continue. Cf. with Pop. ii. 64. vii. 71. The reading 
 
14 
 
 NOTES OX THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book I. 
 
 Chap. 9.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 15 
 
 of many MSS., i.e., dvTi<Txovaai is bad, though Goll. would fain defend it. For 
 this would imply that after long resistance to piracy, many ancient cities 
 changed their sites, — a fact of which there is no historical evidence whatever. 
 On piracy in general, see the stories which Herod, commences his History and 
 Herm. Pol. Antiq.,^vi. 6, 7. ov-eaXdo-orioi— like ouVTaXa, ch. i, 
 
 to be taken as a single term. So we say 'non-residents,' * non-combatants.' 
 * Who dwelt on the sea-side without being seamen.* Hobbes. ^-<£rw and dpu 
 as the prepositions Kara and dvh respectively denote, 'down on the sea- coast' 
 and 'up the country.' Xenophon's Anaba^tis is an instance familiar to every 
 one. a.viaKia-\t.(voi— 'situate up the country.' There is no necessity 
 
 to read du(fKL(rp.€vat, for cities and their inhabitants are frequently confused 
 together in construction : vi. 88, 94 ; viii. 64. Pop. refers to duoiKi^cadai, 
 ' emifjrure in refjionem a mari ranotam,' i. 58, and viii. 31. 
 
 Chapter VIII.— (a.) Kapcs Kal «J>o(vikcs. Concerning the Carians, cf. 
 ch. iv. and Herod, i. 171. On the occupation of Thasus by the Phoenicians, 
 cf. Herod, ii. 44 ; vi. 47 ; also iv. 147 ; vi. 44. wKio-av. Some MSS. have 
 
 (^KTjaav, which Kriig. in his note appears to prefer, though he prints (^Kiffav in 
 the text. He compares ipKujaau rr^v 21iKe\lav iv. 6, * dwelt in Sicily. ' 
 Ai\\ov. See the account giveil, iii. 104. eriKwv dvaip€0€i<rwv. 
 
 Otjk:^ is properly the 'grave,' that which contains the urn, or sai-cophagus. But 
 the verb dvaip^uj is not improperly used, as the earth would of necessity be 
 taken up and carried off. (Kriig.) Or we may say, ' ichen the graves were taken 
 up; meaning their contents. iirkp i\^i(ro—' above half.' This is 
 
 an instance of the omission of the defining article in a very familiar expression, 
 such as, indeed, is common in our own language. We say ' in town,' ' above 
 bridge,' * below bar,' and the like. The same was the case in Greek with iu 
 UeXoTTOPvrjaii}, ch. 28; 'I<rMs (of Corinth) ; BaatXei/s (of Persia); II6\ts, 
 'Ay pas, ^TTovdai. Krug. defends the same expression, Virep ij/niav toO AWov 
 (xrpaTevfxaTos, Xen. A nab. v. ro, where Schneider would insert the article. 
 Kuhner, Or. Or. § 484, mentions several such words, * whidh occur frequently 
 in common speech, and are thus so generally in use, that even without the 
 article they can express a defined and individualized object.' Cf. ch. 16. See 
 more in Schcefer's note, (E. T, v. 640. Add K^pas, ch. 48 b, and viKpovs, ch. 
 54 b, and cf. 89 c, 10 1 b, 136 c. yvuio-QivTis . lvvTf9a\L\ii\rQ. This 
 
 is generally interpreted with Pop., Agnitihabitu armorum, sc. armatunl, quippe 
 qucecum iis sepulta esset. ^vvredafi^^vy seems to me to stand almost parentheti- 
 cally, expressing the reason why they were able to examine them, recognised 
 from the garniture of their armour, inasmuch as it was found in the grave with 
 them, and from the mode of interment, the same a^ that which they now employ. 
 Goll., with several MSS., has ^wTedafi/jLivoi, which makes equally good sense 
 from the fact of their being buried along with their arms. But the two nom. plur. 
 participles are in this case awkward, and it (!bes not seem certain that the custom 
 was confined to the Carians. Vide Soph. Ajax, v. 1409. For the peculiarities of 
 the Cretan armour, see Herod, i. 171. They invented 'crests' {\6<povi) : the 
 interior double handle, or double hand for the shield {6xavov), which took the 
 place of the old single strap {reXafiuu), and what may almost be called armorial 
 bearings,— I.e., e7}H€ia, crests or devices drawn upon the shield. The Schol. 
 
 J. 
 
 says the Phcenicians were recognised because they were buried with their faces 
 to the west. But Pop. argues this was no sufficient distinction, as other 
 nations did the same thing,— e.^r., the Athenians. He refers to Plutarch, 
 Solon. X.; JFA. Var. His. v. 14. 
 
 {b.) KaTao-rdvTos 8^— The 5^ is in apodosi ' inquam,' and (as often) resumes 
 the narrative from ch. 4. KaKovp7oi— ' Evil-doers; sc. pirates. 
 
 «T6ir6p. The use of irtp as a suffix seems to indicate that especial stress is to 
 be laid on the word to which it is joined. 6s, who; bairep, the very man icho : 
 d, if: etvep, if, as we may assume: fire, ichen; Srexep, just when, at the very 
 time when. See the note on efTr^p, ch. 59 b. ' The word is rare. See Hes. Theog. 
 291. Herod. V. 99; vi. 106' (T. K. A.) and II. iv. 259. t^v kxtjo-iv. 
 
 Kriig. explains KT^p-evo^ xW^-^a- I^ ^o^^^ ^^ ^^^^^ *® P^^"* ^"^ ^"^ *^^ *^^^ 
 how the termination in (ris indicates the actual process of acquisition. Cf. the 
 same phrase, ch. 1 3. pcpai^rtpov uIkovv— ' dwelt with more stabi- 
 
 lity; this has reference to the fi€Taya<XTd<Teis before mentioned, ch. 2. 
 irXovo-iwTcpoi kavrwv. In phrases of this sort the subject, instead of being 
 compared with anything else, is compared with itself at another time or 
 place. All the grammars furnish abundant instances. See Matth. § 460, and 
 Jelf, § 782 g, where, however, instead of translating SeivbraTos aavrov, 'when 
 you 80 entirely sui-pasml yourself; it would be more accurate to say, ' when you 
 were at your &e«r— ' when you reached the highest point in cleverness you ever 
 did reach.' l<|)i^ji6Voi 7dp. These words convey the reason for the 
 
 statement ^e^acSrepov c^kovp. BovXcCav. Kriig. renders this word 
 
 Unterwiirfgkeit; ' Subordinate position; for Slavery, in the strict sense of the 
 term was, he says, unknown to the most ancient Greeks ; he refers to 
 Athenjpus, vi. p. 264 [Tauchnitz, p. 77]; Herod, vi. 137; ^^ct. Antiq. 1034. 
 irpoa-iiroiovvro— 'tried to bring over to themselves; a word of which Thucyd. is 
 fond. See i. ^7, and particulariythe note on iii. ch. 47 a. 
 
 {c ) Kal ivrovrt^ Tip Tpdxw— Krug. translates ' Verhaltnisse'—' mutual rela- 
 tions; cf. i. 97, iv otif Tp6Trv KaWcrrT/. |iaXXov— ' more than here- 
 tofore.' See note, ch. 3 b, ' for perhaps their former relations were not alto- 
 gether extinct,' Kriig. 
 
 Chapter IX.— 'A^afi^fivwv . . . -npoHx^v . . . o^k A^wv-dvctpai. The mean- 
 ing obviously is, Agamemnon, in my opinion, collected the armament, because he 
 surpassed his contemporaries in power, and not so much because he took with 
 him &c There is nothing more important for junior students to observe 
 than the distinction between the participle with and without the article. 
 With the article it is simply identified with the subject of the verb. W ith- 
 out the article it expresses the cause or condition under which the verb is 
 predicated of the subject, and may be always given in English by introducing 
 ' when ' ' because,' ' since,' ' seeing that,' and the like. 6 ravra Tpd^as dni- 
 eavev, ''The man who did this was killed.' irpd^as ravra diredavep, 'He icas 
 killed nncc he did this.' See as parallel irpoUxovTes, ch. 18, note b. Jelf's 
 loner remarks upon the participle, § 681, may be read for illustrations. 
 Kal'vavriKui t€ Aj^o k.t.X. Reiske proposed to substitute Se for re, and 
 thereby hangs the whole controversy concerning the meaning and usage of 
 the latter word. Dr. Peile has devoted great pains to its elucidation [Agam, 
 
i6 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book I. 
 
 CiiAP. 9.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 App. C], and his conclusions seem to me the most reasonable which I have 
 met with upon the subject. It will, however, be necessary for the student 
 to study the dissertation for himself, as it cannot be reproduced here in any 
 al)ridgenient which would be intelligible. Let it suffice to quote one or two 
 sentences in which he states results. * re serves to connect the several items 
 which make up the detail of a poetic picture, so that they impress the mind 
 with the perception of but one continuous subject or group.' * re introduces a 
 new term which is but an enlargement upon one leading (former) term, or 
 train of thought' — ' in point of fact, it communicates nothing more than the 
 mind has already associated with something preceding — it is an indication of 
 some previous j)erception, and as long as the mind is associating only a 
 series of particulars included under the same general perception, so long it 
 expresses its tlioughts by re . . . re, hence its use as an affix to the relative 
 pronoun, and in such phrases as olos re.' I will give one remarkable case in 
 order to fix this doctrine concerning re on the student's memory. Soph. Aj. 
 1 3 10, TTJs (Tr)s VTT^p yvvaiKOi, rj toO <tov 6' 6/j.alfxovoi X^yuj. Here Hermann 
 substitutes 7' for d\ But the line contains a sneer which Agam. proj)erly 
 in the next line calls an aiVxtcrroj X670S ; it means that he doubts whether 
 she might not be called wife to both — on hthalf of your wife, or, must 1 ««y, 
 your brother s jointly — where re blends the two men in the same relation to 
 one woman. The student may also be assisted in arriving at a conception of 
 what is meant by attention to such passages as the difficult one (ii. 62, ad finem), 
 Ty\v rdXfiav 7} ^uvecrts ix^pcvrepay irap^x^rai^ iXiridi re ^caov Triarevci, where the 
 clause introduced by rf does not contain a separate, additional idea, but is rather 
 the epexegesis of that expressed in the first. Tr. not — and also trusts less to 
 Hope, but, in that it trusts less to Hope, or, and withal trusts less to Hope. 
 The student should also read the remarks of Dr. Donaldson, who connects 
 T€ etymologically with k€v. Xew Cratylus,^ 149, 186, 195. Peile's version 
 of the present passage is, concurrently therewith (xf dfia) he became master, 
 &c. Tvv8dp€a). The authorities for this compact entered 
 
 into by the suitors of Helen to secure her to the one whom she might 
 select, are, ApoUodorus, iii. 10.9; Pausanias, iii, 20. 9. See also Eurip. Jph. 
 Aid. 51-80; Soph. Ajax, iioo. Kriig. conjectures that the use of the name 
 Peloponnesus may have originated in the poetry of TyrtaRus, from whom he 
 quotes the line, evpciav IIAoTros vija-of d<piK6fX€da. The whole fragment (Strabo, 
 viii. 5. p. .^62) may be seen in Grote. 
 
 (b.) ITcXoirGwqcrtwv may depend upon ol ScSeyfx^voi — 'those of the Pelopton- 
 nesians that have received,' OT \i Td'Ay follow <j-a0f'(rrara — ^the clearest accounts 
 of Peloponnesian affairs.' Am. thinks that the absence of the article and the 
 use of lleXoTTOwTjcriuii' for HeXoTrovvrjaiaKuiv militate against the last. Neither 
 objection is fatal, but both are strong enough together to make most editors 
 prefer the first interpretation. Poppo finally (ed. 2da.) adheres to the last, in- 
 tluenced by the imitations of Dio Cass. p. 8, <f)daiv ol ri (ra^^orara tiZv Hatii- 
 vuv etSores ; and Dion. Hal. A nt. Rom. p. 888, oi rd 'Ptofxaiuiv aafp^crrara i^rjTa- 
 /cores. It may be doubted whether this be a sound principle, for, 'imitatores, 
 servumpecus' are likely to imitate a peculiarity simply because it is one, without 
 much investigation as to its origin. I inchne to the opinion of Pop. (large 
 edition) that rd has been misplaced, following, as it ought to do, the rd in 
 
 17 
 
 vgSl 
 
 •^ 
 
 ffa<f>k<TTaTa, the transcriber made some confusion. lirriXvrqv ^vra 6|iws 
 
 ayjtiv—Foreifjner though he was, nevertheless had the namihg of the country; or, as 
 Gull, and Am., gave occasion to the naming of the country. This sense might be 
 thought to require Tapaax^^v. But the passages quoted by GoU. on dyavaKTrjaiv 
 ^X«, ii. 4^ and by Am. iii. 82, iv. i, Herod, v. 101, vi. 86, certainly show that 
 he is justified in saying that ^x^^" is sometimes * in se habere causam et rationem,' 
 and hence ' ansam dare alicui rcl.' Pop. has * obtinuisse hunc honorem utrcgio 
 cognomen ab co acciperet.' ^irrjXvrrjv— fr. iirepxofiai, i.e., from the 3rd 
 
 per. sing, of an old Perf., as we have ijXvffis from the 2nd. ^sch. Again, v. 243. 
 The form is unusual (but see X en. CEcon. xi. 4, quoted by Kriig.), ^7r7;\Lis being 
 the common nominative. ' On the general question (says T. K. A.) see Thirlwal^ 
 vol. i. p. 70.' He urges that the testimony of Thucyd. is here of little weight, 
 because he is not st;iting his own convictions, but merely relating what he heard 
 from Peloponnesian antii^uarians. ^ •V€V€X0T]vai. Pop. has ' obtigissc,' 
 
 'fell to their lot;' so Kriig., ' zugef alien,' which he rightly remarks is unusual, 
 ' accidisse' being the more common force of the word. He quotes, however, 
 Herod. iv. 157, ovZh ff<pi xp1<^tov avvc^ipeTo; and Eurip. Ilerac. 919, ffv/ji.<pep€Tai, 
 TO. ToXXd iroXXoU: and this is sufficient support. The old rendering, 'were car- 
 ried to a greater length by his posterity,' is untenable. Mr. Riddle, Terminalia, 
 ii. says, ' the subject is dopa/j-iv. This power became by subsequent additions still 
 greater.' Iv rf 'Attik^. This shows that the name of Attica — 
 
 'A.KTLKT), the Sea-board — nmst have extended at this period more widely than it 
 afterwards did — at any rate as far as the Scironian rocks, where, according to 
 Euripides, Eurystheus was caught by lolaus, and not slain, but captured, koX- 
 Xiarov dKpodlvLov. Hcracleid. 860. At this period Megara belonged to Attica, 
 and may have shared in the name. The traditionary accounts vary as to the 
 captor of Eurystheus, — ApoUodorus, ii. 8. i, and Diod. iv. 57, siding witli 
 Thucyd. ; and Pausanias, i. 44, 4, and Strabo, viii. p. 377 (579), with Euripides. 
 Popp. The fact is of little importance, except so far as it seems to illustrate 
 the difficulty of obtaining trustworthy historical evidence on these matters 
 The reader may find an attempt to account for the divergence of the legends by 
 Pflugk. Eurip. Ilerac. p. 8. 'HpaKXeiSwv — without the article, as 
 
 here and elsewhere, when patronymics are used as proper names. Kriig. On 
 the Heracleids read Grote, vol. ii. ch. 18. p^nrpos. The name of 
 
 this sister of Atreus is variously given, as Nicippe, Leucippe, Menippe, and 
 Amphibia. Kara to oIkciov — 'on the ground of relationship.' 
 
 (Jjcv-yovTa rbv iraWpa — sc. Pelops. The legend has a double form. According 
 to one, Hippodamia, wife of Pelops, from hatred to her step-son, induced her 
 own children, Atreus and Tliyestes, to slay him, and Atreus accordingly fled 
 to escape his father's vengeance. In the other, Pelops himself slays Chrysippus, 
 and Atreus flies, dreading the same fate. For the Pelopidae, see Grote, vol. i., 
 ch. vii. ovK^Ti — no longer came back. The phrase may be some- 
 
 what unusual, but there is no reason to change it into ovk iirauex^iip'naev, as 
 Kriig. has suggested. Indeed, he himself points out that it is defended by 
 ouK^rt iipwatv, i. 91, cf. 12 c. ^6^. Jelf, § 607. IIep<rei8wv. 
 
 Eurystheus was son of Sthenelus, and grandson of Perseus. See Miiller's 
 Dorians, i. ch. 3, and Grote, vol. i. ch. 4. All the preceding paragraph, it must 
 bciulmitted, is a specimen of exceedingly confused narrative and inartificial com- 
 
 c 
 
i8 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book I. 
 
 position. But it was written in the earliest stage of prose writing. It is 
 possible to re-arrange the whole as Kriig. has done, and still to confess with 
 him, that the great accumulation of participles makes the new arrangement as 
 
 bad as the old. 
 
 {c.) ri\v o-TpaTciav. ' Pro lioc. et hie, et alibi non raro apud Tliucyd. ubi 
 expeditionis bellicfe notio requiritur in MSS. aut omnibus aut j)lurimis aTpariav 
 legatur.' Pop. The latter is found, moreover, in places in Aristophanes {e.(/., 
 Acharn. 251, 1 143, ii'7. 587), where the metre requires it. It does not, therefore, 
 seem possible to retain the distinction of Ammonius and the grammarians, 'ffrpa- 
 Tela abstractum esse verbi ffTparevecv, nomina in -la esse concreta et collectiva.* 
 The truth is, perhaps, that in all languages such expressions as 'the expedition* 
 and ' the expeditionary army' are wont to be confused. ov X'^P^'*'*' 
 
 u_ T. X. — 'not from favour so much as from fear.' This is supposed to be a 
 tacit contradiction to * xo/"" 'Arpeldrjai (pepovras,' Od. E. v. 307. irXeiov (in 
 Thuc. more commonly irXiov) is synonymous with fiaWoy, which occurs ii. 39, 
 
 3- Kriig. 
 
 (d.) el T<^ iKavbs TCKpT]pi«<rat — ' if In anyhod \j 3 opinion he is sufficient autho- 
 rity to ground an inference upon,' or ' competent to furnish sure evidence.* 
 That Thucyd. did not unhesitatingly follow him is clear from i. 10; ii. 41 ; 
 vi. 2. Pop. On the omission of iffrl see Jelf 376, e. Iv tov 
 
 CKTiTrTpov T?) Trapa8<5<r€i, //. ii. 108. *It was the custom with the ancients at 
 that early period^ when writings were not yet distril)uted into books or 
 chapters, to make a division according to the prominent subjects anywhere 
 treated on. Tliis was especially the case with Homer, jmrtions of whose Iliad 
 were called by the names Td0os TlaTpdKXov, Nehi-o/xavTeta, as here. Cf. Mark 
 xii. 26, iirl T7)s ^cltov: Rom. xi. 2.' Bloomf. Cf. Miiller's Lit. of Anc. 
 Greece, 50-52, and on the Rhapsodists p. 32, 33. Grote on the Rhapsodists, &c., 
 
 vol. ii. ch. 21. 
 
 (/.) IloXXfjo-i v-fjo-oio-i. Miiller (^Eginetica, p. 24.) points out that thiscan 
 only have reference to the Argolic Islands and those in the -^gean Sea which 
 lay round about, for Zacynthos, Pulichia and Paphos belonged to others. 
 * Quales sunt Calauria, Hydrea, Tiparenus, Cecryphalea, fortasse .Egina quan- 
 quam de hac dubitat Miiller.' Pop. 
 
 Chapter X. — (a.) |Uv — without a corresponding 5^. The opposition is to 
 be found in § 4. Kriig. |iiKpdv— ' a?i insignifcant place.' The 
 
 predicative adjective of the general notion in the neuter sing. See Jelf, § 381, 
 and the passages there quoted. Poppo says, 'non legitur hie generalis 
 sententia,' and therefore understands ir6\i<Tixa. But if we say, * a poor sort of 
 place,' we surely do predicate a general notion. Mycenae was destroyed by 
 the Ar^-ives, B. c. 468, thirty-seven years before the Peloponnesian war. Strabo 
 says that in his time not a vestige remained of Mycenje. Yet of the gate of 
 the Lions, and the Treasury of Atreus, in a style so urdike the later Greek 
 architecture, considerable remains are yet to be seen, and will probably last as 
 lon«^ as the world. Arn. See the Vignette in Thirlwall's Greece. Small Ed. 
 Ay— Observe not etrj ; the fact is admitted to be true, but it is contended that 
 the fact affords no ground for supposing the expedition not to have been great — 
 'And because Myctnce was hu,t an insignificant place, or, if any of the towns of 
 
 Chap. 10.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 19 
 
 that day now seem to be of small account, one should not, talcing this as a sure 
 proof dislnlieve,' dc. On /xt) with indicat. doKei aee Jelf, § 749. 
 
 |iV| yivt<r9ai This is what has been called the redundant negative. 
 
 It owes its origin to the genius of the Greek language, which, where the 
 prominent idea in the speaker's mind is a negative, attaches a negative participle 
 to the predicate, whether another has preceded or no. Similar is the practice 
 of the uneducated with us, and with all nations. The best notice of the 
 subject is to be found in Buttman's excellent edition of the Mtidias. Appendix. 
 See also Jelf, § 747, 748, 750. Kar^x^-'^^tinet' in Latin— from 
 
 which our word ' o6^ams'— expressing that the report extends and dominates 
 over a certain extent. So Eurip. Jlipp. v. 1464, 0^^uai KarexovaLv. Cf. 11 c. 
 Pop. refers to iii. 89 ; viii. 28. Krug. to Valckn. on Eur. Hipp. v. 1465. 
 
 (6.) cl XTi4)9ciTi. On ft with the optative, expressing the most general and 
 indefinite form of hypothesis, see Jelf, § 855. Karao-Kcvfjs rd 
 ^8d<|)Ti. Arn. has a long note on the distinction between KaraaKevr) and vapa-' 
 cKeuT), which amounts to this ; that the former is the stationary and permanent 
 stock— the 'fixtures,' as it were: the latter denotes, on the contrary, what is 
 moveable and temporary— what can be prepared for an occasion. The former 
 would include the fortifications and public buildings of a city ; the latter naval 
 and military armaments, &c. This seems correct as a general rule, though as 
 he admits that passages occur which are difficult to reconcile with it, as Kara- 
 ffK(vr) TOV TToXffxov, viii. 5. It is certainly used in i. 89, (which see) so as to 
 include the moveable furniture of a household: compare ii. 38, 65; vi. 31, 
 from which it appears as though Pop. were right in calling it ' totam domfts 
 instruendae rationem,' so far as these passages are concerned. Kriig, says it can 
 here mean nothing but ' Anlage,' — or /cnV/uara, as the Schol. call them, 
 * Foundations.' He quotes Plut. Alcibiades, 36, rriv tQv reix^v KaTaaKevrjv, & 
 KareffKevaffav iv Opg-nv- Arn. quotes from Dodswell's Tou7', ii. p. 303 4, lan- 
 guage with respect to the ruins of Sparta , in exact accordance with Thucyd. 
 anticipations. T. K. A. appends from Wordsworth, p. 335, 'The only Hellenic 
 ruin of any note is a spacious theatre. The prophecy, therefore, of Thucyd. 
 has been fully verified.' See as regards Athens, Grote, vol. vi. p. 24. 
 irp6s — 'iii comparison with, from the notion of being placed alouf^side of cf. 
 Jelf, § 638. Twv ir^VT€ rds 8vo jtoipas— ' Tivo-iifths.' The principle 
 upon which the article is used in these cases seems to be that, when the exist- 
 ence of any whole number is assumed, the existence of all its parts is assumed 
 also— they consequently become definite quantities and admit the article. 
 The second Lacedaemonian portion was Messenia, the national name of which 
 was almost disused. Krug. quotes Xen. //e^/. vi. 2, 31. The remaining portions 
 were Arcadia, Argolis, and Elis. Some have supposed that Tlmcyd. means two- 
 fifths, physically and not politically speaking. ^Yovvrai — properly 
 said of a military leading in time of war, but, as Kriig. remarks, this soon 
 merges into a general and political one. From about 580 B.C. Sparta acted as 
 the recognised commander not only of the Peloponnese but of the whole Greek 
 name. The confederacy itself, however, was formed by the inhabitants of that 
 peninsula alone on fixed and regular laws ; whereas, the other Greeks only 
 annexed themselves to it temporarily. Midler's Dorians, b. i. ch. 9. 
 ir^Xcws. The article has been supposed (see Am.) to be absent upon the principle 
 
 c 2 
 
20 
 
 NOTES OX THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book I. 
 
 Chap. 12.] 
 
 ^"OTES OX THUCYDIDES. 
 
 21 
 
 mentioned in ch. 8, note («), which see. But the c:t«?es are not parallel, for it is 
 not here the fiimiliar expression employed by citizens for their city, as in (Ed. 
 Tyr. V. 630, /cd/iot TroXewj ixir^aTt.. Therefore, either tr. with Kriig., ' it being 
 neither a city that has been compactly built, nor,' li'C, or regard vdXeojs as a 
 gloss. It has been doubted whether ^vvoiKiffSdarji refers to the consolidation 
 of some separate Denies, like that supposed to have been effected by Theseus at 
 Athens, or whether the words merely refer to the loose and straggling way 
 in which the town was built. Tliere is no historical evidence to support the 
 first notion ; and fcara KWAtas— ' rlllayt- fashion," imme<liately following point to 
 the second. We know that there were four or five such Arw/xai clustered toge. 
 ther, though not surrounded by a wall (as Bloomf. states them to have been), 
 at least before the time of Alexander the Great. Their names were, according 
 to Muller, Pitane, Messoa, Limnje, and Cynosura. cUds'ccrOai de- 
 
 pends upon ol^xal above. Cf. Cfrote, vol. ii. p. 344- ' ^^ ^vas noticed that Sparta, 
 even in the days of her greatest power, was not (properly speaking) a city, but 
 a mere agglutination of five adjacent villages.' <|>av<pds 6\|/€a)S— 
 
 * the appearance presented to the eye.' 
 
 {c.) Sx^eis— external appearance. Cf. Jelf, §355, i. \i.tyi<rrr]v 
 
 T«v irpb avTTJs. See note, ch. i. a. \tnTo\i(vr\v—' left behind by,' 
 
 i.e., inferior to. Kriig. quotes i. I44, 5. And tovtuu </)t\o5 evfpycTuv ovdevbs 
 XeiTTCTai. Xen. Mem. ii. 4, 7. i\v—sc. ttoltjciu or according to 
 
 Pop., (Trpardav, implied in ivravda, which is equivalent to Tipi TaOrrjs rrjs 
 ffTpareias. KCi^ oVtws — 'even in this way,' i.e., even accepting the 
 
 naturally exaggerated account of Homer. • X'-^^'' k.t. X. — ' con- 
 
 gisting of 1200 ships.' The Schol. on //. Book ii., says 1166, and Eustath. 
 , J 85 dvSpwv. By a similar idiom we say 'a ship of 1000 tons,' 
 
 or 'of 100 guns.'Krug. quotes irXolaalTov, referring to Lob. ad Phryn., p. 262. 
 
 {d.) avTCpcTai — 'rowed themselves,' or 'did their own rowing,' i.e., there 
 were no mariners distinct from the fighting-men. irpoo-Kwirovs— 
 
 * men at the oar.' 
 
 (c.) ol iv TtXci — ' }fen in power.' The authorities. Tlie same phrase occurs 
 ii. 10, 2, and a similar one, iii. 28, ol iv rots wpdyixaat, ' Those in the adminia- 
 tratlon of affairs,' repeated by Theophrastus, ch. vi. p. loi, ed. Sheppard. 
 ut^XXovras. We miglit expect p-eWduruv, for certainly (as Am. remarks) the 
 word does not refer to the Tepivcus or * supernumeraries' alone. Arn.'s expla- 
 nation is that what precedes is equivalent to Trepivem iroWovs fiera <7(pCiv Ayeiv, 
 and that therefore (by a Trpbs to ffwaivbuevov) fx^Wouras follows just as if he 
 had so written it. Pop. says, *adornnera Gnecorum exercitum spectant ; sed 
 cum illi {rrepiveus) hoc continentur accusativos, ut 140, i., Thuc. collocavit ad 
 quos usitatius alterum nomen opponeretur. Vide iv. 1 18; viii. 63.* 
 Ttt irXoia— * their vessels.' Kar6.^paKTa— decked. * Quie ab Arri. 
 
 Anab. vii. 6, i, retppayfi^vai a Latinis tecUe vocantur.' Pop. See ch. 14, 
 and Sheppard's note on i'lrb tov KaTaaTpiOfxaros, Theoph. p. 237. The Schol. 
 explains (xecTavLSojfxha, ' with the hatches down.* Bl. 
 
 (/.) 8* ovv. The MSS. have yovv, but as the proper meaning of tliat 
 particle (cf. ch. 2, e) is inappropriate here, ahnost all editors adopt the above 
 correction of Bekker. rh pcVov a-Korrovvri -to one regarding the 
 
 mean, striking an average, so. between 50 and 120. This dative denoted the 
 
 
 I 
 
 person to whose estimate the matter is referred. Matth. § 388, gives instances. 
 Pop. refers to rb ^^udev a.irTop.ev<^, ii. 49, 5. And, ' In universum aestimanti 
 plus apud peditera roboris.' Tac. Germ., c. 6. «s dirb ird<rr]s — 
 
 * considering that it was dispatched from all Greece.' See Jelf, § 701. Matthise^ 
 §628. ov iroXXoC — i.e., 1200X85 = 102,000. 
 
 Chapter XI. — (a.) o-i\ i\ dXiy too-. 60-. f| dxptiH"-- — * Not so much the 
 want of men as the want of money.' rfjs Tpo4>Tis. The article implies, 
 
 * the necessary sustenance.' iroXcjioiivTa PtoT€vo-civ — ' would be enabled 
 to get its living while prosecuting the war.' A somewhat unusual use of /Storeuw, 
 but not unparalleled, as is proved by Xen. Cyrop. iii. 2, 25, ddicfikvoL airb 
 TroXcfiov ^i0T€V€Lv. Iir€i8i?| 86. The 5^, though the reading of the 
 MSS. is awkward in its position, and therefore most editors, including Kriig., 
 read re. He observes that 5^ does certainly correspond sometimes to a previous 
 re, but rarely, except in cases where what precedes the 5^ is emphatically 
 o[)posed to the former clause, as, for instance, here we might have had d<pLK6- 
 fievot di. If we admit thus much, it seems unreasonable to demand the exact 
 collocation which logically exj)res8es the antithesis, and we may peihaps repre- 
 sent the 5^ by translating, Nay, even when they had now arrived and won a 
 battle {but that they did so win one is clear, for they would not otherwise have 
 erected the fortifications of the naval camp, sc, because they could not in the 
 face of a victorious enemy), they manifestly, I say (5^ in ai)odosi), did not even 
 thereupon emjdoy their whole force, but, &c. irpos '^^(tipyia.v . The 
 Schol., from some unknown source, mentions Acamas and Autiuiachus as 
 engaged in this cultivation. And, ' Diomedes priniis annis belli Trojani, tt]v 
 Bp(j.K-qv ^ycwpyei teste Eustath. ad II. p. 387.' Pop. XTjo-rciav — 
 'predatory excursions.' Homer gives authority enough for this statement, 
 Jl. i. 366, an«l elsewhere. It will be remembered that the plot of the Ajax of 
 Sophocles turns upon the result of some such foray. 
 
 {b.) fj Kal ^hXkov—' wherefore all the more.' Cf. i. 25, 4; ii. 2. 3; iv. r, 
 2. Kriig. rd hiKo. 'i'n\ — *//te ten years,' «.e., the famous ones of 
 
 the siege. pC<f 6,vril\ov—' held out resisting force by force,' or as 
 
 Kriig. has it, 'in the open field,' ' in pitched battles' tw del iraparv- 
 
 XOVTi. Kriig. prefers this to T(p TrapovTi, the other reading, I suppose because 
 it is still more vague, ' the portion that for the time being happened to be with 
 tJiem,' and though there be less authority for it in the MSS., the least common 
 word is also the least likely to have been substituted by a copyist. 
 &v •n'poo-Ka0€to|J.€Voi. The &v is to be carried on to elXov, for the participle 
 sine articulo would itself express the condition. Cf. ch. 9 a. And see the 
 matter discussed, iii. 82. 
 
 (c.) 6vopaoT<5TaTa. Cf. i a. Kareo^r^Kdros- Cf. 10 a. For 
 
 the general question regarding the Trojan war, the student will of course con- 
 sult Grote, vol. i., and Thirlwall, vol. i. 
 
 Chapter XII. — (a.) Ktv (ji€Tavio-TaTo rk Kal KaTu)Ktt€To — ^ was still under- 
 going migrations of its inhabitants, and icas in course of settlement.' He means 
 that it is not surprising that the Trojan expedition was of no great magnitude, 
 since, even subsequent to it, the same disturbing causes were at work. Bl. 
 
22 
 
 NOTES ON TUUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book I. 
 
 says the expression is one of poetic or Pindaric boldness. If so, we ought, 
 perhaps, to tr. /ieraWo-raTo, ims shift inff to and fro. T|<rux<i<racra. 
 
 An exemplification of the common grammatical rule that the nominative pre- 
 cedes the infinitive, where the subject of the infin. is the same as that of the 
 preceding finite verb — the accus. which three MSS. exhibit is, therefore, not 
 necessary. The fxt), according to Kriig. and Giill., who quotes i. 141 ; iv. n6, 
 belongs to both. Tr. ' so as riot, from eiijot/ing rest, to be developed,* i.e., did not 
 enjoy rest enough for development, and this mode of explanation will not be 
 necessary. ^vcoxfiwa*. Tiiis word with its kindred (says Kriig.) 
 
 seems to have been banished from Attic prose. It is an old-fashioned Attic, 
 i.e., Ionic word found in Herod., and it has been pointed out that Aristot. 
 use-si it, drrep avros (6 6cos) veox/J-oi ' qme nova ipse edit it dcsifjnaf/ Steph. Thes. 
 Tr. here ' produced niany revolutions.' d<|>' wv— refers to (rrdacis. 
 
 iKirtirrovTes ^kti^ov — ' persons who were ejected proceeded to found the cities/ sc. 
 those which tliey were well known to have founde<l — their cities. The ydp 
 whicn foUowH shows (as Popp. has seen) that the cities meant are those founded 
 by the Bceotians and Dorians, with others of contemporary date. 
 
 {b.) 'IXCov fi.\w<rtv. In the statement of epochs like this, the article does not 
 occur, Kriig. Cf. i. 23. 4 ; ii. 2. i ; vi. 4. 3. ii "Apv^s. lliis 
 
 was the Arne in Thessaly. Kriig. and Lobeck assert that the name includes the 
 territory as well as the town. Homer mentions an Ame in Bceotia, II. ii. 507 
 (Giilh), which, according to this account, could not have been founded until 
 sixty years afterwards. Heyne, ad locum, explains the discrepancy upon the 
 principle mentioned above that there was a district so called at the time of the 
 Trojan war, but that the town was not built before the arrival of the ^Eolians 
 from Thessaly. diro8acr}i(is — ' ^1 sprinklinfj.' The authority for the 
 
 fact is to be found in the Homeric Catalogue, //. ii. 494, and Miiller {Orcho- 
 menu.s), supposes that it was merely in deference to Homer that Tliucyd. records 
 it here. Yet he adds, that, with the exception of Orchomenus and Aspledon, 
 all Boeotia was in their hands. As Thucyd. only speaks of an aTro5aa/j.6s, it is 
 plain that he did not servilely follow the Hon)eric account. It is probable, 
 therefore, as Am. conjectures, that Thucyd. had other sources of information. 
 * The Bteotians in the tmdition are a wandering race, first driven by the Cail- 
 mceans into Thesj^aly, to the vale of Arne, which cannot have been so small as 
 it is depicted in our maps, and afterwards .again expelled by the Thessalians and 
 returninir into Bceotia. In this narrative we find the influence of the same 
 Paralogism which so commoidy comes before us in the history of the ancient 
 nations, that, viz., where two peoples of the same stock are found in different 
 localities, they are connected with each other by mutual migrations. If the 
 Boeotians and old Thessalians were of tbo same stock, according to one form of 
 the legend, the Boeotians would be represented as having wandere<l to Thessaly, 
 according to another, they would come out of Thessaly into Boeotia. I cannot 
 affirm tliat the Boeotians did not, in the Emathian migration into Tliessaly, pass 
 onward into B(jeotia. If, however, this was the ca.se, I cannot conceive that 
 they had previously been driven into Thessaly,' Niebuhr, Vor. iib. a. Lander u. 
 Volkerk. S. 113. f., quoted in Engelman's Germ, translation. A«- 
 
 piT^S. Upon the return of the Heracleitls consult Arnold's note, MUller's 
 Dorians, vol i. ch. 2, Thirhvall, vol. i. ch. 7, Grote, vol. ii. ch. 18. 
 
 Chap. 1 3.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 23 
 
 (c.) ovKiri a.via-Ta\Uvr\ — ' no longer subjected to evictions, or dislodgcmcnts of 
 its population.' ^|4ir€[tir€ — is a more suitable reading than e^eire/xxpe, 
 
 because the historian does not merely state the fact ; he means to describe the 
 action as continuous — ^commenced the sending out of colonies.' 
 "Iwvas. llemark that the name of the inhabitants is used, and not that of 
 the country. twv vqcriwTwv. ' Praeter Euboeam Cycladum incolas 
 
 intelligit velut Andrios, Tenios, Ceos, Naxios. Cf. vii. 57, Herod, viii. 46,' 
 Pop. 'IroXCas. The truth of this will, of course, depend upon the 
 
 country included under the name. The student must consult Niebuhr, vol. i. 
 pp. 12-20, E. T. 'The Greeks,' he says, 'who regarded the (Enotrians alone 
 as Italians, were long strangers to the wider extent in which the name was 
 applied within the country itself, and never used it so. . . . The region which 
 originally bore the name wjis, according to them, the peninsula bounded by the 
 isthmus, only twenty miles across between the Scylletic and the Napetine Gulf. 
 ... in other words it was the southernmost part of what was afterwards called 
 Bruttium.' Antiochus of Syracuse, to whom Aristotle refers {Pol. vii. 10), in 
 his own time drew a boundary for Italy * by a hne to Metapontum from the 
 river Laos, which, in after times, separated Lucania from Bruttium.' 
 Icrriv & xwR'-a- He is speaking of the Ambraciots and Anactorians, says the 
 Schol., ' Adde Corcyram, Leucadem, Sollium, Corinthiorum colonias. Vide i. 
 24, 30, 55 ; ii. 30, 80. Ziicynthum Achaeorum, ii. 66,' Poppo. 
 
 Chapter XIII. —(a.) irpjir^pov h\ ^o-av .... pao-tXciai. We must 
 not, however, suppose that the Tvpavvlbis immediately succeeded these. Nearly 
 everywhere there was a transition state where all real power was possessed and 
 disputed am<Hig the members of an hereditary oligarchy. In passing from this 
 into a more democratical stage of social existence, the government very gene- 
 rally fell into the hands of some amljitious individual,— in most ca^es, a mili- 
 tary chieftain. As long as he and his family retained it, they were Tvpavvot. 
 properly so called ; but as in the case of the Pisistratidne, it was frequently 
 wrested from them, and institutions more or less democratic succeeded. Read 
 Arnold's excellent essay, Appendix, vol. i. ; Thirhvall, vol. i., ch. 6, pp. 187, 
 192; and Hermann's Gr. Antiq. § 54, 55, 56; Muller's Dorieuis, vol. i., 
 p^ 1^6. kfr\ pT]Tois "YCpaort — 'certain defined and specific rights 
 
 and privileges.'' *yipas in genere omne prsecipuum notat quod quis pne aliis 
 habet, etiam prsecipuum honorem aliquem.' Damn. Leu: Horn, quoted by Bl. 
 See on the yepea jSaaiXeta at Sparta, Herod, vi. 56—59, on eTrt indicating a 
 condition of tenure, cf. Jelf, § 634, 3, c. Read Arist. Politics, iii., 9, 10. 
 if Trepi roi'S ifpujiKOvs xp(>''0^'^ ^aaiXeia 9}v ckSutuv p.iv, ewl 5e TL<n (hpiapevoLS' 
 ffTpaTTjybs yap rjv kolI 5tKa<rrrjs 6 ^a(n\evs, Kai tQv irpos tovs Oeovs Kvpios. See 
 also Herod, vi. ^6. Kriig. remarks that iiri priTois is a settled formula. Cf. 
 i. 122; Herod, v. 57; Isocrat. 17, 19; Plato, Sympos. 213 a.; and iraTpiKai 
 is 'founded bg their fathers,' cf. vii. 69, viii. 6; Isocrat. ix. 35. 
 avnixovro—held to, applied themselres to. On the change from singular to 
 plural, Kriig. refers to his own note on Xen. Anab. i. 7, 17, KOpos re Kai y\ 
 CTparia irap'qXde, Kai iykpovTO etcrio rijs Td<f>pov. 
 
 (6.) jt€Tax€ipi<rai— lit. ' to take in hand,' rare in the active, though occurring 
 vi. 16, vii. 87. Krug. adds iv. 18. Kai SafxCois-i.e., 'as well as for 
 
24 
 
 NOTES OX THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book I. 
 
 the Corinfhian.% cf. Jelf, § 592, r. But, says Kriig., the vavs here mentioned 
 were certainly not Triremes, as Pliny asserts, A'. JI. vii. 56, as these were rare 
 before the Persian war. The Phocspans had nothing but Penteconters, Her. 
 i. 163. 
 
 (r.) lidXtflrra— ' unf/efiihr,' ' nearhj.' Kriig. Philologers are divided about 
 the meaning of this word. * Veheraenter disceptatum est,' Pop., whose note 
 see. From the most careful and extended induction which I have been able to 
 make of its use in Thucydides, I should incline to the belief that the word is 
 employed, wherever an exact statement is im)>ossible, to denote the very closest 
 approximation to it which the writer can make. It is therefore of necessity 
 sometimes to be rendered at the leattt, and sometimes at the monf, according to 
 the point of view from which the subject is contemplatejl ; and it is this appa- 
 rent contradiction which has so much perplexed commentators. See Peile's 
 note, ch. 18, who argues that the word means always 'at the least,' ' to the 
 full,' * ei-ery whit.' Cf. Fasti Ilefleniei, p. 239, on the date. is r^v 
 
 ri\iv'rf\v~' computed up to the close of this tear.' The more usual form of ex- 
 prc-ssion is with a dative, as in the next sentence rai'Tr), and in the well- 
 known line, Kai tU xP^^o^ To'iffd' iariv ov^eXrjXvdiLs,' (E. T., v. 73^; Matth. 
 §388. 
 
 {d.) Navpiax^a TraXaiTaTT]. See Herod, iii. 53. Refers to the expedition 
 undertaken by l^oriander to avenge the death of his son Lycophron, who had 
 been banished to Corcyra, and murdered there. 
 
 {f.) acl 8t) iroTC. 'The iroTf is t<» be referred to de/; the 5ij has a slightly 
 intensive force,* Bl. cjiirdpiov. Kriig. refers to Arist. Pol. vii. 
 
 5, 5, where he is pointing out the most desirable site for a city. 
 TOis TToXaiois iToiT]Tais. Homer has d^i'eioi' re K6pivdov, II. ii. 570. It does 
 not, however, appear certain that editors have a right to add, 'alluding, how- 
 ever, solely to Homer,' anymore than in ch. 5 b. ^TrXwltov. Tlie 
 active here rests upon the best MSS. authority, though elsewhere we almost 
 always meet with the middle. The act. is rather archaic and poetical (Hesiod 
 E. a:. 'H. v. 632), and once or twice in this preface Tliuc. seems to have affected 
 such expressions. dfi4)0T€pa. This must mean, ' hy sea as urll as 
 hij land,' and so both Pop. and Kriig. interpret it; others have imagined it to 
 imply, * in the jEyivan and in the Corinthian (julf They compare i. 100, 112. 
 On the adverbial use of the word, cf. Matth. § 425, Jelf, § 579, 6. 
 The subject of Kadrjpovv is 01 KopiuBioL, as being the principal subject in the 
 whole statement. ^irl Kvpov. Jelf, § 633, 2. 
 - (/.) "Iwo-iv. The Phocaeans, Her. i. 163; the Milesians, iii. 39; the inhabi- 
 tants of the i.slands, Herod, i. 27; (Kriig.) Samians, e.;/., and Chians. 
 v'Uos. The loaiic, or old Attic gen., cf. dcrreos, i]/xia€OS. Time yd. employs 
 both forms of the gen., for we have vlov v. r6. IIoXvKpaTTis. Cf. 
 iii. 104, and read Herod, iii. 39, et seq. ; Grote, vol. iv. p. 321. 
 'PilV€iav. See the account, iii. J04. This is mentioned here (Kriig. thinks) 
 because Thucyd. already was intending to introduce the circumstances there 
 recorded. 
 
 (;/.) olKftovT€s. There is no article, and therefore the form of expression 
 itself points out, that some battle must be intended which was fought during 
 the actual process of colonizing the place. Am. therefore is right in saying that 
 
 »^M*fi, 
 
 Chap. 1 4.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 25 
 
 the sea-fight mentioned by Herod, i. t66, cannot be the one here meant, though 
 he is not quite so right in translating, * the Phoca'ans nho were founding 
 Massalia; as if we had found oi oid^ovTes. This, however, does not affect his 
 statement that the real founders of Massalia were a body of Phocaeans sent forth 
 fifty- five years before the reduction of the mother city by the Persians. They 
 were subsequently joined by the citizens then expelled from their homes, and 
 it is probably owing to this double settlement that so much chronological 
 confusion has occurred concerning the event. See the discrepancies in Poppo's 
 note. 
 
 Chapter XIV.— (a.) XlevTCKovT^pois. Vessels with a single bank of oars, 
 twenty-five on each side. irXoiois jxaKpois— long, light boats, pro- 
 
 bably containing many men, and going at great speed. Bl. compares them to 
 the piratical barges of earlier times, and refers to Wachsmuth, Antiq. Or. ii. i. 
 See Xen. A nab. v. i, i. 
 
 (6.) TcL MT]8tKd, rd IIcpo-tKd— when used as epochs, denote the second 
 Persian war. Kriig. adds, the second determination of the date by reference 
 to Darius, is given by Thucydides in order to mention the third Persian war. 
 We must remark that Thucydides passes over the usurpation of the pseudo- 
 Smerdis, recorded by Herodotus. -n-cpl StKcXCav. These words, as 
 
 Pop. points out, may either mean 'in Sicilia circumcirca,' i.e., * in the different 
 parts or quarters of Sicily,' cf. vi. 2, 6, or 'in Sicilia et finitima Italia,' 
 'the parts round about Sicily.' Cf. ii. 26. The rvpawot, were Gelo and Hiero. 
 (Herod, vii. 158), ' et pra?ter eos sine dubio Theronem, Anaxilaum, alios,' 
 Pop. k% irXtieos— M/> to,— i.e., amount ivg to a large number. 
 
 Kriig. cites Bergler on Aristoph. Ach. v. 686, ^s rdxos Trat'et. 
 KcpKvpaCois i. "25, Herod, vii. 68. 
 
 (c.) Muller, in his ^Eginetica, states a suspicion that the na\Tr of ^gina was 
 purposely depreciated by Thucydides. Thirlwall, vol. ii. p. 66, conjectures 
 that the Athenians had no insignificant fleet in the time of Pisistratus. 
 Pop. €t Tivcs AXXoi— sc. vavTLKa iKUr-nvTO. The Thasians, for 
 
 instance, or Lesbians. lb. Jelf, § 895, 2. PpaX^*- K:^"?- i"^^^- 
 
 prets small, ' trijling,' as i. 141, iirl (ipaxdg. 'jrpo(pd<T€L. Pop., too, has /Spax^a 
 = fiiKpd uti. 130, 140; ii. 22. o^i T€, d<|>* oO— literally. The period 
 
 is recent, counting from tchich up to the present, i.e., if you take that event as an 
 epoch, and count frcm it to the present, you will find the time short. Cf. d(p' 
 oP, ch. 18. The phrase must be taken ' en masse,' and the latter clause is not in 
 translating to be carried forward to the verb. Tr., therefore, 'tis no long ichile 
 ago since, or that Themistocles, «tc. We may compare ov iroXvs XP^^°^ iTreidrj 
 .... 01) TroWd irri eireidri. Peile refers to the Latin ' longo j^ost tempore,' and 
 v. 26, irri U is tovto rd ^v/jLiravra iyeuero ry TroXe/^v ^irra Kal dnoffL. It 
 seems hypercritical to suppose with Kriig. d(p' ov to be spurious. Such 
 familiar expressions indicating measure of time or space, will not always stand 
 strict logical analysis, as ^rjvaL KeWiv 66evirep i]K€L {(Ed. Col. v. 1227), '^0 go 
 thence ichence he came.' irpoo-8oK£H^ov 6vros—' beiug expected,' as 
 
 we say. Cf. 'Aprv^iov TpoffSdKipLov is tt\v Kvirpov clfai. Herod, v. 108. The 
 sea-fight mentioned by Herodotus, vi. 88, between the J^iginetans and Athenians 
 occurred shortly before the battle of Marathon, and it is natural to suppose 
 
26 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book I. 
 
 that Thucyd. refers to the same here. But Pop. and others assume that tov 
 §ap§dpov must mean Xerxes and not Darius, because I suppose the latter did 
 not conduct the expedition in person. They therefore consider the time here 
 specified to be that between tiie two Persian wars (* Die Worte bezelchnen 
 ofFenbar die Zeit ziclsehen den beiden Peraer Kriegen,' Engehiian), and are 
 obliged to resort to an hypothesis (started by Miiller, uEtjinetU-a) that another 
 ^ginetan war broke out after the battle of Marathon. But this seems to rae 
 to be founded on a misconception of tov ^ap^dpov, which does not necessarily 
 mean the Persian khif/ at all, but stands for the people, just as the Latins said 
 ' Romanus,' 'Pcenus,' and we say 'the Gaul,' or 'the Turk,' meaning by the 
 term the whole nation, and so precisely, ch. i8, b ^dp^apo^. 
 €vaup.dxTi(rav — at Salamis. 8id irdo-ris— sc. t^s v(u}S. Or we may 
 
 consider it, with Kriig., an adverbial expression like dvb irpujT-qs, where ixoipa. 
 or some such noun has been suppressed. 
 
 Chapter XV. — (a.) 8jiws. Notwithstanding their insufficient navies. 
 SiapKT]. If the word differs at all in signification from auTapKTJs, Kriig's sug- 
 gestion may be correct, that, viz., it indicates a country incapable of accommo- 
 dating a gradually expanding po|)ulation, whereas ai'rap/crjj hjis reference to an 
 inability to supply the wants of its existing inhabitants. From vi. 90 (sub 
 finem) they appear nearly identical in meaning ; but 5ta may have the force 
 of 'thoroughly,' 'throughout.' 
 
 (6 ) 60-01 Kal €"y^vovTo. This is one of those cases where the force of the 
 conjunction may (as Arn. has well said) be expressed by an emphasis on the 
 auxiliary verb, 'as many as did take place.' See ch. 97 and 105. The i.liom 
 seems to class itself with those cases where ^at introduces sometiiing to which 
 
 the attention is directed in contrast to what has prece<led — the a<lversative Kai 
 
 as in the phrase ri xpv kuI X^yciv, concerning the right interpretiition of wliich 
 scholars are not agreed. Hermann, c. fj., explains, tL Kal xpv ><€yeiy, ' non solum 
 quid, sed etiam an ali«iuid dicendum sit dubitat.' Klotz, on the contrary— 'Si 
 dico ri xPV no-l \^yfiv, proprie hoc quaero, quid sit dicendum, etiam si solum 
 de dicendo cogitemus.' I tiiink Hermann is correct, and that the i>hrase means, 
 'well if one inuxt speak, what are we to say ? ' where the speaking is introduced 
 in contradistinction to the more suitable silence. So ri /cat jSouXeade, u> veurepoi; 
 'what do you want^' said when the parties addressed ought not to want any- 
 thing; so here the /cat iyevovro is in contrast with ovSeh ^vvkffT-q. 
 ^kStIjiovs o-Tparcias. It may serve as an instance of Giiller's hypercriticism 
 and over subtlety to mention that he would strike out the words voXif dirb ttjs 
 iavTuiv as tautological after eKdrjuovs. Now this word, as is notorious, denotes 
 the simple idea 'abroad,' as eVtS^Mous would 'at home;' and of course it is 
 quite as possible to be at a great distance abroad, as at a small one— cf. eiri ^^odov 
 ^kStj/xov il. 10, 'for a foreiyti expedition: i. e., beyond the limits of their own 
 states. For the construction Kriig. compares rbu Upbv -rbXefjiou iarpdrfvaav, i. 
 112. And Lobeck, Ajiw v. 290. T. K. A. remruks it is an extension of the 
 strict cognate accusative i^65ovi i^ievai, arpareiav arpaTfikafiai, tr., ' went out 
 foreign expeditions; cf. Jelf, §. 588. j. v-n^KOow gvvco-r^Kto-av. 
 
 Remark the absence of the SLTiicXe—' associated themselves in a suhordinafe posi- 
 tion,' 8C. oi'EXXTjfes. avTo£— 'themselves unaided,' sc. by i>7r7j/coot. 
 
 Chap. 17.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 27 
 
 iirb Tf]s i<rris—' (Pquo jure; 'ex cequo; Haack. We must, as in ch. 14, con- 
 sider the phrase adverbial from the ellipse of fxoipas. Kriig. renders-' t» 
 rektions of equality, independence of each other; cf. iii. 40. "^oO dTro tt^s fcrr/J 
 
 ^^^rinoXcjiov. Refer to Herod. V. 99- Thirlwall i. p. 45^. ' Bellum ortum 
 est de Lelanto vel Lelantio campo. Vide Strab. x. p. 688.' Pop. 'Clavier 
 considers 800 B.C. as the date of the war for the Lelantic territory, mentioned 
 Herod. V. 99; Time. i. 15; Aristot. Pol. iv. 3^.' Hermann, P. A. of 
 Greece, § 1 1, 12. SUo-n^— lit. stood apart— dec tdtd into the al- 
 
 liance. Kriig. compares 8L€Kpidr]<Tav, i. 18. 
 
 Chvptf.u XVI.-(a.) iiriyiv^ro. This verb would naturally govern both 
 dXXotj and K-aria;crt. The latter words, however, as Kriig. remarks, also link 
 themselves in construction to eTTccrrpdreucre. It is in fact one of the anaco- 
 loutha of Thucyd., who sometimes hitroduces a fresh clause with a new type ot 
 construction, apparently forgetting that the previous clause is imperfect, if the 
 form into which it has been thrown be not followed out. Cf. v. 95, ov 
 rocovrou (iXd^ru rj ^x^pa ^/xo;. 6ao. v 0'X^a (not (SXd^rei, but) aade.eca, 
 napa5ecyf.a roU dpxo/xeVocs ^Xovp..vov. This, with other idioms of the same 
 sort, depends upon a principle of the utmost importance for the nght umler- 
 standing of (Ireek authors, noticed by Mr. ShiUeto in his edition of Demosthenes 
 De Falsd Zcr/.-that viz., the Greeks almost never, where it is possible to 
 avoid it, make a twofold statement alike in both clauses ; they vary the con- 
 struction even to affectation. Express Kal 'Iccr. in English-' ««^ as their parti- 
 cular impediment to the lonians, Cyrus and the Persian monarchy made a descent 
 upon thin; H^^ ai|T,0fivau Great difficulties have been made 
 
 about the absence of the article rov. But, as Kriig. says, the simple infinitive 
 follows, because Kc^Xvp-ara irrey^uero is exactly cpiivalent to eKo^Xvdv^au, cf. 
 Jelf < 668 - ivrhs"AXvos. ' This side Jlalys'— as this expresses 
 
 a familiar division by a familiar boundary, the absence of the article may well 
 be defended on the principle mentioned above (ch. 8 a), though as a general 
 rule, Krug. may be right in saying, the Greeks to xora/zos prefix the proper 
 name with the article, 6 "AXus worapos. See for the facts, Herod. 1. 28 ^ 
 48ov\«o-€ The younger student should compare dovXw<Ti>pepos voce media, ch. 
 18 and he will see that the middle is avoided here, because reference is not 
 ml<le to the reflex effect of the action upon the actor, or his interests, but 
 simply to its effect upon the sufferer. Kriig. also notices this-'Hier nur das 
 Leiden des Objects, nicht das Interesse des Subjects zu bezeiclinen 1st. 
 Kal Tds vncrovs. Herodotus (i. I43, 151, ^69) relates, that upon the submis- 
 sion of the continental cities to Hari>agus, the islands voluntarily gave them- 
 selves up. But, adds Poppo, either the submission of the islands was simu- 
 lated and temporary, or Thucydides overlooks this surrender and is thinkmg 
 of their re<luction beneath the Persian power, after the battle of Lade, at the 
 close of the Ionian revolt. See iii. 141. 
 
 Chapter XVII.-(a.)TU<J»' lavrJiv. ' Their own interests : Pop. and Krug. 
 ' What concerned themselves.' Arn. 'That which depends or rests upon themselves. 
 Kuhn Gr Gr. 611. These of course amount to the same thing. It is however 
 
28 
 
 NOTES ON THUCVDIDES. 
 
 [Book I. 
 
 CuAP. 18.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 29 
 
 possible to interpret with VcWe-' what was for their own time, i.e., would latt 
 their own time.' i^ ^c rh <rS>y.^. Krii-. undersfinds this of personal 
 
 security. It probably includes the notion of luxury as well. 81 
 
 d(r4»aXc{as-'/«X/>.^ mea.,Hres for security.' Krug. This scarcely seems 
 accurate. Ihe preposition 5ta must I think as usual denote ' in a state of; \ e 
 It mdicates that the subject is pas^^in;, through some status. See what is said ch* 
 40 c. and the whole will mean-' Keeping as quiet as po.ssible,' allowincr as' few 
 opportunities for change or commotion as they coul.l. On the adminrstration 
 ot these rvpap.oL see Hermann's Political Antiq. of Greece, i, 64. He adds in a 
 note, 'Were the tyrants generally warlike? Thuc. i. ,7 seems to deny it, 
 but It IS positively asserted by Phit. Hep. viii. p. 566, e. and Aristot. Pol. v. 
 ?\^- . , wKovv. Arn. remarks the verb does not merely sirrnifv 
 
 theu mhahited; but ^ theif lived In and conducted; as in ii. 37, iii 37" So 
 ^LOLKdv t})v Tr6\Lv-m, ' to adniinlstcr the a fairs of the city.' ' ' ^ir' 
 
 a^Toiv. The i)rei.osition ' has a mi.xed meaning partly expressive of derivation 
 and partly of agency.' Arn. But as the doer of an act is considered as the 
 source from which it proceeds, both i.leas natunilly coincide and are expressed bv 
 tlie same word. See however, Matth. § 573, Jelf, §62 ,, c. cl u^ ,1 
 
 The use of et>^ for 'unless' is rea<lily exphiined l,y tiie elhpse of some predicate 
 to be supplied from the rest of the sentence. The second el appears to me to 
 be ong to ri-,.e. 'si quid,' and such also is the case with thre. instances which 
 Jelt, J^ 860, 7 has cited as exhibiting a s.'Cond el in connexi<m with el fi-h Pop 
 supphes after el ^i, h re, the words d^c6\oyo. fpyo. i^pAxOrj, ami .says that tlie 
 whole runs thus : 'A7./ .1 .juld adrer.n,s suos .juir^ne Jinithno.. me,,orlA dinnuu, 
 fecerunt, (r^uod certd fecerunt SIcIII<b TyrannI), nam (hi) SIcilicv Tyranni' dr 
 In et fiyj ?i Ti, says Bl., we have an Attic phrase for el fir] 8, n. 
 
 (6.) 01 7dp ^v 2tK€X£(j. Tlie yap has reference, as frequently, not to an ex- 
 pressed, but an implied assertion-' But not all, for the Sicilian tyrants '-This 
 IS more simple and natural than with Kriig. to refer it to ^s t6 au;^a ^kcvv &c 
 iravraxoeev -'from causes operating on all sides.' See i. 1 24, and iii 53 c 
 KaT€£x€To -dToXjioWpa clvai. There does not seem to me any real difficulty 
 here. Of course the words do not mean-^ was prevented from belnr/ timid- 
 but the two infinitives proleptically expn-ss the result of ^-ar6/x€ro, and '//Tjre 
 re are like the Latin 'ne<pie . . et'-Oreece was kept In check, so as both not' to 
 perform m confederacy any hrHliant {<t>avep6v) e.rploit, and to be In Its separate 
 commumtus somewhat deficient In enterprise. The absence of u;are is of no im- 
 portance, cf. iii. 23. vi. 69. 
 
 Chapter XVIII.-(..) ^^,,8^ 8^. 'The construction of this sentence is 
 throughout involved and irregular,' Bl. 'Protasis prima sententia alio modo 
 post parenthesin repetitur verbis /.erd 5^ rJp rQ. rvpduuc.. .ardXvacu, et per 
 duphcem particulam yap causam, et caus^-e causam indicat.' Goll 
 Tvpavvot ' The following tyrants are stated by ancient historians to have been 
 deposed by the Spartans: the Cypseli.U^ of Corinth and Ambracia, the former 
 in O lymp. 49 3 (584 B.C.), the latter prol>ably somewhat later; the Pisistratidte 
 in Athens, who were allied with the Thessalians in Olymp. 67. 3 (^,0 B c)- 
 their adherent, Lygdamis of Naxos, probably about the saine time ; ^sch'ines 
 of Sicyon, about the 65th Olymp. (520 B.C.); Symmachus of Thasos, Aulis of 
 
 Phocis, and Aristogenes of Miletus, of whom we know only the names; the 
 larger numbers were dethroned under the kings Anaxandrides and Ariston, 
 Cleomenes and Demaratus,' MuUer's i>or/aw«, vol. i. p. 189. The deposition of 
 tyrants, as opposed to the principles of Dorian aristocratical government, was 
 evidently part of the fixed policy of Sparta, and ui)on these grounds we must 
 account for the great armament sent against Polycrates of Samos, which Herod, 
 iii. 54 represents as despatched to avenge the plunder of a cauldron and breast- 
 plate. ' It is easy to perceive' (says Miiller, vol. i. p. 187) * in the dynasties of 
 the Sicyonian, Corinthian, Epidaurian, and Megarian tyrants, a powerful 
 coalition against the supremacy of the Dorians, and the ancient principles of 
 that race, the more powerful as they knew how to render subservient to their 
 own ends the opinions which had lately arisen.' For a full understanding of 
 the subject, the student must read Midler's Dorians, vol. i. ch. 7, 8. 
 €irl iroXv— * to a (jreat extent; to be understood locally, says Kriig. ; but Engel- 
 man has *.7ro»*t<H Theih; ol irXclcrToi Kal TtXcvratoi. 'The junior 
 
 student should observe that, in accordance with Granville Sharp's important 
 canon, the same persons are denoted by both jjarticiplt's. The canon in ques- 
 tion is: ' When two or more assumable attributives' {i.e. adjectives, participles, 
 or nouns denoting quality, relation, or condition) 'joined by a copulative or 
 copulatives are assumed of the same person or thing, before the first attributive 
 the article is inserted, before the remaining ones it is omitted.' On the theolo- 
 gical importance of the canon in such expressions as 6 0e6s Kal ^ojrrjp rjpwy, and 
 for ample illustration, consult Middleton on the Greek Article, parti, ch. 3. 
 At the same time it must be admitted that apparent exceptions to the canon are 
 80 numerous as somewhat to shake implicit confidence in its correctness. The 
 matter is one which has not received as yet its full discussion. The important 
 question appears to me to be this : Are the existing violations of the rule to 
 be ascribed to the falsehood or inaccuracy of the grammatical principle upon 
 which it rests ? or is the principle metaphysically and grammatically correct, 
 and af e the violations of the rule owing to the looseness and rapidity of ordi- 
 nary discourse, which does not observe grammatical accuracy where the danger 
 of misapprehension is not a practical inconvenience ? In conversation we should 
 probably say, ' The man and horse,' without repeating the article ; for there 
 could be no fear of our hearers identifying the two. But in grave and written 
 composition, should we say ' the warrior and statesman,' if we meant two distinct 
 persons — Wellington, e. g. and Peel 1 I think not ; and therefore, in all cases 
 of serious composition, where confusion was possible, I believe that the Greeks, 
 far more accurate thinkers and writers than ourselves, adhered to the principle 
 of the canon. I have been led into these remarks from the assertion of a 
 scholar whose opinion is entitled to the highest respect, that * upon a pinch 
 Granville Sharp's canon always fails.' As a genend rule it certainly does fail, but 
 * upon a pinch,' i. e. where its violation would occasion confusion of thought, I 
 myself believe that it does not MX.' Sheppard's Theophrast us, p. 56, note on 
 rot's aSiKovfi^vovi /cat dyauaKTOvvTas — * those icho express their indignation at the 
 injuries they are receiving.' I so expressed my opinion some time ago, and all 
 subsequent examination has confirmed my belief in its correctness. The reader 
 may, by way of illustration, compare with this passage, which means, the most 
 nunieroiLS, who were at tJte same time the last^ 6 trpQTOs /cat reXevraios dpafiwv. 
 
30 
 
 NOTES OX THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book I. 
 
 Chap. 1 9.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 31 
 
 ^sch. Afjam. v. 305. rwv UeXoTrouvrjffiwv Kai'ABrjvalwv, i. i. tAs fxcyiffTas Kal 
 i\axi(rTa\ vaOs, i/10. r^s ZaXafimas Kal UapdXov, iii. 33. ^^ ai'^V t6 afivvecdai 
 Kal TralJeii/, ?. f. the sufferimj encountered in the act of re lulling the enemy, ol Aa- 
 KeSaifJidyiol Kal XOv^^aToi, i. 18. t6 jSpaSu /cai m^Xo^ i. 84. i) irapavrUa re \a/i- 
 ir/)6T77s Ktti « t6 ^Treira 56ta, ii. 64. t6 ^ov\6^ltvov Kal i'ttotto.^, i. 90, The sus- 
 picious pun^ort of their policy. V^rk t^v ktCctiv. The majority of 
 MSS. have KTri<XLv. For the latter it has been urged tliat the Heracleuls cer- 
 tainly did not build Sparia, but found it, though a somewhat insignificant 
 place, already inhabited by Achseans (Muller's Dorians). On the other hand, 
 Thucyd. himself, v. 16, says, fire rb irpCbrov KaK^halp-ova Kri^ovre^ roi'S /SacrtX^as 
 KadiffTalro: and Isocrat. Pan. c. 16, calls the Heracleids and Dorians OLKiaTa^ 
 27rdpT775. These passages have induced most editors, and rightly too, to prefer 
 KTiffiv, AwpicW. Pop. has collected a large number of similar 
 genitives in his note upon 'Eperpt^o^^ ch. 15 c. Cf. Wunder on Soph. Phil. v. 
 ,(ji_ (rrao-ido-ao-a. This is said of the period before Lycurgus, 
 andj aa Am. suggests, probably refers to the jealousies between the reigning 
 houses of Eurysthenes and Procles. See Herod, i. 6-., vi. '^2; Iscxj. Panath. 
 § 177; Thirlwall, vol. i. p. 315. *^ T€TpaK<J<ria. The question con- 
 cerning the age of Lycurgus is too long and difficult for a note. Time, here 
 makeslt fall 804 B.C.; since the Pel. war ended B.C. 404; Apollodorus, in 884 
 B.C. ; Messenia was conquered, and the war concluded by Theopompus, accord- 
 in cr to Isocrates, about 750 B.C. [Am. says the date ought to be 714 B.C.]; and 
 Theopompus was next but one in descent to Charilaus, in whose reign Lycurgus 
 made his reforms. See, however, Clinton, F. JL p. 408 ; MUUers Dorians, 
 ch. 7, p. 154, who states, 'We absolutely find no account of him (Lycurgus) as 
 an individual' person.' Thirlwall, vol. i. ch. 8; Grote, vol. ii. ch. 6. 
 lidXwrra. Peile, comparing n)any passages, argues that fidXiara must mean 
 
 * at least,' * every whit.' It is obvious that he is right here, and in ch. 7i, 54, 
 118, and others to which he refers. But see ch. 13, note c. If fidXiara de- 
 notes the nearest obtainable approximation, when it is the writer's intuit to 
 make the number as large as possible, it will be ' at least,' and when vice versft, 
 
 * at most.' ^S T^v nUvri^v—' computed up to the close of this uar,' 
 and infra, ^s rSuSe rhv TroXe/xov. Peile refers to Theoc. i. 16, irorafi^X^erai eh 
 dOo TrAXaj, not into, but as much as two pails. So again, iii. 85, 107, es with 
 a numeral, which, as in Theocrit., I should render ' up to.' jtcri 8^. 
 This is 8i in apodosi recalling the statement with which the ch. commences 
 after the interruption of a long j)arenthesi8. 
 
 (6.) T« jtpydXo) <rr(SXa). Note the article. t«v |vjiiroXcjtT]o-dvT«v. 
 
 Those who regard the ai)ri8t as any other past tense, must be puzzled by this 
 participle, as Pop. is, who remarks, ' non ut plerumque participium aoristi dici- 
 tur, nam primum bellum Persicum non erat communiter gestum.' According 
 to our theory of the aorist, the form of the expression is exactly correct, indefi- 
 nite, and not indicative of any particular time. The confederated Greeks— almost 
 equivalent to tCjp ^vfifidx^^v, the confederate Greeks, cf. Appendix. 
 irpo«xovT€S. See ch. 9, note a. 8iavoT]0^VT€S— * having formed tht 
 
 resolve.' The 8td denotes its passage through their thoughts. Cf. ch. 17 a. 
 dva<rK6vao-d|i€voi. The correlative to KaTa(TKivdio^la^. It is used in military 
 yrritera to denote the breaking up of a camp. See Xen. Anab. vi. 2. 5, and 
 
 here it must mean something similar, i. e. 'having packed up all their moveable 
 furniture, and taken it with them.' S(.eKpC6T]<rav — 'ivere separated 
 
 off into the parties of the A. and L.' Cf ch. 15 b. Pop. ajtpropriately quotes 
 'dissidere in Anninium ac Segestem,' Tac. Ann. i. 55 ; so biecpdvrj means ^were 
 manifestly seen to be the most poiverful on the opposite sides.' Cf. iv. 51, 108, 
 vi. 17. 
 
 (c.) 6paiXH>^ci is an Ionic word (Herod, vii. 145), not in use, says Krug.,by 
 the Attics. A distinction has been drawn that ^vfifxaxlo. denotes alliance in 
 subordination to some leader; ofxaixfJ-io. a league upon terms of equality. But 
 it is impossible to pronounce positively upon the correctness of this. For the 
 circumstances see ch. 102. ^crd kiv8vv«v — amid dangers, i.e. in 
 
 actual service. Knig. compares i. 70, 5, ii. 42, 3, iii. 56, 3. vi. 31, i. Am. 
 ])araphrases well: * Their field of exercise was not the parade, but the field of 
 battle.' Bl, quotes a similar description of the Roman military system, Joseph. 
 Bell. Jud. iii. 5. i. 
 
 Chapter XIX. — (a.) i^yovvto — * exercised their Ti-ycftovCa. ' Matthise, from 
 a hasty consideration of this passage, was induced to believe that ijyeTadai 
 governed the accusative. It evidently stands here independently, and the 
 accusative depends upon ^xo*'''^ 5. ^irirr^SeCws iroXirevciv — ' to live 
 
 under a polity accommodated to oligarchical interests.' It makes Ii' lie difference 
 whether with Pop. we read TroXtrei^craxrt, or with Kriig. TroXir^vaovaL, as there is 
 ample authority for either fonn of expression — the latter being rather more 
 direct and definite — how they shall, instead of, in order that they may. The 
 words are paralleled exactly by ovk iTriTrjSeiws ^X^^^ v. 82, i, and KaraffTriffeLV 
 ^5 rb ^triT-qSeiov iv. 76, 4, and especially i. 144. The method and extent of the 
 Spartan 'llyefiovia is set forth by Miiller, Dor. book i. ch. ix. § 2. The Spartan 
 supremacy was exercised in expeditions of the whole confederacy. A Spartan 
 King was Generalissimo, with many of the privileges of the old Homeric 
 Chieflftin. The Spartans before a war sent round to the subordinate states an 
 order to furnish part of a contingent, the maximum of which was always a 
 determined quantity previously fixed ; but they never (like their rivals) exacted 
 a regular annual contribution independent of circumstances. On the internal 
 affairs, laws and institutions of the allied states, the confederacy had legally no 
 influence. It was, says Miiller, the only confederacy, which in the flourishing 
 times of Greece combined extensive powers with justice, and a respect for the 
 independence of its weaker members. irapaXaP<JvT€s, that this 
 
 wonl does not imply a possession acquired by force or craft may be seen, (inter 
 alia) from its use, ch. 9 c, ttjv ^aaiXdav TrapaXafietv. For the manner of ac- 
 quisition see i. 99, 96. rd KpdxKrra must be connected as an 
 accusative with i^vdrjaav, cf. i. 6 d. And so rd KpdnaTa irapa<TK€vd^€(T6ai 
 crrdXov i. 31 a, and rd dpiara irpdrTciv, v. 9, 7. Kriig. These are apparently 
 adverbial usages. The d>$ is taken by some of the old editors with rd 
 Kpdriffra ' as excellently as possible.' Bl. remarks that this sense is little appro- 
 priate, and prefers to consider wy as equivalent to drav, 'than when they once 
 most flourished.' 'This refers to the period a little before the conclusion of the 
 thirty years* treaty, when the Athenians were masters not only of the islands, 
 and the Asiatic Greek colonies, but had also united to their confederacy Boeotia 
 
3^ 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book I. 
 
 CuAP. 20.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 33 
 
 and Achaia on the continent of Greece itself.' See chap. io8. 1 1 r, 115. Arn. 
 The times of the five years' truce (ch. 1 1 .) and the battle of Coronea (ch. 13). ^ 
 dKpacAvVjsisfor d -Ke.a.o-fr. ..pd..v^..M.d<t>dur^^-'Jre.hfro.athefouut pure, 
 ^unmlnged: ^unimpaired: Eurip. has .^« dKpa.<P^^h, //.c. v. 533 I l>ut Krug 
 remrrks that the wo.d does not elsewhere occur in Attic prose Tr. ikan a. (when) 
 in former da,,. thei,M^ri.hed most nyoroH^hncith their vonM^^^^^^ 
 :^r Grote hi; a note, vol. v. p. 356, in which he contends that aOro. .n- 
 eludes both the Lacedemonians and Athenians ; because as Thuc had not said 
 U^t he Athenian empire at the beginning of the Pel. war had dnnnnshed m 
 magnitude, the comparison between two periods of it cou d not be clearly un- 
 Ztood. The contrast, he says, is between confederate (Greece be ore the war, 
 and bi ected Greece in a state of war. I cannot regard this as probable ; avro. 
 plainly belongs to the second clause introduced by 'A^^.a^o. 84 opposed to he 
 0! uJ XaJa.,6..o. ; and according to Mr. Grote's interpretatu.n, no satis- 
 factory meaning can be assigned to r^s ^v^^t^axia. d.pa.^.ofs, which is a na ural 
 expression for the Athenian league while fresh and unmipaired by desertion, 
 but Is it seems to me, would be very improperly applied as an antithesis to 
 the entire breaking up of the confederacy against Persia. 
 
 Chapter XX.-(«.) tA ji^v oiv. Most of the editors agree in obserring 
 that the opposing clause is to be found in the next ch though some consider it 
 to be iK 5^ Uv, K r. X.. and others with Kriig. Kal 6 .^Xe^o. ol.os. Very much 
 has been written about the words which follow. The difficulty seems to be 
 that whereas the construction is complete with xaXe^A 6^a as the subject of 
 LreCcra^-^d^c e,^>). xe.^Vv are added, forminga.ortofo;,,..Y.r^ 
 hv the verb To me these words seem an after- thought or qualification. Thucy- 
 dfdes was about to say the rd .aXacd are difficult to credit^but while enun- 
 ciating this, modifies it-',e^ not absolutely so, for on the uholehey are creMle^ 
 enouX but it is di^fHcult toestallish each consecutive Huh. n the cha.n of eudence 
 H therefore says, they are dijHcult to lei ie re as estaUrshed ^^ -r/"-- «/- 
 arnument consecutively, or perhaps, taking r.ar.v.a. more independently-(/#r«// 
 for a man to become a believer in them upon an unbroken ckan. ofevuln.ce-ue. if 
 a man does believe them, he must be satisfied with finding some links in the chain 
 less firndy established than others. That rr.crreOcra. should be found where Trc^rre.- 
 La. might have been expected, is not contrary to the genius of the Greek Ian- 
 2^.e See the cases collected by Matthi:e, § 535, and compare xaXeTrrjdp^acvii. 
 r xaX— ^pous elva. rpo..oX.,u. vii. 51. Bl. cites Cicero Ve. Or i. 58, ' res 
 difficiles perdi.cere,' and see particularly note on .r- .cue. ch. ly. b. Reiske 
 and Wyttenbach conjecture ,r.<rr^aat-' dl^cult to conj, rm by a stnctly consecuta^ 
 chain of proof: a very obvious correction upon which most persons would hit, 
 were the reading of the text inadmissible. Kampfer explains, >um cuivis 
 TeltLonio forte deinceps oblato credere difficile sit.' But (as T. K. A. nghtly 
 savs) kiii^ denotes reyulav succession, not fortuitous occurrence. Pop. has, not 
 verv correctly I think- 're. dijficilis creditu, etiamsi ex ord me quodque testimo- 
 nium ad rem comprobandam proferatur,' for where does etiamdproferatur 
 come from^ Kriig., with ingenuity reads Tau rt-' in each particular consecu- 
 firelv to believe from proof But I cannot help considering the expression an 
 rnaCal one, Uiougli he supports it from vii. .9, I find that Peile s transla- 
 
 tion does not materially differ from that given, and he aptly compares iii 1:5 
 rocavras ^xo^., ^po<pdcrus Kal airias d^i<rryjp.eu, aacf>,h p.h roh dKo^ova\ 
 7.u,.at u,s eu'6ra;. ibpdcap.,v-clear indeed {i.e. of such a nature that it is 
 clear) /or thm icho hear them to perceive th(U we have don€ ^V-as parallel to the 
 present case-xaX.Td 6.ra-beinr/ difficult {i.e. of such a nature that it is diffi- 
 cult) tobuild onesbeliefofthem upon a complete chain of evidence. Bl is I think 
 quite wrong, ^ Such I have found to be the .state of affairs in ancient 'times, how 
 everhardlfnt may find credit, even when establi..hed on a regular chain of proof s ' 
 (6.) A0iivatu;v yovv. Some doubt has been expressed as to the meaning of 
 the particle. It obviously is, according to its etymology (cf. ch. . e.) ^ Thfs is 
 evidenced at any rate by the case of the Athenians if by nothing else.' 
 Iir. Kal 0€o-. K. T. X. The ovk laaaiv cannot be connected with ^cav for it is 
 plainly impossible that the Athenians could have been ignorant of this fact 
 It IS better, therefore, with Kriig. to consider these words as purely parenthetical 
 v7roTo^<ravT€s, K. tX. Having had some suspicion that on that day, and just 
 as they were on the point of acting (lit. 'alongside of the matter,' vi 57) « dis- 
 closure had been made by one of their accompl ices-or, having suspected that soim 
 disclosure, dc. 8pd<ravT<is tc Kal KtvSvv.tJav. Compare the note 
 
 on uirbura, re Kivbvp.vuv iii. 53. It is clear that the phrase means, 'not to 
 risk their hves for nothing,' 'not to run the peril without having first done 
 something to make it worth while.' The words are well explained by Peile 
 'But 2cishing before they were seized, having done something, so and not other- 
 wise—if d must be so (or een), to run the risk of their lives. So in the well- 
 known prayer of Ajax— ^,/ 5^ <pd€i Kal dXeaaou-U'en kill us'—' kill us if you. 
 will: Krug. refers to the Kal before Ui>u>vTaL, iv. 98, 2, which see and cf. iwep 
 Tov dyadov rd^a tis Kal ToXfxgi aTroeav^lu. Romans v. 7. Ac«K<Jpiov 
 
 The temple of the daughters of Leos, who, according to the tradition, had been 
 sacrificed by their father during a famine, as an offering for the lives of the 
 I>eople. The temple stood in the Ceramicus within the walls.' Arn. 
 
 (c.) djiVTio-Tciv. ' A rare word,' Kriig. « I have only met with it in Soph. 
 El. V. 482, and Aratus, Biosem. 115,' Bl. ^^ ^y,,j^ Trpo<rTC0€' 
 
 «rflai— '«c«e adjungere,' sc. to the party voting— it means, therefore, 'to vote.' 
 The statement of Herod, vi. 57, to which this is supposed to refer, is 'somewhat 
 obscure. He speaks of the two senior senators who, in the absence of the 
 kings, represented them, as 50o V'^^ous ndefi^uovs, Tplrriv 5e tt^v iwvrwu. 
 Thucydides evidently understood this (if he did refer to it) to mean— 'each 
 giving two votes (sc. as the monarch's representative), and then, severally, a 
 third for themselves,' so that they would vote six times altogether. And'so 
 must we understand it, though C. F. Hermann, P. A. G. § 25. 7, Heeren and 
 Muller consider that the words quoted do not imply with certainty that each king 
 had two votes— the latter, however, admitting that Herod, probably followed 
 this, the opinion generally received in Greece, vol. ii. p. 105, note. Arnold and 
 MiiUer, Dorians (vol. ii. p. 105) state their belief that Thucyd. refers to Hel- 
 hmicus rather than Herodotus, whose work he can scarcely have read. If, says 
 Am., Herod, i. 130, refers to the revolt of the Medes against Darius Nothus 
 A.c. 409, it may be questioned whether Thucyd. had ever seen his history ; not- 
 withstanding the well-known story of his having heard it read at the Olympic 
 games. This seems correct enough, for the termination of Thucyd. exile dates ia 
 
34 
 
 KOTES OX THUCYDinES. 
 
 [nooK I. 
 
 Chap. 22.] 
 
 NOTES OX THUCYDIDES. 
 
 35 
 
 the year 40, A.c, when probably the greater part of h.8 work had been com- 
 nosed 4 ch. .3 b. Indeed Dahlmann .eems to have estabhshed tins v.ew, 
 Teh « d. The second charge of inaccuracy here brought does not certamly .„■ 
 volve the assertion that there was no such place as P.tane, for He"jd^n • »• 
 expressly says that he had been there himself ; but, as A. remarks, . demes U,at 
 thrDemusof Pitane was ever of sufficient importance to allow .ts ,nhab UnU W 
 oLpU of the national army, as in the old Greek and Koman system the ml. 
 ;rdi;isions corresponded entirely with the civil ones. N otw.thstand.ng the 
 Satof Thucyd., MuUer, l,orians. ii. p. 49. asserts that ■P.tane was of suffi- 
 cient importance io have its own gymnastic contests, and to fum.sh a ba Ubon of 
 iteown aUed Pitanates.' This he considers conHnned by the fact that Caracalha, 
 it imTtation of antiquity, composed a Xixo> lUra.dr„ of Spartans, Herod.an, .v 
 8 rd that the Tarentines who retained the memory of the mother c.ty mor^ m 
 their names of places than in their customs, had a division of the. a™.y wh.ch 
 was called Pitanates. The n.pi«Xo. Il.ra.ara. are mentioned upon a com of 
 Tarentum, MiUinger, Plate i. n. .9. Schweighauser w-ould reconc.le both histo- 
 rians by upposing that there was such a cohort levied for the occasion at the 
 battle of Platea, and commanded by Amompharetus ; but, as this was not per- 
 p ual, it had ceUd to exist in the time of Thucydides. Tliis is. however, only 
 «,at sort of hypothesis which any one can make, and besides Thuc. bol>Uy says- 
 *S- ;;2.ro .lor. 4.aXat,»pos-'«J-«»..<«*-!,/ Pop. com- 
 
 Bares (what is probably an imitation) ' vulgi indiligentiam veri, Tac. llu. iv. 
 pares (wnai p ^J^^_, ^^^^ ^ ^^^^ ,^ j„„,, . . ,4, ^.„< „„»„,^ thai pre- 
 
 sents itself.' 
 
 Chapter XXI.— («•) ^H^S- Notwithstanding the difficulty ofcomingtoany 
 satisfactory conclusion about ancient matters. TotavTa-& 8tfiX0ov. 
 
 Cseeml to understand, ' such as I hare rec<runted.' Kriig. makes d 6..X^o. 
 the object of .oM^r-, and ro.aOra the predicate-' «Aa^ J hare recounted to he 
 , udXioTo— '«« near a> can be made out, ct. 13 c. it. 
 
 ila'privousc. ,o^li.v-' v,ould not be wro,,;, ;,. /.oW,«»,' so alsojoin_jn,.r«W, 
 ' a„,l in not being more inclined to bclic'c' XoTfoTfpM".^. The prose 
 
 writers generally historians. Scholars confine the words to the prose writers 
 antecedent to Herodotus, such as Hecat=eus of Miletus Charon of Lampsacus, 
 Xanthus the Lydian, Pherecydes of Leros, and Hellanicus of Myt.lene. The 
 .tudent will find a more particular account, MuUer, //.V. Ur. Lu. ch. xvm. p. 
 ■2s8 E T With otrre ivMeaar of course repeat rurTevut. 
 fwTtthli^v' Perhaps, like our < concoct,' implies the notion of making up a 
 fictitious story. Bl. cites Dem. p. n7, ^^^o-' d>irpo<,dmov, Kal Mov, <rv,0,l,; 
 and in Latin composer, uendacia. irp,.ar f, ^f^--'«^^ " -- '" 
 
 „A«( .ma more attractive to the ear, rather than to truth: Tins double compara. 
 tive is common both in Greek and Latin, when two qualities are assigned to 
 the same subject, and it is supposed to posses, more of the first than the second. 
 This U Jelfs explanation, § 78^, f. It appears to me that the presence of the 
 second quality is only asserted by a sort of euphemism, or pohteness. In fact, 
 it is gently implied that the subject is rather deficient therem, f.ff. Herod, m. 
 65 Idrtlaraxirepaf, .o*cir,pa, '/ hare acted ^Uh more prenjntan^ than 
 .Ll,- implying here was very Uttle wisdom in the act at all. Madvig. 
 
 explanation is similar to that of Jelf (Zaf. Gr. § 307), 'A comparison of two 
 qualities which are found in the same subject in an unequal degree, is denoted 
 either by the positive with ' mar/is,' or by two comparatives. * ^milii contio 
 fuit verior quam gratior populo,' Liv. xxii. 38, which seems to me equally open 
 to the above remark. See e.g. lu ffTpar-nyoi irX^oves rj ^eXrioves, Arist. 
 ^^^'' ^01 1- avi^iktyra—' which cunmA be submitted to the test, ' or, 
 
 as Am. well gives it, 'tvhich cannot bejirored or disprored: 4\4yx€iv, it may 
 be well to remind the non-logical reader, may imply the establishment of a con- 
 clusion by indirect proof, as well as its direct refutation. Consult the logical 
 treati.se8 of Arist. and his Rhetoric. Am.'s version of iirlrb fivd. iKviv. is not so 
 good—'harinrj taken their place among fables: See note on i. 3 b, and trans. 
 'hare won their way into mythus — on dwiffTw as equal to Coare diriaTa elvai, see 
 the long note and collection of passages, iii. 65, <pi\ius /cat 01; ToXe/jiius. Com- 
 pare also i. 140, Ttts ^vfKpopas dfMadQs xw/3^(rat. 
 
 {b.) T)yr](rdp.€Vos, like the other participles, must be connected with afxapTavoi. 
 d>^ 'KoXaia. dvai—' for matters so antiquated,' i.e. 'considering they are anti- 
 quated;' the ehai is quite pleonastic, and belongs, as in ^kuu elvai., to an early 
 stage of the language. Indeed, most languages in such a stage have a tendency 
 to pleonastic usages of the verb * to be,' as may still be seen in the conversation 
 of the vulgar, cf. Jelf, § 869, 5. The words of course modify dTToxpw^rws ; ws, in 
 this case, is common enough. Cf. ovbk dSwaros ws Aa/fc5ai/i6j'a d-jrdv, iv. 84 ' a 
 pretty good speaker for a Lacedcemonian.' Numerous examples may be seen in 
 Matth. §628, 3, The Latins use 'ut' in precisely the same way. Cf. Fre- 
 quentem cultoribus, ut inter montana populum, Liv. xxi. 34. 8T)X(tf(rci. 
 
 The ellipse is to be filled up as in Herod, i. 1 74, Ai^vrj SrjXoi iuvTrjv iovaa 
 xepl^pvTOS (T. K. A.). Compare iii. 84, i) dvdpuTreia (pvais ibijXwaiv aKpaTrjs 
 dpy^s ovaa. avrwv — sc. tQv dpxaiuv. ' Vetera extoUimus, recen- 
 
 tium iucuriosi,' Tac. Ann. ii. 78. 
 
 Chapter XXII. — (a.) The statement which follows, though apparently 
 clear enough, has been the subject of much controversy. Bloomf. declares that 
 the writer, in recording speeches, brings forward no sentiment but what was 
 really spoken ; that the words only are in some cases changed, because it would 
 have been impossible to retain in the memoiy the exact expressions used on 
 each occasion; that due regard is always had to the characteristics of the 
 speaker, and that the intent of the writer was * prsestare atque conservare simu- 
 lacrum elo<iuentiae virorum clarissimorum,' Livy, xlv. 25. But this is incon- 
 sistent with the unmistakeably Thucydidaean impress to be found in every 
 speech. Perhaps the most strongly marked attempt at imitation is to be found 
 in the speech of Sthenelaidas. But this was a very short and very notorious 
 speech, and nmst have been tolerably well known. Otherwise, Athenians, Co- 
 rinthians, Boeotians, SjTacusans, and even Spartans ; Pericles, Alcibiades, and 
 Nicias, so far as the mere form of expression goes, speak very much alike ; and 
 indeed there are certain cases where it is hardly probable that Thucydides can 
 have had much positive and accurate information whereon to construct his 
 written orations. 'The speeches,' says Mtiller, 'often stand in a relation to 
 one another, which could not have been justified by existing circumstances. 
 Thus, the speech of the Corinthians, in i. 120, is a direct answer to the speech of 
 
3^ 
 
 NOTES ON TIIUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book I. 
 
 CuAP. 22.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 37 
 
 Archidamus in the Spartan assembly, and to that of Pericles at Athens, though 
 the Corinthians did not hear either of them.' Lit. Anc. Greece, p. 489. On the 
 other hand, we must not believe them to be pure fictions hke those of Livy, Taci- 
 tus, and Plutarch, and the majority of ancient historians. This extreme opinion 
 is adopted by the French translator: * lis ne sont qu'un cadre adopts pour de- 
 tacher du corps de I'ouvrage des ^vt^nements, des details de niaurs ipii Thucy- 
 dide a voulu mettre dans un plus grand jt)ur.* Thucyd. evidently obtained all 
 the information available as to what was said, and what there was occasion to 
 say, and then placing himself in the position of the speakers, he recounts it in his 
 own words, as near to the imagined original as he can. But, as has been said, he 
 does not succeed in divesting himself of his identity. Arn. illustrates by what 
 appears to me a very similar case — that, viz. of Johnson, who reproduced ela- 
 borate parliamentary debates in the Gentleman s Magazine, with no other basis 
 to go upon than the substance of the debate faithfully reported. Probably 
 these exercises contain most of the arguments used at the time, yet every one 
 would recognise them as the composition of Johnson. Peile translates : Bui aa 
 the several speakers would have appeared to me [i/xol emphatic), had I been always 
 present, to speak most to the purpose on each point that came before them. This 
 connects the ai* with id6Kovv: but he also, as Pop., suggests its being taken 
 with eiTTflv, which seems to me more probable. ' As thei/ appeared to me — when 
 writing my history — likely to have spoken, so cm at the same time to speak most to 
 the purpose.' See, for the collocation, ii. 83, 89, iii. 42, 89. Xo"Y4» 
 
 dtrov. This is in direct antithesis to to. 5' ^pya tQv -trpaxd^vruiv — * The speeches 
 that were spoken'— as opposed to ' the deeds which were done.' Pop. objects 
 that this cannot be so, since it is not the pi. Xdyois. He accordingly supposes the 
 noun to be added, in order to form one of those verbal balances on which Lob. 
 Paral. Gr. Gr. ii. p. 525, has enlarged. But this seems liypercritical. A6705, 
 * speaking' in general, may surely refer to more tlmn one 'speech.' Kriig., in 
 my judgment coiTCctly, renders ' durch Rede,' by means of speech. Cf. ii. 46, 
 60. iv avTw— sc. T<p iroXefielv. Kriig. cites avrd, i. 69. It may 
 
 be of importance to the student to observe, that Time, thus uses the cases of this 
 pronoun, i.e. without an immediate antecedent. Cf. iii. 84. 8iajiVT|- 
 
 |iovcv<rai — ' * remember throughout.* i\o^ivi^—' keeping as close as 
 
 possible to the general purport of ichat was really said^^irijs ^vnTdar)s means, 
 'taken as a whole')— so has it been set forth by me.' Or, as Krug. hjis it, * So 
 have I made them speak.' 
 
 (6.) irpax6€VTa)V. 'Connect as closely as possible with iv r(p iroX^/xt^,' 
 Kriif*. ; who judiciously remarks that to. irpaxBivTa is a term of very wide com- 
 pass indeed, embracing all sorts of transactions, and even speeches. Tlierefore 
 ret. ?pya tQv xpaxd^vroiv is only a small part of irpaxG^vra. Others understand 
 it as the mere verbal balance to the clause, X67v clTroi'. It seems to me to 
 imply, if we could so express it, 'the actuality of what icas done,' * the reed acts 
 and results.' That the expression is emphatic and intensive is the opinion of 
 Hennann on Soph. Trach. v. 229, who translates, 'id quod vcrO, factum est.' 
 Compare, as an apt illustration, a passage cited by Bloomf. from Quintilian : 
 'Historia scribitur non ad actum rei pugnamque praesentem, sed ad memoriani 
 posteritiitis. ' aXXa ols. Kriig. translates, ' I thought myself bound 
 
 only to set forth partly that at which I myself was j^rcsent, partly that which, so 
 
 far as was practicable, I had with cractness informed myself of from others' — 
 lit. 'having exactly informed/ oU is accordingly governed by irapr/v; the con- 
 struction changes, and instead of nal & iwe^rfKdov, we have /cat eTre^fX^wj/ ira/ad 
 rCiv &\\(i}v. This way of accounting for the construction apparently arises from 
 an unwillingness to apply iire^cXdibv to oh Traprju ai/rd^. To me it does not seem 
 so entirely inaj)propriate — ' Carefully going over again all the ptarticvlars of 
 matters whereof I was myself an eye-witness.' * It is supposed that Thucyd. 
 served in the first seven years of the war, for in the eighth he was appointed to 
 command the Athenian fleet off the coast of Thrace.' T. K. A, from Owen. 
 
 {c.) tvvoias^ p.VT|p.i)s Ix^oi — sc. ^avrov, ' a^ each happened to be disposed in 
 rcftpect ef his recollertion of the farts, or of his gooel-will to one of the two parties. \ 
 CKaWpwv is the objective gen., as'A^T^j/ai'wi/ evvolef., vii. 57. For the gen. evvolas, 
 denoting the respect in which the action of the verb is taken, see Matth. § 367; 
 Jclf, § 528, and the long note; Sheppard's TlieojJirastus, ch. iii. p. 77. 
 
 ((/.) TO jn?| |iv6a)8€s. The junior student will observe that rb ov fjLvdQSes 
 would convey the direct and positive negation of the ])resence of a mythic ele- 
 ment — 'the fact that they contain no myths.' But t6 ^it; /xvdwSes is subjective, 
 and refers to the impression existing in the reader's mind — ' the fact that he 
 sees no myths in them, cf. ch. 14 1 e.' This I believe to be correct, but the student 
 may consult Jelf, § 745, 5. 6<roi 8^ PovXT|o-ovTat. This passage has 
 
 been characterized as 'very difficult' by the editors, and has been made the 
 subject of special criticisms by Kriiger, Melhorn, Hermann, Osiander, and 
 others. Where Thucydides, in a somewhat complicated sentence, has already 
 employed words which would be subsequently suitable to express something 
 else, sooner than fall into tautology, he avoids their repetition, without supply- 
 ing their place. In the present case, as it appears to me, either ixeWbvrujv or 
 laeadai is thus made to do double duty. Before consulting any commentator, 
 I conceived the arrangement of the whole to be, 6(toi. 5^ ^ovXriaovTaL rdv re -yevo- 
 p.ev(j}v TO caefih (Tkottuv, kuI tCjv fXiWbvrojv iroTk aWis — Kara. t6 avdpo^irelov — tolo6- 
 Tuiv Kai Trapair\r]ai(i)v iereadai [rovrovi] o)<pi\ip,a Kplveiv avra dpKOvvTus ?^ei 
 yp.01] — 'But they who shall be desirous to attain to the correct view of past 
 transactions, and of those likely at some future time {in all human probabi- 
 lity) to recur in such or similar shape, for these to rcgarel what I have written 
 as useful, will be ample reward for me.' Kara, rb dudpcjirelov is the after- 
 thought (jualification, parenthetically introduced in our author's manner. 
 Bl. Cf. Herod, i. 86, ovbiv ti fidWop is eavrov \iy03v, ij is dirav rb dvOponrrfCov; 
 and Terent. Jleaut. iii. 2. 40, ' Si quid hujus simile forte aliquando evenerit, ut 
 sunt humana.' rb (rd^ej— the clear and positive, as distinct from to p-vOuiSes, the 
 obscure and mythical view. For Tocavra Kai irapairXrjffia, cf. i. 143, and else- 
 where, with T€ Kai, i. 140, viii. 78, Pop. Cf. ' Haec atque talia.' dpKOvvTws e^et, 
 Bl. observes, occurs again, ^^sch. Choeph. v. 879, Ti^de 5' dpKovuTus ^x^i.. I 
 really do not know that examination of the numerous commentaries has much 
 modified my original view. Hermann understands thus. 'Satis er at factum, si 
 qui vel res quee gesta' sunt, accurate considerare, vel ubi futura, ut fieri solet, ean- 
 dem aut simileni formam habebunt, ut Hem judi care hunc librum voluerint.' On 
 which Poppo remarks, pieXXbvTUP tali ratione bis cogitari posse nobis non videtur. 
 The version in which he himself acquiesces is — * Quicunque autcm vedent, etin iis 
 eiuoi cvenerint, id, quod xtro e.rplorato haJbcndum sit, considerare, et in iisquw, ut 
 
 
38 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book I. 
 
 Chap. 23.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 39 
 
 sunt res humance, talia vel slmilla eventura slnt, st utiUa hcec {sc. hanc historiam) 
 judicentj satis erit factum/ which, if I understand it, does not materially differ 
 from wliat I have given. Kriig. writes ffKOirtiv again with ilxptXi^ia, and under- 
 stands fi€\\6vT(ov a second time, i.e. tuv fxe\\6vr(jjv, fiiWbvrwv t. kou tr. (aeaSai 
 — meaning, I suppose, future events about to take place in similar form, <i'C. <tr. 
 (which is at least very awkward), and understands roirrots, not iixoi, after ?^€t — 
 * fur die U'ird es {datf Werk) f/eniif/en,' for such persons my work will be satisfac- 
 tori/, Wex, a late German writer, would combine cJ0^Xt/xa Kplveiv, and make 
 Tu!i> fxcWdirruv—^ffeffSat a gen. case depending upon it, translating ' niitzliche 
 Winke zur Beartheilinuj ron Ereiynisi^en — useful hints for determltn'nf/ events; 
 but I know of no such government for the genitive. KTfj(ia h AcC. 
 
 These word.s hav'e acquired a world-wide celebrity in the sense of 'an iverl acting 
 possession.' It may perhaps disappoint the student to hear that it is question- 
 able whether they can bear such an interpretation. Miiller {Lit. Anc. Greece, 
 p. 487) says — 'Thucydides for such persons (sc. 6<toi PovXrjaoirrai) bequeathes 
 his book as a lasting study — it does not mean an everlasting memorial or monu- 
 ment. He opposes his work, which people were to keep by them, and read 
 over and over again, to a composition which was designed to gratify an audience 
 on one occasion only.' d-ywvio-p.a means a sort of jirize- essay, and 
 
 has reference to the ordinary musical, poetical, and rhetorical contests in which 
 compositions possessing only an ephemeral and transitory interest, were no 
 doubt often produced merely for the sake of an i-rriSci^ii. Zevort, the last French 
 translator (1853), repeating a popular opinion, writes — 'Thucydide fait ici allu- 
 S'on aHerodote, sans le nommer. II laisse rarement (?chapper I'occasion d'attaquer 
 ce grand historien, dont le g^nie poetique et brillant contrastait avec Tesprit 
 rigoureux et positif de Thucydide.' But Dahlmann, the biographer of Hero- 
 dotus, has shown that there is no ground whatever for Lucian's story about 
 Herodotus reciting his History at Ol^mpia, and consequently very small reason 
 to suppose that Thucydides was acquainted with it (cf. ch. 10, c). At any 
 rate these covert and disingenuous sneers at a great fellow-labourer in the field 
 of historical literature are but Uttle consonant with a candid and noble mind, 
 such as was that of Thucydides. Quintilian had this passage in his eye when 
 he wrote his well known description of history, x. i, 31 : 'Historia scribitur ad 
 narrandum, non ad probandum ; totumque opus, non ad actum rei, pugnamque 
 pnesentem, sed ad memoriam posteritatis, et ingenii famam componitur.' 
 gvyKctrai, as Kriig. remarks, stands to ^vtrrid^vai in the light of a perf. pass. So 
 ^scliin. i. 125, ij^ci Kai ^rf/jos X670S rts virb tov avroO aocpiffToO ffvyKelfxevos — 
 tr. ' it has been composed and is placed before you.' 
 
 Chapter XXIII. — (a.) Svoiv. Phrynichus has hvuv eirl fiSurj^ yfviKrj^ Tiderai, 
 ovxl 8^ 8oTiKT}i, and Am. seems inclined to accept the rule. Tlie MSS. vary greatly 
 in this and other places between the two. Bek. and Dind. adopt Sveip; Pop., 
 Goll, and Kriig., Svo'iv. Consult Pop|>o's note, from which it appears that Sveiv 
 is not justly asserted by Bremi {de Corona, § 173) to have been a favourite old 
 Attic form of the genitive; that it is of very dubious authority in the 
 Tragoedians, and that it is only found in the worst MSS. of Demosthenes, 
 though most common in Plutarch and the later writers. From all this, it looks 
 like a modern form, introduced by the copyists to whom it was familiar, into 
 
 their transcripts of the older authors. The Scholiast says the two naval battles 
 were Artemisium and Salamis ; the two on land, Thermopylae and Plataea. 
 Kriig. does not understand how these can be said to have decided the war, and 
 therefore believes reference to be made to the battles of Salamis, and Plataea, 
 and the double battle at Mycale. 
 
 (6.) imh pappdpwv. None is recorded except Mycalessus vii. 29, Kriig. 
 a-^dv is added, because, though rrdXeis is the grammatical subject, 'Ad-qvaioi 
 Kai lU\oTrovv7)<noi are really supplied by the mind. Thuc. refers to Plataea, iii. 
 68, and Thyrea, iv. 5 7. Kriig. Poppo adds Mytilene, iii. 50, but this was a 
 case of dismantling rather than of entire destruction. olKT|Topas 
 
 IJirr^PaXov. Potidcea, ii. 70; ^gina, ii. 27; Scione, v. 32; Thyrea, iv. 57; 
 Pop. oih-e — Kai. Poppo remarks upon Kai thus following oCre, 
 
 that the German idiom is similar, ' noch so viele Verbannungen und Metz- 
 eleien.' The Latins also, he says, after neque have not only aut and re, but 
 also que; and upon the strength of this passage he contends for a wider appli- 
 cation of the idiom than that allowed by Matthioe, § 609. I had always referred 
 this oi'Te back to the previous one, and rendered the present clause as embraced 
 beneath the oifre, 'nor so much banishment and murder; and this I now see is 
 also Krug.'s view. 8tel rh <rTao-td?€tv. 'Ut Corcyrse, iii. 69, 81; 
 
 Megaris, iv. 74; Samos, viii. 21.' Pop. 
 
 {c.) OLKO^—' hearsay,' or mere 'tradition,' as opposed to fact. KrUg. com- 
 pares Herod, iv. 16, tcl KaTvirepde iXeye aKof}, <pas 'l<X(XTi56vai elvai rous raOra 
 X^yovTa^. ovK dirwrra Kari<m\ — ^ have not been incontrovertibly eatab- 
 
 li.^htd.' Scio-piwv. See ii. 8; iii. 87, 89; iv. 52 ; v. 45, 50; viii. 6. Pop. 
 
 ^ir^crxov. * Non occtijtabant, quae tamen explanatio verbis, c. 50, nonnihil 
 adjuvatur sed prm'olebant , ut Dion Cassius, p. 1140, eTrt TrXeioi-s 6 aeiafibs 
 iire'ixe,' Pop. The truth seems to be that i-rr^x^ is * to extend over,' and that Time 
 and Place are after it, as in many other cases regarded as identical in point of 
 construction— the metaphysical basis at the bottom of both ideas coinciding— 
 but as we have 7^5 expressed here, I should not hesitate to tr. * extended over 
 the greatest amount of country,' certainly not of the habitable globe, as has been 
 suggested. The aetafiibv rr^pi, ' on the score •/ earthquakes,' is, as Arn. says, 
 exactly equivalent to olov re ffeifffMoi, and a nominative case. 
 €KX€£4»cts. A not uncommon change of construction. See for instance i. 52, 2, 
 and supply with Pop. ovk AmffToi KaT^ffrrjaav. irapd k.t. X. 
 
 'plared along-side of,' i.e., 'compared with those recorded informer times.' 
 avxjioC. The 'Siccitates' of Caesar, Krug. lo-rt irap'ots. Jelf, 
 
 § 817, 8, and dal Kai ai, Jelf, § 817, 3- ''l o^X ^x^rra - • 'h 
 
 XouhlwStis vd<ros. Kriig. aptly illustrates this repetition of the article by Plat. 
 Govg. 502, b. tL hk hr] r? aep^vT] avr-q Kai davfiaffTT} V ttjs rpayi^Uas iroLwis. We 
 may add, t^v iwayyeXiav tt)v tovtov ravTTjv rrjv KaXrjv, and Midias, § 189, rds 
 d7ro/J^77Tou5— Ttts TOVTOV yovds. See other cases, Matth. § 277. From a com- 
 parison of these, it will, I think, appear that the article is doubled where the 
 wAter means to dwell upon, and make a great deal of the notion denoted by the 
 noun to which it is attached. \iipos ti. Tirones will remark that 
 
 /i^pos T4 is an appreciable, and therefore considerable part, like * aliquot' m 
 Latin. Cf. ii. 47 for the effect of the pestilence, and for the phrase cf. iv. 30, 
 ii. 69, iii. 89, where see note. Peile quotes Juvenal, xii. 1 10, ' Partem aliquam 
 
 ..,j::^ 
 
40 
 
 NOTES OX THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book I. 
 
 ^^}^^-' ^viirietTO—set upon them, or fell vpon them at once, properly 
 
 said of a hositile assault. 
 
 ((/.) Xvo-avTcs— sine articulo, in that they broke, or by hreallng the thirttf 
 years truce. TpiaKovTovriis. The same form occurs, i. 1 15; ii. 2. 
 
 TpiaKom-ovTiSef, i. 87; TpiaKovTa^reis, v. i a. {cf. SeKa^rrjs, v. 25); irelrriKoy. 
 Taerls, v. 32; TreurvKOurovTris, v. 27. Kriifr. For the history, see i. 115. 
 Ev^oias &\u}<nu i. 1 1 a. 7rpo^Ypai|/a irpiirov. Commentators com- 
 
 pare for the pleonasm, Tpow^fx^auTes Trpdrepov, i. 29; irpiiT^pov irpoi^cKtirTo, 
 viii. 66; ^(pSaaav TrpoKaraXa^dfTes, iii. 112 ; vplv Trpodidyvivre, i. 78. See, too' 
 Krug. on Xen. Anab. i. 4, 14. tov jii?| tT]Tfi<rai. On this genitive, se^ 
 
 Jelf, § 492, 2, and supra, ch. 4 a. irpd<|)a<riv is here 'ground,' ' occasion ;' 
 
 alrla is perhaps more properly 'an alleged cause,' but both are used with adjectives 
 that modify and exchange their meaning. Kriig. says that Schoman on Lvcus, 
 p. 181, has a note on the matter. What follows, Kriig. explains as a mixture 
 of two constructions, sc. rrju aXy^d^ardTTju Trp6<t>a<TLv tovs 'Adriualovs rryovfxai 
 ^eydXovs ycypofiipovs, and roi-s'A^T/^a/ous rryovfxai ^eydXovs yiyvopiivov^ dvay- 
 KdaaL is rb iroXe^eiv. Pop. argues that as roi's 'AOrivaiovs ryov/jiai .... 6'ri 
 fiiyaXoi yiyv6p.€vot TjvdyKaffav would be the ordinary idiom of the Greek 
 language, it is not strange to find the accusative with the infinitive {/jieydXovs 
 ytyvofxipovs dvayKdffai) substituted for its equivalent the conjunction 6ti with 
 the finite verb. At any rate, the junior student must not confound ytyvofxivovs 
 with yeyevTjfiipovs ; the latter is, 'because they had become great,' the former 
 
 * because they were growing great,' denoting that the apprehensions of the one 
 party kept pace with the aggramlizement of tlie other. d<|>av6- 
 crraTTiv \6y(a—' least openly urged in words.' l^ rh <|>avcpdv— 
 
 • brought forward into the public sight.' Compare is rb <t>avepbv aTroUures, ch. 
 6, c. ; iT^ns\Q.te' openly alleged.' alrtai €KaWpwv d<|>' iuv Krug. 
 says is for ahiai d<f>' uv eKdrepoi. It seems quite as simple to trans, the causes 
 alleged by either party, owing to which they broke the treaty and settled into the 
 war. iKaripuiv is here a true genetic case, or genitive denoting the source from 
 which the airiaL were generated. But see Jelf, § 483, 4. 
 
 Chapter XXIV.— (a. ) tJ>v'I6viov kcJXttov. 'li appears from this passage, 
 and from Herodotus, vi. 127, where Kpidanmus is said to be on the lonhin 
 gulf, that this term included in the fifth century before the Christian era, the 
 southern part of the Adriatic, as well as the sea between Italy and Greece 
 southward of the lapygian promontory, to which it was more properly 
 applied. It never seems, however, to have extended to the northern part of 
 the Adriatic which was called ' Adrias,' a name applying properly, as Muller 
 thinks, to the coast near the mouths of the Po, where the old city of Adria or 
 Hatria was situated. * Adrias' in Herodotus, i. 163, and v. 9, is the country 
 so called, and not the sea. Muller says that the eariiest niention which he has 
 found of the sea under this name occurs in Lysias, advers. JHof/iton. p. 908. 
 See Muller, FJrusker, Einleitung, iii. 4. The sea between Sicily and Greece 
 is by Thucydides called the Sicilian sea, iv. 24, 53; vi. 13. Yet even this was 
 at a later period called * Adrias,' as appears not merely from the well-known 
 passage in the Acts, xxvii. 27, where its meaning has been disputed, but also 
 from a similar passage in the life of Josephus, c. 3, where Josephus says that 
 
 Chap. 24.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 41 
 
 on his way from Jerusalem to Home he, too, was overtaken by a tempest. Karh 
 fiiffoy rbv 'kbpLav, and was picked up by a ship of Cyrene, on her way to 
 Puteoli.' Am. ^onrX^ovTi. On this use of the dative of reference, see 
 
 Jelf, § 599, I, * «'<' should say, on your right hand a« you sail in.' Epidamnus 
 was subsequently called Dyrrachium ; hence its modem name of Durazzo. 
 Kara 8i?| rhv iraXatbv vd|xov, ' Qusenam fuerint jura, quae coloniae originibus suis 
 debebant, non alienum erit paucis hoc loco perstringere. Primo igitur ii, qui 
 in coloniam mittebantur, annis et commeatu a civibus suis instruebantur de 
 publico, ut docet Libanius in argumento orationis Demosthenis, irepl tQv iv 
 Xe^povriaif}. Pneterea publica iis Diplomata debebantur, qu» diroCKia vocabant, 
 teste Hyperide in orat. Deliaca apud llarpocrat. Sed quod prajcipuum est, 
 sacra i>atria coloni secum asportabant, ignemque sacrum e penetrali urbis de- 
 promtum et accensum ; quod docet Auctor Etymolog. in UpvTaveTa : qui quidem 
 ignis si casu exstinctus esset, ex Prytaneo conditorum accendi eum oportebat. 
 Moris quoque erat, ut coloniae quotannis legatos in majorem ixitriam (sic 
 Curtius lib. 4, vertit, quara Graeci p.TjTpdiroXiv dicunt) mitterent Diis patriis 
 sacra facturos, ut testantur Polybius, cap. 114, legation um, et Cevetius, lib. 4. 
 Solenne etiani erat, ut coloniae ab originibus suis Pontifices acciperent, ut con- 
 stat ex Thucydide, i. 25, § 4, et Scholiasts ad eundem locum; quin etiara, si 
 aliquando coloni aliam coloniam alicjuo deducere vellent, moris erat, ut ducem 
 a inajore patrid postularent, ut hoc in loco docet Thucyd. ; nam Corcyraei coloni 
 erant Corinthiorum, ideoque Phalium ex Metropoli arcessebant, ut coloniae 
 Epidamnum de<lucendae dux esset. Plura hac de re vide in Valesii notis ad 
 Excerpta Polybii, p. 7. JIuds. Add. ^panheim. Dissert, ix., de Usu et Freest. 
 Numisni. p. 570, seqq.* Duk. There is little to be added to this note of 
 Duker's, except, perhaps, that the relation of a colony to a parent state was 
 considered analogous to that subsisting between children and parents, ws 
 yovfvffi -rrpbi riKva, Polyb. xii. 10, 3 ; and that war between the two was re- 
 volting to the natural instinct of the Greek mind. Let the student consult 
 for more particulars Hermann's Pol. Antiq. § 73, 74, 75. The 5?; here has 
 some slight approximation to that usage in which it is almost identical with 
 ly)dfv, i.e., when the writer does not personally vouch for his statement. Not 
 that Time. me:uis to deny it ; he only means, * as was set forth by the parties 
 themselves.' Cf. iii. 104, Karb. XPWI^^^ ^V riva, 'in accordance, as it was 
 said, with a certain oracle.' t«v d<j>* 'HpaKX^ovs, Grote ii. p. 479. 
 
 ifj.) <rTaoriavT€s €v dXXi^Xois, more usually irpbs. For the fact, see Arist. 
 Pol. v. I, 6. dirb *TroXc|xov €4>9dpT]o-av — ' Were reduced to the 
 
 lowest ebb in consequence of a war.' So both Pop. and Kriig., and I tliink cor- 
 rectly. Kriig. compares d<p' dv iKTrlirrovTes i. 1 2. GoU. takes dirb in the more 
 unusual sense of 'after,' and Am. notwithstanding his own note on d<p' &v i. 
 12, connects the dirb iroXifiov with araaiavTes. Tfjs iroXXi^s — 'the 
 
 greater part' —cL tt)v (iacnXiuis yrjv ttjj/ TroXX^f ii. 48. For other instances and 
 an account of the idiom see Matth. § 442, 2. 
 
 (c.) rd T€XcvTaia 'in derletzten zeit.' Kriig. i.e. 'at last— in the period im- 
 mediately j^rerc ding this war' — for a similar adverbial use of the words, cf. iii. 
 65. Toi)S SvvaTovs 'optimates,' — one of the recognized appellations of 
 
 the party opposed to the democracy^. See more on the sul)ject iii. 65, note b. 
 dirtXOovTcs. Haase has conjectured eiriXdovTes, but this is unnecessary — tr. 
 
42 
 
 NOTES OX THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book I. ■ chap. 25.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 43 
 
 i\T]£^ovTO. Iniperf. denoting 
 
 after their departure, or expulsion. 
 continued action. 
 
 (il. ) Tovs <|>^v'yovTas. * The exiles ' — not in a past tense because the parti- 
 ciple almost becomes a substantive. Compare such cases as ^ rUrovaa, * the 
 Afother.' And the instances given in note iii. 14, I), tuv Sta^aWdvTuv. twv 
 
 ^ap^dpuv TToXiiiov. The objective genitive. Kriig. cf. i. 32, 3, vi. 6, 3. 
 Ka06)^6}icvoi. Suppliants assumed a sitting posture ; to raise them from it was 
 equivalent to granting their prayer. See the account of Cylon's party i, 126, 
 
 Kadii^ovaiv ewi rbv j^uixbuUiTai avaffrrjaavTi^U avTOVi olTCjv'kdfjvaluiv, 
 
 K. T. X. See also iii. 75, and the case of Themistocles i. 1 36. h Ti>"Hpaiov. 
 
 On this constructio prsegnans as it is called, for e\66vT€s (s rb 'Upaiou (KaOe^ovro, 
 see Matthiae, § 578. On the goveniment of raOra, cf. Jelf, § 529, i. 
 
 Chapter XXV. — (a.) Bi<rBai. Kriig. says the metaphor is from games like 
 chess and draughts, Plato, JRep. 604, c. Tr. were at a loss how to make any 
 satL^factory arrangement, or, dispogition of the present state of affairs. 
 Tip.wp£a is nothing more than ^o-nSeia, help, as:<istanre, as below, and ch. 38, 
 58, 69. Kriig., however, does not regard it as an ordinary Attic usage. 
 €l irapd8ot€v. Jelf, § 886, d. The optative is used after an historical tense in 
 indirect interrogative sentences, when the question is to be represented as pro- 
 ceeding from some one else. 
 
 (6.) or<^wv ' ior edorCiv in this sense is principally Ionic and Thucydidajan,' 
 Kriig. who appends a large number of parallel instances. 
 
 {c.) KttTd T€ &(ia 84 KttC. See ch. 4 a 6vt€s AiroiKoi. Tlie 
 
 colonization of Corcyra by the Bacchid Chersikrates, was a lateral brancli of the 
 colonization of Syracuse. See Midler's Dorians, i. §119. oiJrc -ydp 
 
 K. T. X. As this is followed by no finite verl), we must class it among the ana- 
 coloutha so conmion to Thucydides, and supply iraprjuiXovv from the preceding 
 clause. Either Thuc. intended to add another verb and forgot it, or imagined 
 that Traprjfi^Xovv would do duty for the remaining part of the sentence, not ob- 
 serving, as Am. remarks, that the insertion of yap rendered this impossible. 
 •iravT]7vpc<ri. Tlie Olympian, Nemaean, &c., says the SchoHast. But this is a 
 specimen of their loose style of explanation. For how, as Kriig. observes, 
 could they possibly be in a position to refuse them the right of irpoibpia, e.fj. at 
 the Isthmian games ? Reference must be made to some festivals conmion to 
 both countries ; colonies sent dewpovi to attend some of the festivals in the 
 mother country. KopivGOj) avSpl irpoKaTapxt^jicvoi. The exact 
 
 meaning of this has been much disputed. It must mainly depend upon the 
 sense assigned to Karapxeffdai. Kriig. quotes from Buttmann's Lexiloyus a 
 twofold explanation, (i.) The word denotes the initiatory consecration of a 
 victim for sacrifice. So we find it, Eurip. Ale. v. 74, where it denotes the act 
 of cutting off part of the hair on the victim's head by the sword of the person 
 otficiating. So Virgil : — 
 
 ' tempora ferro 
 Summa notant pecudum.' — ^n. xii. 171. 
 
 {2.) It denotes the removal of a selected portion from a whole, as for 
 instance first fruits, for the purpose of consecrating it. This we find Od. 
 1 4> 427, irdvTo^ei/ d/)x6/ie;'os /xeX^wj/. Kriig. therefore understands it * m^art- 
 
 ing to a Corinthian the first fruits of their sacrifice, or offering, in order that he 
 may burn it upon the altar.' Others, as Bloomf., take the dative as a Latin 
 ablative— a usage which Giill. wrongly would banish from Greek. Poppo says 
 it is not unusual in the poets, J and quotes Bernh. Synt. p. 104. Matthiae, § 
 396. Add Jelf, § 608, obs. 3, and render, hcyinniny by a Corinthian man, i. e., 
 bv the agency of one, regarding the person as an instrument, not any given 
 Corinthian, but probably the chief priest, who, as the Scholiast tells us, was 
 sent from parent states to colonies, and whose duty it was to commence the 
 sacrifice by pouring a cup of wine on the head of the victim, then to sprinkle 
 it witli the sacrificial meal, and cut off the hairs from the forehead and throw 
 them into the fire. To this Pop. (who has changed his opinion) in ed. 2nda, 
 seems to incline, translating 'jxrr v ir urn Corinth i urn facientes sacrorum initium.' 
 He rejects his old rendering 'in usum viri Corinthii,' which indeed would seem 
 more appropriate to the Homeric times ; for, afterwards, the first viands of the 
 bantiuct were offered to the gods. Besides, this, as relating to many occasions, 
 would rather require Ko^iJ'^tois dvdpdffi. Compare for the word Herod, iv. 60, 
 Eurip. Ale. V. 74, and Ka.rdpx^(^OaL tQv ifpQv, Dem. in Midiam, p. 552. 
 Goll. places a stop at tCjv Upuv, thereby making Kopti/^iy dv5pi depend upon 
 5i8ovT€S TO. pofiiCofieva y^pa. wtrrrcp al diXXai diroiKCai. For these 
 
 see Miiller's Uor. vol. i. ch. vi. § 7, 8. They were mairdy Syracuse in Sicily, 
 Chalcis in yEtolia, Solium in Acarnania, Ambracia, Anactorium, Leucadia, 
 Epidamnus, and ApoUonia, the whole forming ' a strong and continuous chain 
 along the coast.' •»r€pw|>povoiivTCs. Perhaps the notion of neglect- 
 
 ing and despising arises from tlie contemptuous survey of an object^the looking 
 at it on all sides round implied in vepi. I am not, however, so sure that is the 
 meaning in the passage cited by most editors— de^o^arcD Kal TrepuppovC} rbv 
 ijXiov, Arist. Nub. v. 226 : elsewhere in this sense we find vweptppovelv. ^ The 
 Kal before xPWO-t^v is in connexion with the Kal before t^ h rbXefiov Kriig., 
 like 'tum,' and ' cum.' 6|ioia. This is classed by Jelf among those 
 
 cases where the predicative substantive does not signify a person but a thing, 
 and is then frequently joined with a subj. of different gender, sometimes^ of 
 different numl>er. A familiar instance is oi'x apTrayfibv ijyncraTO to duai Ua. 
 e<fv. Phil. ii. 6. See also Herod, vi. 100, 'Xiax'^vris f'^" ^"^^ 'Eperpt^wj/ rA 
 irpQ^ra, and similarly ix. 77. Perhaps Kriig. has overlooked these last instances 
 when he positively declares that f,vT€% ofiola cannot possibly be connected. I 
 should still, however, be inclined with him to place a stop at xpo»'o^» and connect 
 dvudfi€i 6vTe^ with dwaTibrepoi, which seems amply sanctioned by dwar^v 
 bvuafjLiu, vii. 6 ; o^io^a would then exhibit a sort of adverbial usage, and the 
 whole will mean-'a«rf at that period being as well in the power derived from 
 wealth, on a scale equal to the wealthiest Greeks, as in their preparation for the 
 war, more powerful than the Corinthians.' irpo^x"V depends upon 
 
 (7ratp6At«'oi (Kriig.), as the particip. indicates pride and self-confidence.^ The 
 double gen. after irpoei^oiKrjaLv is paralleled by vii. 34, ^m rv^ tov dvifxov 
 Airuffiv avrCiv is rb 7rAa70j. Pop. See more cases. Matth. § 380. Lob. ad 
 
 Soph. Ajax, V. 309. Jelf, § MS- '<^^ ^^^^^ ^^'^'"•' ^^P" ^""^ '"* 
 
 also Kvng.— 'schon wegen.' It is generally admitted that the Phseacians were 
 the predecessors of the Corcyraeans in the Island. See the 6th Book of the 
 Odyssey. It has however been controverted. Pop. remarks that Thuc. does 
 not express his own opinion. €^tKO<rt Kal CKarov. See Herod, vii. 
 
44 
 
 NOTES OX THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book I. 
 
 1 68, where it appears tliat sixty vessels were but a part of their fleet. They 
 had eighty triremes in tiie time of Timotheus. Isocr. 15-109. Krug. 
 
 Chapter XXVI. — (a.) With respect to the subject of this eh. Grote 
 ol)serves:— 'Tliough the Korkyreans, themselves democratically governed, 
 might have been expected to sympathise with these suppliants and their prayers, 
 yet their feeling was decidedly opposite, for it was the Epidamnian oligarchy 
 who were principally connected with Korkyra, from whence their fore- 
 fathers had emigrated, and where their family burial-places, as well as their 
 kinsmen were still to be found.' Vol. vi. p. 69. ^Trcjiirov. Pop. 
 
 remarks that in the case of verbs of 'going' and 'sending,' the imperfect fre- 
 quently stands where we might expect the aorist. He cites firXfov, ch. 29 ; 
 avrryovTo, ch. 48; dHffTeWou, vii. 20; direTrenirov, vii. 29. These cases belong 
 to the distinction noticed, Jelf, 401, 3, 4. * The aor. merely narrates the fact ; 
 if the narrator places himself, as it were, in the midst of the facts he relates, 
 and tells them as if he saw them with his own eyes, the impei-fect is used.' 
 Indeed, we finil the imperfect generally thus employed in the case of verbs, 
 which, like those above, denote a continuous action, occupying some time. 
 Tr. 'tficif proceeded to send.' ircttj— *«« fo(*f,'—i.e., by land. 
 
 They afterwards went forward by sea to Apollonia, perhaps, as Bl. suggests, 
 to avoid the danger of passing through the territory of the Taulantii. 
 'AiroXXwviav. See Herod, ix. 92; Henn. P. A. G., § 86. Ufi 
 
 Twv KepKvpaiuv \i.i\ KwXvwvrai vir' avru>v—' from fear of the Corinthians, 
 lest they be hindered by them.* KuAvuivTai is in the subjunctive rather than 
 optative after iiropevBriaav, by a sort of extension of the principle irpb dixnaroiv 
 TTouXv (Ar. Rhet.), which is seen in the praesens historicum. Kriig. remarks 
 that particular prominence is given to the main idea in the sentence by this 
 sort of repetition, and cites from Xen. IMl. ii. 3, 18, i<po^ovvTo rbv Qrjpafi^urjv 
 fiT) a-oppveirjaav irpbs avrbv ol TroXtrat. 
 
 (b.) hipia (TToXu). ' Navibus 15, id quod ex § 4 coUigitur.' Pop. 
 Kar' itn^ptCav. It was needless to dispute concerning the force of this word, 
 since it is fully explained by Arist., Met. ii. 2, 6 iirvped^wu 0atVerat Kara- 
 <f>pov€7v' ^(TTi ydp 6 iTTTjpeaapLbs ifXTToSiafibi rah ^ovXriaeaiv, ovx U-a ri at'-Ty, 
 dWa iva p.7] tKcluii). It is therefore ' rewatious and contumelious opposition for 
 the sake of opposition.' It is opposed as an exact antithetical notion to 
 irpb^ Xdpiv. Arist. Pol. iii. 16, 7. Td<|>ovs-8c. of their ancestors 
 
 buried in Corcyra. 
 
 (r.) ov8iv avTwv viriiKOvo-av. avrCJv, says Kriig., is neuter. Cf. rovro 
 vxaKovHv, i. 140. But tins seems to me to prove nothing. I should render, 
 * obeyed them in no respect/ 'listened to them not a whit.' And so in Krug.'s 
 own instance, Spa er ri <rov liu pLaWov viraKovoi ^lOKparrji, Plato, Lach'! ^. 
 ^°^' ^' aXXd. ' No single word of Latin or Enghsh will express 
 
 the force of dXXd,' Bl. There is evidently some ellipse, such as, 'Then the 
 Corcyreans (no longer hesitate), but proceed to war.' koX couples 
 
 Trpo(T\a;36vT€i with fxcrd tCov (pvydduv, Kriig. 'irpoa-Ka9il6\ktvoi^ 
 
 'sittinff down before,' not exactly equivalent to TroXiopKovvres, which denotes 
 active siege operations. Poppo remarks that the Corcyneans did not com- 
 mence a regular siege until the Epidamnians had refused to listen to any pro- 
 posals. For the accusative after the participle, Pop. compares aefimv irpocL- 
 
 Chap. 27.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 45 
 
 ^ova' "Aprefxiv, Eur. Ilec. 935. Trpoctirov — gave notice, pro- 
 
 claimed. It is hardly necessary to speak of Dilogia or Zeugma here. 
 ^pT]crd<r6ai — treat as enemies. The MSS. have the aor., but most editors say 
 the future xPV^^odai is required. The whole depends upon the question con- 
 cerning the aor. discussed, Appendix i. l(r6|JLds — 'an isthmus,' for 
 iadfxCodfs X<^pi.ov, and therefore more easily cut off by an dTroTecxtcp.bs. Cf. ch. 
 7 a. The whole is parenthetical. 
 
 Chapter XXVII. — (a.) dyycXoi 8ti — Messengers to say that. A verbal 
 noun, with a verb's construction. diroiKiav €Kif|pv<r<rov — ^jj^^' 
 
 claimed, or gave notice of a colony to Epidamnus, that any one who liked might 
 go upon the principle of equal rights.' dir. is the accusative after the verb, yet 
 ievai follows the verb also. For a similar double construction, Kriig. refers to 
 i. 50, I. The article r^ I should explain as above, ' upon the principle of In 
 the common fonnula, says Kriig., bixoiq. refers to quality, and tarj to quantity^ 
 the latter being the antithesis to the idea conveyed by irXeove^ia. There is 
 some doubt as to the persons among whom the equality was to subsist. It 
 would not be necessary to specify that the colonists should be equal among 
 themselves, for this would seem to follow as a matter of course. This is, 
 however, Arnold's view. It api)ear8, too, that equality with those at home 
 was a generally admitted principle, cf. ch. 34, eKTrifxirovTaL iirl n^ b/j.oioL 
 Toh Xdiro/xivois ehai. As this, then, seems to have been a special case, 
 equality with the |)revious Epidamnian colonists is probably the thing meant. 
 ^6A.0L .... PovXcTtti. Remark the union of the two moods. The first sup- 
 poses a possible case, the second something following actually upon it. Shoidd 
 happen not to be ready to start with the rest, and yet icishes to share in the colony, — 
 i.e., in the privileges just notified. The Corinthian drachma, like the vEginetan, 
 was worth ten Attic oboli, whereas the Attic drachma was six oboli; there- 
 fore, fifty Cor. drachmae would be worth more than eighty-three Attic drachmae. 
 Head Bcickh, book i, ch. 4. Miiller, Dor. iii. 10, 12. [Uvuv Kriig. 
 
 makes to be dependent upon iK-qpvaaov, gave notice that he might stop behind. 
 Those, however, who make the preceding Uvai an epexegetical infinitive, con- 
 sider this as identical, — i.e., expressing the result of the whole sentence. 
 KaTapdXXovTCs and KarapdXXciv — paid down the money; not a mere deposit, 
 but equivalent to €ktLvovt€S. Kriig. quotes elKOffi rdXavra Kpivas tovs Kopivdiovs 
 Kara^aXflv, Plut, Themist. 24. 
 
 {b.) Hermann, P. A. (/., § 34, observes that the relation of the Peloponnesian 
 States to Sparta was so little inconsistent with their political independence, 
 that many were at the same time heads of particular confederacies, as, for 
 instance, Elis. Xen. Jlell. iii. i, 23. Those who were asked for support were 
 either members of the Peloponnesian confederacy, or colonies of Corinth. 
 IlaXfis in Cephallenia. Miiller remarks, ' Herodotus, ix. 28, does not afford any 
 reason for supposing that Pale was a Corinthian colony ; yet both here and in 
 Thuc. i. 27, it appears as closely united with Corinth,' vol. i. p. 130, note. 
 Arguments respecting the origin of colonies are frequently drawn from coins. 
 But these are sometimes fallacious, for, as Miiller says, 'Barbarous tow^ns fre- 
 quently adopted the devices of the neighbouring Greek cities.' 
 |v|iirpoir^pL\j/€iv. The use of the future after verbs indicating wish or purpose 
 
45 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book I. 
 
 Chap. 28.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 47 
 
 is common enough, as may be seen from IVIatthiae, § 506, and from Krug.'s note, 
 who com})are3 vi. 57, 2, and many other passages. In such cases, the MSS. 
 as xp7;(rd(r^at last ch., often exhibit the aorist. 'Hie reason of this falls wHhin 
 the general discussion of the nature of that tense, vide Appendix. ' Tlie act 
 spoken of is essentially future here, inasmuch as it is contingent upon the 
 acts of the other party,' Am. ; and see Jelf, § 405, 1. 
 
 (c.) Kopiv0(wv. Proper names are often joined to avrbi without an 
 article, Krlig. Here it is 'of the Corinthians themselves,' in contradistinction 
 to allies. In vi. 32, avrCiv 'ASrjvaiuv, which Krug. renders * Athcner ohne 
 heimi^chunfj Andcrer/ it is much the same. 
 
 Chapter XXVIII.— (a.) o^s irap^apov. T. K. A. (after Owen) remarks 
 that probably the Corcyraeans began to be alarmed at the powerful confederacy 
 w hich was formed against them, and * had recourse to the mediation of the 
 Lacedaemonians and Sycionians;' qy. Sicyonians. tl tI dvTiiroi- 
 
 ovvToi. Understand ttJs 'Eiriddnvov, if they on their part make any claim to it. 
 The directa oratio, and present tense, to impart liveliness to the narrative. 
 8kKas Boiivai— as the Schol explains it, iiriTp^xpai SiKaaTTjpiit) Kal Kpidijvai, to 
 submit the matter to the arbitration of a court. Kriig. cites i. 14O, blKas twv 
 dia<popQ>y d\\v\oLS bMuaL, and the correlative Kal Ux^adat. Let the junior 
 student notice the distinction between these and Xa/i/^avf iv ZIkt^v. ' For disputes 
 between citizens of different states, there was an entirely free and equal inter- 
 course of justice. Commercium juris dandi repetendique,' MuUer, Dor. \. 
 p. 202, who also remarks in reference to this case, * Nor were disputes between 
 individual states brought before the congress of the allies, which on account of 
 the preponderance of Sparta, would have endangered their liberty, but they 
 were commonly referred to the Delphian oracle, or to arbitrators chosen by both 
 states ' Thuc. i. 28 ; v. 79 ;' Ibid. Sparta itself was sometimes chosen arbi- 
 trator, as between Elis and Lepreum. See v. 31. • Although,' says Grote, 'the 
 Korkyrseans had been unwarrantably harsh in rejecting the first supplication 
 from Epidamnus, yet in their propositions made at Corinth, right and equity 
 were on their side.' Grote, vol. i. p. 73- Kparitv. Some have 
 
 interi^reted this, ' to possess the colony,' but Kpariu) often stands independently, 
 as in Soph. Ajaj-, v. 765, ^ov\ov Kparelv p^v ^vv de^ 5* dei Kpareiy; cf. vi/cav, 
 ch. 64 b, and this sense is more proper here, as the actual possession of the colony 
 was not the matter of dispute, but certain rights in connexion with it. So, too, 
 I see, says Kriig., who renders ' obsierjen; which, however, he explains by 'dU 
 Kdonie haben.' Yet, in the instance which he quotes, Kpare^v is indei)endent, 
 
 ^iz.^ r^ <f,{,\7i Kparovarj otTiwraros tov m viKrjaai KariffTT}. Some such 
 
 word before the infin. as Ae70i' is, he says, understood. Tr., biU to whichsoever 
 party of the two it shwild be adjudged that the colony beloru/ed, that these should 
 be victors, sc. in the arbitration. «s ov |i^tov a^ols •E-n-iSdjivov— 
 
 inasmuch as, they would hare them to know, that they (the Corinthians) had 
 nothing to do with Epidamnus. This is in accordance with the well-known dis- 
 tinction made by Ehnsley (Eurip. Jlerac. 693), and denied by MatthiaB (§ 568), 
 that viz., the genitive absolute indicates a fact, the accus. absolute, some one's 
 impression about it, either acted upon tacitly, or expressed to others. 
 ovK ct«v. The note of Schweighaiiser quoted by T. K. A., points out the well- 
 
 known fact that this expression does not mean * non sivit* but rogarit, precaius 
 est. It indicates unwillingness on the part of the subject, but does not imply 
 that this feeling of unwillingness can be carried out by any exercise of his 
 power. Valckn. describes it as a milder way of saying ^ vetarit.' To me 
 it seems that the peculiar meaning very much depends upon the peculiar 
 force of the imperfect, Was not for letting, or allowing, for the real past tenses 
 of the verb do not appear to have this force, cf. ov84va ^ri eiaffe irapeKddv, * did 
 not after this permit any one else to come forward,' vi. 4I. With the present 
 idiom compare i. 126; iii. 48; Soph. Phil. v. 442. el hk fjLTJ. 
 
 Here, as elsewhere, el 5i would more accord with our own idiom, for the pij 
 does not negative the preceding verb, but is to be taken as a general negation 
 of what the former clause implies or recommends. Translate, 'for if otherwise.' 
 So the Germans, ' widrigen falls' Kriig., in his Grammar, says d 5e p.7) has 
 become a sort of fixed fonnula, and where a negative notion goes before, is 
 still used to introduce the contrary supposition, though this is of course 
 afirmatire. In the present passage, ovk etujv is this preceding negation, 
 negatived by el 6^ p-Tfj. We may add as a familiar example, Luke iv. 26. 
 CT^povs — the Athenians. twv vvv fivTwv. The members of the Pelopon- 
 
 nesian confederacy. jtdXXov is to be connected with Troie'cadat, ' rather to 
 
 make for themselves.^ So Kriig. But Poppo prefers er^pous ytiaXXo;/, ' alios potius.* 
 (b.) dird'yaxru — ' w'ithdraw the forty ships,' ch.. 26. irpoTcpov k.t.X. 
 
 — 'Bnt before this were done, it teas not fair that the others, sc. Epidamnians, 
 should be undergoing a siege, while themselves were going to law.' avTovs — 
 
 'the Corcyrceans and Corinthians.' Goll. understands it of the Corinthians 
 alone, and T. K. A. agrees with him, ' for if the Corcyreans are included, they 
 are engaged on both sides.* In this case we should have expected a<pds, and 
 the objection is absurd, for the Corcyreans must have been included, if the Co- 
 rinthians were, else it would appear that the latter went to law with them- 
 selves. CTOi|tot 8i clvai . . . <nrov8ds 8i 7roi^<ra<r9ai. At first sight 
 it is obvious to expunge the second 5^, which Pop. has accordingly done, and 
 rendered the whole ' paratos vero etiam sese esse hdc conditione fadus facere ut 
 suo utrique loco maneant.' Against this it may be urged, as Kriig, has done, 
 that no MSS. sanction the cancelling of 5^, and that the words might imply the 
 existence of other proposed conditions of peace, beside that here mentioned. 
 Krug. accordingly makes both eroTpoi elvai and (rirovddi 5^ Trotrjaaadai dependent 
 U]K>n an fXeyov, to be supplied from avriXeyov, and to this fXeyov we may at- 
 tach the force of iK^Xevov. [See note on Sheppard's Theoj^hrastus, in voce.] 
 * They professed to be ready to do so (sc. dtKd^effdai) also upon the condition of 
 both parties remaining as they icere [status quo ante], and that they would make 
 a truce so long as the arbitration continued.' Am., who would also retain the 
 5^, attempts to explain it, as though 'hoip-oi etvai coarc pL^veiv = ^TOip,oi etvai 
 pAveiv: but there is reason in the objection [T. K. A.] that although ^roLpoi, like 
 many similar words (especially Uauds) might well be followed by wore, yet the 
 insertion of dpcfxnipov^ as the subject of dvai renders that impossible here. In 
 other words, ^T0ip.6i elpi uare toOto iroietv is correct : ^Toipds dp,i. iiiffre ip,i Kal 
 a^ TovTo Troielv is not so. Peile thinks the diflficulty may be removed ' by con- 
 struing €Toipoi elvai in the same sense as id^Xeiv, and that they were ready also 
 in the terms that (i.e. to agree that) both parties shall remain as they were, and 
 
48 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book I. 
 
 Chap. 3 1.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 49 
 
 male a trure'—ioare in fact extending over the whole sentence, in which 5^ can 
 by no means be spared.' For the usage of ^roi/xoi I would compare Soph. Anthj. 
 V. 264, ^IJ.€V ^TOifjLOi Kai fivdpovs alp€i¥ x^poiv K.T. X. 
 
 Chapter XXIX.— («.) irXripcis— */«% manned' Kriig. remarks that ttXtj- 
 peis, irXvpovv, TrXr^pu/xaTa, were regular technical terms for the manning of ves- 
 sels either with marines or soldiers. -irpoiTt\iy\iavTis irpdrcpov. This is 
 usually explained as a pleonasm ; but needlessly for TrpovffXTrau is the common 
 word, technically employed for the solemn conduct of a procession, envoys, 
 &c. Kriig. says the wpo has a local not temporal force, and is found in irpoUvaiy 
 Trpoipx€<TOa.i, meaning o«/, atcay (Gennanicfe 'ent'). Cf. iii. 100, i ; i. 29, 2 ; iv. 30, 
 3; 78, i; in. I. 8t<rxiXiots. We heard of 3000, ch. 27. Probably no 
 more could be got ready in time. The Scholiast's explanation is, that through 
 contempt of the Corey ra\ans, 1000 were left behind. Not a very likely thing. 
 
 (6.) |€v|avT€S . . . ^iri<rK€va<ravTCS. Considerable doubt has been felt as to 
 what these two operations severally denote. The first, as applied to old vessels, 
 apparently not sea-worthy, umst imply the most. Indted the latter probably 
 refers merely to the smaller gear and tackling which every ship recjuired before 
 ' coming out of dock,' as we should say ; iinaKevd^dv then would correspond 
 to * rif/</iii(j andjitting out.' Cf. vii. 24. The ^ev^avTcs has been supposed to 
 indicate the operation of ' underfjinlinf with ropes, for the purpose of holding 
 the timbers together. That this was often done we know from Acts xxvii. 17, 
 Hor. Od. i. 14, 6, inter alia. And Arn<dd says that the operation was found 
 effectual with the Russian ships taken in the Tagus in 1 808. It was done. Bloom, 
 shows, by ropes from poop to prow, and not across the middle of the ship. But 
 in this case should we not have had viro^ev^avTfs ? It is much more likely that 
 reference is made to the binding and strengthening the old ships by the intro- 
 duction of fresh timbers, and the technical name for these timbers seems to have 
 been firywfiara. With this agrees the explanation quoted by Pop. from Gre- 
 gorius. Cor. ad Ilermofjenem, iii., t6 i^eu^avres ras waXalai vaOs avrl tou i^vyib- 
 /xara Kparvvavre^ [Schol. Thuc. ^vyJj/xara ai'ratj ivdevTCi] Kelrai. ^vywfiara 5^ 
 KaXovurac to. ^v\a tcl airb tov toLxov t^j vtws irpbs rbv 'irtpov diaTfivovTa toixov 
 
 ij ^vyw/xara to. |u\a to. ep-^aWo/j-em rah (xavicnv, ware tri's'tP^at rds craWSas 
 
 rds 8irip7]iJLiua^ ^ariv bre. 
 
 (c.) 8U4>6€ipav. Kriig. explains dirXovs iiroirjffap. Hence the phrase 
 means ' dimbkd," put ' hors de combat,' i. 54, no, ii. 2, 84. b\io\oyi<^ 
 
 — 'terms of capitulation.' Cf. i. 98, ii. 107. irapao-TTjo-ao-eat— 
 
 me&nhig ' to make a person come and stand beside you' — naturally passes into 
 the sense of subdue, reduce. Pop. adds, * Supple avTrjv ne tovs post Epidamn. 
 transponendum existimes, quae est suspicio Kruegeri.' ^tnfjXvSas — 
 
 * tfie new comers,' called ^ivoi in ch. 26. In tlie next chapter they are mentioned 
 as oi &\\oi, who were murdered contrary to the terms of the capitulation. 
 8T|o-avTas (ixtvv— having bound to keep, i.e. 'to keep in bonds.' The idiom is 
 common enough; the verb ^x^*** denotes continuance down to the present 
 moment of the action denoted by the participle. See next ch. and ch. 38. 6. 
 iraptt iroXw. Mr. Riddle has an excellent note explaining the usages of vapd, 
 Terminalia ii. irapd signifies juxtaposition, and with the accusative motion 
 terminating in juxtaposition. The ordinary meaning holds good here; the dif- 
 
 ficulty must be thrown upon the sxibject joined to it brachylogically, ' They 
 conquered so as to attain to a great distance from their adversaries.' So vi. 37, 
 Trapd TOffovTov yiyvuiaKU, ' I go to the length of thinking— or so far from the sup- 
 jmition of my opponents as to think.' vii. 71, vap' dXlyov ^ hU(}>€vyov ^ OLirbX- 
 \vvTo— ' as far as a little from perish ing — as far as a little from escaping. ' viii. 
 76, 7r6\£S . . . i] trap' eXdxKTTou di} T/Xde t6 'Adrjvaiwv Kpdros d(piXecdaL, 'a city 
 which attained to a very little distance from taking away;' and similarly iii. 39, 
 where see note on that disputed passage. 
 
 Chapter XXX. — (a.) AcvKijifiTi. Wliat the Italians call Cap. Bianco, 
 and the Greeks, retaining the old name, Lerkimo, or Alefkimo. The latter is, 
 however, according to Leake, eight miles to the northward, Poppo. It is 'a, 
 low cape advancing into the Channel at Corfu.' 
 
 (6.) Iir* oUov—' homeward.' With the gen. in the direction of an object; 
 with an accusat. quite up to an object. As the latter would be the motion put 
 into practice by an attacking enemy, iirl with an accusative is generally said to 
 denote hostile intent. Instances are innumerable. rfjs viis ^tciiov. 
 
 Partitive genitive, ' ravaged some of the land.' 
 
 {r.) TOV xp<Jvov rhv irXciorrov. Five or six months. Tlie battle occurred 
 in the spring of 01. 86. 2, B.C. 434; Kriig.; Others, B.C. 435. ^iy^pi. 
 
 The final iota is not elided before a vowel in Thucyd. Cf. Lob. ad Phryn. 
 V' i.^- ircpiiovTi Tui 0^p€i. The reading of most MSS. is wepidPTi ry 
 
 Bipei, which is usually rendered superante adhuc a'state. Arnold objects that 
 e^pd ' is not used absolutely as if it were d^povs, but expresses the time at 
 which the thing was done; and irepidvTi rep d^pei cannot signify reliqud astatic 
 parte, as Hjuick and Poppo translate it, for then it should be either r^J wepidm-i 
 TOV depovi or rtp Oipu ry irepidvTi. This may be true ; but why may not the 
 words mean, summer still being left— i.e. some of it still remaining o?-fr— like 
 IK>rtion of a stock not yet consumed. Still Refske's conjecture, irepLiduTi, con- 
 firmed as it is by one good MS., and sui)ported by Xen. Hellen. iii. 2. § 25, 
 iTfpubvTL TV iuiavT(^ is preferable. But it must not be rendered, with the 
 Schol., when the summer came round— i.e. at the beginning of next summer. 
 The metaphor is taken from the act of describing a circle, which, as the line 
 comes round, is more and more nearly finished. Tr. as the summer teas drawing 
 in to a close. Pop. reads TrepibvTi, but I cannot understand his proposed ver- 
 sion, 'a'state quum ilia (tota) reliqua esset.' 
 
 {d.) x€i.\uavos if[Sr\—'when it was now winter.' Thucyd. employs a twofold 
 division of the year, xft/^w" and d^pos, the limits of which were somewhat un- 
 defined. But the Xfi/Au'»' may be considered to have begun about the middle of 
 autumn or the fall of the leaf, and to have lasted until the weather in early 
 spring was fit for military operations. See lib. ii. c. i, y^pa-rrrai 8^ e^ijs cIjs 
 f/cacTTa iylyvcTo Kara 6^pos Kai x^'-IJ-'^va. 
 
 Chapter XXXI.— (a.) rhv ^viavro'v. As we interpret the preceding ch. 
 tliis year will be either B.C. 434 or 433, or, as Pop. says, from the summer of 
 434 to that of 433. ipY^ <|>^povTcs. This seems to me analogous 
 
 to xaXeTTwj l<l>€pov. The dative dpy^Q is just such a dative as in the old language 
 l^assed into an adverb. (The junior student may be reminded that the adverbial 
 forms in-j-ci-ws-ot, are dative terminations). Tr. bearing angrily the war 
 
50 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book I. 
 
 Ceap. 32.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 51 
 
 agaimt the C(yrci/rean8 — i.e. regarding it with wrathful and excited feelings. 
 The common xa^c'rtDj (pip^Lv—' mjr^ ferre," would disincline me from believing 
 with Pop. that dpy^ tpipotne^ can mean anhnose, ma(jno animi ardore et imj^tUy 
 administrantes. And it is more than doubtful that wdXefiov <p^p€Lv can stand 
 for helium gerere. Bloom, is quite right in saying that vpodvfius <f>^peiv rbv 
 v6\€iJL0v, Herod. Lx. 18, is quite another thing. Tliere the meaning is, zealously 
 to endure the labours of the war; and so too, rbv irdXenov Suvoovm-o irpodvfivt 
 otcetj'. Thuc. iv. 21. 
 
 (6.) Kal . . - . ^a-av -ydp k.t.X. . . . . ISogcv. This parenthesis is more in 
 
 the style of Herodotus than our author ; but Thucyd. repeats the same fonuula, 
 
 iii. 70, iii. 107. Neither in this case, says Rriig., nor in that of dXXA ydp, 
 
 should we place a comma after the first word. ?v<nrov8ot would naturally 
 
 govern a dative, but signifying as it does 'members of the sam^ confederacy^' it 
 
 becomes virtually a substantive, and is constructed like one. So some verba 
 
 chant^e their original character and construction, cf. note on ii. 69, dpyvpoXoyujffi, 
 
 ivp£<rK6cr0ai, N. B. mid. voice — ' procure for themselves,' as i(T€ypd<pavTo is 'got 
 
 themselves enrolled,' cf. i. 33, 3. irpfa-^tv<r6[L€vo\.. Periiaps the force of 
 
 the future is — Ucith the intent of managing the matter by an embassy* Pop. 
 
 (larger edition) conjectures irpfa^fvdfievoi. But, says Krug., perhaps irpea^eii^ 
 
 co-^at means the actual dischiu-ge of ambassjidorial functions, as aTpareveadat 
 
 does with reference to those of a soldier, and TroXiTeveffdai those of a citizen. 
 
 I sup{>ose he means that the present would not be used unless to describe 
 
 ambassadors in discharge of some actual duty. Whereas here we have merely 
 
 the general mention of the office in which they apj»eared. dir* 
 
 avTwv tvpia-KtcrQai. By contrasting this with iK ai>r^s JleXon-ovvifjffov at the 
 
 beo'innirif of the chapter, it will be seen that in such cases dir6 denotes a much 
 
 less intimate relation with the object spoken of than is implied by iK. For 
 
 d-Trd is simply 'coming away from a thing'— ^/e properly 'coming out of, and 
 
 being derived from it.' Hence the former is used where there is uncertainty, 
 
 the latter where there is none, as in a somewhat curious passage, Eurip. 
 
 Hipji. v. 759, 60. 
 
 ij yap air' dfjupor^pojv, ^ 
 
 KpTjcrias iK yds dvaopvLS iirrara, 
 
 which is translated — *vel enim ab utrilque parte, vel certe c Cretii proficiscena.' 
 Cf. note i. 128. 
 
 Chapter XXXII.— («.) irpov<|)€iXopL<vTis. It is perhaps hardly necessary to 
 consider that there is any Zeugma iu the construction of this participle, though 
 it has a slightly different application to the two nouns — uhcn neither benefit iwr 
 alliance is previously oicing to them, i.e. when they have done nothing upoD 
 which to found a claim for a return of favours, or for alliance. Cf. Herod, v. 
 83, i] ix^PV V rpoo4>€iXop.iv7} ii 'AdT)vaiovi. This example might perhaps 
 induce us to write the word without a Crasis. But Kriig. shows that in Attic 
 Greek, the cases where Crasis does not take place, are occasioned by the fact 
 that the simple verb V>egins with an aspirate, as in Trpoopdv, vpoi^w. 
 udXtcrra jjl^v and cl 84 p.^ denote, as usual, the best and most desirable course, 
 and what is next best — should make it appear that they ash what is even exji*' 
 dient, bat failing this, that they ask at least v:1iat is not iyrcjitdid^d. 
 
 &va8i8d{ai. The preposition conveys the notion of going back. Hence in such 
 cases it seems to mean to Cjcplain from first principles — i. e. fully and satisfactorily. 
 X<Sif tv. This of course may be rendered two ways — thai they (the speakers) 
 viill retain a lasting sense of tlie obligation. In favour of this it may Ije said 
 that ^^ovaiv in this case retains the same subject as biovrai. Or again — that they 
 (those addressed) mil have the gratitude felt toicards them an everlasting possession. 
 This seems to give a better and more usual sense to ^i^acov, cf. iii. 37 b, note. 
 
 (b.) €\vpa irapiiio-Qai—gct these points clearly established for you — i.e. by owr 
 explanations. This is one of the cases where the Germans, by the use of the 
 auxiliary verb lasscn, come nearer to an exact expression of the force of the 
 middle voice than we can do. rerv\7]Kf k. t. X. Translate — 'now ii 
 
 has come to j^fiss that the selfsame practice is both in respect of you (i.e. as it 
 must seem to you) so far as regards our request inconsistent, and as concei'us ov/r 
 awn interests at tlie present crisis incrpcdient.' The awkwardness arises from the 
 apparent tautology of irpbs v/xds and ^s xp^iav. But there is a distinction be- 
 tween the use of the prepositions, though a somewhat subtle one. They are 
 often found interchanged in MSS. A case occurs in Theophrastus [ch. iL p. 
 64 ed. Sheppard] where I have quoted eis 4>w/c^as ws Tpbs av/jL/xaxovs iTroperjero, 
 observing that here cts seems to mean turning the eyes iu the direction of the 
 object, while vpbs gives a notion of some dependence placed upmi, (>r aid ccpccted 
 from it. In general tenns we may say that eh denotes the more vague and 
 abstract relation, vpbs the more positive and practical connexion. I find that 
 Peile's notion coincides with this. He transUtes irpbs vfxds, ' apud vos,* H 
 Xpeiap, quod attinet ad. lie says is ttjv t6Xiv — 'urbem versus ' expresses motion 
 in tlie direction of, or towards tlve City, thougli the moving body may not 
 actually enter it. But irpbs tt)v ttoXlv, oaI urbtm, can only mean motion continued 
 uitto the city. He also calls, attention to St. John i. i. It is, I think, clear, that 
 rpbs rbv Qibv denotes a much more intimate relation than is rbv Qebv. . . . Cf. ch. 
 102, ^vfjL/xaxta-v irpbs avrovs. See Soph. Ajax, v. 10 18, irpbs ovbiv is ipiv dv/xovfievos. 
 
 (c.) ircpUcmiKev 4>aivo|i^VT] — * has come round to approve itself, ' or 'turned out 
 tmdently to be.' This seems antithetical to TervxvKe d^v/xipopov {6v), and this 
 may cause the construction witli a participle of which Kriig. says he knows no 
 other instance except the imitation in Dionysius Arch. vi. 43. irepUeT-qnep 
 il SoKovaa rjiiQu irpbvoLa iUq. irpbs cKdrepov p-epos direxOeiap (fyepop.tvrj. But see 
 note on Tvxbvruv, ch. 120. <ro><j>po(rvvi] denotes 'quietude,' a re- 
 
 tiring and modest spirit, as distinct from a forward and presuming one. It is, 
 says Kriig. , dirpay/xojvvi} as distinct from iroXvirpay/xoa^iUTj. 
 
 (d. ) Kara |JLovas. This is one of the fonimlai where Kriig. thinks fioipas was 
 originally supplied by the mind, \Uyas 6 k£v8vvos. Probably this 
 
 is the danger to Athens herself, which they proceed to enlarge ui)on by way of 
 argument, ch. 33 and 36. |ii?| pcrd KaK^as, 86^t]s St pdXXov dp-aprC^ 
 
 It is (luite plain that to take these words in the common grammatical way 
 with ToXfiwpiev, makes nonsense. Tliey Ijave therefore veiy generally been con- 
 nected with dirpayfioavvt] only — 'a quietude not associated with anything vicious, 
 but ratJtcr originating in an error of Judgment.' This I always thought was to 
 put a grciit strain upon the collocation. Surely Thucyd. would have made 
 some combination with the article, e.g. -tq /xtj p-erd Kadas dirpaypxHTuvrj k. t.\. 
 I have therefore ever translated the words as generally modifying the whol^ 
 
5^ 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [IJOOK I. 
 
 CllAP. 34.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 53 
 
 Btatement— MhcZ iliere is excuse for m, if in a rase where there was no ill inten- 
 tion, but where we were rather iniuenced by an error of policij, we now venture to 
 act in direct contradiction to our former quietude,' or, we may say, ' icithout 
 any sinister intention now, but owing to a previous error of judgment; as how- 
 ever it was not their present, but their previous conduct which was regarded 
 with so much suspicion, I prefer the former. This, which was certuirdy quite an 
 independent view, is confirmed by Kriig., who has— '?/ wc, not from malice, 
 but rather from a defective judgment ;' adding that the defective judgment is 
 not connected with the present application for aid, but with their previous 
 isolation. Foppo's interpretation is slightly different. It is reasonable for ns to 
 contradict our former practice, if we do it, not for any sinister object^ but because 
 we hare been deceived in our ej'pectations^ makifig bb^ris d/xapr^g, equivalent to 
 6tl U^v^ T]ti6.pToixev. 
 
 Chapter XXXIIT.— («. ) f| gwrvx^a rfjs TjjicWpas XP«fas- * The conjuncfvre 
 of our refluent," sc, with the existing circumstances. For ^vvrvx^o. Krug. refers 
 to iii. 82, :. I 12, 5 ; V. II, 3 ; vi. 54^ i- KaTaW|o-€o-0€. The old 
 
 reading KOLTad-ncde is, aa Am. says, barbarous. Tliere can be but little doubt 
 tliat this trifling correction ought to be accepted, first because rroiri<T€<xee 
 has gone before, and secondly because tis hv catching the transcriber's eye might 
 so readily have made him hesitate about writing the future indicative. We 
 must understand the verb again with ws &v, so that the whole will be Karadi)- 
 ffcffde u?s Slv fxaXiffTa KaTddoiaSe—' Ye will store vp as much as you possibly can 
 
 store up.' 
 
 (6.) ris cvirpo^ta crrraviwrtpa, cl. The absence of the conjunction i} is 
 variously accounted for. lV»p. refers to Matthite, § 450, and Hermann ad 
 Eurip. Ale. V. 890, tL yap dv8pl KaKOv pifi^op, afiapTuv Tnarris d\6xov ; where 
 the infinitive is as a genitive, sine articulo. The genitive of the pronoun is 
 generally expressed as in Ayani. v. 63, ri yap yvvaiKi rovrov <p4yyos ridiov Spa- 
 K€iv, dpSpa irvXas dvot^ai ; The present seems to me a somewhat simikr case, 
 Taimjs being implied. What could be more rare good fortune than if, dc, is 
 of course the regular way of speaking. Bu.t expressing ourselves less accu- 
 rately we might say, What piece of good fortune could be more rare! if the very 
 power presented itself, cOc, or, inverting the expression, * // the very ]i0wer 
 which we wanted j/resented itself voluntarily, what piece of good fortune conld 
 he more rare ?' H tovs itoXXovs apcT^v — * bringing with it in the 
 
 eyes of the icorld (apud populum) the reputation for courage.' Such is the force 
 ofdpeTTj. Cf. with Am. ii. 45, and with Kriig. iii. 58, Soph. Phil. v. 1420, and 
 Kada, iii. 61. i. (p^peiv is is, as Pop. remarks, properly perferre at/," but 
 Tacitus has ' Fama in posteros.' But is not this renown reaching to posterity? 
 irpb troXXaiv xP1|*Atwv. Cf. Herod, i. 86, rbv dv iyu irdffi Tvpdwoiffi irpoeri- 
 firjaa /xc7d\wf x/>''7Mdrwi' ^s \6yovs iXdeiv. 6\iyois 8tj. Whether 
 
 b-q be an intensified forai of 5^, or an abbreviated foi-m of 17577, cf. ch. i b, we 
 arrive at nmch the same meaning. In the first place, it indicates that the mind 
 pauses and dwells upon some point of contrast with what has gone before : in 
 the latter, it indicates that the mind has at last reached a point upon which it 
 may pause and dwell. It therefore gives enq)ha8i8 and intensity to any word 
 with which it is combined. woWoi 5//, 'full many:' dXiyois 5t), but few indeed/ 
 Trapa-yCY^ovvat. — 'present tJiemselves before the persons to whom they apply.' 
 
 (r.) 81' ovTTtp. Here 5td with an accusative as occasionall}'^, through the 
 infuenre or agency of which. yvu>\ir]<5 a|xapTdv€t — * he misses, errs in his 
 
 judgment.' ' A metaphor from archery,' Bloomf. and T. K. A. But if this be 
 true, yvtv/j-rji is surely the object aimed at, not the instrument for reaching it ; 
 the target, not the arrow, and, therefore, 'judgment' should not be 
 spoken of as the instrument in operation. It is rather 'he fails to hit upon a 
 right judgment.' On this use of yvwfnj, as 'a right opinion,' cf. Soph. Ajax, v. 
 163, TovTojv yvivfias vpoSidaffKeiv. ^6^(a tw v|i6T€pa). The posses- 
 
 sive pronoun for the gen. of the personal, and here the objective genitive — 
 'far of ir/iirh you are the object,' so a little below is rrjv vfieripav iirix^p-qcLv. 
 iroX<[iT](r€(ovTas — * on the 'qui vice' for war.' Let the junior stud, notice these 
 verl)s desidemtive, formed from the first fut. act., by changing -w into -eiu. Cf. 
 d-rraWd^eiev, i. 95. 4; iii. 84. i ; irapabdxreuv, iv. 82. -2 ; ^v/x^daeiev, viii. 56. 
 3 ; uavfxaxwdcy, viii. 79. 3, Pop. They correspond to the Lat. verbs in -urio, 
 fonned from a supine. irpoKaToXafipdvovTas. This seems to me a 
 
 military metaphor, seizing upon us as an advanced post from which to ptrosecutc 
 their aftac': against you. Such, at least, is the force of the word, Xen. Anab. i. 
 10. 6, and ch. 57 c. 8voiv <|>6d(rai dfJidpTwo-iv — may not fail in both poinds 
 
 at once, or, that they may make sure of securing one or other of two things, either 
 to damage its, or strengthen themselves. There is some awkwardness owing to 
 the condensed fonn of the expression. Hermann {de Ellips. p. 142), has ex- 
 panded it, ij rov (pdaaai rjixas KaKtojai, ^ rov <Ttf>ds avrovs ^e^aiua-affdai. He 
 compares Soph. Elect, i ^20, ovk dv 5vo2v ^jxaprov k.t.X. Poppo's remark is 
 ' hvolv pendet ex afxiprojcnv, et (pdacai. propositum est, quia ad utrumque inci- 
 flum, ij KaKuxrai ij ^e^aLiSxraffdai pertinet, atque adjunctum habet infinitivum ut 
 iii. 82. Cf. Matt. 5^ 553,' i.e., not miss both points, viz., to secure beforehand the 
 damaging, <i'c. Kriig. takes it as we have done, d/udpTucriv (pddaai dvoip. Simi- 
 larly in TpiQv tCov ixeyiffTUv ^vfi<popu}v, d^vvefflas i} p-aXaKias ij dpieXeias, i. 122, the 
 use of the disjunctive conjunction proves that rpiQv must also be taken disjunc- 
 tively, 'one of these three misfortunes.' There is a similar passage, Dem. de 
 Cor. § 166, x^P^^ 5^ ro&rcjv duo7v xp^ip-^'-^ ov diap-apTrjaeadac. Shilleto, ad 
 locum, rightly observes that it was a mistake of the earlier commentators to 
 propose the insertion of ivbs or daripov, and adds, in an affirmative sentence we 
 nmst say, 'to fail in one of two things,' but in a negative, not to fail in both 
 things obviously implies to succeed in one or the other. 
 
 Chapter XXXIV. — (a.) jiaO^roxrav. 'This form appears to have been 
 Archaic, for it is often found in laws, as Demos. 21. 8, 94, and .(£sch. i. 12, 55. 
 It was not, however, rejected by the Attics, as maybe seen from KoXaadrjTcoffav, 
 Thuc. iii. 39, irapaXapL^aviTucav, Xen. Cyr. vii. 2, 14, Kpiviadoicav, Hell. i. 9, 
 23, and many others. It was avoided by theTragoedians,' Kriig. 
 ^Kir^linrovTai. The nominative is, of course, Attolkoi, contained in diroLKla. 
 
 {b.) TrpoKXi^d^VTcs — 'challenged to decide the matter by law.' See ch. 28. 
 [JiCTcXOciv — /o follow up — go through xcith — prosecute, cf. rifiuplais p-eTioures tovs 
 ddiKovuTas, iv. 62. Kriig. quotes also rt/iwpf^ fxeTeXBetv roi'Toi/s, -^schin. i. 12, 
 .',5. Trapd-yco-Oai —led aside from the right path by trickery. 
 
 ^K Tov cvOcos. These words seem to be opposed to dwdTri, so as to signify 
 * whether they cloke their object under any false pretence, or ivhcther they prefer 
 their request directly.* So Arnold, after Heiiman and G oiler ; and Kriig. seems 
 
54 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book I. 
 
 Chap 36.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES, 
 
 55 
 
 to coincide. But I cannot help thinking that this is negatived by the existence 
 of re after Seo/x^vois, which surely could not be employed to introduce, as they 
 Bay, an idea antithetical to dTrdrj] ; for, according to every view of re, it intro- 
 duces not what is antithetical, but what is epexegetical to that which goes 
 before. I understand it to mean — and nut forthwith at Mice {i.e. without reflec- 
 tion) render assistance to them for the askiuf/. Here the last clause Seofi^von rt 
 K. T. \. is epexegetical, as it more fully sets forth the nature and result of the 
 iLvdrig mentioned in the first. Had the antithesis, for which Pojtp. and others 
 contend, existed in the words, surely we should have had 5e, and not re. See 
 the notes, ch. 4 a ; 25 c ; iii. 5 1 d. yA\ vnrovp'yctv arc, says lU., to be taken 
 
 as a single term, expressing a single idea, as ov <pr}fj.L, and then-fore ov is not 
 required, as Poppo would insist. For this sense of iK rod evOios see Herod- 
 iL 161 (quoted in Bl. note) dir^aTi^ffav iK ttjs WeLijs, and iii. 127; ix. 37. 
 
 Chapter XXXV. — (a.) tAs AaKcSaijiovCwv <nrov8ds — 1.«. the thirty years* 
 truce (cf. i. 115). Remark the objective genitive. * Miiller {iJoriuns, i., p. 
 414) says that the defensive treaty with Corey ra engiiged in a war with its mother 
 country was, according to ancient Greek principles, wholly unlawful and un- 
 just.' T. K. A. Miiller says so of the war itself, not of a treaty with those 
 engaged in it, which is not precl'^ely the same thing. His idea of the meaning 
 of the article referred to is, that, ' states not included hi the alliance may join 
 whichever side they please, by which means they come within the treaty, and 
 the alliance guarantees their safety. But if a state already at war with another 
 state, party to the treaty {^vffTovSos) is assisted, a war of this description is like 
 one undertaken by the confederacy of the assisting state.* irpoKCV- 
 
 ffAvj\s—j)rof(red, lit. put before you for your acccjtfance. Portus tr. prase at i. 
 ctpT|Tai "yap cv (nrovSats. ' For it has been laid down in the trecUy, whatsoever 
 Grecian state is not in alliance anywhere nuiy betake itself to either of the two 
 lead in r/ parties it chooses.' The language is somewhat elliptical. Pop. expands 
 it thus, i^eivai i\de7v irap iKeivovs, trap* oTcrripov^ Slv iXOdv Twr 
 
 iriJXcwv iJTis }iT]8ajiov |vn(jLax€i— dp^o-Ki]Tai. Tl»e verb dpicKccOai is followed 
 dativo rei, e.g. i. 129, 3 ; ii. 68, 2, and occurs absolutely 5td rb fir] dpiaKeaOai, 
 V. 44 ; but does not take an infinitive after it. For arovScuj sine articulo, see 
 ch. 8 a. 
 
 (6.) eliplovo-i — * exclude J* according to Lobeck's rule. {Aja.r, 75 3^ ft/>7*^> 
 includo ; dpyoj, excludo. T. K. A. has a profound remark. The pupil, as an 
 artificial help, may observe that when it signifies to exclude, the breathing is 
 turned out, but turned in when it signifies to include. ctra. This as it 
 
 stands is either a very singular asyndeton, equal to 'quidenhn,' uhat then? shcdl 
 they,' tic, which, as Engelman says, is very suitable for the expression of indig- 
 nation, or it is an error for Kdra, or we must, with Kriig. , read el re. In this 
 case the re couples the clause to the previous el. ' 'Tis hard indeed if these shall 
 he permitted, etc. , and if they shall reyard it in the liyht of a wrmig,' Ic Tideffdal 
 Ti iv Tiui — * to place a thing in the category of another.' 
 
 (c.) ov\ Sirws KwXvToi. It is generally considered a sufficient account of 
 this idiom to say that it resembles the Latin 'non modo,' for ' non nuxlo non.* 
 But this explanation of ' non modo' has been shown by Mr. Long and others to 
 be incorrect. See Long on Cttsar. Bell. Gall. ii. 17, * quo non modo intrari 
 
 Bed ne perspici quidem posset.* The confusion, he says, arises from translating 
 •non modo,' ^not only,' whereas it means 'not so much cw,* and he renders the 
 words — ' into which there was not so much as a possibility of entering, nay not even 
 of seeing through them.' The best way of rendering the idiom seems to me to 
 be — 'not to speak of the first case' And similar is the force of oux Sttws in 
 Greek: Sttws is properly 'how,' i. e. it is TrtDs in its dependent form, the form 
 which TTws takes when it dei)ends upon some verb, expressed or understood, and 
 therefore ovx 5irws is * / say not how,' <£.'C., and we must translate such phrases 
 as the present accordingly. ' To say nothing of hindering them, you will even 
 permit,' d.'C., ovx 6'7rws ^(pvyev, d\X ovde irpeaev — ' to say nothing of running away, 
 he was not even frightened ;' and similarly without a negative in the second 
 clause, ovx 6'7rwj roj>s TroXe/xiovs irpi-^avro ol "^Wrjves, dWd Kal ttjv x^P^-^ 
 iKUKCjaav, ' To say nothing of routing the enemy, they also ravaged their territory* 
 See note on the same idiom, iii. 42. irpoo-XaPciv ir€pi<J4'€<r9at. Kriig. 
 
 rightly calls attention to the distinction between the infinitive and participle with 
 these verbs, cf. ii. 18. 3, trepuSelv avrrju TfnjdeTaav. The first states the case as a 
 conception, the second as a fact. kwXvciv tovs jiicrBo^xJpovs. The con- 
 
 jecture ni<Tdo<popias is quite unnecessary, * to put a stop to tJce mercenaries,' means, 
 of course, * to put a stop to levying them.' Kriig. quotes — olKo<p66pop yap dvSpa 
 KuXvei yvvq. Eurip. Stob. 67, 8. Ka0' 6tw Av ircurOfJTC. * Poterant 
 
 enim modice, ptjtenant clanculum, non aperte nee magnis viribus Corcyraeis 
 opitulari.' Haack. Perhaps the words are meant to suggest the practicability of 
 some clandestine aid. ^crav. It is not easy to see how Popp. can 
 
 suppose the imp. capable of meaning, 'were and stUL continue to be.' Some 
 consider that fj<Tav is inexplicable, and conjecture dai. Goll. rattier strangely 
 understands it as a sort of short caustic sneer, ' erant ? nonne etiamnum sunt V 
 a very characteristic version. Kriig., after Karapf, says the speaker refers to 
 i. 33, and renders — ' are as we have seen' — as we have said. Or might the im- 
 perfect here resemble the Eng. ' were,' for would be, tr. ' in which case our enemies 
 were the same,' cf. mfra, c. 37 c, i^rjv avrois for i^ijv Slv avroh. Cf. the Lat. 
 crat. ' Tempus erat dapibus sodales. ' irCcrns — hQVQ' ' the nuans of 
 
 producing or assuring good faith,' as in Arist. {Rhet.) it ia 'the m^ans of pro- 
 ducing conviction.' tovs fiCTacrravTas. The Corcyraeans themselves, 
 as Popp. says. But this does not much help the argument, for damage done to 
 them need not affect the Athenians : besides, in this case we should have anti- 
 cipated some word denoting to punish, rather than §\d\paL. I suspect an error. 
 Engelman explains the argument thus. The capacity of the Spartans to punish 
 us for joining you, is the surest guarantee for our remaining faithful to your 
 alliance : for if we fall off we are at once at their mercy. This is ingenious and 
 may be correct. Kriig. I see has conjectured rds fieraffT-fiaavras — i.e. 'you if 
 you reject us.' Kal vavriKiis k. t. X. Notice the collocation of the article, 
 equivalent to ^ ^vfi/JLaxia. ij didoTai, vavriKr] o!/ja — didofjiivij vavTLKT] is, of course, 
 'being proffered in tlie shape of a naval one.' cdv . . . ^X"'*'- These infini- 
 tives are governed hy5ia<pip€i understood, Haack. ; by ^vfitpipei, contained in ovx 
 ofioLa i] dXXorpiufais, which is equivalent to oi)x ofxoiojs ^v/x(pepeL. Arn. ; by KpaTiardp 
 iffTL, latent in fidXicrTa fUv. Kriig. Burgess supposes 5et has fallen out before el. 
 
 Chapter XXXVI.— (a.) -yvwro) rh ^\v 8c8tbs avTov. Most annotators 
 
5^ 
 
 ]S:OTES OX THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book I. 
 
 Chap. ^J.] 
 
 NOTES OX THUCYDIDES. 
 
 57 
 
 explain this passage, but there is no real difficulty. ' Let him understand that 
 this cautious fear of his, if backed by such strength as would accrue from our 
 alliance, is more likely to alann the enemy ; while his confidence in his security 
 as a faithful observer of the treaty, if he refuse to accept our alliance, being 
 powerless against his enemies in force is less likely to inspire them with alann.' 
 t6 8e8i6s is exactly e«iuivalent to our particii)ial substantive, and is therefore 
 well rendered by A., *his beitifj afraid.' Cf. t6 6p'yL^6ix€vov, ii. 59. 2 ; t6 dvfxov- 
 fxevov, vii. 68. i. The gist of the passage Hes in the fact that <po^ri<xov is made 
 the predicate of to 5e6t6$, a piece of false taste into which the fondness of Time, 
 for antithesis betrayed him. It would have been more worthy of the Sophists, 
 as Kriig. seems to suggest. This passage has been judiciously selected by Dr. 
 Donaldson to exhibit the difference between the use of the participle as an 
 tvofxa and as a p-qfia. ' ^v/u.<p€pot>Ta. veiddfievos, ^x^"* <po(irjaov, Se^a/j-^vov, 6u, 
 lffX^'>ovTas, and iabjxevov, are all })redicates, the two futures being e(piivalent to 
 infinitive moods of the same tense, while t6 5e5t6s and rb dapaovv are subjects, 
 or equivalent to noun substantives.' Tiiough Dr. Donaldson's nomenclature, 
 80 far as regards the terms in which he expresses predication, is open to some 
 question, few things will better repay the labour of the younger student than 
 a careful perusal of New Crafyltts, § 300 — 306. See note, ch. 49 d. 
 d8€^<rT€pov. Tlie active meaning of this, too, Kriig. ascribes to its antithetical 
 position. I certainly remember no similar insUmce, except that which he 
 quotes, dSe^s Se'os SedUvai, Plato, Sf/tnp. 198 a. 
 
 (6.) 6<rov ov irapovra—'all but 2>re8ent.' So in Latin, ' tantum nan.' Kriig. 
 quotes ii. 94. i, iv. 69. 3, v. 59. 5, viii. 26. i. jjlctol \i.€yl<rru)V 
 
 Kaipwv — ' / A- made a fr'teiid of, or an enemy in conjunction with the yrtattst op- 
 port anitias — i.e. the greatest opportunities for good or evil are involved in your 
 decision to accept or reject us. 
 
 {c.) Tfjs'lToXfas . . . irapdirXov Kcirai. The first is the objective genitive, 
 depending upon irapaTrXoiK Witli respect to irapdirXov itself, cf. Sheppard's 
 TheophrastuH, ch. iii. note on OeaTpov. 'Analysis shows that the genitive ex- 
 presses the antecedent notion from which any other notion may be conceived to 
 flow ; that this antecedent notion may have reference, as to several other things, 
 BO io locality or ptosition; that adverbs and adjectives conveying such a notion 
 take a genitive of that from which the notion arises — in reference to which, 
 that is to say, they do denote position or locality.' The note proceeds to ex- 
 amine Tliuc. iii. 92 (which see), i. 26; Hennl. vi. 116; (Edip. Tyr. v. 345; 
 IIeraclid(e v. 214, &c. Cf. note on dpxv^ 8iaK€iadai, i. 75. X.B. We have tlie 
 compound, not the simple irXoDs, as the Greeks seldom ventured upon anything 
 but coasting voyages. rb ^v0cv8c, sc. vavriKdv—' to convoy our 
 
 marine in this part of the world to those reyioms;' as irapairepLireuf, 'to convoy,' 
 is said of one who assists another in reaching his destination, so here it is meta- 
 pliorically applied to a port which materially Jisslsts vessels in the prosecution 
 of their voyage. ^paxvraru. Kriig, translates — * By the following 
 
 very brief nummary which embraces (he whole and every particular, you may learn 
 not to ffive us uj) to our enemy ;' and this seems to give the force of the colloca- 
 tion. Tois {vjiirdo-i K. T. X. is in apposition to §paxvrdT(^. 
 
 ((?.) TpCa (liv 5vTa. ' Ilepete men te Av /idd^otrc s. /id^fTc,' Pop., who sub- 
 joins * sed ne participium obstet non disceudi verum reputandi uotioue.' Yet even 
 
 then there is something extremely unnatural in the bnguage. I have re- 
 garded it as an instance of the nominativus pendens — ' thei'e being but three 
 navies,' then j)lace no full stop {as Pop.) at KopLvdiojv; and read tovtuv hi—if 1 
 say of these, &c. Kriig. supposes that the construction becomes * anakoluthisch* 
 from bringing the pikv and 5^ into stronger contrast — or would read Kopipdiuu 
 al' TwySe el . . , rd 8vo: as in fractions we have the article, for any given part 
 becomes definite. irXetoert vav<rl rats V|(i.€T^pais — * tcith your jleet 
 
 more by ours' — i.e. * increased in number by the amount of vessels which we 
 bring.' I suppose Kriig. prefers this, for he explains it in his note as the dif- 
 ferential dative like iroWi^ and dXlyi^, and quotes to?s toiovtol^ KaKoh irXeicj 
 Kapirovrai, Plat. Hep. 579, c. In his text, however, he prints vp^eripais, which 
 I cannot help thinking the true reading — ^ with your navy, which v:ill then be 
 more numerous than theirs;' or reading i]fjL€TlpaLS — 'with our united navy, 
 which,' &c. 
 
 Chapter XXXVII. — (a.) tva do-<j)aX€orT€pov irpoii^firi—^ that you, may 
 be more certainly acquainted beforehand,' Arn. ; rather, * more securely,' for d<j<pa- 
 \((TT€pov refers to security against making a slip, or being tripped up, and 
 da<pa\elav, St. Luc. i. 4 has a cognate sense. d^Coxriv, -XP'^^"^* ^^ 
 
 the first, the idea of the right, or worthiness of those who ask to receive their 
 request, is prominent. Hence it nearly is * claim.' In the second, the promi- 
 nent notion is necessity, it is accordingly 'want.' \l'^ oXoyitrroiS 
 anuartiar^t—' not reject them without having a reason to give for it.' 1 cannot 
 accept T. K. A.'s note, ' /jlt) dXcrytVrwj are to be taken together = non incon- 
 sulte,' cf. ch. 21 a. 
 
 (b.) <^(rC 8^. Kriig. reads StJ. I suppose because what follows is not a 
 statement in any way contrasted with the preceding. St^acrOai — 
 
 *as a preterite,' T. K. A. But I do not suppose Thuc. would have used the 
 same word in a future and pi-seterite sense within a few lines. Both have the 
 same genuine aorist sense, and refer to the general principle of receiving alliance 
 at all. See Appendix. cirl KaKovp-yuj. — ' for knavery,' ' mal- prac- 
 
 tices.' Cf. i, 102. ^7ri denoting the object, i.e. motive of an action, need not 
 have called for much elucidation. |v|x|iaxov — because the fewer to 
 
 share, the more booty to divide. ov8^ [idpTvpa. 'Lege ovre,* 
 
 Dobree. * This is, I think, a true correction, and greatly improves the sense of 
 the passage,' Arn. I must venture to differ. Arn. did not see that oi'Se is, 'and 
 BO not. and consequently not a witness either.' This at least i.s, I think, the mean- 
 ing, though the editors appear to overlook it. o<Jt€ TrapaKoXovvTcs 
 al<rx,vv€<r6at — not to be put to the blush by having to call others in — i.e. such as 
 would become witnesses of their knavery. It would be scarce worth while to 
 notice this, had not some (Pop.) supposed that Thuc. meant, 'to have to blush 
 for the rejection of their applirfttion ;' to which Owen and T. K. A. seem to in- 
 cline. avrdpKT] 8^<riv Ki\.pAvr\—' their city, lying in an independent 
 {i.e. requiring nothing from others) position, gives them the opportunity of being 
 rather judges in their oicn ca^e of the damage they may have done to any one, 
 than thai judges should be (as elsewhere) appointed by mutual agreement .' Or we 
 may make it irap^x^'- oirroi)s yiyveffdai diKaards, pidWov ^ Kara ^vvdrjKas Ay iyi' 
 VQVTO, instead of having Stxao-rds understood as the subject of ylypeadai. In 
 
58 
 
 NOTES OX THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book I. 
 
 Chap. 39.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 59 
 
 this case, Acari ^vvO^Ka^ will mean, jiuhjes, more than could have been the case 
 had they joined a lewjiie, accordiny to the terms of sv£h lear/ue. I had always in- 
 clined to this interpretation, and now see that Kriig. approves of it. Another 
 is adopted by Kampf, which was indeed given by Giill. in his first ed., i. e, 
 Kara ^vvO-qKas yiyveadai are tiiken in close connexion, makes them rather judges, 
 d'C. than makes them enter into the confederation. 8icL tJ> k. t. X. — 
 
 Because, with less (/oinff forth than cdl other men, they more than all others re- 
 ceive the rest of the world into their harbour, puttiuf/ in of necessity (or when com- 
 pelled to put in) from stress of iceather. The force of the various participles 
 (sine articulo) is here very delicate, and may easily be wrongly given. 
 
 (c.) K&v TOVTW K.T. X. Several MSS. read koI tovto, which also makes 
 good sense. But perhaps the other reading conies to the same thing — and 
 herein have they put forward their specious abstinence — i.e. and herein consists 
 their specious abstinence from alliance which they put forward as their defence^ 
 not namely {i.e. it is this) that they may not be conqtelled to join others in injus- 
 tice, but that they may commit injustice all by themselves, and that wherein 
 they yet the mastery they may openly employ violence, and where they escape detec- 
 tion they may secretly take advantage, and in the event of appropriatiny anything 
 may not be pmt to the blush, .so. as there would be no allies to witness the fact, of. 
 supra. I have used the words 'openly' and 'secretly,* because I beheve the 
 form of the expression implies them, rb evrrpcTris &(nrov5ov is like t6 avdpu}- 
 irdov KOfiirQdes, v. 68, and rb ^uvrjOei i^avxov, vi. 34. Pop. ovx tva k.t.\. the 
 form of expression is compressed, and this clause is to be taken in <:lose connexion 
 with AffirovSov as its exidanation — iv tp, and oD exactly answer to each other, and 
 are another illustration of the fact that where the Greeks can alter the form of 
 the second expression, they will, cf. ch. 16 a. 6X'i]irT6ripoi — 'less 
 
 within the jiower of others,' A. But i\y. ' grasj}.* i^riv — cf. supra, 
 
 c. 35 a. 
 
 Chapter XXXVIII. — (a.) d(}>€GrTd<ri — ' have stood aloof from all connexion 
 with us,' scarcely 'have revolted,' as ]). See i. 25. 8id iravros — 'from 
 
 first to last.' Kriig. has, * not in this case only,' which seems the real meaning. 
 4Kir€ji<}>0€iTi<rav. Kriig. remarks that this and similar forms occur frequently in 
 Xenophon, sometimes in the orators, never in the di-amatists. Gavjid- 
 
 |co-dai — here like the Latin 'mirari,' 'to be treated with respect.' On this and 
 similar uses of the word, see n(>te, Shepi»ard's Thcophrastus, p. 72. 'Amid the 
 various colonies planted from Corinth along the coast of Epirus, the greater 
 number acknowledged on her part an hegemony or supremacy. "NMiat extent 
 of real power and interference this acknowledgment implied, in addition to the 
 honorary dignity, we are not in a condition to say.' Grote, vol. vi. p. 67. 
 
 (6.) ov8* ^frurTpaT€vo}i€V 4Kirp«irws k.t.X. On this nmch has been written, 
 more especially as there is abundiiut MSS. authority f»>r iwiaTpaTevoifiev and 
 evtrpeww. If the words stiiud, I apprehend their meaning is, nor is it unbe- 
 coming in us to attack them (as otherwise it would have been), seeing that it is in 
 no ordinary sort of way that ice are being wrimged. If our attacking them is 
 extraordinary, it is because our provocation has been extraordinary too. But 
 Thuc. has said this somewhat awkwardly. We do not assail them unbecomingly 
 {i.e., unbecoming, as we admit it under ordinary circumstances to be) without 
 
 also being in the act of suffering extraordinary wrong from them. Under ordi- 
 nary circumstances, of course, a mother city fosters and protects its colony. 
 Peile, who prefers the opt. iTno-TpaTevoifiev, does not differ niuch in the general 
 sense. • The opt.,' he says, ' naturally f(»llows ovk 6pd' air., and, like it, follows 
 brjXov 6ti, and that we should not now be invading them, a thing that ought not 
 to be, were ice not also, ttr.' Arnold's version, ' without having received, <i:c.,' would 
 require r)bcKrifx^voi. Pop. simply has iKirpeirus ut plerumque valet ' insigniter.'' 
 Kriig. more accurately. We attack them not in so extras trdinury a way without, 
 (Lc, explaining ' extraordinary' in so far as it was a war carried on by a mother 
 against a colony. Stephens prefers evirpe-n-Qs, supposing it equivalent to 
 evirpojibirujs, ' with a good face.* i^ova-ix^ irXovrov is well explained 
 
 by Bl., The poicer, or licence of weidth, — i.e., which enables men to gratify their 
 appetites and passions. Tacit. Agric, 'expateruil fortunii tantam licentiam 
 usurpante. ' 
 
 Chapter XXXIX.— (a.) ijv. This is obviously a case where the relative 
 is to be resolved into a demonstrative and conjunction, — e.g., dXXa ravTTjv. It 
 Is governed by vpoKaXov/Jievov. Am. quotes ii. 72, 73, 74, & TrpofcaXetrat, though 
 this is perhaps, as G. objects, not precisely the same thing as the construction 
 with a noun. Kriig. more appropriately, ras (rirovbas irpoKaXovvTat, Equit. 
 V. 796. The student will do well to observe that rbv appertains to trpoKako^t- 
 pL€VQv, and that the other participles ' sine articulo' are, as usual, only accessories 
 as conditions to the predication,—* the man who from a ground of vantage 
 and security challenges you to this.' X^-yciv ti— * to say some- 
 
 thing to the purpose,' is the exact opposite to ovbev Xiyeis, 'you talk ab- 
 surdity.' rhv h t<rov . . . Ka9C<rra.vra. It is a question whether 
 • the equality between deeds and words,' or * the aiuality between the persons 
 themselves and their opponents' be meant. I incline to the former, from the 
 fact that Thuc. is so partial to this particular antithesis. Pop. consi.lers that 
 the introduction of oixoLojs is a sufficient argument against this view. But may 
 it not be the sort of pleonasm not unusual in such familiar phrases. ' Their 
 acts all the same as their words,' because it was the acts more particularly 
 that the si)eaker had in his thoughts, and meant to say should correspond 
 to {bfiota eti/at) the words. Every one laughs at the negro's saying, * CiEsar 
 and Pompey are very like, but specially Pompey,' yet there is a meaning 
 at the bottom of it. The second recalls the first to recollection more than 
 vice versd. hiaytav iUa-Qai. Here again it is doubted whether a 
 contest at law, or one by arms is meant. Pop. decides in favour of the latter, 
 and with reason, since it seems to be explained by ov irplv iroXiopKdv. 
 
 (b.) iroCv with the infinitive is usually employed in affirmations; it does, 
 however, occur in negations with the usage of a preposition, Thuc. 1. Ob; n. 5 ; 
 vii. 50 ; Kriig. The difference between irplv iroXiopKe'iv and irpiv iTrdXiopKOvv 
 t6 x^P^ov, concerning which usages some discussion has taken place, appears 
 to me simply the difference between a general, or generic statement, and a 
 special one respecting a fact. The first is, before besieging the place, before pro- 
 ceeding to such an act as besieging the place; the second, before they besieged^ the 
 place, before they did this definite act of besieging the place. This principle is, I 
 believe, correct, and of wider application, cf. wplv ia^alveiv, said of that 
 
6o 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book I. 
 
 Chap. 40.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 61 
 
 which never hecame a fact, ii. 67. 8ia<|)<Jpovs ^vras is connected 
 
 of course with cc^as, but Kriig. considers that 01' dia<p6povs agreeing with vfxas 
 would be much more appropriate. 
 
 ('•) t(Jt€ irpoo-icvai— 'V/<m to come for aUlance* It is said that refer- 
 ence is made to the revolt of Samoa, but the whole may be general and 
 indefinite. dTroYcvop.cvot — 'harhuj had no jmrt in their ilelin- 
 
 qucncics.'' Kriig. quotes airor^i'^viaeaL tt)^ P-o-xn^y Herod, ix. 69. 
 47KXiip.dTwv K.T.X.. Even Bloomf. has in his last edition given up the 
 autlienticity of these words. "We may suppose them to have crept in from a 
 summary of the arguments attached in the margin, or to be, as Ar. suggests, a 
 quotati»»n from some other author appended by the copyist in the way of illus- 
 tration. Tlieir antiquity is proved by the imitation cited from Die Ca.s.sius, 
 xli. 30. It is difficult to make anything of fxbvuiv. If the whole have any 
 meaning, it must run thus,— irdXat 8^ k.t. X. No, but not icithout hariug loiuj 
 ago made you partners in their poicer, ought they noic to make you partners in its 
 results: whereas, if their faults (the matters laid to their charge) are the only 
 things in ichich you had no share, then (oOrw) ought you not to share in the conse- 
 quences. On KOLViba aura's, see Elms, ad Med. v. 793. * Koivuaai et Koivu:aa<T6ai 
 diversa sunt, illudr<?»i, aliquam cum aliis communicare, hoc, rei al icu jus part iceps 
 fieri significat.' He does not add, as he might have done, that this difference 
 flows directly from the nature of the middle voice, and may be illustrated by 
 numberless other cases. Mr. Riddle {Terminal ia ii.) interprets /x6vwv apart 
 from the consequences, the offences si mpl y, and quotes Soph. El. 153, o\^toi aol fiovvqi, 
 Hkvov, &xo^ e<pdvr} PpotQv, and Antig. v. 308, ovx v/xiv AtSrji fiovuos dpKiaei. 
 
 Ch.vpter XL. — (a.) ipx6}if9a. — ' we come' = ' we are come,' by the rhetorical 
 use of the present. T. K. A. But it seems to me there is a difference between 
 iJKOfieu and ipxdfxeda, and that the latter means 'you see us now coming 
 forward.' Such a scholar as Dr. Bloomfield ougiit not to write in so loose a 
 style as he does here, 'epxbfieda. -Present for preterite,' as often in ' tjku/ 
 since, as every one knows, it is because r/Kw is derived from a prajterite, that it 
 contains a pneterite notion, or the notion of a completed action, tJ/cw implying 
 the result of a previous ' coming.' 
 
 (6.) cl €l'pTiTai, hke 'si' with the indicative, assumes the hypothesis, if, as 
 must be admitted, it is specified. ^ovXtrai is employed rather than 
 
 dv povXrjrai, owing to that tendency towards vivacity of narrative in the Greek 
 writers which induces them to employ the e.xjict words of the persons or docu- 
 ment to which they refer. See 51 a. aXX* ficrris |xf| . . . dvT* 
 €lp^VT]s iroCiio-ci. The difficulties which have been felt about this passage will 
 best be understood from the remarks of Peile and Aniold which follow. The 
 first says, I agree with Baver in thinking that the fonner /trj is to be taken, 
 not with dTro<TT€p<dy, as most commentators have supposed, but with Sdrai, and 
 that not merely on account of the 6(ttis firj iroi-qaeL that follows, but because, in 
 fact, it cannot be taken otherwi.se. Since in the absolute predication, or in 
 Matthiie's words, the definite denial, of not fraudulently withdrawing himself 
 from another, ovk and not ait; would be required. 'Oo-ris ht) implying * in every 
 case that a man shall not,' virtually expresses an excepted case; and it is thus 
 that I understand the passage. ' The agreement does not ejctend to those who go 
 
 to the prejudice of one of the parties, but is to be understood with this proviso 
 always, thai a man is not fraudulently to separaie himself from another, and so 
 require protection, provided also that to those who receive him, he shall not, if they 
 are wise, occasion war in place of peace.' To this I should be inclined to reply 
 tliat 6<rTi$ fxT] diro<TTepu}v is not a case of 'absolute predication,' or 'definite 
 denial;' it suggests an hypothetical case, and does not describe a definite indi- 
 vidual. It means * in the case of a man being found to do so,' and being in fact 
 equivalent to d ris fir}, is therefore properly followed by fxr) and not ovk. Mat- 
 thire's idea is, that where the relative refers to a definite person of whom some- 
 tliing definite is denied, we have 6<ttis ov, but when to indefinite persons conceived 
 of collectively by the mind, where it may be in fact rendered by siquis, 6(xtls 
 /iTj is required, cf. ch. 118. This is equivalent to the explanation above given, 
 and therefore forms no impediment to the more obvious way of taking the 
 passage. The treaty is framed, not for the benefit of those who betake themselves 
 to an alliance for the damage of others; but for such as, icithout depriving others 
 of tlie benefit of their aid, are in want of security; and for such as will not 
 turn peace into war to those who receive them, if they behave themselves, or as- 
 suming that they act with discretion (cf. supra el etpryrai) sc. oi Se^dfievoi, 
 This somewhat strange sense of dxoaTepuv avrov AWov is amply supported by 
 Kriiger's references, vop-i^uv Siroaa 6in<T6ev iroiriaaLTO idvq -jravra dTroaTep-qaeiv 
 /SactX^ws, Xen. Hell. iv. i, 41. <pv\aKr}v Xeppovrjcrov rrjs 7r6\eci)s diroaTepelv, 
 Dem. xxiii. 3. I have ventured to give a version which seems to make el 
 a<j}<Ppovov(Ti intelligible. Arnohl, however (as I have hinted), Dale, and others, 
 cannot understand it, as it occurs. ' There is a confusion in the expression, 
 and the words et ffuxppovovai have really nothing to do with the sentence as it 
 is actually expressed, which is suggested, as it were parenthetically, to the 
 writer's mind, but which he did not set down in words. If written at length, 
 it would thus run : — * The benefit of the treaty was intended for such only as should 
 iK^ involve those, whb'receive them, in war, as, if you are wise, you will take care 
 tiiat these men do not involve you.' A. 
 
 (c.) d|ivv6<r6ai tovtovs. Kriig. makes rj/xdi sub. the subject of the verb, 
 and TOVTOVi object, * punish these, not without involving you.* Popp. and others 
 make tovtovs the subject, and d/jivveffdai the passive infin., which is more ob- 
 vious, though the passive occurs less often than the med. voice. 
 SCKaioC -y'^iTTC. See Jelf, § 677. |i^v y€. Kriig. says, apparently 
 
 for fiiv ydp, as ye generally stands to attract attention to some particular which 
 illustrates or confirms what has gone before. T. K. A. quotes a good remark of 
 Buttman's on the distinction between the two phrases. ' Cum quis uno argu- 
 mento vel exemplo aliquid probat, potest hoc ut sufficiens adferre ; quod fit 
 particulS, ydp ; potest etiam significare plura quidem posse desiderari, sed hoc 
 unum satis grave esse, quod fit addito ye, ' certe,' 'saltern,^ ' Midias, p. 46. 
 avaKta)XT| is the holding back of the hand, and not striking, hence it means a 
 mere temporary truce. Kriig. remarks that except in Thuc. it is rare in Attic 
 prose. For 5td * in a state of,' See Jelf, § 627. i. 3, b. Am. thus states the 
 rationale of the matter — * 5id denotes the circumstances accompanying the 
 action or situation spoken of ; or, more generally, whatever is interposed between 
 the beginning or end of an action.' To me it seems that as physically 5id would 
 denote the course of the diameter of any spherical body ; so metaphysically it 
 
62 
 
 NOTES ON THtCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book L 
 
 Chap. 42.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 63 
 
 denotes what is as it were central to certain surrounding circumstances, which, 
 80 to speak, envelope it. So Am.'s examples. 5t' 6xXou ehai — *to be enveloped 
 by confusion ;' 5t' deipdXelas — * to be enveloped in security ;* 5*' (x^pas y^veaOai 
 — *to get into the middle of a (juarrel ;' and similarly, Std fidxv^ ^pxfc^ai, ii 
 II. 2, and cf. oiimino, ch. 42 c, 5td kiv^vvujv. See note 17. a. 
 
 (d.) €l XP'^I ttVTois djivvciv — 'oh the question whether it he erpcdlent to aid 
 them* See supra, note on /3o>''XeTai, ch, 27 a, and 40 b. 4>av€tTai -Ydp d k.t.X. 
 
 ' There trill he found quite as many amontj your allies who will cmne over to us,' 
 Jelf, § 817, 4. avTov Tiva — every man fur himself, cf. i. 43, and vi. 77, 
 
 rhv v<JjJL0V — you will he laying down your law arjainst your own selves, <£r. ir\ 
 in this sense, as in Dem. 52, i, i(t> vfuy aiTo?s iff^ade rb idos rovro KareaKfva- 
 ie6T€i (quoted by Kriig.) is the exact opposite to r/xij, cum genitivo, irpbi tQv 
 ix6vTU}v <Poi(i€ rbv vdfiov tiOtjs. Eurip. Ale. * It seemed established as practical 
 international law, that neither of these two great aggregate Ixxlies should inter- 
 meddle with the other, and that each should restrain or punish its own disobe* 
 dient members.' Grote, vol vi. p. 66, 
 
 Chapter XLI. — (a.) Ai.KcnM[Lara—* picas of justice,* See Sheppard's 
 Theuphrastus, p. 199, note upon ws TroXXd ira/)aXeXoiir6rt rCov SiKaLup — having 
 omitted many of the pleas which he miijht have urycd. Kriig. (quotes v. 97 ; vi 
 79, 80, and other authors. Tlie idea expressed by the words is evidently meant 
 to be contrasted with a^lu)ci.v xaptros, which might be rendered — *a claim upon 
 your fjratitude.' irp^s vftds— * to ur>je in your presence.* 
 
 &<rr 4irixpi]<r0au Tlie meaning of this word has been disputed. The only 
 passage with which a comparison has been made is ^v 5e 71^1^ Kdp.yj, al iTixp^dt- 
 fievaL fid\i<TTa yvvaiKes raura roicri dvSpdat iroievat,, Her. iii. 99, where the word 
 refers to familiar intercourse. We may, therefore, understand it here to imply, 
 * nor on the other hand friends, sousto he ona very familiar fiKdiny with yott,'and 
 this seems to me established by the sense of 'mutuality,* * interchange,' which 
 has been proved to attach to eVi in composition. See note on iirtixaxia, ch. 44. 
 Others have seen in the iiri, the idea of *wcr and ahove/ conse^iuently 
 ivixPV<^0°-'- is with them 'ahuti—to male an unfair use of you.* 
 
 (h.) V6WV ^dp K. T. X. For the history see Herod, vi. 89. Wlp 
 
 -•^^Bcfm'e,* an uncommon usage. Ivriig. It is * tf^o»?<^ ' in reference to time, 
 taking the present as a stand- point. irp6s rhv Al-yirrirwv ir6\t\unf. 
 
 See Herod, v. 85. iiriKpdrqoriy. A Tlmcydiduian word. Cf. 
 
 Lobeck's Phrynichus, p. 351. That the Corinthian fleet hatl really no right to 
 arrogate the result to themselves, is remarked by Midler, jEginctica, p. 117. 
 Kriig. The American editor transktes this word in a special note, ' victory," 
 ■which is only worth obsening, as it encourages a sort of inaccuracy to which 
 the junior student is too prone. It is of course, as may bo seen from its termi- 
 nation, the means of (jcttinfj the hetter of, dc 
 
 (c.) dtrcpCoirroi irapd rh viKOV—Weyanlless of cvcrythinrj in connj^arisvii v^itK 
 victory," i. e. all other things when placed beside victory seem as nought. This 
 would be perhaps unnecessary to notice, liad not Am. translated it — 'for the 
 9ake of conqucrinfj," and El. p-fc, or prropdcr, for tU sale of. Kriig. quotes toD 
 ULudvvou KaTe<pp6inrj<T€ vapa rb alaxP^^ '''* vto/xuvcu. Plato, Aj^l- p. a8. 
 ftv Kol wpoTcpov ^6po8 ^ — *cvc» supposing him to he formaiy an ciuwiy.' 
 
 Kriig. ingeniously remarks that Tpbrepou gives to ^ the force of a praeterite. 
 Gcill. comjiares the German * von jeher' — from an earlier period. 
 rd olKcta k. t. X. — They disptae, or manage icorse, even their own affairs owing 
 to the excitement of the moment, i. e. the excitement naturally engendered by 
 gtrife with an enemy. D. has, less rightly I think — 'for tJie sake of their 
 animosity at the moment.' See vii. 70 ; iii. 82 ; v. 32. 
 
 Chapter XLII. — (a.) <5v cvOvjjltjOcvtcs. This verb (Kriig. remarks) again 
 governs the genitive, vi. 60, i, whereas the accus. most generally follows it. 
 Tlie latter case denotes that the action of the verb simply operates ujwn its 
 object, as is the case with any other transitive ; in the former it is equiva- 
 lent to <ppovTi^€tv, i,e. with the accus. it is to * consider,' with the genitive to 
 
 * consider aloiU ' a thing. V€tGT€p<5s tis, T. K. A. explains as 
 equal to et ris iarc veurepos — ' each younger man/ rather say, and in the case 
 (jf any one that is younger, let him deem. aJ^iovrta — attracted in 
 number to the nearest nominative. dfi.tlv€<r0ai — * to requite,' here 
 in a good sense. Cf. iv. 63, 2. Am. and others explain the word at length, but 
 there is no peculiarity which does not directly follow from the nature of the 
 mid. voice, which the student should ela1>orate for himself. cl iroXe- 
 |i,^a-€i — * in case he shall go to war;' the most simi)le and naked form of stating 
 the hyjwthesis ; ^v woXepirja-ri, * in the event of his going to war/ seems to me 
 to be usetl, when reference is more particularly intended to the course of action 
 then to be pursued. See the remarks on ch. 120 c. 
 
 (6.) T<J T« "Y^P Ivji^pov ^v (^ K. T.X. F(yr escpediency most folloics upon 
 tliot course of conduct wherein a man makes fewest mistakes; or perhaps we should 
 say, 'commits the feicest errors/ for KrUg. is api)arently right in saying, 
 'mondisch, am wenigsten felilt.* rh \i(Kkov. Not, I think, here, 
 
 * the future of tlie war' — i. e. the nature of its contingencies, though this might 
 be easily supported ; but, the ' coming of the ivar' — i.e. whether it will come 
 or no. <|>av£pdj' ^r\ k. t. X. Tliis is of course in strong antithesis 
 to iv d(f)av€i KciTOi — ' which is already hefore your eyes, and not a mMter of th£ 
 future at all/ vc|>cX€tv — to take a little away from — i.e. in some 
 degree do away with. For the history, cf. i. 103. 
 
 (c.) Kaipbv Ixov**"* — cf. {(Txvp ^xo"' «• 36 *> 'when possessing tJie quality of 
 opportuneness' — i. e. when seasonably timed— coming in season. 
 rh ydp ^i\ dSiKctv. For to ahstain from injuring one's equals is a safer source 
 of power, than to he so excited hy tJie jyrospect of immedicde advantage, as to grasp 
 at aggrandizement surrounded hy i^erih. This I believe to be the general mean- 
 ijjg of the words. T<f avr^Ka <|)av^p<p — ' the advantage immediaiely 
 
 Itcfure your eyes'— i.e. that of adding the Corcyrean marine to your own. 
 Bed KivSvvwv rh irXiov ixtiv—\a the taking more than our rights amidst damgcrz. 
 rb nX. ix^uf is opposed to the equally abstract notion, rb firj ddLKeiv. I cannot 
 understand why T. K. A. should declare ' the article is used because a parti* 
 cular unfair advantage is meant.' This is not tme, and if it were, could the 
 article be absent had the advantage not been particular ? Neither do I seo 
 why Kriig. accounts for it by a contrasted rb fKaaaov. 6td KLvbvvuv, T. K A- 
 explains by * through,' i.e. 'leilh dangers/ But see supra, c. 40 b; it means 
 euch a taking, or possession, would be * enveloped by dangers/ 
 
64 
 
 NOTES OX THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book I. 
 
 CiiAV. 47.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 65 
 
 Chapter XLIII.— (a.) ircpnrcirrwKOTcs — liarhifi fallen into the circum- 
 stances under ic hi rh ice ourselves at LmtiUeinon prorlaiincd the }trincii>h\ that every 
 man should have the chastising of his own allies — oU ih governed by the participle : 
 I do not think that Kriig.'s proposition ev oh is necessary. 
 
 {h.) TovTov CKCivov K. T. X. ^^ctVoi' is of coursc the predicate: ' this is that 
 opportunlttf — i.e. the sort of opportunity which people recognise to be the one 
 in which, &c. The Aristophanic tovt' (kuvo will at once occur to the reader as 
 parallel. Toiavra 8^. For the corresponding fiiv, aee the close of 
 
 the Corcyrean speech. 
 
 Chapter XLIV.— (a.) Kal 8is. ' Etiam his advocatd convocatione," indica- 
 ting, I suppose, something remarkable, though the same thing occurred iii. 36. 
 TYj \kkv irpoT€p<5i. It seems to be doubted whether these words agree with 
 i)fi€pqi or €KK\r]<Tiqi. The former being more familiar, is perhaps more probable; 
 but it is of little importance. \itT(yvu)<rav — used rather * sensu 
 
 praegnanti,' since the meaning is, * so altered their purpose as not to make;^ or, as 
 we say, ' chanyed their minds not to male i e<iuivalent, therefore, to /ifTa7»'6KT€j 
 ^yvwaav. Cf. /jLerayvuivai rd TrpoSedoyfi^ua, iii. 40. or(|>£(riv must 
 
 be connected with ^vfxirXeiu, for although Matthii'u supposed it to be governed 
 by iKi\€vov, all the later grammarians (Rost, &c.) contend tliat /ceXej-w ae irotctM 
 is the only legitimate construction. |vfip,ax£a — ^in|iax£a. Tliat 
 
 these words were not, in common parlance, very positively opposed, seems 
 plain from the use of the first in the more special meaning of the second, v. 27, 
 vi. 19; and, as Pop. observes, ^vfifxaxo^ for iwlKovpos, c. 53, iii. 70. It seems 
 evident that eirLfiaxla is a defensive compact, implying the obligation to aid an 
 ally if invaded : ^vfifiaxla therefore, when opposed to it, must stand for ' offen- 
 sive alliance.' But the truth is, that the latter became a sort of Koivbv 6vo/j.a, 
 and was used genencally for any alliance. Dr. Donaldson, Aeic Cratylus, § 1 74, 
 observes that the force of ^7ri in composition, where it denotes * mutuality,' 
 ' interchange,' * the running of one thing into another,' has not been sufficiently 
 noticed by Greek scholars. In this way, iiriixaxla would mean ' an alliance 
 for mutuid defence." He amply illustrates this meaning of the preposition by 
 other citations. The student should consult the section. Cf. ch. 41, eirLxprjaOai 
 and viii. 85, €iraix<f>oTepl^ovTa, «<rT< tovs avrovs k. t. X. Pop. 
 
 remarks that this formula passed into Latin usage ; at least he quotes * eosdeni 
 amicos atque inimicos (alibi hostes) habere.' Livy, xxix. 23, xxxv. 50, xxxvii. 
 I. Cf. also iii. 75, iii. 10. 
 
 (6.) Kal ws — of course for oirrws, 'even thus,' i.e. even though they were to 
 reject the proffered alliance. ^xryK^ovciv dXX^Xois— /o wear each 
 
 other out by mutual attrition, or conflict, as we say. Kriig. quotes * bello coUi- 
 dere,' Hor. Ep. i. ii. 7, and Pop. Isoc. Pan. c. 37; Dem. de Cor. § 19. 
 tva aff-eevcoT^pots oia-iv—' that they miyht find the Corinthians and the other 
 naval powers more weak when they went to war with them, should any such neces- 
 sity arise.' The dat. are governed by KadiaTuyrai, and are in the predicate. 
 
 Chapter XLV. — (a.) hUa vavs. Probably quite enough for the purpose, 
 as Kriig. observes. It is not easy to see why Pericles should be suspected of 
 lukewarmness in the cause, as Bloom, (ed. prior) suggests. The story told by 
 
 Plutarch (Pericl. c. 29), that he meant to show contempt for the Corinthians 
 by the smallness of the number, implies an unmeaning act of impolicy, absurd 
 in so far-seeing a statesman. AaK€8ai|i6vios. Cimon, it seems, 
 
 had six sons, to three of whom he gave the names of the nations for whom he 
 acted as Proxenus, i.e. AaK€dai/x6vios, 'llXeros, and OerraXos. Ai(5ti|jios 
 
 the father, as Popp. supposes, of Strombichides, mentioned in the 8th book. 
 Twv iKiCvmv Ti \o)pi(tiV. Bloomf. explains ^s rt rwy x^p'^-^v iKeivwv, ' to any of 
 their places,' and remarks that such a separation of the article from its noun by 
 the governing word, or l>y another, though found chiefly in Ionic writers, is not 
 unknown in Attic Greek, as i. 106, ^s tov x^P^-ov idiuyrov. But in this case tov 
 stands for rivos, and the instances are not parallel. With Kriig., I doubt the 
 admissibility of such a collocation in Thuc, and with him would read x^P'-o^ — 
 some place among the number of those belonyin;/ to them. It is impossible to see 
 what T. K. A. means by declaring that Kriig. would read is tQv eKcivov ti 
 Xujpluy. The Schol. says Epidamnus is hinted at. 
 
 Chapter XLV'l.— (/>.) irpoo-^iiilav— *</re?o near.' t<m 8^ 
 
 XiiJL^v K.T. X. A full discussion of the geographical difficulties here involved 
 would require too much space. The student may consult Bloomf., who has 
 incorporated Col. Leake's valuable observations. The principal points made 
 out seem to be, that Xifxriv is a predicate, there is a harbour, — i.e., a port called 
 Cheimerium, as well as the promontory ; that it is the object of the writer to 
 point out the locality of Cheimerium, though he does it awkwardly ; that uv 
 eiT^s means Trordfjiup, i.c.j the rivers; that Cheimerium is Cape Varlani ; but 
 that the Port Cheimerium is not, as was once thought, to be found in the Port 
 of Par«'a. but in the ruins discovered by Colonel Leake on the other side of the 
 promontory. Bloomf. translation best explains the passage : — ' Now there is a 
 port, and above it, removed from the sea, is a city called Ephyra, situated in 
 the Eleaeatis of Threspotia, alongside of which the Acherusian Lake disem- 
 bogues into the gulf, a lake deriving its name from the river Acheron, which 
 after running through Threspotia, has its outlet into it. The river also' — I 
 suppose Thyamis, though Bl. omits the word— ' runs to seaward in a parallel 
 direction, dividing Tlirespotia and Cestrine, between which rivers the 
 Promontory Cheimerium juts out.' *E<|>vpT]. This Ionic form in- 
 
 stead of 'E<pi>pa is given in most texts, because the reading in the MSS. is 
 'E<pvpri, and in one 'E0up77. It appears that the grammarians declare this to be 
 a word which always retained the Ionic form. But since Strabo, Steph. 
 Byzant., and others employ "E^u/aa, Popp. strongly suspects the reading. The 
 'E<pi>pr} of Homer is of course Corinth, and Thuc. would not have borrowed the 
 form from his writings to apply it to this town. 'i^iia-i, 
 
 Kriig. prints i^Lrjai because of ii. 102, and iv. 103, but he admits that the best 
 IVLSS. have ^^aai. 6.v€)^ti— raises itself up, iv. 53, 3; vii. 34, 2. 
 
 Kriig. 
 
 Chapter XLVIL— (a.) ^v^ora—' The swine pastures / now St. Nicolo 
 di Sivota. According to Leake, they lie five or six miles S. of the mouth of 
 the Thyamis. 
 
 {b.) ZaKvveCwv. This seems at variance with what is said of the Corey- 
 
66 
 
 NOTES OX THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book I. 
 
 Chap. 49.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDTDES. 
 
 67 
 
 roeims, c. 31. We must therefore suppose that they had made an application 
 at the same time as they sent an embassy to Athens, and were successful. Set 
 Pop. Ed. Maj. kv T[j -fiircCpt}! — i.e., the mahxland close by the 
 
 Sybota. r% i\irdpi^-T% Kara K^pKvpau -qtr^Lpi^, for in the time of Tlmcydides 
 tlie word was not yet a proper name, Pop. See notes on iii. 54. The 
 Chaonians are principally the barbarians meant. 
 
 Chapteu XLVIII. — (rt.) rpiwv Tjficpwv trvritx — * prorighns for three days/ 
 Kriig. compares ii. 23; iii. i; vi. 34; and Xen. J/rfi. v. 3. 21. This suflSci- 
 ently proves how little the ancient triremes were calculated for anything like a 
 long voyage. u>s ^irl vavp,ax^civ. We have the dative, iii. 4, 
 
 vi. 34, but this is a case where small reliance can be placed up(m MSS. Tlie 
 ws, in cases like this, seems to me to indicate adherence to a common practice, 
 drew up as ships are woyit to do when going into action, or, at any rate, that the 
 act described by the verb is compared with, and referred to a similar class of 
 acts; even ws ^5 Ilettr^Sas ^ovXSfjievos CTpaTcveffdai, Xen. Anab. i. i, 11, means 
 
 * such an expedition as would be organized against the Pisidians. * T. K. A. 
 explains thuM: * u>5 does not perceptibly weaken the certainty of their deter- 
 mination =?r//A the purpose of engaging,* from which one does not gain much 
 infonnation. irX^ovrcs. Take this with KaOopdai, uhile so sailing, 
 catch sight of. p.€Tc«povs, a picturesque word, as any one must 
 admit, who has remarked how vessels upon the horizon sometimes seem to be, 
 as it were, suspended in mid air. I do not think Bl. is right in explaining in 
 Hhe high sea;' and besides, * the high seas' is scarcely said in the same sense as 
 
 * the king's high-road.' Though a favourite with Thuc, it is not, as Kriig. 
 remarks, employed by Herod, or Xenophon. 
 
 (b.) WXt]— here Ulirisions,' or \^(juadrons^* cf. ii. 8f. Of cavalry, ii. 22. 
 Kriig. rh Sk dXXo k.t. X. — 'Along all the rest of the Hue they 
 
 thcinselres took place,* or 'extended,* cf. iii. 107. Pop. would rather say 'reli- 
 quuni spatium' than ' reliquani aeiem,* because it appears from the next 
 eh. that the Corcyrreans also occupied portion of the right. We nmst not, 
 then, understand rb &Wo as entirely exclusive of the right division. 
 €vwvvp.ov Kc'pas. Remark the absence of the article. Tliis case comes under 
 those where the article is not applied to things sufficiently familiar and definite 
 not to need it, — as /3a(ri\eus, 'I(T^/i65, &c. See note, eh. 8 a. So we say 
 
 * right,' ' left,' not always * the right,' *the left.' 
 
 Chapter XLIX. — {a.) rd (n][JL€ia. The signal was a sort of flag raised 
 upon a mast or pole. Tlie opposite term to denote the lowering of the signal 
 in order to put an end to the action, is KaTeaTrdcdr}, i. 63, 2. The Mace- 
 donians used a crimson flag for the same purpose, Plut. Philop. 6. Similarly 
 among the Romans, Ammian. xxvii. 10, 9; Copsar de B. G. ii. 20; Knig. 
 Kaprcpd — the regular term for an obstinately-contested combat, not found, says 
 Kriig., in Xenophon. ovx o^oCws, sc. Kaprfpa. by a sort of 
 
 Zeugma, not so muck by the science of the parties. Bl. version approved by 
 T. K. A., 'less ejccellent,* 'meritorious,* does not seem desirable. Kriig. says, 
 'short for ^iq. 84, Trtfo/xax^?.' 
 
 (6.) irpoo-pdXoiiV. Bekker prefers to wpoa^dWoicv, which occurs in the 
 
 MSS. But it does not seem necessary to alter the present, * when they happen 
 to lay alongside of one another,* i.e., in the nautical sense of 'laying a ship 
 aboard of another.' Tlie optative of course expresses * indefinite frequency,' as 
 ird^oLVTO infra. dircXvovTo — ' got clear.' KaTatrravTCS 
 
 ^advovTo. Bl. is right in saying, ' the sense is maintained a pugna stataria,* 
 rather than D. in translating, ' they set to, and fought;* it implies that they 
 formed into a regular set array, like a body of infantry. SUKirXot. 
 
 This evolution, Bl. seems to think, corresponds to the modern evolution of 
 'breaking the line' employed so successfully by Rodney and Nelson, and the 
 ori<^iual suggestion of which has been so much controverted. The object of 
 this is to destroy a portion oi the enemy's fleet, which is thus cut off from the 
 rest. But does not the plural here indicate a single manoeuvre often repeated, 
 whicli couhl not be the case with such breaking the line ? I should therefore be in- 
 clined to accept the original ex})lanation, that, viz., it was a breaking through 
 tlie enemy's line, in order by a rapid turn backwards to smash the oars, or 
 sides, or stem of the opposing vessel, ii. 83, 89; vii. 36, 70. Compare Livy's 
 description quoted by Pop., 'Libero inter ordines discursu prsetervecti in 
 puppim impetum dabant,' xxxvii. 24. 
 
 {r. ) 8<8ioT€s ol (TTpaTiTYoC. Had the construction proceeded smoothly, we 
 sliould have had ai 'Arruai j/^es still continued as nom. to ovk ijpxov, but oi 
 arpaTryyoi is substituted, because they were the responsible parties in the 'Arr. 
 vijes, and the real causes of the delay. Kriig. places a stop at ^ipyov, thereby 
 inaking SeSiores oi crpar. a sort of nom. pendens. ti?|V TrpdppT|<riv. 
 
 See i. 45. 
 
 ((/.) rds o-KTivds ^p^jJLOVs. In this collocation, as in r^ Zi^ri diravcyTip, iv. 
 122, Ta?s vavoi KoOcpais, vii. 37, rbu ktvttov p.^-yav, vii. 70, we have what Dr. 
 Donaldson calls secondary predication, and the whole is equivalent to — ' they 
 set f re to the tents, and the tents were empty.* The idiom is of course familiar to 
 every scholar ; but I have some doubt whether this mode of explaining it suffi- 
 ciently points out the fact that the adjective or participle so ])laced contains 
 the cause or condition of the whole predication : as rbv dpdpa yeXdcaura irvve 
 is not — 'he struck the man, and the man teas laughing;* but, he struck the man 
 because he laughed. Here I should render, they set fire to the tents as they found 
 Uiem empty. D.'s ' burnt the deserted tents,* may be defended by the ambiguity 
 of the English idiom, but should not have been given in a version intended for 
 students, as it might mislead. See more on the subject, notes on i. 36 a ; 
 iii, ^^ a. ^pfjfios is iti Thuc. of two, and also of three terminations. 
 
 8iT|pira<rav. Bl. way of accounting for the force of the prep, is probably 
 correct. They searched through (5id) and carried off, ijpTraffav, any articles ; as 
 
 infra, viii. 31 and 36. 
 
 (<•.) 6t.'n6—'from an originally smaller number,* i.e. no, see ch. 47, which 
 even united with the ten from Athens would not equal the Corinthian fleet of 
 1 50. See ch. 46. dirpo<|>ao-C<rT«s. Said properly of an act which 
 
 required no 'rrp6<f>a<ni to excuse it ; therefore it means more ' openly ' and * im- 
 
 hesitatingly.' 
 
 Xa|i.trpwSf <|>av€pa>s. Cf. ii. 
 
 /> 
 
 dea rly, * indisputably, 
 
 Krug. cf. \aixrpbi vIkt}, vii. 55. ^p^yov Axixo—' set to work,* lit. 
 
 held himself to it, so in German, ' Griff das Werk eifrig an.* 8ic- 
 
 K^KpiTo. There was no longer any distinction between friend and foe. Bl. illus- 
 
 r 2 
 
68 
 
 NOTES ON TIIUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book I. 
 
 Chap. 52.] 
 
 NOTES ON TIIUCYDIDES. 
 
 69 
 
 trates by St. James ii. 4, (Bl, ref. is wrong), ov ZuKpi6r)T€ iv iavTo7s, where 
 the meaning obviously is — JIave you not made invidious diatiniiions among 
 yourselves? is tovto dvCLYKTis — Wo such a pitch of necessity,' * eo 
 
 necessitatis.' Kriig. exphiins * to such an inevitable collision,' comparing ^j 
 TOVTO dvdyKTjs 6 X670S ^/cei. Plat. Theert. 170, c. Comparers tovto ^v/jopopas, 
 iii. 59. €s ToiiTo Si'CTTi'xtas, vii. ^6. The usage of ^vviTefftv in this impersonal 
 way is elsevvhere, says Kriig., confined to the meaning equivalent to ^vv^^rj 
 There seems little authority for ^vvkirfffov accej)tecl by many editors. Pop. 
 suggests that TrdvTa may be supplied to ^vvireaev from dvdkv. The Schol. 
 understands ret irpd-yfxa.Ta. 
 
 Chapter L. — (a.) to, <rKd(|>T] k. t. X. ^They did not attempt to lash fast and 
 tow after them the hulls of the vessels whirh they haj»pened to sink.' The opt. 
 expresses the indefiniteness of the whole : the aorist is used because there is no 
 intention on the part of the writer to connote the exact time of the action of 
 the verb. Entertaining those views on the nature of the aorist, expressed else- 
 where, I do not attribute so much importance as others to the controversy 
 maintained between Madvig and Kriiger in their Greek Grammars, whether the 
 aor. optative in non- hypothetical relative clauses, be a pi^ivtcritum, or no. 
 Kriig. would naturally (juote the present case in confinuation of his opinion 
 that it is. A. directs attention to the fact that KaTahvaciav only implies a 
 partial sinking, or waterlogging of the ships. This is clear from Herod, viii. 
 90, and from the famous case of Arginus«^, where some of the Athenian com- 
 manders after the action proposed TrXet*' (7rt rds KaTahihvKvlas i/aOs, Kal tovs 
 iir' avTuiv duOpufrovs. SicKirXt'ovTCS is of course not used in the 
 
 technical sense of duKirXovs in last ch., but simply — 'sailing through,' i.e. the 
 scene of action. 
 
 (6.)"EXXii<rt K. T. X. With reference to the naval actions in the Persian 
 war — pLeyiffTr) tCiv irf>b aiV?}?. Cf. i. r a. 
 
 (f/.) Kal i)<rai "fjo-av Xoiiraf. The koL has been very offensive to editors. But 
 Pop. exphmation seems satisfactory : the Tr\u)tp.oi are those which came sea- 
 worthj' out of action ; but beside these, ten had never been in action at all, for 
 the Corcyreans had 120 triremes, see ch. 25, and of these only no were 
 employed in the battle. Engelman, thinking this 'very obscure,' proposes to 
 ender /cat 'viz.,' so that irXwt/iot and Xoiirai should mean the same ships. This 
 use of Kai I cannot but consider very dubious. He supports it by toioituv Kal 
 OLKOvaliav LpiapT7}p.dT(j)v, Plato, Apol. p. 26 A., which he says is only used to 
 denote one class of dfiapTrjfiaTa. But I am not sure that it onl}- denotes one 
 aspect of them ; and tlie word toiovtos, owing to its collocation in such phrases 
 as TotaOra Kal irapatrX-qcna, has a particular usage which renders it impossible 
 for us to quote the above phrase as any authority for such a use of Kal in the 
 text. Of the other reference to iii. 26, ret re irpdrfpov Ter/jiTjfxkva Kal h ti 
 i^e^XaffTTjKei Kal 6<Ta iv Tais irplv iapoXah ira/jeXActTrro, we can only say — 
 Nil agit exemplum quod litem lite resolvit.' 
 
 {e. ) ^irtiraittivwrTO. ' Etsi Gra?ci non TrattDva sed waidva gSciv dicunt, tamen 
 promiscue iraiuvii^u) et iratavl^u usurpant.' Stanley ad j£sch. S. C. T. v. 274. 
 The MSS. here as elsewhere exhibit both. irpv|ivav, sc. ivl 
 
 irpv/J-vav iKpovovTo, rowed steniward. The object of this evolution sometimes, 
 
 was to gain space for returning to the charge, and sometimes, as here, to present 
 the least vulnerable part of the ship to the enemy. Cf. Herod, viii. 84. Thuc. 
 i. 51 ; iii. 78; vii. ^6. Kriig. cf. the military phrase ivl trbba di/ax^pet". 
 Xen. Anab. v. 3, 31. oXC'yai dpvvciv, Uoo few to aid.' This sort 
 
 of comparative usage of the positive is not peculiar to Greek. Thus we might 
 gay_ygMj for the purpose. Cf. dXlyov^ elvai, t^ cTpaTia ri? 'Si-q^biv avix^akiuv. 
 Her. vi. 109, and again vii. 207. See Jelf, § 666. Matt. § 448. 
 
 Chapter LI.— (a.) jioLXXov Ik tov d<|>avovs— ' more than to the Corinthians.' 
 U TOV d<pavovs — adverbially. Pop. quotes as similar cases from Thuc, e/c tov 
 (pavipov, iv. 79, ^k tov irpo<paPovi, iii. 43, and others. ISavjiatov 
 
 wondered at the Corinthians harking icater, as we might say. See Jelf, § 495, 
 obs. 3. vr\i% iKCivai lirnrX^ov<riv — as often, a transition to the words 
 
 actually used, * yonder are shij^s sailing up to us.' See ch. 40 b. 
 5vV€orK(JTat< — ' darkne.'<s wcut closing in.' 
 
 {b.) IrcXcvrd k vvKxa. See note iii. 78, ended at night, i. c, lasted up to night 
 and then ended, ch. 58 b. *Av8oki8t]s. This is the well-known Ando- 
 
 cides the orator, who afterwards played so prominent a part in reference to the 
 mutilation of the Hernije. wp|iCo-avTO sc. at vrjes. ' Subjectum enim 
 
 Piutatum ex medio apparet,' Pop. But I am not convinced that the word can- 
 not mean, * brought their ships to moorings,' without any such awkward change 
 (»f subject. al €l'KO<rt vi^ts diro rwv * A0t]Vocv, avrai. In this and some 
 
 other passages of Thucydides, as iv. 9. i, vi. 96. 3, vii. 41. i, the article 
 seems used in somewhat an anomalous manner. I fully agree with Engelman 
 that to alter the passages, as Kriig. would in this case, is futile, for how can we 
 account for their existence? The correction of them, which we find in some 
 few MSS., is much more probably owing to the hand of the transcriber. It 
 oidy remains, therefore, to conclude that Thucydides is somewhat peculiar in 
 his way of employing the article. Now if a writer were to say, ' The ships 
 from Athens, those, I mean, which Glaucon commanded,' no one would express 
 any sun)rise. But here we have * these' instead of those. May not this, how- 
 over, be ascribed to the same principle of composition upon which, as above, 
 we have a transition to the directa actio in f?>s eKeri^ai /c. r. X., the narrator 
 vividly entering into the action, and speaking from that stand-point as it were ? 
 
 Chapter LII.— (&.) rds jjlIv vavs fipavrcs ... T|<rvxatov. Here is a slight 
 anacolouthon, for either we ought to have read rds /xev mOs 9ipav, rjarvxaiou 8i, 
 or /xh should have been omitted. Pop. But Kriig. remarks that fih belongs 
 rather to the general thought than to any one of the separate ideas, and may 
 be supposed to connect itself with tov 8^ ohade ttXoO in the next section. vaOs 
 dpavTa is not so common as vavffip dpavTes, but Kriig., cf. Herod, vui. 57, 
 dwaipovai rdj vcas dirb :i:a\afx7poi. The ships themselves were drawn up on 
 shore, therefore dyKvpai need not be substituted. lirwrKCv^— * the 
 
 means of refitting.' Pop. says, in the same way as TrepiTeix^ffis is the 'means 
 of fortifying,' but surely, in this latter case, it is the termination in -o-is, which 
 denotes the operation: so also with dXw<rts, ' the means of capturing, Phil. 61.^ 
 iv xoipUa Ip^jiw. The junior student should note the effect of the article's 
 being absent ; it conveys the reason why there was no iiriffKevrif but scarcely 
 
70 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book I. I Cuap. 57.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 71 
 
 say with D. *?)j «o deserted a place,* 
 
 Sttt). Cf. I. 68, Kriig. But see Jelf, § 496. 
 
 Toil irXov for t65€ toO ttXoO 
 
 Chapter LIII. — [a.) kcXt^tiov, explained by theSchol. fiiKpbu irXoidpiov Airb 
 fKTacpopds Tov KeXrjTos tinrov, (^ ets dvijp iiriKddTjTai. As the k^Xtjs was the 
 riding- horse (light horseman, says T. K. A.), the small light skitf contiiining 
 an individual was so named metaphorically. Krug. cf. iv. 120; viii. 38 ; 
 Herod, viii. 94. dvcv KT)pvKcCov. 'Tliis was a straight stick of 
 
 wood or of metal encircled around witli two serpents, having their crests oppo- 
 site to each other, so as to bear the form of the letter 4>. Thus it answered to 
 the caduceus of Mercury. Sometimes, however, instead of serpents, it was 
 encircled by sprigs of olive, indicative of a desire for reconciliation,' Bloomf. 
 Thus it would be equivalent to our flag of truce, and the sending a message 
 without it, would be meant to imply that the Corinthians did not admit them- 
 selves to be at war with Athens. Tr^p-xj^avTcs, on the principle of 
 ' qui facit per alium, facit per se,' the legat&s are regarded as the mouth-pieces 
 of the principals, from whom they come, cf. 8U<f)6€ip€, ii. 69, ad fin. 
 cnrovSds Xvovtcs, may be much more emphatic, sine articulo, are breakers of 
 treaties, but, see ch. 48 b. 
 
 (6.) Xv€T€. This Bloomf. regards as a negligence of expression for \veiv : to 
 me it seems a very natural anacolouthon, and quite in the manner of Tliucyd. 
 * and are hreakiiKj the treaty too.* 
 
 {c.) TO (JL^v. Upon any explanation which I have seen the yuiv is misplaced, 
 for the (TTpaTOTreSov is not contrasted with anything. It may be a mere 
 carelessness of expression, the writer's real intention being to contrast the 
 Corcyreans and Athenians, or, as Kriig. suggests, it may have cre])t into the 
 text from what has gone before. dvcPoT]o-€V — * called out to lay 
 
 hold of and kill thcni,' Krug. cf. Xen. Amib. i. 8. 12, Kupos e/i6a ir^ew t6 
 (rrpareOyua. 
 
 Chapter LIY.— («.) cir* oI'kou, not eV oXkov. Therefore, ' homeicards," 
 i.e., in the direction of a point; with the accusative right up to a point, as ch. 
 30 a ; hence I imagine its common signification of * hostility,' which in some 
 grammars and lexicons is given as the primary one. 
 
 {b.) vcKpovs dv€tXovTo. See note, ch. 8 a. The absence of the article is 
 explicable upon the principle often noticed of its natural omission in the descrip- 
 tion of any familiar process, where the object of the verb's action is at once intel- 
 ligible without particular definition, — e.g., 'weigh anchor,' 'shoulder anns,' 'furl 
 sails,' and the like. So 'to take up dead' describes so natural and necessary 
 a process, that no article is required. Cf. iv. 4; iv. 54; v. 10; vii. 5; viii. 
 106. €5€V€\9^VTa. The neuter, because the corpses were regarded 
 
 as without personality — mere things. Kriig., cf. 6ca ii. 92, anil Xen. Aniib. 
 i- a., 8, wo-Tc Kal vavd^ia k.t.X. This would of course, as in 
 
 the similar case on land, indicate that victory rested with them. 
 
 Chapter LV. — [a.) Iv OepaircCiji (i\oy — 'treated them with great courtesy 
 and attention.' Kriig. cf. iv airiq. (x^iv, v. 60; vii. 81. On the result, see 
 iii. 70- irpooTroi^io'€iav — 'might bring over to them.' On tliis 
 
 somewhat peculiar word, see the note on iii. 47 a, and in Sheppard's 
 
 Theophrastus, c. i., rrepl dpu,ueias. All the usages of the word appear to me 
 directly deducible from the primary meaning, to bring over to; cf. Trpoa^-KOLi]- 
 aavTO, last chapter; ' took to themselves,' i.e., claimed. 
 
 (6.) ircpt-yC-yvcrai. A. taking the prepos. in a not unusual sense, cf. ch. 
 2 b, translates ' ^yiu.x overlived the war,' i.e., thus came out of the contest with 
 the' Corinthians undestroyed. And I am not at all sure that he is wrong. Krug.. 
 however, and others, contend that it is 'got the upper hand.' Cf. ii. 65. The 
 connexion between ' superesse' and ' superare' shows how closely the ideas are 
 united. <r<^(o-iv— because logically 01 Kopivdioi is the subject of the 
 
 sentence. «v <nrov8ais. Remark the absence of the article, ' in 
 
 a time of treaty;' sc. the thirty years' truce. But see chap. 54 b. 
 
 Chapter LVL— (a.) hia^opa—' points of difference,' or 2^oints in dispute; 
 hence 'causes of quarrel.' More frequent, says Kriig., in Thuc. than else- 
 where. Cf. i. 67, 68. irpao-o-dvTwv. This word, in the sense of 
 
 ' working,' 'scheming,' may, as A. remarks, be compared with our own expres- 
 sion ' to practise,' and ' practises.' See note on iii. 56. Kriig. remarks that 
 it is most common with Sttws and an indicative, iii. 4, 7°. 
 naXXV|VT]s -formerly calleil Phlegra, now the Gate of Kassandhra (says Col. 
 Leake) Between the Gulf of Therma and the Strymonic Gulf, the whole 
 district called Chalcidice juts out int.) the sea with three promontories, of which 
 this lies most to the west. Consult Grote vi. 90, 91, who remarks that the 
 \thenian Empire was much more secure over the islands, than over the sea- 
 ports situated on the Continent, as the latter would have a much better chance 
 of receiving aid from some neighbour powerful by land. ^^^.P**" 
 
 {.iroTcXits -/..'., paying a fixed sum annually, instead of a contingent of ships. 
 See ch. 29, and the commentators on Arist. Vcsp. 669. ^ '^^ '^ 
 
 HoXX^VTiv Tcixos. The effect of this would be to leave standing the fortifica- 
 tions towards the mainland, but also to leave the town destitute of defence on 
 the side where it was accessible from the sea,-/.e., from Athens. 
 ^iriSnaiovpvovs. ' This term and Aap.iovpy6s was applied to the chief magis- 
 trates of the Pelopoimesians, expressive of their doing 'the service of the 
 people.' See Livy, xxxii. 22, and Arist. Pol. iv. 4, P- 140. Asclepiades con- 
 siders the prepos. superfluous. GoU. understands it to mean ' extra magis- 
 trates sent a^ colleagues to the Avf^covpyoi.' Am. It is possible eTr. may only 
 have the sense of superintendence, aa in i^icKOTros. For the nature of the 
 magistracy, cf. MUller, Dorians, i. 2, 4^, who, however, seems to interpret 
 ' upper magistrates.' 'The words rd iirl QpiKvs denote generally the towns m 
 Chalkidike, places in the direction or on the skirts of Tlirace, rather than parts 
 of Thrace itself.' Grote, vi. 90. Mr. Shilleto makes it embrace Chalcidice, 
 with its three projecting tongues of land, all the Hellenic colonies s tretchmg 
 eastward along the coa^st, and terminating at some unknown point to the W. o 
 the Hellespont. Its western boundary was Macedonia, and it included several 
 islands in the ^gean, among which Thasos was certainly one. Thucydcdes, or 
 
 Grote, p. 10. 
 
 Chapter LVII.-(«.) 4>av€p«s ii64opoi-' openly at variance.' 
 ' n€p8£KKas-the line of the Kings of Macedon, from their founder. Perdiccas, 
 
^^ 
 
 NOTES ox THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book I. 
 
 Chap. 6 1.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 73 
 
 may be seen Herod, viii. 139. They were reputed to be descended from 
 Temenus, that one of the Heracleidre who at the return of his family with the 
 Dorians, obtained possession of Argolis, and on the strength of this descent 
 they were allowed to be Greeks. Herod, v. 22. But the Macedonian people 
 were regarded at best as half- barbarians. Tliucyd. iv. 124,126.' Am. 
 MaKcSovwv without the article, and means certain Macedonians on the sea-coast ; 
 see ii. 99, r^s /cdro; Mave5o»'/as. Perdiccas was to have reigned jointly with his 
 brother Philip and his cousin Derdas, but attempted to deprive them of their 
 provinces. Besides these, says Pop., the brothers of Derdas, c. 59; Pau- 
 sanias, c. 6r ; and Augustus, son of Philip, are mentioned as rivals to Vex- 
 ^^'^^^^^ ^irciroX^ftwTo— ' had been made a foe of.' 
 
 4vavTiovfi.^vois— * ctrfl)i;/fof/tf/ur in o/>jjogition to hint.' Tlie construction, though 
 unusual, verl>orum pugnandi usu defenditur. Cf. Plut. C/eom. vii. 3. 
 irpo<r€iroi€iTO. The preceding re would induce us to expect Tpo<rvoLoOfMfvos, but 
 it is quite in I'liuc. manner to pass thus to the finite verb. Pop. cf. ii. 29; 
 iv. 4, 72. 
 
 (6.) «|xopa 6vra ra X^P^ci- ^I'^ny MSS. omit the ra, which most editors 
 inclose in brackets. If it stiuid, it must mean, I presume, * if he could ;irt pog- 
 
 session of the places, heiwj as theif %vere, close to Potidita.' h'CKa 
 
 denoting the final cause, 'for the sake of.' 
 
 (r.) XaXKi8€vo-t. According to Col. Leake (.V. Cfveece, iii. 54), these 
 Chalcideans occupied the whole of the great peninsuhi, south of the Mount 
 Khortiatzi, though Chalcidice itself was originally the name of a much 
 smaller district. When Xerxes was retreating from Greece, he left behind him 
 Artabazus ; the latter subdued Olynthus and placed it in the hands of the 
 Chalcidians. Ever after, the Bottiaans are found in close jvlliance with them, 
 cf. li. 79- irpoKaToXaiApdvciv — properly a military word, 
 
 meaning * to anticipate the enennj in occupyinfj some position.' See ch. 33 e. 
 
 ((/.) ttVTov— sc. Perdiccas, cf. i. 59. jut' dXXwv 8^Ka. 
 
 Eleven generals are quite an unheard of number, and, besides, many more 
 than are suitiible for one thousand men, to say nothing of the five who follow, 
 c. 6i. The very ingenious conjecture of Kriig., fxer dWa;;/ 8', 'with four 
 others,' gets over the difliculty; and they who know most almut numerals in 
 MS8. will make least difficulty in accepting it. It is no valid defence of the 
 old reading to say with Arn., that Pericles was employed with nine colleagues in 
 the Samian war, c. 116, for Time, there only says that Pericles was one of the 
 ten regular aTpaTrjyol of the state, SeKdrov airroO a-TpaTTjyoOvTos, and not that 
 all ten were on duty in the same expedition, and with the same force. The five 
 mentioned, c. 61, would make the number exactly ten. 
 
 Chapter LVIII. — (a.) ?irpa<ro-ov. Most editors agree with Pop. in 
 marking this as spurious. If it be genuine, says Krug., iXddvres- 5f tj must be 
 considered an anacolouthon of parenthetical character; or after 4x€i8ri, we may 
 add with one MS. a 5^. 4k ttoXXoO— * after a hnr/ time,' after much 
 
 ner/otiation. vir^trxcTo. The majority of MSS. have vx^axoyro, 
 
 which Kriig. in his notes ai)pear8 to accept : for neuter plurals which stand for 
 persons, individual agents, sometimes follow the law of all plurals. Cf. note 00 
 ch. 126 ; iii. 82 ; vii. 57. ra r(kr\— « the authorities.' Am. has a 
 
 good note on the origin and various meanings of tcX^oj, as traced by Damn. 
 Ur. Homeric, and Wachsmuth. They seem to resolve themselves into the 
 notion of * completing and perfecting,' bringing to a culminating point. 
 TOTC hi\-then at last. Kara tov Kaipov rovrov— when thoj met with 
 
 this favourable crisis. The first, says Kriig., denotes only the time, the 
 second, the favourable conjunction of circumstances. 
 
 {b.) ravrr\v is the object, fiiav rdXiv Iffxvpav the predicate, and is therefore 
 sine articulo. dvoiKt<ra<r8ai 4s "OXvveov is not an uncommon, though 
 
 elliptical way of speaking— Wo break up their establi.shments and settle m Olyn- 
 thus.' See nearly the same notion, Arist. Ares, 1340, cf. ch. 51 b. rr^s YH?— 
 this, says Krug., depends upon wepi r\)v \lpvr]v BdX^w, wlierewitli one may men- 
 tally supply tL The Lake of Bolbe seems now to be called Besicia. Henceforward 
 Olynthus became the principal Chalcidiean city. It was at a subsequent period 
 taken by Philip II., its inhabitants sold for slaves, and its walls razed to the 
 ground. Bloomf., who considers that df^ implies ' up the country,' shows that 
 Olynthus was not, as represented in the maps, on the sea shore, but about five 
 miles inland, in a N. E. direction. ^8a,K€ vi^LnrQai-rjare if to them 
 to inhabit, or occupy and cultivate, whether by farming or [/razing, and to receive 
 the fruits thereof. Such is the full import of the phrase. Bloomf. 
 
 Chapter LTX.— (a.) ra cirl Qp^Kx^s. See Grote as quoted above, c. 56. 
 Karao-rdvTts €itoX€|xovv. Either, says Popp., ' quum pervenissent,' or ' quum 
 consedissent. ' I should prefer the latter, taking the words in a military sense— 
 ' when they had established tlieniselves there,' i. e., secured a base for their opera- 
 tions. dva)66V — /ro/Ji the upper, or, inner country. 
 
 Chapter LX.— (a.) ircpl t« x^P^*?- Thucyd. uses both the dative and 
 gen. freely in this meaning. D^at. i. 67, 74, ^^9> &c. Gen. iii. 102, and with 
 <t>o:idadaL, viii. 93. Tovs irdvras, in all, the German idiom 'im 
 
 (Janzen corresponds. , 
 
 (6.) 'Apio-ri^. 'Apio-T^as appellatur, Herod, vii. 137- AScijtavTov. 
 
 Est Adeimantus, 6 'ilKvrov, KopivdLos arpaTvyds, de quo Herod, viii. 5. 59, 61, 
 94. Popp. 4iriW|8cu>s-is ' a fit and proper person for anything ;' hence 
 
 it naturally slides into our meaning of ' proper,' except in such cases as Xen. 
 A nab. I, where it is \fif and proper to be beaten;' here it denotes accordance m 
 political sympathies, and is equivalent to 0t\oj. Cf. 1. 95 ; li. 49 ' ^lu. 47. 
 
 (c.) T€o-<rapaKO<rrn-re(r(rapdK0.n-a rifxipais {((rrepof would have been more 
 usual, but we have rplrri r]pJpq. varepov, viii. 24, and so in Latin ' tertio anno 
 post,' as well as ' tribus annis post.' Popp. We may add that Anglic^-' forty 
 days after, ' and ' the fortieth day after,' are alike used. 
 
 Chapter LXI.— (a.) 4mirapovTas— ' Aci<^ come up besides.' Krug. cf. 
 Xen. Anah. iii. 4, 30. €axn-«v-8C. of Athenian citizens. Cf 1. 64. 
 
 (6.) ^va-iK^Uv^' compulsory,' i. €., ^nc\x as circumstances compelled them 
 to make. Cf. exactly the same use of necessarius, Li v. xxii. 2., * iiecessarmm 
 
 cubile,' and of dvayKoios, i. 90 ; ii. 70. 
 
 {c.) diravCtrravrat 4k Ttis ^aKSovl^%-' break up their encampment for the 
 
 purpose of leaving Macedonia.' So, says Poppo, the words must be taken, aa it 
 
 I 
 
74 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book I. 
 
 Chap. 64.] 
 
 NOTES ON TEUCYDIDES. 
 
 IS 
 
 is impossible that Beroea was not within the limits of Macedonia. The town, it 
 will be remembered, is honourably mentioned in the Act. Apost., and is still 
 called * Veria.* 4Tri<rTp^\J/avT«s — ' they made a turn back' — * niare 
 
 versus; says Popp., ' f/egen Osten.' Krii<,'. Both Arn. andBl(>omf. understand 
 Thuc. to mean — * they turned back again into the regular route from Pydna to 
 Potida^a, from which they had deviated in their attempt to surprise Bercea. Now, 
 as the latter place lay in a westerly direction, and somewhat inland, such a turn 
 must have brought tlieir line of march toward the east and the sea. All the 
 explanations, therefore, come to much the same thing. The student shouKl, 
 if anxious for further discussion, refer to Grote's elaborate note, vol. vi. p. 95. 
 Tlie Kai before ireipdaavres, which Popp. dislikes and Bloomf. would obliterate* 
 ought I think to stand. It seems to me to resemble the xal in diroirrds ti. Kai 
 Kivdvv€V€iu and such phrases, yet not before haruiy made an atfetnpt upon the 
 place. Cf. TTitpdv tQv reix^v, vii. 12, and rijs Xto-a/as irdpdv, iv. 70. 
 Xwp^S— here not in its usual sense, but * besides,' which meaning it appears to 
 derive from the notion oi~' without counting this or that.' Cf. with Krug. ii. 
 13; iv. 97: iii. 17. I. Gigonis is described by the Schol. as a promontory 
 between Macedonia and Pallene. Leake places it near ' Apanonni promonto- 
 rium.' cp8o|iT|KovTa, made up with the forty of Callias and the 
 
 thirty of Archestratus, c. 57. 
 
 Chapter LXII.— (a.) irpis *OXvv0ov. The majority of MSS. have irp6 
 OXvvdov ; but the aUies were not encamped in front of Olynthus ; nor yet, says 
 Popp., close to Olynth us, irp6s'0\vvd({}, but under the walls of Potidaea, on the side 
 that looked towards Olynthus, and this idea can only be expressed by irpos 
 OXwOov. So iii. 21, wpbs IlXaraiW ; iv. 31, rrpbs tov \t/xfVo5 ; iv. T30, t6 7r/)6s 
 lKiu:vT}i. ||w T-ps irdXcws — to prevent the men from straggling into 
 
 tlie town of Potidaea. Cf. iii. 6 ; v. 1 15 ; vi. 50. 
 
 {b.) (ixovn. The junior student may remark a good instance of a not un- 
 common wpbs TO a7}fiaLv6fxevov construction, i. e., because toO 'ApiaT^ws i] yvicfjLr} 
 Tjv is equivalent to ^5o^e T(p 'Apiarci, the participle sUinds in the dative. In- 
 stances are numerous. Popp. gives one from Homer, Lib. xiv. 139— 'AxtXX^os 
 6\o6v KTJp yTiOei—SepKOfievif). t«u icrB^ . . . Kgw to-Opiov. This ap- 
 
 pears contradictory to the common usage of the article. It is to be explained, 
 I think, by supposing that in the second case Thuc. uses the expression as 
 employed in the common parlance of the locality, where the article would be 
 omitted, just upon the same principle as it was omitted before the Isthnms of 
 Corinth by the Southern Greeks (i. 108 ; ii. 9 ; iv. 42), and as it is omitted 
 before thoroughly familiar objects by ourselves. See note, ch. 8 a, and ch. 54 
 a. Elsewhere, in this part of the narrative. Time, describes it as a stranger 
 'cum articulo.' Cf. u^Kpovs dvdXovro. Cf. c. 54. cr<|>ds. Aristeus 
 
 and his own troops. 
 
 (f.) Tovs MttKcSovas iTTircas. This word appears to be used adjectively here 
 and in c. G^, oi Ma^eSoi^ej tTTTr^s. So also we have ol 'EWrfves ireXraffTai, 
 Xen. Ayiab. vi. 5, 26, and such phrases as tV "EWaSa yXicacav. 
 
 Chapter LXIII. — («.) oirorepwo-c 8iaKiv8vvcv<r)] X'^P^*'"*? — in which of 
 the two directions he should run the risk of going. The subj. after T}ir6pri<T€ is 
 
 given by Bekker for the future, -veucrei. It is remarked that x<^PV<rac might 
 liave been employed, or the word altogether omitted, as in vii. i ; vui. 47. 
 «s h adxt<rTov x"ptov— * into as narrow a space as possible,' because the 
 denser the column, the more easily they would force their way through the 
 enemy. Popp. points out that x'^P^ot' stands for 'spatium,' n. 77, 78. The 
 transposition for is u,s iXdxcarou is to be noticed. See Matth. Or. Or § 461, 
 and cf. with G. iii. 46, 6rc h ^paxvrdr^. ^u.<raa^a.-M<c hiS 
 
 y^u into Potid<Ba. x^^v-lit. Uhe claw of a Inrd. Here the 
 
 'mole ' or 'stone- break water,' which, as Arn. points out, after being constructed 
 just below tlie sea-wall of the ancient towns, in order to strengthen them, was 
 afterwards continued so as to narrow the entrance of the harbour. It projected 
 like a talon or claw, and hence its name. Aristeus could not enter the regular gates 
 of the town, as the Athenians had probably cut off the retreat, and in passing 
 alon.' tlie mole he was exposed to missiles from the ships. 8ia is 
 
 undoubtedly 'through the sea,' as is easily intelligible from the position of the 
 mole Others have rendered it prwter vel propter mare, which meaning 
 Popp. says only exists in the poets, Herod., and the ancient writers. But 
 
 366 xl C» 
 
 (6 ) KaTa(|>av^s. We may either, says Pop., understand x^^'P'O" or ^'- ^"<^ 
 the neuter form of the predicate need not be tied down to any particular word. 
 We may translate-* in sight,' which would imply that the places were recipro- 
 aUly visible, which sense seems to be required here. Pop. refers to e7rc4>a.is, 
 said of Decelea, vii. 19, which is apparently taken in an active sense ' lat us 
 lateprospectans,' Tac. Jlist. iii. 60. Kriig. has ' ein libersichtlicher Raum ; 
 and cf. Trr^XciSes, vi. loi. ^7t7V€TO . . . ^pH The tenses vary 
 
 as the sense reciuires-fw soon as the bcdtle began (of a continuous action), and 
 the standards were uplifted (of an act done once for all). Cf. Karecirdcdv intra. 
 Vide Append, on Aorist. S^a raxovs- Cf. xl. c. 
 
 (c ) {,'Tro(rTr(5v8ovs-* under a truce,' the technical term. This was the re- 
 gular* admission of defeat upon the part of those who ,-equested the permission, 
 ^.f ^ ^ dir^eavov. The exceedingly interesting inscription upon 
 
 the Athenians who fell in this battle may still be seen in the British Museum 
 where it was placed by Lord Elgin. It is engraved upon a small stone found 
 in the plain of the Academy, and is much mutilated. See Bockh s Restorations 
 Corpus Inscript. i. p. 300, and Arnold's note. It forms part of the subject of 
 an interesting lecture by the Professor of Anc. History, Oxford. 
 
 Chapter LXIV.-(a.) rh U tov IcrOfiov tcixos. Compare KUapxos Kai ol 
 it i^eiuov, Xen. Anab. i. ii. 15. The preposition here is equivalent to «, or ab, 
 a parte, as in ' Pastor ab Amphryso,' and the whole means * the wall on the 
 side of the Isthmus'-i.e. the wall on the outer or northern side towards Olyn- 
 thus; as towards the close of the chapter, rb iK rri, UaWv^vs is the w all on the 
 side of Pallene-i. e, the south or inner wall. The same wall had been called 
 rb i, WaWi^v-nv, but the difference arises from the different point of view-« 
 implying the wall, which the spectator sees when looking fi-om Pallene (eK 
 lIaX\^.r,,) ; is, the wall which itself looks towards Pallene. It is clear, says 
 Am., from Herod, viii. 129, that Potid^a occupied the whole space across the 
 neck of land from sea to sea, and that, consequently, the Athenians on one side 
 
 i 
 
76 
 
 NOTES ON TIILXVDIDES. 
 
 [liOOK I. 
 
 CUAP. 67.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 77 
 
 could not communicate with those on the other. diroTcix^o-avTcs. 
 
 This is the technical terra for a wall built for the puqwse of cutthuj of comrau- 
 nication from a ulace, and this is the sense conveyed by the preposition, cf. viii. 
 26, vii. 6. The imperfect i<t>povpovv implies that they regularly garrisoned and 
 continued to guard it. SCxa, an adverbial predicate— m two different 
 
 directions— apart, Krug., cf. vi. 100. utci'xkttov must be consi- 
 
 dered as equivalent to ovk diroTeixKrTov. 
 
 {b.) 'A<|>vTios. Kriig. remarks that this is an Ionic genitive like Tod^ios, 
 iv. 107, and KWStos, v. 51. So even in Xenoph<m, Af/. ii. 18, we have Kpe&- 
 aios. The town was situated on the shore towards the E., near the present 
 village of Athyto, Leake iii. 156. 6pfi(ifjL«vos-lit. startinrj frcrm, 
 
 i.e. making that his starting place, or head-quarters— the regular miliUiry term, 
 as in Xenophon, passim. Cf. iii. 31, iv. 52 ; so also icpop/nflu is the usual tenu 
 for a naval blockade. Cf. i. 116-142. dHi<|>oWp«0cv refers to the 
 
 two walls on land, specified at the beginning of the chajder. viKav— 
 
 Uo be victors: Engelman well remarks that this transmutation of a transi- 
 tive into an intransitive verb, is common to all languages. Cf. iXevdepoOv, 'to 
 be liberators; i. 69. dSiKoviuLeu, we are f/uilfn, iii. So *amare' is 'to be in love; 
 and Trinlrn in German, as 'to drink' in English, means ' to be a drunkard/ and 
 ivlKU is said of the Olympic victor. 
 
 Chapter LXV. — (r^) dTroTcixt<re€i(rTis - Kal— lx«v. Uemark the con- 
 nexion of a genitive absolute with a nominative hy Kal: the same takes place 
 with T€ /cat also. Popp. quotes similar examples, c. 67, iv. 29, 100, 124, v. 1 16 
 VI. 93. &XXo K.T.X. — or if anijthinfj else, contrary to exftectation, turn 
 
 up. Kriig. says, we should have anticipated dWodev, but, as in the version 
 given, dWo is more indefinite. Kriig. himself quotes v. 80, Kal d-rroaa dW^Xwu 
 TToMfiip ^ ei Ti dWo elxov. There is a question between the readings wapd 
 \hop and TrapdXoyov. Bl. argues, that as Thuc. uses the substantive irapd- 
 Xoyo^, it is unlikely that he would also employ the same word as an adjective 
 masculine. tA itri tovtois—' that irhich was to follow next upon 
 
 these thinus—i.e. the next steps to be taken. tcL ^5w0€V— ' what 
 
 was to be expected from abroad.' Poppo says the expression eipials rd ^^w, but 
 this seems inaccurate, as the above translation is meant to show. 
 
 (6.) rd dXXa. This construction may be regarded as a sort of extension of 
 the cognate accusative: so Kriig., who considers it equivalent to vbX^ixov iroXt- 
 fidv. Tr. 'he both took part in the other operations of the war.' 
 ^€p\kv\i(av. This gen. has been considered as dependent both upon ir6\et and 
 ToXXoi's. Perhaps the last is more probable, as the Athenians have not lately 
 been named. At v. 18, we find tliem in subjection to Athens. The place was 
 situated in Sithonia, Herod, vii. 122, and is now called IVa 'OpfivXia, accord- 
 ing to Leake, iii. 153. ^9 ri\v ncXoirdvvTio-ov ^Trpaa-crci — a common 
 form of condensation, cf. c. 51, on eVeXei/Ta is pvktu. Popp. also compare* 
 KeXeveiv is ttju AaKeSaifiova, iv. 108, aTparlav iirayyaXeiv is rovs avpudxovs, 
 ^'"- ' ^ 7- 8'n-Q — for this, dirws has been conjectured, because the 
 latter is universally the word employed by Thuc. after irpdaaecK But there is 
 no reason in grammar, nor in the nature of things, why we should not alsp 
 employ oTrrj. And Kriig. observes that we have eiry Tpdvip, iv. 128, and 
 
 troulu 6Trri, vi. 93. * Bottice, or Bottica, denotes the new country of the Bot- 
 tiapans, to the east of Potidsea and the Gulf of Therma, where they had settled 
 after they had been driven out of their old country by the Macedonians [Thuc. 
 ii. 99]. But Bottiaia denotes their old country, situated much more to the west- 
 ward, between the rivers Axius and Lydias, of which Herod, speaks, vii. 123, 
 127. In the Thracian invasion. Si takes overran Bottica, but never penetrated 
 as far as Bottiaea, ii. 99, 100, loi.' Arnold. 
 
 Chapter LXVL— (a.) Iwc^pw^cu The form ^vppwffu for ^vp'pr}aw occurs, 
 says Bl., also in Dio Cassius, 186, 62. 1247, 53. 6 irbXep-os ^vveppihyei. In all 
 probability it is a direct hnitation of this. Kriig. cf. 6 Tr6Xep.os Kareppdyr), 
 Arist. Eq. 644. dvaKwx^— a graphic term, * a holding back;' some- 
 
 times also employed of a temporary suspension of hostilities. lot<j. 
 
 'on their own account,' i. e. as Popp. explains, i>er se, ' non co7isultis sociis.' 
 
 Chapter LXVIL— (o.) evdvrwv- ScSio'tcs. Cf. c. 55 a. -ircpl 
 
 Tw xwpiw— as we, * beinff alarmed about the place.' See with the dative, i. 6, 
 and ii. 5. <nrov8ds. See c. 53 a. 
 
 {b.)ivr\yov -cfjged on, or urr/ed on the uar. Kpv<j>a Kriig. 
 
 connects with Trp€(TJ3ev6p.€uoi, whereas Hermann, ad Elect, v. 1059, '"^"^ ™«»^ 
 others, attach it to iurjyou. His words are ' Particulee ,i€P-U interdum ad ea 
 tjintum ipsa, qu£e opposita inter se sunt, referuntur, manente constructione 
 participii.' Kriig. 's method avoids this difficulty, but is less obvious. Arnold 
 believes that rds <nrov5ds must refer to the thirty years' truce, and indeed, when 
 the word occurs thus with the article, this peace is commonly meant. It has 
 been objected by Muller, Jujinetica, p. iSo, and GciUer, that this cannot be so, 
 as .Egina had been reduced by Athens before the commencement of the thirty 
 years' peace (cf. i. ic8), and he thinks that reference is made to the general 
 compact, entered into by the Greeks after Plataea. Cf. ii. ^2, iii. 68. Krug. 
 adheres to the former opinion, conjecturing that in some way or other provision 
 had been made in the thirty years' peace by the Lacedaemonians for the avro- 
 vofxLa of ^gina. See similar provisions for the Olynthians and others in the 
 peace of Nicijis, v. 18; and of the same opinion is Arnold. Grote, vol. vi. 
 p 104, is undecided. * Muller s opinion,' he says, 'might seem to be counte- 
 nanced by the allusion to yEgina in the speech of the Thebans, iii. 64; but on 
 the other hand, if we consult i. 1 15, it will appear possible that the wording of 
 the thirty years' truce may have been general, as dwodovvai 5^ 'Adr]vaiovs 6(ra 
 {xov(nneXoTrouv7)<jiu}u; at any rate, the ^ginetans may have pretended that 
 by the same rule as Athens gave up Nisea, Pegae, &c., she ought also to re- 
 nounce JtWm^. However, we must recollect that the one plea does not exclude 
 the other -."the ^Eginetans may have taken advantage of both in enforcing their 
 prayer for interference. This seems to have been the idea of the Schol.' 
 
 (r ) Kal €t t£s Tt dXXo— ' and any of the allies that had any other wrong to 
 complain of,' Jelf, § 45, 3- rls dXXos, the proposed alteration, is inferior to the 
 original reading, for any other injury is the prominent part of the idea. 
 Tov cUeora. The ordinary assembly, consisting of all Spartan citizens who 
 had attained to the age of thirty years, Am. Popp. points out that it is called 
 T, iKKXr,<xla t(ov AaKeSaifiopiu^p, c. 87, and rb nXridos avrC>v, c. 72. It is so 
 caUed, probably, to distinguish it from r, /xtAcpd'E/c/cXr^crm, which was composed 
 
78 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book I. ■ Chap. 69.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 79 
 
 only of the Spartiate Peers, or 6/10161, to the exclusion of the LacedjemonianH. 
 See on the subject of these assemblies, MuUer's Dor. vol. ii. ch. 5, and the remarks 
 of Grote, vol. vi. p. 105. Remark the usage of voUu) in Troir)<7avTes, so like that 
 of our own verb to make. Cf. i. 139, iv. 118. Xip.^va>v cCp'yco'Oai. 
 
 This celebrated decree, which inflicted so much distress upon the Athenians, is 
 much harped upon by Aristophanes. The student should refer to the Achar. 
 vv. 477, 729, 752, 758. The Schol. on Ramv, v. 273, preserves the terms of 
 the decree, Meyap^a^ /jltit' dyopds, M^^^ daXdaarjs, fi-qr -fjinipov jxtTixav. See 
 also I*Iut. V'tt. Pcrir. c. -29. 
 
 Chapter LXVIII. — (a.) rh irnrrdv. The reliahiUti/, if there were such a 
 word, in default of which render (joud fa it?i, loijaute, it means the trustworthi- 
 ness of their conduct in all the relations of internal policy and private life. 
 Cf. t6 TTKTTdv TTJs d\T)d(ias, Soph. Track, v. 398, cf. Jelf, § 436, 7. 
 dirio-TOT^povs — /f** inclined to suspicion, or, ' less ready to believe us when we 
 say, activo sensu, less ready to believe,' cf. iv. 17, viii. 66. is 
 
 Tovs aXXovs. This is generally connected with dvia-TOT^povs — 'less suspicious 
 towards all the rest of the world, in the event of our saijinr/ ani/thinf/ ayainst 
 them. Others give a different force to ^5 rous dWoi/j — more incredulous 
 towards the rest of us, if we have anything to say. Both are possible. 
 To the first it has been objected that the Corinthians were going to accuse 
 the Athenians alone. But this is surely futile, for the general form in which 
 the expression is couched is precisely what we should have anticipated in a 
 rhetorical statement. Nor is Poppo's assertion that tovs dWoi's (in the second 
 method of taking the words) cannot include the Corinthians, because rjfjieis is 
 subsequently distinguished from tovs ^vjufidxovs roiVSe, anything more than a 
 hypercriticism ; for of course it is possible for them sometimes to identify 
 themselves with the rest, and sometimes not. His own way of taking the 
 words is to connect them with Xeyw/j-ev — * if tee have anything to say against the 
 rest.' But here the first given objection would apply, and Popp. seems sensible 
 of it, for he conjectures Tovs'Adrjvalovs — and surely in this case we should have 
 had dWovs sine articulo. The i^v ti Xiyu/jiey is a sort of euphemistic expres- 
 sion with which Kriig. well compares Ar. Ach. v. 579, ^iryyvw/xrjv ?;^f, d 
 irrwx^s <*»' ctTTOi' ri Kqi(TTUfxv\diJ.7]v. <rw<|>po<rvv'»]v * moderation.' 
 
 See an explanation of what is meant by the word, c. 84, § 2. 
 d^aOka, cf. Sheppard's Theophrast. ch. ix. p. 115. 
 
 (6.) T^v }i.d6T]<riv ^-irouiTc, is said to be identical with IfxavdiveTe, but there 
 is, I think, always some shade of difference between the simple verb, and the 
 cognate noun with iroUw. The latter seems to dwell more upon the action 
 expressed by the verb : tr. took the trouble to inform yourselves. 
 Twv XrydvTwv k. t. X. Am. has a very long note, following Pop. ed. Maj. 
 wherein lie says that the gen. XeybvTUJv depends upon the latter part of the sen- 
 tence, and that ws Xiyovai. is exactly equivalent to t6 X^7fij', the gen, expressing 
 that connexion of the subject spoken of with the verb which is expressed 
 in English by the prep. * in.' But it has always seemed to me much more 
 simple to make the gen. governed by virevoure, and wj \4yovffi. one of those 
 recurrences to the directa oratio so common — * You suspected the speakers and 
 (declared) that they arc speaking for their private interest,* Suu^pa 
 
 slightly differs from its use in the last ch., where it was 'points of difference ;^ 
 here it is, 'points which make a difference.' See note on ibiq. ti avT(^ dia^ipei, 
 iii. 42. ^v Tu» ^p-yw — actually involved in the evil ; this is the pri- 
 
 mary force of the preiwsition, as may be seen in such phrases as ifi^aTiveiv wa- 
 TpiSos, Sophocles, cf. iii. Pop. renders it apud, coram. 
 
 (c.) d<|>avcis — * if they were committing this wrong in a corner.' 
 ovK cl8<J<ri. Dat. commodi, 'as to persons ignorant of the fact,' cf. ii. 36; iv. 
 ^g. ^oXcpifjcrovTai for TroXfixrjOrjffovTai, Poppo. This is one of the 
 
 cases which will illustrate the way in which a middle sense passes into some- 
 thing like a passive one. See the observations, iii. 40, and Jelf, § 364, and 
 transl. bring irar upon themselves, viii. 43, and biairoXepi-qaeadaL, vii. 14. 
 
 ((/.) ov -ya-p dv — 'for otherwise they woidd not,' supply with Poppo, et p,^ 
 •jrpoirap€(TK€va<jp.ivoL ^aav is v6X€p.ov. viroXapdvTcs. This is ex- 
 
 l^lained by the Scholiast 5f^dp.€V0L, and by Thom. Mag. TrpoXa^dures, but I have 
 little doubt but that Stephanus was right in thinking tliat inrb contained the 
 sense, clam, et per insidias, an opinion which has been repeated by several 
 editors. Cf. with Kriig. i. 121, 143. d'iroxpil<r6ai. A. interprets 
 
 this, * to give you the full benefit of your dominion in Thrace,' and it is certain 
 that such a use of dirb may be supported. But this does not seem to me called 
 for by the sense. It is better to take the old inteq)retation, * to avail yourself 
 of,' 'to reap the benefit of.' Goll. compares diro^riv, i. 2, and Kriig. vi. 17; 
 vii. 42. So, says Popp., the Latins use abuti, liber e uti. 
 rb }Uv, which might have been i] p.iv, referring to KepKvpa, is attracted to 
 
 XibpiOV. 
 
 Chapter LXIX. — (a.) Kparvvai. A somewhat poetic and rhetorical 
 word, cf. iii. 18, 82. On the subject compare c. 90 and 107. Kriig. 
 diro<rTcpovvT€s — active voice upon the principle of * Qui facit per alium facit 
 per se,' as is explained in the next section. 
 
 (b.) cttrcp K.T.X. Am. quotes with approval Hermann's dictum, ' eiirep doKel 
 COL, dicimus ei de quo non certo scimus quid ei ])laceat, aut de quo id nescire 
 sinmlamus,' and renders, 'if he mukes a x^retention of being the deliverer of 
 Greece, we cannot say whether he does make it, but if he does.' This I believe 
 to be wrong, et-rrep, as its form in)j)orts (cf. Sanep, ch. 8 b, and Donaldson, 
 N. Crat. § 1 78), will be found ui)on a careful induction, more especially in the 
 philosophers, always to assume the hypothesis which it makes ; sometimes, it is 
 true, only temporarily and for the sake of argument, but still always to assume 
 it, especially if they carry off the honour of being the liberators of Greece, as I 
 suppose you think you do. I was induced to examine the question, owing to 
 an assertion in a note by the learned editor of the Agamemnon (Peile), ad v. -29. 
 * (tfrep is used when the proposition is doubtful.' But after the largest induc- 
 tion which I have been enabl«;d to make, I find that direp always assumes the 
 hypothesis either from its intrinsic truth, or simply for the sake of argument ; 
 and it is from cases of the last sort that the notion of its doubtfulness arises. 
 Numerous instances of this will present themselves to the reader throughout 
 Thucydides. But it is still more important to trace the usage in strictly argu- 
 mentative writers like Aristotle. It will be found that he is perpetually stating 
 his principles in a delicate way by etirep, while his mere 56^ai are introduced 
 
8o 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book I. 
 
 by el. The real state of a disputed fact, he, for the purpose of avoiding dogma- 
 tism, continually introduces by dW cltrep—e.g. Men do not wish for the good 
 of an inanimate object, except so far forth as may be desirable for themselves 
 yeXolov T(^ oivip ^ovXeaOaL rAyaOa, d\X etirep adj'ieadai ^ovXerat avrbv, tVa aiV^s 
 ^XV- Here dTr^p obviously and necessarily assumes the supposition contained in 
 ^ovXerai. See again £th. yic/i. lib. vii. c. 7, x. 3. To go through the instances 
 which I have selected would be tedious ; but even in the very case quoted by 
 Peile, ad J<jc., etirep ti 7 iffri riji dXriddas adivo%, it:. T. v. 369, the 'vis 
 veritatis' is assumed as a foundation for what follows. A long note will per- 
 haps be pardoned, as the matter is of great importance from the use of the 
 word in arguments, and Mr. Stanley, I perceive, in his truly valuable work on 
 the Corinthians, has again reprwluced the assertion about its being a particle 
 of uncertainty. The error arises from contrasting it solely with ei 7e, which 
 assumes the same hypothesis in a more emphatic, and, so to speak, deictic and 
 lively way. Peile himself has elsewhere said, * If the original notion of vcpl be 
 connected with that of its derivative, TrepiaaSs excess, we shall lie led, consider- 
 ing irep as a kindred particle, to the same inteqjretiition, roaov Trcp—thus much 
 ami more; full as much." Afjam. v. 141. d|Cw<ris— nearly as d^lufxa. 
 
 Krlig. cf. i. 138, ii. 2, iii. 37. 4>€pcTai, I believe to be a metaphor 
 
 from the games ; as we say, 'hear off the prize; (others tr. 'ostentatiously set 
 forth i cf. prae ae ferunt.) If d^t'wo-ts be taken activo sensu, then we must 
 tr. '*<■ rirtutem palam sibi rindicat,' as Popp. ; but this is not so good : for, as 
 Kriig. indicates, cf. ii. 11, with ii. 60, and iii. 53. ©l -ydp 8paivT€s. 
 
 The do€r.s, the act ire party, or it may be possible to supply dbiKa to the parti- 
 ciple from d5t/cor/xe^a, and tr. 'the wrony-docrs: Either is preferable to dis- 
 connecting oi and dpu>vT€s, and making the first here a demonstrative pronoun, 
 as it sometimes is before 5e. Tr. therefore, for the wrony-doers are comiiiy ayainst 
 persons who have not yet made up their mind, with their own measures already 
 taken, and 7iot merely threateniny; rather than, for they already actiny, are 
 coming ayainst, dc jieXXtjo-is denotes a menacing attitude; as A. 
 
 explains, holding up the stick, but never striking. Cf. iv. 126. 
 
 (c.) Ka£— 'a not unfrequent use of Acat, by which it is nearly equivalent to 
 dXXd, immo, the literal sense being 'and now,' as in Arist. Pac. 402, /cat 
 act (ppdau} tl irpdyp-a Seivbv Kai fiiya, ' P.l. kolt 6\Cyov—sfep by step, 
 
 creeping on. Kriig. well com[)are8 Kar' oXlyov t6 irpCjTov ipLirlTTTovca, Plat. 
 Timieus, 85, d. rh dvat<r0T]Tov- ' //ojtr inmmbility,' 'your want 
 
 of perception of ivhat is going on about you/ Krug. remarks that the word is 
 not used by Thucyd. in so contemptuous a sense as by Demosthenes. Cf. i. 82, 
 vi. 86. This seeujs true of the later writers. See an examination of the 
 Character, Sheppard's Theophrastus, ch. x. ^icXXtjo-ci. Cf. supra, a. 
 
 {d.) ao-4)aX6ts — ' safe men;' lit. ' such as cannot be trij)jH;d up in wrestling.' 
 Cf. <ppov€lu yap oi rax^U ovk dafpaX^L^, (Edip. Tyr.Oiy. ^v refers of course 
 
 to vpeis, and must be resolved into its constituents — 'thmigh, as it now seems, 
 what was said of you transcended the reality: In Thuc. the perjietual antithesis 
 between \670s and ipyov must be rendered sometimes in one way, and some- 
 times in another : tDv has been taken for the neuter— /Ac common report about 
 which things; but I cannot believe this to be right. irpoairaVTtj<rai 
 
 •^'before the preparations made by you suitably encountered/ or rather 'antici- 
 
 Chap. 70.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 81 
 
 pated him on the way.' The infinitive, says Popp., stands after irporepdv ij, as 
 commonly after wpiv. Cf. note, ch. 39 b., and vi. 58, and Jelf. So after 
 vffTcpov ij, vi. 4. Kttl Is Tvxas — KaTacrrfjvai. Popp. tr. Fortunoi 
 
 casus subire. The meaning of the whole is, undoubtedly, to expose yourselves to 
 the influence of accident by struggling against your enemies when they have become 
 more powerful, and not before — i. e. by delaying the struggle until they are so. Cf. 
 iirl tA? dfpavfis eX7ri5a$ Kadiaravai, v. 103. avrbv ircpl avTw a-^aX(vTa — 
 
 metiiphor from shipwreck, that he was the rock upon v;hich he himself made ship- 
 wreck — i. e. his own errors were for the most part the cause of his failure. Com- 
 ])are vi. 33, Trcpt (r<t>l<Tiv aiTois rd wXelu Trraiujaiv, and Herod, ix. 101, p.T} irepi 
 yiapdovlif) TTTalari r]"EXXas. 
 
 (e.) at v)Ur€pai ^irCBcs. The pronoun stands, as often, for the objective 
 ufenitive — the hopes of which you are the object; cf. ch. 33; Jelf, § 652, 6. 
 Tivds- Reference is made, perhaps, to the Thasians (i. loi), the Euboeans 
 {[. 114), certainly to the Potida^atans (i. 58), Popp. airU^ — is 
 
 ' charge' in general, here, a * friendly remonstrance.' Kan^'yopCa 
 
 has a more s|)ecial and forensic sense — an accusation at law. 
 
 Chapter LXX. — (a.) &|tot — it is our desert — we may claim. t»v 
 
 5i,a4>€pdvTwv. Cf. note, c. 68 b. ; tr. as dia<p6pu}v — * the interests which are at 
 atake being great:' the 5ia<p^povrai which follows is, ' differing in character.* 
 o^ovs vjiiv must be taken in close connexion with 6 dywv ^arai. Cf. infra. 
 
 (6.) 6%il% cirivoTio-aw is ' quick at devising novelties ;' the ^Trt in composition 
 denotes something over and above what has been before : from the d^eh is de- 
 rived b}' Zeugma another adjective, which governs aw^eiv. ' The meaning of 
 o^cts, ' sharp,' when applied to the latter half of the sentence, is in the nature 
 of a sarcasm,' G rote, vol. vi. p. 110. Goller's idea of understanding kai'oi in- 
 stead of o^cts, is, I think, quite unnecessary. i-iriyvuvai has reference to 
 iirivoiiffaL, and the preposition has the same force, to devise fresh measures, 
 i^iKi<rdai — ' to folloic out.' ' A meaning,' says Kriig., * and construction which 
 I am unable elsewhere to find.' irapd 8vvap,iv ToXjir^Tat — daring 
 beyond their pou'cr. The words which follow I understand to mean, ' venture- 
 some beyond what their sober judgment sanctions,' and are explained by the anti- 
 thetical clause, TTJs yvwfiTjs p-v^^ toU ^e^aion TrtoreOffat, to have no con^dence 
 even in such schemes as their judgment sanctions, cf. Jelf, 442 a. Many other 
 translations have been suggested ; but I have little doubt as to the correctness 
 of the above. rh 8i dpircpov — it is your way, or your characteristic, 
 to perform what falls short of your power — i.e. not to effect all you are able to 
 effect. Livy seems to refer to this (as Bl. observes). *Atheniensium populum 
 fama est celerem et supra vires audacem esse ad conandum; Lacedaemoniorum 
 cunctatorem, et vix in ea quibus fidit ingredientem,' xlv. 23. 
 
 (c.) p.€XXT]Tds: d'iro8T]p.T]TaC: cvB-qiioTaTovs. All these words are of pecu- 
 liar signiiicance; on the first, see sup. c. 69 b. ; the second means, ' roamers 
 abroad;' the third, ' stay at homes.' dirodrjpeLV and evorjpe'iv were used at 
 Athens to express our ideas * at home' and * abroad.' €|^p\ovTai — 
 
 'follow out their advantages to the utmost,' Popp. tr. longissime progrediuntur. 
 Si verba explicanda essent longissime victoriam persequuntur, ex tribus pessimis 
 membranis scribendum esset iire^^pxovraL. The translation I have given is not 
 
82 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book T. 
 
 Chap. 7 1.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 83 
 
 to be restricted to actual pursuit of an enemy. dvaTrfirrovo-iv. This 
 
 verb deiiotea the action of a man who throws himself back from his task in phy- 
 sical exhaustion or despondency. Am. says it is a strange mistake of Athenseus 
 to suppose that its primary meaning is mental discouragement, for in all lan- 
 guages terms expressive of mental operations are borrowed from those of the body. 
 This is quite true; but it seems a no less strange mistake of his own to derive 
 the notion 'dispirited' from * the movement of a rower who throws himself back 
 to give force to his stroke.' Neither does Athenseus /oc. c<V. s.ay so much, but 
 iirl ^I'xv^ iffTip ohv advfiuv. IrX 8i rots <rwfia<riv k. t.X. Thirf 
 
 antithesis here expressed is, though somewhat difficult to translate, easy 
 enough to understand. ' They are as reckless of their persons as if they did 
 not belong to them, when fighting for their country, but they are most thorough 
 masters of their intellect, and employ all its powers in her service' — i. e. hus- 
 banding all its resources, and allowing none other the advantage of them. The 
 orators seemed to have admired the sentiment, for it has been imitated by Iso- 
 crates, Panet/yric, p. 58. and Lysias, Orat. funeb. p. 87. See Am. and Kriig. 
 Some have regarded oiKeiOTdTjj as if it belonged to ir6\et — 'most entirely the 
 property of their country/ but if the antithetical word dWoTpioTCLTOis has refer- 
 ence to the subject of the verb, this must also. 
 
 (d.) l^iKQua-iv. This is Poppo's and Bekker's reading from most MSS. 
 He quotes Soph. Trach. v. 506, i^ijXdov &€6\' d-yu.vwv. Kriig. has ^ire^- 
 iXdojffiv. ^X^^a . . . TrpdlavTts- The construction seems to be, 
 
 Tjyovvrai rvx^'i-v Trpd^avTe^ dXlya rrpb^ rd /x^Wovra. They think they hare 
 chanced to effect but little as compared with what they will hei'eafter effect. ' Ac- 
 cording to Matthias, the participle irpd^avT^^ stands for the infin. irpd^ai, as 
 dependent upon ijyovvTai.' Bl., who tr., vhatever thei/ so pursue at to f/ain, they 
 esteem trijling compared with what they may chance in, future to attain to. Cf. 
 Jelf, § 683. Peile believes * the correct version of this difficult passage' to be, 
 ' A 7id whatever indeed having projected, they shall not have followed out, they 
 reckon (their own to lose, i.e.) an adv^al loss of their own property ; but 
 whatever having followed up they shall have acquired, (they reckon) a trijle when 
 contpared with what they were to have succeeded in effecting, as if in the last 
 clause it had been irpbt B, f/MeWov rvx^iv irpd^avrei, cf. iii. lO. /coi (fieWov, ol 
 p-kv TiPfs dp.apTri(T€ff6ai, ol 5^ irXelovs Tfv^effdat. tov dXijdov^ Xoyiffpov, iii. 22. 
 xai (peXXov du'aciv k.t.X. lirX^pwo'av ti?|v xpcCav. The true aorist, 
 
 denoting an act not restricted to any special time, past, present, or future, 
 which we somewhat clumsily express by a present. They supply the deficiency, 
 i.e., are wont to supply. «'Tri)^€ipTj<riv k.t.X. — because they imme- 
 
 diately set themselces about attempting whatever they have made up their minds 
 about, — i.e., make their attempt an immediate one. Kriig. cf. iTix^iprjan tQv 
 'EimroXuv, vii. 43. 'The attempt upon Epipolae.* 
 
 {e. ) fi.ox0ov<riv, as our word toil, is somewhat poetic, and as Kriig. remarks, 
 scarcely used in plain Attic prose ; but it seems to have a peculiar appropri- 
 ateness here with alQvos, cf. Horn. Od. E. 202, cf. ii. 39. In speeches 
 Xenophon frequently employs it. KTd<r0at. Note the present, 
 
 * being always in the act of acquiring.' €opTf|V — Think nothing else 
 
 a holiday, than the doing what the occasion requires. There seems some tacit re- 
 ference to the practice of the Lacedsemonians, who, as on the occasion of 
 
 Marathon, would not go forth upon even the most necessary expedition during 
 the time of a festival. On this account, I think Reiske's interpretation of the 
 word, delicia^, rolupfatem, is incorrect ; and Dio Cassius probably overlooked 
 the allusion when he substituted evdaipoviav in the imitated passage, xxxviii. 
 37. Cf. Miiller's Dor., book ii. ir€<|>vK€vat. Cf. Xen. Mem. ii. i, 9. 
 
 (iovXopivovs TToXXd irpdypara ix^*-^ avrois re Kal &XX01S irap^x^'-^' 
 
 Chapter LXXI. — (a.) TavTTjs ji^toi k. t. X. This and the following sen- 
 tence are confe.ssedly difficult. I will first mention what I myself imagine to 
 l>e the meaning, and which I now find to be nearly that given by Blooraf. : 
 * And yet when such a State as this stand-i, as it were, in baffle array against 
 you, Laced(vmonians, ye continue {5ia) to procrastinate ; and think not that 
 j)eace endures langexf for those men, who go not indeed beyond what is just in the 
 matter of armament, yet plainly show that their resolution is, if they be uronged, 
 not to permit it ; but ye hold fair dialing to consist in doing no violence to others, 
 while ye prevent injury to yourseh'es by repelling it when attempted.^ The second 
 clause of the sentence would naturally have commenced with oieade 8^, and con- 
 tained some other oi)inion concerning the nature of a durable peace, ascribed to 
 the Lacediemonians. But with that love of variety which we have so often 
 remarked, (cf. ch. 38 c,) as characteristic of Greek composition, the antithetical 
 clause is cast into a new form, rij irapaaKevri I have translated 'armament,' 
 for want of a single word which better expresses its meaning ; but it must be 
 understood to include all acts and measures which might awaken the jealousy 
 of a neighbouring government. Bl. says, * I must still adhere to my opinion 
 t\i&t T^ TrapaffKevT) means in vita institutione.' rb taov v^p-ere — lit. 'ye allot, 
 or deal out the equitable, — i.e., equity.' Tlie translation given to it is therefore 
 quite as tenable as Am.'s, to deal justly, or Donaldson's, 'ye lead a life of 
 easy indifference,' or Poppo's 'aquifaf cm colitis.' dpvvopevot caji scarce mean 
 'suffering harm, by attempting to defend yourselves/ for by no code is self- 
 defence considered as inconsistent with justice ; and again, it is going much too 
 far to say that the Lacedaemonians would noidcfend themselves, which in this case 
 the orator would imply. pXdirretreai, says Donaldson {N C. § 454), is a 
 
 certain deoree of harm or mischance, a hindrance or accidental harm ; (this I 
 have pointed out with examples in a note upon ^sch. Ag. v. 119. Termlnalia 
 
 [[■^ never an injury of that kind which can cause resentment. The present 
 
 passage has, he thinks, been misinterpreted by all commentators. His own 
 version is, — 'It is not your opinion that those persons enjoy peace the longest, who 
 while they act justly, show they have made tip their minds not to submit to injury, 
 hut you observe the rule of non-interference,— i.e., you are strictly neutral or im- 
 partial, 0)1 the principle of not hurting others, and of avoiding the inconveniences 
 to which reprisals woxdd subject you.' 
 
 (6.) dpxaioTpoira, exactly corresponding to 'old-fashioned.' 
 •irpi)S aiTov%—when compared with them. A very natural ellipse for Tpbs rd 
 ^iriTTjSeu/xara avrdv. In a similar manner, rix^rjs stands for uaTrep rex^V^ 
 del rd iinyiyvbpeva /cparet. Bl. is scarce right in saying with respect to the 
 government of t^x^V^ 'supply did or vepi.' The ' additions here of course are 
 the improvements made from time to time. Illustrations will occur to every 
 one. Cf. Xen. i. 6, 38. 4iriTcxvTJ<r6«s. The iiri has the same 
 
 G 2 
 
84 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book I. 
 
 Chap. 73.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 85 
 
 force as in iwiyvivmi, ch. 70 b., which see; but as the word Tfx»^ has been 
 used, 67rtrex''WfW5, says Popp., 'exquisite positum est.* The verb occurs, 
 Herod, ii, 2, 1 19. Gr«)te gives the sense correctly, but somewhat too magnilo- 
 quentlyfora Spartan, ' mnUipUclty of active oblUjations rer^uire^ multiplicity 
 and novelty of contrivance.^ 
 
 (<?.) jicxplTovSc. Let your procrastination be limited by this; go thus far, 
 and no further. The words fifxP^ and dxpl I believe sometimes signify, not 
 simply up to a certain point in time or space, but coincident or co-extensive with 
 a certain amount of time or space. iripav riva ^vjijiax^av rp^^/T^Tc. 
 
 This probably refers to the Argives, who were ever ready to take advantage of 
 any opportunity to establish a counter influence to Sparta in the Peninsula. 
 
 ((/.) 0€to)V Twv bpKiuiV. • The 'wds who were called upon to witness the oaths.' 
 Expressed by Livy—Ftederum arbitros ac testes. Liv. xxi. 10. Poppo. 
 Twv al<r9avo|X€'v(uv, /. e., aladrjciv ix^vTu}v, <Ppovlfxu}v. This makes the expres- 
 sion the exact antithesis to dvaLadriTi^jv, and we may render it, men of feeling 
 and intelligence. Popp. refers to v. 26, and Xen. Mem. iv. i, i. Otherwise— 
 * of these men icho witness the act,' under whose cognizance it comes, as the oaths 
 came under the cognizance of the gods. ipr\^Cav— deserted, and 
 
 therefore defenceless position. Kriig. cf iii. 67. ^a-ia—'hoh/ in the 
 
 sight of gods'— from which we may infer the strength of the religious feehng 
 connected with the idea of race. 4Ct]7€i<reai. The notion is, ' Do 
 
 not let the power and glory of Peloponnesus degenerate under your Headship.' 
 Popp. explains the construction eXdaffu, = to dare Adtraw dmi: others say 
 that the double accusative is occasioned by the eUiptical way of speaking, rijv 
 lUXoTTovuTjaov iXdaau) KaTaaTrjaai (^rryovfi^uov^. To me it seems explicable by 
 Prolepsis. On the verb i^rfy^ofiai in this sense, cf. i. 76, 95 ; vi. 85, and L. 
 and S. Lexicon. On the Spartan T/^tiovia, see Grote, p. '396, note, and i, 
 38, and vii. 55. 
 
 Chapter LXXII.-(rt.) t«v * A0t,vaC«v. This genitive must be referred to 
 wpea'^da, but the whole sentence is, as Am. remarks, an instance of irregular con- 
 struction, known to most Greek authors, and particularly to Thucydides 
 When the subject of the discourse is suddenly altered, the new subject is 
 brought forward into the most prominent place in the new sentence without 
 much regard to the necessities of the construction, which often is changed by 
 an anacolouthon, and the subject left independent of any government. This is 
 most conunon where, as in Herodotus, the reason of the pra^dication is introduced 
 by -ydp, before the writer gives us the prapdicate itself See Jelf, § 786 6 
 The introduction of /cai before ws ^adopro renders this passage more confused 
 than usual, and I confess it seems to me very like the work of a copyist, who 
 did not perceive that irp^a^da could form the subject -by repetition— of 
 ^(TdovTo. In this suspicion I perceive that Kriig. concurs. Arn. cites, by way of 
 illustration, i. 1 15 ; vU. 48 ; viii. 30, which the Student will do well' to consult 
 So also Herod, iv. 149, 6 5^ irah, oi, ydp l<py) ol (ru/irXetVecr^at, roiyapC^v ^^^ 
 airrhv AcaraXei^etv oUv iv X^KOifft, iv. 100. xQy di irau ydp iju t6 ir\r,dos fieTalnoy 
 ovK iS^KouTo ToOs \6yovs, ix. 109. TV 8^ KaKQs yap ^ee irauoidv yive^rdai 
 eJire ry S^p^i;. dTro\o7T]o-op^vovs. This accusative must be con- 
 
 sidered to depend upon the verbal adjective iraptrvria. On the construction 
 
 see Jelf, § 318. Matthiae, § 447. Goll. accounts for the fact that these verbals 
 govern accusatives, on the principle that they tacitly contain the notion x/"^> or 
 5ct, and cites Matthiae, § 447, 4- Of. ovt^ p.L<rdo<f>op-qT€6v etr] dXXovs 7) roirs 
 CTpa.T€vop.ivov%. ircpl irdvTos — * concerning the general question ; the 
 
 construction is varied by the infinitive STjXwaat, which is admissible after verbs 
 of motion. Popp. €V irXctovi, sc. x/x^^V opposed to rax^ws, 
 
 cf. i. 121. Kriig. 
 
 (6.) ^K Twv Xo"yu>v— ^\- from its proper notion, which is that of the material 
 cause— in the metiiphysical sense of the word— passes into a cognate one of 
 after^ or arising from, regarding the antecedent events as in some degree the 
 cause of those which follow. We may therefore translate— * //i consequence of 
 what had been said.' tois AaKcSatpiovtois as distinguished from 
 
 t6 TrXrjdoi aurQv probably refers to the Ephots. €l ti |j.tj, a trans- 
 
 position for d fiTj Ti. So d M '^d^, for d Kai fx^ ii. 11; vi. 60. Popp. 
 itrUvai.—adire, accedere, TapiXdciv, ad dicendum prodire. But, as Popp. ob- 
 serves, the distinction is not always kept up, cf i. 119. 
 
 Chapter LXXIII.— (a.) irp^o-pcvo-is. This word is censured by Dion. Hal. 
 as too poetical, but the truth is that npea^da is ' embassy,' just as we might 
 say the 'English embjissy' at Paris; and irpiafievffLS is 'the iact of coming 
 upon an embassy.' KaTaPoTjV receives the same tiensure from the 
 
 critic, but it is very graphic and suitable to the speaker. ' The outcry against 
 us,' cf. viii. 85, 87. BtKacnrais vfiv—' you as our judges.' 
 
 paUoi%—' easily,' and, therefore, lightly, cf. i. 80; vi. 9. 
 
 (b.) TOL iravv iraXaid. The old mythical legends about Tlieseus, the 
 Amazons, &c., which were a stock topic. Krug. refers to Isocrates, v. 42, 
 Dem. xxii. 15, Xenophon, irepl irpos. iv. 16. «v. This gen. depends 
 
 upon ndpTvpei. Popp. explains d/coat Xdyoiv as equivalent to aKOvad^vres 
 \^oi— the hearsay of tradition. 6^is is, * the personal observation 
 
 of those who are to hear us speak.' cl Kal . . . irpoPoXXojt^vois— 
 
 'Although it be somewhat irksome to us to be for ever bringing this subject for- 
 ward.' Tims Arn. after Haack Jind Popp. I think correctly; but Kriig. 
 adopts the other explanation, even though it be somewhat disagreeable to you to 
 have this ever put before you. On the force of the prepos. in St' 6xXov, cf. 
 xj. a. 4kiv8vv€V€to. Either rd MrjdiKa is the subject, or it is 
 
 impersonal. ^s rov ^p'yov— sc. r^? (IxpeXias may, I think, be 
 
 rendered ' the practical benefit; in contradistinction to rov \6yov ; but Popp. and 
 Giill. undersUnd, ' of the actual doing of the good,' which makes the antithesis 
 less effective; t^$ uxpeXias, ' the benefit of the reputation, if any there be.' 
 «l tI ^<^\ti . . . irapaiTV)o-€«s is explained by the Schol. ^vena tov ahuv 
 cvyyvibfx-,)v, for the sake of deprecation, to which, namely, they would not con- 
 descend. 
 
 (c.) MapaBwvi. The word had become so familiar, that its use is almost 
 adverbial,—/.^., without iv before it. Cf with Krug. Dem. xviii. 208, Plato, 
 Menejccnus, 240. Yet Thucyd. sometimes employs the preposition, as i. 18, 
 ii. 34, cf. MX<t>OL%, ch. 143. Aristoph. always omits it. irpoKiv8v- 
 
 vcOo-ai— ' to have borne the brunt of the danger. ' The same expression occurs in 
 the far-famed oath of Demosthenes. Ovk ianv 6irws i]fxdpT€T€ ov fid tovs iv 
 
86 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Kook I. 
 
 Ceap. 75.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 87 
 
 Mapa^^D^t vpoKLu5vu€vaayTas. ifrxi-hindend, prevented. The use 
 
 of tlie simple verb in this sense is not so comnion, yet Kriig. gives abundant 
 instances. Xen. Anah. iii. 5, i,, 6 d(T»c6s 'e^n bvb Audpas too p.^ Kara^vvai 
 and Herod, iii. 79, vi,^ iweXeouaa ^(r^e, &c. Add Ibid. v. roi. 
 ASvvdTwv dv fivTu,v. This is a very clear case of the usage of &„ with a par- 
 ticiple. Cf. Matth. 597, 6, an.l Jelf, 429, 4. It may be resolved into 5irep 
 €i iyevero, dduwaroi &u i)<yav oi IIe\o7roi'f^(7toi. ofioias— VyaaZ to 
 
 what it was before: Cf. ii. 80, 6 w.piyrXovs ^aoiro 6noio,. This seems to me 
 correct, nor can I undersUind why Bl. should consider this sense so very 
 feeble, that it should be necessary to give the unusual fcrce of ♦ an unequal 
 match for the Greek,/ to the words. This is inconsistent with ovk (n, and we 
 should have had aurnraXov. He did not consider l>efore this that he was 
 equally matched with the Greeks, he imagined that he was imnun^ly 
 mpenor to them. He now saw that this sui)eriority no longer existed, and 
 therefore abandoned the 'iiiterprise. 
 
 Chapter LXXIY.-{a.) iv rals vav<rt-m their ship.,-i.e., depended 
 upon them. Cf. .Telf upon e., § 622. 8T,Xa>e.'vTos-- ' when it had 
 
 been dearly shown.' So dyy.Xd^uros and similar phrases are used occasionally. 
 Jelf, § 696. ^s avTo— ' to it,' in general reference to the circum- 
 
 stances described by the introductory words. It is important to notice this 
 use of the pronoun in reference to the discussion concerning the genuineness of 
 lu. 84, where see the long note, and cf. 22 a. ^5 ras rcrpa- 
 
 Koorias-' to rnalr up the four hundred.' Speaking in round numbers, for as 
 we learn from Herodotus, the exact amount was 378. Great difficulties have 
 been made about this, because Demosthenes, de Cor., 238 ^, the poet .^schylus 
 and Nepos, who copied from them, call the fleet 300 only. But it is plain that 
 poets and actors, when engaged in proclaiming the glories of Athens before 
 Athenians, would diminisii the number of the fleet as much as possible— ' the 
 fewer ships, the greater share of honour.' Therefore, they took the hundreds 
 below instead of ahove the odd numbers. Here, however, the estimate is 
 naturally more exact, though still the speakers make an exaggeration in their 
 own favour, for Herod, makes the Athen. quota 180 (viii. 44), but see also 
 vni. 6r ; and Diod. Sic. (Ixv. 58) gives it as 200. It is to be observed that 
 Isocrates, Pan. c. 31, more accurately describes the Athenian contin.-ent as 
 •more than double' that of the others, rptripeis SurXaaias p.h f, avpLyrlures oi 
 dXXoi. But this cannot surely justify Didot's interi>retation, tC^u dvo fioipCju, 
 the half Popp. seems to incline to it, but it is quite contrary to the practice 
 of Thucyd. in giving numbers, and to the general idiom of the language. 
 alTitiraTos-'Me print-ipal cause of fighting in the street.' Gon! points out 
 that this construction of atVtos with the infinitive without the article tov, is the 
 ordinary one. See i. 25, 33, 75, 133, Xenoph. Hellenic, vii. ^, § 17. Krug 
 adds other instances, cf. Matt. 542. kTiY.i^frari. See an account 
 
 of these honours, Herod, viii. 124, and Plutarch, Vita Them. 17. Popp. and 
 GoU. read avrol from some good MSS. for airrbv, ' You yourselves spon- 
 taneously.' 
 
 {b.) 8ia<|>0€ipavT€s. It has been said that we might rather have expected 
 the mid. voice, since the Schol. interprets diaipdeipai idaaures. But the active 
 
 represents the sacrifice as more personal, as it were, 'with our own hands 
 
 destroyed.' , 1 ■ 7 
 
 (c.) TOVTOV— i.e., TOV u}(f>eXel(Tdai. -^5 ovk o«otis— * uhich was 
 
 ft^w no more.' So in ii. 44- ^^^ ou« 6utwu, 'those who are no more,'— i.e., 
 'the dead.' Similarly Herod., nepl oiSefilv^ waTpidos, viii. 57. What, there- 
 fore, is meant by ttjs (V6Xew5) iv ^pax^gi ArriSi offtrr/s? The '7r6\iS,' saj" 
 Popp., must be either the fleet, or the citizens embarked in it; or reference 
 may be made to its future restitution. This I prefer, and intei-pret with Kriig. 
 'for the restitution of which there was but a very diyht ground of hope.' 
 Tb ji^pos, when thus specified, means * aliquantum,' ' took our full share.' Cf. 
 i. 127, ii. 67, and Jelf, § 579. 6» cf. ch. 23 c. n fi^pos is more usual, and Bl. 
 would suljfltitute it; but rb is here for the personal pronoun, cf. 22 c. 
 
 Chapter LXXV.— (a.) dp &|iou ^<rHi€v. 1 subscribe to the remark of 
 
 Kriig., that Spa in itself neither implies affirmation nor negation, and 
 
 may perhaps be pennitted to refer the reader to a disquisition of my 
 
 own on the word in the Class. Musceum. The context, and the speaker's 
 
 intonation, make the difference in the meaning. Here with Popp. 
 
 render ' nonne digni sumus,' and consider the subsequent /xt? to form 
 
 part of the verb hiaK^ladai, so that, so far as this passage is concerned, no 
 
 question need be made on the distinction between hpa m and Spa ovk, 
 
 'do ive not deserve not to be under quitt so much odium in the eyes of the 
 
 f^^^^j.^ f TvwfiTis iwia-H^. There is some difficulty about the 
 
 two genitives. Each has been rejected by editors, but the latter is probably 
 
 added in reference to ^vpeTibraTov in the lastch., and as Arn. remarks, we 
 
 have ypiJI^M^ Ly^dprnixa, ii. 65. Why, then, not say ^ tlce perspicacity of our 
 
 juilg.neKt,' as well as * an error of judgment f ^^X^S-s^ ^"f/cev 
 
 Matth § 368, Jelf, § 499 ; or with Bl. understand that diaKetffOai k.t.X. 
 
 is equivalent to <pdope:<Tda,, and takes its syntax. Or dcaKuaOai may itself 
 
 take a genitive, in accordance with the general notion implied by this case 
 
 respectively to verbs indicating position. See note 36 c. , „ . , 
 
 Td viroXoiira tov papPdpov-' what yet remained to be done against tJie Persian. 
 
 So iii, 10, TO. inrbXoiva rQ}v ipyuv. 
 
 lb ) ,rpoa>dY€iv. As vi. 18 and i. 44, Popp. and roi^s "EXX^vas is roaavrvu 
 e^Topta, irpoiiyayev, Isocrat. iv. 37- Krug. tr. we were compelled by the very 
 vat are of the case to advance it to this, its present pitch of greatness. 
 8«'ovs K T X. If these motives be meant to be taken in the order of time, this 
 will signify ' fear of Persia.' But fidXcara p.h points to the order of intensity ; 
 it therefore signifies, fear of the revolted allies, cf. infra. diroTOVTa.v 
 
 KaT€<rTpafijt^va>v-' and when now some revoltershad been reduced to subjection. 
 Remark the two participles taken together. Krug. cf. ii. 5, ^uv ^^ur<ou 
 
 , , 1 • ^o .,:: -r iroiTL 84 K T.X. * Now no odium is 
 
 ixofi^yuv, and iv. 38, vii. 75. '^^^*- o« k.t./v. . , ., 
 
 etUertained against ani, man, for making the best disposition he can of his inte- 
 rests, in respect of matters involving the greatest risks.' Krug. would erase 
 KipSOi^ivv, but from what goes before, we see that the perils of the Athenian 
 Empire were the prominent argument in the speaker's mind (p-dXcara p.h virb 
 Uov,), and this allusion to them in summing up is natural. Popp. compares 
 the Homeric phrase, ov yefMeavrby. Thucyd. repeats the word, vi. 83, waaLW 
 
88 
 
 NOTES OX THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book I. 
 
 Chap. 7^-] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 89 
 
 &ueirl<t>dovov. Bl. adds vii. 77, viii. 50. Soph. Track. 1035, cf. for eC rideceai 
 iv. 59, rd Wta e«5 d^adai. 
 
 Chapter LXXVI.-(a.) ^?T,Y€t<rfl.. Of. ch. 19 and ch. 71, ad finem. 
 Sid iravros-throiujh the whole war, up to the time of the final operations 
 iyKparios-vif/orous/y, 'with a tight rein: Cf. Soph. Antig., v. 715, and Tlieo- 
 cntus, XXV. 266, where the original physical sense is found from which the 
 present metaphor comes. 
 
 (6.) dirb Tov iLV^pi^ir^lov-removed from, a,ra;^jr,,n, and so contrary to the 
 common practice of mankind. Tlie Athenians maintain and improve upon the 
 same doctnne to the Melians, v. 105. 8c8oji^vi,v. It .should always 
 
 be remembered that the present participle stands also for the imi)erfect. Tr. 
 'proffered.' tov roiovrov—siich a practice, or such conduct as this 
 
 I. €., the acceptance of power, and iU maintenance bv all practicable means 
 vy.lv 8oKovyT.s. See ch. 95. ^y ScKaCo. U^i^^the argument about 
 
 justice, or the plea 0/ justice. 
 
 {r.) irapaTvx<5v. On the neuter nom. part, absolute, cf. Jelf, 700, 2 a. The 
 
 same word is used a^ain, V. 60. Withotherq si\-«j Krii.r *.«^x. ;„ ' 1 
 
 « o ' V- " **'""''"^r.'s, sa3s ivrug., Trapoj' IS more usual. 
 
 IT, av9pu,ir€£«j <t>vo-ci. Kriig. transl. the inclination of men. I should rather 
 render 0u(rts— the natural character, or dispo.sition of humanity— 'hum2,n na- 
 ture,' as we say. Bl. quotes, for similar usages of xpwa/xevot, i. 130 6pyv 
 XPVcr. : vn. 30, irddei XP- ; vi. 15, imevfiiai, XP- 8iKai<5T«pot'vj' kutA 
 
 T^v iirapxoticrav Svivafiiv. Literally, more just than accorded with the scale of 
 our existing power-i. e., mryre just tham we had any nece.^sit,/ to he, if we looked 
 at our power. On this sense of Kara, according to the f/rade of see Jelf § 620 
 ir€pi^(rTt,-* has come round to be.' Am. adds, This word generally denotes a 
 new and unexpected result, as in ch. 32, 120, and vi. 24. But somethnes 
 simply what has happened, or befallen, as vii. 70. Cf. ch. 28 b. 
 
 ^ Chapter LXXVII..-(a.) i\a<r^ov^..vo.~' taking up an inferior position ' 
 I.e., not taking such high ground with their dependents as they might have 
 done. They need not have had the trials at all, but might have decided the 
 pomts m dispute by their sovereign power. Arnold cites Thucyd iv 64 d^w 
 6W eiKos vaaaaOai; and Demosth. cont. Dionysiod. p. ,287, ed. Reiske' Cu, 
 fi^u ravra av.ex^pov,.ey, ovk dy.oovures rb Ik rr,, ^vyypacpij, SiKaco., dW rryou- 
 M.ei'Oi 5eLP eXarrovaeai n Kal <Tvyx^pdu, uxrre ^yj SoKelu <pi\68iKoc duai The posi- 
 tion of Kai~ykp~Kal is somewhat unusual. Kai ydp, says Kriig., is oftener 
 connected with .a2 following, than Kal simply, but not then with a word inter- 
 vening But GoU. remarks, that Kal ydp are not, as generally, in this case to 
 be combined into a single expression ; the Kal is to be referred to the kuI follow- 
 mg in the sense of ' both,' 'and; the one clause contains the cause of the other 
 and IS well exp amed by GoU., '.^..'enim apud nos judicia constituimus, tamen 
 htigiosi esse videmur. Kriig. supposes that the kuI here can mean also even 
 and quotes Arist. Ecclez.j. 603, K^Kr^.aro yap Sid roiJro, for tliis was e'ren the 
 reasn, the very reason, thai, dr. Cf. also Ranir, v. 735. 4>^Xo8oKcrv 
 
 i?Ltr't '^^r? ^'^'"^""' '^^ ''''^''^ "^ ^"«^- f«"^>« the best 
 
 illustnttion. Cf. Ares, v. 40. iv^^oXaCa.,. These suits, called 
 
 SlKui aTTb I.M^oXu,., were grounded upon contracts existing between persons 
 
 who belonged to the several states comprised under the Athenian dominion, and 
 the necessity of trying them at Athens, owing to the expense and delay thereby 
 incurred, was one of the greatest grievances to which her allies were subjected. 
 The orator here tries to gloss it over, by making allusion only to such as Athe- 
 nian citizens were themselves engaged in. Cf. Sheppard's Theophrastus, note 
 on Tovs ^evovi, p. 73; GoUer in hoc loco: Schiiman de Comitiis. 
 
 (b.) ol hi—' while they,' so. our dependent allies. irapd rh ^-^ 
 
 ot€<r6ai xp^vai— * contrary to what they think they ought.' The negative must be 
 taken in close connexion with the verb, as in the case of (prj/J-i, Kriig., who also 
 proposes to read wy for /xt?. Cf. Matth. § 534. "yvw|iT|, says Bl., is 
 
 any decision at law; and so, too, Kriig. ; but they do not cite any instance. I 
 do not, therefore, think it improbable that it here has the more ordinary sense 
 oi a public resolution, vote, decree, or proposal. Cf. Herod, iii. 80, and Qep-i- 
 ffTOKXiovs yvib/Jiri, ch. 90. 
 
 (c.) dirb TOV t<rov. Is this the masculine or neuter gender? GoU., Poppo, 
 and others seem to have decided that it is the former, * a mans equal.' But 
 the whole usus loquendi, in Thuc. at any rate, seems to point the other way. 
 See OVK dirb ToOtffOv, i. I43, awb rujv ofioiujv eXaffaovfieyoi, viii. 89, dir^ tov taov 
 6fii\ovvT€s, iii. ii, dirb tov (aov 5^ iwiovTes, iii. 84. Other passages might be 
 cited from other writers, as Eurip. Phen. v. 541. I should therefore translate, 
 ' men are more angry at being wronged by law than by open violence; for the one 
 looks like being over-reached on a footing of equality, the other like compulsion by 
 a superior force.' This Bl. calls an aKpifioXoyia, or over minute distinction: to 
 me it appears plain and forcible enough. Cf. for the sentiment, iv. 86. 
 
 (d.) Ka9cX6vT€S — ' after having overfhroum us.' Cf. i. 4. &p|aiT« — 
 
 'were to assume dominion.' Kriig. compares aire^>dovT€s ws Zei>s mttot' dp^euv 
 Oewv, ^sch. Prom. v. 203. TbT||i€T6pov Zios—'thefmr of which we are 
 
 the objects.' Objective gen. expressed by pronoun. Cf. note on ch. 69 e. 
 ctirip K. T.X. — * if your policy is going to be such as you evinced symptoms of its 
 being, when ye headed for a short time the confederacy against the Persian.' 
 AfiiKTa— sc. vbfiifxa, i.e., ' institutions which do not amalgamate with those of the 
 rest of Greece.' On this meaning of dfiiKra, Bloonif. aptly quotes yEsch. Ag. 
 312, otfiai §oriv dfjiiKTOv iu iroXei Trp^T(iv—6^os t' AXft0a r iyx^as ravTi^ Kvrei, 
 bixoaraTovvT dv, ov «/)f\v irpoaevviTTois ; and Kriig. (piXois t dfiiKTOS iari Kal 
 Taci Tr6X€i, Eurip. Sfoba'us, 10, 17. See, for the weU-known fact, i. 144,124, 
 ii. 39. In what foUows. allusion is perhaps made to Pausanias. The same ob- 
 servation was made by Aristotle and Isocrates, Panath. ch. 82. ols. 
 This is one of the passages quoted to prove that vofxL^ei governs a dative. Cf. 
 ii. 38, iii. 82. See note upon this last passage- I am not satisfied that the 
 present one proves anything, for we may easily supply XPV<^^<^^^ ^"^ ^^^^ 
 voni^€iv is constructed with an infinitive is,- as Krug. says, plain even from 
 firXa 01) yofjiiiovaiv l^x^iv, Herod, vii. 85, and cf. Thuc. ii. 15. ^ any one 
 prefers the former construction, vop.l^ei must be rendered ' attaches a value to.' 
 
 Chapter LXXVIII.—<a.) ov— supply i3ouXeu6Acej'Oi. irp6o-eT]<ree. 
 
 Bring upon yourselves. So i. 144, Kivbvvovs irpoarldeadai. Kriig. quotes ouSeis 
 iTdXfi-na' tdia Trpoad^adai KaKd, Eurip. Her. 147. tov irapdXoYov. 
 
 Used by Thuc. only as a subsUntive, but see ii. 61, 85, iii. 16, vii 28, Krug. 
 
90 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Hook I, 
 
 Chap. 82.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 9^ 
 
 {b.) ircpitcrracreai. See note upon TepUarr,, ch. 76, ad finem—' when pro. 
 longed, is wont to bring things round to the infiuence of accidents—to the award 
 of chance/ Kriig. ; cf. i. 69. My^o^,v-from which one of us is no 
 
 further removed— i. e. , further exempt— M an the other. 6TroT€>u,s 
 
 'ia-rai—in which of the two wuf/s it a-ill turn out. Cf. with Popp. ch. 82, KaOdri 
 X<^py}<Tii. iv d8T]X«{» Klv8vv€V€Ta^ means * the danger is run while U 
 
 u as yet uncertain.' On the impersonal use of the verb, cf. ch. 73. 
 ^8tj is to be taken in connexion with /caKOTa^oiWes, when now they hare got 
 into dijicultg they address themselves to deliberation -or rather to discussion, sc. 
 diplomatic. Cf. TrXeiarov d^ct/xevos Uyuv, Alcestis, v. 967. 
 
 (c.) 6p«VT€s— 8C. eV T775e d/xa/,n> dura,. ai0a£p€Tos- ' 0/ our 
 
 own free choice/ i.e., before we have been compelled to mmlify it by the course 
 of events. <nrrov8ds— sine articulo, not to break treaty; cf. ch. 67. 
 
 SCKia. For in the thirty years* treaty (i. 1,5) this provision hiui been made. 
 Cf. 1. 140; \u^(r^at, the midd. voice, to have our differences arranged. Cf. i. 145 
 €l 8i ,xif). This is the reading of twelve good M8S. and Popp. Bekker and 
 the other editors take the common reading, ii, which has precisely the same 
 meaning m some passages. Krug. quotes Soph. Phil. 1 34 1 ; Ly.sias, xxv. 14; 
 Dem. 11. 8; and Stalbaum, Plat. Rep. v. 463 <i. v4>TjYfi<r0€-idem 
 
 est quod irporiyrjade, Goll. Am. siiys they do not express the same part of the 
 same idea: the first expresses precedence; the second, the nearness of the 
 leader. Krug. refers to the Lexicon Plat. There is an ellipsis of 65uv. 
 
 Chapter LXXIX.-(a.) kutA <r4>ds avrovs- Wiat is sometimes ex- 
 pressed by Kud' Uvrovs, as iv. 38, vi. 13. Ail strangers were ordered to with- 
 draw; I. e., the allies who had come to the conference. The great assembly of 
 the Spartans, we thus see, decideil upon questions of peace and war. 
 
 i,b)k'K\^rhJx.<yTh^^^o^,~^tem^ed to the same point: Krug. rightly exemplifies 
 this by use of the verb in Uo, <t>ip,,. There is a similar use of yVro ' J n nova 
 fert animus.' Ovid. Metam. v. i. Bi. quotes Herod, viii. 100, tX^o. ^0epe 
 -n -..^M Kar^Pldaaada. r^. ' EXXdSa. * Apx£8a,xos, /. e., the Second. 
 
 He succeeded his grandfather Leotychides, as his father Zeuxidamus had pre- 
 viously died. 
 
 Chapter LXXX.-{a.) tovs ^v t^ a^ r,X.K£<j 6p«. Tlie simplest expU- 
 nation is to supply i^.lrdpov, iuras. Others not so correctly have interpreted- 
 and I see among you those of the same time of life as myself riva 
 
 takes in any of this class indefinitely-' a man.' Kemark the studied variety 
 produced by the transiti.m from direipiqi to uofuaaura. See ch. 38 c. 
 trui^povuis— without extravagance, or ejuggeration. ctcXovi'toiTO— 
 
 compute it to the full, i. e., with all its chances, &c. 
 
 (6.) irap<5|iows-'o/ the same description/ i.e., mihtaiy rather than naval. 
 Compare Aristotle, Rhet. i. 4, 4, a.a^Kalov d54uac rds dvudf.ec, ^drepou 
 duocac ^ audf^oLuc. Am. The /cat which stands before aarvyeirouas does not, as 
 sometimes happens, so much introduce a new idea, as a part of the original one. 
 Popp^ compares v. 112, 2, d7r6 rQu d.dpu^Tu>u Kal Aa/ceSat/xoWo,,., vi. 20, 3 ; 
 ^"* ; [' , ^'^' ^"^ao-ra. The neuter is employed because the idea is 
 
 general, including their towns, &c. Kal IVirois Kal ^TrXots Kal ^xXij.. The 
 
 Equites, the heavy araied infantry, and the remaining population which served 
 as rowers or light- armed infantry. There is no necessity to say that 6x^V is 
 'put for light-armed troops,' an assertion which Bl. combats, cf. vi. 17, 
 (JxXotj ^vfifiiKTOis, mixed populations. €Vt yi. Jelf, 735, 5. 
 
 Bockh. computes the whole at about 500,000 whereof 180,000 belonged to the 
 town and harbour. Niebuhr, Vortrdg. iiber alte Lander-u.-Volkerk., p. 108, 
 expres-ses an opinion that the general estimate among the ancient writers of 
 Athenian population, especially of the number of slaves, was much too high. 
 
 (c.) |icXT]TT|(ron€V. Kriig. supi)lies to pavriKdv from rats vaOcrti', comparing 
 i. 121. But the word may stand independently, like our own verb ' to practise ;' 
 thus we have tovs To^dTas fieXeTQvras, ' the archers practising.' Xen. II til. ni. 
 4, 16. So also, though less certainly, ii. 86, fxeXerCJvTes Kal TrapeaKevacpJvoL 
 TTjp vavfiaxiay, i. 64 b. XP^vos lvi<rrai—' Time will intervene/ i.e., 
 
 'that will take time,' as we say. t« koCvw— ' The public treasury/ 
 
 The phrase is not unusual. Herod, vii. 144, «^^ ' kdriuaioLai. yeuofiiuuv 
 Xp-qpidTUiv fieydXwv iv t<^ Koivii>. Cf. Arist. Pol. ii. 7, 6. 4>^po|X£V, 
 
 for the more usual compound i<T<pipop.€v. 
 
 Chapter LXXXL— (a.) t(^ 7T\i\^i\,— population. liri<}>oLTcovT€s. 
 
 The verb ^oirdw is a frequentative, hence (poiTav is said of 'attending school,' 
 and also of 'courting,' as the suitor regularly visits his mistress. We may 
 tiierefore translate, 'by making frequent, or regular incursions.' 
 (TTo^ovTai. * They will bring in from abroad/ Pop. quotes aiTos iiraKTds, vi. 20. 
 Krug. irduTa iiraKTa, vii. 28. I would add. Soph. Trach. 258. (Ed. Col. 1522. 
 Ajax, 1275. There is theieforeno necessity for Popp. to remark, 'usitatius hac 
 vi iadyeffdai.' On the fact compare ii. 38. 
 
 (6.) pXa>|/o}t€ea. Passive, says Krug., as vi. 64. It is rather one of those 
 cases already (ch. 68 c, Jelf, 562, 3) noticed where the reflexive force of the 
 middle runs into a passive sense. ' We shall do ourselves more damage than we 
 shall do to them: See note i. 68 c ; i. 81 b, and ii. 87. ra irXcCu,-' in the ma- 
 jority of matters: iv tovtw. D. has translated, ' and in such a time/ and 
 T.K.A. quotes Bothe's—'m^erra.' But why should it not be, 'in this case/ 
 or, 4:ontingency, i. e., that expressed by the previous words ? irave^o-cTai. 
 * This form without the a is found also ii. 77 ; v. 91, 100 ; vi. 59.' Popp. 
 <|)pov^jtaTi. I regard this as a causal dative. T. K. A. renders, the Athenians 
 with their usual mar/nanimity. I should prefer to baj— owing to their high 
 spirit, such I think being the real force of the word. Theologically the 
 <Pp6vwa (xdpKos is the spirit of pride naturally inhering in man's heart. On 
 fiilT€ omitted, cf. Jelf, § 775» 3, and on <f>pov. lb. 603, 2. 
 8ovX€vo-ai-' ie the slaves of their land, ' i. e., be so servilely attached to their 
 property as not to sacrifice it to the common good. We may also connect 
 bovXevaai <t>povnp.aTL—' slaves in spirit/ KaTairXriYfjvat— lit. ' to be 
 struck down/ i.e., to be dismayed, and paralysed by the war. 
 
 Chapter LXXXIL— (a.) oi fJi^ oiZL These particles are often thus 
 employed in qualifying a previous statement. The ov generally denies, the 
 01-5^ particularises as Hoogeven says, 'not that either I mean to recommend: 
 dvawre^Tws has doubtless reference to the t6 dvaLadvrop, charged against them 
 
92 
 
 NOTES ON TIIUCYDIDi:S. 
 
 [Book I. 
 
 by the Corinthians. The word denotes dulness of tlie natural perceptions 
 wantoffeeluuj,^^ui\ is metaphorically applied to indifference to the wroncrs of 
 the allies. See the analysis of characters connected with this element, viii-xv 
 Sheppard's Theot>krastus. ^,^0- i,^ ^^.rp^^op.v. (ioll. inteq^reta- 
 
 tion IS, nor to let them see that ice do not mean to notice their conduct ' But 
 It IS the direct antithetical expression to irdXe/uou, thus constructed upon the 
 principle of variety, cf. 38 c. The meaning therefore is, 'neither too plain! „ 
 tndicatnuj that we ,haU yo to war; nor do the opposite thing, i. e., permit them 
 to go on as they are doing, iju ddcKQaip ovk iirirp^ovaiv. Xen. Hist, ii 4 1 1 
 Cf. Jelf, § 804, 4. • t» • 
 
 (6.) gvp-fidxcov irpo<ra7«Yi,_to this is opposed subsequently rd avrihv 
 iKTopc^u^f^eea ; with respect to the latter word, it may be doubted what force 
 should be attacJied to the prep. 4k. It may either imply 'full, complete prepa- 
 ration, or, as Kriig. says, it may have reference to Uie ditficulties out of which 
 they had to extricate themselves. He compares i. ,25 ; vi. 83. We may add 
 the simi ar use of the Latin ' expedio. ' ' Expediunt per acuta belli,' Horace 
 avTcuv, Jelf § ..04. dv€^£4,0ovov of course implies after it a word 
 
 which stands as antecedent to the relative 6Vot. There is nothing invidious in 
 the enhstnn, of foreign allies by all such as, dc, of., Jelf, § 817 7 
 
 iO Kal 8vb Kal Tpt«v. T^ao, or it may be three years. On 'this adversative 
 Kal, ct. cSo b. <^v 8oKxi-'in the event of its apijearinr/ desirable' 
 
 ct 42 a. 1 20 c. Connect this with f^.. i^' a.Wovs. ^c4>paYp^vot. 
 
 Better fnnrd and ,.n>red,' the metaphor seems to be taken from a fortified 
 camp. ir.ro<rt],ia£vovTas. Note the force of the preposition, giving 
 
 maication?; of. So Aristotle Fth \v >■, ^^a^^ ^ • , 
 
 id.) ^f| Yap K.T.X. ^Look not upon tfieir land as anything, else than a 
 hostage or pledge for you to hohV Bloomf. well compares a simiLar declaration 
 ot policy, Livy, v. 42. 'Non omnia concremari tecta ut pignus ad flectendos 
 
 hostium aminos haberent.' oiv Vln-o-rtu ««////. 
 
 , , ovx T^o-o-ov — 'aft the more ni proportion 
 
 L • ' 1 .. a7rovi>£av-'the casting away of all hope, recklessness, 
 despair a better reading than dwoyuoiau. Archidamus throughout ur-^es the 
 principle that we ought to build a bridge for a flying enemy. 
 aAt]irTOT^povs 'ixi^v-have them more impracticable to deal with 
 
 (..) rots iyK\ya<r.v In^.^Qivr^s. Pup. expresses a doubt as to the genuine- 
 iiess of these words. T. K. A, is particular in pointing out that roU ^y.Xrj^aac 
 must not be taken with eV«^^^..., Yet it seems to me much the sinl^lest 
 way to do so- haiu.g been egged on, excited to premature action, by the charnes 
 ^hich our allies hare brought.' Where is the impropriety in sense or construc- 
 Bpkk.r TK- f ^P^^'^f^"'- Arnold. Krug. Trpd^u.,.,.. Vulgo. Popp. 
 Bekker. This of course involves the well-known question whether the Canon 
 of Dawes be correct, which asserts that 6Va,s /x^ cannot be joine.l with the sub- 
 junc ive aonst except in the passive voice. No intelligible reason can be given 
 for the dognia. All that can be s.ud is, t^at the future is the more lively and 
 graphic form, as approaching more nearly to the directa oratio, and is therefore 
 aJmost universally used by the Attic writers. I should therefore retain it where 
 there was any MSS. authority in its favour. Tlie later copyists, in their frigid 
 attemp s at correctness, even invented subjunctives in cases where they had 
 no real existence eg X-nco:.i, 5c6cru,cr, &c. Therefore, as Arn. remarks, 
 the mere number of the MSS. which give T.d.^c^e. ought not to force it upon us 
 
 Chap. 84.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 93 
 
 ato-xtov Kal diropwrcpov. The comparison is not I think with the Athenians, 
 but with their own previous condition.' t«v l8C(uv — for, as the 
 
 Bchol. remarks, the private interests of Corinth were not necessarily shai-ed by 
 all Peloponnesus. evirp^irws 0^<r6ai — to settle in such a way that both 
 
 parties may have specious reasons for concluding it, i.e., as a salve to their 
 vanity, cf. ch. 21 a, and iii. 6f, b. \<ji^i\a-i\.. The simple verb, says 
 
 Kriig,, does not occur in the future indicative active save in this place. The 
 middle future, x'^P^o'OMai, is always found. Yet in the compounds, as he 
 shows by abundant instances, the active form, x^P'h<^^> is "^^re common. 
 
 Chapter LXXXIII.— (a.) xpV«^'r«^ <|>epovT€s. This is well rendered 
 ' iique trib Ufa ferentes,' for the orator evidently means to contrast them with 
 their own allies, who i)aid no such contribution. ovx SirXwv k.t. X. 
 
 ' depends not so much upon arms as upon money,' i.e., its result would not be 
 
 determined so much by the first, as by the second. 81* fjv. It may 
 
 be right to say with Krug. that 5id with the genitive denotes the instrument or 
 means, with the accusative the occasion [ Veranlassung] of an act, but obviously 
 the two frequently run into each other. * How oft the sight of means to do ill 
 deeds, Makes deeds ill done!' and but little distinction can be made in our 
 version of them. Kriig. cf. &v6puiros av^dverai 5td t6 iadUiv Kal -rriveip. Plat. 
 Phivd. 96 c. It may be here, 'it is only through the opportunity afforded by which 
 that arms do any good.' dXX«s t€ Ka£ here stands simply with a 
 
 noun. Kriig. quotes TroXXd h.v tU ^x^* AXXws tc /cat pr}TU3p direi-p, Plat. Crit. 
 
 (6.) Twv diroPaivovTwv tt]s alrtas. Remark the present participle, and, 
 for explanation, see ch. 24 d. atVia is employed in an intermediate sense — 
 * the respon»ibility of the consequences: lir* dp.<t>cT£pa— */o»* either 
 
 remit; i.e., good or bad, cf. ii. 11 ; iv. 17. oStoi rather unusual 
 
 in the first person — ' we who stand in this position.'' 
 
 ChapterLXXXIV.— (a.) rb ppa8v Kalrb ^(^Xov— 'Of the slowness and pro- 
 crastination, which is the principal thing they bring against us, be not ashamed.* 
 If the t6 be omittt-d before /xAXov, it is a case of Granville Sharp's Canon. See 
 note 18 a. According to Kriig. the gen. tjplQv is governed by 6, 'the quality 
 of ours which they most find fault with.' He quotes, in illustration, Plato, 
 Legg. 685 a, tL fxefKpo/jLevoi avrCov X^ytis ; But cf. Jelf, on p.ip.<povTai, § 495. 
 Kal &jta.' Krug. remarks that the second reason here introduced by Kai, is 
 really to be gathered by inference from the statement, and is not found in the 
 sUtement itself. The wisdom of their usual cautious policy may be inferred 
 from the greatness and glory to which, under it, their city had attained. 
 
 (6.) 8vvaTou TovTO clvai. We must understand tovto as a repetition of 
 rb PpaSv K. T. X. SiVarai is here, as in some other places, amounts to, is equiva- 
 lent to, a wise moderation. t«v . . . liroTpvvovTwv. The genitive 
 depends upon i]dovy—the pleasure we receive from those who urge us on into 
 dangers contrary to our own convictions. dvair6£<r6i]p.cv— * are we 
 ever brought over to their views,' rem&rk the true indefinite predication of. the 
 aorist. The force of the prep, is the same as in apadiddffKeiv. 
 
 (c.) rh |iiv oTi K.T.X. The argument is a sort of Sorites. ' Good discipline (rd 
 eCKOfffxop), produces a sense of shame fatScis]; a sense of shame produces a manly 
 
94 
 
 NOTES OX THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Hook I. 
 
 Chap. 87.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 95 
 
 spirit {evxpi'xia), and a manly spirit produces martial excellence (rb TroXefiiKdv): 
 We see that at'Sws is employed as the equivalent of alax'^'^'V- The expression 
 v\e7ffTov fi€T^x^i is repeated, iii. 83, rb fCrjd^i, oC t6 yeyvaiov TrXeiarov fierix^i, 
 either, very lanjcbj partaketk, or, forms a very larr/e ingredient.. See note there. 
 
 The speaker proceeds to show that rb eCKoa/nov produces practical wisdom also 
 
 inasmuch as we are brought up with too little pretence to learninfj to despise the 
 laws of our country (on 'AfiaOla as an intellectual habit, cf. Sheppard's Theo- 
 phrastus, p. 115, and note on iii. 37), and with too much severe self control and 
 modesty to disobey them. After vaL^fvhfxcvoL Popp. supplies (ourws ibairep) fxi] i,T(- 
 popav. Krug. prefers to understand oloi re. Most readers will call to mind rb tQv 
 vbfiwv ffo(pujTepov ^rjTciv eJvai, Toirr' ianv 6 iv toU iiraLvov^hoi^ vdfiois d-rrayo- 
 pevcTai, Ar. Met. i. 15. ifpYw ^irtlCcvai. Poppo doubts whether 
 
 irapa<TK€vdi is to be understood after the verb, which will then be taken in the 
 sense of * exequi,' or whether, with GoU., we are to supply rbv Xbyov, i.e., rd 
 XexOhra els p.4p.\pLV rCiu irapaaKevuv tQv iroXefxluv ; in which case he says we 
 must render iire^Uvai by persequi. Both, though intelligible, seem to me 
 somewhat obscure explanations. Possibly the whole may mean, after criti- 
 cising speciously the preparations of the enemy, not to prosecute the war against 
 them in any corre>iponding scale : iire^Uvai. avrov^, to assail them ; dvofioius, not 
 on a scale corresponding to mir affected superiority. Cf. fpyip itn^ipx^Tai, i. 
 I -o ; iv. 5. vo^LXiiv TrapairXTio-iovs. Our view of this passage 
 
 depends upon the method in which -trapairXTjaiovs is to be constructed. If with 
 Am., Gr.ll., Bl., we connect it with KaL, as similis atque, the words mean, We 
 are taught to hold the plans of our neighbours to be very like the ordinary acci- 
 dents of war, that is to say, quite undejinable by any process of reason. For my 
 own part, I believe that Thuc. would have admitted the policy of our enemies 
 to be quite a fair subject for rational conjecture, inasmuch as it is sure to be 
 founded upon certain common and unvarying principles of hum.m nature. See 
 his sentiments upon the point, iii. 82, and infra, iroXi/ re Siatp^peiv ov Sd vofil^eiv 
 AvSpwirov dvdpujTov, a sentiment introduced by re as if contained by the pre- 
 ceding, not by 5e, as if contrasted with it. I, therefore, prefer the other inter- 
 pretation (Pop.), We are taught to believe that the schemes and jtolicy of our 
 neighbours are very like our own, and that the accidaits of war are matters quite 
 undejinable by reason. There can be no objection founded upon the fact that 
 irapawXriffiovs is not followed by a dative, for we have such phrases as ToiaOra 
 Kal irapairX-qaia. To the other objection, that in this case we should have fxi) 
 and not ov, I should reply by translating as above, making, in fact, ov—Xby(^y— 
 SiaipeTd^ one logical tenn, equivalent to dSiaipiras. Mr. Grote's version— ir<r 
 think the capacity of neighbouring states is much on a par, does not appear to me 
 to cast much additional light upon the passage. A«l 8^. We always 
 
 practically make preparation against our opponents on the assumption that their 
 schemes are good. We do not calculate on errors, and false moves on their 
 part. i^ Uiivbiv— dependent on them. 4v rots dvav- 
 
 KatoTdrois. Goll. renders * in usu rerum, et omnino in agendo magis quam in 
 eloquent id.' Grote, * in the severest trials,' and so Krug., quoting 6 /xtj 5a/)f is 
 &vdp(aTros ov Taidcvcrai. Arn. in what is most needful, wherein he is followed 
 by Dale. But has the word ever this meaning ? It is possible also that some 
 allusion is intended to the strictness of the Spartan discipline, where the soldier 
 
 was obliged to put up with the merest necessaries of life, the minimum with 
 which they could do, cf. ch. 90 c. 
 
 Chapter LXXXV. — (a.) iL(Xirai~institutions,T.K. A. B.a,iheT 'habits,' 
 or more literally, 'practices.' Cf. 80 c. a)<|>€Xovfievoi — * to our benefit.' 
 
 ^X.o|i.€v — 'maintain.' €T€p«v. Strictly speaking, we should have 
 
 have had 7) er^pois. Kriig. quotes ii. 15, vi. i. 8id l<rxvv. The 
 
 Scholiast explains 5t' t^p ^xoAtf ^<^X^^' Cf. 83 a. €V ^po.\fl [lopCw 
 
 i]\i.ipai—'in the brief space of a day;' i. e., the brief space of time which a day 
 comprises. Cf. 'Horae momento,' Hor. Sat. i. i, 4. 
 
 {r.) BUas Sovvai. As in c. 28 — to submit the matter to arbitration. 
 8£8ovTa. The present, or imperfect participle is of course, 'the man who 
 proffers arbitration.' 
 
 (d. ) «ls Twv i^6p<av. On the Ephors, see the excellent information amassed 
 by C. F. Hernian. Pol. Antiquities, § 44, English transl., and Grote. 
 
 Chapter LXXXVI. — (a.) ov yivwckw — ' / do not understand,' Dale. 
 But it is not cognovi, so much as cognosco—I cannot make out; I shall not enter 
 upon the consideration of: he means he is not going to give himself the trouble 
 of studying it. On the contrary, T. K. A., after Bloomf., makes ytvuiCKu mean 
 much more than ' understand i according to their view it contains the addi- 
 tional notion of 'approve.' 
 
 {b.) Kal TOT€ (^|JL€v) Kttl vvv Itr^nv. An ellipse common enough in all 
 ]a„(Tua«'-es. 01 8^. Here we must consider 5^, as it not unfrequently 
 
 is, a ca°usal particle— */t'»* '^^'»* suffering wrong is no longer a matter of the 
 future: On this pronominal ol 5^, cf. Jelf, § 768, 3. ovhk 8ta- 
 
 KpiT^a. Tr. nor must we decide matters by law-svits and debate, seeing that it 
 is not in word that we are wronged. Popp. remarks that the accusative avrovs 
 pXaTTTOix^vovs is not govenied by diaKpir^a, ' nee ob addita Kal avrovs per <rxwa 
 5ia pL^jov explieari possit;' but that it is to be constructed like dvoXoyv<Top,4yovs, 
 ch. 72. It agrees, therefore, with Tj/xas, understood. But cf. Jelf on irapa- 
 
 SoT^a, § 383. 
 
 {,'.) KaTa'irpo8(8«jJi€V. Tlie preposition exerts a force which must not be 
 overlooked. Tr. 'betray to utter ruin;' this meaning it of course acquires from 
 the notion of down from the top—' ruit alto a culmine Troja.' iirio>iL€V 
 
 •irpbs Tovs d8iKovvTas. Some doubt has been expressed about the right con- 
 struction of these words. Popp. hesitates about the preposition ; Kriig. asserts 
 that iindvai is rarely constructed with a simple accusative. But the text is 
 confirmed by iv. 92, irpbs rovs m dp,vyof.iuovs iTio^res, and ii. 65. Otherwise 
 a dative is more usual. 
 
 Chapter LXXXVII.-(a.) iiri^i^Cli^' to put to the vote,' should be 
 noticed by the junior student, and distinguished from i^v<t>^^otiai, ' to vote.' Its 
 usual construction is with an accusative of the person, or a dative ; here (Kriig. 
 conjectures) Thuc. wrote is iKKXrjalay, to avoid a double accusative, for rotavra 
 also depends upon the same verb. opjifjcraw. In this place transi- 
 
 tive as i 127, ii. 20. The act of Sthenelaidas was probably grounded upon 
 the 'assumption, that many even of those who had raised their voice for peace, 
 
96 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book I. 
 
 CuAP. 90.1 
 
 NOTES OX THUCYDIDES. 
 
 97 
 
 would not dare to vote for it openly. ypr,<t>ov iirayuv is presently employed in 
 a similar sense. oru^ ^-^ 8oKov<rtv. On /xt; with indie, of Jelf 
 
 § 743, I; 
 
 (6.) dvacrTTiTw h- x*^9^ov—' Let him rise up, and go to that place: This 
 is what is called the ' usus praegnans,' which is not uncommon with verbs which 
 imply motion of some kind or other. Kriig. quotes vii. 49, viii. 45. See note, 
 65 b. The idiom is less common in Latin, but Popp. bus produced 'exsurgere 
 foras,' from Plautus, J///. Ohr. ii. r, 3. It seems from this that the members 
 of the Lacedsenu.nian assembly were seated. Haack supposes that this was an 
 imitation of the Homeric practice, where the heroes seated themselves upon the 
 ground like the American Indians. 
 
 (c.) Tovs Ivfijidxovs— sc. the legates from their allies, who had previously 
 been ordered tc withdraw. iroKivTai— pres. ' commence operations: 
 
 (d.) \pr\\i.arLcravrts~' harinf/ transacted the business. Tliis, it appears, 
 was especially a diplomatic word. Kriig. refers to v. 5, 61, and vi. 62. Bloomf! 
 has remarked its freiiuent use among all the regular imitators of Thucyd. Hero- 
 dotus (he says) would have used the middle voice ; and the writers of the middle 
 Attic, irpayfMaTeveadaL. 8ta7v«fiT,, fcr Scdypcacs, is peculiar to 
 
 Thuc. Schol., * division of opinion: iv r^ Urti k.t.X. This, says 
 
 Kriig., is for f s t6 ^ros vpoKexf^PVcviCju Kal iv ry ^ret bvruiv. The wpoKexcopr,- 
 Kvloiv seems added as a sort of after thought— Moae many years having already 
 elapsed. This would be Olyrap. kxxvii. i, or B.C. 432. For the to. ECaolKd 
 see ch. 1 14. ' 
 
 Chapter LXXXVIII._(a.) tro\f\i.T]r{a~'thaftheymust gotowar.' The pi. 
 in such cases as I have said seems to me a shade more general and indefinite than 
 the singular -//m^ it was a case for uar, a casus belli. It might be worth while 
 to examine in this view the instances quoted by Krug., TroXffxrjT^a, vi. 50; eVt- 
 X^^PVr^a., i. 118; TrXeuorWa, vi. 25 ; d^^e^Wa, i. 98; irapirrrr^a, i. 72; xapaSoria 
 and ccaKpcHa, i. 86. 8vvV|0a><rcv. I quote T. K. A., ^of the commence- 
 
 ment of a state attained to = should arrive at greater power: Thus every pos- 
 sible shade of meaning is at one time or another assigned to the aorist. How 
 much more simple is it to adhere to the plain interpretjvtion of the tense There 
 could be no reason why the Spartans should fear tlie commencement, any more 
 than the progress and consummation, of the Athenian power, even were there 
 anything in the notion of an aorist to convey such an intimatior.. What they 
 feared was the /art itself, no matter when it happened, or was likely to happen 
 Consequently the aorist was the right tense, from its nature. Vide Appendix. 
 
 Chapter LXXXIX.-(«.) ^X0ov l^\ rd irpdYH^ara k.t.X. This is inter- 
 preted {I.) were brought to the circumstances under which they prosjtered - and 
 (ii.) were induced to adopt that means of administering their affairs under which 
 they prospered. From the Thucydidaean usage of Trpdaao, and its cognate words 
 the latter seems prefemble. Krug. cites A^ioy iudvpi-ndr,vaL otV Tpbinp ipxovra, 
 iirl rd TT^d^/xara, Antiph. vi. 20. 4Tru8i?| Mt,8oC. It api,ea.-s that 
 
 this digression (S9-1 17), containing the history of nearly fifteen years, from the 
 siege of Sestos to the beginning of this war, was called by the old grammarians 
 T€UT7fKovTla. Kriig. refers to an historical tract of his own, discussing more 
 
 especially the chronology of this period, but I have not had an opportunity of 
 reading it. Arnold points out that the historical student, after finishing 
 Herod., should ])roceed to the perusal of the present ei)isode, and then take up 
 ch. 24-88, subsecjuently cjirrying on the narrative from ch. 118. Tlie digression 
 about Pausanias and Themistocles, 128-138, synchronizes with 95-98 of the 
 general sketch. A€wTuxi8Tis. This king was the grandfather of 
 
 Archidamus the Second. After the campaign of Mycale he was sent to reduce 
 the l*ersian party in Thessaly and Northern Greece, but having been suspected 
 of receiving bribes from the Aleuadte, he was recalled to Sparta, condemned, 
 and banished. He died at Tegea, B.C. 469. t«v €V MvKdXrj — 
 
 those 2vho fought at Mycale. Kriig. quotes ro«>s iv 'Mapadwvi., ii. 34, iii. 113, 
 and Arist, Eq. v. 355, KaaaX^dau) tovs h llvXt^ aTpar-qyovs, and more pecu- 
 liarly still, MtXridS?;*' Tbv 'SlapaddvL, to which Arist. Thesm. 806, is similar. 
 
 {b.) fj8T|. Even before Mycale. See Herod, ix. 114. Mt|8wv 
 
 IXOVTwv — sc. avTTjv, while still in the occupation of the Persians. Kriig. sup- 
 plies many similar phrases. 
 
 (f.) rh Koivdv . . . avTOis. This sort of dative is simply accounted fur by 
 the common j)rinciple of the dative, which makes it the case expressing the 
 more remote object in reference to which the action of the verb takes place. 
 This conception of the dative seems to have been but imperfectly realized by 
 the com}>ilers of our common grammars, if we may judge by the mass of rules 
 collected with respect to the usage of this case. * Quid mihi Celsus agit,' in 
 principle does not differ from Do tibi librum. SScv tnre^c'GtvTO. The 
 
 bdev must in strictness be taken with the preceding duKOfi-ii^ovro. The use of 
 owov here, says Kriig., would be ambiguous, ddev for €K€id€v 6irov may be ac- 
 counted for by considering that SOeu does in effect hold a place among relatives. 
 See Matth. § 473; we may also cf Jelf, § 822, 6. Troezen and Salamis are the 
 places meant, and also .'Egina. See Her. v. 5. iraiSas Kal ywaiKas 
 
 —wives and children. Remark the absence of the article, and cf. ch. 8 a, 48 b. 
 iXi^ai. According to Herod, ix. 13, says Krug., Mardonius had left nothing 
 at all standing behind him. But this is a way of speaking suitable to the semi- 
 poetic character of Herod, style and narrative. 
 
 CHAPTni XC— (a.) rh ]i(Kkov—' what was going to happen: 
 ^X0ov irpco-pcC^— for Std irptc^das upon the principle of 'Qui facit per alium 
 facit perse.' PopP- quotes yEsch. cont. Ctesiph., § 95. 'A<piKveiTaL yap irpos 
 vfias ovK^Ti 5t' dyyeXuv, dW aiV6s. The dative irpeff^dq. is not as Bl. says for 
 es Trp(fff3(iav, but denotes the modus, or manner, of their coming, as is the proper 
 usage of the dative. rd \lIv answered immediately by t6 5e wXicv. 
 
 jiTiTC. Kriig., considering that according to grammatical principles we should 
 have had oi're, explains the deviation from the rule by the fact that the notion 
 of 'prevention' is implied. T<JX|iiav •^wo\iivr]V—' the valour that 
 
 ^cas cvhibited: Such phrases point out the true force oi" yiyvofiai, denoting 
 existence as the result of a process as distinct from ei>t, cf. dvdpQv dyddwv 
 ipyif} y€vofxivu}v, ii. if., and the long note on this matter, Shei)pard's Theo- 
 
 phrastus, p. 102. 
 
 (6.) IvvcwrTTJKei— * /icW together,' and consequently were standing. Supply 
 TCL TcLxv froin Teixi^eiv. Others with the Schol. understiind Tr€pi(ioXos. 
 
 H 
 
98 
 
 NOTES OX THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book I. 
 
 Chap. 9 1.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 99 
 
 TO PovX6^€vov Kal viroTTTov. Both, say the commentators, belong to t^i 
 yvujfirjs. This is true, but it seems to me that in accordance with the principle 
 of Granville Sharp's Canon, both are to be combined into a single idea. Tlie 
 mspicious purport, or Inuring of their jtolinf, cf. 18 a. For the neuter parti- 
 ciple followed by a genitive, cf. ii. 59 ; iii. 10 ; viii. 68. ovk dv 
 l\ovTos, as above, Slv opQvrci, may easily be rest»lved into the equivalent form 
 with the finite verb = ovk B.v ^x^*- See Jelf, § 429, 4, and § 697. 
 dva\wpi]<riv t€ Kal d({>op|XT|V. ' Distinguo a.vax^py)ff*-v, locum, praesidium quo 
 reci})erent sese, d<f>opfxi]v unde ernmj>t'rt'nt.' Both conditions might be fulfilled 
 by one place. T. K. A. well explains d<popiJLrjv by the modem militarj' term, 
 ' base of operations.' With regard to the general construction of the sentence, 
 Kriig. is right in connecting ws 5^, as well as dr)\ovvT€i with rj^iovv — in that thiy 
 alltyed the Persian irorltl wonltf not by this means hare, ttr. 
 
 (r.) [JL^XP*" TocrovTov ^«s — '»/> to so long a time as,' lit. until. These words, 
 says Kriig,, would not easily elsewhere be found in combination. He however 
 quotes Plato /iV^>., 471 c, fiixp*- tovtov )Lt^xP* O"-'- 4pw<riv. This 
 
 is Bekker's conjecture. The MSS. have atpiijatv, which is ' dum erigercitt,' 
 during the time they were raising ; but perhapft ixixpt- Toaovrov, as A. says, in this 
 case would not have been so proper as Travra xp^^ov. I have some doubt 
 whether p.^XP'' to<toi>tov may not be the exact etjuivalent of this very phra.se, 
 if p.^xP'- ii^^y mean, as I believe it sometimes does, not tip to a certain point, 
 but coincident in eutent or duration xcith something that follows. In this cas^e 
 we must render ^just during so muck time as they vere raising,' cf. ch. 71 c. 
 The other expression, ews &f Apuatv, is of course donee erta^issent — * until thty 
 should have raised.' w<rT€ . . . v\}/ovs — So as to Jfght from the leant 
 
 possible elevation which would be sujirient, i>., they raised the wall to the 
 minimum height necessary for defence, and soon as ever they reached this, 
 delayed no longer. Concerning dvayKainrdrov, cf. ch. 84, ad finem, (and cf. 
 Livy's 'necessarium cubile.') 8t]|j.o(rCov. * "We are not to under- 
 
 stand that temples are here included, for that the religious spirit of the Greeks 
 would forbid. [Acts xvii. 22.] Among the public buildings we may inclu<le 
 the Mausolea and other tombs. So -^^^sch., p. 87, 31. and Diodorus.' Bloomf, 
 Itrrai — certainly, as T. K. A. says, a recurrence to the directa oratio, but not 
 therefore to be translated as he translates, from trhenre there might be, which 
 does not indicate the transition. rdXXa — tclkci. Kriig. considers 
 
 this a case of the * doubled article,' and refers to his own granmiar, 59, 9, 1, 
 where it is laid down, that after 6 dXXos, when another notion occurs which is 
 regarded in the light of a substantive, it always takes the article. To me it 
 seems more simple to take one phrase as the epexegesis of the other — the other 
 matters, i.e., what was to be done there, cf. note 23 c, and 108 b. This T. K. A. 
 denies, but he seems to contradict himself — if there be not a misprint. 
 
 (d.) rds apxds. 'The authorities,' i.e., the rd iv tA« tvra. 
 Sifj-yc, sc, t6v xP^^°^' ^^^^^ '^^ ^^*® explanation given by Stephanus in the 
 Thesaurus. Trpov^aa-iXtro — continued to make excuses. 
 
 o Ti oiK ^ir^pxrrai. There is some difference of opinion concerning the view 
 to be taken of 6 ti in collocations of this sort. 6 ti says Am. is 'quod ;' and 
 would best be translated into English. * When any one asked him about Aw 
 not coming, lit. as to that he came not, before the government.' Tliis nearly 
 
 agrees with Madvig's view, who classes the idiom with those wliere 8ti denotes 
 a circumstance or relation which takes place, and of which something is .said — 
 e.g., rd fxev &\\a dpOws iJKovaas, 8ti 5^ Kai ifii oul eiirelv tovto, TTaprjKOvaas. 
 Plato Protag., where he translates 6ti, but as to the circumstance that. Com- 
 ])are some very similar remarks of his concerning qiwd, Latin Grammar, 
 § 398. b. R, 2. We might illustrate by Hor. A)>, i. vii. 94, Quod te per 
 Genium, dextramque, Deoscjue Penates Obsecro et obtestor, where Orelli olxserves, 
 * Est relativum infinitum 8i6ti propter quod.' Kiihner [Jelf, § 849, 3] says, 
 ' The relative 6rt, quod, refers to a demonstrative in the principal clause, ex- 
 pressed or supplied, as To&r<f}, did toi'ito, iK tovtov, &c.' Other Grammarians 
 consider oVrty to resemble birov, brrtjs, &c. ; that is to say, the adverbial and 
 pronominal forms of questions used in the indirecta oratio, are fran)ed from 
 tiiose of the directa oratio by the relative preji.c 6, which is indeed the symbol 
 of their connexion with what goes before. Thus ttwj is answered by oTras, and 
 on the same principle tU by 6<xtls. So on this principle tI ovk iir^pxcTai, be- 
 comes in the indirecta oratio, ijpeTO avTov, 6 tl ovk evepxoiTO, or iirepx^Tai. 
 
 Chapter XCI. — (a.) tcjv dXX«v d<}>iKvov/x^vwv. Poppo would read tlvuv, 
 and he, with others, greatly disapproves of tCjv &\\u)v. To me the difficulty 
 does not seem insuperable. I had always supposed the words tCov &\\wv to be 
 simply exclusive ofTliemistocles — * When every one else came and told them, i.e., 
 when every one else who came, told them.' Mr. Dale has I see hit uj)on nearly 
 the same words in his version, and I believe we are right. For certainly I have 
 observed other cases where dXXos occurs even *cum articulo,' and not less 
 strangely than here, e.g., tQv ttoXitcov Kai tQv &X\(jju ^evcjv, Plat. Gorgias, 
 473 c, and again avrov Kal tCov &\\uu oiKfiicv, d 840; cf. also Eurip. Ilerac. v. 
 644. Ar. Equites, v. 905. Kriig. says that ol fiXXoi often occurs where we 
 should have expected to find dWoi, because the article only implies — the others 
 who have any comicj'ion with the matter in hand — 'the only other persons to be 
 considered.' Xa|xpdv€i, i.e. Tb retxos, understood from Teixt^^rai. 
 
 {b.) Kal ^Kov — had even arrived, i.e., in reference to the long-existing ex- 
 pectation of tiieir coming. 'Appwvixos— 'commanded the ship 
 st;itione<l at Thermopyhe, to communicate between Leonidas and the fleet 
 stationed at Artemis.' T. K. A. See Herod, viii. 21. Sttotc 
 dKovorciav. I cannot understand the doctrine that (as T. K. A. has it) this 
 phraseology represents the aor. subjunct. of direct narration with &u, and is to 
 be translated — 'when they should hare heard.' Why should not the simple 
 optative retain its ordinary indefinite meaning — 'when the Lacedmnonians came 
 to hear of it, ichenever that might be;' cf. tuv vcCjv As KaTadvaetau, ch. 50. See 
 
 Jelf, § 844 a. 
 
 (c.) IvravBa 8tj. Popp. note is 'post partic. ut ii. 58, est 'turn rero* Sail. 
 Jug. c. 71, turn demum, ibi vero; similia apud Liv. cf. Sanp. ad Xen. Mem. iii. 
 5, 8.' The truth is that, in this common phrase, 5^ exerts its usual force, i.e., 
 it adds intensity to the meaning of the word to which it forms an adjunct — 
 hereupon then, or if derived from 7)87) denotes that the mind has at last reached 
 a point on which to pause ujyon this at last. Cf. 5^ in connexion with relatives, 
 superlatives, &c. See note ch. i b. ws irpbs k.t. X. Popp. says, 
 
 * Consecutio verborum haec est r6 Xoiirbv ikvai ws -rrpbi biayiyvuffKOVTas, k. t. X. 
 
 U 2 
 
100 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Took I. 
 
 Chap. 93.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 lOI 
 
 Trans. — *to come to them for the future as to men capable of discriminativfj.' 
 Kemark the variation between the singular and plural numbers, as though 
 Tliemistocles sometimes spoke in his own person, and sometimes in that of his 
 colleajiues. 
 
 (d.) (A-fi dirb dvTfirdXov irapacrKcviis. I think the obvious sense of these 
 words is — ' where the means of military defence are not equal among the 
 parties, it is impossible that fair and equal councils can be contributed to the 
 common iuterest.' Themistocles purposely, I should imagine, couched the 
 maxim in general tenns, and left it to the Spartans to make what particular appli- 
 cation of it they jdeased. It is not therefore needful to convey this particular 
 application in the words of our translation, nor indeed do I hold that it would 
 be correct. The Schol. and Poppo sujipose that Themistocles insinuates — 
 in case of invasion, if Athens is without a wall, she might be more inclined to 
 counsel submission to an enemy than the better defended members of the con- 
 federacy. Kriig. explains, that they could not enforce their opinions with the 
 same authority as more strongly protected states. This is true, but as this 
 would be a contingency by no means displeasing to Sparta, we must be careful 
 not to regard it as an argument addressed to her, but as a general assertion. 
 With respect to the phrase ^s t6 Koivbv ^ov\€V€(T0ai, Poppo well cf. * in com- 
 mune consulere.' Terent. And. iii. 16. 
 
 Chapteu XCII. — {a.) dv84 "ydp, here equivalent to Kal yap ov. 
 K<a\v\ir\ — 'i\, Thucydida\in word, cf. iv. 27, 63, and imitated by Herodian 
 viii. I, 6.' Kriig. -yvioiiTis irapaiv^o-ci — 'a recommendatloti of policy.' The 
 particles 5?) and drjdev are, as is well known, freijuently employed when the 
 •writer is giving what is the sentiment or statement of another, and not his own. 
 See Jelf, § 762, 2 a. The idiom seems to me to have arisen from an ironical 
 emphasis. It is generally employed in cases where the writer himself distrusts 
 the statement to which it is affixed, and is evidently meant to mark out this 
 statement with, as I have said, somewhat of irony. But from this usage it may 
 pass into the simple index of language for which the author does not hold him- 
 self responsil)le. tw koivw. No editor has determined whether 
 this is to be taken, as the Schol. says, for I'-rep tov koivov, or whether it is 
 governed by the verbal notion contained in irapaiv^aeL — *a recommendation 
 addressed to the State.' d(iapT<ivovT€s. This use of the present 
 participle seems to me akin to those noticed, ch. 24 d, and 83 b, where see 
 what has been said. Kriig. says that this verb, and doiKu) also, virtuallif have 
 a past signification, cf. i. 38. He quotes a/xaprdvojv ^rj/itw^T^o-erai, Xen. Man. 
 iii. 9, 12. c.V€'TrtKXT|T<«)S. Sch. oi'S^i' ^7/c\77^^i'rcs, and L. and S. " un- 
 blamed.' There seems no ground for making it actice as T. K. A. 
 
 Chapter XCIII. — (a.) ^\r\ itrnv 6ri — for the more usual construction with 
 a participle. But peihaps a slight diHerence of mejuiing is implied. Sheus in 
 its verif apitearancc ; carries in its appcaranre, a proof that it was. But 
 see Jelf, § 677, 804, 2. viroKcivxat. Apparently a technical 
 
 term, for Bl. quotes Xen. Iii pp. i. 2, tii) viroKci/x^vuv o'iuiv bd tQv dcfieXiuv — 
 tr. 'the foundations are laid of stones of all sorts and sizes.' 
 |vv£ipYao-|i^vuv — 'so hewn as to Jit into each other.* Kriig. cf. ^vvc^iKodofnjfi^voiy 
 
 i. 93. iyKaroKiyut is translated by L. and S. (from the Scholiast's 
 
 iyKaTifiKoSofMrjdTfffav) — 'to build in.' But it seems to me that the idea of synte- 
 .uutic bnildinff is precisely the one which Thuc. meant to reject. KaraXeyu) is 
 simply to collect, and the whole word implies, I think — 'icere picked up and 
 hastily put in.' The fact is confirmed by Col. Leake, who saw whole courses of 
 masonry formed of broken portions of Doric columns, and composite blocks of 
 Doric entablature. Topogr. of Athens, vol. i. p. 312. The eipyaafievoL \l6ol were 
 from these very entablatures, sculptured in relievo. This seems to have been 
 overlooked by the English Trans, who has merely — ' wrowjht stones.* 
 KivovvT€s. This looks almost like a reference to the proverb wavra \idov 
 KLVilv — *to leave no stone unturned.' 
 
 {b.) virfjpKTo avTov. *A commencement had been made of it,' Kiiig., cf. 
 TiiravTai, i. 6. kvi, cum genitivo, * in the time of The construc- 
 
 tion dpxf)v' Xd-qvaloLS Ap^aL is, says Pop., e(iuivalent to dpxovTa Trap' 'A6r)vaioii 
 €luai. There is more difficulty about Acar' ivLavrbv, which, according to analogy, 
 should mean, year by year, yearly. Puppo's notion is, I think, m<ist probable, 
 that, viz., it is so connected with dpx^s 1^ a« to be almost equivalent to dpxh 
 /car* ivLavrbv oiVa. I should therefore translate, hdd the annual ojHce of 
 Archon, i.e., Archon Eponymus, What this year was is disputed. Bockh, 
 who lijvs published a learned dissertation, rfe A rchont ibus pseudeponymis, fixes 
 upon Olymp. Ixxi. 4, i.e., B.C. 493. Kriig., in his Studia Ilistor. et Philol., 
 maintains, on the contrary, that the year was 01. Ixxiv. 3, i.e., B.C. 482. 
 Clinton argues for B.C. 481, with whom Dr. Thirlwall coincides, having aban- 
 doned Kriig. 's view. See Appendix v. vol. ii., Hist. Greece, all of w^iich should 
 indeed be read as bearing upon this subject. Mr. Grote has a notion of his 
 own, that Thuc. meant, * during the year when Themistocles was Strategus 
 (vol. v. p. 338, note), but I cannot see how he supports it. Xifi^vas 
 
 Tp€is. Pop. refers to Pausanias, and the Schol. Arist. Pax, 144, from whom 
 we learn that the two were called tov Kavddpov Xip-eva and t6 ' A<ppodia-iov. 
 Hesychius supplies Zea as the name of the third. Kapp, de re navali Athen. 
 interi>rets the above mentioned Schol. so as to substitute Ueipata /car' e^oxnv 
 for t6' A (ppo5i<nov. avTo4>v€is, lit. of spontaneous yroirth, natural. 
 
 y-iya. irpo<|>^peiv. The infinitive may have for its subject, ai)roi>s vavriKov^ 
 yeyiv-qpiivov^, in which case tr. the fact of their having become a naval people 
 wuuld i/reatly contribute to the acquisition of 2^0 wer : or its subject maybe t6 
 X^P^ov, in which case tr. that the place would greatly aid them, ichen they had 
 once become a riaval people, in the acquisition of power. Kriig. aptly cites Eurip. 
 Med. 1090, Kal ^r)fii (3pOTu>v oinvei dalv Trdfiirav direipoL /jlt)8' e<pvTevaav iraidas 
 tiiya Trpo<f>ipeLV 6ts evrvxiav rCov yeiva/xiyuu. €v0vs, as explained by 
 
 the Schol. &fia rif ffVfx^ovXf.uaai. GoU.'s idea that it means ' statim postquam 
 Archon factus est, ' is negatived by what follows, cf. note upon heXiadt). 
 Tfjv dpx^v, generally considered to mean ' their dominion^' but Kriig. would 
 rather refer it to inrrjpKTo. TJp^cv— * the commencement of the building.' 
 
 He, with his colleagues, erected a Hermes with this inscription— 'A p^d/xej/oc 
 vpQjToi reixiii'eiv t6p 8' dvidrjKav. Kriig. Hist. Phil. Stud. p. 23. 
 
 (c.) Kal coKoSofiTio-av. This description has caused some difficulty. The ex- 
 position of Mr. Grote seems to convey the general opinion. ' Two carts, meet- 
 ing one another, brought stones, which were laid together right and left on the 
 
IC3 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 other 8,Je of «ach and thus fome.1 two primary parallel walls, between which the 
 ^ter,or spaee (of course at least as broad as the joint brea.lth of the two cartst 
 was filled up, not with rubble in the usual n.anner of the Greeks but ^n 
 
 hfteen feet tluck, smce it was intende,l to carry so very unusual a hei,rht • 
 vol. V. p. ,,.,. And so Thirlwall. ' The wall w^ of a bl.a.lt rwtid, aUo'w 'd 
 two wagons to pass each other, and this space was entirely filled wihhew.l 
 tones exacUy fitted together within, and consolidated upo' the ouT le ^U 
 .ron clamps and molten lead.' [Vol. ii. p. ,06.] T. K. A. wond ™ X 
 Thuc should tell us that they kept brinjjing the stones to the wall ,„ ,i;fZ] 
 d.recnons and suggests that some of the stones were l,.,por,e.l (1), and therefore 
 came up from the port. I do not see that Thuc. </„./tell us anything o7th: 
 
 ^ttn for-'T " ""■'; "''r '"'""« '""'''"S^'' ''" '"=">' """IJ ""' "nnLurally 
 return for ano her, and „„ght meet a laden cart by the way. We need make 
 
 JO/ Me „ul, but that they brought their load up to the place where it was 
 to be depos.ted : as n.ay be seen fron, .,d,., 'a .,.r,a'a. vii. 60. Z 
 bchol explanafon i.a^ia, „„„^^^,,„, . ,„j gothe's conj^ture, mJI^ 
 
 4 le^ V. 1 , 24, a pas.s...ge evidently referring to this very building. 
 
 "'"'' ^' inmiu SO' ipf^are 
 
 iwTW vTdm-ue, fiiyteos iaov Sovpws, 
 
 M TOO T\dro„ i, wapeXaaairvK [v. 1048, ed. Bothe.] 
 
 87r.p vSv ?Ti. We may remark that the doubt expressed bv ..cent ditn™ 
 
 thlwlr aalt « ""V"""' *"*" "' ""y *'■"« '"f"" ">e conclusion of 
 
 tue war. U. ap^a^tm cveOs Kadcffrai^i^ov, i. i. For the more u«„a1 J. 
 Krug. reads withoneMS ,Vr^„« Ti, c . t , , ' " '^°'''' 
 
 Me /,w»„; • ,- /" "f.*'^- '"^'"f The first I shouhl render, • made ar,^u/ur in 
 
 H iH^l f \-' ' " '" *" ""S"'""" '°™' »" '''»» 'I'" n.eani„g would but sii.d.tlv 
 diffe fron, Krug. 's mstrumental dative, which, however, would make tlt-"^ 
 to r.x,avp. l„ th,s he pro.luces the authority ^f Josephus, p^o8 J 
 i3ut Josephus may have been imJfafSnr, ♦! : . ' »oo, 21. 
 
 Am cf ii -6 aLJ ^ '""**^'"ff **"« Pa««a&e under a misapprehension. 
 
 G™i' h J ./ ;r ?' "°^^r '•^'•^^ '^^^ i>-"' ^'f^^re the ^,nes had been cut ' 
 ijroii. iKia /oo« nutftus incsi sunt' z\ t . r 
 
 .ii .vi:^:^. nave ^7rt/3o\as, t. e., ^irt^^acts, which looks more natural. 
 
 [Book I. I Chap. 95.] 
 
 NOTES OX THUCYDIDES. 
 
 103 
 
 T«v AxP**'®^^'*'"''* *• *•» '^^^ Trpfa^vToiTOJV Kal tQv veojTarojp. See ii. 6. Kriig. 
 adds iii. 78. Xen. Anab.f v. 2, 4. 
 
 (rf.) irpo<r^K€i.TO. Sch. rbv vovv Tpoaeix^ — /<-€ laid most stress upon the ships, 
 being farsiyhted enough to perceive. lTcixC<r9Tj<rav — ' were provided 
 
 with a wall.' For understanding the fuW force of KaTearKevd^ovTO, refer to ch. Jo, 
 KaTaffKeOf}. 
 
 Chapter XCIV. — (a.) Ilavo-avCas 8^. This 5^ refers the narrative back to 
 ch. 87. For KXe6/ii3/)OTOs, cf. Herod, vii. 71. ^^c'ir^jJi<}>6T]. In the 
 
 spring of the year, 478, B. c, i. e., one year after the battle of Plataea. Diodorus, 
 says Grote, makes the Peloponnesian ships fifty ; but his statement is not io 
 be accepted in opposition to Thucydides. €V ttjSc ttj t|'Y€[iov£(2i. 
 
 Stephens, Goll. and Kriig. connect these words with the following chapter. 
 Arnold retains them in this, because he believes that Thucyd, means to express 
 that Byzantium was taken during the term of Pausanias' command, though 
 certainly towards the close of it. This would place the recall of Pausanias in 
 B. c. 378 ; and as Dorcis, his successor, never succeeded in securing the alle- 
 giance of the allied Greeks, Mr. Fynes Clinton assumes the year, B.C. 377 to 
 have l>een the true commencement of the Athenian dominion. According to 
 this view, the building of the walls, the capture of Byzantium, and the recall of 
 Pausanias all occurred B. c. 378. Mr. Grote generally assenting to Clinton's 
 view, adds, ' Pansanias' comn)and, however, need not be restricted to one year, 
 as Mr. Clinton mainUins, for the words of Thucyd., cV Trjde ry riyefxoviq., imply 
 nothing as to annual duratiim, and designate merely the 'hegemony which pre- 
 ceded that of Athens." See note, vol. v. p. 415. 
 
 Chapter XCV. — (a.) Kara rh |vyy€V6s. Because the lonians, who had 
 been expelled from Peloponnesus, took refuge in Attica previous to their mi- 
 gration to the Asiatic coast. See on the Ionic migration Arnold's note upon 
 this passage, and a very full account, Hermann's Pol. Ant. of Greece, sections 
 77, 78. Grote, vol. iii. ch. 13. Thirlwall, i. p. 295. avrois- 
 
 Of the Athenians, aa is obvious from the context, though <T4>laiv might rather 
 have been anticipated. Kriig. compares v. 32 ; vi. 35 ; vii. 17 ; viii. 46. 
 d8iK£a KaTT^-yopciTo avTov — * much icrony doing was laid to his charge.* Kriig. 
 is unacquainted with the phrase icaT7)yopoi'fjLai ddiKiap. ^ crTpaTT^Y^a — 
 
 ' than a military command." To read i] aTpaTrjyia with Poppo in order to 
 obtain a subject, aj^ears to me to destroy the force of the language. Krug. 
 aptly cites dpicroKpaTia fidWov fj ^acnXeia voixLcdriffeTai. Herodian, v. 1,4. 
 
 [h.) avT«, for the niore strictly correct avrdv—' it happened to him to be 
 summoned.' T. K. A. says, 'as both events have reference to Pausanias, 
 avrbi is placed under the government of ^vv^'^t).' |i,€TaTd|ao-0ai. 
 
 The prep, denotes as usual 'change,' and the whole is correctly given by Dale— 
 went nter and ranged themselves vpon the side of the Athenians. 
 cv0vv0T|. The Schol. explains eu^iVas S^Swkc Kal KaTediKacBr] : lit. he suffered 
 judicial condemnation. The €vdvwri was the examination (at Athens) into the 
 way in which a magistrate had discharged his office in order to see whether he 
 had acted correctly [€vOv%]. The meaning here therefore is clear. On rdv 
 eiidvydT}, cf. Jelf, § 501. Remark how the Aorist merely denotes the fact, 
 
104 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book I. 
 
 Chap. 98.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 J 05 
 
 while his partial and incomplete acquittal is expressed by a transition to the 
 present dTroXi'/erat : the firj before dSiKeJy is in accordance with the usual Greek 
 idiom, which affixes the negation to the part of the notion negatived in the 
 speaker s mind ; Poppo has produced a somewhat uncommon imitation from 
 the Latin language, ' Liberatur Milo non eo consiho profectus esse ut insi- 
 diaretur.' Cic. pro. Mil. 18. 47. 
 
 (''.) X«^povs yiyvuivrai. Not simply as Rl. would have it, comparative for 
 positive, but './ajufd deteriorate.' That such was the fact with the Spartans 
 owing to a reaction against their severe domestic discipline, is notorious. See 
 Plut. Art^. c. 23. Aristotle notices the fact, and gives the same reason for 
 'i^r urn. ^^'^ Ivil^ov-ukirh they mw to he the erne in Paumuias. 
 Muiler [Dormm, 1. p. 204] considers that tlie unwillingness of the Spartans to 
 send more commanders to Asia, lay deeper than any annoyance at the defection 
 of the Ionian Greeks. They deemed it inexj.edient to aim at the mastery of 
 the sea, or run the hazard of breaking up the Sp-irtan institutions by attempts 
 at foreign conquest. Uavovs- See what the Athenians themselves 
 
 say, 1. 76 ; and for a Lacedjemonian witness, Xen. Hdl. vi. «;, 34. Kriin-. 
 
 Chapter XCVI.— (a.) HavoravCov (ii<ros. Objective genitive. 
 EXXtivorafiCai. So called because they received, and then disbursed the con- 
 tributions of all the Hellenic confederacy. These contributions were originally 
 deposited at Delos, and then removed to Athens. Boeckh [Public. Econ Ath 
 ii. p. 2zG], from some inscrii»tions, concludes that they were ten in number, and 
 that, like the treasurers of the gods, they were chosen by lot, out of the Penta- 
 cosiomedimni, and that they did not enter upon their office at the be-inning of 
 the year, but after the Panatlienrea. They [mxouro] received, but did not 
 coUert the tribute. The word 4>6po, became so odious, that at Olymp c 
 avvra^L, wa^ substituted for it. Delos was selected for these ^vuoboi, or 
 'councils.' Subsequently they were called 2: iWSpoc Bekker. ^««^r p 302 
 Isocrates, viii. 29. For fuller information see Herm. Pol. Antiquities § 56* 
 Boeckh, Public Econ. Athens, p. 236. Eng. Trans. The Hellenotamiai were 
 not (says A.) reappointed after the establishment of the Demociacv bv 
 Tlirusybulus. *' ^ 
 
 Chapter XCYII. (a.) d^6 Kocv«v. Tliis d^A has, as Kriig. remarks, the 
 force of the Gennan Von. It indicates in a less intimate way than iK the 
 source from which any action proceeds. For examples cf. L. and S and Jelf's 
 Grammar, roc. awS, i-^XOov, prosecuted, or e^cuted. 
 
 xpo<rTU7X<ivovTas is explained by the Scholiast 4f.7ro8il:o,^as ; perhaps it is 
 rather more general-W.o in each particular case came into contact or collision 
 U'ith them. Kriig. quotes Xen. Q/r. vi. 3. 2, ol irpoarvyxd.oure, tQu dpx6yrwy 
 iTrefiiXouTo, and Dem. 25, 96, 6 irpocTvxCjv del rifiupdadu,. 
 
 (6.) «7paxj/a. . . . liroiTia-djitiv. As perfects, savs T. K. A. Wliy not m 
 Aorists I am unable to determine. The fart that Tliucvd. had so written ia 
 all that he wishes to convey. The time of writing is of no importance. 
 ^kPoXt], a digression, called in later Greek writers vapiK^aaL^. 
 UKiTTis, omitted, left out, only imitated by Arrian. x^P^v seems to 
 
 be here used as a sort of diminutive for the ordinary t6tos, i. e., locus, topic 
 
 KttV -IjxI/aTo, this Koi is one of those which, as Am. observes, may best be 
 rendered by an emph:isis upon the auxiliary verb — * did touch upon.' In seems 
 in this and similar cases to imply, 'for all that,' 'notwithstanding what I have 
 said,' cf. ch. 20 a. tois xp<^*'0''5 — 'The chronology,' and in later 
 
 writers. The reference is to the Athis, or History of Attica, which Helkinicus 
 composed in four books at least. He was a native of Mytilene (see i. 21.) — 
 Aulus Gell. makes him come from Miletus— a contemporary of Herodotus — 
 i. e., twelve years older, and sixty- five years of age when the Peloponnesian 
 war began. See Miiller's History of Greek Literature, ch. xviii. 7. 
 IXCi here, as elsewhere, nearly irap^x^t.. See GoU. on i. 9. Its subject is either rb 
 X^ptoi', or as Pop. and Kriig. suggest, ravra from what precedes, cf. Jelf, § 898, 
 3. tr., 1/ inrolres, or gives opportunity for the setting forth, Herod, i. i. Mr. Grote, 
 after observing that the period from B.C. 477 to B.C. 405 is sometimes incor- 
 rectly described as the Athenian Empire, and that no one word will express the 
 character of their ascendency during these years, proceeds to direct attention 
 to this portion of the work of Thucyd. as indicating the imperceptible transition 
 from an rrytf^ovia to an dpxT}- * The transition from the Athenian Hegemony 
 to the Athenian Empire was doubtless gradual, so that no one could determine 
 precisely where the former ends and the latter begins ; but it had been consum- 
 mated before the thirty years' truce, which was concluded fourteen years before 
 the Peloponnesian war, and it was in ftct the substantial cause of that war.' 
 Grote, vol. v. pp. 395, 6, where see also the long note on the in'cp-ovia, as con- 
 trasted with dpxTj. ^v ota» rpdirw. The prep, conveys somewhat 
 more meaning than the simple dative. Bremi, to whom Poppo refers, says 
 upon Lys., p. 69, Ilepi :::r)K. (vtovti^ T(p rpbxi^ fjaOa &v fie TeTifiojprjfi^vo^, est cum 
 prepositione quod nos diceremus, qua ratione innixi, Jidentes, tr., under what 
 circumstances it became established, cf. i. 8, ad fin. 
 
 Chapter XCVIII.— (a.) 'HCova. 'On the site of this city, subsequently 
 the p<irt of Ami.hipolis, cf. iv. 102. The words ij ifrl :f:Tpvfi6vL are added to 
 distinguish it from a Mendsean Colony, and periiaps from a third Eion 
 mentione<l by Eustathius.' Popp. M^8«v Ix<Jvtwv. Herod, vii. 107. 
 
 The event occurred, Olymp. Ixxv., 4, and Olymp. Ixxvi. Kriig. The capture 
 of Scyros occurred in the latter year. Grote has, I think, successfully shown, 
 that these three events could have formed but a small portion of the operations 
 carried on against the Persians, from B.C. 477 to B.C. 466. See Herod, vii. 
 106, 107. Nothing but years of active training could have enabled the 
 Athenians to acquire their remarkable ascendency in nautical skill, and their 
 various other advantages, and to the same prolonged and continuous labours 
 must be ascribed the disgust of the Ionian confederates, vol. v. p. 403. 
 
 (6.) irpbs 8€ Kapvo-rCovs. Nothing is known of this. liroXI- 
 
 \i.T]<rav. ' That this happened during the time of Thtniistocles' flight into Asia, 
 we learn from ch. 137, and before the battle of Eurymedon, ch. 100. But as 
 the date of this battle is itself undetermined, Clinton and Wachsmuth place the 
 siege of Naxos B.C. 466, but Kriig. in the year B.C. 47.^/ ^OPP- 
 irap€<rW|<ravTo— lit. 'made them come and stand beside them,' is not express as 
 to the means employed to compel a surrender. That the place was carried by 
 assault seems (as Bl. has seen) implied by the words of Aristophanes, ieis aavrbv 
 
io6 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book T. 
 
 Ghap. 101.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 107 
 
 KaTk roO reixov^ 8t€ 5)? 7' v Na^os eaXw, Vesp. 355. ^8ovX«eT|. 
 
 From what precedes, we see that this word is not so strong as dvSpairodiit a dai ; 
 inileed, Kriig. says it is simply opposed to avrdpofxoi, as is the case in Xen. 
 Hellenic, iv. 8, § i, 2, 
 
 Chapter XCIX. — (o.) lK8uai— 'anrar*.' Tliis is evidently so to be 
 translated, as the passages adduced by Popp. prove. Zon. et Suidas, ikSda, ij 
 KCKpeufffiiuT) XoLTds. at tQu (popuf ^/cSetai sunt Polybio rd frpo<TO<p€i\6fi€va rdv 
 bixo\oyT]divT{i}v xP'?Aia7-a;*'. Livio, reli<iuum pecuniae ex eo quod pepigenint, 
 xviii. 37. The term in the Latin Jurists is Reliquatio. XciirooTpaTtov 
 
 — refusal, or omission of militarif service. The word had a technical applica- 
 tion in the Athenian law, as indicating a particular civil offence. In the case 
 of a ypa<p-q XenrocrTpaTiov, actual desertion seems to have been imjilied. The 
 penalty upon conviction was a fine, and complete disfranchisement of the 
 offender and his descendants. «irpa<r<rov, as the compound verb, 
 
 ea-irpdaffu — were very strict and e.racti>ig. ToXannapfiv. This and 
 
 the cognate substantive ra\ai7ra;/)ia denote regular and prolonged devotion to 
 labour. Wachsnmth, vol. ii. § 53, is justified in saying, 'The lonians and their 
 Greek neighbours were too much debivsed by sensual pleasures to prefer freedom, 
 at the price of toil and privation, to servitude which insured them the enjoy- 
 ment of luxury.' See their conduct as described by Herod, vi. 12. 
 TOLS dvd-yKas — ^ the coiupuhory measures uhich tJuy did employ,' said in the 
 first instance of tortures applied to extort confession. I cannot agree with 
 Popp. that there is any allusion to military engines and besieged towns, cf. iv. 
 87, and Dein. ii. 29; Isocrates, iv. 81. 
 
 (6.) ^v TJ8ovg dpxovT€S. This may be considered equivalent to ij^fh iv ry 
 dpxv — afjreeaUt in their (joverninent ; but such a use of T)hovri must be admitted 
 to be unusual. Krlig. therefore proposes to make dpxovT€S rjaav equivalent to 
 flPXov, a predicate modified by the phrase ^j' ^Sor]^, * no longer ruled to the satis- 
 faction of their allies.' This use of the participle with ei/^i for the finite verb, 
 is, I think, common in the Greek Test., and may be found elsewhere. 
 6(ioCu>s — w? iv dpxv f^^Ta rbv Wavaaviav, Schol. paSCov ^v. This 
 
 perhaps may mean, they made light of it^ just as Juvenal uses 'facilis,' — Queis 
 facile est aidera conducere, &c. iii. 31. 
 
 (c.) airoKVTjo-iv, we might almost render 'shirking' — 'trying to get off.' 
 ^Ta^avTo — 'they made the arrangement for themselves,' voce media. The accu- 
 sative ro t/ci'oi//Lie:'OJ' dvaXw/ua, not as Bl., 'what the expetise comes to,' but the 
 expense coming to, or devolving on tJkem, may be regarded as placed in explana- 
 tory ap{)Osition to rd xj>lf^°-'^°" Popp. suggests another way of taking the 
 words, sc. xp^/^ctra ird^avro (ware) <pipeiv to Uv. dvaX. ; but this does not seem 
 necessary. This sense of Uviofxai is found in Herod, vi. 65, 84, 86, ix. 26 ; and 
 Kriig. also cites Ar. Pol. iv. i, i, idv rij firi rijs iKvov/Jiivrjs €Tri6vfxr} fxijd' ^^fwy 
 K.T.X. dircipoi. The common reading is dvopoi, but many of the 
 
 best MSS. read dreLpoi, which is adopted by Bekker, Poppo, and Goll. I think 
 they are right, for dtropoi is rather tautological, and at any rate much more 
 likely to have been substituted for d-rrcipoi than vice versii. dirapoi implies that 
 they were destitute of that experience which the practical service which they 
 bad declined alone could give. 
 
 Chapter C. — (a.) rds ird<ras €s [xds] 8iaK0<r£as. Tliere is much variation 
 in MSS. and among editors concerning the article before the numeral. The read- 
 ing appears to me to depend upon the historical fact whether the Persian fleet 
 at Eurymedon consisted of more than 200 ships or not. Later writers state 
 the number as much higher, but they vary so among themselves, and exhibit 
 80 much tendency to exaggeration, that their authority is not worth much. 
 Besides, what became of the remaining vessels not destroyed by Cimon ? From 
 the necessity of the case, and indeed conformably to the usual practice, the 
 Persians, we may be sure, ran all their ships on shore, so that their whole force 
 might be concentrated to repel the inevitable attack of their enemy ; and how, 
 in this case, could any of the vessels have escaped the victoi-s '( I should there- 
 fore tr. the whole of them, up to their full count of 200 — i.e., the whole 200 of 
 them. Other ways of accounting for the article seem to me futile. Mr. Grote 
 has, I se«, taken a view similar to the above, vol. v. p. 419, note. 
 Xpovw verrepov. B.C. 465, or, according to Kriig., B.C. 467. tov 
 
 (jLCToXXov. According to Herod, the gold mine brought in 80 talents yearly to 
 the Thasians. See vi. 46-48, vii. 18 ; and read Bockh, Public E. of A. book iii. 
 ch. 20. Thucyd. had an interest in it, through his wife, and resided at Scapte- 
 Hyle during his banishment. For an historic parallel, see Grote's note, ibid. 
 
 (6.) *Evv^a 680VS. ' On the Strymon, about three miles higher up than Eion, 
 near the spot where the river narrows itself again out of a broad expanse of the 
 nature of a lake, was situated the Edonian town or settlement called Nine 
 Ways, a little above the bridge which here served as an important communica- 
 tion for all the people of the interior,' Grote, v. p. 421. On the Edonians, cf. 
 Herod, v. 124, vii. no, 114, ix. 75, and 'HSwWs ala yEsch. Persce, 487. 
 ^vfiirdvTwv. Their destruction is ascribed to the Edonians alone by other 
 writers. Kriig. would therefore accept Valla's conjecture, ^v/xwavres, i. €., the 
 colonists ; or, with Heilman, read ^vardvTwv. Arn. considers it natural that 
 all the Thracian tribes should combine to destroy a colony attempting to settle 
 itself in such an advantageous situation as Amphipolis, especially as they had 
 already defeated a similar attempt by Aristagoras of Miletus, Herod, v. 126. 
 Histiaeus, he might have added, had been similarly unsuccessful, Grote vi. 
 p. 16.) Apd^r}<TKos, according to Leake, is the modern ' Drama.' This occurred 
 B.C. 467-464. 
 
 Chapter CI. — (a.) \i.a\ais- Commentators are puzzled, as only one battle 
 is mentioned. I regard it as the indefinite use of the plural, * hostilities.' fcee 
 note on iii. 65. vir^o-xovTo Kpv<|>a. Upon this, Grote takes occa- 
 
 sion to remark, ' The first intent of unprovoked and even treacherous hostility 
 — the germ of the future Peloponnesian war — is conceived and reduced to an 
 engagement by Sparta,' v. p. 423. EtXwrcs IIcpCoiKot. The student 
 
 must consult upon these, Arn.'s excellent note on this chapter; Miiller's JJo- 
 rians, book iii. ch. 2, 3; Hermann's Pol. Antiq. Greece, § 19, 24, 28, 48: and 
 Grote. TOV orcwrjiov. The article, because it was the worst ever 
 
 known in Greece, Olymp. ci. It laid the whole of Sparta in ruins, save five 
 houses, and it is said, broke off a peak from Mount Taygetus, which rolled into 
 the river Eurotas. The Spartans regarded it as a judgment sent by Neptune 
 for the murder of some revolted Helots who had taken sanctuary in his temple 
 
io8 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book I, 
 
 CuAP. 104.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 109 
 
 at Taenarum. See Grote, v. p. 428. ^s*I0w|jlt^v i-ir^cnTio-av. Re- 
 
 mark the contracted form of the expression, as in 65 b, H^" b. Kriig. quotes 
 d7r6crras els MtVoi/s, Xen. Anab. i. 6, 7. Tlie remarkable expression of Ari- 
 stotle {Pol. ii. 6, 2) concerning the Helots is quoted by Kriig., uxrwep yap i<f>€- 
 Spevovres rots a.TvxoP'-o-o^'- hiaTcXovaiv. 
 
 (6.) t<5t€ — here, as often, ' the well-knou-n time/ 0d<rtoi 8^, Here 
 
 the narrative is resumed. tci\os and vavs — without the article, as 
 
 in the quotation of legal formulae, items in an account, and such familiar matters. 
 See note, ch. 8 a; cf. inter alia ch. 108, iii. 117. Ka6cXovT€s. In 
 
 this case, as generally, the participle sine articulo expresses the conditioniiuj of 
 the predication. This is clearly shown by the present example, since it stands 
 for f0* (^ — u)<TT€. Cf. i. 108, iii. 115, 117. Ta|d^cvok. Cf. ird^avro, 
 
 ch. 99. 8(ra ?8€i, Kriig. supposes to mean arrears, and the pay- 
 
 ment of the expenses of the war. , 
 
 Chapter CII. — (a.) Ijitjkvvcto. Two battles are mentioned by Herod, ix. 
 3S« aXXovs. 'The .^Cginetans, ii. 27; Platwans, iii. 54; Manti- 
 
 nseans, Xen. Hell. v. 2, 3,' Popp. -JiXBov. Olymp. Ixxix. i, or B.C. 
 
 464. ovK oXi-yu). With 4000 Hoplites, Arist., Lysist., Kriig. 
 
 T€ixofiax€iv. So in the case of Platjea, Herod, ix. 70. Cf. Thuc. ii. 75, vii. 
 79. TovTov. We must supply rov Teixo/JLaxdv- Popp. refers to 
 
 rrjs Svvdfieus ivSed, ch. 77. ''EuSed i<f>alv(To quasi tA Trpdyixara TwvWdTjvalwv 
 est dicendi genus impersonjile,' Popp. * [Vhen there was shoini to he a ilejicitncy 
 in fJiis respect.* iroXiopKCas. without the article, 09 it turned out a 
 
 hni'i siege. Kriig. quotes Polyb. i. 1 7, 9, yroXiopKlas xpo^^ov Trpoipaivo/x^Trj^. 
 pCt^ Y^P ^v €tXov — ofhtru'ine, had not this deficiency existed, they uoulU hare 
 captured the j>/<ice hi/ storm. 
 
 (h.) <|>avcpd, opposed to dSrfXujs -ffx^ovTo, ch. 92, Popp. fir} ti connects itself 
 with Seiaaures, though the cognate n(jtion Kai dWo^vXovs dp.a Ttyija-d/xevoi inter- 
 venes. Kriig. refers to Pflugk on Eurip. JJerac. 227, and Lobeck, Aja.c, p. 26S. 
 rh 7roXp.i]pbv Kal ti?jv v««t. — ' the enterprisiinj and revolutionary spirit. ' Cf. ii. 
 87. dXXo<|>tiXovs. Tiie never extinguished animosity between the 
 
 Dorian and Ionian race is justly considered as one of the real causes of the 
 Peloponnesian war. Clinton {Fasti Hell. ann. 464-461 B.C.), following Plu- 
 tarch, has recognised two Lacedaemonian requests to Athens, and two expedi- 
 tions to Sparta, both under Cimon, one B.C. 464, just after the earthquake, a 
 second B.C. 461. Mr. Grote's arguments for a single expedition (vol. v. pp. 
 430> 4.3 1> note) appear to me conclusive. ITie eartluiuake took place at the 
 time of the siege of Tliasos, for it was the earthquake which prevented the 
 Lacedremonians from acceding to the request of the Thasians for an invasion of 
 Attica; but Cimon commanded at Thasos, and consecjuently could not have 
 led an auxiliary force at that time into Laconia. Next, Thucydides must have 
 mentioned two expeditions had he heanl of them ; nor is it probable that 
 Sparta, the first military power in Greece, should have been all at once reduced 
 to such helplessness as to owe her safety to foreign intervention. The gross 
 exaggerations of the comic poet, Lysistrat. v. 1138, deceived Plutarch. 
 
 {c.) OVK 4irl T« ^cXtCovi — ^ not for the best of motives,' as we should say. 
 Cf. TrpoffTrolTjffis iiri x^^po*') Theoph. Uepl Elpwveias, or, in this place perhaps, 
 
 not for the more honourable reason of the two — i.e., 6ti ovdev irpoad^ovrai avrwp 
 (ti. 'Ap-yetas. On the Argives and their poHcy, consult Thirlwall, 
 
 ii. p. 424, and Grote, v. 429. * Argos, neutral during the Persian invasion, 
 had now recovered the effects of that destructive defeat suffered about thirty 
 years before from the Spartan King Cleoraenes.' i-ni tw M'qSw. The 
 
 dative is unusual, but quite legitimate, for it denotes the * object' against which 
 the treaty was directed. 
 
 Chaptku cm. — (a.) ScKdro). Kriig. would read 5', i.e., rerdpTif}. Dio- 
 dorus also, however, says 10. ^<j>* (^ i^iatriv — 'on condition that 
 
 they shall emif/rate.' See Jelf. 
 
 (6.) KaT* ^x^os TiS-fj tJ> AaKcSaifiovCwv — 'the animosity ichich they had by 
 this time bef/un to entertain toicards the Laceda'monians.' The objective genitive, 
 as ch. 96, /xtaos, and t6 ' Adrjvaiojv ^x^os, ii. 11. Cf. iv. i, vii. 57. 
 KarwKiorav Is — settled into, or, as we should say, in — an elliptical way of speak- 
 ing that has often been noticed, cf. supra 100 a, and with ev for ^s, v. 35. The 
 same words occur vi. 7. NaviraKTov. The modern Lepanto, a 
 
 town which commanded the Sinus Corinthiacus. Subsequent events showed 
 the perspicacity of the Athenians in selecting this spot in which to locate an 
 enemy to Lacediemon. Cf. ii. 90. Kriig. 's date for this event is B.C. 462. 
 
 (r. ) irpoorexwp'HO'av. On this brief notice of a most important event, see 
 Grote, vol. v. p. 435. 'This was an acquisition of signal value to the Athe- 
 nians, since it both opened to them the whole range of territory across the outer 
 Isthmus of Corinth to the interior of the Crissaean Gulf, on which the ISIegarian 
 port of Pegse was situated, and placed them in possession of the passes of Mount 
 Geraneia, so that they could arrest the march of a Peloponnesian army over 
 the Isthmus, and protect Attica from invasion. It was, moreover, of great 
 importance in its effects upon Grecian politics ; it was counted as a wrong by 
 Lacedaemon, gave deadly offence to the Corinthians, and lighted up the flames 
 of war between them and Athens ; their allies, the Epidaurians and Ji^ginetans, 
 taking their part.' Hence the exceeding indignation which, as we know from 
 poets and historians, was felt at Athens when Megara once more reverted to 
 the Peloponnesian alliance. See infra, ch. 114; Arist. Ach. v. 460, 648. Tlie 
 date is very uncertain : Miill. says B.C. 458; Wachsmuth, B.C. 457; Manso, 
 B.C. 464; Grote, B.C. 461 or 460. NioraCav was eighteen stadia 
 
 from Megara, and even in Strabo's time (9, p. 391) connected with it by long 
 walls. ' These ' long walls, ' though afterwards copied in other places and upon 
 a larger scale, were at that juncture an ingenious invention for the purpose of 
 extending the maritime arm of Athens to an inland city,' Grote, v. p. 437. 
 They doubtless gave the idea, and formed the encouragement for undertaking 
 the more gigantic scheme of connecting Athens with its ports of Piraeus and 
 Phalerum. dirb tovSc — it was mainly from this that the excessive 
 
 animosity of the Corinthians against the Athenians originated. Aa roOSe, accord- 
 ing to the general rule, would not refer to what precedes, Kriig. understands 
 dnb TovSe XP^^°^'' ■^'^t the above rule is not without exceptions. 
 
 Chapter CIV. — (a.) dir^<rrr]arcv. Kriig. assigns all the events mentioned 
 in this chapter to the year B. c. 460. Ik Mape£as. This place stood 
 
 according to Kiepert's map, on the inland shore, to the S. W. of the great lake 
 
no 
 
 NOTES OX THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book I. 
 
 of Mareotis. Inarus thus commencing his insurrection on the western extremity 
 of the Delta of the Nile, gradually advanced towards the east. Diodorus 
 says the insurrection began b. c. 361, which agrees with Kriig.'s chronology. 
 4>dpov. This small island lay off the mouth of the harbour of Alexandria, and 
 from the lighthouse there erected, all similar beacons have received the name. 
 'Apral^p^ov. This form of spelling is moat consonant with the analogy of 
 Zip^Vh ii"<^l t^ie Hebrew form of the name. See Donaldson, Aeic Cratylus, 
 P- »95. yet Bekker, following some few MSS., reads 'A/)ra^6/3^ou. 
 
 (6.) An inscription preserved in the Louvre contains the names of those 
 Athenian citizens who in one single year perished for their country in Cyprus, 
 in Egypt, in Phoenicia, among the Haliensians, at Egina, and in Megara. 
 Nothing could more forcibly indicate the extent of the Athenian empire, and 
 their military activity. Bceckh, in his great work {Corp. Inscrip.), assumes 
 that the year intended is not the natural, but the civil year ; i. e. Olymp. Ixxx. 
 3, or from summer, B.C. 459 to summer B.C. 458. This he infers from the 
 fact that the battles mentioned by Thuc. as having been fought in the Megarid, 
 would not otherwise be included in the given year. But Am. remarks that 
 preliminary skirmishes must have taken place, and that the men may have been 
 slain in some of these. ' The funeral ceremonies,' he adds, * in honour of those 
 who had fallen in the first year of the Peloponnesian war were performed in the 
 winter, i. e. at the close of the natural, and in the middle of the civil, year.' 
 vav<rl 8iaK0<rCais. Acconling to Isocrates 1200 triremes were lost in Egj-pt, 
 viii. 86. Diodorus says 300, xiii. 25. More than 700 vessels, Thuc, ch. no. 
 Xriif*'. dvair\ev(rQVT€s. Bemaik the force of the preposition, as in 
 
 'Avd/Sao-ts. KpaTovvT€S k. t. X. Kriig. refers to Ctesias, Pivsic, c. 32, and 
 
 Diodorus, ii. 74, who speak of a great battle, in which the viceroy Achaemenes, 
 brother of Artaxerxes, fell by the hand of luarus (cf. Her. vii. 7.) According 
 to Herod, (iii. 12) 100,000 men perished. AruKbv tcixos- Am. 
 
 gayg_' The white castle of Memphis was the head quarters of the Persian force 
 in Egypt, amounting, native and tributary, to 120,000 men, ii. 30, iii. 91, 
 Herod.' According to the Scholiast it received this name because built of stone, 
 whereas the other two fortified places were brick. On tQv Uo /xepCjv, cf. ch. 10. 
 a,nJ y^.. IIcpo-wv Kttl Mt|8<»)V. So described, thou h they had 
 
 some time before coalesced into one single state. It is remarkable that the 
 ancient appellation, ol M^5ot, was generally retained, though the Persians were 
 the dominant race. Cf. MrjhKds 1 16X6^05, fiv^i^^i-t'^ firj5tffp.6s, &c. and iirel 
 ffTparbu (iXeo-c MtjSwj', ch. 132, as well as the well-known epitaph upon the 
 brother of vEschylus. 
 
 Chapter CV. — (a.) *AXids. The name 'AXiers belonged both to the place 
 and people. They were probably a race of poor fishermen, perioeci to the Dorian 
 Ar<nves, who had forced them down to the extremity of the Argolic peninsula. 
 Probably, as Grote conjectures, it was uy.on this occasion that the Athenians 
 made themselves masters of Trcezen.which we subsequently find in their posses- 
 sion without knowing how it came to be so. The war, though it is not distinctly 
 so said by Thucyd., doubtless arose from the jealousy felt by Corinth at the 
 accession of Megara to the Athenian alliance. K<Kpv4>aX«Ca. 
 
 According to Leake, the modem Kyrk, one of the small islands which lie 
 
 Chap. 1 06.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 Ill 
 
 between Epidaums and JEginai. This action was not decisive, but ' in the great 
 naval battle which ensued off the island of yEgina, the superiority of the new 
 nautical tactics acquired by twenty years' practice of the Athenians since the 
 Persian war over the old Hellenic ships and seamen, was demonstrated by a 
 
 victory most complete and decisive The maritime power of ^gina was 
 
 irrevocably ruined.' Grote, vol. v. p. 438. 
 
 {b.) AtwKpdrovs. Colleague of Aristides in the battle of Plataea. Plutarch. 
 Arist. c. 20. Popp. Wachsmuth, Ile/L Alt. i, 582 § (German edition) speaks 
 highly of these men. * Between the political parties of this age, far from being 
 anything like demagogues, and yet not decidedly opposed to Pericles and the 
 Demus, for the most part inspired only with the thought to rival each other in 
 great exploits, there stand forth from the darkness which shrouds the frag- 
 mentary historical traditions of the time, the great outlines of those stout war- 
 riors Myronides, Tolmides, and Leocrates.' M}Tonides, he goes on to say, won 
 the admiration of his contemporaries and posterity (dprip eV dperrj davfxa^o/nevos, 
 Diod. xi. 89) by his expeditions, undertaken to advance the popular cause, into 
 Boeotia, Phocis, and Tiiessaly. Leocrates was colleague to Aristides at Plat«a, 
 and commanded in the war with ^gina, B.C. 457. Tolmides was more distin- 
 guislied for daring than pmdence. During the banishment of Cimon he con- 
 ducted successively several expeditions for Pericles. After Cimon's death he 
 led the Athenian army into Boeotia and fell at Coroneia. irpdrepov belongs 
 to iiriKOvpovs (6vTas), Kriig. to. &Kpa rfjs r€pav€ias. Krug. 
 
 reads Vepavias. The high ridge of land stretching across the Isthmus 
 from Corinth to Megara, so called from its resemblance to a crane's neck. On 
 its importance as a military position, cf. supra. See Wachsmuth, Eng. transl. 
 vol. i., Appendix iii. 
 
 (c.) Twv ^K Tf]s irdXctos viroXofirwv. T. K. A. tr., 'those 7c7io were left 
 hfhind in the eity,' a version not strictly accurate ; it is — of those who eouhl he 
 furnished from the city, i. e. such as were left there. 01 irpeo-BvTaToi 
 
 i. c. those above the age of compulsory military service, which reached from 
 jmberty up to sixty. ql vctoTaroi. Does this refer to those not yet 
 
 old enough to be irepliroXoi, a sort of mobilized militia, in which all young Athe- 
 nians from eighteen to twenty were obliged to serve ? Poppo thinks not. 
 avTol «KdT€poi. Krug. quotes v. 41. vii. 34, either side thouyht themselres not 
 to hare had the worst of it. Compare ws avrods eKar^povs d^iovv vikSLv, vii. 34, 
 and Herod, ix. 26, iSiKaitov aiWol eKdrepoi ix^'-^ ^0 '^repov K^pas 8/j.o}s — 'though 
 both sides claimed the victory. ' KaKtt<5[Ji€vot. * This indignation 
 
 of their own old men is highly characteristic of Grecian manners,' Grote. 
 lujipoXdvTcs. The conflict is said by Diodorus to have taken place iv ry Xeyc 
 p-ivrj KifiujXiq.. 
 
 Chapter CVI.— (a.) irpoo-ptao-e^. Kriig. conjectures irpo^LaaOiv, 'forced 
 forward,' because he considers it difficult to understand to x^^pi-ov after the par- 
 ticiple, and TTpos demands something of the sort. Pop. fills up Tpbs rb iaeXSeiv 
 
 ii K. T. X., and compares wpoaavayKd^eiv, iv. 87. vii. 18. Y^Pi^v 
 
 here what we call a 'close,' though, as in the New Testament, it often means 
 'a farm,' and may mean so here. 4cr^ir€o-€V— it must be remembered 
 
 is quite a common military temi, used to denote a body of men throwing them- 
 
112 
 
 :notes on thucydides. 
 
 [Book I. 
 
 Chap. lo8.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 113 
 
 selves into a position. Quite similar to the present case is ii. 4, iairiirTovaLv is 
 o(Kr)fjLa. ircpuip'yov — i. e. says Poppo, <^ irvx^v f>v dpoyfia Ttpieifryov 
 
 avrb, but, as Kriig. remarks, if we connect irvx^ vepielfryov, the 6' would be 
 unnecessary. ilpyov — if we retain the old distinction between these 
 
 words, elpyov, incluserunt,' would perhai)8 be more proper. Kara 
 
 Trpoo-wTTov refers to the front entrance of the ' close,' by which the fugitives had 
 gone in. KOT^eu<rav — most probably by the use of slings. 
 
 ovTois— such a dative as is often found, and may be perhaps included under the 
 general head of Dativus Commodi. C'f, ch. 89, § 3. 
 
 Chapter CVII. — (a.) {^p^avro olKoSopiclv. We have an infinitive after 
 ApX^ffOai, when the notion is in intention, not in act ; the participle, oiKodo- 
 fxovifTcSf when it is actually begun. See Jelf, § 688, obs. to. (laKpcL 
 rti\r\ K. T. X. The difficulties concerning these walls will be noticed in their 
 proper place, ii. 1 3. In the present passage Thucyd. speaks of the Phaleric 
 wall, and that to the Pirajus, as to, p.aKpd t(Ixv : the intermediate wall, t6 did 
 /xeVou, is included by imjdication. Kriig. assigns the ijp^ayTo to B.C. 459. 
 Awpids, T?|v MT]TpdiroXtv. It is certainly common enough to use the name of 
 a people for their country, as '.^quos,' * Sequanos, ' Livy, and * the Milanese,* 
 by modem historians, cf. ch. iii. Here it is rather more remarkable, as the 
 singular stands in direct apposition. So Autpirj^, rj firjTpdTroXn tCjv AaKedaifxovluy, 
 iii. 92. Doris is here a TpiiroXis, nc»t as usually described a TerpdTroXLS, i. e. 
 Pindus is omitted. But there seems to have been some uncertainty about the 
 point, for Pliny (iv. 13) makes it a Trej^rciTroXtj, and the Schol. on Pind. Pi/th. i. 
 V. 121, an e^diroXii. ^acrxXiuts of course belongs to llXaaTodvaKToSf 
 so also i. 114, Kriig. Pausanias, properly speaking, was never king of Lacedae- 
 mon, but guardian to Pleistarchus, cf. ch. 13?. Nicomedes was his younger 
 brother, and also * guardian' to Pleistoanax. On the objects of this expedition, 
 see Grote, vol. v. p. 443. * It was soon seen that this was only a i)art of the 
 objects of Sparta, and that her main purpose, under instigation of the Corin- 
 thians, was to arrest the aggrandisement of Athens To strengthen 
 
 Thebes, and to render her ascendency effective over the Boeotian cities, was the 
 best way of providing a neighbour at once powerful and hostile to the Athe- 
 nians.' Miiller fixes the expedition at B.C. 457, Kriig. in the spring B.C. 458. 
 
 (6.) ^jicXXov. A good instance of the usage of this verb, were ready to pre- 
 vent thenij were sure to prevent them. Tlie editors hesitate about the future, 
 and most of them print /cwXi^cJetJ', and ^/jlcXXov &pa Xel\l/€iv, Soph. J^hil. 
 V. 1084-5. Kriig. thinks that the infinitive future with fxiXXu) is used 
 of intentions, implied probabilities, ttc. I would compare ifieXXov dpa iravaeiv 
 trod' v/Jids ToO Kod^, v. 261, Jianfe, 'J thoiujht I would stop your Koa^.' 
 dci 44)povp6iTO, i.e., since the events described in the latter part of ch. 
 105. TO 8c Ti, and in some degree too, Kriig. cf. i. 118; vii. 
 
 48. For iiTTJyov, which means * were for brinyhuj them in,' Bl. would read 
 ivrjyov, ' were egging them on,' needlessly, I should imagine, for Thucyd. means 
 to describe the schemes of a traitorous party at Athens who were for bnnging 
 the Spartans in, and arresting the progress of the Long Walls, and iirdyeffOai 
 bears this meaning passim. See, with Poppo, the active, also ii. 85 (eTrijye) ; 
 viii. 46 ; iv. 79 {^vpewdyeLv). Upon the circumstance, see Plutarch, Vit, 
 
 Cimon, c. 17, and Pericles, 10, Grote, vol. v. p. 44T. oIkoSouov- 
 
 (jicva, admits of literal rendering in the English idiom — ' hinder, or rather stop 
 the long walls being built.' 
 
 (c.) €poi]0ii(rav — 'came up to the rescue against them.* Poppo has a long 
 note uix)n the usage of this word. All the peri)lexity attending it will be 
 removed if we remember that ^orjdiuj is really /3or;06s iu), i.e., el/xi. See the 
 question fully discussed in She[)pard's Theophrastus, p. 58, and add to the 
 instances there given a very clear one, ws irdv reXoOvTi (not reXovvTo) irpo^hiiy 
 Be my Prouenns. On the same principle I have always maintained Oeojprjaaaa 
 ToCfiov 6pfia, (Edip, Col. v. 1083, (which Linwood says, 'vixintelligi potest, ') 
 to mean, having witnessed with my own eyes ; because d€(x}p-qaa<ra = deupbs o?<ra. 
 iravSiijici, i.e., all capable of bearing arms. Pop. refers to Clinton, Fast. 
 Jhll., p. 417. Tlie number of Hoplites when the war began was 29,000. See 
 ii. 13. ^irg SUXOoxriv. This is said to be the ^ conjunctivus deli- 
 
 berativus,' which occurs even after past tenses, cf. ii. 52 ; iii. 112; v. 65. 
 The explanation seems to me to rest upon the same ground as the perpetual 
 recurrence from the directa to the indirecta ©ratio. The mood, i.e., mode of 
 thought, is employed under which the question presented itself to the party 
 for the time being, and by this means greater vividness is given to the narra- 
 tion, ' to be at a loss to know by what means they must pass through.' 
 Kara |v)ipaxi-K<$v — ' in accordance with the terms of the alliance.' Kriig. cf. ii. 
 
 22 ; iii. 3 ; iv- 3 ; V. 6. 
 
 (jLcWoTTio-av, cf. i. 130 ; ii. 67, Kriig., who 
 
 refers concerning the faithlessness of the Thessalians to Bomel, Prolegg. ad 
 Dem., p. 89, a work which I have not seen. 
 
 Chapter CVIII. — (a.) Tavdyp^i ri\s Boiwrias. This collocation is of fre- 
 quent occurrence. See ii. 2, llXaraiav rijs Boicorias, ii. 25. Medwurjv ttjs AaKco- 
 viKTJi, and more particularly Arn.'s note on iii. 105. The town was built upon 
 a rugged eminence upon the north bank of the Asopus, near its junction with 
 the Thermodon. Plato, Memxenus, p. 242, speaks of it as only a drawn 
 battle, but this is only a rhetorical flourish, and cannot invalidate the honest 
 testimony of Thucydides. It was, however, so little decisive that the Pelo- 
 ponnesians obtained no advantage beyond the opportunity of an undisturbed 
 retreat over the ridge of Geraneia [Grote, v. p. 441]. Most chronologers, 
 inclu<ling Clinton, place the battle in B.C. 457. Kriig. makes it, as Diodorus 
 has it, one year earlier. The latter speaks of tico battles, but there is no 
 ground for supi)osing him to be correct. 8€v8poTO|i^(ravTcs, a rare 
 
 word. Cutting down the fruit and timber-trees implied ravages of other 
 kinds. The Schol. therefore explains rrjj/ yriv Tep-ovres. Poppo quotes Livy, 
 v. 24. *Io-6}iov, sine articulo, cf. ch. 62. dTTTjXGov, 
 
 after having made a truce for four months, says Diodorus, xi. 80. 
 86VT^p<ji Kal tltiKocrri), B.C. 456, Clinton, p. 255. The extreme precision of the 
 date marks, says Grote, the strong impression it made upon the Athenian 
 mind. 
 
 (J>.) Olvo<|>vTois. Schleiermacher, on the passage in the Menexenus, sup- 
 poses this name to denote some spot famous for its vines — ' The vineyards. ' 
 So, too, Bl. But localities often derive their names from such attributes : the 
 descriptive term becomes appellative, cf. toj)s 'Pctroys, ii. 19: and from the 
 
114 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book I. 
 
 Chap. IIO.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 115 
 
 absence of the article Kri'ig. believes this to be the case in the present instance. 
 ircpiciXov — lit. * stripped the wall from around it.' Cf. tov &\\ov irepiriprjfj^vov, iii. 
 II. Bl. I know not on what ground interprets, ' dismantled by removing the bat- 
 tlements of the wall, and lowering it to a height practicable to be scaled by an 
 invading force.' tKarov &v8pas — ' Prajerant Locris nobiles ex 
 
 centum familiis, quorum nobilitas ex majoribus muliebribus deducebatur, cf. 
 Polyb. xii. 5/ Gbll. One individual, therefore, was probably selected from 
 each of these. toi tc^xI ~'^^ tavruv — tA piaKpd. See 90 c. AVhen 
 
 the writer dwells upon an idea, reproducing it under various forms, for the 
 purpose of more clearly identifying it, the d» fining article is naturally repeated 
 in e.ach definition. See Nubes, v. 764, Tr)v \i6ov Tavrrjv — ttjv KaXrjv — tt)v 5ta- 
 ^avTJ. Jelf, § 459, 5, thus explains the idiom: 'When two or more attri- 
 butives are joined with a substantive, each of which has a peculiar force, the 
 article is used with each. This is more rare where the attributives follow 
 the substantive.' a)|ioX6YT]<rav, after a siege of nine months. 
 
 * The reduction of this once powerful maritime city marked Athens as mistress 
 of the sea, on the Peloponnesian coast, not less than on the .^gean, ' Grote. 
 Kriig. dates B.C. 458, Miiller B.C. 457. 
 
 {c.) irepicXovTCS k. t. X. I agree with Krlig., against some other com- 
 mentators, that these participles cannot, in this place, denote the condition under 
 which the surrender was m.ade. Tliey denote circumstance rather than condi- 
 tion ; when they had pulled down their walls, t{r., cf. iirobdm-es 'Siffaiav. . . . 
 ffirovSas iiroLr]ffavro, ch. 1 15. ircpi^irXcvo-av — with fifty triremes 
 
 and 4000 Hoplites [Diod. xi. 84]. ^sch. ii. 75, p. 38, names only 1000, 
 as the remainder were volunteers ; but perhaps there is some confusion with 
 ch. 113. Kriig. rb vcwpiov. Gythium. XoXK^Sa. 
 
 A city of -^tolia, at the foot of mount Chalcis, and near the mouth of the 
 Evenus, it is now called Ba/)d<ro/3/Sa. The Corinthians were at this time 
 occupying the city, just as they had Molycriuni for a colony in Locris [iii, 102], 
 and SoUiura in Acamania [ii. 30]. Diodorus informs us that Naupactus was 
 captured at the same time by the Athenians. Poppo. €V diropdo-ck 
 
 TTjs 'Y'HS. A sort of objective genitive, *m a disembarkation in their country^' 
 Jelf, ^ 464. 
 
 Chapter CIX. — («.) Tlie narration is resumed from ch. 104. 
 IS^ai. On this word, to which Plato has given such a world-wide celebrity, 
 Kriif. remarks, * Excepting Plato, the Attic writers seldom use this word ; it 
 is indeed almost unknown to their prose, yet Thucyd. employs it thirteen 
 times : in the sense of Oestalt, form or shape, only once, vi. 4, 6 ; elsewhere it 
 stands for Weise, way, manner or mode.* To this I can scarcely subscribe ; as 
 form, i. e.t mental form, form conceived by the mind, is its original meaning, so 
 I believe it may in most places be translated, e.g. here — ^many forms of 
 warfare / ii. 19, Tracai/ iSkiv Teipdaavre^ — having tried every conceivable form of 
 dUtaclc ; iii. 81, Traaa idea davdrov, death in every form, ' Plurima mortis 
 imaf'o.' Virgil ; ch. 83, irdaa Id^a KaKOTporlas, vice in every shape ; and so iii. 
 08, 112. In iv. 55 we have irapd ttjv vtrdpxovaav Idiav r^y TrapaaKtvTjs, con- 
 trary to the form which their warlike preparations usually took — or an unusual 
 type of warfare ; vi. 4, bpexavoabh rrjv i84av rb x^'pi-ov. The place was scythe- 
 
 like in form, or shajye ; vii. 29, precisely as iii. 81. Similarly in the Attic poets, 
 iripav Op.vwv Ihiav, Ar. Ran. v. 382, another type of poetry ; and Ares, v. 
 993, rU Idia ^ovXrifiaTos, uhat is the form of your plan f what shape is it going 
 to take ? By keeping this, its true meaning in view, we shall, I think, be 
 better enabled to understand why Plato selected the word to express the 
 eternal type or form, of which all perishable things were the antitypes. The 
 interest of the word, the authority of Kriig., and the explanations given in some 
 instances by L. and S. Lexicon, e.g., 'manner,* must excuse this long notice. 
 
 (6.) irpouxtipai — sc. rd irpdyixaTa, cf. ch. 74, ad finem. 
 dXXws — otherwise, i.e., another way than the right one, uselessly, in rain, 
 cf. ii. 18; iv. 36; vii. 42. Mcydpatos n)ay be the individual 
 
 mentioned, Herod, vii. 97, as holding a command in the fleet. Meyd^v^os was 
 one of the generals of Xerxes ; he also commanded at Euryniedon, and must 
 therefore have been a person of some experience, see Herod, vii. 82, and 143. 
 Zuirvpos was the man through whose self-mutilation Darius obtained possession 
 of Babylon, Herod, iii. 160. dv8pa n^poT^v. * So the Normans, 
 
 after the conquest, to their Christian name, added * Norman ' as a surname,' Bl. 
 A distinction from 'Mede' might be intended if we accept the parallelism ; 
 but the addition of duSpa to the national appellative is common with all Greek 
 writers. ficrd crrpaTids iroXXfjs. Diodorus, ii. 77, says with 300 
 
 ships and 300,000 men. Ctesias, Persic. 33, makes the numl)er 200,000, but 
 adds the troops, amounting to 300,000, which remained in Egypt. 
 pdxT] iKpa.rj]cr€v. We may estimate the rhetorical exaggeration and inac- 
 curacy of the later Attic writers, from the fact that Diodorus denies this 
 victory. IIpoorwTriTiSa. An island formed by two branches of the 
 
 Nile, or, as Bl. thinks, by the Nile, and a deep canal, Herod, ii, 41. 
 
 (<?.) ?| pfjvas — other MSS. /t^ms ?^. Kriig. iiri tov ^-^pov €irotT]o-€. * II 
 
 les mit d sec. ^ He left them high and dry.* Popp. cf. iroteiv ripd ^ao), ^^w 
 /SeXwv, cf. also Xen. Anab. i. 10, 9; v. 2. ir. ■f^ircipov, predicate 
 
 with iToir](T€, 'dry land.* Bl. says, I know no other example of iirolrjcre 
 for ^6r)K€, but cf. €voi7)a-ev 'Adrjvaiov ii. 29, * made an Athenian,* and ^705 
 KpivavTos, ch. 1 35. 8iapds taken with tt^^tj ; unnecessary, says 
 
 Kriig., cf. rr^^Tj x(i-P^po-<^^°-h iv. 24. 
 
 Chapter CX. — (a.) iroXcji-fjo-avra — by a sort of hypallage agrees with 
 vpdyixara instead of * Adrjvalwy. The exact six years are nmch disputed. 
 Clinton makes them commence, B. c. 455, cf. ch. 104. €<ru»6T]<rav. 
 
 Here again Diodorus betrays his exaggeration, by saying that the I'ersians 
 allowed the Athenians to return home unmolested, from admiration of their 
 valour. But why in that case, as Bl. remarks, should they have adopted the 
 dangerous and difficult route to Cyrene? For iadud-qffav is, cf. sup. loi a, 65 b. 
 *A(ivpTaios. Not the Amyrtaeus who B.C. 414, i.e., forty years after this time, 
 revolted from Darius Nothus, and was succeeded by four successive kings, till 
 the Persians regained their ascendency under Ochus, sixty yeai-s afterwards. 
 The man here mentioned was reduced to submission, according to Herod., 
 though his son Pausiris was permitted to reign over the fen district, Herod, ii, 
 40; iii. 15 — ToU ^Xeai, Herod, ii. 137, 140. They were situated between the 
 Canopic and Tanitic mouths of the Nile, and formed most of what was called 
 
 I 2 
 
ii5 
 
 NOTES OX THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book I. 
 
 Chap. 112.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 117 
 
 the Delta. Compare the stand, made in the marshes of Ely by the Saxons 
 after the Norman invasion. Cf. ^^ch. Paste, ^g/EXeio^aTai, vaCovipkrai Aet;/o< 
 irX^do^ T dvdptd/JLOi. 
 
 (6.) €K Twv*A6T]vaW. Bekker conjectures' A ^Tyvwi', but cf. with Kriig. iv. 
 97. Tlie reading of the text seems to me better than the conjecture, for it only 
 specifies — from the proportion contributed by the Athenians. Cvp,|iav£8os. 
 
 The allied force, a substantive as ii. 80 : v. 36. Poppo. ^cr^ov made the 
 
 shore, came to land, cf. inrb vvKxa 5(* (rxo^rfj. iii. 91. ^o-xoi', Kartcrxov, 'irp6ffi(Txov 
 are, as Duk. remarks, all properly nautical words, and the simple form lax'^* 
 (Tx^trw, ^ffxov is generally found with a dative or the preposition ^j, cf. ii. 2J5 ; 
 iii. 29, 33, 34; vii. I. *In.solentia sunt verba,' vii. 35. Poppo. 
 Kara rh Mfv8TJ<riov K^pas. The fifth mouth of the Nile, reckoning from the 
 most westerly one. It entered the sea near the town of Mendes, Hurod. ii. 
 17, cf. Pindar, Fraff. 89, iffxarov yeiXov /c^pas. Engelman supjtoses that the 
 use of Kipas may be a relic of the ancient symbolism which represented rivers 
 under the type of a bull, cf. 'Tauriformis Aufidus,' Hor., and the remarks of 
 Arnold upon the broken horn of the Achelous, which was converted into a 
 Coniu Copias. ovk €18<Jt€s, i.e., the crews, understood from 
 
 Tpirjpeis, ii. 83, 91 ; vi. 52 ; viii. 10 1. Poppo. 
 
 Chapter CXI.— (a.) Bao-CXcws. Certainly not King of all Thessaly, as is 
 plain from iv. 78. Popp. therefore suggests that he was Tagus. But there 
 were several of these dominant families in Thessaly, the Aleuada for instance, 
 who are styled kings by Herod, vii. 6, and appear to have ruled at Larissa. 
 But, as miglit be expected, history casts but little light upon these early 
 Thessalian rulers. Orestes was, according to Wachsmuth, uncle of Antiochus 
 and member of a dynasty connected with the Aleuadaj and Scopadce, which 
 had its seat at Pharsalus. Tlie date of the ex|>edition is very variously given. 
 Am. B.C. 454. Diodorus, mixing it uj) with those against the Phocians and 
 Locrians, after (En ophytae, B.C. 457. Kriig. agrees with xVm., adding, *in the 
 spring.' Clinton B.C. 455. irapaXaPovrcs— «/iffr takiZ/ vp the 
 
 Bceotian and Phocian rontinfjentif. Kriig. who cf. the same word infra and 
 ^"- -o- ^<^a Wh -n-potovTcs. Popp. rightly 'fills up the e/lipse, 
 
 6(Ta Kpardv idvvavTo /xt; irpoidfTfs—' all thcii amid made thrm.se I res masters of 
 without stirring far from camp,' cf. iv. 16, <pv\d(T<reiv ttjv vrjaoi^ '6<ja pi] diro^ai- 
 vovra<i. Kriig. adds &aov pj] x^pffl Kaivwv, (Ed. Tyr. v. 346. 
 oirXwv— the place where their arms were piled, and consequently equivalent to 
 e castris (Popp.), but seethe note on iii. i. &-rrpaKro%— 'without 
 
 effecting anything.' In Thuc, says Krug., always active. 
 
 (6.) pcrd B\ raira—i. e., in all probability, the following year, B.C. 453. 
 Kriig. sa\8 in the same year. ras IXti^As. See ch. !03. 
 
 vavs^ro, according to Diodorus, xi. 85; 100, according to Plutarch, Pericles, 
 19, Kriig. Tovs Trpoo-ftClavras. Those who came into conflict with 
 
 them. Tiio less veracious Diodorus declares that the Sicyonians came out vav- 
 3^M€^- 8iairXctio-avT€s ir^pav, to be tiiken together— Aar/«f/ sailed 
 
 across, probably to Naui)actus. Olvid8as, a name from the wine 
 
 made in the district. In S. Acamania, on the right bank of the AcheloUs. 
 Leake supposes that it is identical with Trikardho, or Trikardhocastro, a large 
 
 modem city. This, says Poppo, is one of those states which is always indi- 
 cated by the name of its inhabitants. Cf. ii. 102, iii. 94, iv. 77. Such, too, is 
 the case with Leontini. From these we must distinguish such names as Veil 
 and Gabii, which always stand for cities. Cf. note on ch. 107 a. 
 
 Chapter CXII. — (a.) 8uaXiirovTwv Itwv Tptwv. Tlie five yeai-s' tmce, 
 therefore, according to the general computation, commenced B.C. 450 ; accord- 
 ing to Kriig., summer B.C. 451. Grote points out that the truce was probably 
 concluded by the influence of Cimon, who was anxious to carry out the opera- 
 tions against Persia; while, on the other hand, Pericles would not be soriy to 
 see his rival reuioved from Athens (vol. v. p. 453), •iroX€p.ov ^crxov. 
 
 Elmsley refers to this passage in his note on Eurip. I/eracleid. v. 924, ' ^ax^v 
 5' i'l^pis. In his locis ax^^v idem fere valet ac iravaaadai, (juo sensu saepe adhi- 
 bentur lax^ et trx^J • . • Noster locus fateor, ab his paulo diversus est. Quamvis 
 enini ben^ Graica sit locutio l<jx^ tov iroXipov cessavit a bello, non ideo tamen 
 constat Grieco.'i dixisse iax^^ troXipo^, cessavit bellum.' Bl, says, for dTreaxov, 
 there being an ellipse of eavrovs, Matth. § 353. 3. Cf. Jelf, § 517. 
 * Ajivpraiou. See ch. r 10. We see from this that in the former chapter Thuc. 
 was anticipating the regular course of his narrative. jtcTairc'inrovTos. 
 
 * /uf T-ttTT^/xTrttJ' = accersere, usually the middle peTairlpireaOaL,' T. K. A. The 
 difference I believe to be that media voce the word signifies to send for as 
 something of our own, ' to send for as a right,' or 'a command;' in the active, 
 simjjly *to send for as a request.' KitCov, in the south-east of 
 
 Cyprus, the birth-place of Zeno and ApoUodorus. Kffiwvos. It is 
 
 not clear whether of disease or from a wound. See Grote, vol. v. p. 455. 
 
 {f>.) vir^p — ' off Salamis,' according to our nautical nomenclature. Lit. hang- 
 Inn over, because vessels seen from the land are pereajpoi, or aj)parently sus- 
 I)ended upon the line of the horizon, Milton, Par. Lost, ii. v. 636. Cf. i. 137, 
 viii. 95. d|ia. Not to be considered, says Grote, as implying that 
 
 the battle, like that of Eurymedon, was a double one on the same day. 
 irdXiv. There is some awkwardness about the position of the word. I believe, 
 however, that it is only a slightly irregular usage for at irdXtv eXdovaai., — as we 
 might say the ships from Egypt back again. Popp. says, * supple dTrex^pT/cra;/ 
 ut dicitur dvaxoip^lv ifdXiv, ii. 5, and dirrjXdov irdXiv, iv. 72 ;' Giill. at iv XlyvirTii) 
 j'^ej i^ AlyvTTTou tXdodffai, which I cannot think correct. iroXtiiov 
 
 IcTTpdrcvo-av. A cognate accusative after a neuter verb, as if it had been 
 CTpardav iarpdrfvffav. Popp. cf. ' Bellum militabitur,' Hor. Epwd. i, 23, and 
 such phrases as wixTTeis ipv^rdv, i. 5, avrapK-q diai.v Keiadai, i. 37, Jelf, § 564. 
 irap^Soo-av A^<|>ois. Because, as Arn. remarks, the noble Delphian families 
 were of Doric origin. aSBis— /» their turn, denoting some action 
 
 strongly contrasted with, or op})osed to, that which has been last mentioned. 
 The Phocians, according to Muller {Dorians, i. p. 262), had no real claim to 
 the management of the Delphian Oracle. * There was a native nobility whose 
 influence over the oracle was very c -nsiderable (Eurip. Ion, v. 418),— so great 
 that they may have been considered to be the actual managers of it.' Bockh 
 {Public (Econ. p. 601, note) writes, 'The temple of Delphi was, according to 
 the agreement of the Greeks, an independent sacred possession, the chief manage- 
 ment of which was exclusively vested in the council of Amphictyons, and the 
 
ii8 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book I. 
 
 Chap. 1 14.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 119 
 
 sacred assembly at Delphi ; but the Phocians were always putting in claims for 
 the direction of this temple, which they affirmed to belong to them, and that 
 they had even once been in possession of it (Diod. xvi. 23), an assertion which 
 they also strengthened with the authority of Homer (//. B. 518); and these 
 claims, according to Diodorus (xvi. 29), were brought forward in Olymp. cvi. 
 1, and assisted by the countenance of Sparta.' See also Grote (iv. p. 85). 
 T. K. A., following the American editor, has confused the references in this 
 place. Kefer to ch. 118, iii. i2t, and v. 18. 
 
 Chapter CXIII. — (a.) The operations of Athens against the Persians are 
 here concluded. With this is connected the famous controversy concerning 
 the peace of Callias or Cimon, supposed to have been made at this time with the 
 great king. Its conditions are represented to have been so unfav<mrable to 
 Persia, that the whole story is not unjustly suspected of having originated in 
 the rhetorical extravagance of the later Athenian Panegyrists. Tlie Persians 
 were to abandon the military occupatitm of Asia Minor within three days' 
 journey on foot, or one on horseback, of the coast ; or, according to another 
 account, they were not to pass the Halys to the west, or the mouth of the Bos- 
 phorus, and the Chelidonian islands. All Asiatic Greeks were to be left undis- 
 turbed and untaxed. Dahlman (in his Forschungen) has devoted a separate 
 essay to the subject, in which the above view is maintiiined. He is followed 
 by Thirhvall (vol. ii. p. 473, 4), who argues that the entire silence of Thucy- 
 dides — the vague and contradictory statements of later writers— the obvious 
 unconsciousness of the Persian court that it had ever resigned its dominion 
 over the Asiatic Greeks — and the absence of all reference to any such treat} in 
 subsequent negotiations between the same parties, — abundantly prove that no 
 peace of the sort was ever made. On the other hand, Mr. Grote is less inclined to 
 regard it as a fable; he considers that some foundation for the story must have 
 existed in the circumstances of the time. It is impossible to give all his argu- 
 ments (see vol. v. p. 456-462). The point upon which he dwells most is, that 
 such a convention would only have been a recognition of the state of things 
 which really existed after Cimon's death. As such, it might easily have been 
 omitted by Tliucydides, who lived in the actual fulness of Athenian empire, 
 because it would seem to him simply a matter of course, and because he was 
 striving to condense his narrative. But Isocrates and later rhetoricians, in 
 their anxiety to amplify the past glories of Athens, indulged in absurd exagge- 
 rations upon the matter, and have thus naturally thrown discredit upon it. 
 Demosthenes speaks in very positive terms of the existence of such a peace, c5 
 015' 6tl tov \&yov toutov aKrjKoaTe, KaXXi'ai' rbv 'ItttovIkov TaOrrjv t7]v vvb irdvruv 
 epvXoufi^vriv elprivTiv irpeafievaavTa k.t.X. I)e faUd Ley. % 311. 
 4"y"Y€Vop^vov. iyylyveffdat is ' intercedere,' &a iv. in, viii. 9, Herod, v. 92, 
 Kriig. He also connects /iexA xaDra with iyycvofiivov, when an interval 0/ time 
 after this had expired. It is possible also, of course, to take it with icTpdrfiffav, 
 which is perhaps simpler, and is preferred by Popp., who compares ch. 114 
 and 118. Twv <|)cvYovT(»>v. The part if of the exiles— i.e., those who 
 
 had been expelled after (Enophyta. 4<rTp<iT€v<rov. B.C. 447, Kriig. 
 
 B.C. 446. MS CKCiOTois. Supply iffTpdrevaav — with the contitujint 
 
 as each severally had to furnish them. 
 
 (b.) Iv Kop«v€C<f. The name is variously given : iv * AXtaprf^, says Pausa- 
 nias, I. 27, 6; ^»' AejSaSei^, Xen. Mem. iii. 5, 4. Isocrates, nepi ^evyovs, agrees 
 with Thucyd., as do Plato {Aldbiades) and Diodorus, Popp. The truth is, that 
 all the localities were very close together, and the battle may have extended 
 over them, as in the case of Mont St. Jean and Waterloo, the Tchernaya and 
 Traktir Bridge. Upon this, the first great blow to the Athenian ascendency, 
 followed by so many disasters, see Grote, vol. v. p. 466. AoKpoC. 
 
 The Opuntian Locrians, says the Schol. As they had been subjugated with 
 the Boeotians, cf. 108, they doubtless rebelled with them. ttjs avrfjs 
 
 YV<ofM]S— 0/ the same way of thinking; i. e., the same purpose to revolt. Cf. for 
 the construction, Jelf, § 518, I- "^o^S ^^^ 8U<j)e€ipav. Amongst 
 
 them, Tolmides himself. 
 
 (r.) ol AXXoi irdvTes. Both Arn. and Popp. interpret this to mean the 
 Locrian and Phocian exiles, with perhaps those from Eubcea. But Krug. con- 
 siders that oi &\\oi can only be Botwrot, KareXedures does not, he says, belong 
 to oi AXXoi, and the sense is— The B<£otian exiles upon their return home, and all 
 the other Bmotians became independent again, i.e., with all the other BcBotians. 
 Cf. iii. 62 ; iv, 92. Heilman, the German translator, took this view, so, too, 
 DiUe, and the last German translator [Engelman] ' Die Verbannten der Booter 
 .... als auch die ubrigen alle,' &c. Grote's remark is just, that probably, as 
 was the case with the Lacedaemonians at Pylos, the captured Athenians be- 
 longed to the best families in the state ; otherwise they would not have con- 
 sented to such unfavourable terms to recover them. 
 
 Chapter CXIV.— (a.) E«?oia onrccmi. b. c. 445. Krug. b. c. 446. 
 8iap€pT]K6T09 avT«^. The construction is thus varied, for the purpose of more 
 clearly marking the time. After Pericles had already got across, news was 
 brought to him. Ni(ra£av. See above, ch. 103. Muller, Dorians, 
 
 ii., p. 171, gives a short account of Megarian politics. After the democratic 
 revolution which had united the place to Athens, the nobles returned, con- 
 quered the people in battle, restored an oligarchy, and filled all public offices 
 with persons who had fought against the people. This return probably caused 
 
 the revolt. See note on ch. 103. . „, 
 
 (6.) epi(i>U. Sch. is Tb epidaiou TTidiov. Cf. ii. ch. 19. A well-known 
 battle ground, as appears from Herod, ix. 7. Leake fixes the locality on the 
 Sandiiforo, or Eleusinian Cephisus about three miles above Eleusis. On Pleis- 
 toanax, cf. supra, ch. 107. to irX^ov— as ^s rb irXeiov, ii. 21. 
 
 a'Kixoipr\a-av. Because it was thought that Pleist. XP^M^^^ TreLffdrivai tt]v 
 dvaLXu}pr)(TLv, ii. 21. It was Pericles, says Plutarch, who bribed him. Grote 
 supposes they were too weak in force to venture further. Kare- 
 
 <rTp^4;avT0 wao-av. Therefore it was hitherto in part unsubdued, Kriig. See 
 Aristoph. Nabes, v. 213. Kari<rri^^a.vTO- settled by convention. 
 
 The Latins said both 'pactione constituerunt' and composuerunf, Pop. Cf. iii. 
 35. 'EoTiaias. The Athenian settlers subsequently received this 
 
 name, and were also called '^pelrai, as the place, says the Scholiast, was after- 
 wards called 'ilpios. Plutarch, Pericles, c. 23, ascribes this treatment to the 
 fact that the Hestiaans had put to death the crew of an Athenian trireme. The 
 
120 
 
 NOTES OX THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [IJOOK I. 
 
 Athenians would gladly avail themselves of any such pretext to establish a mili- 
 tary post in the island upon which they could rely. 
 
 Chapter CXV.— (a.) <nrov8ds. Tlie famous thirty years' truce. In the 
 eprin-, B.C. 445. ^e Grote. 'Axatav. A question is raised 
 
 which It IS l,y no means easy to determine positively, whether the province of 
 that name be meant, or some town in the occupation of the Lacedaemonians 
 Authorities are pretty ecjually divided. Miuiso. GoUer, Poppo, and Kruger 
 decide against the province, principally because no mention has been made by 
 Thucyd. of the acquisition of it by Athens ; because 'Axatav is coujiled both 
 here and in iv. 21 with other towns ; and in the last passage the demand of 
 Cleon from the Lacedaemonian?, dvoSovuac 'Axaiau, seems very inappropriate 
 language as applied to a country not regularly in their possession. On the other 
 hand, Mr. Grote (vol. v. p. 475) has no doubt that the province is meant for in 
 ch. iir we find that ' the Athenians had acquired Achaia as an independent 
 ally.' Arnold, from the political circumstances of Achaia, shews that it must 
 have been alienated from Lacedtemon, and therefore believes it to be meant in 
 this place. Bloomfield also entirely coincides, quoting Aristides, i. p. 157, ttSi/ 
 t6 WxaUou. Tliirlwall raises no doubt, but assumes that Thucyd. speaks of the 
 country. Engelman, the last German editor, follows on the same side, and 
 expk.ns diro5ovvaL (iv. 31) as a sort of zeugma applied to both the province and 
 the towns m the same sentence. I cannot pretend to decide between such dis- 
 putants, but would remark that when Mr. Grote speaks of * acquiring Achaia 
 as an independent ally,' he builds a large superstructure uj.on the words wapa- 
 \al36uTes'Axalovs (ch.iii) which can only mean havinu fakrn icith them certain 
 Ac/ueans. It seems strange too that Thucydides should have omitted to give 
 an account of this acquisition by Athens, for we must remember it would have 
 been directly connected with his main subject, and he is elsewhere very particu- 
 lar in specifying alliances. To speak of such an important territory precisely 
 m the same rapid way as of some small Spartan garrisons, ravra ydp dxoy 
 neXoirouurjaiw^., is not explained to my mind by saying that the Spartans con- 
 sidered all within Peloponnese as their property-certain ly they could not con- 
 sider It so m the same icay; and on similar grounds I should doubt whether in 
 gi-ave proposals for a peace, dTroSoit'ai would be applied to an allied country 
 because it had been used of a garrisoned town. No argument can be grounded 
 upon aTTodov^ac, to restore, because it is said of all claims. See the long note 
 Sheppard-s Theoi^hrastus, ch. xviii. p. ,76. It is, perhaps, right to add thai 
 MuUer who, in the first edition of his Dorians, expressed a belief that some small 
 town of the xMegarid wasintended, appears in the second U. havechanged his mind 
 Krug. conjectures thafA\£a5a (ii. 56) may have been originally in the text. 
 
 (6.) 5(kt(u «T€i. In the beginning of spring, B.C. 440, Kriig. Pop. says 
 B.C. 441, as he pUces in B.C. 440 the expedition of Pericles mentioned in the 
 ^^^\ ^^^' KaT€^uiv—made an outcry against the Samians—iXxQ word 
 
 implies accusation, cf. i. 73, y. 45. ^^ ^oXircCav. At that time 
 
 an aristocratical one, Kriig. 
 
 -S^"^7"*' ^^ 2*^P^<-y-^<^<^v Ydp Ttv€s. On the construction cf. Jelf, 
 § 786. 6. Edpov. This island appears to have been the most power- 
 
 ful of all the allies of Athens, paying, like Chios and Lesbos, no tribute money, 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 121 
 
 Chap. II 6.] 
 
 but furnishing ships and men. Tliat Pericles undertook the war at the inter- 
 cession of Aspa.sia, who was a native of Miletus, is a mere scandal, Grote, vi. 
 pp. 34, 35. T«v ScqjiCwv depends upon riVej. See i. 72. i, Kriig. 
 
 Refer to note, rots SifvarwrdTois — the most powerful members of the aristo- 
 cratical party. The term ^vfi/xaxiav only applies to Pissuthnes, Kriig. 
 c-rriKovpovs —probably 'mercenaries,' as the word generally implies. 
 l'irav€'<rTT|(rav. Kriig. contrasts dnoaTaffis with iTrafdcTao-is. The first is 
 simply recolf, the second is insurrection, implying, I imagine, an armed assault 
 upon the opposite party. twv itXcCo-twv. Krug. observes that 
 
 Valla has not tnuislated these words, but that if genuine we must suppose that 
 some of the deinocratical iwxty made themselves masters of a stronghold, and 
 maintained themselves there. tovs dpxovras. Not military only, but the 
 
 civil officers left behind by Pericles, as eirlcKoiroL or <pv\aK€^. See Bockh, Pahlic 
 CEcon. of Athens, Kriig. See Xen. ile Jiep. Athen. i. c. 14, 18, and Grote, vi. 
 4, 8. <r4)C<riv, i. e. toU ^a/j-loi^, so c<f)ds in a relative clause, iii. 3, Kriig. 
 
 Bvtu.vTLOi. See ch. 96. Byziuitium came under Athenian dominion when the 
 conduct of Pausanias at that place induced the Lacedaemonians to resign the 
 command of the confederacy against Persia. But as it still retained its Doric 
 institutions and character, it seems to have taken the earliest opportunity of free- 
 ino- itself from Ionian domination. It was, however, compelled to submit agam 
 at the fall of Samos, cf. 117. 
 
 Chapter CXVL— (a.) rais CKKaCScKa. Tlie 16 which remained, after sub- 
 tracting the 44 mentioned from 60. Cf. al iUoai, infra. When any definite 
 part of a fixed number is specified the article is used. irtp\xiy- 
 
 •ycXXoOo-ai ^or\^iv— carry in y round in all directions the messofje to come vp to 
 aid. The infinitive stands here as in the passages quoted by Kriig. ii. 10, ii. 
 80, iv. 8, V. 54, and, as in the above version, agrees with the English idiom. 
 8€KdT0v avToii. Of these nine others the poet Sophocles was one. 
 <rTpaTi(iTt8€S. ' Transports: They were heavy and not fit for manceuvres, con- 
 seiiuently they were rarely, if ever, employed in action. arpaTLiLTas Ayovaai rds 
 fx^WovTas TTCiOfxaxitv, says the Schol. See vi. 43, and Xen. Ilelkn. i. i, 36. 
 Kriig. remarks that the combination of two datives, as in this place, is not 
 unusual, i. 81, ii. 92, iv. 11 ; even three are found, iv. 129. 
 
 {b.) Tpwrl r€i\ta-\.. Mr. Grote says * a triple wall.' A twofold wall, one to 
 keep in the besieged, and another to keep off a relieving force, is conceivable. 
 But three walls of circumvallation seem absurd ; neither can I call to mind any 
 similar case. Krug. is induced to suppose that three walls, one on each side of 
 the town, except the sea-side, are indicated. I scarcely think that Thucyd. 
 would have called such a Tepireixicrii ' three walls.' As reixos is sometimes ' a 
 fort,' might not the rplai relxeffi refer to three detached forts, built in com- 
 manding positions, and so connected by lines as to serve the purpose of a 
 blockade ? I see Bloomf., in his last edition, suggests the same thiiig, and adds, 
 what certainly is some confirmation, that the Schol. explanation is Tecx^ 
 
 <ryLta<ri. , 
 
 {c.) dtrb Twv l4>op|iovcr«v— 'as a detachment from the Uockadiny squadron. 
 I do not see why the use of the preposition should have been thought so singu- 
 lar, iiri Kavvov Kal KapCas. To Caunus, as the spot where h e 
 
122 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book I. 
 
 Chap. II 8.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 123 
 
 expected to meet the enemy, but also towards Caria generally , because he did 
 not know where he might fall in with them. Am. Krug. quotes dir6 roO 
 Bovddpov Kai Tijs :^a\afMiuos, iii. 51. kuI is not here disjunctive, and Pop. well 
 remarks— non opus fuit scribi Kal rrjs &\\t,s Kapias. See 'Chrysippus et Stoici.' 
 Cic. Tusc. iv. 5, 9, where Davis has selected several examples, //. t', 63. "E/c- 
 TopL Kal Tptval, iii. 33, iv. 36, vii. 65. IcrarycXe^vTwv. This appears 
 
 to agree with the genitive of the following noun, insteiid of standing in the gen. 
 fling, absolute— ivhen they were reported, not when it was reported that they. 
 Jelf, § 696. 3, quotes this passage, apparently chissifying it under those, where 
 Trpdyfiara, or some indefinite word is understood. He illustrates by the Latin 
 'cognito,' for postquam cognitum erat. See drjXuS^yTos, i. 74, 
 4»oCvt<ro-oi vfjcs -a Phoenician fleet. Mr. Grote, assuming the truth of the con- 
 vention of Callias (see last ch.) supposes that Pissuthnes had never any inten- 
 tion of violating it by really bringing up these ships (vi. 37). iir* 
 airovs-' to their assistance; i. e. the Samians : had the Athenians been meant, 
 iwl o-^as 'ar/ainst themselves/ would have been used. As Krug. remarks, we 
 should rather have anticipated vap' avrovs, or irpbs aCrroOs, but iirl surely may 
 be supported. Krug. says nothing hinders us from connecting avrovs with the 
 Athenians, as icrayy^XdevTuv represents the tense of the finite verb; and it is 
 p»>ssible that he may be right. ^^l tAs *. to fetch the Phoenicians. 
 Stesagoras was a Samian. 
 
 Chapter CXVII.— (a.) 4v tovt<{»— during the absence of Pericles. 
 a<|»paKTw. Wlien a fleet was for any length of time drawn up on shore, it was, 
 as may be seen from many instances, protected by a palisade or aravpu^fia. Cf. 
 VI. 66. vii. 25. This precaution appears in the present instance to have been 
 neglected, the Athenians thinking it enough to keep some 'look-out ships' (rdf 
 Trpo<pv\aKi5as) moored at a little distance seaward. When these were captured, 
 by the sudden onset of the enemy, the Athenians were compelled to launch the 
 ships on shore in detachments as they best could, and were thus easily beaten in 
 detail. It was in a somewhat similar manner that they lost the great battle of 
 ^gos-potami. Remark the present participle d^Toyayofji^yas—as they were 
 launched to meet them. 
 
 {b.) 0ovKv8{8ov. I think we must understand Tliucydides, son of Melesias, 
 the successor of Cimon at the head of the oligarchical party, and the rival of 
 Pericles, even though his return from ostracism has not been mentioned. 
 Grote, vi. 38, says there is no evidence on either side, by which we may deter- 
 mine whether it were he or no, and favours the idea that a third Thucyd. is 
 meant. The negative evidence that nothing is said to mark his distinction 
 from the leading man of Athens, though he bore the same name, is, I think, 
 evidence enough to prevent us from imagining a third Thucydides. For a 
 very good account of him, see Grote, vol. vi. p. 20. 
 
 (c.) ^paxtlav—' insifjnijicayif/ Krug., probably .so, but the notion is derived 
 from the fact that they were only able to maintain it for a short time. 
 6fioXo7C<f, on terms, i.e., they did not surrender at discretion. 
 Ka0aovT€s— 8dvT€s-irapa8<JvT€s. These participles, as generally 'sinearti- 
 culo,' conditionate the finite verb with which they are connected, i.e., these are 
 the conditions upon which they ' wpoaex^p-qcav: rd dvaX«0^vTo. 
 
 ' The expenses of the siege.* These have been variously estimated : 1000 
 talents, according to Isocrates [15, in], 1200 says Corn. Nepos. [Timoth.] 
 But these writers were sure to exaggerate. On the other hand, the 200 men- 
 tioned by Diodorus [12, 28], is evidently under the truth. Diodorus, as Krug. 
 says, most probably wrote 2000. Kara xp<ivovs, the distributive 
 
 use of Kard—at stated times. Cf. Kara 7r6\eis, ch. 1 19, and the like, /card/cw/ias, 
 II, Jelf, § 355. T, and 629. From the narrative here given, Mr. Grote draws 
 several inferences in favour of the Athenian administration of their empire. 
 None of the dependent allies except Byzantium joined in the revolt. Tlierefore 
 they could not have been much oppressed. It is more than doubtful whether 
 the Athenians renewed the democracy. Therefore they did not force this 
 form of government in cases where the natural tendency of the parties ran the 
 other way. The conduct of Athens to other dependencies, e.g., Melos, might, 
 perhaps, induce us te suppose that there was something in the great power of 
 Sjvmos, and the particular position of affairs, which rendered a mild policy in 
 this case preferable. The student must remember that when in this war 
 Samos applied to Sparta for aid, the Corinthians prevented the latter from 
 stirring, by maintaining the principle that every state had a right to punish its 
 own recusant dependencies. Hence the extreme exasperation felt by the 
 Corinthians against the Athenians, for violating this same principle in the affair 
 of Corcyra and Epidamnus. See the Corinthian Speech, ch. 40. 
 
 Chapter CXVIII.— (a.) ov iroXXois ^tco-iv. The history now proceeds 
 from ch. 88. The Corcyrean (juarrel began B.C. 436, and the thirty years' 
 truce was concluded B.C. 445. Therefore the KepKvpaiKd took place about four 
 years after the reduction of Samos. See ch. 24-55. On the affair of Potidaja, 
 see ch. 56-66. iv 'intri ircvxTiKOVTa jidXurra. At the utmost, 
 
 says Dobree, from the departure of Xerxes, Olymp. Ixxv. i, in the autumn, to 
 the Lacediemonian invasion, Ixxxvii. 2, not more than forty-nine years can be 
 computed. From the night attack on Plataea, the first overt act of the war, 
 there are only forty-eight. Popp. rejoins, that the war is dated from the irrup- 
 tion of the Thebans into Plataea, see ii. i, and that the qualifying expression 
 fidXiara is used. This I consider quite sufficient justification of the language 
 of Thucydides, more especially as Cicero [quoted by Kriig.] translates ixaKajra 
 hy fere. Ad Attic, vii. 11. 2. The present instance seems to me fatal to the 
 theory elaborately maintained by Peile, that p-dXiara always means to the fall. 
 Refer to note upon the word, ch. 13 c. I^KpaTCcrr^pav, as iyKparQs, 
 
 is used in ch. 76. 4irl ji^^a Ewdficws. As iirl /xiya iaxvos, n. 97- 
 
 See Jelf, § 442 b. The idiom rather belongs to the Epic and Ionic forms of 
 
 speech. 
 
 (6.) 4irl ppaxv, to a slight extent. I do not think that Dale is right in fol- 
 lowing Bloomf., who interprets for a short time. Neither do I consider T. K.A .'s 
 in a slight degree, an accurate rendering of the preposition. Krug.'s quotation 
 bears me out, t^$ dpTrjpias ivl ppaxv Kivndih-ris. Dion, ircpl ^vvd., 14. p. 
 162. rh irXiov tov xP<^vov. Popp. remarks that rbv xXiova, or 
 
 tX^w tov xp&vov is * magis Thucydideum.' Nostrum tamen non falsum. This 
 is corroborated by Kriig. from rb irXiov tov x^/j^ou, iv. 4. H to-xcis. 
 
 On this unusual /xtj Poppo remarks, ' Adnotandura m, quod apud paHicipium 
 
T24 
 
 NOTES OX THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book I. 
 
 causah, rarius legitiir in scriptis Atticonim, velut Deniosth, c. Bmot. de nom. 
 § 35j snepius apud communis Uialecti scriptores.' Kriig. agrees so far as to 
 say that ovk is positively required by dures, except that in this case the influ- 
 ence of the infinitive justifies /x^— an explanation which itself requires to be 
 explained. Tlie i)road distinction between the two negatives is, that ov simply 
 and directly denies a fact, or proposition ; while fii} denies in reference to some 
 conception formed by the mind of facts or [.roix)sition8 : it is entirely subjec- 
 tive, and expresses negation in the conceptions of the mind, not non-existence 
 in nature. If oi' rax^h be, 'not quid-; i.e., slow as an absolute reality, /tr? 
 raxeh is, ' not conceived of under the category of ' fjiiirk; ' * those with whom the 
 notion of * quick' was never connected. For practical jiurposes in collocations 
 like this, the difference of meaning is trivial, and not easily expressed. See 
 note on fi^ iir' d-^ddip, ii. 17, and 22 d. oUc^ois. The Helot war. 
 
 Seech. 101. Midler {Dor.) thinks that a war with the Arcadians is meant. 
 But considering the antagonism between the two nations, I do not believe 
 OLKdoLs wouhl in such a case be usetl, whatever might be the claims of Sparta 
 to an Hegemonia in Peloponnese. ttjs ^vjipax^as. Abstractum 
 
 l>ro concreto. o-a^xSs fjpcTo— '?<?«« manifestly on the rise.' This very 
 
 candid and positive stiitement of Thucydides should be borne in mind by the 
 historical student, for the perusal of Mr. Grote's great work has a natural ten- 
 dency to obscure or obliterate the fact which it asserts. The ingenious plead- 
 ing of ^Ir. Grote would almost persuade us that Athens could never have been 
 culpable in her relations with Laceda;mon. 
 
 (c.) ovK€Ti dvacrxcTov eiroiovvro— ' considered it to be a thimj no lon>/er to he 
 put up with: Soii. 21. ^mx€ipT,Wa- ' « thing to be attempted.' 
 
 See note, ch. 88. d TroXc|iov<riv . . . Jia-rai. See Jelf, § 691. The 
 
 question is transfeired to the direct furm, as addressed to the god ; so in the 
 next chapter, d xpv Tro\€fj.e7v. In the answer of the god, Bloomf. conceives 
 that the usual oracular ambiguity is latent in woXefiovffi, which is universal, and 
 might be applied to either party. It may be so; yet, as Kriig. remarks, there 
 is no real ground for supposing that the oracle had a double meaning. It cer- 
 tainly was universally believed to favour the Lacedaemonians. C^ tov deov 
 XPV<TaPTos Kal avTov viro(Txofi€vov ^vWrirpeaeai, i. 123. and similaHv, ii. 54 ; and 
 Kriig. adds Plut. de Or. Pyth. 19. Grote, from the (is X^^erat, considers that 
 Thucyd. was sceptical as to the fact of its ever having been given. 
 &fi€ivov. A sort of cant phrase with oracles, cf. rb lUXaa-^iKbv &pyov d/xeiyov. 
 Bloomf. refers to the ommon tis kuI dfxeii^ov, and Hesiod, Opp. ii. 368, ^r}8' 
 dKi^riTOiat Kadli'eLv, oO ydp dfieivou. AkXtitos. Popp. quotes Hor. 
 
 Od. ii. 18, ad finem, 'Hie . . . vocatus afque non roca^us audit.' The Lacedte- 
 monians considered the plague at Athens as exhibiting the fulfilment of the 
 god's promise. See ii. 54. 
 
 Chap. 120.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 125 
 
 87 
 
 Chapter CXIX.— («.) aSOis refers back to the conferences mentioned ch. 
 86T]e€VT€s «<rT€ \|/Tj4>to-ao-0ai. Similar instances are cited by 
 Kriig., o{>K iirddovro (b<JT€ ix^odai, and viii. 45, imacKeu (bare Uvra irdcaL. 
 Matthiae, Gr. Gr. § 629 c. expresses himself unable to satisfy his own mind 
 whether any, and what difference, subsists between Ci(tt€ with an infinitive and 
 indicative. The former appears to me to be employed when the result might, 
 
 upon general principles, be anticipated as likely, and when, supposing that it 
 did follow, it might be accounted for a jtriori. \Vith the indictative, on the con- 
 trary, dare denotes, as a positive truth, that the result did follow ; it points to 
 a matter of fact, and is (juite independent of all « priori considerations. In ii. 
 4, both occur in close connexion, wore dtetpdeipovTo iroWoi, so thai many actually 
 perished, a positive fact ; and again, ^KXaae rds trvXai ware fit] ^^o8ov ehai, 
 * shut the gates, so as to allow of no egress,' a general result following naturally 
 from the previous act. So I had been accustomed to teach, long before I had 
 the advantage of seeing Mr. Shilleto's able paper upon this idiom, where a 
 similar doctrine appears to be laid down, but with very different precision and 
 accuracy. I shall consult the advantage of the student by referring him to 
 Mr. Shilleto's edition of Demosth. de falsd Legatione, Appendix B. 
 Kal t<Jt€ Kal TcXcvraioi, coming forward last u^on this occasion as well as upon 
 the pnilous one [see i. 67, ad finera), in order to sum up, and urge with greater 
 force all the complaints against Athens. 
 
 Chapter CXX. — (a.) ovk &,v ^ti. As they had done before. See ch. 68. 
 ttS ov — as though they had not, implying that now they have. No difficulty 
 need be made about this, for the ydp in xPV y^Pt immediately following, does 
 not give the reason for the foregoing statement, but, as often happens, for an- 
 other implied by or involved in it. Translate, * [ We say blame] for those who 
 are leaders ought, while administering their own affairs fairly (i.e., without a 
 grasping spirit towards their neighbours), to be before others in attending to the 
 general interests, just as they are among others selected out of all to receive the 
 highest honours. This is what I have always thought the right interpretation, 
 though ev dXXois is generally interpreted according to the exposition of the 
 Scholiast in oHor things— i.e., iv irpof^plq. Kal rots toiovtois. Kriig. agrees 
 with the version I have given ; for i^ iaov he compares the conduct attributed 
 to the Athenians, iv. 6r, 4, irXeoviKTiiv ; but the idea of 'fair dealing to 
 others' is the essential one contained in to Icrov. 
 
 (6.) 4vT]XXd'YTj<rav — hare had dealings icith. The word contains the notion 
 of barter and exchange. See L. and S. Lcricon. iv irdpw— /h the highway of 
 
 intercourse. The Schol. explains Tropov KaXel rd efiTrdpia. Corinth, from its situa- 
 tion between two seas, was eminently such an efiirdpiov, and is doubtless hinted 
 at here. So several cities are said to be tV irbpii), vi. 48. KaraKO- 
 
 u.iZi\v — a conveyance of gooils for exportation down to the coast, as is evident 
 from the elements of which the word is composed. dvTiXT]\|;is — 
 
 the receiving of others in exchange. KttKovs Kpiras— bad judges, 
 
 because careless and uninterested. Bloomf. cf. irov-qpi^ xpTjaerat KpLTrj, Eurip. 
 Elect., ^79. irpootvTO. So read Kriig. and Poppo. Bekker prints 
 
 from some MSS. -rrpodvTo, and Arn. follows him from deference to his judg- 
 ment. It is certain that the forms in -olvto are pronounced by the gramma- 
 rians to be i)eculiarly Attic, but, for this very reason, Bekker believes them to 
 have been frequently substituted for others by copyists. Such he imagines to 
 have been the case here. On such a point, without great special experience, it 
 is impossible to pronounce. 
 
 (c. ) cl ^^ dSiKOiVTO. For i^v fxr) dSt/cwirat say both Popp. and Kriig., not, 
 however, I presume, without a distinction of meaning. This distinction 
 
126 
 
 NOTES OX THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book I. 
 
 Chap. 121.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 127 
 
 between ijv firj cum Subjunctivo, and el fi-f) cum optative, is frequently misun- 
 derstood. It is not, for insUtnce, quite correct to say, that the former contem- 
 plates the realization of the hypothesis positively and certainly, the latter 
 vaguely and dubiously. The event expressed by the verb which follows ijv 
 may be less probable, than that expressed by the Optative after e/, but the 
 former puts an alternative which experience will soon decide, or is likely soon 
 to decide, or perhaps has decided, one way or other : the later exj)re88e8 a 
 less positive opinion as to the arrival of such an opportunity for decision, cf. 
 ii. 5, it TLva Xd^oiev — ijv &pa rvxt^crl Ttve^ e^br^pT)ixivoi. The first case was quite 
 uncertain — if they should have the luck to catch any: the second supposition 
 must have been tested in the course of the night as the &pa shows — if, as they 
 had reason to anticipate, any had been captured. Here T. K. A. asserts that 
 the mixture of the obliqua and directa Oratio is (juite enough to account for the 
 change! Tlie Optative, therefore, is often employed by a sort of euphemism 
 for the setting forth of disagreeable or unwelcome alternatives, and the state- 
 ment of questions which are not in themselves pleasant to entertain, cf. el 
 dvTL<TXoi.ev, next ch. Again, as here, upon the same principle, generalized 
 statements about undefined persons require el with the Optative: but, where 
 the statement is about definite, known persons, and an alternative to which it 
 is thought they will be subjected, ijv with the subjunctive is employed. See 
 (Ed. Col., 1442, for an instance, ijv ixrj ddiKuvTai, in the event of their not 
 heing injured, el ^r) dbiKoivTo, supposing it should come to pass they are not 
 injured. Ik \Uv. The preposition denotes here, as often, out of 
 
 /.f ., after a state of peace, <tr. irapacrxdv, as irap^x^L, is .sometimes 
 
 used impersonally, the neuter participle, like those of other iiupersonals, stands 
 in the nom. absolute — 'when good opportunity offers.' Kriig. (juotes Kairoi 
 /caXws ye (ru}<ppoveiy irapeix^ <toi, Eurip. Elect. 1080, cf. v. I4, 60, 63. 
 T|8o}icvov. We might expect the plural after dvhpCiv (ruxppdviov — d7a^cDi'. But 
 it comes to the same thing, for the singular T]b6ixevov is as indefinite as the ante- 
 cedent plural : so in English, it is the part of guoil men, and // is a good mans 
 part. For the change from dydduv to ddiKov/x^vovs, cf. Jelf, 675 a. dSiKfi- 
 
 <r9ai — 'to he the subject of wrong,' or dSiKia, just as l Cor. vi. 7, Siarl oi'x^ 
 fxaWov ddiKeiffde, Popp. cf, Tro\iopKe7adai, iii, 52. 
 
 {d.) €1 T|<rvx*^5o^- Note the force of the i)resent, ' if he continues in ei state 
 of apathy.' ivrvyjx^ TrXcovdl^wv — in the present cjise very much the 
 
 same as irXeoveKrCiv, except that the tennination in -d^ta modifies the way in 
 which the notion is predicated — is induced by success to ejchibit too high preten- 
 sions. See Deni, 117, 5. eTreiSrj Tr\eovdtfi.v iirexeipovv Kal Trepd tov fxerplov rd 
 KadeffTTjKora eKivouv. dirCorrai — which is not deserving of trust. 
 
 KaKws "YvtDO-O^VTa — bailly judged meai<ure.^. tv\6vtwv — because their 
 
 opponents cheinced to be still worse advised. So we must tr., if with Bekker, 
 Poppo, and G oiler, we read the genitive rvxovruv. This will, then, form one 
 of the rare instances where Tiryxdvw occurs without a participle. See i, 32 c. 
 No one very clear case is found ; but cf. Soph. Ajax, V. 9. ivdov ydp avrjp 
 &pTL Tvyxdvei., which may be explained away by the occurrence of a participle 
 in the next line. Cf. also Elect ra, v. 46, 113. Some MSS. read rvxovra, which 
 Gcill. prefers to retain. tri irX^. Omissum est verbum substan- 
 
 tivum. Popp. irtpUm]— hare come round to be. See note on 
 
 vepL^ffTTjKev, ch. 32, 6(JLota tQ trl<rrei. This is the common 
 
 reading, retained by Bekker, though both Popp, and Kriig, adopt Keiske's 
 emendation ofiolg.. I should tr.. For no man in actual performance carries out 
 things upon the same scale, as that on which he speculates upon them in his 
 sanguine hopes [lit. confdence], fejr we indulge our fancies in security, but in the 
 midst of apprehensions we fail in the ccecution, — i.e., so long as we are in a 
 state of security, we nsay frame what visionary schemes we please, but the 
 dangers which attend their realization disable our powers by the apprehensions 
 which they excite. Tlie other (purely conjectural) reading, d/xoiq., would be, 
 710 man lays his schemes, and proceeds practically to execute them with equal con- 
 fidence, — lit. 'his confidence equal.' The meaning does not seem to me suffi- 
 ciently improved to warrant the alteration. The objection urged by Dale, that 
 T^ irloTei ought to be answered by t^j ?/37V, is, I think, obviated by con- 
 sidering the nature of the latter noun and its use in Thucyd,, where it is 
 so familiar as almost to assume an adverbial character. Indeed, we ourselves 
 say ' in practice,' instead of 'in his ptractice.' Cf. Jelf, 752, 2. Cf. h Kaipcp^ 
 at the proper time, next chapter. 
 
 Chapter CXXI. — («.) d8iKovp.€Voi. Sine articulo ; therefore expresses 
 cause or condition, because we are suffering wrong. €Y€Cpo|X€V — ■ 
 
 * Wake up the war.' Rather poetical ; but it is not unnatural that an orator 
 should employ strong and Homeric language upon this point, Cf, ^yeipe 5^ 
 <f>v\oTriv uivr)v. II. X 213, Xenophon and Polybius imitated Thucyd., as may 
 be seen in the citations of Bl, and Kriig, rd irapaYYcXXop-cva. 
 
 This is the technical military term for passing the word of command along 
 {trapd) the ranks. See inter alia Xen, A nab. Most commentators, &c,, trans- 
 late as though it were rd irapayyeXdivTo., losing the force of the present, which 
 is worth notice. For they do not boast of mere subordination, but of that 
 aptitude and training which enables soldiers in action to catch the word of 
 command eis it is given, and act accordingly. 
 
 (b.) iv A^4)ois. Delphi must therefore have passed away from the 
 Phocians (cf. ch. 1 1 2), and have fallen again under Laceda?monian in- 
 fluence. S6Lveitr\ia 'rroir](rd\i.cvo\.--' having effected a loan.' The 
 temples were the banks and capitalists of antiquity. All the provisions for 
 securing repa)rment of one of these loans from a temple, were almost as elaborate 
 as those of mo<lem times, Cf, ii. 13, viroXaPtiv. In virb is con- 
 tained the idea, secretly or furtively withdraw. wvitH]. Kriig. 
 doubts whether this is to be interpreted ' gekauft,' i.e., purchased, mercenary^ 
 or Kdujlich? i.e., purchaseable. Probably the orator meant that the ambi- 
 guity of the word should suggest the connexion between the two ideas, 
 
 (c.) dXCo-Kovrai — cf, ch. 32, The perfect usage of the present. Metaphor 
 from capturing a besieged town. If it were not that the phrase has degene- 
 rated into slang, we might translate, they are sacked. At any rate, it means, 
 it is idl over with them. ii o.vriir\o\.€V . See note on el fXTj ddiKOLVTO, 
 
 last ch, 8^ trov — / suppose one may assume; I presume. The 
 
 Speaker enunciates a particle of absolute certainty, 5?^, and then qualifies it by 
 me of uncertainty, trov, as if he had said. With the utmost certainty, — at least, I 
 ■tuppose we may say so. KaGaiperlov — must be put down Qit. pulled 
 
128 
 
 NOTES ON TIIUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book I. 
 
 Chap. 122.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 129 
 
 dotcn) I}/ our practice. I cannot see why D. should translate mai/ be uttahud 
 by us. Tlie Attic usage is surely all the other way. Of. xp^vos Kada'ipei Tdvra. 
 ^Esch. Earn. 286, and fioipa rbv (puffavra KaOdXc, Ajiur, v. 517. See also in a 
 sense plainly derivative from this, t6 yieyap^ojv \pri(f>i<Tfxa Kadaipe'iu, infra ch. 
 140. And Entjelnian has rightly, ' ihwch Utl»nif/ bmultif/en,' and Zevort, 'iwilh 
 €nl( )rroiii< jmr It travail.' 
 
 [(/.) yjpi^^ara. In refutation of the wortls of Archidamus, c. 80. Popp. 
 is avrd— without any immediate word to which it refers. Important, as T 
 have more than once ohservetl, cf. -22 a, in reference to iii. 84. ovk 
 
 dir6po€<riv — xhall not faint or fail. The notion is that a fainting person 
 ceases to .^jmd'. In this sense d7rei7ro>' is more common. It will he ohserved 
 that in this sentence ov twice follows e^, whereas, according to the usual ndes 
 of the language, /jltj would be re(iuired. The phrase deiubv el is, however, a 
 peculiar one, and really amounts to a positive affirmation — no doubt is at any 
 rate implied, and therefore el loses in a great measure its grammatical force. 
 ' It would be hard that while their allies wont be found wanting (not * // they 
 wont,' implying doubt), * we shall not,' &c., the reasons which excuse the first 
 ov, are of course valid in respect of the second. Indeed after the sentence 
 had once assumed the direct form, /zrj would have been improper. Kriig., I 
 think, if I understand him aright, agrees with this view. ' ei,' says he, ' is ex- 
 tinguished, because, as &pa shows, an independent tpiestion expressive of indig- 
 nation is introduced — i7/A€ts 01) dawavrjcrofjiev. He quotes Lysias, xii. 36, 
 ovKOVv deivbv d roi-s p-iv aTpaTrjyovs davaTi^ i^rjpiwaarf, toi'tovs 5^ 5rj . . . . oi/K 
 &pa XPV KoXd^effOai ; whore also we might render — Is it vot hard that you, 
 should hare j^uvished, lir. Buttmann, in speaking of the passage (quoted by 
 T. K. A.), says the first ov is used because a po«<itive and notorious fact is as- 
 sumed ; in the second clause the construction passes into the form of a question 
 imi)lying surprise, and conveying reproof. ovk dpa SaTravrjcrop.cv — 
 
 'shall not, as it seetm to he inferred, contribute our money.' avrd, 
 
 so. xpVara, cf. note supra. avTots rovrols—by this very money of 
 
 our oicn, which, like the eagle's pinion in the Ai^vanKbs X670S, would be used 
 against us for our own destruction. Arnold surely is wrong in tr., in that very 
 part in which we are most sensitire ; viz., our projicrty. 
 
 Chapter CXXII. — (a.) 680I iroX^ixov, ' \cays and means for cai'ryinrf on the 
 war.' So Tacitus — heUi rias, An, ii. 5. dircJoTacis — much con- 
 
 troversy has been wasted, whether or no this word can have an active sense, 
 e.f/.f U'ithdrairal. I believe it cannot, but it surely comes to the same thing. 
 The speakers say, ' rirolt if allies,' in general terms, not thinking it necessary 
 to specify how such revolt was to be brought about. It might be by their 
 intrigues, or by tije inclination of the parties concerned. At any rate war 
 would give an oi)portunity for it, and it would, in either case, be equally dis- 
 astrous to Athens. ciriTtixvo-jios. Tlie constniction of fortified 
 positions either in, or close to, an enemy's territory, which may be used as a 
 ' point d'appui,' or basis for predatory and c»ther operations against them. It 
 has been observed that this is an anticipation, Tlie Peloponnesians never 
 thought of such a thing until A Icibiades put it into their heads. Tlien, how- 
 ever, they carried out the suggestion by fortifying Deceleia. See also ch. 142, 
 
 note. cirl p^Tots, specified, and therefore definite, fixed rules, cf. 
 
 ^ttI py}Toh y^paai, ch. 1 3. avrbs dcj)' avrov— forms its schemes 
 
 itself from itself to suit the emergencies as they arise. to Traparuv- 
 
 \o.v6v. — pro re mttd, the occasion as it presents itself. cv a. sc. 
 
 TToX^MV — «vop7T|Tws, without losing his temper. If we read avrbu with Arn. 
 and Kriig., it is perhaps best to connect it with dpyiadeis, so that the two 
 expressions exactly balance : Jle who deals with it in good temper, and lie who 
 puts himself in a passion about it. irraCci — stumbles, meets with an over- 
 
 throw. Bekker has accepted Dobree's conjecture, vepl avrbv, stumbles over 
 himself, is the cause of his own failure. But in vi. 33, we have irepl <x(f>i<TLv 
 aiTots TTTaiuaiv, and i. 69, vepl avr<^ (r<f>a\^vTa, where Arn. quotes prj ire pi 
 Map8ovi(f) TTTaiar) 17 "EXXay, Herod, ix. 101. We should, therefore, expect the 
 dative here. 
 
 (6.) Kard Tr<JXiv, State by state separately, or rather against each state 
 separately. cl fiVj — // we do not all collectively and severally. 
 
 Every member of the confederacy must individually exhibit its zeal : it will 
 not do to have some active, and some lukewarm. dvTiKpvs 8ov- 
 
 Xtiav. We have i) dvriKpvs iXevOepia, viii. 64, downright freedom ; but, per- 
 haps, T. K. A. is right in remarking that the absence of the article should 
 make a difference in our rendering, tr. slavery out-right, slavery staring us in the 
 face. ^v8oia<r0'iiTai. According to the etymology the word must 
 
 signify to he in a state of halting, or wavering between two opinions — Tr. it is 
 disgraceful to Peloponnesus that two opinions should ever be expressed about it. 
 I do not like Arn.'s version, ' that the very name of slavery should be pronounced 
 as within possibility applicable to if,' nor D.'s, to be even mentioned as contin- 
 gent, cf. i. 36; vi. 91. Kriig. remarks that the word is not used by Attic 
 writers. rupavvov irdXiv — Svjfer a despot city or a usurping city to 
 
 be set up in Greece. Ui)on the suppression of 'Tyrants' in Greece by the 
 Lacedsemonians, see ch. 18, and the note there. 
 
 (0.) OVK t<r^cv. We know not hoic such conduct gets rid of three of the inost 
 calamitous things that can befall a man, or, clears itself from labouring under 
 one of the three greatest evils which can befall, want of sense, want of spirit, or 
 want of care. ov ^dp 8^ — for surely ye do not escape these charges 
 
 by taking refuge in that which has damaged far more persons than anything 
 else, contempt of your enemy, we mean, which from the ruin it has inflicted upon 
 numbers, has come to be called by a name expressing the very opposite, contemp- 
 tible want of sense, p.aXaKCa, is generally translated 'cowardice,' but 
 surely this is strong language applied to Spartans, it is rather "want of energy 
 and exertion." It is impossible in our language to express properly tlie play upon 
 the words KaTa<f>pbv7j(Tis and d(ppoffvvr}. Dr. Donaldson [New Cratylus, p. 184], 
 has observed that the present passage proves the simple a as well as dvd to 
 be a direct opposition to Kard. I have translated the passage as I have always 
 understood it. But it ought to be mentioned that another view of it is accepted 
 by T. K. A. and Dale. 'For you assuredly had not escaped these when you 
 betook yourself to that contempt which has injured so very many,' d'C. This, I 
 consider, contains too direct a charge against the Lacedaemonians, whom they 
 wished to conciliate ; and, secondly, the Lacedaemonians had not so much 
 
J30 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book I, 
 
 Chap. 126.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 131 
 
 despised the growing power of Athens, as overlooked it from diriffTla and 
 dfiadia. See ch. 68, and on d<ppoffvv7jj Jelf. § 475 a. 
 
 Chapter CXXIII. — (a.) rots irapovo-i PoT^Oovvras — comivg to the aid of 
 things as they are ; making the best of. Cf. Livy. Quae fortuna coegisset ita 
 fieri, eandem cogere tueri factum, Livy, xxiii. 35. The iiri in the following 
 verb implies the bestowal of additional pains and trouble. Kriig. considers /xfX- 
 \6vTU}v with iireiTa suspicious. It is not nece88<ary for the sense, but helps the 
 antithesis of sound ; and he quotes himself, t6 (cTai ov rov firciTa toO /uAXo/'toj, 
 Plato, Parm, 141 e. rds apcrds. Both Popp. and Kriig. give the 
 
 same meaning as to dper-Zi, ch. 33, i.e., ' exist imatio rirtutis,' your character for 
 valour. Cf. the Latin use of laus, laudes, for honores, e.g., pro laude merentis, 
 Hor. Ep. i. vii., and so, indeed, 'honours,* in English. 
 
 cl dpa. —if peradventurc. 4ktt|0t]. Though Krdofiai be deponent 
 
 this aorist is passive : so is Cb<f)67]v from birTOfxai,. Tr. ^Tis not right to lose in 
 the day of abundance, what ha^ been won in the time of difficulty. KardL 
 
 iroXXd — on many scores. w(j>cX£qL, a sort of instrumental dative — 
 
 *from the benefit thereby accruing to them.' The weakening of the Athenian 
 power, would free them from oppression, and in many cases from tribute. 
 irapaPepdo-Gai— /o have been transgressed. Kriig. points out that the perf. 
 pass, from jSi^afiai occurs in other compounds, ^v/x^e^dadai, viii. 98, and dva- 
 ^e^dixevos, Xen. Uipparch. i. 4. The aor. ^vjx^adijvai, iv. 30, and dvaj^adrjvaL, 
 Xen. irepl lirr. iii. 4. Elsewhere the form is not found in Attic writers. 
 
 Chapter CXXIV. — (a.) virapxov. D. tr. since on every ground you hare 
 good reason for going to war. But I am surprised that he has not seen how 
 ^vapxov has direct reference to vvdpxovai, c. \ii. Since you have excellent re- 
 sources coming in on all sides for war. Cf. iii. 62. virapxov -y€ vpuv, at least 
 when you had the resource. ctircp — if as we must assume, cf. supra 
 
 69 b. It is natural to conjecture ravrd for ravra, as I had myself done without 
 seeing that Keiske and Giill. had done the same, but the latter now allows, and 
 I believe with truth, that ravra is right. Am. well explains — ' We advise thio 
 war for the interest of the whole confederacy, and it is for their interest, if it 
 be admitted as most certain, that this measure is alike for the benefit of states, 
 and of the individuals who reside in them.' Both ravra. and rd^( refer to iroXc- 
 ^lelv. So says Popp. c. 143, * ravra et rdbe de efidem re dicuntur.' 
 oh irpoTcpov. The opposite of wh ich was formerly the case. oH refers to the whole 
 clause. See, for the fact, v. 9, vi. 77. vii. 5. viii. 25, Popp. ficrcXOciv 
 
 T^v IXevOcpiav — to ensue the freedom of the rest, as in the E.V. of the New Test., 
 * seek peace, and ensue it.' The Germans similarly say, 'Nachgehen der Freiheit.' 
 
 (6.) ovKiTi IvS^x*'''**''- ^^ '* '^0 longer admissible; it is no longer a possible 
 case, Cf.ch. 140. 142. d4>ix6ai — impersonal, that things hare come to a sfinit. 
 Cf. ^5 o'iav TeXevrijv d<ptKTo, vii. 75. 8id irXcCovos, sc. xp^^ov — leafing 
 
 Q. longer time. Ik 7roX^p,ov .... d4>* -^^^x^^S- l'^^© different use of 
 
 the prepositions is well seen here. iK arising out of, and therefore following 
 from; dirbfrom a regard to. iK is ever the material cause ; in dvb the causal 
 notion comes from the primary local one — that which comes away from an object, 
 TT^v Ka,Qi(rn\Kviav--the usurping, or despot city that has been set up in Greece, 
 
 liri — to the detriment of. 8iavoci<r6ai, sc. dpx^t-v — on this 
 
 use of wffte, denoting the natural consequence of what precedes, cf. supra 
 76 c. 
 
 Chapter CXXV. — (a.) d<|>* dirdvrwv. Kriig. remarks that such a use of 
 the preposition is rare with dKoveiv though not with fiavBdvcLv — heard from the 
 lips of all. There is nothing strange in the omission of the article before 
 'yvu}/xT)v, it belongs to the class of cases already noticed, cf 8 a, and may be 
 illustnited by such expressions as * shew cause,' &c., in our own language. 
 TO irXfjOos. * The majority;' for, as A. remarks, it is said, v. 30, KvpLov dvai 
 6ti Siv t6 irXrjdos rCjv ^vfipidx^v \pr}<piff-qrai. ScSo-yjic'vov — used abso- 
 
 lutely as the more familiar cases of bb^av, irapdcrxop, &c. This would be scarce 
 worth noticing had not some copyists introduced dedoy/jievov into the MSS. Cf. 
 with Kriig. elprjfi^vov, i. 140, and elsewhere, yeypa/x/x^vop, v. 56, irpocrTer ay pi4vov, 
 in Plato, and Jelf, 700. 2 a. 6}iws 8^ k. t. X. This, 1 believe, refers 
 
 to 1X7] dvai p.^\\r]<riv, i.e. notwithstanding the resolution to make no delay in the 
 settlement of the necessary preliminaries, not indeed a whole year (one cannot say 
 a year), but something less was consumed. This was niy own impression of the 
 meaning, but the editions with which I was familiar, A. and Popp., gave the 
 sense as the Eng. trans. D., does. A year, however, did not pass while they 
 were settling all that was necessary; but 1 cannot think that Time, would speak 
 of a year as a short time for the purpose. Kriig. seems to adopt the first intei'- 
 pretation, and so does the last German trans. (Engelman), ' zwar kcin Jahr, 
 aber doch nicht viel weniger.' 
 
 Chapter CXXVI. — (a.) ^v \i.i\ n 4<raKovw<rt. Cf. 120 c. 
 Ti> &"Yos TTJs 9(ov. The abomination of the goddess, i.e. as it might mean in our 
 own language — the thing which the goddess abominated. tkavvnv is 
 
 the regular technical term for the expulsion of persons (ivayeis) so situated. 
 See (Edip. Tyr. v. 98. KvXwv k. t. X. The simple and lucid way 
 
 in which Thucyd. has given this narrative, and its diiference from his usual 
 sterner style (t6 <f>o^€pbv koWos) struck the giammarians so much that they said 
 of it A4(*3v iy^Xaae, see Grote (vol. iii. 108). The date of the victory of Cyloa 
 in the Diaulus, according to Corsini, diss. ag. p. 171 (Kriig.) was Olymp. 
 XXXV. dvciXcv. The regular word for the answer of the oracle. 
 
 €Trf|X0€v. Several, and I believe the better, MSS. have iv-qXeov. This involves 
 the question concerning the real nature of the principle upon which the Greeks 
 combine a neuter plural with a verb singular. I believe it to be this. Neuters, 
 whatever may be their plurality in mere number, do not contain the notion of 
 separate individuality and agency. They are embraced by the mind 'en masse,' 
 as a single whole. As they thus exhibit but a single operation, or action, the 
 verb denoting this action is put in the singular number. This accords with the 
 view taken by Coleridge, Tab. Talk, vol. ii. p. 61, that viz., neuters may possess 
 multeity but not plurality. From this he deduces the conclusion that neuters 
 plural being merely o6/ec^«, have no proper sui/'ccf-Zoj-w or nominative. Dr. Donald- 
 son supports the same theory, regarding all such neuters as properly accusative 
 cases, and the verb with which they are connected as impersonal in usage. 
 *' Apud Gnecos neutra pluralia {i.e. accusativi, nam genus neutrum nominativo 
 
 K 2 
 
132 
 
 NOTES OX TIIUCYDIDES. 
 
 [HoOK I. 
 
 Chap. 128.] 
 
 NOTES OX TIIUCYDIDES. 
 
 ^33 
 
 caret) verbo singiilari apponuntur, ut ra ^wa rpix^L, i.e. curritur quod aninialia." 
 Upon the same principle it is plain, as is here laid down, that there is no neuter 
 nominative singular. It may be true, as Coleridge says, that neuters have 
 * objectivity' alone, yet I can scarcely admit that, because neuters do not pos- 
 sess a conscious metaphysical subjectivity, they cannot be made the subjects of 
 a grammatical proposition. The same mental tendency which, in all languages, 
 ascribes masculine and feminine ' nomina' to things without life, and rd d^i'xa 
 i/ji\l/vxa\iyei 8ta ttjs /ncratpopcis [At. Jihef. iii. II. 3], might well be supposed to 
 sanction the subject- form, or nominative, as apj)lied to a neuter noun. But neuter 
 plurals are sometimes followed by verbs plural, when the idea which they express, 
 and which forms the subject of the verb, may easily be divided in thought into 
 separate individualities and agencies, a case by no means so universal as Arn. 
 imagines. Thus ra fwa rp^x^*- — lii'i»0 creatures run, regarding them as a 
 single logical class : but we might have rd fiDa Tp4x°vffi.Vy * The creatures are 
 runninfj," if the writer meant to describe several separate animals as doing so. 
 Here reference may be intended to the various d7wi'f s of which the Olympia 
 consisted. At any rate this princi[)le ai)pear8 to me to explain the only 
 passages in which, so far as I remember, Thucyd, in this way coujdes a neuter 
 plui-al to a plural verb : e.g., ii. 8, TroWd X67ta iXiyovro: here the diversity of 
 meaning or expression in the \67ta, or, at any rate, their entire independence 
 upon one another is conveyed by the plural : v. 26, dficpor^pois afiapr-^fxara 
 iyeuoPTo, the separate and distinct errors ascribed to either jiarty would 
 naturally notfiill under a single conception expressed by a singular verb. At v. 
 75, Kapvela irvyx^-^^^ dvra is a case which exactly resembles the present one. 
 In vi. 62, iyivovTO eiKoai /cat iKarbv rdXavra, the plural indicates the 
 several sums which together made up {iyivovro, amounted to), the total. See 
 also, Jelf, § 385. KaT€Xap€, according to Herodotus [v. 71], he 
 
 made the attempt without succeeding. ws ^irl TvpavvC8i, A is they 
 
 iconhl do u-ho were strivhifj to estaUixh a ttfrannij, cf. Jelf, § 634, 3 a. 
 tI -irpooTTiKciv — had some peculiar reference to himself, or appropriateness to him- 
 self as an Objmpic victor. lr\. KaT€V<Jii<rc — any further, i. e., his 
 
 comprehension of the oracle's meaning went no further. Kriig, says, however, 
 KarivoTjae is, 'considered,' but cf. KaT(v6r]acy ch. 138 b. On 'OXvfitria veviKt}- 
 k6ti, cf. Jelf, § 459. 5, Monk on Alcest. v., and on w$ iirL, § 626. i, on iirl 
 TvpavviSi § 634. 3, and eVi ^e/nvuiv Qewv § 633. 3 a. 
 
 (b.) Aidcia. ' Jovis MetXix^ou crebra apud veteres mentio,' Duker. Nor 
 was his worship confined to Athens alone, nor indeed the name to Z^us. As 
 it was celebrated iraud-qfiel, and without the walls, there would naturally be an 
 excellent opportunity for the execution of Cylon's plan. iroXXot — 
 
 many of them not victims, but sacrificial offerings, such as were common in the 
 country. These, as he goes on to explain, were cakes made in the shape of 
 animals, and offered by persons too poor to possess or purchase the animals 
 themselves, Tr^yujuara eis i^wwv /xoptpas rervirufieva, Schol. Cf. Herod, on the 
 Egyptians, ii, 47. 
 
 (c.) k'myiyvo\Uvov — 'accruing,' 'being added to what went before.* 
 avTOKpar. — with full powers. Arn. refers to Herm. Pol. Antiq. Greece, § 103, 
 who says that it is impossible to ascertain the manner in which, at this j)eriod, 
 'the ruling houses {yivT]) exercised their privileges. The insurrection, however. 
 
 without doubt was only a consequence of their sanguinary enactments, and, 
 though they succeeded in overpowering Cylon, the perfidy with wliich they 
 acted precipitated their fall. Herod., it will be remembered, v. 71. 3, speaks 
 of the wpurdi'etj rCiv vavKpdpojv o'iirep hefxov t6t€ rds 'AOrjvas as the persons 
 concerned in these dealings with Cylon. They perhaps were the executive 
 power acting under the authority of the Archons. Engelman's ed. supposes that 
 they fonned a sort of college among themselves. Biihr ad locum Herod., Wach- 
 smuth, § 436, Biickh {Public. Ec. of Ath.), Schiiman Be Comitiis, xii, xiii., all 
 treat of this difficult question. The younger student may refer to the Diet. 
 Jm//V/., Grote and Thirlwall. t(Jt€, Because the power of the 
 
 Archons was limited by Solon. ^\avpias—i. e. kukCos, or, as vulgarly 
 
 would be said, * scurrily.'' Poppo remarks that Thuc. elsewhere always says 
 0ai)\os, but never 0au\w5, Upon such matters nothing can decide but the 
 *usus' of the time, with which truly rest the 'arbitrium, jus, et norma 
 loquendi,* 
 
 {d.) dva<rTT|<ravTes — 'raised them up from their suppliant position.* As 
 Kriig. says, this is the regular word for inducing persons to quit a sanctuary or 
 asylum, cf. ch. 128, 136. €mT€TpafJL|i6Vot t?|v <J>vXaK^v, cf. * in- 
 
 scripti nomina regum.' Wvg. Eel. iii. 106. * Suspensi loculos,' 'Hot. Sat. \. 
 6, 74. diroOvTio-KOVTas— '>>" the point of death. 
 
 €irl Twv <r^fJLVwv— a^ the altar of the venerable goddesses. See Arist. Equif. v. 
 131 1. Kadyjffdai fioi So/cw Vt tujv ffi/xvuiv deQv. This temple, says the Scholiast, 
 lay between the town and the Areopagus. Join with Popp. iv toU puj^ioh to 
 8taxpV<^daL ; the latter word may be rendered— </ca// with, dispatched. 
 dXiTif|piot. 'tovs a/JiapTdvovras eis tovs Ueras dXiTrjpiovs ^(paaKov. Sch. on 
 K'luitcs V. 445. iK 'rdv dXiTTjplojp ai (Prjpn. yeyovivai ttjs 6eov. 
 voTcpov, /. e., ' when recalled by Cleisthenes.' KrUg. avTwv refers 
 
 to the AlcmsBonidae. 
 
 Ch.vptku CXXVII.— (a.) S^ecv— an unusual position for the word which, 
 as Kriig. remarks, always in Thucyd., follows the alleged cause. The later 
 writers however prefixed it. irputrov—' potissimum,* 'mainly.' 
 
 irpo(r€Xi5|i6VOV ovtw. This is an inversion of the way in which we should state 
 the idea, i.e., an English writer would say, attached to him. 
 rd dirb r(!iv*A9y\vaifdV— matters from the Athenians, i.e., their demands from 
 the Athenians. rh (i^pos. The article here has caused much em- 
 
 barrassment. It is generally said to be used with a tacit reference to to 6Xov. 
 It seems to me to add strength to the expression, being more emphatic than 
 fiipoi per se, aliquantum, in an appreciable degree, meaning that a definite, an 
 ascertainable amount of the responsibility rested with him. Might we not, as 
 before 23 c, read ti fiipos, which of course would be 'aliquantum.' 
 Hyuiv— 'leading,' as we say, a leading man in the state, cf. ii. 65. On the 
 alleged causes, supposed to influence Pericles in the support of the war, such as 
 the wishes of Aspasia, &c, see Grote, vol. vi. p. 131. 
 
 Chapter CXXVIII.— (a.) airh Taivapov— which came upon them from. 
 Tanarus. Kal o-4>C<rtv avTois. The ^at belongs to the whole 
 
134 
 
 NOTES ON TIIUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book I. 
 
 Chap. 130.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 135 
 
 aentence. For which reason also they hold that the fjreat earthqualce visited 
 them. Kriig. cf. i. 130; ii. 21. With respect to the fact, cf. ch. loi. 
 
 (b.) XoXkio^kov. ' Pallas of the brazen chapel.' Probably, as Arn. suggests, 
 the walls were lined with plates of brass, like our wood panelling. Tlie etlitors 
 refer to Pausanias iii. 17, 3, cf. Livy xxxv. 36. 'j^toli circa Chalcioecon 
 (Minervje est templum sereum) congregati caeduntur.' Sir W. Gell, Argolis, 
 p. 30, speaks of the bronze nails in the treasury of Atreus which must have 
 been used to fasten the metal to the walls. ji€Ta'ir€}i<j>6cCs — sent 
 
 after, t.c, judicially summoned, B.C. 478. 'Ep[iiov£8a. Hermione, 
 
 a city of the Lacedrenionian confederacy. irpd'YpaTa irpdcrcrciv — 
 
 to carry on an intrigue. The infinitive Trpd<T<r€iv depends upon d^t/cvctTat, 
 and in this case the English idiom approaches the Greek more nearly than the 
 Latin. Kriig. aptly cf. ixauOdveiu T^KOfiev, (L\lip. Tyr. v. 12, and i. 72 ; viiL 
 29. It is perhaps needless to remark with Kriig. that dveu here means — 
 *iDithout authority from the Lacedtemonians.' He cf. ii. 72 ; iv. 78 ; viii. 5. 
 ltrt\iipt]<r€V. Some good MSS. exhibit ivexfipT]aiv — took in hand. 
 TO irpwTov — i.e., before his recall. The digression containing the reasons for 
 this recall extends to the close of ch, 1 30. KaW0€TO — stored up as a deposit, 
 
 cf. i. 33. TT) TTpoTcp^ irapov<rCqi — * on his first approach thither,' 
 
 not * prajsentia,' Bl. But it is not easy to see why. I should tr. ' on the first 
 occasion of his beiny there,' and such is the force of the word. Soph. Elect, v. 
 540, and Eur. Hec. v. 227. Jelf classifies this as a local dative, denoting the 
 place where the action of the verb occurs. See § 605. irpo<rf|KovT€S — 
 
 Connexions of the King, * Ajfines the participle almost becoming a noun. 
 |v7Y€V€is — ^relatives by consanguinity,' though sometimes used generically of 
 those who were not so. Cf. with Popp. Cic. pro. Sext. Rose, § 96, * propinqui, 
 cognatique.' Cfesar, Bell. Gall. i. 11, *necessarii et consanguinei,' Tac. JJist. 
 iii. 34, 'propinqui adfinesque.' ol is omitted, or enclosed in 
 
 brackets by the best editors. ToyyvXov. Gongylus, says T. K. A., 
 
 quoting an American edition, settled in Mysia after the death of Pausanias, 
 where the king gave him several towns, Xenophon, on his arrival in Mysia 
 with the Cyreans, found his widow still living B.C. 399. 
 
 (c.) Sopl kXiitv — 'the captives of his spear.' A poetic, and, probably, archaic 
 phrase retained from the language of an early period. -yvtofffiv 
 
 iroioi)|iai — [purpose — lam intending. Note the present tense. Tliis change from 
 the third person to the first is not now uncommon in the epistolary effusions of 
 the uneducated. In Greek it seems to have been less vulgar, cf. Xen. \IItll. v. 
 I. 3r. 'Apra^^p^rjs /SacrtXeus vofii^ei SiKaLov . . . tovtois iyui iroXf/jL-qau}. The de- 
 monstrative Tovcrde is used in reference to the time when the king would receive 
 the letter — * these prisoners before you.' <r\ dp^orKcu Elsewhere, 
 
 says Popp., Thucyd. always connects a dative with this verb in the active 
 voice. He has also used the passive dp^aKeaOai Tivt, ch. 119 and ii. 68, 
 Aristoph, Plat. v. 353. tovs XcJ^ovs— * what we shall have to say.* 
 
 Chapter CXXIX.— (a.) 'Aprdpatos. Most probably the same so often 
 mentioned by Herodotus, cf. vii. 66 ; viii. 126. ri\v tc Aao-icvXiTiv 
 
 K. T. X. This Satrapy was so called from a small town on the river Jihyndacus ; 
 it comprehended the cities of Bithyuia and Paphlagonia, from the shores of the 
 
 Hellespont along those of the Euxine. This was, says Am., the province of 
 which Pharnabazus was afterwards Satrap. He cf. Herod, iii. 90. Xen. Hell. 
 iv. I, § 15. The particle re, says Kriig., stands here as though avTeTerideL 
 did not follow. Similar anacoloutha are found iii. 36, 2 ; vii. 14, 2. 
 
 (6.) dvT€ir€Ti0€i — entrusted to his care as an answer. This verb contains 
 within it, by a sort of Zeugma, the government of irpdccr^iv a little further 
 on. r^jv <r<|>pa'Yt8a — the royal signet. The Schol. explains, i) 
 
 (T(ppayU rov UepaQv /3a<rtX^a;$ fixe, Kara fih rivas rrjv jSaaiX^ws dnova, Kara bh 
 Tivas TT)v Yivpov rov trpthrov j3a<rtX^a;s avrdv, Kara 5^ rivas rov Aapeiov tinrov, 5t 
 6v ■xjiip-aTLffOLVTa i^aaiXevaev. In this case probably the seal impression on the 
 letter is meant. Popp. cf. Xen. Hist. Orcec. vii. i. 39. 
 
 (c.) Twv dvSpdiv. The objective gen. after evepyeaia. The word Kclrai, as 
 well as some of its cognates, graphically denotes ' lying up in store.' 
 dvd"ypairTOs. The common word in such cases, because probably the name 
 was written up upon some pillar and exposed to public view. The passage of 
 Herod., to which all editors refer, is the best commentary. ^vXaKos evepyiTT}^ 
 paffiXio^ dveypdipr)- ol 5^ evepy^rai paaiXios dpoffdyyai KaXeoprai lUpattXTL viii. 
 85. Kriig. refers to Xenophon, irepi irpos. iii. n. K€K«Xv<r9a). 
 
 Cogita ri tDv ifioi inriaxvv- Popp. The perfect imperative implies something 
 different from the present. The latter would mean— (/o not allow any impedi- 
 ment to be offered, lit. let it not be in a state of hindrance; but the first is, do not 
 allow any impediment which has been offered to prevent it; lit. let it not have 
 been hindered. I make this remark because erroneous explanations have been 
 given. dpYvpov. Pausanias was said to have received 500 talents 
 
 in gold. i-m^^a.^ past tense in reference to the time of the receipt 
 
 of the letter. So too always the Latins ' dabam.' The younger student must 
 notice this, as we always make the time of our own wnting the standard of 
 tense. Is anything indicated by this difference between the ancient and modern 
 practice ? 
 
 Chapter CXXX.— (a.) rd Ypdjijiaro. As the Latin litcrce, 'a letter.* 
 d|Cw}jLa is a verbal substantive with passive meaning, and takes a verbal con- 
 struction being followed by virb. Krug. cf. vi. 15, and dpxn ii- 65. rifi-q. 
 Xen. Cyrop. iii. 3, 2, and ddvaros Plat. Reji. 620 a. Ka0eorTT]K<jTi, 
 
 for the more usual KaOcoTWTi, cf. i. 98, Eur. Uel. 438, &c. Krug. 
 o-Kruas MrjSiKds. Kriig. doul)t8 whether this refers to the Caftan, Kdvdvs, 
 which he imagines would have been described by ffToXr}. See his note Xen. 
 Anab. i. 1, 27. 
 
 (6.) TpaiT^tav. Just as we say he kept an expensive table, so here the word 
 does not mean merely the thing itself, but the luxurious living. Remark the 
 mid. voice exercising its force in TraperideTO. KaTc'xetv t^v 8iavoiav— 
 
 keep under, i.e., conceal his intention. ^paxi(T\.— trifling, as 
 
 often. "YV«|Jixi is to be connected with ^fieXXe—was in pjurpose about to 
 
 do, i.e., was purposed to do. 8v(rrrp(J<ro8os. This adjective 
 
 graphically expresses the pride of a tyrant who would admit no one to his 
 pre8ence-c/j>"cu/« of access. Kriig. cf. Xen. Agesil. ix. 2, and Zvairpb<nro^ 
 Iph. in Aul. 345. Tfi dpYg-here evidently in the general sense. 
 
 So our word ' temper' has a general sense, and a special acceptation as 'anger,' 
 
135 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book I. 
 
 Chap. 133.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 ^^7 
 
 cf. ch. 140. As might have been anticipated, the former meaning is found 
 more frequently in an earlier stage of the language, e.g., buirnpaTo avr^wu 
 T^s dydpayadirji Kal Trjs dpyiji. Her. vi. 128 and i. 73, dpyijv ovk &Kpos. Krug. 
 quotes Simonides apud Stobaeum, 73. 61. So also KvH'^^ffffi Kodovpoi% cheXos 
 dpyifiv, Hes. Op. 302. Accordingly we have the word in the plural to denote 
 tempers, animi affectus iii. 82, and viii. 83. Elsewhere it is scarcely found 
 (among later writers at any rate) in this sense. 
 
 Chapter CXXXI. — (a.) rh irpurov —-' as well the first time' See 
 ^^- 95. ^KiroXiopKTi0€£s. Here the preposition denotes the com- 
 
 pletion of the act, and therefore the word is equivalent to r^ woXiopKlgi 
 iK^XTjdels. Tpwds as an adjective. So 'EXXaj vi. 62 : 'Ids iv. 61 ; 
 
 Ilepalt i. 138; Kriig. irpd<r<rwv l<ry\yy(kiTo was announced as 
 
 intriguing, cf. iii. ifi; iv. 25. o-kvtolXtiv. See L. and S. Lex., 
 
 or Dictionary/ of Antiquities. It has always seemed to me a rude expedient, 
 for by trying staves of different thickness, surely an enemy into whose hands 
 the dispatch had fallen might easily find out the key to the writing. Probably 
 there was some mechanism connected with the staff which none of the accounts 
 describe, and a secret cypher also. The Schol. sensibly remarks,— W 84 rts 
 eiTToi, Kal TTws elxci' 6 Uavffavias tj]v (jKVTdXijv, \dOpa ttjs irdXcws i^e\di::v; prjT^ov 
 6ti iirb rijt 'irpJ}TT}s arpaTrryias elxe irju CKVTaX-qv. tov K^pvKOS ^^ 
 
 X€Circo-0au. This does not, I think, mean, ' imer to he out of the herald's sight,' 
 but not to stay behind him, to accompany him to Sparta. diroX^iir^aeai. is, as 
 Kriig. remarks, more common in this sense. ^<nriirT€t vtrh. The 
 
 neuter with a passive force has the passive construction. Jelf § 359, 3. 
 
 {b.) rhv Pao-iX^a. He was, more properly speaking, (TrtrpoTros'or regent, 
 cf. ne.\t chapter, though in this capacity he acted for the king. ri,i-nv ^xovtol. 
 Arist. calls him king, vii. 13. 13. 8iaTrpa4dji€vos ^5fjX0c— Ae got 
 
 out bij settling the affair, compromising it mth the magistrates. So I think the 
 prep. did. signifies; the simple irpa^dfieuos would be, by scheming, or in- 
 triguing. Ka0C<rTTio-iv K. r. \. — surrenders himself to take his 
 '^^"^' "^^P^ ^^^ov «X^YX"v— a somewhat unusual phrase, but, as 
 Popp. remarks, it is proved to be genuine by c. 135. u,j ,Vpt<rKoy iK rQ>v irepl 
 Ilavffaviau iX^yxfj^v. 
 
 Chapter CXXXII.— (a.) ^v iri\iMpovvro—* on the strength of which they 
 were to punish.' Peile, cf. Herod, vii. 139. rriu u,<f>,XLvu rQy rux^ivy ov Upa^ac 
 irvdeadai r,Tii &v 9jv, of what use walls were, or should have been. ' 
 
 ^vi^^o^— First-cousin. Cleombrotus, father of Pausanias, and Leonidas, father 
 of Pleistarchus, were brothers, sons of Anaxandridas by his first wife. 
 Cleomenes was also his son by his second wife. See the story Herod, v. 41 ; 
 ^"^- 7^- ^|«8c8iT]TTiTo— c/f7>aWet/ in his habits of living fn/m the 
 
 national institutions, which would, in accordance with the spirit of the Spartan 
 con.«titution, be regarded as a grave offence. Bl. quotes several instances where 
 later historians have adopted the word. I do not remember its use elsewhere 
 among earlier writers. Notice the double augment which Kriig. amply illus- 
 trates by other cases, chiefly from the orators. rhv rpiiroBa. This 
 was a golden tripod supported by a triple-headed seri)ent in bronze. The history 
 
 of this tripod is curious, and may be seen, Gibbon, Decline and Fall, vol. iii. 
 ch. 17. Mr. Turner, who examined it last year (1853) in Constantinople, where 
 it stands in the Hippodrome, states that it is in excellent preservation, but that 
 the drawing of it in the Dictionary of Gk. and R. Antiquities is not accurate. 
 See Herod, ix. 81. rh ^Xcyctov t<J8€ — Tliis elegiac distich. 
 
 4^€K(>Xa\|/av — erased, lit. beat out, because the erasure was probably effected by 
 hammering the surface of the brass. If we are to believe the Athenian author 
 of the oration Kard. Nea/pas (§ 97), the Lacedaemonians did not do this of their 
 own free-will, but because they were cited by the Plataeans before the 
 Amphictyons. According to the same authority, they were fined 1000 talents, 
 which, when we consider their position in Greece, their services in the war, and 
 the silence of Thucyd., is, as it seems to me, enough to throw discredit on the 
 whole story. Diodorus xi. 33, supplies the improved distich, — 
 
 "EXXaSos evpvxopov aur^pes t6v8' dvidi]Kav, 
 ^ovXodvvT]^ (TTvyepds pvad/xevoi 7r6Xta$. 
 
 Kal TovTO — i.e., the previously- mentioned inscription. 
 
 (6.) vcwTcpdv Ti iroulv — to adoj)t any violent measure. It may also have 
 reference to tlie unprecedented nature of such an act, just as the usual force of 
 the phrase contains a mixed notion of revolution and violence. 
 dv^K€<rTov. D. tr. an extreme measure. It is so, because the word means 
 irreparable, irremediable, like the infliction of capital punishment which 
 cannot be recalled. irwrroTaTos. It is by no means necessary to 
 
 resort to the expedient of making this word passive, ' cui ille fidem maxime 
 habtbat.' Whatever was the conduct of this man after the discovery of his 
 master's treachery, it may have most thoroughly deserved the epithet before it. 
 Upon trplv in the sense * until.* Jelf, § 848, 3. dir^p * Ap-yCXios. 
 
 Argilus was in the peninsula of Chalcidice. Trapairon^o-diicvos — 
 
 having counterfeited the seal, a not unusual force of the prep, in composition, 
 the idea of falsity flowing from the general notion of, beside the true thing, 
 amiss. L. and S. Lex. well compare the force of the particle ver in German 
 compounds, — e.g., * verschworen.' See the instances collected by Blomf. on 
 the word irapdaTj/xov, yEsch. Ag. 754. avrbv ^yyc'ypaixjJL^vov ktcCvciv — 
 
 he found himself written down therein, to kill. Notwitlistanding the difficulties 
 made about this passage, it appears to me no more strange than many others, 
 where an active infinitive is introduced to which a subject must be supplied, 
 instead of a passive infinitive with the old subject, as the idiom of our own 
 language would have required, — e.g. (to take the first instance which presents 
 itself), Trap€xoyT€S T)/xds avToui tii Touiv, where an Englishman would have written 
 €u TOLeiardai. Xen. Amib. ii. 3. 22. Every now and then, the idiom seems 
 more than usually awkward, and the editors are inclined to make a change in 
 the text. Thus, in the converse case. Soph. CEd. Col. 1488. ri 8' div diXois t6 
 tnarbv ifx<pvvai.(f)pevl; it naturally occurs to every reader to substitute €p.<pvaai. 
 Yet there is no MS. authority for the alteration, and I should hesitate to make 
 it. Cf. davfxdaai, ch. 138 c. 
 
 Chapter CXXXIII.— (a.) avTT)K00i — to hear with their own ears. Such 
 positive assurance was necessary in dealing with so powerful an individual. 
 
138 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book I. 
 
 Chap. 1 35.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 139 
 
 Airb irapao-Kcvi^s — ' tx composito,' from a previoualy concerted plan. 
 <rKT|VT]o-a|i€vov K. T. X. — having raised a temporary hovel divided into two apart- 
 ments by a thin partition. Thirlwall. To understand this, we must suppose 
 that the right of sanctuary extended to the T^/xevos, or * sacred precinct' sur- 
 rounding the temple. Suppliants would, either from choice or necessity, very 
 frequently take up their abode there instead of within the walls of the temple 
 itself. Twv Tc ? k^6puiy. This re has been the subject of extended 
 
 controversy. Haack, Popp., and Goll. place it within brackets, and Hartung, 
 in his work on particles, would expunge it altogether. On the other hand, 
 Am. and Peile retain it, explaining its usage according to their peculiar views. 
 For these refer to the note on 'Ayafi^/xvuv re, i. eh. 9. In this place, Arn. 
 says, re signifies no more than also, moreover, in which sense 5^ occurs, and re 
 again, ii. 63 ; vi. 17; vii. 20 ; and being merely a remnant of the ancient 
 verbiage of the language, may be rendered, *t» which he concealed, moreover , 
 some of the Ephori.' Peile (Appendix, Ayamem. p. 383) explains, 't€ shows that 
 both the clauses, rOiv i<p6pu}v ivrds rivas fKpvrpe, Kal Uavaavlov .... i^eretaj, are 
 alike to be connected with €is rjv, so that we might translate, into which he in- 
 troduced some of the Ephws, and hid thini uithin, and Paiisanias also, — i.e., 
 into which also Pausanias, having come to him and asked him the reason of 
 taking sanctuary.' As in the same appendix (p. 382) the ]>rinciple is laid down 
 that ' T€ is altogether retrospective, and herein to be distinguished from Kal, 
 which is always unticipative,' I should myself have imagined that re had not 
 BO much relation to the fact that Pausanias also came into the hut, which is 
 subsequently stated, as to the fact that Argilius was already there, implied in 
 the narration, and that he introduced the Ephors, as well as himself, to hear 
 the conversation of Pausanias. Within which he concealed some of the Ephori 
 too, or the Ephors ivithal. See also Jelf, § 756, obs. irapapdXoiTO. 
 
 The Schol. explanation is irapa^dXujs KaTrjyoprjffeie ij virdiTTus biaKovijaiu. It is 
 probably the Homeric usage, aikv ifir}u xj/vxvv irapa(ia\\opLivo% iroKifxl^civ, and 
 KLvUvip must be supplied, exposed him to risk. 7rpoTi.fiT)9({i]. The 
 
 word certainly appeai-s to me to contain somewhat of irony. So too Kriig., 
 who tr., had the distinguished honour, &c., we might say, * preferred to death.' 
 T. K. A. says it may be simply rendered, thought worthy of being put to death, 
 and quotes ^Trir^Seiov, Xen. Anab. ii. 3, 11. But as that word means ft, and 
 the context there implies plainly, 'fit to be beaten,' I do not see the parallelism. 
 ovK IwvTOs. The common usage of these words, note ch. 28, and cf. L. and S. 
 Lexicon. irCoTiv. Kriig., after Bauer, tr. Verbiirgung, J^ail, or 
 
 security if he would rise and quit the sanctuary. See note d, ch. 126, on 
 dvdffTaffis. On the distinction between Upbv and ri/xevoi, which are, however, 
 often used synonymously, see Arn. Hpievo^,—i.e., T(^iw6fievos, Diis separatus 
 ager, includes the consecrated ground, and all the land of which the usufruct 
 was devoted to the temple. Upov seems to express all the actual buildings, as 
 well the crroai and dwellings of the priests, as the sacred edifice itself. Tims 
 the ipbv is said to be ev Te/iiuei, Herod, ii. 112. Na6s is the great central shrine 
 where the deity himself was supposed to dwell, and where his statue stood. 
 There were, however, smaller vaoi, like the side chapels in Roman Catholic 
 cathedrals. rd irpa<ro-6|JL€va — the transactions then actually going 
 
 on, — i.e., with Xerxes. 
 
 Chapter CXXXIV. — (a.) eirotoOvTO. The true imperfect, describing an 
 action never completed — were for arresting, cf. i<nr^v5ovTo, iii. 24, and with 
 Am., ipnadovTo Trap' ovk iKSiSovTos, Herod, i. 68. Iv tt) 68w — in 
 
 the street, a not uncommon use of the word, especially in N. T. 
 &(|>av€i — secret, unseen by the rest. TrpoKara^vyilv— anticipated 
 
 them in taking refuge. 
 
 (6.) oCKT]|ia. Either a chamber attached to the temple itself, or a small 
 house in the sacred precinct. ^vSov 6vTa — ' ichen they knew that he 
 
 was housed.' iv8ov is one of those adverbs which must be regarded as formed 
 from the accusative. They denote, as I have endeavoured to express, not a 
 simply local position as the dative, but motion terminating at a place. 
 diroXaPovTCs — having shut him up within : in this phrase, as in the following 
 one, dTr(i}Ko56iJirj(Tav rds dvpas (with Kriig. cf. rds 68ovs d7roi/co5oyu^<rat, vii. 73), 
 barricaded the doors, the preposition indicates the cutting off all communication 
 from without. Similar is its usage in dTroTftxtTw and its cognates. See i. 64. a. 
 
 (c.) ftio-TTcp d\€v. The general import of this phrase is, forthwith, e.g., 
 iii. 30. It is not, however, improbable that here the primary notion may be 
 intended — *just as he was,' t.e., in the piteous state into which he had fallen. 
 Bl. well supports this sense by Herod, i. 24, pi\l/aL /jllv 4s t7]v ddXaaffav euivrbv, 
 wffirep fixe, ffvv rrj ffKcv^ TrdffTj, where the concluding words explain Cbairep elxe. 
 rhv KatdSav. Strabo explains <nrriKalov ri. Its etymology implies a natural 
 cleft in the earth, such as those which arise from volcanic agency. Similar 
 was the Bdpadpov of which we hear at Athens. l|ipdXX€iv. Kriig. 
 
 governs by ifxiXX-naav, supplying the word a second time to elicdcffav. 
 TrXrio-iov irov — * In the neighbourhood of the Ceadas,' SiS may be understood from 
 fierev^yKiiP oiiirep diridave, Krug. This is, I think, correct, and the transac- 
 tion, notwithstanding all the difficulties made about it, seems tolerably clear. 
 The Delphian god, indignant that a Spartan monarch, and a suppliant of his 
 own, should lie in so ignominious a locality, desires that he should be removed, 
 and buried where he died. He is accordingly entombed, iv T<p irpoT€fi4vi<Tp.aTi, 
 which, I apprehend, nmst mean some edifice at the 'front x)(irt of the r€>€vos 
 —the entrance, or, in scriptural language, the going in. I believe Arn. is right 
 in comparing it to the gateway of the ' close' at Peterborough or Salisbury ; but 
 he asserts too strongly that no burial could have taken place within the sacred 
 l)recincts; this Thirlwall shows from the case of Euchidas, Plat. Hist. 20. 
 Probably the llpoTep-iviafia was chosen as a sort of compromise between their 
 own scruples and the command of the God. That it was a building of some 
 sort, and generally a decorated one, seems clear from Clem. Alex. Paag. iii. 
 2 (quoted by BL), Kara tovs Al-yvirrMv K6<r/xovs, oh vaol Kal irpoirvXaia Tap* 
 auTols Kal vpoTefieulfffjiaTa i^rjcKrjTai. The aTTJXai probably were a double 
 column, with the appearance of the Tables on which the commandments are 
 engraved in churches, Bl. dvSpCavras. Two images or statues of 
 
 Pausanias. They were seen by his namesake in the Chalciacus. See iii. 17. 7. 
 Cf. Diod. II. 45, Popp. The death of Pausanias occurred 01. 76I, or B.C. 
 473. Krug. 
 
 Chapter CXXXV.--(a.) A-yos Kpivavro^^having determined it to be a pol- 
 lution, sc. oi)t6. The noun stands as a sort of predicate, as in the case avTOV 
 
140 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book I. 
 
 iiroirjffev'Aerjvaiov, cf. 109 c. iweiriDriuvro—implirated him in the 
 
 charrje. A very rare word says Bl., which I have only found elsewhere, Plut. 
 Peric. ovs avv€Trr)TiC>vTo tov yirjitafiov. This di<,'re8sion concerning Themistocles 
 continues to ch. 138 inclusively, and may be justified partly by its connexion with 
 the affair of Pausanijvs, and partly by the important influence which Themistocles 
 exercised upon Grecian |)olitics. Roscher, a German writer {Clio, i. p. 359), 
 thinks that these four digressions of Thucyd. on Theseus, Cylon, the Peisis'tra- 
 tidae, and Themistocles, are intended to represent the four principal epochs of 
 Greek history before his time. Probably he had no such artificial notion, and 
 there is no reason to suppose that he would have hesitated to say so if he had 
 meant it. IXt-yxwy. This is explained by Plut. Them. c. 23, <?7rto-To\a/ 
 
 Tiues dvevpedelaai, Kai ypd/ji/xaTa vepl tovtujv cis virorpLav ivi^aXov t6v Offit- 
 (TTOKXia. axTTpaKKTuov. Circiter B. c. 476. Kriig. B. c. 47 1, Clinton and Grote. 
 
 Chapter CXXXVI.— (a.) avrwv sc. rCfv KepKvpaluv implied in KcpKvpap. 
 By the figure Up6s rb arjfiatuofi^uov, J elf, § 379 c. «V€pY^TT]s. 
 
 Either, as Plutarch says, by his friendly mediation in a dispute with Corinth 
 about the Leucadian peninsula, whereby Corcyra obtained the object she con- 
 tended for ; or, as the Schol. says, by dissuading the Greeks from proclaiming 
 as public enemies those states (includizig Corcyra) which had refused to co- 
 operate in repelling the Persian invasion. ^j^tiy avrbv wcrrc dir^ 
 xBi(rda.\.~to keep him so an to become odious to,-^i.e., to keep him, and so [five 
 offence to. For the constructicm of bfMvai, Kriig. quotes il^hkaav ^aaanadiimi, 
 Lys. xiii. 27. t^v i^ircipov— sc. Thesprotia. 
 
 (6.) irpo<rT€ra.y\i.iv(ov—tho,'<e to n-hom the duty hud been assigned. Cf. v. 75 
 and viii. 23. Kara ttvo-tiv— accord in (/ as they learnt by inquiry where 
 
 he was fj<me,—i.e., they regulated their pursuit by the infornuvtion which they 
 received concerning his movements. Cf. 7ri'/<7Tets, ch. 5, and cf. Jelf, § 802, 1, 
 ^"^ ^31, 2. Kara tI diropov. The editors generally understand, 
 
 «>t a great strait, supposing that rt bears the same force as in the expression ri 
 p.kpo%, aliquantum, 'a considerable portion.' This is, I think, very doubtful, 
 and no examples are given. Thiei-sch accordingly, and apparently Krug., 
 would read t6 6.iropov,—i.e., in his difficulty. But may we not suppose thit,' 
 like Charles Edward after Culloden, be passed through many hair-breadth 
 'scapes, and that rt indicates this, 'in one of his perils.' MoXdo-<ru)v. 
 
 Their territory was but small, since, according to Scylax, it only contained fifty 
 stades of sea-board, though broader inland. KaroXvo-at. I ,do not 
 
 think that Am. and others are right in saying that r^v bUv is to be understood. 
 The word is borrowed from Eastern, or at any rate primitive travelling, where 
 the party, always a sort of caravan, broke up for the night to lodge in a khan 
 or caravanserai; and the reference is to unsaddling and unloading the aninuds, 
 &c. Cf. Hom. Od. iv. 28. KaTaXvao/xcv w/ceas 'iinrovs. The word and its 
 cognates are common. After PLat*a was razed to the ground, they made there 
 a KaTayuryiou diaKoaiuu Tro5C}p iram-axv nvKXif) oiKTifiaTa ^xo" »»• 68. The 
 analogous Latin word was * Devertorium.' ttjs YvvaiK<Js. Plut. 
 
 says her name was Pthia. <r4,«v. Because, says Kriig., yvH) is 
 
 the principal subject in the writer's thought, though not grammatically so. 
 
 Chap. 1 3 7.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 341 
 
 Kae^€<r0ai. * So I have given, for Thuc. uses KaOi^civ, but never Kadi^fadaL.* 
 Kriig. loT-Ca— because the shrine of the household gods, and the 
 
 chief seat of domestic life, it was regarded by the ancients with special venera- 
 tion. Cf. Grote, v. p. 384. hr\Kol os Icrriv. Here we have the 
 simple relative in a dependent clause, where, according to the genius of the 
 CJreek language, we should anticipate a dependent interrogative Bam. * Optim^ 
 Gr;ece dicitur olda <T€ 6s el, nori te, qui sis; minus bene vero ovk ol5a tre, 6's et. 
 Uectius 6aTis et, vel etiam Ws cI.' Elma. Med. 1086. Kriig., however, pro- 
 duces instances of 5s after a negative. Her. ii. 121 ; Eur. Jlel. 818. In ch. 
 137, we have the more regular <ppdteL Harts iari, cf. Jelf, § 877, 4. 
 OVK d|iot, as in the parallel case of oj5 (prjfii, the negative passes on to the 
 f»)llowing infinitive. Kriig. cf. ii. 89; iii. 44. avTctircv. 'An 
 application to the Athenians from Admetus for help, was rejected by the advice 
 of Themistocles. Sintenis F\ut. Them. 24.^ Kriig. d<r6ev^o-Tcpos. 
 One MS. exhibits this as a correction for iffdevfarepov, and it must surely be 
 right. The intention of Them, evidently was to work upon the generosity of 
 Admetus, by representing himself, who once was stronger, as now the weaker 
 of the two, and therefore an unfit object for his enmity. The genitive — 6?/ one 
 far weaker than he — would suggest an idea of the weakness of Admetus, which 
 however true, was not likely to have been urged by one seeking for his protec- 
 tion against a powerful enemy. I am therefore surprised to see that T. K. A., 
 after Popp., retains dcdevecrkpov. dirb tov to-ov — on a footing of 
 equality. Cf. i. 77 ; ii. 89. clvai is governed, as Popp. points out by 
 Xf7et, implied in d^io?. 
 
 {c.) xp«^as r{.v6%—had opposed him in the matter of a request or private 
 interest. Some editors supply a preposition, but Kriig. has shown that ivavn- 
 oixrdai governs a genitive, from Xen. Anab. vii. 6, 5. 3.pa firj kuI tj/juv ivavrnb- 
 trcrat ttjs aTrayiayris. See Jelf, § 531. He adds that rb belongs to aw^effOai, 
 for the Imman body and its members are mentioned frequently without the 
 article. Plat. Bej). 461 a. This is upon the principle of familiarity with the 
 subject spoken of, already explained, and is, I think, preferable to the arbitrary 
 supposition of Popp. and Goller, that the phrase is for is rb rb ffCofia aJj^eadaL 
 with the second article elided for euphony. We too say * body and goods.' In 
 addition to the words mentioned, ch. 8 a, cf. crTroi'Sds Xveiv passim, and Ta<pds 
 Toi€i(r6aiii. 2, 4. ]Uyi.irTov, — i.e., among the Molossians. All 
 
 etliters quote Plut. Themist. 24. ravTrjv fieyiffTrjv /cat /xdprjv cxebbv dvavripp-qTov 
 ijyovfiiuuv iKeffiav tujv ^loXbaauv. 
 
 Chapter CXXXVII. — (a.) t^v cWpav BoXdo-o-av. The iEgean. 
 ir(iXi — by land. 'AXc|dv8pov. Tenth King of Macedon. 
 
 KaTa4>^p€Tai — 'carried down by the force of the tempest.' Cf. iv. 120, and note, 
 Sheppard's Theophr. Pref. p. 51. Nd|ov. Refer to ch. 98. t?|v 
 
 do-(|>aXc£av — The safety required. We should perhaps write Uhe only means 
 of safety consisted in, <t*c.' H'CXP^ irXovs yivryrai. — 'till a favourable 
 
 time for sailing arise,' for such is the meaning of irXovs. So Xen. Anab. v. 9, 
 33. (lis aH'pLov, idv tXovs ^ (on the usage of p.€XP^ with a verb, cf. Jelf, § 
 841, 5), dpo^bfxepoi, where see Kriig. 's note. dirop-v^o-co-dai 
 
142 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book I. 
 
 Xapiv — icould remember it to him with fitting gratitude. Popp. quotes Eur. 
 Ale. V. 299. vvv Tu!v8' dTr6fJLvr]ffai x^P"'- I^riig., however, conjectures that 
 Thuc. wrote airoixefxvqfffcdai, for the future in the text is not Attic. 
 
 (6.) diroo-oXeva-as. The verb seems to imply hjing out from the land in the 
 open sea. Cf. iii. 7. a, and fierewpovi dTrotraXei^etv, Dem. 50. 2?. Kriig. (juotcs 
 Dem. 1. 12 (1213, 24), dvayKaiov ^v iir dyKvpai diroaaXeveiv TT]P viJKTa fjL€Tfu:- 
 povs. The translation of Nepos is, ' in salo narem tenuit in ancoHa.' 
 lOepdirrucrc. Portus' version is liberaliter prosequi. Dale's simply 'reicarded.* 
 But in the many passages where Tbucydides uses the word, something of con- 
 tinuous action is ever im[)lied. virc|cKctTO — cf. vire^^devro i. 89. It 
 was said that property of liis to the amount of one hundred talents was con- 
 fiscated at Athens. vcoxrT^. According to Kriig.'s computation, 
 Olymp. 761, B.C. 473, but the date is generally given B.C. 465 or 466. lie 
 also cf. vcuctI ^xo»^a iii. 30. See Thiersch, Gr. § 289. 
 
 (c.) 48-^Xov T| "Ypacj)-!]. Tlie question concerning the real authorship of this 
 letter is, I imagine, the same as that respecting the speeches, which see ch. 
 22. a, though the term id-qXov certainly does look as if Thuc. professed to quote 
 the very words. Eemark thatfirt here introduces thedirecta oratio. Cf. v. 10; 
 viii. 53 ; and Jelf, § 80:, 6. €V tw d(r4>aXci. . . . ^iriKivSvvu). 
 
 This is the common idiom of the neuter adjective with an article standing for a 
 substantive. But it is rather varied, inasmuch as we have two adjectives with 
 one article, which, in accordance with Granville Sharp's canon (ch. 18 a), refer 
 to the same subject; tr., in that state of things which was secure for me, but 
 perilous for him. Popp. remarks, ' potuit quidem scribi iu t<^ da<pa\(i ixkv 
 iyu},' but this would have required a repetition of the article in the second 
 clause. irdXiv t|— by a sort of inversion, say the editors, for 
 
 ^ irdXiJ'. But see i. 82 ; ii. 18. -ypdxl/as. This stands thus, because 
 
 ibriXov i] ypa^ri must be considered equivalent to (iriareiXfu 6 QeixtaTOKXrjs. 
 Popp. Thucydides as frequently falls into an anacoluthon, and writes as if he 
 thought his sentence had been cast into a form different from that which he 
 really gave to it. rfis dvaxwp^<r«us. The question is, does this 
 
 refer to the message sent before the battle of Salamis, informing the king of 
 the pretended intention of the Greeks to escai)e ; or to the message sent after 
 the battle, warning him to retreat without delay. The first message, if ever 
 sent, must surely from its disiistrous issue have rendered the sender an object 
 of suspicion ; neither under such circumstances could ITiemistocles have de- 
 clared himself in a state of security {ev r<^ da^ctXet) while the king was in a 
 state of peril. The message after the battle must therefore be meant by these 
 words; yet Herod, (viii. no) clearly states that this message was sent from 
 Andros, and not from Salamis. Still, I would rather suppose with Am. that 
 Thucyd. is here guilty of slight oversight, than refer the words to the first 
 message with Popp. and Haack. Tlnrlwall, vol. ii. p. 430, agrees with 
 Arnold. irpoa-ciroi-^o-aTO — took to himself. t^v ov- 
 
 -8idXvo-iv. The negative particle so combines with the noun as to make one 
 negative term. See the note on ov-fi4ya\a, ch. i, and cf. ij ov-irepiTeixiffis iii. 
 95. 77 ovK'i^ovffla v. 50, and Jelf, § 745, 5. <H|v <|)tXCav— for the 
 
 objective genitive ; cf. ch. 33, note. 
 
 Chap. 1 3 8.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 H3 
 
 Chapter CXXXVIII.— (a.) U(k€vt. This, though the reading of the 
 best MSS. is scarcely defensible, for it is difficult to see how any sense can be 
 given to iKfXeve, which would justify such a variation of tense. This is not so 
 with the other cases where an imperfect is coupled to an aorist, — e.g., in 
 Herodotus, for there the liveliness of the narration accounts for the imperfect, the 
 subject of the verb being vividly brought forward, and represented as engaged in 
 action. But, as Am. remarks, this would be altogether out of place in the 
 very calm and sober style of Thucydides. I should therefore prefer reading 
 ^K^Xevae, but if the imperfect stands, tr., 'The king icas surprised at his scheme 
 {what passed through his thoughts), and proceeded to bid him, <L'C.' 
 6<ra c8vvdT0 Karcvd-qo-c — mastered as much of the language as he could. Bl. 
 says this is a very unusual use of KaTavo^u. I do not myself see that it is 
 unusual to employ the word for such an exercise of the understanding faculty 
 as that implied here; cf. ch. 126, note a. The exaggeration of the later 
 writers is well illustrated by the extravagant proficiency in the Persian tongue 
 ascribed by Nepos to Themistocles. *AX€^dv8pov. Successor of 
 
 Amyntas the first, father and predecessor of Perdiccas. 
 
 {b.) Tov EXXt]vi.koO. a species of attraction, says Popp., for Kal t7]u 
 iXirida ijv vireTiOei avT(f, SovXibaeiv rb 'EXXt]vik6v. Kriig. makes SovXuaeiv 
 depend upon iXvida, — i.e., VTrerldei aurc^ toO 'EXXtjulkou iXirlda dovXibcretv. Cf. 
 Jelf, § 898 b, who classes this under 'contracted sentences.' ' When an infinitive 
 or ]>article stands in the same sentence with some other verbum infinitum, the 
 substantive which properly depends upon the infin, or part, is frequently made 
 to depend upon the verbum finitum, so that it is in the case required 
 thereby.* jidXio-ra Zk k. t. X. — but especially from his wisdom 
 
 which he had established by giving proof ; lit., from the b y-giving-of- proof - 
 •established reputation for wisdom. 
 
 {c.) PcPawJraTa 8t]. The particle strengthens the superlative, cf. ch. 
 23 b; tr., one who most indisputably crhibited strength of natural genius. 
 8ta<|>€p<JvTws Ti. The ri here as often * is aliquantum,' in no small degree more 
 than any other man remarkably deserving to receive admiration. For dav/xdaai. 
 active infin., see ch. 132, note b. Jelf, § 667, 3. Is avr6 — with 
 
 reference to it, though (pvaews has gone before ; cf. 22 a. ovtc 
 
 iTpop.a6uv K. T. X. — ivithout having acquired anything by previous studies to con- 
 tri/nitc to it, nor by subsequent studies to add to it ; this administration was the 
 fruit of natural genius not formed by previous or increased by subsequent 
 study. Twv T€ irapaxptj^a k. t. X. Of what immediate crpedience 
 
 required, when the opportunity for council was most brief he was of all men the 
 ablest judge; and of future events the best conjecturer, with the most far-reaching 
 view of whcU was going to happen. This seems to me the best way of taking 
 tlie sentence, because it best preserves the balance of the clauses, after which 
 Thuc. was ever straining, though occasionally at the expense of a false or im- 
 perfect antithesis. Kriig. makes tCiv fxeXXbpTUiv dependent upon irri irXelaTov; 
 but ifVhuc. meant tuju irapaxpw°' ^o ^6 governed by KpariaTos yvibfiuv, I am 
 nearly' sure that he also meant tCiv ixeXXbvruv to be governed by Apiffros 
 ilKaarA. The noun e/^acrr^s is very unusual, and I have therefore rendered it 
 by onelwhich is unusual also; but why either should be so, is not easy to 
 explaini 
 
144 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book I. 
 
 Chap. 140.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 (d.) ji€Ta x«^pas Ttxoi— happen to have in hand, lit. between his hands. 
 Krug. cf. Herod, vii. 16. iu x^P<tIv ^x« means the same thing, and is of more 
 frequent occurrence. ^^Ti7^ara(r0ai-<o interpret, an ^^7777^775 was 
 
 one who went over words first, which were subsequently repeated by his 
 hearers. The connexion with the primary meaning of 'leading the way,' and 
 the tertiary one of 'expounding' are obvious, and may be easily illustrated by 
 consulting L. and S. Lex. in voce. Kpivai iKavais ovk aTrVjXXaKTo— 
 
 he u-as not icithout the power to pass a competent judgment on. ovk air., like ovk 
 &P€v,' 'non sine,' and many other such phrases, is not the less positivJ, though 
 purposely qualified in form ; Kpiuai, a common sense judgment, was always 
 says Am., distinguished by the Greeks from full theoretical or practical know- 
 ledge. It was obviously shared by a much larger mass of men, and upon this 
 pnnciple, he adds, the people at large were competent judges of the conduct 
 of their magistrates. See ii. 40, ijrot KpLvofx^v ye k. r. \. \uXhr]i 
 
 ppaxvTTiTt. Am. tr. 'with acquired leaminrj most scanty,' hxs meaninfj ])robably 
 is correct, but the woi'ds might mislead the younger student, as the lit. tr is 
 with scantiness, or brevity of practice, where fieX^rv, I think, refers to the 
 preparation usually made by public speakers, so *exercitatio,' Cic. de Of. i. 
 
 '^- , , ovTo<rx€8tdt€iv TO, Biovra—to extemporize, or devise at a 
 
 moment's notice what was wanted. 
 
 {e.) vocnfjo-as. The collocation is peculiar and emphatic, ' 'twas by disease 
 that he died,' because the contrary had been reported, cf. Plut. Them. 31, and 
 Arist. Eq. V. 83. As early as the time of the latter the story was prevalent 
 that he died from drinking bulls' blood at a sacrifice, or periiaps a poison so 
 called. Cic. Brutus, c. 1 1, rightly ascribes the legend to a desire ' mortem 
 (ejus) tragicd et rhetoric^ ornare.' MayvTio-iav ^\v dprov. The 
 
 predicate is dproy as in those cases already noticed, ch. 109, 134. The practice 
 of assigning certain cities to particular persons, or rather the taxes which these 
 cities paid, is one well known, and as Bl. observes, dates from remote antiquity 
 vestiges of it being found in Homer, where Agamemnon offers to Achilles, a^ 
 the price of reconciliation, seven cities, each possessing some peculiar excellence 
 of. Herod, ii. 98, Xen. Anab. i. 4, 9. Athen. 534 d, records the cities assigned 
 to Alcibiades, whenever he went abroad, for his tent, &c. 'The custom ' Bl 
 writes, 'continues to the present times in the east, Athens having 'been 
 assigned to the Sultana for pin money, and Jerusalem to the concubines for a 
 similar use.' Mr. Grote says, ' I doubt Dr. A.'s statements about the land tax 
 rent. I do not think it was a tenth or fifth of the pi-oduce of the feoil in 
 these districts which was granted to niemistocles. but the portion of reeal 
 revenue or tribute levied in them. The Persian kings did not t^tke the trouble 
 to assess and collect the tribute ; they probably left that to the inhabitants 
 themselves, provided the sum total were duly paid.' Grote vol iv p 386 
 a<nov governed 6ara, not oi TpoavKoyr,,. ov ^dp ii^v e'xplains'the 
 
 reason of Kp6(f>a 'AdvyaiojK The law is mentioned by Xen. Bell i vii ii 
 /card, TovTou rbu u6p.ou-6s iariv i^i roi, UpoavXois Kal irpoddrais. . . . ' uh Tad>r,vai 
 iv ry Attlk^. ^ ' 
 
 Chapter CXX\IX.-(a.) Aa«8atfuSv«i. The narrative ia rcumed from 
 " ■ '-"• irpodXcYov— Kar«£d litem, or pMidt/ declared to Ihem. 
 
 H5 
 
 On the affair of Megara cf. ch. 67. ImKoXovvr., t^|v «ir.pvao-fav 
 
 endowed. The noun seems nearly equivalent to the simple 4pya^ia, thouffh there 
 may be some latent force in the preposition ; perhaps-^^^e/rfl,^ t/eir J la,Tol 
 over On the construction cf. Jelf, § 568. I certainly agree with Goll.(cf cl Ts a) 
 that the article t,5 before dopl^rov implies that the land described by t i, distinct 
 
 to the Eleusmian goddesses, for the distance would certainly be great but it 
 may have been dedicated in some other way. The dop,.r<,; was^obab^y so 
 left from a poht.cal rather than a religious object, since the conflicting claims of 
 nuhviduals, ,f any were aUowc.1 to appropriate border land, would be veir like", 
 to .nvolv^ t ,e,r respective states in warfare. Am. remarks, that on similar 
 common land the Israelites fed their flocks without disturbance, but when thev 
 wanted a piece of ground for a burial place (a j^rmanent possession), a regular 
 .sale on the part of the people in occupation was necessary 
 avSpairdW. It has been supposed that aUusion is made to the slaves of 
 Aspasia, cf Arist. Achar. v. 525. rHv &i,»rrau4v^v Remark 
 
 th^pre^nt participle, which implies a process going on~,he daves as they kept 
 (wsconding. -^ ^ 
 
 (b.) T«v TcXcvraCwv. ' Ambassadors with an ultimatum, ' as we should 
 
 ^^[ r -, . "^^ '^^^'">*' ^^^^"^'^^ P'^^^ to continue, or it may be, thev 
 WLshfor the existence of the peace, which aU desire, or, 'is the subject of ne^ro- 
 tiation,' or something similar implied. ^viijias €TrotovvTo. KrL 
 
 we 1 gives the general sense, 'to lay matters before a person for deliberation' 
 and so D. 'proposed the subject for consideration.' We may however remark 
 that the words lit. mean 'proposed to themselves judr/ments,' i.e., the formation 
 of judgments: then subsequently ycyu6f.euoc rah y.d,p.acs is, ' coinino to be in 
 their judgments.' The younger student will notice how weU this illustrates the 
 distinction between 7t7voM^»'ot and 6vTe,, the former denotes the process of 
 formmg the opinion, the latter only states that persons are of such an 
 opimon T.K. A. has, yiyvbuevoi, deciding; prop, 'becoming, ranging 
 themselves, from which I do not see what is to be leamt. l^* 
 
 Aji^KiTcpa-'/or both views of the case, i.e., for and against.' The whole 
 phraseology is certainly very intelligible, but Bl. remarks that he only knows 
 one other example, and that an evident imitation of the present passage, Dio 
 Cass., p. 65, iv dfKpdrepa rats yvcofiais yeuSfjLevai. &ira|— ' once for all ' 
 
 cf. .Xirat Oui^ffKovac. Od. xii. 22, and ' semel' in Latin. Bentl. Hor. Sat ii 8 24 
 Jude £p. V. 3. Hebrews ix. 27. \4y,,v Kal 7rpdo-<r€iv denotes oratorical 
 
 and administrative ability. Niebuhr, Vortrag. iiber Alte. Gesch. ii. 13, remarks 
 that It was only in the time of Pericles that war and the forum had a real con- 
 nexion. The old statesmen were of necessity generals, and vice versd. But Demo- 
 sthenes saw no real service in the field ; while on the other hand Iphicrates was 
 a most meffecuve speaker in the ecclesia, and Chabrias did not speak at all. 
 
 Chapter CXL.— (a.) txo\Lo.}.~' hold to; from the physical image of a 
 thing or person clinging to an object ; cf. Eur. Hec. v. 402, Scrota KLcab, 5pv6, 
 5ru,s Tijad' ^op,ai, cf. viii. 81. Jelf, § 536. From this notion of holding on 
 to that which is beside you comes the somewhat singular adverbial use of 
 
}^(j 
 
 NOTKS ON TIIIXVDIDKS. 
 
 [I'OOK I. 
 
 ^X'S/ifiP", 'next in order,' cf. Ixoyilvov tJ/j *Po5o7rf)?, n. 9^1, an<l Aristotio passim. 
 ('f. *C'*mlitoiis Selcuci rctiiicna,' T:ic. Ann. vi. 42. ^P"Yli — ' r.iritrincnt of 
 
 fcdiuff,' * temper,* cf. cli. 1 30 b. — ' wen arc not ]tersu<ulcd to inulertake a wur, and 
 actualhj eur/ar/e in if, iti ejurtly the same temper,* i.e., <lo not provpcutc it with 
 the same zeal and excitciiunt which they showtnl when first iiwhicrtl toen^age in 
 it. On wpdaaovTas, cf. Jelf, § 752, r. irpbs 8< rds k. t. X. Jhtt that, 
 
 just as circumstaitceH ehnvt/e, t/iof efinvi/e their mtfions aho. rd? ^ift<popdi — 
 qiiie accidcrint, plainly takes in both good and evil accidents, as (^MTj). J\/r. 
 V. 44, and elsewhere. 6p.ota Kal irapa-rrXfio-ia — * fimi/ar and 
 
 comi)uj very near to ivhat I adrlacd l>rfore,' tovs dva-n-dCo^^vovs — 
 
 those ii.ko allow themselves to be jumuaded. toIs koivt] Sd^acriv 
 
 poT]0€vv — to come to the rescue of the common resolves, i.e., wlien there is any 
 ditticuity in carrying them out, or when their policy is assailed — or neither, i.e., not 
 either, should j/ou even succeed, to clai m a share in the visdom vhich drvistdthem. 
 
 {b.) ^v8€\€Tat, as in ch. 124 h. The iuridentsto which cirrumsftmrf.i ffire rise 
 arc wont to take a course which ran be aitliltir dttermincd{ap.aOC)^,nut tnbc nia.ntered 
 by study) as the scheme i of jncn. I do not like to translate, as all the editors 
 do — ^u/j.(popas by results, for the notion of *a fixed result' is the one most 
 entirely foreign to the word, yet it is didictdt to do without it; al ^vfitpopal tCi/ 
 Trpayi-aTiov are ' the indeterminate incidents which niay be expected to occur in a 
 course of human transactions.* 'I'lic (piestion is, what <loes -yd/) give the reason 
 for- Giill. supposes that it contains the reason why those who rashly change 
 their mind, even should things turn out well, ought not to claim for themselves 
 the praise of prudence. But it is more consonant with the general course of 
 the aigument, and the tone of thought, to say, as I'uppo, that ydp gives the 
 reason why even wcll-j)lanncd Bchemes sometimes fail of meeting with a huc- 
 cessiul issue. That this refers rather to what is un<lerstood than expressed, 
 will not be any dilUculty to one familiar with the style of Thucydidcs. 
 816170 KaC — which is the reason too why we are wont to lay at Fortune's door 
 all that chances to fall out contrary to calculation. aiTiacOai — mav not 
 have the grave sense of accuse, as lU. remarks, still I hold that it in some 
 measure partakes of such a sense; just as we arc always saying 'to blame 
 Fortune.' 
 
 {c.) 8iKas 8i8dvai Kal 8€X€(r0ai. The usual tenns to denote a legal settle- 
 ment, though, as Topp. points out, it is clear, from ch. 28 and v, 79, that arbi- 
 tration by some friendly city, if other means failed, is included in the formula. 
 i'X^CLV d ^xo|X€V. A clear recognition in ancient diplomacy of the principle of 
 'uti possidetis,* or 'status quo ante.' See also i v. 65. Kal tiriTdo-o-ovrts 
 
 — and now they come forward in the character of persons dietatin;/, «{c. 151. 
 quotes Traadfievoi ^Trtracraf, fjive your orders nhen yon are our ma.offr, but not 
 before. Theoc. Jd. xv. v. 90. fiircp is, according to Popp., the ob- 
 
 ject of TrpoijxovTai — ' u-hich they especially hold forth as a pvrte.rt,' and this cer- 
 tainly ^eems most natural, the construction being that sort of attraction found 
 in such sentences as 6 dvi)p 6v olada 6ti JfKOiv. Kriig. denies that such attrac- 
 tion is found before a particle which denotes a condition, as el here, and therefore 
 makes fiTrrp the subject of /ca^at/)c<?€i7;. |ir^8' ^v vjiiv ovtois viroXf-rrqo-^t — 
 
 nor leave behind in your own minds a reproach; i.e., nor allow any feeling of 
 flelf-reproach to linger in your minds. 
 
 S 
 
 ClIAI'. 14 I. J 
 
 KOTi:s ox THL'CVDIDKS. 
 
 H7 
 
 {d.) rh Ppaxv ti toOto. 7V«/'« llttlr tviJJr, as they call if, involves the whole 
 confirmation and test of your purjto.-ic, or carries with it the whole coufrminij an 
 tesliny of your resolution. \W si-em to have here a sort of Oarfpov irpbrfpov, as 
 the grannnarians call it — inasmuch as the 'confirmation' mustf(»llow the 'test- 
 ing,' and not vice vers;!. 'I'liis is, 1 think, more correct than to say, with 131., 
 that ' ^(fialuaiv Kal irdpap is an hen<lia<lys to signily * proof or trial.* 
 ^■TriTax0rj<r«r0€ — i.e., rovro lwiTa\Oi)aiTai. vpuv. Our own ordinary idiom coin- 
 cides— y<r will be ordered some tfreafrv fhiny. Cf. ii. 7. On dWo ti, Jelf, § 54s;. 
 3» ^"*i 548 e. dTTio-xvpio-dpttvoi — having met it with decided refusal. 
 
 The dvb, 1 aj>prehend, exerts the sanjo force as in dirbtjtaai':, when lugicaliy 
 opposed Ui KaTd<f>aai%, where, as it is well known, the jirep. denotes the separa- 
 tion in thought of the subject from the jtrcdicate. AVe may mention, in pass- 
 ing, that, from not knowing this, K(»me i^d. have strangely erred in their inter- 
 pretation of p.ip.<pop.ivu)v av KaTa(f>airjv, <Kd. Tyr. v. 503. Compare diroepd- 
 CKovra, lb. v. 484. dirb toO to-ou k.t.X. — to treat yon more upon a 
 
 (/round of c/ualify ; i.e., to come li(-n; as equals, and not as entitled to dictate 
 (iwiTdaaoum). The Kd. vary about KaTaaTrjcraiTe and KaracmjaeTf, of which 
 the former, which has also most MS. authority, is adopted by liekker, 131., and 
 Kriig., the latter by Gtill. and Poppo. The common reading, KaTaaT-qarjTc 
 which would be a sola'cism, seems to point to Karaari^aaiTe, of which J31. re- 
 marks, * it may be rendered 'planum ipsis eflicietis,' as infra, ii. 42, rijif 
 eOXo-^lau <pay(pav KaOiaTas.* 
 
 CUAPTKR CXLI.— (a.) avToOcv. D. tr. henceforth; Pop. and Kriig., on 
 these yroundtt. I should rather !*<• inclined to render, forthwith, at omr^ on the 
 nptot, as more conHentaneouH with the etymology ami common use of the word. 
 8iavoTj0T^TC ' make up your minds,' usually constructed with an infinitive. But 
 that it should here be also followed by ei^ovTis is defensible upon the ground 
 that it follows the anah.gy of yiyi'u'aKU, hOvpLOvpiai k.t.X. Knig. quotes fppov- 
 Tij"w, Kur. J/cc. 2^(i, pT) yiyfiiffKOiT' Ipoi, ol tovs <pi\ovs /SXarrroiTcj oi> (^>popTl- 
 ffre. In this case, howe>'er, 1 regard (iXdirToyres as agreeing with the subject 
 of the verb in the usual w.ay : who whnt you injure your friends, take no thoui/ht 
 upon the matttr. Kriig. seenjs to forget that (ppovTl^u) has an intransitive force 
 
 and properly means, 'to be in a state of anxiety.' 8iivaTai. 
 
 amounts to the same enslavement. On this use of dui'apai, cf. L. and S. Lrx. 
 and iii. 46. 8{Katwcris. A Thucyd. word, according to JJion, iii. 
 
 82, iv. 86. Kriig. translates a claim, because originally sup[)used to be founded 
 on justice. 6p.o(wv. I agree with Kriig. that contn.versy is here 
 
 unnecessarj-. llic word must be masculine. upb SCKr]s~beforc an 
 
 attempt at judicial arranjcmcnt. linr.—cominy in the shape of a 
 
 command. 
 
 {b.) xd Tov TroX^jiov k.t.X. With re.oj>ect to what is required for carn/ine/ 
 on the jcar, and the resources of both pavtics, that we shall not Jind our means 
 the feebler, I would that you should fed a.ssured, by hcarinrj them in detail. A 
 very intelligilile and pardonable inaccuracy of exi>res3ion, for no confusion can 
 arise, though daOiviaripa is grammatically referred to tCov (Karlpois vnapxbvTuv. 
 ovTovpYoC — liviny by their own labour. We must remember that at Athens all 
 manual labour and artisans' work was performed by slaves. In Sparta, agri- 
 
 V : 
 
 I. <i 
 
 ! 
 
 il 
 
 11 
 
 ; ti , 
 
 I if* ■ 
 
 '^J 
 
 *i*fe* ■'*^i •' 
 
 /^ 
 
i4^S 
 
 NOTES OX TIIUCYDIDF.S. 
 
 [Hook I. 
 
 culture was probably the ofUcc of the Helots. Am. has an instructive note, 
 in which he refers to Xen. (JJconomic. v. 4, tol-? ^^i' airovpyovs 5td tQv x^'-P^^ 
 yv/JLvd^ovffa (^ 7^) /o'xi'*' avToh irpoarlOijfft. * TIk- nuiuhcr of bI.-wcs in Laconia,' 
 he adds, ' was a striking excoptittn to the rest «>f rcloponncsuH. Herod, vi. 137, 
 viii. 137; Athcn. vi. 83; Juv. <S'<t/. xiv. 168.* lip also makes an npjKisite re- 
 ference to ihe ancient JJonian republican heroes, who, as is wril known, tiUed 
 their own land. See on the sulijoct, Ar. Pol. ii. 8, 9. ppax^<*'S — */*^'* ^ ^^"/ 
 ilme.^ im^ipiiv — sc. ttoX^/xous. Their poverty was the cause why they 
 
 made no wars, and the making no wars was the cause of their inexperience. 
 I (c.) irXT]povvT«s — We must, with Pop. and Kriig. again supply TroWd/ctj ^k- 
 
 TT^fiireip d'juavTat. dirb twv auTojv — n. b. not aiTui', but here tA aiTuv, 
 
 their own property. Arnold (quoted by K.) says, that elsewhere Tliuc. prefers 
 ff(pcT^piou — which seems true, ii. -20. irtpiovo-Cai — stock laid hy ; i.e., 
 
 that which is over and above our daily wants. See ch. 2 b. Pericles doubthss 
 meant tliat the tre:isures of tlic Acropolis an<l their otiier siirplus 8t(»rcH shouhl 
 recur to the recollection of his hearers. pCaioi (l(r<|>opa£ — compnlsory 
 
 contributions. Cf. ch. 121. av^xov<riv — uphold. Cf. Soph. Aj. v. '212. 
 
 ((/.) <ru>|x. i\ XP^K- — * in person than in purse.' rh p.iv -mo-rdv. 
 
 Tlie Schol. tells us to place a comma at fi^v, and to explain t6 tQv aufidTuv, 
 (which seems right,) having confidence ahout the one that it may even escape the 
 prnl, hut not fccllnfj security about the other (lit. the other secure) that it trill not 
 ere that he spent; lit. that they shall not S2>cnd it before tiiey get out of the 
 danger. 
 
 (e.) jiT^ TTp?>s o^oCav. The junior stvulent will remark that wc have ^tj here 
 instead of ovk, on account of the hypf)thetical nature of the clause, if it be not 
 an homof/eneous one. Cf. t6 ixi) fivdCjoa, ch. 12 d, and Jelf, § 904. 3- ^,^ - - . 
 Urav — ' sinrc/ but, says Kriig., the ' ZeitbegrifT,* i.e., the * notion of time' lia.«i 
 not vanished. This is well illustrated by our own word irhm, which often 
 retains part of tlie temporal notion, even when signifying 'since.' 
 * p.T|T€ — T€. ' as often * ncc — et.' The negative allVcts both chiuses. 
 PouX€VTT|p£u). * Council-board, or chamber.' This is again a tacit contrast 
 with thg state of things among the Athenians, who had a centralized a<lmini- 
 fltratioii. and were not conqielled to consult their allies when occasions for 
 action arose. to ^<|>' caurdv. This is the reading of the best and 
 
 most numerous ^ISS., and is well nupported by Kriig. from I'orson, J.'nrip. 
 Orcst. V. 13.38, ffdjOrjO' oaov 76 toutt' Ipi, and t6 (ttI ff<f>a.i that, iv. iH. Tr. 
 what concerns himself personally. A few MSS. rea<l rb ^tp' tavrOiv, witii which 
 we may cf. i. 17, t6 i<f lavrCjv. But then there is no tKa<TTo% in that pajisage. 
 
 (/.) 4>d£ipai. The verb here, as often, denotes an extravagant and useless 
 expenditure. xpdvioi |uviovT€s. * Jieiny Inng in coming totjrther.' 
 
 kv Ppaxet p.opfb> — sc. XP^^^^t understood from XP^^''^'-- Ihis, the common and 
 obvious way of taking the jtassage, is, I think, better than Kriig. *s, wliosupplics 
 T^j ^vvb^ov fr. ^vvlovrei. The antithesis is between the length of the time spent 
 in getting the council togetiier, and the very short time during which at best 
 they can deliberate : to this is appended another antithetical n<jtion, i.e., tho 
 greater amount of time which they spend upon their own interests. Put does 
 Tw rrXiovi mean, the greater part of that time which they have for deliberation ; 
 or, the greater part of their time during uhich they are unable to deliberate f 
 
 \ 
 
 t 
 
 ,i 
 
 ClIAP. 142.] 
 
 NOTES ON TllUCYDlDES. 
 
 149 
 
 ^api T^v cavToO ijxcXcCav. Arn. cleverly adduces the English vulgarism, 
 along of his oicn neglect-i.e., owing to his own neglect. The cases are probably 
 T>arallel, though we still reciuire an explanation of the way m winch this causal 
 force of the prep, arises. It may be that the idea of close proxindty nnphes that of 
 dependence. Am. <,uoteH Den.. Phd. ., p. 4.^. oeO^ 7^/^ ouros TrapA r^^ a.TOU 
 l>u,^rju TO(TOuro. Urj^ivrat, to which a.ld A>. ad Cor. i. xn. 15, 16. Cf. L. and 
 S. Lex., and note on napa noXv, ch. 29 c. Cf. Jelf, § 67, ni. 3 c. 
 (ririp lavTov. It certainly seen.s to me that, according to the sense, fiXXos be- 
 comes the principal subject, and that therefore we n.ay tr. that others as wdl 
 care to lool- out for thrir own interest. If, however, it be necessary to reler 
 eavTod to the strict grammatical subject, we must, with Kriig., tr. in suo loco, 
 Un his stead ' "<rT€ Toi airci K.r.\.-owing to this same notion 
 
 (ie of personal interest) entertained individually by all. The i5i<^ is intro- 
 duced because, though all do it, they do it each sepanvtely for their private in- 
 terest. To Idlif in oi>po8ed iOpboi', ' collect iirly ruined.' 
 
 CHAFTER CXLn.--(n.) ^iy.^ov Zi. ^But what is of most importance.' 
 Kriig. cf. Xen. A nab. ii. 5, 7- ^P-^ov Kal f^h^crou ol Oe^iu fip^oc vf^as Ku:\vovai., 
 Jelf%8o 4 <rxoXfi-/^/)a5^cus. Schol. cc^/r^. Kriig. So we say, 
 
 * I should be slow to doit.' And Shakspeare. Til trust by leisure him who 
 mocks me once.' KcuXvcrovrat. Kriig. considers this the only msUnce 
 
 where the fut. med. of this verb stands for a passive. Upon the general question 
 of sucli futures, see I. 68, c. Tr. they will bring disHculties upon themselves, 
 ov uLcvcToC The opportunities of war wait for no man, in the sense of the j.ro- 
 verb about 'Time and tide.' Cf. Arist. .Ic/t. v. 1620, and Jelf, § 3^H a. 
 a,.trol e.ol. ' The god, are long soaring.' The orators probably inntated this 
 usage in such passages as those quote.l by Kriig., e.g. Dem. iv. 37, ol r.u^payfid' 
 r.u\a.pol 00 M^vca... oihi-ne ^uidcm. Thuc. seems to re er to the 
 
 thre.it of the Crinthians. intrnx^ap.6^ rfj x.^Pf, ch. 122. It is possible tha a 
 re...rt of their pr.>po.sed scheme may have reaehed I'ericles ; or ^ »;"c. may be 
 mLly answering himself. t^ I^^v yap xa^v k.t.X. The dithcu ty 
 
 here does not, 1 think, so much arise as Arn. supposes, from not seeing that 
 T6Xt. is the ace. after napacKevdcaaOat, as from failing to perceis-e that it 
 BUnds in apposition to, and is an epexegesis of the primary predicate tt,. 
 irirdx^ci^. Tr. for the former (sc. irrndxict.) 'tis hard even .n peace to esta. 
 lli.k in the shn,e of an equally matched dty, i. e. a city whicii sha I be an e<,ual 
 match for Athens. Kriig. su^^gests that inneix^.i. may be the subject of rapa- 
 cKtvacaaea.-\n this c;vse tr. that any process of fortijiration could ever estor 
 lli^h ^c ^ -"OV hi\— surely then we may assume, d:c. 
 
 dvT«mTCTCvxc<r».^u,v. Most Ed. assert that here the p:vHsive stands for the 
 middle, and that very unusually. 1 do not see why the participle should not 
 be a regular passive-u/.c;i we on our part have been well fortified ^n their terrt- 
 tory, i.e. in the possession of well fortified places. So our mi it^ry writers 
 might say-irr// entrenched in the place. This is surely confirmed by ire. x^cdv<rau, 
 ch 03 d. *Thucyd. is here distinguishing between two sorts ^^'^^^^f'^". 
 the one by founding a city (^.o.Kff.v, vii. 27) in the neighbourhood of Athens, 
 strong enough to be a check upon her power (iii. 9), the other by erecting forts 
 in Attica as strongholds, ' Arn. Of the former, Megara, founded by the Donana 
 
 lSL::j^:^m^m^'^^^ 
 
 fe i 
 
 t 4 
 
 t. 
 
 '^\ 
 
 II 
 
 I 
 
 it 
 
 i 
 
 < 
 
 h. ^ 
 
 1 
 
 i: 
 
 t 
 i 
 
 * 
 
 if 1 
 
 N._ 
 
^50 
 
 NOTKS OX TIli;CYI)II)i:S. 
 
 [IJOOK I. 
 
 as a check on Athena, is an instance ; ns also is lleraclcia, cf. iii. 92. The 
 latter sclienie was carried out by the fortification of Decelcia. 4>oPn* 
 
 6f]vat — Uo be afraid of.' T. K. A. says its usual meaning is to fear. As 
 <poi3iu is to ter.-ify, a little consideration will show the cause of the varieties 
 of meaning found in the active and passive voices. 
 
 (/j.)^4)povlpi,ov — a fortified place y as oi»i)osed t«> irbXiv iiVTliraXov. 
 avTojioXfais — by the facilities uhich it would afford for dtscrtimi. Sec vii. 27. 
 The slaves are principally referred to. Similar complaints are found in Aristo- 
 phanes. ^iriTcixCt<«-v Is governed by the following inf. kujXvuv — jirtrcnt vs 
 from coHstruc(in(j an ^Trtre/xt^/Ua arjainst them, cf. Jelf, § 664. irX^ov yap 
 K. T. X. Though it is suffici:titly obvious, most Ed. point out that toO naTo. yijy 
 depends upon i/xireipias, and ^fiireipla^ upon ttX^ou — we hare more expert en re of 
 land service from our serving/ on board ship, than fhrt/ have c.r2)cricnce in jiaafi- 
 cat matters from their scrrice on land. 
 
 {('.) ovSk "yap vficis. -/'"'* ni if/irr hare i/oii, thnuijh pntefiaiii'/ it crrr ninrr the 
 period direrfh/ followiufj the Median inra'<ion, as yet browjht it to perfec- 
 tion. ^ac-o(x€voi,. Passive sensu. Cf. supra, (a.) Cf. Y.\\t. Jph. Anl.\. 331. 
 ovX^ Seivd ; rbf (fiov oIkuv oIkov ovk idffouai. For the fact, see i. 80, 12 1. 
 
 ((/.) ^v TO) p.f| ^tXcTwvTt. ThJH is a good instance of the extension to the 
 partici[>lc of tliut idiom whiih makes a neut* r adjtotivo with an ailiclo »<HMva- 
 lent to a noun. Owing to tlie use of participial substantives in our langu.age 
 we can easily translate such phrases — oicinj to their not practisiny. See iii. 48, 
 iv Tt^ roii^oe d^toDi/rt, and Jclf, 4.^6 7. rh h\ vavTiKOv k. t. X. For 
 
 nantlcal skill is (M tnuch thr ?/•/»/•/• af art as anythiny chc, ttnd dors not admit of 
 bciny practised as a mere byrirorh vhcn occasion happtns, nay, it ralhrr udmilH 
 ofnofhiny el.^c being cnyaycd. in as a bye-icork heaidc itself— Ciairtp Kai &\\o is said 
 to be identical with etirep aWo. Peihaps it is a little less strong, 
 •n-dpep^ov — a vork done alongside of, or contemporaneously vith another. Cf. 
 iv Trapipyif), »i. 6()—ytyv€<jOaL is governed by ^Vo^x^''**' subaud. 
 
 CifAPTKU CXLIII. — (a.) AiXf^oi.^. The adverbial dative is not uncommon, 
 as in the ciine o( yiapaOCJvi, but A^X^oiy wit!i(»ut iv is seldom found. IVrhajis 
 the position oCOXvpLirlacriv occasioned and justifies it. viroXapciv — clam 
 
 aubducere. Sec ch. 121. roSt— as th.; Schol. explains for the full sentence, 
 
 rb dvTnrdXovi v,p.d% aurouj fxerii Tiic p.€TolKuv dvai avroii. Cf. Kur. Ale. v. 50^. 
 Kup€pvT)Tas — native Athenian citizens for sferrsnun, a duty of more injporlancc 
 in ancient vesf ols of war even than in our own, for the success of the varioijs 
 mancx'uvres employed in action must have materially depended upon their 
 management. vin^p^o-ia is the * abstractum pro concreto,' the 
 
 remainder of our crews; or, as we might say, 'the manning of our vessels.' 
 Kriig. thinks the word is exclusive of the ivi^aTai. In its n.'vrrowest sen.se it 
 would, as its etymology imports, be confined to the oarsmen. 
 
 (6.) lirX Tw KivSvvu) — to their risL; as we use the preposition in such phrxsos 
 as — to their discredit, i. e. importing the result to which any action tends. Or 
 it may be — 01 '^r and above the risk. I prefer either of these to the interpretation 
 of the Edd, ' ; face of the danger,' 1)., and similarly 'bci dir (Jefahr,' Kriig. - 
 obimpendens pericuhim, or ut periculum adeant, Top. ^tvyivv. 
 
 The word irapcirting banishment is used, for most of these men would naturally 
 
 ntv 'r — ■--, ■ . ."mjj.juiwj).p.ii.w. J I u i i w ii Mn '■ . ■■■ i »- i. ' i » w<t 
 
 »v 
 
 I 
 
 t 
 
 9 
 
 1 
 
 I 
 
 CUAP. 144.] 
 
 NOTES ON TIIUCYDIDES. 
 
 ^51 
 
 belong to the subject states of Athens, and bo be subject to sentence of out- 
 lawry Vir6. Ttis 4io-o-ovos iXMos- siding with the inferior 
 hope, i. c. with the party whose hope of success was inferior. ovk 
 Atrb Tov Ka-ov-other advantages not upon an equal scale, i. e. upon a very much 
 rm-alcr scale than the enemy. See these enumerated, ii. 1 3- V ^c 
 Cf. Ar. nan,r, v. .4^.3, Krug. ovk^tc Ik tov 6,xoCov. Jl u.ll be «o 
 lon',rr themmr thinq. Cf. with Kriig. ii. 44, "i- 3^ >v. 10. ajidxct. 
 So all the MSS. but one which has d^ix^. Cf. Blomf. ad P. V. Gloss, v. 2i6, 
 and Ellendt. Lex. ^oph. voce d.ard. Kar* ^iuc.pov. This refers to 
 their possessions in Asia Minor and Thrace. 
 
 (r ) cl vdp ^ixcv. So we, ' if ice uerc,' an ordinary emplojmient of the im- 
 perfect in hvpothetical propositions. tovtov-/.c., the being islanders, 
 8tavone^vTas-A'";„7 disposed ourselves in thought-having brought ourselves to 
 the stateof mind. Cf.ch. i«b. oUtas -without the article, because, says 
 
 KHi^' ..uly some houses were in a position to be taken. Hut n)ay it not fall under 
 the head of 'fainihar n.ention,^is in tin. phrase Vio,Mr roH/Aomr/ cf. St Alatt. x.x. 
 
 aq Kal Tras Sar.s d<p9,K.y oUia, k.t.X., and in the nextch. dy6p<^ Kai Xtf^ici xP^<^^ac. 
 Seiv ic-xvov-iv-the source of our strength, -i.e., in men, ships, and money. 
 
 (rn ^crvxdo-ovo-t. Thry will not keep eiuiet; there uill be a revolutionary 
 r^Jenul Krug. says, after Popp., treu bleiben, renuun true to our 
 allegiance, which is not the special aspect of the idea presented by the wonl. 
 6X64,vpcr.s-«K./.-. o«r wail; properly applied to the lamentation of ie males, 
 and Ik' e, therefore, the word insinuates an argument against the etieimnate 
 cowardice of such a course. oUu^v-cf. supra last note, lor the 
 
 Hentiment. cf. vii. 77. 7- * ---^ ^t^"--' ^^'"^^ "T'''^ ""^'f'^ '"" 
 
 taken together, burn with your own hands. tovtu,v ^€ ^cKa- 
 
 for the matter of these, or for the sake of tluse at any rate. 
 
 CiUPTF.u CXLlV.-(r».) l<>^iXTTLha-tendivgtoahope,that go to makeup 
 a hoi^e. Cf. ^s drboui.. ii. 13. ^^^M-- ^opp cf. iv 104 ; n. 
 
 0, BovXeaeai p^), kc. It has been suppo.scd that the words exhibit an in- 
 version for pii mX,re, but 1 prefer to tr., ,/ you consent to forbear maknig 
 fred, ar^ptisitions of dominion while engaged in warfare. Ihe junior stu.lent 
 will do well to notice, as in ch. .39. l'-^ strongly this passage confirms the 
 distinction betwc^-n OiX. ami /ioi'.XoMac. for here mX.re, ho far froin denoting 
 a tnW,, implies a constraint put upon the natural w.h. ihe Schol. expl.uns 
 aiArrera. Z.KeXlau Kai'lraXia. 9,, in.Ovpovu Kpari^aac. Ihc account of ho 
 fatal expedition to Sicily (Hooks vi. and vii.) is the best commentary on the 
 words, and an entire confirmation of the policy of Pericles, a policy Aristo- 
 phanes has so succinctly expressed. 
 
 TTji/ yrjv orav voplauiai t)]v tuv TroXepiwv 
 that acptrlpav, Tr]v bk a<peT(pay rC:v TroXeplu^V 
 irbpov U Tds va.v%, dwoplav 5^ rbv Tropov. 
 
 Hanoi V. 1390-93- 
 
 ,po^£e.,reav-6,-,«.7 «;."» ^.-r o,n. UnuU aMilional periU. ^.^.i^n^a, 
 • Like oiioiKa often lias ti.e nicanin- of a pirxnt. So iv. 1 14 ; vi. m; i '»<■• 
 Oral. 403 \>: So T. K. A. after Kriig. But it is perhaps as «eU to mdicat* 
 
 I- : 
 
 \: 
 
 i 
 
 
 I 
 
 i i m 
 
^52 
 
 KOTES OX TIIUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Hook I. 
 
 a shade of (.Ifferenco in the meaning. Tr. uhaf I hare been and am afraid of 
 '*» *^*^- Ttts olK((as. The possessive adjective, accompanied by a 
 
 genitive detjoting possession; a verj' emphatic formula. The Kd. quote ra? 
 tolas avTufu irpoffddovi. Dem. 
 
 (6.) ^v dXXu) \6y(^. Cf. ii. 13, and 61. fiUyapiai, an accusa- 
 
 tive (as below rds Tr^Xctj), stands, because the primar}' notion in the speaker's 
 mind, even before 6ti. It is, therefore, to be rendered, And as rryards the 
 Mcrjarcans. |€VT]\a(r£as. Arnold assigns two motives fortiie existence 
 
 of these ^iuriXdaiai or ' alien acts' at Sparta— lirst, to preserve intact the Dorian 
 type of character and principles ; second, to prevent the fonnation, within the 
 bosom of the state, of a wealthy and mercantile alien body. The junior student 
 should consult Muller, JJor. 11, p. 4, note. He remarks that ^(i'7;Xa(T«a was only 
 practised against tribes of different usages, i)articularly lonians and Athenians. 
 Philosophers, such as Anachar^jis, the Scythian, were willingly admitte<I; other 
 persons were excluded ; there were fixed regulations concerning the time and 
 manner of admitting foreigners, and hence the earlier writers, Thucydides and 
 Xenophon, speak of ^evrjXdffiai in the i)lural number. See for further informa- 
 tion the autiioritics collected by C. F. Hermann. Pol. Anfiq. Or. § ^8, i. 
 KwXucL. Hermann understands ti m the subject of this verb, m.aking ^/ctrvo 
 and r65e accusatives alter it. Jiut it is simpler with the majority of Kd. to 
 suppose that KuXvei is hero inqmraonal ; tr., for there is nothiwj in the treaty to 
 prevent either one or the other; and Kriig. sujiports this view by quoting Ar. 
 Arcs, V. 463. 6V SiajidiTTeiv ov KuXvei. l^ovrt%—i.e., in the 
 
 capacity of allies. €<rrr«io-d|ic0a refers to tlic thirty years' 
 
 ^*"cc. diToSwcri K. T. X. Tr., uhm theij aho 'jrant to their allies 
 
 not to be independent after a fashion which suitu thfm.nircs, the Laccdeemonians ; 
 implying that the boasted independence of the allies of Sparta was nominal 
 rather than .-eal, for that as a matter of fact they were compelled to accommodate 
 their institutions to the Spartan ta.stc. See i. 19. Kar dXiyapxiay 5^ ff<plai 
 auro?? i-rriTTj^efus Sttw? voXIt€uo}(ti, and cf. i. 76 ; v. 81, 82. avrois 
 
 CKdo-Tois sc. airodCiai, permit each of then scvcrallff. Krtlg. would read ai>rorj 
 eKdarovs, but I think uimecessarily. ^OAojicv — cf. supr. this ch. 
 
 "^^-^ ^' B.p^o\iiv . . . dpxofi^vovs. Why are the voices varie<l? 
 
 Perhaps the 'irst may mean, vc will not cominrner the irar ; the second, if thry 
 take upon tkunselvcs to ina'.e icar, if thry allow thcm.tclves to be led into a war. 
 T. K. A. writes, 'Krug. makes ApxeaOat ttoX. be, to commence hostilities with 
 the intention of proscciitiny them virjorously.' I cannot see the rationale of 
 this, nor do I think Kriig. says so, for his ex|)ression is, * U'enn sie sieh in 
 den Kricff cinlassen,' an expression which is the proj)er German equivalent 
 for the middle voice, and much more nearly .agrees with what I had given as 
 the meaning, quite independently of what otiiers have written. 
 
 (c.) 8€x^}i€0a — sc. TToXtfieiy. V|o-(rov iyKtifro\i.(vovs—ice shall 
 
 ■find the enemy likely to be less viyorous, or uryent in their assault upon vs. 
 -iTipiyiyvovTai.— come round as results. Cf. supra, ch. 31 c. Kriig. cf. ii. 39, and 
 Bern. 3. 12, TouTov fibvov irepiyiyveffdai /xiXXovTos. Tlie lit. meaning of the 
 word, has reference to what remains over and abore, after any action. Cf. 
 repLovalav, ca. 2 b. and 141. c. The infinitive dUvai must be again supplied 
 after Kivhvvi^jy. 
 
 '^^^^Hmm^QniA^AM!^^^^- 
 
 \ 
 
 CnAP. 146.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 ^5Z 
 
 \' 
 
 {d.) ol "Yovv iraWpcs. Our sires at any rate. On the illustrative and infer- 
 ential force of the compound ye-o^v, cf. supra ch. 2 e. 6p)iui^cvoi 
 — not starting from such yreat rrsonrres. T. K, A. (luotcs "with approbation 
 from an American ed. this remark, ' opfulifxeuoi hapjiily expresses the eagerness 
 and ardour with which Pericles represents their Grecian ancestors as rushing 
 to battle.' But, in the first jdace, opynlifxevoi here applies primarily to them- 
 selves, and not to their ancestors ; and, secondly, tiie word in such collocations 
 comes to be quite a technical one, cf. Xen. Anab. passim, and is used in cases 
 where no such eagerness, &c., can be con-noted by it. "Yvw^-n k. t. X. — 
 * by policy more than by luck, and with ;ireafer couroije than power,' the datives are 
 instrumental, J elf, § 603. ^s rdBc— ?/;> to the present pitch. I*opj). cf. vi. 
 18, ii rdSf ^pav avri.. We must explain ai'rd grammatically by rh. v-rrdpxovra. 
 XcCirto-Qat — left behind, i.e., in the race of glory. Cf. Xenrofi^viji' tu>u vvv, 
 i. 10. 
 
 CHAITER CXLV. — (a.) oii8^v KeX€v(5|xcvoi •nQ\.i\a-i\.v—that they would do 
 nothing upon compulsion, or dictation. }\\. quotes imitations from Dion. Hal. 
 liri to-n Kol 6ji.oC<jL. See note upon ^Trl r^ (ari Kai 6/xoiq., supra, ch. 27 a. 
 ovK^Ti ^irp€ap€uovTO. For, as Popp. reminds us, Melesippus, mentioned ii. 
 12, was only a herald. 
 
 Chapter CXLVI. — {«.) aWLai—'crlmina,' charges which they brought 
 against each other, cf. alriai, ch. 23, ad fin. h\.a(\>opa.(.— differences, 
 
 causes of quarrel. aKT^pvKTws y-iv — without, indeed, as yet employ- 
 
 ,ing heralds {whoHQ services were re<juired in all transactions after an open 
 declaration of war), but not without feelings of distrust. Bl. quotes * Bellum 
 indictum, tacitai induciie quietum animum tenuere,' Li v. ii. 18. 
 {vYXvo-is. properly a confounding, hence, a breaking up, a rupture. Kriig. 
 appo><itcly quotes Plat. Ji>p. 379 c., ttji/ tCju 6pKU}y Kal awovbQv ciryx^'^^^^ W o 
 lldf5apos ffiWxff*', where the word aptly denotes the confusion caused by the 
 treachery of Pandarus. It occurs again v. 26. 
 
 .■ » 
 
 I f 
 
 t 
 
 ■ 
 
 1 
 
 " ■ 
 
 * 
 
 ^B 
 
 
 1^1 
 
 
 ' B 
 
 
 - H 
 
 i 
 
 j 
 
 «H 
 
 
 It 
 J 
 
 ;/ 
 
 N.J 
 
 M-'i-^ 
 
 / 
 
a34 
 
 ^"uiI:.-D U.N iiiucvDiuics. 
 
 [Book II. 
 
 CuAP. 2.] 
 
 NOTKS ON TllUCYDlDES. 
 
 ^55 
 
 li 
 
 BOOK II. 
 
 CllAPTiill I.— dpxcTai. Tlic war be;,'an, strictly Hpcaklriij, acconliiig to 
 Thucydiaos' view, with the attack on IMata'a, in the month Munychion, B.C. 
 431, the thirty years' truce having been niade in the same month, B.C. 445. 
 The revolt of PotitUea took place about Midsummer, B.C. 431. Clinton, 
 d. 6 iroXtpos €ve€v5€ <i8ti seems to have p;issed into a proverbial expression. 
 Of. Lucian Pseudomant. §8, Tom. ii. p. 215, ed. Hcmsterh. Aul. (;tllius, 
 Aort. Att. xvii., xxi. 16, says, * cap turn est circa annum fcrfe post conditam 
 Eomam, treccntcsimum vicesimum tertium.' dKT)puKT«(. Cf. lib. 
 
 1. 146, where he uses tiic form dKrjpvKTWi' For the termination rtl or t/, see 
 Kruger, ad loc, and Jelf, § 374 /3. Kriigor reads rd with nuds<.n and 
 Dukor, and says only ono bad MS. has tI. (M.lhr has W, and .Iidf Hays, ' when 
 the r does not belong to the root, as in tho case of verbal adjectives, r. //. 
 dfcXavTl, and aKXavarl, a^;u7;^l, &c., tho ending of the modal adverb is in /. 
 liauer thinks the termination in ws is the more J'otdUc, as implying an im- 
 placable and internecine war— 7r6Xf/xoj dKi)pvKToi. In time ofardml war those 
 who passed lIjo borders took a herald with them. This was not necessary now, 
 but their intercourse was restricted and mistrustful. (Jrotc, vi. p. 151. 
 KaTao-rdvTts— ' uhcn once c,ifja;/cd In the mir.' Cf. c. 9, 1 3, 65, 75, 78, not ad. 
 i. i,^ ui. 69, and Jelf, 530, 2. K. compares I. 49, 2, KaTacrdvTt^ ifiaxovro. 
 Kara e^pos Kal X€iti<iva. (Jruto (Vol vi. p. 15.^) considers that the bisection 
 of theThuc>dida'an year into Otpb% an<l x«'mw»' •>< xiarkcd by the e.iuinoxes ; 
 and that consequently his summer and winter are each half a year, comparing 
 v. 20, €vpr)(T€i i^ i]titff€ias €Ka.Tipov rod iviavroO ttji/ Svvafiiy fx°^o^ k.t.X. 
 But H. Stopiiens had already remarked that this did not necessardy imply an 
 C7tt«i division, ♦ sed ut tota le.stas sit una dimi.lia pars, tola hyoms sit alt.ra ;* 
 <^f/j6j therefore will bo ' the season for miUtary <»perati.»ns.' It is plain ft oni 
 Oaj.sar, £. (J ii. 2, that ;tstas had the same modified signification in Latin. 
 I'oppo and Kriigcr consider that the winter began with thcm<.nth M.Tmacterion* 
 and ended with Elaphebolion, leaving eight months for active warfare. 
 
 CllAl'TKii II.— ^dp refers to Hpx^rai in chap. i. A', and P. rJi U -ir/jnrrw 
 
 Kal 8€KdTu>. Cf. Xen. JIdlai. ii. 3. 10, where he gives the names of all, the 
 Epiiori Eponymi of Sparta for the first twenty-eight years of the war. 
 Qt xpiaKovTovTcis <nrov8aC. Cf. ad. i. '1 15. Xpvo-(5os. Cf. iv. 133. 
 
 Tins was the Priestess through whose carelessness the. Hera.'um was acciden- 
 tally burnt, in the ninth year of the war. These priestesses of the Argivo 
 Juno were caUed ■hp€(TLbi^—Upi^)iivy\s k.t.X., in the forty-eighth year of her 
 consecration. ?Tt 8vo nfjvas ixp^ovros-' having still two months 
 
 to be Archon ' It appears from Jdeler and others that the Athenian Archons 
 entered on their oHice in the commencement of the month llecatomb.-eon. If 
 so, and the reading bo correct (and wo ought not rather to read 5' for ov6, i. e. 
 four months instead of two), the attack on PlaUea was ma<le towards the'close 
 of March, b. c. 431, i. e. in the mouth Munychion. Kruger would carry it back 
 
 to January. trportro^^^a-ai—'adjungcre; P. 'to make over,' i. e. 
 
 * restore to the Boeotian league: Cf. i. 55. ^V" K^pKupai' irpoffTroi-fiffeiav. 
 a^ia f|pt dpxo}i^u»- ^^- ^^^^' hOf ^- BouurapxoOvTCS. Cf. iv 
 
 92 V. 37. Tho li<eotarchR appear to have been thirteen in number, two of 
 whonl wero eliosen fi.un Th-beH. 'I'h-y w«,io tho military heads of tho liu.otian 
 confederacy, chosen by the ^lilierent states. When engaged in military service 
 they formed a council of war, the president being one of the two Theban 
 Boeotarchs, who commanded alternately. Cf. Smith, Uict. of Ant. s. v. 
 iripl TrpiTOv virvov. Cf. for this measurement of time, Soj^h. Aj. v. 278. 
 8i' Eipvjidxov Tov AcovTidSox.. Herodotus vii. 233. mentions Leontiades as 
 commanding the Ba-otians at Thermopyl.T. He was the ^irch traitor' who 
 went over to Xerxes, and received the royal brand. ^ti ^o-oito o 
 
 ir<JX«jios. For tlie opUitive in the oratio oblicjua, see Jelf, 885, 3. 
 Iti^ tlp^vn. and moreover during the time of a religious festival. Cf. in. 
 56, in the apology of tho IMatieans, ('v (nroudaU Kal wpoa^ri UpoM^dt^- ^f. 
 Duker. ad. 1..C. where h<.wever Upopii]Aa cannot bo e.piivalent to vov^^ia, as 
 we hear c. 4 that this happened TtXivrQ^vTos rov fiv^6s. irpoKae- 
 
 tarr^Kvia.%-' set to ilcfrnd the city.' So Trpo4>vXdcauv, c. 93. and pro castns 
 aciem instruere. C.-ps. R G. i. e^j^cvoi U t^v d^fopdv rd fiirXa. 
 
 Cf Grotevi. 153, who clearly shows th.at Dr. Arnold has misUvken the sense 
 of these words. ' It is «iaite evident that no soldiers under the circumsUnces of 
 the Thebans, making a hostile attack in the night-time upon a garrisoned town, 
 would think of 'piling their arms' any more than Proxenus (in the well-known 
 passa-c Xen. Anab. i. 5- 13) would have thought of giving such an order to 
 l.is men in th-ir critical position b.-tween tho tnx.ps of Clearehus and Menon. 
 or Hippocrates to his, when the enen.y were actually in sight before the battle 
 of Delium(Thuc. iv. 93, cf. vii. 3. Xen. Anab. iv. 3. 17). I" the p.issage 
 viii 93 ^/m^^oi rd 5irXa r^^KKXrjalaaau, it MIGHT bear Dr. Arnold s meamng. 
 But n'udson's interpretation is far better, ' armis instructi et ordme collocjiti. 
 concionem habuerunt, immincbat eni.i ho.lis.' The latter gives the four 
 meanings very clearly. 
 
 a. pro TdTTeiy et TaTTcaOai. 
 
 p. pro ffTpaTOTrtO(v((T0at. 
 
 3. I'ro castra munire. 
 
 4. pro iroXiopKuv. Cf. viii. 7^. 
 
 In most cases it may be explained by ' Armati conslstere,' to maintain 
 rank, resting the spear and shield upon the ground ; and in this case means 
 little' more than our 'ground arms.' Cf. Xen. IJcll. ii. 4- i^. ^^1^'*^ ^''^' 
 Boldiers of Thrasybulus rest their shields, but retain the rest of their arms, 
 so 16, § 5, 6, wliero comj^aro tho story of David and Saul, I Sam. xxvi. 12. 
 tpyov tx^aBai^* set about their work at once.' dv«nrcv. 
 
 The technical word ; therefore found without the substantive. Cf. Arist. 
 Ach. II. 6 b' dfciyrev ttaay u) e^07«'i rbv x^pov. »«*'^* '^* 
 
 udrpia tJ>v irdvTu,v Bouurciv. After the death of the mythic Xanthus 
 in his single combat with Melanthus (Cf. Crotc, ii. p. 22), the monarchical 
 form of government was exchanged for a republican constitution, founded on a 
 mixture of aristocratic and democratic principles (B.C. 1126, Heeren) ; the 
 former shown in the appointment of eleven annual magistrates caUed 
 
 ■■? 
 
 1 1 
 
 1 1' 
 
 
 xx^yvi 
 
 / 
 
^y^ 
 
 XOTKS OX TIIL'CVIyiDKS. 
 
 [IJUOK II. 
 
 i 
 
 Bcnotarcls, who rros.dca over the n.ilitary nn well an civil Jcpartn.cnU ; the 
 latter ■„ the estabhsh.nont of four council, (llo.Xa.-), which were ,,nsse.se,l in 
 fact of the sovereign authority, all measures of i,„|,„rlanee hein^ «ul„„itted to 
 then, (as J hue. says aiVr^ a,ra. ri xPp.; exoua,). Tra.Usn.en an.l arlisai.s were 
 
 allowc.l „o Hhare in puhlie allairs, unh.ss they |,,..,1 ahs.ai 1 f„r l,.„ y, a„ rr,„u 
 
 carry,,,;; „„ their on,,,loy,„..„ts. ll„,v„ thinks these lt.„.\a( «,.ru h. 1,1 in the 
 four cl>.t,,cts into which l!.uotia was ,livi,le.l (,,. ,4;). The .jn„r„l assen.bly 
 was held m the ten.ple of Ilonian Jlinervu, near Coroneia (I'aus. ix. 34). It 
 was m fact a political confe.kracy un.ler the i,rc8i,lency of Theb-s The 
 greater cties which ha 1 s.naller towns .Kpen.lent upon then,, seen, to have been 
 or,gn,ally fourteen the na,ues of which are variously given. The religious 
 Jcst.ral of the whole league was calle.l l-anibnotia. Cf. Sinill,', OWy. Diet. 
 art.Loeotia. Cramer, Vol. ii. pp. ,,,. ,3,^. Jleeren's .)/„,,„„/, pp. ,.,, ,... 
 For the constitution of the .several Uo,„\a/, see .Sn,ith» iJkl. art. Iheolarchs. 
 
 « Tis povX<Tai K. T.x. Cf. iii, (ij. r,r>, iv. 118. 
 
 l'U,„i„, or l-lulaw \_\U,m.v uses the .„„y„'/„r form [II. ii. jo^l. 4, .V..w. 
 d^e.i ^„,,y^,. strab. i.x. ,, p. ,60., as does Thucydides generally: though 
 some ,mes the plural as c. 7 a, .0. Hero.h.lus, the plural usually, tas 
 docs Uiodorus and Ue.nosthenes] was situate.l „n a spur of Ml. Cith.rron, 
 from wh,eh the Asopus takes its rise, which river separated its territory 
 from that of Thebes; at the disUance of about seventy .tadia fron, Thebes 
 (c. 5. a), the 8.amo fron, Thespi.-c, about a hun.lred from the border town 
 of O-noe, a,.d ,50 from Athens. The I'lala-ans l,a,l early separated then,- 
 selves froni the Bceotian league, conshlering that their own interests were 
 at yarmnce w.th this political union, ,a„,l h.a.l put the„,.selves under the pro. 
 teotion of Athens, about 9., years before the ,late of their surr.n.ler (lib. iii. c. 
 68), . «. n.c. 5,9 (Clint,m i„ an.). Th.y ha.l at first olfered thcn.selves to the 
 Laceda-mo, .ans and Cleon,e„e.s, but we.e advise,! by then, to ally tl,e,nselve., 
 
 for them by the Athenian,- the Plat:eans furnishc.l ,000 sol.liers for Marathon 
 and maancd some of the Atl„.nia„ vessels which fought at Artemisium. The^ 
 fought mo»t bravely at the battle of I>lat;ea, an,l were publielv thanked bv 
 Pausani.as and the confederate Greeks for their gall.u.t con.l,,:,. ]•.„, thej- 
 aft.r«ards mcurred the l,atre,l of the I.,ueda.n,on,an,, an,l cs,,eciallv of th, ir 
 kings, by causing the boastful inscriplhu, of I'ausani.as on the lri,H,d '..ffere,! at 
 Del,,h. to be altered (Herod, ix. 8,, Uen.osth. ,„ .\>,rr. . ,;8). llata-a was 
 bunit by thearmyofXer..es, but restored by the .assistance 'of L Athenianr 
 After then surrender to the Laeeda.nonians in the fifth year of ti.e war, 1, c 
 
 structcd fro,,, the ruins which they use,l for the reception of travellers ".ara- 
 hd,Z"'; *■ . ?"•"" ''""° "' -^'"^'''^■"'^'"' "'■-• '"»■' -" -''"i". - 1 th. 
 
 •i^.^; : ; jit v" ^r'^" •■■■v "' '"" "'°"'""' -^ '^«-"-' -•" "•- 
 
 of aI ■ ^ ,"• ""'• '■ -^"'- ''''"■ ^ •• '• 33- Uut in the Archontate 
 
 P ivtto ' •"■ "'V "° '"'"'•■"'^ '"■''■^■'-•""e that the i'lataan, had been 
 n Z-ea b'f """ 1 '""^ '^ "" ^-'"•J-"'"'"-- ""•'" I'ho.bi.la, 
 
 B c t. he \T f ; '•■ , ^"" "" ''""'-ti"" "f TlK.be, by Alexan.ler, 
 B.C. 335, .he confederates decided on rebuilding l>lat»a; but this desi-n doei 
 
 CiiAr. 4.J 
 
 KOTKS ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 157 
 
 i 
 
 
 t 
 
 not 8ceti\ to have been carried into effect till the time of Cassander (Pau8. 
 Ii(Cot. iii.). who also rebuilt Thebes. Dicrvarchus, who died c. B.C. 285, 
 mentions tlie town as existing in his time. Traces of the walls, consisting of 
 very considcrablo masses, evenly hewn and well-built, may be seen near the 
 village of Kockla. (The? N.W. anglo Boomingly was the portion restored.) 
 They are on the sU-rp and r»igg.-d hL-imh which fall fn.m the heights of Citha-ron 
 into the valley on the north. Cf. Wordsworth's Greece, p. 182. 
 TCeco-Bat Trap airovs ra SirXa. Cf. iv. 68, t6u ^ovUfitvov Ihai "SUyapiuiv 
 fxfTOL 'AOrjyaluv Orjad^fvov to. 67r\a. 
 
 Chapter 111. ov povXoji^vu) t|V ^^^^ dative expressing reference to. 
 Cf. J elf, § 599. 3. Cf. Sail. Jioj. 4, uti militibus a^cjuatus cum imperatore 
 labos vo'k-ntibus'cHsct, and c. 84, Tacit. Auric 18. (^^bu8 bellum volentibus 
 erit. Cf. Matth. p. 621. (lipwy— 'Me// could not sec' 
 
 paSiiis Kpa-nyoi. Csually with a.', as c. 70, but cf. our own idiom. ' Thc^ 
 thmuihl h, u't ff*r hrWr vfthn,,.' ^viwWpilov— ' ojlnrd vo vioteHve.' 
 
 Cf. 16./, ^lr,^h ucu}T(pov iroiuv. 1. 13."^. ^- I*'"'' ^''« "^"'"^^ meaning, cf. c. 73. 
 Cf. iii. 66. K. ^irixtipilWa. For the plural.form of the verbal adjective, 
 
 cf. ad" i. 88. 8iopva(rovT£S. See (irote, vi. p. 155. a"^ ^^'»^ l^*'^'-^^' ^^ 
 
 M. Marra.Kt. avA rdxovs tJ, Anacoluthon. Cf ISIatth. p. 519- ^'^P- v- 
 Amol.l, ad loc, hence the rotxwpt'xos. Arist. Jian. 773. Plut. 204 (cf. 165). 
 Xen. Man. i. 1. 62. Plat. Lcj. viii. p. S.'^S- «j)vXa4dvTas- 
 
 * haviuy watched their opportunifjf uhile it was yet night, or harehj the break 
 ji- jgy • 4)op€pu)T€poi. Qy. transitive or intransitive? 
 
 Ai-nold takes the former view. The Etym. M. the latter, as also Suidas, 
 Photius, Poppo, Kri.ger, (ioller. Cf. Soph. (K. T. 153, Eur. Iph. A. 620. 
 Xen. Cyr. iii. 3. 19. The same double meaning attaches to our English 
 adj. 'fearful,' and the Latin formidolosus. Cf. Tac. Ann. i. 62, and Sail. 
 CW. § 7. Either sense would be admissible, the suhject being clearly 
 changed. ^jtTrcipfas. The causal genitive, Jelf, § 481. 
 
 ^jiirirpovs. as always in this collocation, the predicate; 'havinrj for their 
 ],nr.-<iur.<(, or, to pursue them, persons kcU acquainted with the lye-ways, so 
 that,' kc. 
 
 CiiAPTKR IV.-|vv«o-Tp/4)0VTO— 'Z'"*''"^'' ^'^'^ ^^"'^^ order: Cf. TIero«l. ix. 
 ,8. h <r4>(aiv avTots. Cf. .klf, § 622. The loral meaning of if. 
 
 The notion of being in a number or crowd. K*pdpi>. Plural idea 
 
 conveyed by the singular noun, as c. ^caXd^V f«r KaXd/xois, so ttMuOos, &fiTe\os, 
 K. Kdx\ri^ iv. 26, 5^9, Kaprb,, P. Cf. Judges, ix. 53- The death of 
 Abimelech and Paus. 1. xiii. 7, the death of Pyrrhus, K. of Epirus. ^ 
 vcToO. Cf. c. 5. Bia vvKT6<i—*the whole niyht through. ^ Cf. 
 
 Xen Anah. iv. vi. 22. TcXfvTwVTOS tov ^^v6%. Cf. Grote, vi. 153. 
 
 Tov u^ ^k4>€v7«iv. Infm. with article used to express the result viewed as 
 the cause. Jelf, § 49^- 3- Cf. Matth. § 540. Cf. c. 22, ^KK'X7,a/av o.;/c <?7rof« 
 
 TOV uh 6nV liap^aprtlv, and c. 3^, hux^oBr) rov fit) Xi?crras 
 
 i.rUoura, KaKOvpyu.. "^ttc 8cc(|>ec(povTO. Tlie action or fact 
 
 primarily represented bv the indicative, its other character of a result not ben.g 
 lost sight of. Jelf. § 863. c. cTTvpaKfu.-' the iron point at the 
 
 bottom of the spear by which it was stuck into the ground: The dimm. of crrupaj. 
 
 t. 
 
 
 ^i^r^f^ '- i^^. 
 
 W- "W 
 
 
 
 •' J. . 
 
 / 
 
^5^ 
 
 :soT\:< ox Tiii:cvi)ii)i:s. 
 
 ^ 
 
 I 
 
 r 1 
 
 [i:uui; II. 
 
 Cf. Xen. mil. IV. ii. 19. Cf. (rropOv^. L. and S. Smith's Diet, of Ant. v. 
 ILista. Called also aavpwTrjp, Horn. It. x. 153. Herod, vii. 41. Cf. i Sam. 
 xxvi. 12, the story of David removing SauPs .«?pear. This point of the javelin 
 was used in place of the peg l.y which the bar of the g.itc was usually held 
 fast. The peg was termed /3d\oi'os, the instrument l.y which it wa« nmovt-d 
 ftaXaydypa. Cf. Arist. IV.s;). -200, cum Schol. Thesm. 423. Art. rcHsulus. Kitdi's 
 Uidionarii. ^dXai^os = fxa^^avou, Schol. (cf. Schol. ad Arist. IV.v/). 155) v. ;xaV. 
 5a\os iPaXaudypa, cf. Xen. JIcll. v. 2, it)). P. compares the Honuric 6x(0i 
 Il.xii. 121, Odi/ss. xxi. 47). On the .subject of bolt.^ see lUkker's (.nlhi.^, 
 V- 2S2. ol irXcCovs, i.e. of those who threw themsilvts from 
 
 the wall: for 180 out of 300 were taken prisoners. Xa0dvT<s Kal 
 
 8iaK6\}/avT£s. Hendiadys. rh SI itXcio-tov itrrr(TrTov(riv. The 
 
 idea of several subjects included in the word of number. Cf. Matth. § 302. 
 fivTiKpvs. Cf. i. 122, viii. 64, yEsch. C/io<i>h. 190, Plat. Futhjd. p. 215. For 
 the difference of meaninij and quantity between dfriKpv and djru/i'j cf. 
 liuhnktn, ad Tim. Lrx. Vint, in v. dvriKpvs. Thtre wcmis to 
 
 bo in this })assage clearly the meaning oi ' straifjht t/i)„u;//t,' as well as oi'viqht 
 omcard,' as T. K. A., who aj^pears from his note to have been unaware of tiio 
 distinction between the two .-idvcrbs dnuvn by ancient as well as by nuxkrn 
 grammarians. tlVe KaraKavcrovq-iv. The indicative ropnsonting 
 
 the fact :t8 actu.ally existing or h.appcning, and as sometliing indcpenflent of the 
 thought and conception of the speaker, 'utrum eos concremarcnt an aliud quid 
 illis facerent,' Matth. § 507. i, but many M.SS. have the subj.; Bekkcr retains 
 the iud. xP^o-ao-Sai o. p. Cf. iv. 69, vii. 85. Xen. Jldl. ii. 4. 37. k. 
 
 ClI.vrTKU V. ?8<i — ' vho ithonhl Jiavf arrived nreordiuf/ to prcvioim arranqr. 
 ii^cnL' TTJs vvKTos. The /(■;/»;>'»•<// genitive. The moment of time in 
 
 which an action takes place being conceived of as a necessary condition of tho 
 action and therefore antecedent to it. Jelf, § 523. i. ' ii\ia—' haiino 
 
 rcecivcd tidings uithal.' ct ti &pa--' //, (,., u-as not an impo.isiUe 
 
 eontinrjcncy: Cf. c. 12. S7. 'Ao-wTrbs. Tiio Asopus, forme.l by 
 
 the confluence of several small streams (one of which rises near the town of 
 Plataja itself and another near Thespia>), flows in an e.asterly direction through 
 Bceotia; in part of its course forming the boundary between the IMata'an and 
 Theban disti'.cta (cf. Herod, vi. 108), passing through a plain calb-.l Parasopia, 
 then througn a rocky ravine into the plain of Tan.-.gi-a, and falling into tho 
 Kurii)us, in tlie territory of Attica, near Oropus. In the upper part of its 
 course it is called Vuriemi, in the lower Vuriendi. It was on its .banks that 
 the battle ot Platiea was fought, v. Herod, ix. 51. Cf. Leake's Xorthrm 
 Grceee, ii. pp. 326, 424 sq. ^jSpvti. Cf. Demosth. r. Xarr. p. 1379, 
 
 who uses the very words. (On the discr.p.mcy in the stiitements of Demnsth! 
 and Thucydides, v. Grote, vi. p. 158.) The river is still subject to these fluo<l.s- 
 or freshes. Mr. Hawkins, in a letter to Dr. Clarke (ii. § 3). .says that the 
 Asopus is iu winter a mud.ly torrent, and for eight months of the year wholly 
 <^»y- Karaa-KcvT] Cf. not. ad. i. 10. 6, ii. 14. 16. 17. 65. ^7. 
 
 iii. GS. The word here evidently implies all the farm buihlings, stock, Ac.,' as 
 in c. 14, where perhaps it m.ay be lindted to their moveable property, v. Grote, 
 vi. p. 173. For the general idea, cf. Herod, i. 17, on the invasion of Miletus 
 
 J 
 
 Chap. 6.] 
 
 X0TP:S on THUCYDIDES. 
 
 ^59 
 
 \ 
 
 1 
 
 4 
 
 by Alyattes. •Cirdpxtiv ivrX tuv ?v8ov — ' tthould serve as hostages 
 
 for those within the city,* or, * as vnnrthiirg which they might exchange for such as 
 were prisoners.* cl Xdpoicv . . . . fjv apa rvyjucri. For the oratio 
 
 oblicpia followed by the oratio recta, v. Mattbia*, § 524. 6, Jelf, § 854. i. 
 cl 8i fi^ — ' otherwise.* So 7 1 , aTpatfOaai pLy)Mva irort dS/jcws ^t' ainov^, d ok /xt), 
 dfivfeiy Tovs tcapbinat. Tho negative Kcntencc is often followed by ff Ik pL-fj for 
 (I 5^, this form being commonly used to express the contrary of the former con- 
 ditional sentence. Cf. Herod, vi. 56. Xen. Cyr. III. i. 35. Plat. IJip. M. 
 p. 285. Jelf, § 860. 5. Cf. ad i. 28. ^Tro^ocrai — ' confrmed it by an 
 
 oath.* ^K 8'ovv TTjs "yfjs — 'at all events.' The attack upon Plataa 
 
 was considered unjust even by the Spartans themselves [cf. vii. 18, and Grote, 
 vi. p. 149 sq.], but the murder of the Theban prisoners by the Platx'ans was 
 still more atrocious. Ii\ spite of the impartial statement of Thucydides few 
 persons can <loubt that the oath was given or at least implied, and with this 
 belief the Theb.ans retire4|. Cf. iii. 66. Put tlio act was Jiighly impolitic as 
 well as groHsly unjust. It was 'a blunder ns well as a crime,' v. tirote, p. 160. 
 Evpvp-axos- Herodotus (vii. 233) mentions this fact when speaking of his 
 father's tre.ichery. €u0vs. Cf. c. 67. 4. 'Trpo8£8ovTcs. 
 
 N.B. part, pres., because the attempt was not successful = 0/ iTrayaydpLevoi. 
 
 ClIAriKK VI. — vcuTcpov. Cf c, 3. iviiaripiXov. v.c, iii. irplv &v. 
 
 V. Jelf, § 848. The difference between irpiv and irplv Slv seems to be that the 
 latter marks that the action of the temporal clause is viewed as something 
 which will jjrobably take place = Mv m^ : ""p/i/ alone leaves it uncertain. 
 t€6vt]k<Jt«s div. ()j>tative in oratione obliqu.1. v Matth. § 529. 2. 
 dxpt'-OT^i-Tovs. Cf. l'<»pi>o, a«l i. 93. So c. 78. h. 1. 76 dxpf'o" ''"<*"' duOpurruiu. 
 'The old men and sick with the women and children,' Grote. 
 
 Chaptkk VII. — {a.) Xa}nrpu)s 'in a glaring manner.* Cf. i. 49. P. 
 ws iroXipTiaovTcs. v. Jelf, § 690, 2. Matth., p. 991. Trp€(rp«(as 
 
 iropd pao-LXta — i.e. both ]>artics, Athenians and Laceda?monian8, P. and A'. 
 The Lacedamonians depended on Pharnaces to convey theirs to the King, 
 cf. c. 67. *A remarkable evidence,* (irote observes, *of melancholy revolu- 
 tion in Grecian affairs, when that potentate whom the common arm of Greece 
 had 80 hardlv repulsed a few years before was now invoked to bring the 
 Phffinician fleet again into the yEgean for the purpose of crushing Athens,* 
 Vol. vi. p. 167. For the fate of these and)assadors, descendants of Spcrthias 
 and Bulis, fee c. 67. Herod, vii. 137. |v}ijiaxC8as iroiovptvoi, 
 
 N.B. pres. and imperfect part, 'endeavouring to win over.' 
 
 (6.) irpbs Tais avrou virapxovaais — * in addition to the ships already in the 
 Peloponnesus,' s.iys Kriiger ; ' to those in Italy and Sicily,' says Hermann ; * in 
 addition to their allied cities in (ireece,' T. K. A., and this seems to bcThirlwaira 
 view. ' Her allies in this quarter (Italy and Sicily) engaged to furnish her with 
 money and ships, which it was calculated would amount to no less than 500,' Vol. 
 iii. p. 120. Grote apparently inclines to Kriiger's view.— -'The Lacedapmonians 
 resolved to make up the naval force already existing among themselves and 
 their allies to an aggregate of 500 triremes, chiefly by the aid of the friendly 
 Dorian cities on the Italian and Sicilian coasts,' vi. p. 167. Diodorus (xii. 41) 
 says the Italians and Sicilians were to send 200 ships, but it does not seem to 
 
 .1: 
 
 I 
 
 i'^\ 
 
 
 / 
 
i6o 
 
 iNUlKS ON TliUCVDlOKS. 
 
 [IJOOK II. 
 
 have been actually done. aojx^vois. v. Jelf. § 5S9. 3. K. of. iii. 63. 
 
 P. explains t\t<jOa.i as equivalent to 0poi'tt> ra tivo%. We say, t<i lake jMirt, to 
 take up a side. €U€Tdxeiicrav. Here is ancther difHcuItv ; what is 
 
 the nominative to iwj If we had v^tj the constructi.n. woul.l l,o Hiniplc and 
 regular. (Of. Cics. B. G. Naves iis iniperat;© sunt.) Hut Lolieck aiul all the 
 conuncntators agree that pad, is always accusative and never numimttire, 
 Poppo therefore would read iir^T^xOr^^ (which in fact must be supplit-d before 
 ^ro.^xciret;^,) from the Vienna MS. Cf. n. ad i. 14,. d. Jelf. § 898, 1, considers it 
 us a sort of attraction, the subject of the dependent being transferred to the prin- 
 cipal clause, in which it stands as the objtct. Lut, after all is it so certain that 
 vavs cannot in Attic Greek st.ind as a nominative? If it cannot, probably some 
 transcriber, not knowing the fact, substituted it for »'i}£T, imagining that 
 he was removing an lonicism from the text. dp^vpiov p^T(5v-- 
 
 'a specified sum,' cf. c. 70, and iv. 69. 'The highest amount which each state 
 would be called on to supply was fixed once for all. The supplies in money 
 and stores were also regularly ai)p()inted, ho that an army with all its equipments 
 could be collected by a single sumn.ons.' Mull. Lor. i. p. 198. Thirlwall 
 says, 'If Sparta determined the amount of the contributions required by ex- 
 traordinarj- occasions, .she was obliged carefidly to adjust it to the ability of 
 each community,' Vol. iii. p. 119. Cf. Wachsmuth, Vol. ii. p. 144. 
 jii(jVT]C. A greater nundnT would inqdy a hostile intention. Cf. iii. ;[, vi. 51. 
 (c.) li<]Ta.lov = iooKipai:ou. Schol. Cf. vi. 97. paXXov— 
 
 diligentius P. Kt'pKvpav. P. ad. i. 44. K.<>a\. Cf. c. 9, 68. 
 
 ZdKvvOop 1. .,7, ii. 9. Thc! Z.K-yiitliianH were allies of C.Mcyra before. 
 il di). V. Jelf, §885. -, M.iUl.. p. 907. Wpi5 Cf. vi. 90. 
 
 KaTa7roX€|it|crovT€S. Jell, §6Si. 6, participle use<l for the infinitive, referring 
 to iha present conviction with regard to something future. Karan. cf. iv. i = 
 debellare ; l^ellu infeatarc, V, 
 
 Chaptkr VITl.— (rt) iXi'^ov €Tr€vo'ouv ov5«v. V. compares Liv. xxix. t 
 ' Nihil parvum agitabat animo.' ^jipwvTo-' ad bellum cvidd>' fieri 
 
 lantur; Coll. [Cf. Horn. 11. X 50; Odijs. a,, r.8 ; Callim. //. Del. 175. 
 Appian, B.C.W. 30], so vii. 7, l, r&Wa xoXv ijTq^f.u'yTo. Hence (,^pu'<xo=\lc 
 Lat. Vale, Acts xxiii. 30. V. translates it * totis viribus incuml)ebant.' 
 dpxo>€voi. A general reflection, which the H^ in the apod, applies to tho 
 special case. avTiXappdvovTai., So ajr^xo^^at vii. 66. Cf. IMat. 
 
 Profar/. pp. 275, 314, Bekker, and c. 62, 'set riyoroushj to work:' 
 v«oTTis = vto:. So r/Xi/fIa, Abstract for concrete. Cf. 20, -21. 
 d7r€iptas. 'flic Schol. quotes the proverb, 7Xi'»ci'S d-rrdpii) 7r6Xf;/oj. 
 jicWwpos— ' wound up to the fiull pitch ufi uarlikr e.rrifcmfnt,' On.te. Cf. c. 1 1 
 7) -yap 'EXXas TTdo-a iTri)praL. Poppo comprires thc Latin phrases, arrectumi 
 erectum, expectatione suspensum esse. |uvtov<rJlv— ' ro;,nX7 into 
 
 confiicty so ^vvl<TTT)fi.i, llcrod. i. -02, ai ywCpai ^vvlcraaav. 'The opinions 
 clashed.' 
 
 {h.) Xoyia. Thc difference between \6yia and xPV<^hol seems to be tliis— 
 Xpr]<Tp.6, O'li. xpac^, XP^f^Oai) is an an.^uer returned to one who ronfufts an 
 oracle; X67to;/ any o;/n'y/r>*/5 saying, whether given by a God unconsulfed, or a 
 soothsayer. Wtissa^un^cn, K. Cf. lib. viii. i ; for the xPV(^po\^oi, gee 
 
 1 
 
 ClIAP. 9.] 
 
 ^'OTKS ON TIIUCYDIDES. 
 
 161 
 
 
 Aristoph. A v. 960 sq. h. 1. c. xxi. Ay\Xos Ikiv^Ot] k. t. X. Cf. i. 
 
 13, Arist. Acharn. 12. Sebol. Call. //. Ucl. 11, Schol. Virg. jEn. iii. 77, 
 with Heyne'a Excursnn. There is a ditticulty here, as Herodotus, vi. 98, men- 
 tions an earthquake in Delos, n.c. 490. AVass thinks this is the one to which 
 Thucydides refers, 6\ly^) irpb rovrwv l>eing taken in a loose sense (just as nuper 
 in Latin has the same vague meaning). Pliny {Hist. A', iv. 1 2) and Seneca 
 {N. Q. vi. 26) speak of only two earthquakes at Delos, See Thirlwall, Vol. 
 iii. p. 114. n, who quotes Voss, Miifhol. Fur^ch. Some suppose that Herodotus 
 merely quoted a report of the Delians, wi fXcyov ol Ai^Xtoi ; and that his earth- 
 quake never did take place. Miiller {/)<>r. i. 312, (ieru). e<l.) suppos. s 
 Thucvdiiles had never seen tho pasH;ige in Her(»dotus. Cf. ad i. 20 ; Cramer's 
 Anc. Greece, s.v. Delos. avtl^TiTciTO. The prep, exerts its force of 
 
 back-, hence 'altius indagabantur,' avai^'ijTUffOai^ dvwOev i^rjTeladai. So duacKO- 
 X€iy, dvaTifidVf dvaOrjpdv, duaKplueiw, Abresch. ap. Gottleb. ^ 
 
 (c.) T| cCvoia Trapd iroXv liroUi. Cf. Dion. xlv. p. 427, Iv. p. 851, who copies 
 this passage. So Api)ian Ji. C. i. 82, i] fiVota tCjv dvdpQv is toi)s i'7rdroi/r Trapd 
 ToXi) iwoUi, which seems to confine the reading iirold, which K. and Baver 
 prefer to dirrjei. Cf. irpoairoiTjaai, c. 3, iroiovixevoij c. 7, * axljungebat homines* 
 icon orer, B. For the feeling entertained by the subject- allies towards Athens 
 see Grotc, vi. p. 44, and Wachsmuth's Jlist. Antiq. ii. p. 98. For irapd iroXu 
 Bee Jelf, § 637, iii. 3. f. See note, i. 29. c. 'jrpoinr6vru>v—' n(t fiorth 
 
 «j» tltrirplea, 'trp6<f>a<Ti,, fior fjoiu'i to ivar.' For the grammatical construction, see 
 Jelf, § 7 10 b, the gen. ah.<t. implying the notion of c<insr, instead of agreeing with 
 the Hubj<-ct of the verb, or some *»bject thereof. Cf. Theoph. Ch. jr. piKpofJuXor. 
 iXivOipovo-iv. Cf. e. 72. a. 'Ah <;bief (»f tho J'elopoiiTiesi.-in eotdederacy, 
 Sparta presented the majestic an«i winning as|)ect of the chanq)iou of liberty 
 a^'ainst Athenian tyranny and ambition,' Thirlw. Vol. iii. p. 120. Ippwro, 
 
 irai fulhi ft — had all its encrffies strunn up. I8tuirr]s. Cf. c. 67, where 
 
 we find Pollis, an Argive, fitting out a privateer. IvvcirtXappdvfi.v. 
 
 The middle is the more common form, A'. w \i-r\ ns avTOs 
 
 irap^oTai. Thuc. repeats the i<lea, iv. 14, KeKioXvaOai ^56/cci 'inatTTOs v prj tivl 
 Kal avrbi fpytji Traprjy. The ]>erfect k(k. denotes the certainty of the result, K. 
 ^PYB t^X°^- Cf. c. 65, Ti>v llepixXia (v dpyfj tlxov, and 18. iv roiavTr] dpyy 6 
 CTparbs Tbv'Apxi^o.p.01/ (Ixfv, the form with the prep, being more common. So 
 5i 6pyTi% ^x^'"* ^'■^ Mctx^*» c. 1 1 ; ota (nrovbq%, oid <pCXla%, Triariui, iroXlp-ov, bib. 
 biK-n%, Soph. Ant. 742, A'. Cf. Plat. Ale. 18. 
 
 Ch.vptkr IX. — (a.) AaK. |vppaxot. 'Within the isthmus her allies in- 
 cluded all the states of Pel<»ponnesuH, except Achaia and Argos : hence tho 
 great cont^rst now beginning was not iiiq»roperly call«'d tho I'rlnponiKsian war.' 
 Thirlw. iii. p. 119. 'Ap^cCwv. Cf. Diod. xii. 42. Wnehsmuth'e 
 
 U. A. ii. p. 106, fcq. 
 
 (6.) 4>wKf)s. Cf. i. III. n. Had the Phocians passed over to the Lace- 
 daemonian interest since this event, or must we with P. suspect some error? 
 Probably the fonner ; as we find them afterwards decidedly joining the 
 Lacedaemonians. Cf. iv. 89. 1 18, v. 64. AoKpoC. i.e. Opuntii. 
 
 ' ApirpaKtwrai. Cf. c. 68. 'nnr^as &€ BotwToC. Cf. c. 12. c. 
 
 (c.) 'A0T]vaC<uv 8^. Aristophanes (Pt>|^>. 707) says the Athenian empire 
 
 M 
 
 :a 
 
 1 : 
 
 I P 
 
 I > 
 
 I 
 
 n; 
 
 iP^PBPI<— i w iwi ■ ■ 
 
 '^m.mmrmmm'^fifm'-^^mr^' ' I ■"^""•^^■i'ai^ 
 
 ■IdC - ■»> 'A»P1 JJ -,11PMPJ 
 
 / 
 
j62 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book II. 
 
 comprehended icxk) cities, but some allowance must doubtless be made for 
 poetic exaggeration. Her subjects were more opulent than the allies of Sparta, 
 and she disposed of their revenues at pleasure. Xioi, A^o-pioi. At 
 
 that time the only free islands. Naxm-AicTw. Cf. i. 103. 
 
 ' AKapvdvwv. All but CEniadae, c. 102, del vdre woXefiiovs 6yTa^ fiovdvs 'Ak. 
 Kapia. Cf. c. 69. to, ^irl 0p4»o]s. Cf. ad i. 56, and c. 29. Xen. 
 
 JJtll. II. ii. 5. Grote, vi. p. 90. The Thraceward allies included Potida?a, 
 Chalcidice, Bottiiea and probably Thasos. The nei^dibouring inland territory was 
 held by Perdikkas. For the early connexion between Athens and Thrace, v. 
 Herod, vi. 39. Hegesipyle, wife of Miltiades, was daughter of a Thracian king. 
 Cf. Waclismuth, ii. p. 39. and 94. * Some of the possessions of Thasos on the 
 Thracian coast had fallen into the power of the Persians, and required to be de- 
 livered from the Persian governors by whom they were occupied. We may infer 
 from the expeditions to Eion and Daton that this was chiefly effected by the 
 Athenians, wlio, upon pretext of compensating themselves for their exertions 
 retained possession of these places.' [See Mr. Shilleto's pamphlet, Thuctfdidea 
 or Grote, i. p. 10, note.] MtjXov Kal 0T|pas. Colonies of the 
 
 Miny«, from Lacedaemon. P. Cf. Thirl wall, i. p. 277. 
 
 Chapter X. — {a.) rats TrdXco-iv— i.e. Karh. 7r6Xfts, as ^Kaaroi, below. 
 l<rpaXoi)VT€s. Cf vii. 28, v. 14. They were 40 days absent from home. 
 Cf. c. 51. ^Toijia ^Cyvoito — 'as thq/ severally (jot thin f is 
 
 ready.' v. Matth. p. 899. The iterative optiitive being referred to the several 
 States, each in its turn. to, 8vo |i^pT]. Cf. A', ad. i. 74. a. * Ttco-thirds 
 
 of all the population capable of bearinj arms.' ii. c. 12. c. rd <T<f>€Tfp6v 
 fjL^pos. c. 47. ol ^v/xfxaxoi r. 5, ix. ibavep Kal rb irpCorov. iii. 15. Ca?s. B. C. 
 i. 82. Grote, vi. p. 168, explains it as: 'Two-thirds of a certain assumed 
 rating, for which the city was heltl liable in the books of the confederacy. So 
 that the Boeotians and others who furnished cavalry were not constrained to send 
 two-thirds of their entire force of Hoplites.' 
 
 (^•) *Apxi8ap.os. [i. 79. 6.vT)p ^werb^ Kal adxppwp.] the second of his 
 name, and i8th king of the Proclide branch, succeeded on the deposition of his 
 grandfather Leotychides ; Zeuxidamus having died before his father. Cf. 
 Herod, vi. 71. Paus. iii. 7. 8. He married Lampito, daughter of Leotychides 
 by a second marriage. He led the first three expeditions into Attica, in the 
 years B.C. 431, 430, 428, and died about B.C. 427, as in the following year his 
 son Agis invaded Attica. Plutarch {Cimon, c. xvi) mentions thp fourth year of 
 his reign as coincident with the earthquake at Sparta. Clinton fixes his ac- 
 cession therefore at B.C. 469. Paus. I.e. briefly mentions the chief transactions of 
 his reign. His presence of mind saved Sparta at the time of the earthquake, 
 and his whole life justifies the character that Thucydides gives him for intelli- 
 gence and temperance. His death was as great a loss to Sparta, as that of 
 Pericles to Athens. He left a daughter, Cynisca, the first woman who ever 
 carried off an Olympic victory. The first 10 years of the war are said to have 
 been called from him 'Apxt^d/jLios iroXefxos. v. Harpocration, s. v. and AcKcXeiKbs 
 vo\€fios. rovs iv T{kfi=€v dpxv, P. Cf ad. i. 10. e, 58. a, iii. 
 
 36, vi. 88. Xen. Anab. ii. Herod, ix. 106. d|ioXoYwTdTovs Tropcivat 
 
 '^' mod of consideration so that they should be present/ i.e. * those who had the 
 
 Chap. 12.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 16^ 
 
 greatest right to be present.' K. says ^vyKaXiaa^ wapehai, 'having summoned to 
 be present,' would be without example, he would therefore read irapaLvCov. 
 Eeisk. suggests vapiuu. 
 
 Chapter XI.— (a.) dTrcipoi. Cf K. ad. i. 80. a. 
 
 (6.) ^irfipTai— ?■« up at the sound of, up in arms, as c. 8, fierewpo^ ?jv. Cf. 
 Liv. ii. 54, xxi. 20. irpoo-^x^'' ^V Yvwjjltiv — ' attendit quo tandem res 
 
 sit evasuraj' G. iijvoiav '4\ov<ra. Cf. ad. c. 8, ' having a strong 
 
 feeling in our favour, which induces them to hope we shall succeed in our enter- 
 prise, and therefore is anxiously watching the result: This is surely better than 
 the other interpretation, * that we are doing ichat we purpose, through hatred of 
 the Athenians.' Kruger compares Plat. Hep. 608. A, ei5j/ot iab/xeda (pauijuai 
 avTT)v ws ^^Xriara. Thuc. iii. 83, v. 40. €irivoov}icv. So cTivoijaaL 
 
 d^ets, i. 70. •n'X^0€i. So * multitudo ' in Caesar. ' With superiority 
 
 of force. Cf. ch. 89 a., i. 1 25. a. Plutarch {Pericles, c. xxxiii) says 60,000 men. 
 The Scholiast on Soph. (iW. Col. 694, says 100,000. Cf Thirlwall, iii. p. 117. 
 d<r4MiXcia ^^ &v ^XBciv. Cf. iii. 39, irap^ax^u 6kvov /jltj eXOeiv es rd deivd. 
 
 {€.) TO, T«v 7roX^p,«v — 'bellorum eventus, res bellicce,' P. So c. 80. q. v. rd 
 T7J5 6pyri^ = 6pyifj. Soph. (E. T. 977. rd rrjs rvxri^. ii 6X170V. 'Cf. c. 
 
 89. In its usual sense in Thucyd., ' on a sudden,' * at short notice.' K. 
 yvui\ir\ = <ppovrifxari, i. 81. ' Geist und Muth,' A'., but Bl. translates it by 
 ' consiliis.' ? See ch. i. 1 30. b, from which it appears that it refers to the 
 state of the will or purpose— icith resolute icill, but cautious action. 
 
 (d.) ovTw. Connect with dd>'>vaTov, K. * Not so iveak as their enemies would 
 wish us to believe,' Arnold. Cf the Latin phrases— 'AaMt^ ita magnus,' haud 
 ita pridem. 
 
 {e,) 6jtfia(ri. Cf. i. 82. Hom. II. N. 99, davfia rbd' 6(pdaXfioc(nv opccfiai. 
 iv Tw irapavrCKa — *all are angry to see themselves with their own eyes, and at 
 the present moment suffering some unusucd injury.' Poppo. T.K.A. considers 
 bpdv a loosely appended explanatory infinitive. dT]0cs. Grote, 
 
 vi. p. 169. 'All men exposed to any unusual indignity become incensed, and act 
 more under passion than under calculation, when it is actually brought under 
 their eyes.' Tfjv kavrS>v supply SrjovfjL^uTjv. Jelf, § 895. c. 
 
 (/.) 8<J|av — 'glory or shame as the result may be.' Kuhm oder Schande. K. 
 ^Tp' dfKpbrepa. Jelf, 635. 3. b, 'both ways,' i.e., whether the issue be glorious 
 or disastrous. Reisk. explains it, * whether they come out to fight or not.' 
 8irn dv Tts Ti-yTJTat. Jelf, § 838. 2. koo-^lov = emoafxia, evra^la. 
 
 P. Cf. Herod, vii. 104. o^itas Sex,6\i.ivoi. Combining the 
 
 meaning of each word, 'quick to hear and prompt to obey your orders.' A tech- 
 nical expression, K. says. vi. 34. d, d^^us Treideadai. 
 
 Chapter XII. — (a.) hiaXva-as—' having dissolved.' We have the middle 
 form below. iTreiSrj ^/xeXXe bcaXvaeadai. * When he was about to part from his 
 conductors,' = d<pi<TTaffdaL, Schol. ^irl to Koiv<5v^rd riX-q. rds dpxds. 
 
 To the authorities, i.e., 'to a public hearing.' Cf. A', ad. i. 90, who explains 
 it by ' die Regierung.* 
 
 (6.) vcviKt^Kvtcu Simply implies that Pericles' proposition was carried, not 
 that any contrary vote was proposed. i^eaTparevfjiipuv, * now that the Lace- 
 
 M 2 
 
1 54 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book II. 
 
 diP/inonians had taJcen the Jiehl.* irpiv dKov<rai. The aorUt in- 
 
 finitive. ' Without a fiearinf/.' The phrase is observable in connexion with 
 S. Matth. i. V. 25, ^wj oO ^rc/ce. 
 
 (c.) 8ti 4j8< -q T|}jL€pa K. T. X. Tlie 6'rt simply introduces the saying of 
 Melesippus, as in Herodotus, passim. Hudson compares Virg. u£n. iv. 169, 
 
 Hie dies primus lethi primusque malorum 
 Causa fuit. 
 
 Aristophanes had this passage also in view in the Pax, v. 435, according to the 
 Scholiast, 
 
 air^udovTes fi'^w/ifc^a tt}v vvv rifiipav 
 
 "EWrjffiv dp^ai irdffi voWQv Kdyaduiv. 
 
 Gott. compares Horn. v. 63. Xen. Hell. ii. ii. 23. Valckenar ad. Herod, v. 
 97. SjiU. Jug. a»s 84 d<|>tK«To k.t.X. Observe the change of 
 
 subject. Tovs t-mreas. Cf. ad. c. 9. b. * The whole of their 
 
 cavalry.' 
 
 Chapter XIII. — (a.) |vXXc7o^^vwv Is t. I. The preposition referring to 
 a verb of motion, connected with a verb of rest, when previous motion is implied. 
 So in Latin, *Abdo me in Italiam.' So adpoi^tLv, ^vvayelpciv, aXl^ay, es. 
 See notes, i. 51. b, 6s,. b. aTpaTirybs — ' minister of war.' Niebuhr 
 
 compares the re-election of Pericles year after year to that of Lorenzo the 
 Magnificent at Florence year after year to the post of Gonfaloniere. Cf. c. 65. 
 S^Karos aiuTiJs. Cf. Hom. //. ac. 495, 
 
 rbv TptffKaib^Karov fieXirjSia 6v/xbv dwrfvpa. 
 
 \ii\ TToXKaKis—* ne forte,' properly, 'as often happens.' It has this force after 
 el, idv, p.T), 'iva p.-q. TrapaXiirr] Kal y.^ S-gwo-g— ';)fM« by without 
 
 injuring: Justin (iii. 7) says it was actually done. Cf. Tac. Hist. v. 23. 
 * Sicut Cerialis agros villasque Civilis intactos, notd arte ducum sinebat.' So 
 Coriolanus. Fabius's lands were spared by Hannibal, v. Liv. ii, 39, xxii. 
 2 3- G. TO. dyq 4Xavv€iv. Cf. i. 127 i]v dpa }i^ 
 
 8t](u<r(u<riv — d<|>iT]<riv — * in the possible event of their not ravaging.' &pa implies 
 that there existed some ground for such an inference. See also Jelf, § 887. i. 
 Matth. § 529. oIk£os. Cf. Xen. Anab. vii. 4. 
 
 8td \ii.phs i\i^v. A metaphor from driving, * to have well in hand.' Matth 
 § 580. 
 
 (6.) TO. Sk iroXXd tov iroXt'^ov Yvut\L7] k. t. X. * That superiority in war as a 
 general rule is the result of skill and superabundance of resources.' 
 
 (c. ) TTpocri.ovTwv cgaKOo-Cwv TcxXdvTwv K. T. X. — * since the average {iirl rb iroXu) 
 yearly revenue amounted to, ' &c. The original amount levied was 460 talents, b.c. 
 477, Thuc. i. 96. The money was paid to the Hellenotamiie at Delos, which 
 was then the treasury, ra/xLeiov. The treasure was removed from Delos to Athens 
 during the lifetime, and with the concurrence of, Aristides, who had adjusted 
 the original levy (C. Nep. in vit. 3). Wachsnmth supposes this to have betn 
 done B.C. 461, 01. 79. 4. Pericles was appointed the superintendent (v. Diod. 
 xii. 38), as at his instigation, or that of the Samians, the treasury was removed ; 
 and by a despotic decree passed apparently at his suggestion, the amount was 
 
 Chap. 1 3.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 ^^5 
 
 i-aised to 600 talents. Towards the close of the reign of Philip it was raised to 
 1200 talents ; and the management of it was entrusted to the orator Lycurgus, 
 who, like Pericles, defrayed out of it the expenses of restoring and improving 
 the public buildings. Grote considers these 600 talents to be equal to about 
 i38,cx>o^. (cf. Diod. xii. 40). 
 
 dvcv Ti^s &XXt]s irpocrdSov — i. e. <popol, t^Xtj, TrevTrjKoaTr), rifi-qixara, the 
 ptTOLKLov, or 'tax on resident aliens,' the revenues from the mines at Laureium 
 (for which see Boeckh's dissertation at the end of his Pub. Econ., Grote v. p. 
 71 8(1.). Cf. Xen. AnaJb. vii. 1.27. 
 
 rd Yop rrXcioTa . . . fivpia k^fivero. The buildings erected or restored by 
 Cimon and Pericles might easily have cost this sura. Cimon built the temple 
 of Tlieseus, the Dionysiac theatre, the stoae and gymnasium, and embellished 
 the academy, the agora, and other parts of the city, though this Plutarch says 
 he did at his own expense. Pericles completed the fortifications left unfinished 
 by Cimon, rebuilt many temples and buildings which the Persians had de- 
 stroyed, and erected the temple of Eleusis, the Parthenon, and the Propylaea. 
 The last building was one of the noblest in Greece ; it was five years in erecting, 
 and cost 2012 talents = 460, CX50^ (v. Harpocrat. in voc). The whole was of 
 Pentelic marble, and the size of the blocks was enormous, v. Pans. i. 22. 4. 
 Aristoph. Equit. 1326. It was commenced in the Archonship of Eutbymenes — 
 the architect was Mnesicles. (v. Smith's Geog. Diet. art. Athenae ; Miiller's 
 Anc. Art. § 109. 3 ; Wordsworth's Greece, p. 136.) €s noT£8aiav 
 
 From c. Ixx. b, we learn they had then spent 2000 talents on the siege, and from 
 iii. 17, that 3000 Hoplites were engaged in the blockade, each of whom received 
 two drachmae a day. dp^vpCov lirwrfjjiov — ^ argent um signatum.' 
 
 Coined money, as opposed to bullion, dpyvpiov da-q/jiov (vi. 8), aurum infectum, 
 and aurum factum in aKcvrj, dvadrjixaTa, dydXixara, &c. The first stamper of 
 Grecian coins is said to have V>een Phido the Argive, c. B.C. 894, who coined 
 some silver money in ^gina. The oldest Greek coins to which a date can be 
 unhesitatingly assigned, are the silver medals of Alexander the First of Macedon, 
 minted about the year of the Battle of Marathon, v. Cardwell, on Coim, 
 Lect. V. p. no ; Wordsworth's Greece, p. 127. 
 
 {d.) Upd o-KCVT] — * sabred utensils used in public processions and games.' Of 
 these spectacles Pericles was very fond, as one great engine of political power. 
 V. Plut. in Vit. xi. , del ixiv riva 6iav iravTryvpiKTjv ^ effrlaaw ^ irofJLTrrjv ehai fiTj. 
 Xavibfxevos iv dcrrei. These sacred vessels {TrofiTreia) were kept in the Pom- 
 peium, a building near the Piraic gate, and probably chosen for this purpose as 
 the most suitable place near the road to the Piraeus. [Cf. Paus. Att. i. 2; 
 Harpocrat. in v. irofiwcia, Demosth. c. Androt. p. 615.] Pausanias says some 
 of these processions were annual, others at longer intervals. Leake and MuUer 
 suppose the Panathena?a are alluded to ; Forchhammer, the Eleusinian festival. 
 The orator Lycurgus is said to have furnished vases and other ornaments and 
 dresses for the Panathenaic processions. Cf. Paus. Att. i. 29; Plut. vit. 
 Lucurg. o-KvXa MT]8iKd. The scholiast mentions the silver-footed 
 
 throne of Xerxes, and the golden acinaces of Mardonius, which appears to 
 have been worth 3000 Darics. (Dem. adv. Timoc. p. 74 1.) Cf Herod, viii. 
 90, .^sch. Pers. 466. For the grammatical consti-uction of ToXdvTwv, see Jelf, 
 m^Q^ I), Twv dXXwv Upwv. The commentators differ as to 
 
"^66 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book II. 
 
 whether these words refer to sacred ' vessels,' or * to temples.* Arnold main- 
 tains that they can only mean the latter. Bloomf. and Poppo extend the sense, 
 and Kriiger clearly shows from Xenophon {Hell. i. 7. 23), Appian (ii. p. 613), 
 and Isocrates (viii. 126), that the sense need not be restricted. 
 l|€ip7&)VTau — ^ if they should he absolutely excluded/ from all revenue arising 
 from these things, tribute, offerings, &c. o.\nr\% Ti\% 0€ov. 
 
 This was the famous chryselephantine statue of Athena, executed by the hand 
 of Phidias himself. It was twenty-six cubits, or nearly forty feet high. Schol. 
 ad Arist. Pac. 588. Philochorus reckons the moveable drapery at four talents 
 more than Thucydides, and by some the weight is placed even at fifty. (Diod. 
 xii. 40, where Wesseling considers Philochorus' statement to be the most pro- 
 bable, the others using round numbers.) For a full account of the statue, see 
 Miiller's Ancient Art, § 113; Smith's Geo(j. Did. art. Athenae, and Diet, of 
 Biofjr. s.v. Phidias, Vol. iii. p. 250 ; Cramer, v. 2, p. 330, Plin. //. N, xxxvi. 
 § 5. 18, Sillig. The statue was finished and dedicated B.C. 438. 
 o-raOpidv. v. Jelf, § 578. 
 
 (e.) xpvo"Cov dir^4>0ov — ' aurum coctum, refined gold: Cf. Theog. 449, 
 Herod, i. 50 ; opposed to white gold, Xeu/cos xP^vbs, i. e. alloyed with silver ; 
 fr. ^t/'w coquo ; cf. Butt. Irr. r. p. 114. Cramer calculates the value of this 
 gold at more than 150,000/. sterling of our money, ii. p. 297. Poppo considers 
 it = ten times the value of silver. Cf. BOckh, P. (Ec. i. p. 479 and 23, Grote 
 vi. p. 163, Lachares appropriated the gold. v. Paus. i. xxv. 5. 
 ir€piaip€Tov may refer either to the statue or the gold, ' capable of having the 
 gold detached,' or 'capable of being detached.' Bl. and T. K. A. prefer the 
 latter, Poppo and Kriiger the former sense. XP^F^*'"'- The 
 
 causal dative. t«v Trap' ^iroX^iv — 'the men who manned the ram- 
 
 parts,' sing, for plu., * the line of battlements,' or nither the tennination implies 
 he plural, just as we might say the * coping' for the line of ' coping-stones,' cf. 
 ^vXuaiu, ch. 14. a. Hom. //. xii. 381 ; Blomf. ad. ^sch. S. Theb. 30, Ag. 
 372, Arist. Ach. 72, irapa ttjv ^iraX^iv iv tpopvTi^ KaraKelfieyoi. Herod, ix. 7; 
 Thuc. iv. 115, vii. 28. i<pv\aaffov — * were on garrison duty.' 
 
 if) [iCToUwv. Only the richest resident aliens, probably the to-orfXcFj 
 served as oTrXlrai. They mostly served on board ship. (See Poppo, who quotes 
 Biickh's Inscrip. i. p. 306.) Cf. c. 31. h. 1. i. 143, iii. 16. These laortXeis 
 ranked after the irpb^ivoi, needed no TrpoaTdTrjs, and paid no neToiKiov. S. and 
 L. Cf. Clinton, F. II., Vol. ii. p. 389. tov 4>ttXTjptKov tcCxovs. 
 
 The Phaleric or Southern wall (as the Peiraic was sometimes called the 
 Northern wall. Plat. Hep. iv. p. 440), formed one of the legs ((tacAt;, Diod. 
 Sic. xiv. So MeyapiKa aK^Xrj, Arist. Lysist. 1 170), or as the Latin writers call 
 them, the arms {brachia, Li v. xxxi. 26) of the Piraeeus. It ran nearly due 
 south to Phalerum, consequently not parallel to the other two. By avrov tov 
 kvkXov, Thuc. means the circuit of the walls of the Astu itself. The part 
 guarded was forty-three stadia ; the sj)ace between the long wall and the 
 Phaleric was left undefended. Col. Leake says the outer or Piraic wall alone 
 needed guarding, that being the only direction by which an enemy could ad- 
 vance. To the S. and E. of Athens there was no passage but by a circuitous 
 and difficult pass between the city and Mount Hymettus. The two long walls 
 ran in a S.W. direction to Peiraeeus, parallel to, and at a distance of 550 feet 
 
 Chap. 15.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 167 
 
 from, each other. The whole subject of these names is exceedingly compli- 
 cated ; |>erhaps from a misconception of a passage in Harpocration (s. v. dia 
 fx^ffov TfLxovi). It seems, after a careful examination of the different passages, 
 that the following statement may reconcile the conflicting opinions. Tlie two 
 original walls were the Piraic and Phaleric, called respectively to ^opeiov and 
 t6 i^Stiov relxos. These were commenced during the exile of Cimon, B.C. 457, 
 and completed the following year. Having thus far succeeded in carrying his 
 plans, Pericles, some time between this date and the commencement of the 
 Peloponnesian war, urged the Athenians to build the intervening wall. 
 Socrates we know (Plat. Gorg. p. 455) was present at the assembly when he 
 pressed his scheme. The object was to render the communication between the 
 city and Pirajeus quite secure. This intervening wall was called t6 dta fiiaov 
 rerxoj, and in reference to this the Piraic wall was called to ^^ojdev. But very 
 frequently in later times the term of vdriov reixos originally applied to the 
 Phaleric, was given indiscriminately to this intermediate wall from its relative 
 position to the Piraic. After the erection of this intermediate wall, the Phaleric 
 was suffered to fall into decay, as we hear of the destruction of two long walla 
 by the Lacedsemonians (Xen. I/ell. ii. 2), and Conon after the battle of Cnidus 
 probably restored but two. Their foundations may still be traced in many 
 parts. Cf. Cramer, Vol. ii. pp. 311, 12. 347; Smith's Geog. Diet., art. 
 Athense ; Leake's Topogr. p. 351, and Forchhammer's essay, quoted by Smith; 
 Clinton, F. U. ii. p. 394. tov ircpU<r€o-0ai— ' that they would out- 
 
 last the war,' Hobbes. 
 
 Chapter XIV.— (a.) Karao-Kcv^. Cf. ad i. 10, ii. 5 ; Isocr. Areop. c. 20. 
 Ka0aipovvT€S t^v IvXwo-iv— ' taking down and carrying into the city (for i<xeK0- 
 fjii^ovTO refers to this also), the wooden framework and weather-boarding of their 
 houses.' Part of the ravaging an enemy's land consisted in the destruction of 
 these buildings. Cf. Herod, i. 17, who speaking of Alyattes' invasion of the 
 Milesian territory, says, okry/iara to. iiri tCjv dypQv oUre KaT^^aXXev, oi'Te 
 iveiripLTrpr], oOt€ Ovpas atriaira. Cf. Xen. ^nai. ii. 2. 16, rd airb rdv o'lkiC^v 
 ^vXa, and vii. 4. i. EiJpoiav. Cf. i. 23. 114. Tas 
 
 W|o-ovs ToLs ^iriKCiii^vas. e. g. Atalanta (which they afterwards fortified as a 
 garrison, c. xxxii. a), the Petalia?, yEgina, Macris, &c. dvd<rTa<ris 
 
 (what precedes), fi€Tavd<TTaais, c. xvi., 'a breaking up of their establishments and 
 removing elsewhere,' so vii. 75; an unusual sense, copied by Dio Cass, and 
 Appian. B. Its usual application in Herodotus is to the removal of the inhabi- 
 tants of a conquered city, to the country of their victors, and their replacement 
 by settlers sent from their own country, as in the case of ^gina by the Athenians, 
 Samaria by Shalmanezer, &c. Cf. Herod, i. 177, vii. 1 18, ix. 106, &c. 
 
 Chapter XV.— (a.) cWpwv jiaXXov. For ^ fWpois. v. K. ad. i. 85. b. 
 (^€<TTt 5* T}fuv fiaXXov eripuiv. Kara iroXcts- Strabo, ix. 609, enumerates 12. 
 
 irpvravcia— * town halls.' The vp. was the mark of a distinct state or indepen- 
 dent civil community. The common altar- fire was here, (hence derived by some 
 from wvpbs Tap.dov,) and stood in the same relation to the national, as the ecTia. 
 to the domestic home. v. Liv. xii. 20, penetrale Urbis. Cf. Thirlwall's 
 Greece, iii. p. 122. 
 
i68 
 
 NOTES OX THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book TI. 
 
 (M-'EXevo-tvt'ot. Cf. Platon. Me^e:r. p. 339. Plut. t.V. Then. p. 49. 
 ^Pacr£X€vo-€- Vcm. «o Me ^yi roue,' lit. *6em7w.l/«<7.' Cf. Herod ii 2 
 H-cra Tov ^vwrov v. Poppo. ' fTAo .0 po/.V.Va/ ^..aW^y added great porcer: 
 tf.Dion. Hal. ^n^p. 8.. /.era rou Spa^r^pfou .aU...r6.. ^ 
 
 povAcuTTipta. The centres of municipal government, tm,n counrlh, so to speak 
 though of course the analogy is imperfect. y^^o^^yo.,. v. ad. I 
 
 5^. ^1. c. 27. tontimnng to possess and occupy, and reap the fruits ' roi,t 
 Kapjrovs 4>^puu. The union effected by Theseus had no relation to residence 
 but merely incorporation into one political body, Athens being made the 
 supreme seat of government. Cf. Wordsworth's Greece, p 99 
 ^VT€Xo^;vTa>v. Explained by Dr. Arnold 2.b-^ corUributing to it r It surely 
 refersto 'forming one portion of a political union or state by paying joint 
 taxes to It.' SoKrviger. ^Sta^itlichen Genossenschaft.' Cf iv 76 
 Swo^Kta. Hudson considers th,s festival to be equivalent to the 
 /.ero...a, celebrated on the loth day of Hecatomb^on. [Or perhaps we may 
 say more correctly that what in Thucydides' time was called ^Lwa wal 
 ca led .n Plutarch s days ^.eroiK.a. Plut. in vit. Thes. xxiv. ,.] It was ori.n. 
 mUly distinct from, but afterwards identical with, the Panathemea 
 
 (r.)-8r,j.0TcXii. A'. Cf. Bockh. i. p. .,8. 5,;.oreXi that for which the 
 ^ir6Xts furni.hcH the victims. dmoriKii for which the drjfio, (or Srjfioi) 
 OXv^iriov. The Olympeium was one of the most ancient buildings in Athens 
 and was said to have been founded by Deucalion, v. Pans. Attic, i. xviii 8 
 Peisistratus raised a magnificent structure on the site of the old buildinsr but 
 did not live to finish it. After the expulsion of Hippias it remained untouched 
 for 400 years; the prejudices against the Peisistratid.-e, as Mure observes 
 probably operating against its completion. Antiochus Epiphanes contemplated 
 IS completion, but it was eventually finished by Hadrian, who was present at 
 Its dedication (Spartian, in vit. Hadr.). It contained a chryselephantine statue 
 of Jupiter. Its site is still indicated by 16 gigantic Corinthian columns of white 
 marble, to the b. E. of the Acropolis, near the right bank of the Ilissus. Thev 
 are the largest columns now standing in Europe. [See the authorities in Cramer 
 ^ P- 3^4, and Smith, art. Atheme, p. ,89.] Cf. Wordsworth's Greece, p. , ,0' 
 nveiov. Cf. VI. 54, stood near the Olympeium. Cf. Cramer, ii. p. 3,6 
 rrjsSuiTianied .ouporp60or. Hudson. ^ ACfxvats. Limn^ was 
 
 a district S. of the Acropolis. Cramer considers this temple identical with the 
 Leiieum (11 p 3.6). Cf. Harpocrat. in v. Arist. /?«..„ 8. The Dionysiac 
 theatre stood close to it ; v. Leake, Tapogr. p. 54. Poppo quotes Schneider De 
 Re Seemed p. 44. ' Aveccrrrip.aivt. This festival, (distinct from the 
 
 Lemea and rural D.onysia, B<>ckh and Wachsmuth) was celebrated on the nth 
 inh and T3th of Anthesterion. The 12th {ol x6es) was the principal day. y 
 
 T; n,!';*'^ '^' ""^ '^^- ^^' I^^"^-^h. c. AW. p. ,37,, and Schneider,' 
 U.S. Ct. Clinton, n. p. 332. Donaldson's Gk. Theat. p. 132. 
 
 (<^.)--KpVjvT,-'EvvcaKpoi5v({». Hudson considers that "the epithet iweaK 
 IS not to be taken literally, but as equivalent to ^oXvKpov.^ (as Cratinus ap! 
 l^zeiz Utl. v.ii. ,84, calls it) as Virgil says of Timavus, which has but 7 
 niouths ; un,le per ora novem; ^n. i. .45. So Schol. ad. Arist. Equit. ^2^ 
 ^^h^KaKpovvou <yrbp.o.. Hari>ocrat. s. v. ivveaK. and \ourpa06po., where \ee 
 Valesius note. Paus. i. xiv. i. Plin. H. N. iv. 7, and Bekker's Charicles ii. 
 
 Chap. 1 7.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 169 
 
 460. This fountain of Callirhoe was the only spring water used for drinking by the 
 Athenians, all the rest being too salt and brackish for that purpose. A fountain 
 near this spot still retains the name of Kalliroi, and Col. Leake says it is still 
 resorted to as the only sj)ot in the neighbourhood furnishing sweet water, 
 Topofj. p. 47, The natural sources were covered by some kind of building, and 
 fitted with 9 pipes by the Peisistratidre. Enneacrunos was therefore its 
 architectural name, the spring being called Callirhoe. Cf. Stat. Theb. xii. 629, 
 'Callirhoe novies errantibus undis.' It flows from a ridge of rocks crossing 
 the bed of the Ilissus, from which it was distinct ; 7 of these orifices are still visible, 
 [v. Smith, Athence. p. 292. Cramer, ii. p. 338.] ^kcivoC — 'the 
 
 men of that day.' irdXis. K. Cf. v. 18. 10. Arist. Lys. 245. 
 
 487. 
 
 Chapter XVI. — ofiv. Epanalepsis, from c. xiv. olKi^<r€i — 
 
 In the then preraiUng manner of living, in their oicn townships in the country, 
 the Athenians parfiripated. The unusual construction of a dative after 
 /xereixov instead of a genitive, is variously explained by commentators ; but a 
 dative after the uncompounded fiera in the sense of local union or community 
 is common enough, v. Jelf, § 636. ii. b, and § 642. b. Poppo produces two 
 instances of a dat. after Koiviaveiv from Demosthenes, and the Scholiast simply ex- 
 ])lains it as an antiptosis, which is most natural. Baver would supply the prepo- 
 sition iv, • ha<l a share in.' Abresch. says it is an independent dative =* quod 
 attinet ad. ' Kriiger supposes an omission. ttj eirl iroXv must be taken 
 
 adjectively — ' the long protracted residence.' TravoiKT]<r£a — ' most of 
 
 them having been born or bred in the country, or having settled and lived there, 
 they and all their families.' Cf. Thirlwall, iii. p. 122. ov paSCcas. 
 
 A litotes — ' n-ith great reluctance.' fX€Tava<rTa<r6is. An idea 
 
 exactly conveyed liy the French ' demcnager.' avetXT]4>0T6s — 
 
 * wiedcr-hergesfellt,' K., implies that they had 're-collected round them all their 
 ancient comforts of villas, farm and out-buildings, household furniture and 
 decorations, farm stock,' &c. Cf. Isocr. Areop. 20. "P<i, as 
 
 Thirlwall remarks (u. s.), 'though the incorporation of the Attic townships had 
 for ages extinguished their political independence, it had not interrupted their 
 religious traditions, or effaced the j^culiar features of their local worship.' Bl. 
 c<mi pares Aristoph. Pax, 574. biairav implies ' changing their home, as well 
 as their way of life. ' 
 
 Chapter XVII. — (a.) oU-^o-eis — 'had dwellings of their own to go to.* 
 The whole number of houses in Athens has been reckoned at about ten thousand. 
 Cf. Xen. Hell. ii. 3. 24. Mem. iii. 6. 14. (Econ. viii. 22. Most of these 
 were small and incommodious (see Bekker's Charicles, quoted above), none 
 al)ove one story high, consti-ucted either of a framework of wood (^i^Xwo-ts) or of 
 unbumt bricks. Even those of Themistoclea, Aristides, and Cimon, were very 
 ordinary buildings, (v. Demosth. c. Arisfocr. p. 689, Olynth. iii. p. 35, 6.) 
 Their insignificance is shown by the small prices they fetched, i. e. from three or 
 five minae to 120 ; 50 minge was a considerable price. v. Bockh, P. E. p. 66. 
 The influx of a rural population (Acharnae alone furnishing probably a popula- 
 tion of I2,cx>0, not including slaves) into a city already containing 120,000 
 
170 
 
 KOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book II. 
 
 persons according to Clinton, or 192,000 according to Leake, must have been 
 most distressing. Cf. Clinton, F. U. ii. 387, Leake, p. 618, and Biickh. p. 30, 
 who fixes the population of the city and harbours at 180.000. v. Smith, art. 
 Athens, p. 622. ra kpr\Y.(x--' places void of buildiny.' 'EXcvcrivCov. 
 
 The temple of Ceres and Proserpine, where the lesser Eleusinian mysteries 
 were celebrated. Paus. Att. xiv. It stood probably in an island of the 
 Ilissus, a retired spot, where foundations are still discernible, v. Leake p. 1 15. 
 Cramer, ii. p. 339. rb II^XaonyiKdv. A spot originally inhabite<l 
 
 by the Pelasgians who fortified the Acropolis, and from which they were 
 expelled because they plotted against the Athenians. It was applied not only 
 to a portion of the walls, but a space of ground below. It is placed by Leake 
 and most authorities at the N.W. angle of the Acropolis, the S. side being 
 called Cimonium. Smith, A theu(e, p. 266. Cramer, ii. 332, and cf. Schol. 
 Arist. Av. 833. Herod, v. 64, ii. 51, vi. 137. Paus. i. 28. 3. Thuc. iv. 
 109. Hesych. v. T€\a<TyiK6v, and Smith, art. Pelasgi. dp-ydv— 
 
 'unoccupied: Grote, vi. p. 173; 'untrodden; Thirlw. iii. p. 113. 
 ii<oKridr]—' was blocked up with buildimjs: ' Impletum fuit habitaturis," Bav. 
 Cf. Soph. GaI. C. 27. Reissig. 
 
 (6.)— 7^vc<r6ai. Sc. hoKovvLv. K. Karfo-Ktvaa-avro—'richteten 
 
 »ich haMich ein^ K. Xen. Cyr. vii. 5. 37, and see Arnold's note. 
 Twv Tcix«V. Cf. Arist. Eq. 789. oIkovvt' iv rais (pihaKva^fft. kolI yvirapiois /cat 
 TvpyiSioLs. 
 
 iC')~iX<i»pr]a-t—'fagsfe; K. Properly applied to the measure of content 
 
 of a vessel. Herod, i. 51. b fih xp^<^^os Kpr^r-qp x^P^^^v dfi<popias 
 
 i^aKO(Tiovs.^ Xen. Anab. i. v. 6. iiortpov Stj— * at a time considerably 
 
 subsequent. ' Karavcifidntvoi— ' having portioned out aniomj themselves. ' 
 
 gvfifxdxovs— c.^r. Thessalians, &c. v. c. xxii. ky rovrcp 
 
 irapao-KcvT^s. v. Jelf, § 442. 6, and see Arnold's notes on viii. 5. i. 
 
 Chapter XVIII.— («.) OlvoViv. AVhen the name of a place is defined as 
 belonging to such a country, governed by a preposition, the country- usually has 
 the article, the place not. So i. c. iii. iffrpdrcvaay rrjs OeffaaXi-ns eirl 
 4>dpaa\oK K. Tliis was not the Demus near Marathon, but a town near 
 Eleuthene, and on one of the roads from Attica into Bceotia. It belonged to 
 the tribe Hippothoontia. (Herod, v. 74. Harpocrat. in v. Sophocles ap. 
 Strab. viii. p. 375.) Its exact site is not agreed upon by topographers. Sir W. 
 GeJl identifies it with Gypto Castro. Grote (vi. p. 170, n.) supposes Archi- 
 damus marched over Geraneia, and fell into this road in order to receive the 
 Boeotian contingent. Wordsworth's Greece, p. 28. Cf. Plat. Protag. § i. 
 Wesseling ad. Diod. Sic. iv. 60. ^pov^U^—^ a garrisoned fort} 
 
 Archidamus probably thought it unsafe to have so strong a fortress on his rear 
 or flank. 0. 6ir<jT€ KaToXdpoi. The optative of indefinite fre- 
 
 quency. KaraXap-^aveiv is used without the accusative in the sense of befalling. 
 
 (6.)— dXXws. Either simply 'in other ways,' or better still, 'fruitlessly, to 
 no purpose/ Hn a way other than the right.' See Buttman, Lexilogus, and L. 
 and S. lAix. on the Homeric use of the word. gvva-ywY-f) is variously 
 
 explained by the commentators: i. * /» bringing the war about,' Poppo. 
 2 . ' Wh He the war was a-gathering, ' Dale. 3. ' Jn the congress held to deliberate on 
 
 Chap. 19.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 171 
 
 the war,' B. The first seems the best interpretation ; it may include 'the getting 
 together everything necessary or serviceable for the prosecution of the war/ 
 such as troops, ships, stores, &c., and the words of Thucydides just below seem 
 to confirm this, iircLbri re ^vveX^ero 6 aTparSs. 4m|i.ovVj. The 
 
 variety of words used to express the inaction and dilatoriness of Archidamus is 
 noticeable, imfxavf), (rxoXai6r7/s, etrlax^cn^, /aAXt^ctis, Kad45pa. See the note in 
 Mr. Shilleto's * Thucydides or Grote,' p. 20, on this 'restless love of change in 
 the use of words and constructions,' and i. 38. c. 
 
 (c.)— 8td Tdxovs. V. Jelf, § 627. i. 3. avii\€V—' held cdoof 
 
 lept quiet: Cf. vii. 48. c, viii. 94. b. Xen. Hell. i. 6. 14. 
 
 Chapter XIX.— (a.) irao-av IScav— * having tried every conceivable form of 
 attack.' Cf. ad i. 109. tov 0€povs tiK^oXfivro^—' when the summer 
 
 was at its height and the corn ripe.' T.K.A., i.e. the end of May according to 
 Kruger ; the end of June, Arnold ; the middle of June, Grote and Niebuhr. 
 Col. Leake says the harvest begins about June 10, and does not end before July 
 70, or the beginning of August. 
 
 (6.)— *EX€v<riva. Eleusis, though a place of considerable importance, was 
 classed among the Attic Demi (Paus. Att. 38. Schol. ad. Soph. a\ C. 1050), and 
 belonged to the tribe Hippothoontis. The Eponymus Hero had a chapel in 
 its vicinity. It had a citadel of some strength, comprised within the precincts 
 of the temple of Ceres (Liv. xxxi. 25). It is now an inconsiderable village, 
 retivining its name of Lesina. The temple which had been burnt by the Per- 
 sians was rebuilt by Ictinus, the architect of the Parthenon, under the adminis- 
 tration of Pericles. The bust of the colossal statue of Ceres is now in the 
 British Museum, having been brought to England in 1802. (Cramer, ii. 360, 
 sq., and the authorities there quoted. Wordsworth's Greece, p. 8r.) 
 0p'id<riov TTtUov took its name from the Demus Thria or ITirio, ii. 2t (v. ad 
 i 114). Cf. Herod, viii. 7. 65. Athen. vi. 66. Strab. ix. p. 395- It was 
 about three miles N.E. of Eleusis. 'PcCtovs. These were two salt 
 
 lakes near the shore, on the right bank of which ran the sacred road, the ancient 
 road from Eleusis to Athens. They were supposed to come from the Euripus of 
 Chalcis, and being sacred to Ceres and Proserpine, none but priests were allowed 
 to fish in them, Paus. Att. 38 (Gell ap. Cramer, ii. 356). Grote, vi. p. I75» 
 * The straight road from Thria led directly to Athens, across the ridge of Mount 
 jEgaleos ; lut Archidamus turned off to the westward, leaving that mountain 
 on'his right until he came to Kropeia, where he crossed a portion of the line of 
 Jigaleos over to Acharn*. He was here about seven miles from Athens.' 
 ACy6\Mv, now Scaramanga, a continuation of Corydallus, rises above the coast, 
 stretching northwards into the interior of Attica. From its summit Xerxes 
 watched the battle of Salamis. Herod, viii. 90. Demost. c. Thnocr.y. 466. 
 Kpwiretas. For the old reading KCKpoirias, cf. Schol. ad. Arist. Equit. 80. 
 Axapvds. Acharme, the chief of the Attic Demi, with a population of 
 12,000, furnished 3000 Hoplites to the Athenian army. It was about sixty 
 stadia from Athens, which agrees with the situation of Menida, where extensive 
 ruins are still visible. It gave its name to one of the gates of Athens, the Pylae 
 Acharnicse. It was flourishing as well by its com, vines and olives (the ivy, 
 too, was said to have been first discovered here, Paus. Att. 32), as by its pecu- 
 
172 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book II. 
 
 Chap. 22.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 liar abundance of charcoal-burning from the forests of ilex on the neighbouring 
 hills. The Acharnians were celebrated for their sturdy valour even in the time 
 of Pindar, 'Axdpuai evdvopes, Pind. Nem. ii. 24. Cf. Aristoph. Acharn. pass, 
 who describes them as 
 
 vpea^vral rtve^ 
 
 AxapUKOl, (TTlTTTol f^pOVTiS VpiviVOl 
 
 CLTepd/xoves, Mapaduvofidxai- acfxi'ddp.vivot. 
 
 (with Elmsley's note). Cf. Wordsworth's Greece, p. 85. sq. 
 Ka0€?6fjL€vot ^s. Cf. ad. c. xiii. a. 
 
 Chapter XX.- (a.) rva»tiT)—Vfs/7«, or o^vVf^' ^o-poXr). Tlie 
 
 usual meaning of this word in Herodotus and Thucyd. is a * mountain pass,' 
 (V. Herod, vii. 172. 5 ; Xen. Anab. i. 2. 21 ; Hell. v. 4. 48 ; Thuc. iii. 112, 
 iv. 83. 127.) In a doubtful passage, viii. 31, it means apparently 'an attack.* 
 Does it mean here 'in this invasion of Attica?' If so, it is, Popjx) observes, an 
 unusual inatince of the dative of time, like the Latin adventu, discessu, &c. 
 irtpuSeiv TfiT]0T)vai. Jelf, § 687. i, where the notion is not of permitting some- 
 thing already existing, but something which may exist. V€<Jtt]ti. 
 Abstract for concrete, as c. 8 and 21. 
 
 (6.) dir^vrqcrav avrw. The more usual construction of this verb is with ^s 
 and iiri, with an accusative, as iv. 77. 89, vii. 1. 22. 35. It occurs again 
 with the dative iv. 78. c, Kal rore wopevo/x^vif} ai'r(p diravT-^ffauTes, P. 
 €irtTTJ8€ios lv<rTpaToir€8cvo-ai. Cf. Jelf, § 677, 2. obs. i. Tlie olyect of the in- 
 finitive made into the subject of the verb. So Herod, ix. 7, iTriTr)d€u}TaT6v iaTLV 
 €/j./xax^<ra<TdaiTbQpid(novTr€blov. SoEurip. Phcen.'jig; Ilippol.^G^; Herod. vi. 102. 
 
 (c.) <rrd<ris — 'a division of feel in j or counselis.' Cf. iii. 2. c, i8i(ji dvSpes 
 Kara, ffrdaiv, and vii. 50. So /card ^vardam in the following chap. In c. xxii. 
 it has a somewhat different meaning, q. v. Cf ^sch. P. V. 200. 
 
 Chapter XXL— (a.) nXcKrroavdKTa. Cf. ad i. 107 and 114. 
 0piwt«. Cf. ad c. xix. and i. 1 14. jitjiviipL^voi ore. Jelf, 804. 8. 
 
 After the verbs p.ifxpr]fiai, olda, d/coiJw et sirailia. instead of a substantival clause 
 introduced by 6ti or ws, there not unfrequently follows an adverbial clause with 
 ore (Poet, fjfxos, r]vlKa). This appears to arise from some ellipse, as tov xP^vov, 
 which the very notion of memory implies. Xen. Cyr. i. 6. 8 ; Plat. Menex. 
 p. 79 D ; Soph. (Ed. Tyr. 1 133. So sometimes in Latin, meniini quum darem ; 
 vidi quum prodiret ; audivi eum quum diceret. llie use of d after such verbs 
 as eo.viid^ij3, &c., is similar. OTpdrw. Jelf, '§ 604. 2. AVith verbs 
 
 of co>ni«</ and going, that whereby the person comes or is accompanied is in 
 the dative ; generally collective nouns, as arpdri^, ari)\i^, trX-qdu, or their com- 
 plements as (TTpaTLwrai^. Cf. Thuc. i. 102 ; Xen. Cyr. i. 4. 17. 
 ir6i<r0T)vai t^v dvax«pTi<rtv. See Jelf, 545. 3. Cf. Thuc. i. 126, iTirerpaM.- 
 fiivoL Tr)v (pvXaKrjp. 
 
 (b.) |v<rTd<r6is. Lat. circuli, conciliabula, 'forming tumult uoiis assemblages.* 
 See several similar passages collected by Bloomf. by later imitators, and 
 c. Ixxxviii., al<jd6p.€vo% 8ti /card o-^as avrovs ^vviaTdficvoi i<po^ovvTo. Grote cf. 
 Eurip, Heracl., 416, Androm. 1077. 
 
 (c.) xP^o-l^oXo^oi. Cf. viii. I. iTpYITO. Tlie reading of the 
 
 best MSS. for iopurjTO. So unusual a word could not have been admitted by 
 mistake, and the use of dpyi^ in the sense of 'a passionate impulse,' and 
 €vopyf}T(i}s, without any passionate impulse, i. 122, are quite Thucydidean, 
 T. K. A. Dr. Arnold says these words are added because different persons 
 ran to listen to different prophecies, each choosing those which encouraged his 
 own opinions, or accorded with his own feelings, opydoj occurs, though rarely, 
 in the active, A'. wv dxpodcrOai,. We must supply i^KpoCovTo 
 
 from aKpodadai. The verb being placed in the dependent, and not the principal 
 clause, must be supplied fto the principal clause in the number and person re- 
 quired by its subject. Jelf, § 895. 3. ovk €Xaxi<rTT|v potpav. v. 
 sup, , note on Acharnse. avrfpcOiorro. So fjceTewpos, chap. viii. 
 ^KdKk^ov. A mixtid idea of blame and reproach, B. * They angrily reproached 
 him ; perhaps better, * reviled hi in an a coward / i. e. Cleon and his fellows, 
 Grote, vi. p. 177. ciregd-yow. Jelf, §885, obs. 2. The oralio 
 obliqua used to mark that a statement is made, not as by the writer himself as 
 a fact, but as passing in his own or another person's mind, ' quod exercitum 
 non educeret (e mente Acharnensium).' Soph. Track. 903, Kpuxj/aa-' i/xavrriv 
 Ivda fir] Tis eifflSoi, yEsch. P. V. 203. 
 
 Chapter XXII. — (a.) ov rd dpicnra. a Meiosis for Aca/cws 0/). 
 eKKXi](rCav t€ ovk iiroUi ovBk ^vKkoyov. This, as Minister of War, Pericles 
 had the power of doing, cf. c. lix, ^vWoyov TroLrjaas, in d'ia-TpaTrjyei, and Plut, 
 Pericl. xxxiii. This power of convoking the ecclesia was shared with the 
 strategi by the prytaneis. Cf. iv. 118, v. Schiiman de Comitiis, c. iv. p. 62; 
 But besides this power of calling a meeting, the strategos had also the power 
 of preventing or postponing those regular meetings which commonly took place 
 at fixed times, i.e. four times in each Prytaneia. |vXXoyos is the 
 
 generic term, »'. e. any public meeting invested with an authorised character. 
 lKKXT]crCa is the specijic assembly. Cf. Grote, vi. p. 178 and 226. K. quotes 
 Plat. (wrg. p. 456, iv iKK\Tj(Tl<;/i rj cV &\\y rivl ^vWdyciJ. tov prj. 
 
 V. Jelf, § 749. I. 
 
 (/>.) Ppaxcua = (T/xt/cpd. Cf. not. ad i. 14. c. * a slight affair of cavalry.' So 
 S. John vi. 7, iVa ^'/caaros ai'rwi' ^po-x^ Tt \dl3r}. <i>pv'YCois. The 
 
 site of this spot is unknown (Cramer ii. p. 415). T. K. A. supposes x^/Jta to 
 be understood - ' the dry plains or tracts.' (ppvyios = ^rjpds, Hesych. 
 tA.os. The regular WXos was 2048 men. T. K. Arnold says : but ? 
 0€<r(raXois. On the ancient connexion between'Athens and Thessaly, v. 
 Wordsworth's Greece, p. 99, Thuc. i. 102, 107. Pausanias saw the graves of 
 these Thessalians, near Athens, on the side of the Academy. I. xxix. 5. 
 Grote, vi. p. 179. a.vd\ovro, ' carried off their dead.' This fact 
 
 shows the equality of the conflict. 
 
 (c.) Aapwratoi. The ohler Attics prefer the single <r in the spelling of this 
 and similar words. Ilapdo-iot - Ilvpdo-ioi. These two names are 
 
 probably identical, or perhaps one ought to be expunged. The Magnesian 
 tribe mentioned by Steph. Byz. as quoted by Bl., having no connexion with 
 them, Poppo says. Gott. would read irapaXioi, but these were a Melian race. 
 Strabo (ix. 5, 14) mentions Pyrasus, a sea- port of the Thessalian Thebae. Cf. 
 P. K. and Bl. It is mentioned by Homer, //. ii. 695, and Col. Leake thinks 
 
J74 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDKS. 
 
 [Book II. 
 
 its ruins are now to be seen near Kokkina. (Smith's Did. of Geog. v. 
 Pyrasus). <rTd<re«s, 'each from, i.e. delef/ated by, his own particular 
 
 political parti,: That the oligarchs should have sent one is, as Kriiger says, 
 surprising, and therefore Thucydides mentions it. M^vwv. Poppo 
 
 says this is not the Menon mentioned by Xenophon and Plato. See hi.s note 
 on Xen. Anab. i. 2. 6, though there is no chronological argument against it. 
 
 Chapter XXIII.— («.) Apavrcs. Applied to the movement from their quar- 
 ters of both land and sea troops, usually of the latter (where an ellipsis of rd 
 tcTTia used to be supplied) ; as applied to the former, cf. h. 1. c. 98, iii. 96, 
 ^^'- " • "^"v ^V■*^v rivas dXXovs. For the names of the Demi in 
 
 this district see Smith, art. Attica, p. 329. ndpvT]eos. The 
 
 loftiest mountain range in Attica, branching off in an easterly direction from 
 Citharon. These two hi-h and in many places inaccessible mountain ranges 
 formed the impassable barrier of Attica. Parnes terminates on the sea-coast 
 above the promontory Rhamnus. Its modern name is Nozia. It is from 
 Parnes that Aristophanes evokes his clouds. (Xub. 323). 
 
 BpiXVjo-o-ov. This mountain chain is identified by Col. Leake, Dodwell and 
 other topograpliers, with Mount Pentelicus (Pans. i. 32. 1), which was perhaps 
 Its later name. It is still called Penteli or Mendeli, from the ancient Demus 
 HfKrAr; (Steph. Byz. s. v.). Its magnificent marble quarries are well known. 
 The whole range is known by the modem name of Turko Vonni. (Gell's Iti)i. 
 p. 68). This plain, ravaged by the Lacedtemonians, is probably the celebrated 
 Diacrian table-land ; and was important, not only from its own fertility, but 
 also as being the route by which the corn from Eubcea was imported into Attica 
 [v. Smith, Attica, p. 322 ; Cramer ii. p. 400 sq.] ^as Uarhv 
 
 vavs. Cf. 0. xvii. c. In c. Ixvi. of this book we find the same relative numbers • 
 1000 hoplites to 100 ships. ^fifi€£vavT€s. The invasion lasted 
 
 thirty or forty days ; and the statement of Thucydides that they stayed as long 
 as their provisions lasted, contradicts Dio<lorus' account that the coasting ex- 
 pedition round Peloponnesus recalled the Lacediemonians. Diod. xii. 42 
 Scov-'for mch time as they had.' Cf. Livy, xxiv. ii, cum triginta dierum 
 coctis cibariis. oix laircp ^o-c'paXov. In order to commit the 
 
 greater depredation. Schol. 'flptuTrcJv. Oropus was a town near 
 
 the sea-coast in the vale of the Asopus, and in the debateable land which was so 
 long an object of dispute between the Athenians and BtBotians. Though pro- 
 perly in Boeotia, as the Diacrian range of hills was the natural boundary of 
 Attica, Oropus from very eariy times was in the hands of the Athenians It 
 was a place of great importance to them, as keeping open their communication 
 with Euboea, which otherwise could only have been effected by doubling Cape 
 Sunium. In B.C. 412, the Boeotians became masters of it (Thuc. viii. 60) and 
 ten years after removed the site of it seven stadia from the sea. Of this latter 
 town the ruins are visible at (h-opo ; of the ancient seaport at Scala. In my- 
 thological times it was celebrated as the spot near which Amphiaraus was 
 swallowed up with his chariot and horses. IIcipaiKyiv Grote 
 
 prefers the reading TpaXK^v (vi. p. 189). and Poppo admits it into the text 
 Cramer seems also inclined to it (ii. p. 273). See the whole question discussed 
 in the Philol. Mus. 1. p. 193 ; in connexion with the passage, Thuc. iii 91 
 
 Chap. 25.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 ^5 
 
 But all the bePt MSS, have Tleipal'K-riv, without variation ; and Steph. Byzant., 
 the chief authority for the change, has clearly misquoted the passage ; and the 
 state of the MSS., especially of that part of St. Byz., is excessively corrupt. 
 
 Chap. XXIV. (a.) <f)vXaKds. Not ' guards' <t>(>\a.Kas, (as Arnold renders 
 it), but 'established garrisons on the coasts, and stationed blockading or guard- 
 ships off the shore.' ' The Athenians made arrangements for placing Attica in 
 a permanent state of defence both by sea and land,' Grote, vi. p. 185. 
 X^Xta ToXavra . . . 4|a£pcTa. 'They set apart 1000 talents out of the 
 treasure in the Acropolis as an inviolable reserve not to be touched except on 
 the single contingency of a hostile naval force about to assail the city, with no 
 other means at hand to defend it,' Grote, vi. p. 185. The sentence of capital 
 punishment was repealed, and the money appropriated to meet the imminent 
 peril of the state in the twentieth year of the war, after the terrible news of 
 the revolt of Chios. Cf. viii. 15. It is amusing to see the contradictory con- 
 clusions as to the barbarism of democratical governments drawn by Mitford 
 and Grote from this statement of Thucydides. (v. Grote I. c.) 
 
 (6.) ^'irixj/Ti<|>i:<rTi. Cf. ad i. 87. Any one might move the question (cl'irri), 
 but only one of the ten Proedroi, i. e, the president for the day, could put the 
 question to the vote, Bl. Ktvciv. Cf. ad i. 143, viii. 15, with 
 
 Arnold's note. vt]itt] = va\>TiKw. So iv. 85. d. 
 
 GdvttTov \r\^i.o.v. In this connexion Kriiger observes Odvaros stands without 
 the article. Jelf, § 580. i. Tpi.T]pdpxovs, Here * men to command 
 
 as well as to equip the triremes: In later times it was not so: see Smith's 
 Diet. Antiq. s.v. 
 
 Chapter XXV. (a.) U€ili^v\i\ia\(av—e.g. Acamanians, Zacynthians, and 
 their countrymen from Naupactus. &XXa t€ ^KdKovv — * derastattd 
 
 other places in the course of their circumnavigation: Diod. specifies the 
 Argolic Acte (xii. 43. Cf. Cramer iii. p. 34). MeOwviiv rfis 
 
 AaKwviKTJs. This is added to distinguish it from the Argolic Methone, between 
 Epidaurus and Troezen, which was occupied by the Athenians in the seventh 
 year of the war (iv. 45). (There were besides three other towns of the same 
 name in Macedon, Thessaly, and Euboea). It was, strictly speaking, in 
 Messenia, a little to the south of the harbour of Pylos. (So Xen. Jlell. vi. 2. 
 19, speaks of the Sphagian islands as being off the Laconian, i. e. the Messenian 
 coast. Pausanias says it took its name from the rock Mothon, which formed 
 the breakwaterof its harbour {Messen. xxxv.). The Lacedaemonians established 
 a colony of Nauplians in Methone, who had been expelled from their native 
 city by the Argives (Paus. u. s.). There is a modern Greek town called Modon, 
 with a fortress built by the Venetians, near which Sir W. Gell saw vestiges of 
 a city, with a citadel and some marbles, at a place called Palaio Mothone. 
 (Cell's /tin. p. 54 ; Cramer, iii. p. 138 ; Smith's Diet. Geog. s.v.). 
 avBpiimuv ovK iv6vr(av — i.e. 'no regular garrison,' P. *No portion of the 
 one- third of the available military force of Sparta left at home for the defence 
 of the country,' T. K. A. In joining in this attack on Methone, the Corcyrseans, 
 as Poppo observes, violated the principles of their purely defensive alliance 
 
176 
 
 NOTES OX THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book II. 
 
 {iirifiaxia, i. 44). Tliis was probably the result of the embassy to Corey ra 
 alluded to in cap. vii. of this book ; the invasion of Attica by the Spartans 
 justifying a naval irruption of the allies of Athens into Peloponnesus. 
 
 {h.) Bpo<r(8as 6 TcXXiSos. We are here introduced for the first time to 
 the man most eminent not only among his own countrymen, but among all 
 whose names are mentioned as connected with this war. We may j ustly bestow on 
 him the praise of having 'had the head to devise, the tongue to persuade, and the 
 hand to execute' (not any mischief, as was said of Cromwell), but every scheme 
 evincing daring enterprise, brilliant execution, and the soundest patriotism. 
 Fn.m this time until his untimely death there is no single gallant achievement 
 that was not either planned or conducted by him. He was (a rare qualification 
 with his countrymen) ovk dSuvaros diruv (iv. 84), fiirpios, irp<^vs (iv. 108), 
 dpaarripios ets rd Trdj/ra, /card Travra dyaddi- v\ti<jTov d^ios Aa/ceSatyuofioij 
 yevo/xevos, and these noble qualities were of this essential service to his country- 
 men, that they inspired a ground of confidence among those whom they wished 
 to win over that he was a fair sample of what might be expected in every 
 Spartan commander: iXirida iyKar^Xnre ^^^aioy us Kal ol &\\oi toiovtoI eiaiv 
 (81). Such ai-e the scattered expressions in which Thucydides, an historian 
 above all others chary of praise, sums up the character of this noble man. The 
 words of Diodorus are simple but expressive— 1/^0$ fi^v cbp d\Kv 5^ Kai aubpuq. 
 dta(p^pa}v, xii. 43. 8ia8pa^«v. He forced his way through the 
 
 Athenian line while their attention was fully engaged with the fort in front of 
 them, and threw himself into {ia-triinti i%) the town, and saved it (ircptciroiTio-c), 
 effiriTTTetp seems to be the technical military term ; in Latin, intromittere of 
 Liv. xxiv. 13. [No doubt the primitive notion of TeTpafi/n^vov is having * their 
 faces turned towards'— the natural position of all persons intently occupied on 
 anything, but to translate it so literally, as Bl. does, seems childish]. Kruger, 
 cf. iii. 102, Trepieiroirjffav rb x<^p'^ov. kTrrxvi^x. B. quotes Westermaim' 
 
 Quixst. Dem. ii. 26 (who describes these public honours as 'civitatis gratiarum 
 actio erga civem qui munere aliquo in commodum reipublicte bene functus erat,') 
 and a decree preserved in Plut. Vif. x. Met. p. 851, dadxOat t^ S^/i^ (Traip^Jai 
 AvKOvpyov—dpcTTJs 'iveKa Kai diKaioavvijs. In addition to these public honours 
 he was probably made Ephor Eponymus the next September. Cf. Xen. JJell, 
 ii. 2. 10. 
 
 {c.) orxo'vTCS rfjs 'HXcias €S *€idv. So above, is Ueduvrju ttjs AaKuviKrjs, 
 and Thuc. passim. On the omission of the article here, the ret/ular construction, 
 [cf. c. 1 8. h. 1. ] Bl. founds a surely unnecessary theory that «t>eia and i] *eta are dis- 
 tinct places ; the former a peninsula, the latter a city. A look at any good map 
 (e.g. Cramer's) will show this to be incorrect. The Athenians, be it observed, 
 were sailing northward, purposing to attack Pheia (as is <i>€iav shows). From the 
 position of the town, just at the neck of the peninsula, on whichever side of the 
 peninsula Ichthys they had landed, Thuc. words would be correct. But they de- 
 barked their troops on the south side, in what is now called the Bay of Katicolo 
 which may be described as a x^P^ov dXlfxlvoy. Wlien overtaken by the storm, t^ 
 avoid being caught in this open roadstead, they sailed round the peninsula to tlie 
 true port of Pheia, which was on the A', side. vii. 31. This is the creek of 
 Pontikocastro, or Pundikocestro, where some vestiges of the Hellenic walla 
 of Pheia are still found. The jarmnotitory Pheia of Strabo (viii. 343) lies stiU 
 
 Chap. 26.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 ^77 
 
 further again to the N. and is identified with the modem headland of Skaphidi. 
 Near this is a mountain torrent which flows into the sea, and is probably the 
 lardanus (on which Homer places Pheiae. II. vii. 135), and the modern 
 Cardamo. Cf. Xen. Hell. vi. ii. 19., Horn. Od. xv. 297. (Cramer, iii. p. 87. 
 Leake's Morea^ ap. Smith, Geoy. Diet, s.v.) koCXt^s "HXtSos 
 
 ' Hollow Elis' was the name originally given to the plain of the Peneus to dis- 
 tinguish it from the mountainous district of the Acroreia ; but as this was the 
 larger and more fertile part, the name was given to the whole N. territory, to 
 distinguish it from the dei)endent districts of Pisatis and Triphylia. No doubt 
 the name of Elis, FAXis, is connected with the Latin Vallis. (Smith, Diet. s.v.). 
 dv^ftov KarCovTOs. K. cf. c. 84. rb irvevfxa /carpet, vi. 18, the regular term for a 
 squall coming sweeping down : so S. Luke viii. 23, Kari^T} XalXaxj/ dvip.ov els 
 r7)v Xl/jLvrju. So Acts xxvii. 14, ^^aXe Kar avrijs Avefios tv<Po}pik6s. 
 \ii\i.al6\i.€voi — 'makinr/ bad weather of it,' as our sailors say. So Acts xxvii. 
 1 8, <X(po5pu)s 8i x^^P-f^^o/xivoov r)fiu>v. ircpUirXeov. ' Strong winds 
 
 on a harbourless coast induced the captains to sail with most of the troops round 
 Cape Ichthys, in order to reach the harbour of Pheia on the northern side of it, 
 while the Messeniau hoplites, marching by land across the promontory, attacked 
 Pheia, and carried it by assault, 'Grote, vi. p. 181. These were the Messenians 
 of Naupactus. 
 
 ((/.) dvaXafipdvovo-i — 'pick up.' 1^ iroXXi?! ^hx] crrpoLTla. By 
 
 this time the main body of the Eleians had come to the reinforcement of the 
 men of Pisatis. 
 
 CHAPTER XXVI.— ircpl. For the force of irepl see not. ad i. 14. b. 
 * To coast round the shores of the Locri Opuntii and Epicnemidii, and keep 
 guard over Euboea, whence they derived their com, and where they had de- 
 posited their cattle.' diropdo-CLS — 'descents.' ttjs tc irapaGoXao-o-Cov 
 Kal OpdvLOv. The grammaticiil construction is borne out exactly by the geo- 
 graphical position of Thronium, which lies inland at some distance from the 
 coast, on the banks of the Boagrius (Horn. //. ii. 533), twenty stadia from 
 Cape Cnemis, which gives its name to the Epicnemidii (Strab. ix. 426). The 
 town was afterwards enslaved by the Phocian general, Onomarchus. Sir W. 
 Gell identifies its site with a ruin near Longachi, where an inscription containing 
 the name was also discovered. (Cramer, ii. p. 114.) 'AXdirrj — 
 lies a few miles to the east of Cnemis, on the coast, in the territory of the 
 Locri Opuntii. Gell discovered its ruins on an insulated hill near the shore. 
 The Locri Ozolae had also a town of the same name. op.'^povs. 
 Cf. i. 108, iii. 101. 
 
 Chapter XXVII.— (a.) dv€<mi<rav. Cf. n. ad c. 14. The word implies 
 not only the expulsion of the ^Eginetans, but the occupying their island with 
 settlers of their own. {KXrjpovxoi, iii. 50.) These men are of course Slttolkoi. with 
 reference to the country they leave — i. e. emigrants, and Iitoikoi to that in which 
 they settle as immigrants. For the Dorian origin of ^gina, see Strabo, viii. 
 375 ; Paus. Corinth. 29. We leam from i. 105. 108, that the Athenians had 
 taken seventy of the iEginetans' ships, forced them to surrender the rest, de- 
 molish their fortifications, and submit to taxation. They now eject the whole 
 
 N 
 
178 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [book II. 
 
 population : but not content with this, in the eighth year of the war, they made 
 a descent upon Thyrea, burnt down the city in which the J^.ginetans had taken 
 refuge, sacked the whole place, and carrying the survivors in chains to Athens, 
 put the whole number to death in cold blood : 5id rrjv vporipav del wore ^x^pav 
 as Thucydides quaintly adds, iv. 57. Cf. Xen. Hell. ii. 2. 5. 
 
 (6.) Ovp^av is interesting as the place where the battle took place between 
 the 300 Spartans and 300 Argives, described by Herodotus, 1. 82, who, we 
 may observe, uses the plural form of the word, Qvpeai. Cf. Ov. Fast. ii. 663. 
 The modern Astro probably represents the ancient town, i. t. the one com- 
 menced by the .^ginetans, which the arrival of the Athenians suspended. But 
 the whole subject is of great difficulty. (See Smith, Diet. s.v. (.'yuuria.) This 
 district of Thyreatis was one of the most fertile plains in Peloponnesus, ex- 
 tending about six miles in length along the coast, but never more than three 
 miles broad, being shut in by Mount Parnon. This plain, which belonged 
 to Argolis, was seized by the Lacedjemonians as early as the reign of Eches- 
 tratus, son of Agis, c. B.C. 1000, but they were expelled by the Argives, who 
 retained doubtful possession of it till B.C. 547, when the battle before alluded 
 to was fought. When the ^ginetans were settled there, the two towns of 
 Thyrea and Anthene were given to them. It was afterwards ceded by treaty 
 to the Argives, v. ^\, and Philip confirmed them in the possession of it. 
 Pausanias, vii. 12, says the border quarrels continued even down to his day. 
 ♦b A0T]vatwv 8id<|)opov. Objective genitive ; 'their quarrd with the Athenians.' 
 (r€icrp.ov. Cf. ad i. loi. jiceopCa. These compound adjectives 
 
 K. says are of three terminations. Cf. iv. 56, where Thucydides repeats almost 
 word for word, the statement here. 01 8' ^{nrdptio-av. These 
 
 scattered remnants were probably those whom Lysander collected and reinstated 
 in their ancient home after the battle of yEgos Potamoi. Xen. Jlell. ii. 2. 5. 
 
 Chapter XXVIII.— vovfiTivi<j Kard o-cX^vtiv. The physical new moon 
 not coinciding with the civil one. 8oK<t is the received opinion. 
 
 6 fjXios l|€Xnr€. Modern astronomical calculations refer this eclipse to the 
 3rd of August. Had it happene<l three months earlier, as Mr. G rote observes 
 it might have been looked upon as an unfavourable omen, and stopped the in- 
 vasion of Attica (vi. p. 184). Eclipses were still reckoned among fortuitous 
 natural phaenomena, along with earthquakes, famines, &c. Cf. i. 23, and 
 Herod, i. 74, where, though the historian implies the previous calculation of 
 the eclipse by Thales (o^>pov irpodififvo^) he uses the curious phrase, tt^v rip.4p-qv 
 i^airivr]% vvKta yeviadat: and the still more curious past^age in Xen. A nab. iii. 
 4. 8, where the inhabitants of Larissa take advantage of an eclipse to escape 
 from the invading army. Cf. JJist. v. 3. 10; Herod, vii. 37, ix. 10 ; Quintil. 
 Inst. Or. i. 10. 47, ed. Gesner. dcrr^pwv. Heiss states that these 
 
 were Venus and Mars. 
 
 Chapter XXIX.— (a.) Nvfi4>d8wpov rhv UvQm dv8pa *Ap8TjptTT]v. 
 Herodotus (vii. 137) uses these words in exactly the same order, when sjieaking 
 of Nymphodorus as having betrayed Nicolas and Anaristus, sons of Bulis, and 
 Sperthias to the Athenians. Cf. h. 1. c. 67. (Ili/^fw, the Ionic genitive of llvdris 
 as the Schol. observes.) Abdera was on the south coast of Thrace, some little 
 distance east of the river Nestus. /card 'A^drjpa . . . voratibv ^icTov pedyra 
 
 Chap. 29.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 179 
 
 Herod, vii. 109 (perhaps in c. 126 we may explain $1 'A^drjpojv piiav TroTa/iibs 
 N^crroj, 'flowing through the territory of the Abderites'). Hercules was its 
 mythological, Timesias of Clazomenae its historical, founder, Herod, i. 168. 
 When Harpagus was left by Cyrus to complete the subjugation of Ionia, the 
 Teians, following the example of the Phocaeans, left their country and sailed in 
 a body to Abdera. Fifty years after, the Abderites had the expensive honour 
 of feeding the Persian king on his march to Greece (Herod, vii. 120). It was 
 reduced under the power of Athens by Thrasybulus B.C. 408. Though prover- 
 bial for the stupidity of its inhabitants, it produced the philosophers Democritus 
 and Anaxarchus and the sophist Protagoras. Cf. Juv. x. 50. 
 
 * cujus prudentia monstrat 
 Summos posse viros et magna exempla daturos, 
 Vervecum in patria crassoque sub aere nasci.' 
 Mart. X. 25. 4. 
 
 2iTdXKi]s. Son of Teres, succeeded his father as king of Thrace, or more cor- 
 rectly of the powerful tribe of the Odryste, probably some years before the break- 
 ing out of the Peloponnesian war ; as he had so far increased the already extensive 
 kingdom of his father, that it reached from Abdera to the mouths of the 
 Danube, and inland to the sources of the Strymon, thirteen days' journey ac- 
 cording to Diodorus, xii. 50 (Diod. is probably mistaken as to the date of his 
 accession). As he was on hostile terms with Perdiccas, king of Macedon, 
 (having espoused the cause of his brother Philip,) the Athenians, who were 
 also exasperated against Perdiccas for supporting the Potidaeans in their revolt, 
 cultivated the friendship of Sitalces by repeated embassies, and as we see 
 below, conferred the rights of citizenship on his son Sadocus. At the close of 
 this book we have the account of the gigantic but unsuccessful expedition 
 which he undertook against Macedon (c. 95 — loi). He afterwards fell 
 in a battle against the Triballi, B.C. 424, and was succeeded by his 
 nephew Seuthes, son of Sparadocus, who was a partisan of Perdiccas, iv. 
 101. Cf. not. ad i. 57. 59. 61.63; Diod. xii. 34. Aristophanes alludes to 
 these embassies in his Acharnians, 140, 150, where the scholiast says that 
 Sadocus was also known by the names Teres and Sitalces. This enrolment ap- 
 pears to have taken place at the festival of Apaturia : hence the allusion in 
 line 146. irpd^cvov. Poppo cf. W^achsmuth, Gr. Ant. i. i, p. 122 ; 
 
 Thuc. ii. 85 ; iii. 2. 70. 92 ; iv. 78; v. 76, &c. 
 
 (6.) '08pv(rais. Herod, (iv. 92) mentions the Odrysae as settled on the banks 
 of the Artiscus, a tributary of the Hebrus. But their territory was afterwards 
 much enlarged. Thamyris is said to have been an Odrysian, Paus. iv. 33, 
 and Orpheus was their king. €Trl irXciov ttjs &XXt]s Opq-Kt^s. — K. 
 
 compares I. ix. c. /cat vavTiK(^ &/j.a iirl irX^ov tQ)v dXKujv l<7x^''<^o.s. Dale 
 translates * he founded the great kingdom of the OdryscB on a larger scale than the 
 other states of Thrace.' avT<5vo}iov. Cf. c. 96 (b.) where he 
 
 specifies the Dii : the kuI implies for all that, notwithstanding. 
 irpo<r/|K€i ov8^v 'has no connexion with.' So oi irpoa-qKovTe^ and ai TrpoffijKovaai, 
 c. xxxiv. 6. TTJs avrqs 0p<fKT]s. * They did not come from the same 
 
 part of Thrace.' K., who compares 7r6\eu?s rivos etvai.. Xen. Anab. vii. iii. 19. 
 Plat. i4^)o/. xxix. c. Prot. 316. AavX£(|i. The more ancient name 
 
i8o 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Rook II. 
 
 was Daulia. Strab., ix. 423. (signifying a thick forest, q^ from 5a v\r)) uhicli 
 wa.s afterwards changed to Daulia, which it retains to the present diiy. (Cf. 
 Horn. Jl. B. 520. Liv. xxxii. 18.) There was, we may observe, another 
 Daulia in Illyria. Homer speaks of it as a Phocian town. Cf. Pans. x. 4, 5. 
 For the occupation of this district by Thracians, see Muller's Dorians, I. p 9 
 Wachsmuth's Ant. Gr., Introduction, Pans. I. xli., Strabo, ix. From using 
 the words al ^vvaiKcs we may infer that Tliucydides was aware of the variation 
 of the legends in the story of Itys. Homer, in the well-known passage in the 
 Othjssey [v. i.] makes Aedon wife of Zethus, and daughter of Pandareus. The 
 words 8av\ias 6pvis do not occur in any extant Greek author of a date prior to 
 Thucydides ; v. Poppo, thougli the allusions in later writers are very common. 
 As Grote observes, i. p. 265, 'Neither the arclueology of Attica, nor that of ita 
 various component fractions, was much dwelt upon by the ancient epic poets 
 of Greece.' Grote quotes the passage referred to above. Hom. 0(/y«., T. 523 • 
 ApoUod, iii. 148; ^sch. Hxipp., 61; Soph. Ehct., 107; Ovid, Mttam., y'i 
 425, sq. ; Hygin. Fab., xlv. Tliere is proliably an allusion to the Myth in 
 Hesiod, Op. et Di. 566. Gaisf. wavZLovU upro xfXtSu^i'. To these we may 
 add Pans., i. xli, who speaks of Daulis as r^s vHp Xatpuudas, and adds TrdXat 
 yhp T7)s vvv KaXovfMevrj^'EWddos ^dp^apoi to. ttoXXo. t^K-qaav. Soph. Elect., I48, 
 with the Schol. Sophocles and Philocles both wrote a ' Tereus. ' ^Esch. Again ' 
 1 152, Arist. Av., 100, 209, 676, with ScJwL, CatuU. Ixv. 14. Daulias ab- 
 sumpti fata gemens Ityli. Ov. Jlcroid., xv. 154. Concinit Ismarium Daulias 
 ales Ityn. Metam., v. 276. Daulia Threicio Phocreaque milite rura cesserat 
 Virg. Ciris, 200. Dauliades Puellae. Eclog. vi. 78, Gtory. iv. 15, Albinovan. 
 1. 105. Deflet Threicium Daulias ales Ityn. Senec. Agamem., 671, Thyest. 
 " ' 5 • 8ta To<rovTov. ' At so ahort a distance' from his own country. 
 
 P. cf. ii. 89. ZC 6\iyov. iii. 21, 51. bC iXdcaovo^. 94, hiii ttoWov. iv' 
 115. 5ta TrXdarov. vi. ii., &c. kir' i^^^Ki^.-' with a view to 
 
 mutual assistance/ as i. 3. j^axXov ij 8 ir. i^-' rather than 
 
 amongst the Odnjsce, whose country lay at a distance of many days Journey.' 
 
 (d.) Ix«v . . . iyivtro. Either ijp must be supplied from the other clause 
 of the sentence, as implied in iyiyero, or by the change in the construction the 
 participle is put for the finite verb. P. Kparos 5vuap.iu ' Pri- 
 
 musque potens rex Odrysarura fuit.' P. gvv^^Xciv-* una expuq- 
 
 nare;inexpugnandoadjurare.' B. SaSoKov. v. s. 
 
 ircXTa<rTwv. The Thracian Peltastai were renowned. Cf. iv. 129, 6 (So ii 
 79; iv. 28, 32; iii. 123; V. 6, 10.) Arist. Acharn., 160. KaTaTreXrdacn-ac rhv 
 Boiumdv 8Xvv. Lys. c,6^. HXrrjpaeiuv ioairepoTvpeOs. Xen. Mem., iii n 2 
 Elmsley ad Arist. Acharn., I. c. ' • y> • 
 
 ie.) |vv€pipa<r€— ' reconciled: i.e., from the notion of bringing the parties 
 together. Qip)iy\v. Cf. i. 61. 
 
 Chapter XXX.— («. ) ircpl ne\oTr<Jvvii<rov. From Pheia the Athenian fleet 
 coa^sted northwards. The coast of Acarnania being probably included in 
 their mission. Naupactus would be their main station to the north, of course 
 ScJXiov, or 2<JXXiov— as Colonel Leake and Poppo read, on the authority of the 
 best MSS. IS placed by Cramer on the Acarnanian coast, N. of Astacus, and a 
 httle S. of Palaerus, over against Leucas. He identifies it with the modern 
 
 Chap. 32.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 181 
 
 Selavena : Zavedei representing the ancient Palaerus. It was at SoUium that 
 Demosthenes convened the Acamanians, prior to his attack on ^tolia. iii. 95. 
 And we find the Corinthians claiming it, on the cessation of hostilities, v. 30. 
 naXaip€v<riv. Strabo mentions this town along with Alyzia. x., p. 459. 
 "Ao-TttKOV, said to have been a colony of Cephallenia, lies on the bay now 
 called Dragamasti, one side of which is fonned by the promontory Crithote. 
 Its ruins are to be seen near the monastery of St. Elias. v. Leake, North. 
 Greece, iv. 4; Cramer, ii. p. 19. Kara K^iiTO^—' by assault.' 
 
 (6.) K€4)aXXT]vfa. Called by Homer Same, orSamos. Odys. i. 246; II. ii. 
 634 ; had the Tajihians for its earliest inhabitants. The name of the island 
 first occurs in Herodotus, ix. 28. The four-fold division of the island was 
 probably very ancient, since an early legend derived their names from the four 
 sons of Cephalus, the Eponymus of Cephallenia. None of them became of any 
 importance. Same and Proni are on the E. coast ; Crania and Pale on the IF. 
 Cf. Strab. X. p. 455; Grote vi. p. 182. Kard'AKapv. 'gegen- 
 
 uber.' K. v.Jelf, §629. i. 
 
 CH.iPTER XXXI. — (a.) 'n'cplTj><|>0tv6iTwpov. Cf. Diod. xii.43, 4. 'Towards 
 the close of September.' Grote. 4s r^v M67apC8a. v. Grote, vi. 
 
 p. 184. *A decree was proposed in the Athenian Ekklesia by Charinus, 
 though perha])S not carried, to the effect that the Strategi every year should 
 swear as a portion of their oath of office, that they would twice invade and 
 ravage the Megarid.' It appears from Lib. iv. 66, that, for several years of the 
 war certainly, this was actually done, iru^d/xevoi vrb 'kd-qvaio}v T<p iroX^p-i^ 
 dd Kara ^ros tKaarov 5ts ic^aXXbvrwv iravffTpaTiq. is Tr]v x^po-v. (Cf. Duk. in loc. 
 Plut. V. Pericl. p. 306.) The distress and privations endured by the Megarians, 
 remembered even down to the days of Pausanias (i. 40, 3) were extreme ; as 
 not only their corn and fruits and even their garden vegetables were destroyed, 
 but by blockading the port of Nisaea the Athenians prevented all importation 
 of provisions into the city, which was reduced to a state of famine. See the 
 graphic description in the Achaniians (685-781) and Pax, 482. They suffered 
 in a similar manner before the battle of Leuctra from being the allies of Sparta 
 and enemies of Athens, v. Demosthenes, c. Necer. p. 1357. 
 
 (b.) li^-yicrrov 8^. [Cf. iii. 17, a., where Thucyd. mentions the largest display 
 of the naval force of the Athenians preparatory to the blockade of Mytilene. ] 
 Grote, vi. 183. *The junction of the two formed the largest Athenian force 
 that had ever yet been seen together.' avroi. For the expressive 
 
 force of the pronoun here cf. Arist. Acharn., 507. 
 
 dXX' ifffifv avroC vuv ye irepuirTtcpiivoc 
 Tovs yap fJ.€TolKOVs dxi'pa twj' dffTUJv Xiyu). 
 
 Tpu(rx«.XCow. Cf. iii. 1 7. Where we learn that the pay of each hoplite on 
 service at Potidaea, was two drachmae a-day. In i. 57 we hear that 1000 were 
 sent. V. c. 64. A second reinforcement of 1600 under Phormio. Either 
 therefore their numbers were thinned by the siege, as Poppo thinks, or some 
 had returned, as Kruger says. Nio-aia tctXw. In the eighth year 
 
 of the war, B.C. 424. Cf. iv. 69. 
 
 Chapter XXXII.— 'ATaXdvTT)— (not to be confounded with the Mace- 
 
i8^ 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book II. 
 
 Chap. 35.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 183 
 
 donian Atalanta, chap. 100. or with the small island of the same name off the 
 coast of Attica) lies off Locris, in the 0,»untian gulf. A great part of these 
 Athenian fortifications was swept away by the inundation of the sea in the 
 sixth year of the war, which did so much damage in Eubcea also. Cf. iii. c. 
 89; of. Diod. xii. 44. 59, who even states that this irruption of the sea made 
 Atalanta, which was before a Chersonesus, an island. It is still called Talando- 
 JN181. <|>povpiov. * A pennanent garrison was planted, and a fortified 
 
 post erected/ Grote, vi. 18.. Cf. vi. 75. ^pVjp^, probably as c. xvii., 
 
 having only scattered inhabitants. ' Some of the cattle of the Athenians were 
 probably transported here. toO ^.Vj. civ. X^o-ras. Privateers. 
 
 Chapter XXXIII.-(a.) KaTcXOctv, icaTdYciv. Tlie technical phrases for 
 the return and restoration of exiles. Cf. .iCsch. Chotph. 3. 
 
 ^*fw yb.p els yijv tt^v bt Kal KaHpxofiai. 
 liriKovpovs— ' Mercenaries," P. 
 
 (6.) €g o)io\oyCas-' from a preconcerted plav afjreed upon hj the parties ' / e 
 on pretence of surrender. AupocrSoKViTocs. Here used acf'ivdu, 
 
 as 93 ; IV. 72 ; vu. .9; passively, in ii. 5. 6, ; iii. 39. pcatorcpov. 
 
 ^1. IV. 31, auaxivpvat, ^aLoripa. v. 73, ^ airox^py^c,, ov ^ia.o, ^u. 
 
 Chapter XXXIV.-(«.) rcji ^arp^, vdpu,. Grote (vi. p. 4,), quoting 
 Westermann, says that this custom seems to have been introduced shortly after 
 the I ersian war. Pericles had pronounced the funeral oration over those who 
 tell in the Samian war. Some portions of hi. speech seem to have been pre- 
 served to the time of Aristotle. Cf. Met. I;. ., ,0. 3. Who the introducer of 
 his custom was is doubtful. Grote thinks that noone in particular was intended 
 by r6. yo<reiura in the following chapter. The Scholiast says Solon was the 
 authorof It; Weber, Cunon; Westermann, Aristides; while other commentators 
 fix on Themutocles. ra4>As Ino.i^.avro. The indef. plural; A 
 
 heZ<' P ' '• '' """" '^' ""'"'" ^"'"'- ^^- I«^^^^^^«' «• viii., and 
 
 of Horn '/, • ' "^ ' "• '^- ^^ °^^- '^^'^ ^^- -'-^^ I-We, 
 
 1. ii . '"'• '^"^ ''• . . -Por^ecvra. So ^proponer.,' tJ. 
 
 X A J' "^"^ «^'^OY«vo(x^vwv-'o/ the departed.' Cf. c. ^i 
 
 rd. 6\o^vp<re^, rC,u d^oycyuo^^.u,., and 98, dreyly.ero o08i. rov erparod 
 ^erod. 11. 136, p.-n5^ua tCjv (covtov diroyev6pieuou dd^at. 'np6roira 
 
 Poppo «ays that this ^pSOeai, took place sometimes the day before * 
 
 !r> ^'~'^'"'^'/T'''' 0. tokens of respect:' not to be understood here of 
 
 such offerings as the Latins expressed by • iuferice/ P. and Weber 
 
 (A.) XapvaKas~'o/>./^ rojlns:' Sandapil^. The Scholiast says cypress 
 
 wood w,s chosen from its property of resisting corruption ; 5.d r6 &Zro. 
 
 €lmi. Cf. Honi. //. u. s. ; Muller's Archiroloyy, §301 ^5 
 
 ^KacTTos ^v «|>vXfis. Inverse attraction of the relative by the transposition 
 o the substantive. v. Jelf, §8.4; ii. 2. r«v ac^av<-v Ex- 
 
 plained by the succeeding words, ' those whose bodies were not found 
 for burying (a.a.>e<r.. of xxii. 6 ; Plat. Menex. xiv.) For these a ceno 
 taph was erected. For the grammatical construction, see Jelf § c ,8 b 
 prltn'elr^ ''' A-a^i.-oc..a..' B. says this wa^ not ali;wed at 
 
 (c ) (Hjutt— * Grahstdtte; hurylng-place. rov KaWlcTOv Tpoaareiov, the outer 
 Ceramicus; between the astu and. the academia. Cf. Paus. ii. 5; Smith's 
 Did. V. Athenae, p. 302. del-' as a ye.ieral rule,' i-e- ever since the first 
 
 establishment of the custom, with the exception of those who fell at Marathon 
 (iu yiapadQuc, where observe the omission of the article), and the case of Tellus, 
 mentioned by Herodotus, i. 30, who was buried at Eleusis ; probably in the 
 war a-ainst Megara (see Turner's note ad he). Herodotus says also (ix. 85) 
 that those who fell at Plataea were buried on the spot. TipT]H.^vos 
 
 {»irb Tfis 7r(5X€«s-6y the senate. Plato .says, Meaex. c. i., d<t>iKl>p.'nv rrpb^ to 
 ^ovXevrvpioy irvdhp-evo, 6rt r, ^ov\^ /x^Wec alpdcda. Scrrts epeZ hcl rols drro- 
 davovffL' Ta<pas yap olffda 6tl (xaXovaL woieiv. os dv. Ct. Jelt, 
 
 8 g^g , ^Ti a^vvcTOS, Cf. c. xiv., per^ rov ^vuerov Kai bvuards, 
 
 and a liv. a|iii<r€i. Cf. ad i. c. 69. For the diflference be- 
 
 tween d^'wcris and d^fw/xa, see Grote, vi. p. 233- "• *^* airois- 
 
 in their praise. * zu ehren derselben, ' K. • , xr 
 
 (d ) 6-Tr6T€ IvHLpaCii a^rrois. * So oft ihnen der Anlass dazu eintrat, K. 
 ' Whenever circumsUnces occurred to call forth the necessity of the custom ; 
 Meg over those who fell at Sphacteria, Delium, Auiphipolis, m Sicily, the 
 Hellespont, and Arginusa^,' Weber. ncpcKXfjs. He had before 
 
 pronounced the oration over those who fell in the Samian war (v. Grote, vi. 
 41) on which occasion the women present crowned him with gariands,like a vic- 
 torious athlete. Katpbs cXdnipavc. Cf. xviii. b., 6r6re noXepos Kara. 
 \d3oc ; Dion C:iS3. 393, ^'rei re 6 Kacpbs eXdp^aue, ' when the proper tune for 
 so doing came.' crVaros. Here used for the actual spot m 
 the cemetery where they were buried, not as above for the whole sepul- 
 cretum. ^""-^ irX^icrrov tov ojiCXov. Cf. ad i. i. b, iwi irXeiaTov 
 dvdpujiriaVy K. 
 
 ChvpterXXXV.— (a.) The principles already laid down concerning the 
 speeches in Thucydides, cf. i. 12. a, arc doubtless applicable to the i)resent 
 one • but this is probably more exactly reported than most of the others, for it 
 is likely that Thuc. heard it delivered, and the matter as well as the character 
 of the speaker would impress it deei)ly upon his mind. It is one of the most 
 beautiful and remarkable fragments of antiquity, and with its commentaries and 
 its translations forms quite a little literature of itself. The English reader may 
 consult the Pro%o«i€«u to Poppo's larger work; Thiriwall, vol. m.; Grote, vi. ; 
 Mu ler, Uist. Gr. Lit. xxxiv. § 8. Lysias, as is well known, has also an 
 ^TT.rd^tos Xbyo, among his extant orations, but it is of an inferior order of merit. 
 That called 'Menexenus,' which passes under the name of Plato, is altogether 
 unworthy of him. The Funeral Oration of Demosthenes is generally acknow- 
 le.lged to be spurious. rbv 7rpoo-0^VTa tc^ v<Jj.u,- him who attached to 
 
 the law, i.e., made the delivery of a speech one of the provisions which the law 
 enjoins. Solon is supposed to have originated the law. It is not clear who 
 made this particular addition ; Krug. and others refer it to the era of the 
 Persian war. The form of expression seems to be borrowed from^ Herod. 11. 
 1 36. irpoarediivai. hk ^ri rovnp n^ vbp^ rbvZe. «S KoXhv— as with 
 
 the idea that it is a Hght and proper thing; some editors suppose that 6v has 
 fallen out after the simikr termination, but such omissions are easily paralleled. 
 
184 
 
 NOTES OX THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book 1 1. 
 
 emphatic) U .oM kare se^l^, '"'r^'t Z^CTT f ! T'""" " 
 ri;;il f«- o 1 ^ preier taking dv thus to di/ dvai with 
 
 fpvl Kal . W T;"' '""\;»P--"y because Tl,ue. di,I „„t write 6o.2 
 
 o'tL whole auTe'- V ""T:'-' ' '7-»'-P'''^" -' '/>7»., but .aU,el„„«, 
 10 tlie Whole clause. 1 h.s would greatly have weakened the rhetorical effect 
 
 whole phmse a sort of er™is to ' i T ''"''°' '' "^ ^' ""''•'"'' "'« 
 
 to -/, oShuriu,jthe Ukf , Cached to „.,,. d.t.e»dm Z^Z/^ft,'f; " 
 M«)t sixalc well or ill. There is a tl,lr.l „. »). . • ? '"«/«'^' 0/ wlieli.er a 
 
 twice in the sentence as 0^1: The if I V'"' \^T "''"'"""'' 
 "eeessary be considered the adverstdve a^d n" th^oT" r " '"'"" ""«'" '' 
 passages in Thucvd and with connective one, as in several 
 
 (ft.) |X€Tp£u»s-oA5e'rW„^ Me rfwc mean. i^ A .,. .„ -« 
 
 thus .;LC , ;f;«f ;;x "'«.".'''* « ™'"''-"-» "«" '- •w-i-.m. ,.„,., 
 
 87. Yet it is Xw^ btf^rXrer'^^^^^ "'r "' ■'•'' 
 
 which makes the difficulty of oh^inT, , T 7!" ' ''■''™ """' '*"8"»ge 
 
 moderation in statement! "^ °'"*'"7, -^'fle-'ee look like a re>ul, of observing 
 
 to frpf p fif „„ I J b^"- "eiievea at all ; much more then is it difficult 
 
 rl o La,„ ''■*"" "-""""'' "' "" '"''"^^ •-»-«'•• Am. quotes iiT 4 
 
 Poets. ^I'i ' « !:'.*"• ^« »•""» '» °f f-1"«^t u«e in the Tr.agic 
 
 Me. to . , ..t:Af:tr:7:t :x^.t;tir ""' "" 
 
 /....stands somewtt indUdent,. as Jt^J::!LZ. """"' 
 
 refer to iyraiuJl\e must trln!i . \ i. ! ^^ ^^" "^^ ^^"'^^^'* «'^'^'' *« 
 
 of the praises bTI T translate-^o such of them as are e^travagant-i.e., 
 
 ceptio?impTed in t wt^ H! '"^'"'^^.'^ "'^^ "^'^ ^ ^^^ ^^"^^^^ -- 
 F m 0,^ ^/co.(re;._io ^Ac mrpamnf, among them-i. e, the exploits ; 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 i8s 
 
 Chap. 36.] 
 
 or generalizing the antecedent notion still more, we may explain, with Popp., 
 & &v Ua(TTO% otrjTai havos elvai hpav, tr. that which goes beyond lohat each man 
 fancies h'umclf able to do. But that vwep^dWeLV should be intransitive, is no 
 objection to the other methods. Cf. vii. 67, ii. 45, and Tsoc.xii. 36. rots virepfidX- 
 \ov<n rCJv (pyo}v i^iaibirai rods \6yovs. Something of the same kind happens with 
 our verbs ' to pass,' and ' to 8uri)as8.' In old English, * Well that passes.' 
 ^St]. Tliis word denotes that the mind pauses, and goes no further. Tr. there- 
 fore straightway — at once, because they envy, tcithout further examination, dis- 
 believe. For the sentiment, cf. Sallust, Catil. c. 3, and Rochefoucault, Max. 
 376. Les esprits mediocres condamnent d'ordinaire tout ce qui passe leur 
 portee. l8oKi|id(r9T], a strong word, being that employed to denote that 
 
 after scrutiny a i>erson has been found fit for a public office, and youths for the 
 rights of manhood. See Dem. 814, 20, tr. tested and approved. See Hermann, 
 Pol. Antiq. Greece, § 123, 12. XP^ *^°-^ «H^^ •«• ''• ^- ^^ becomes necessary 
 
 that I, as well as others, in j)ursuance of the law, should endeavour to meet, as 
 far as possible, your several wishes and opinions. The 86^ meant is that of the 
 ^ui/ci5ujs OLKpoaTi}^, as the povXtjcris is that of the ct5fous. 
 
 Chapter XXXVI.— (a.) &p|ofiai . . . irpwrov. TliC first thing I shall do 
 will be to commence from, <tr. This Krug. admits may be the meaning, though he 
 observes that even if taken otherwise there is no pleonasm, for a commencement 
 may embrace several topics. Cf. 11, 53 {a), and irpQTov dpxeffdac ii. 68, and 
 Monk on Ilipjtolytus, v. 991. Kal irpc'irov 8^ 6.^0.— and suitable 
 
 withal. Such is generally the force of 5^ following kuL . . . t^v ri\iT\v sc. of 
 first and distinguished mention. ad 01 avTol. See note on i. 2. b. 
 
 8ta8oxTi Twv €ir. This may be the instrumental dative denoting the means of 
 transmission, by means of a perpetual succession, or simply the dative after 
 irap^docav, to an uninte)Tupted succession. Giill. remarks that the words are 
 intended to explain ol ai/Toi, virtually the same, that is to say in the sense of a 
 successive body, but this seems to me hypercritical ; who would ever have sup- 
 posed that they were actually the same? 
 
 (6.) irpbs ols 48^|avTO— in addition to what they had received from their 
 ancestors. Up to the Persian war only Attica. Krug. ovk dir^vws. 
 
 The editors doubt whether this is to be connected with KTrjadfievot, or 
 xpoffKaTiXiirov. Probably the author, in such cases, had no very determinate 
 purpose himself, and Poppo's remark may be correct. ' Fortasse data opera in 
 medio coUocata sunt, ut ad ambo verba spectent.' I would only say that Kiiig.'s 
 objection to connect it with irpoa. because inappropriate, seems to me unreason- 
 able— «»rf at the cost of no slight labour have bequeathed it to us as well, is surely 
 very intelligible. rd irXcCw avrr\s. This certainly appears a con- 
 
 tradiction to what precedes. Melhorn, as quoted by Popp., explains that no 
 territorial extension is intended, but the gradual consolidation of power by policy, 
 and the increase of internal resources. It may be so; yet Popp.'s conjecture, 
 avTr]v is worthy of consideration, in which case we should take to. irXeiu adver- 
 bially, as in /card yijv rd TrXeiw ij Kara daXdaaav, i. 13. 
 iv TQ KaGciTTTiKvCq. ^XiK^qi. The set time of life, i. e., physically speaking, when 
 the muscles are set, and the human frame will henceforth receive no additional 
 growth, yet has not begun to decay. The use of p-dXiara here is surely incon- 
 
i86 
 
 KOTES OX THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Boos II. 
 
 aistent with the notion that it means ,o ,h.f,M. exactly aa has been intin.ated 
 uetore Cf. ,. ,3. c 18. a., for ™«ear,^„>. Cf. with Popp. ' composite .etato.' 
 Jac. Ann. yi. 46, and ' ConsUnti »Ute, quie media dicitur' fie. de iSentct c 10 
 avTapK«o-raTT,», used proleptieally, iare rii-a. a:)ra/«£,rrir,» ' ' ' 
 
 {c.) <iy. Either simply AS^^a/o,., or more probably jy^^ii^ rC.Se, ,„i rC^ 
 irarfpi,,. Poppo remarks, that not only does the orator avoid the old n.vthical 
 co„„nonplaces about the Amazons, the Herucleid^, Ac. but does not even 
 speak of the Persians ,n the usual rhetorical style. »dX.aov intoyra 
 
 an aa-mhnywar, or war of invasion, or more strictly still perhaps, war bar- 
 lanan, or Greet, when it mnu upon them. I cannot see the desirableness of 
 reading „x^^,„,, as Xriig. suggests witl, others. Popp. quote, Tpoai^, 
 K..SU.O,. Lys. p 99. and ' appropinquans terror,' Livy. xliv. 6. The use of 
 pappapos for iSap/iap.Ki, is not very remarkable. "EXX^v for ■E\\r,nK6, 
 IS n.oreso, and is only found in the PoeU. Cf. Eur. /;,A. T. v. 3,4. But Ihen 
 such phrases as "EXXaaa ^X....„., i,,,„ .r^„, / y_ ,. J^^ f„„^ '^» 
 need not suspect anything wrong. ^aKp.^op.tv ly ,i&6..yl' ,0 
 
 enlarge upon he mhjecl a,nomj,t ,jou, whoare well ,u;,uainted with it.' ' It is not 
 ^1, that .... .s omitted.' T. K. A. If it is not at all that O.i. is onntt^d 
 
 a St r^r; '""i ^ ''''"''"'"^'' ^"^ =" ^^^^^ '«'»-'"' «■« ---i^ -« quit 
 
 a ste.eotyped forn.ula, to enlarge upon topies before per>o,„ who know ,/.nn a» 
 
 Ifr "T :• ..''' '• '" '• "• '' • '"■ •'9- X'"^'- thinks Pericles could n" 
 have mentioned the matter so briefly, but Thucyd. was con.pelled to do so 
 because he had already treated of it, i. 73. 
 
 (d.) 4xiT^8.i<r.«,5. T. K. A. in'terprets eV.r^Je.^,,-' the source ■ thenar- 
 
 W ought to have pomted out to him that the word <lenotes the actual proce.. 
 h it Zh t' "''"''"-/r^"'"- "■'"" '-■' of 'raining. Cf. vii. 86.' TM 
 
 avra. This ,s the rea.ln,g of the best MSS., to which supply oi .ar/,„ y,^<i. 
 It mus be -.cknowledged that P-ekker's ri\<^OM« supported by ^me MbS sTels 
 more plausible, for surely Pericles meant to incluie'him»elf'a„d his conteZ 
 raries. But Popp. retains ^xeo. upon the principle in MS. criticism that 
 the easier reading IS not altered into the more difficult, but vice ve,,A Tl^ 
 ai.ra refers to the general notion of .pay^ara implied in the foregoing word 
 and serves itself as an antecedent notion to MyaSa. L l^ 
 
 >-" proceed to. Cf e.l rb. HXXo. X6yo. U.a, I 37 . Let the junior'tud'u 
 not ce how .^, cum accusativo only indicates primarily uj. .to a certain « J 
 Without cdiinntn.r lww.f;i^ ;..*.....i:_ ^,n . ^ ^ ^ ^ ^f^iiuin poinr, 
 
 without cunnoting hostile intention. Cf. 
 
 »• 30- ft- 54- a. 
 
 Chapter XXXVII._(a.) o<> t^Xov<rT,-„o< emulati,,,. Pericles here ad- 
 vances the chiim of originHlity. tacitly contrasting the Athenian polity with the 
 
 sources. TrapaSeiYjxa-SvTcs. On the principle of variety so fre- 
 
 a ent y ,nent.oned (cf i. 38,0, for .apa5eiy,ar. o.V ; the inde Jte .. « 
 
 el as often, when the hearer can readily supply the persons whom he 
 
 speaker, from motives of discretion, will not mention. ^s nX.Cova, 
 
 rr;oov?.r "'"^' ^T "^^^'^•^"^^ ^ ^^^ e»-l>orate controversy. Some 
 early copyists, unaware that oUel may mean ' U adnuni.tercd,' altered the word 
 
 Chap. 37.] 
 
 NOTES OX THUCYDIDES. 
 
 ]87 
 
 in the MSS. (see Blooraf.) into ff/cet ; and this alteration, though not accepted 
 by the later editors, has had some influence in inducing them to attach the 
 same sense to oUclv. I cannot but think Am. is right, who interprets, ' by reason 
 of the government being administered for the benefit, not of the few, but of the 
 many: Popp. objects that h cannot be for ' the benefit of: I reply that h 
 denotes the object to which a man looks in doing anything, and if in his ad- 
 ministration he looks to the many, it may be truly saiJ to be conducted for 
 their benefit. The same meaning will hold good in the passages which he 
 quotes, ^s 6\iyov^ fiaWou ras apxas Tronfiaofxtu. viii. 53. <?s dXiyovs KaT^ar-qcav 
 ra tC}v 2iK. v. 81. With a view to the interests of the few, and there is no other 
 objection to Arn.'s interpretation of which I am aware. Popp. himself, with 
 Coll., ed. Ida., makes the meaning nearly equivalent, as I have said, to what 
 would arise from iJKei—imperiutn non ad paucos redactum esse, the government 
 devolves not upon the few, but the many. For the passive sense of oket, see 
 Xen. Cyrop. viii. i, 2. Jldlen. vii. i, 3 ; and 7) 7r6Xts otVet /ca/cuis. Plat. Rep. 
 ^62, D. Sr^jJioKpaTCa. The Scholiast's comment is, eireibr) <pav\ov 
 
 SoKci 7] 8r]fioKpaTia Kai bpi tovs AaKUvas aefivvvdfievovs iirl t-q dpiffTOKparia. I 
 think any one acquainted with the Greek notions about ' aristocracy' will be- 
 lieve that the Schol. is right. Pericles meant to excuse the name, and to show 
 that the government really was quite as much an dpiaTOKpaTia as that upon 
 which the Spartans prided themselves. Plato, or the author of the Menexenus, 
 plainly says, r) yap avrr} TroXire/a Kai tovto fjv Kal vvv apLCTOKparla. KaXei 6e 6 
 ixh avTTjv drjuoKpaTiau, 6 5^ dWo y Siv x^^PV- Isocrates, in a similar spirit, 
 speaks of 'an aristocratical democracy,' 12, 131, 153; and Krug. cf. Xen. 
 Mem. iv. 6, 12. The words dirb dperns irpoTipLaTai explain the nature of the 
 aristocratical element, as Pericles considered it ought to exist. Ttt 
 
 I8ia 8td<|>opa. This is explained in the most general terms by GolL, quce 
 hominibus privatis agenda sunt, and he is probably right. We might, tr. oil 
 causes of dispute arising among private individuals. to IVov, w'hat 
 
 is called l(TOvop.lav in the Menexenus, and 'juris asquabilitas,' by Cicero, 
 equality in the eyes of the law. Kara 8^ t^v d|iu)<riv k. t. X. But 
 
 with respect to our estimate of men, as each one chances to have a reputation in 
 any particular, he is preferred to an honourable place in the public service, not 
 because he belongs to a class or caste, but from merit; the words dwb p.ipov^ refer 
 to the distinctions of birth, such as that assigned to the old Dorian, or Heracleid 
 blood at Sparta, to which belonged the 'Ofioiot or Peers. Arnold denies this, 
 because the neroiKOL at Athens were no more eligible to office than the 
 vepioUni at Sparta. But surely the first must be regarded as external to the 
 Athenian polity : whereas the latter belonged to the Lacedaemonian, though in 
 an inferior position. It is to my mind a much greater difficulty to make, as he 
 does, dirb fx^povs mean ' distinctions of fortune or party ;' for in what state have 
 not members of different parties succeeded to the administration of affairs ? 
 Cf. the English phrase ' class-legislation.' On the usage of rb irXiov, see i. 83. 
 (6.) «x«v 8i. ' if he nevertheless have it in his power, does he Jind himself 
 hindered; &c. The construction changes upon the principle of variety (cf. ch. 
 37. a), and proceeds as if Kara ireviav had been irivq^ p-h Cov. d|iwp.aTOS. 
 
 This means ' the value at which a man is rated ;' hence we may tr. has he been, 
 or is he ever hindered by the obscurity of his rank, or social j^osit ion .? 
 
i88 
 
 NOTES OX THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book II. 
 
 Chap. 39.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 189 
 
 tXcvBcpws 8^ K. T. X. * We not only conduct public affairs in a liberal spirit, 
 but we carry the same spirit into private life, and do not exhibit those absurd 
 iealousies and irksome restrictions which characterise the Dorian states.' I 
 had always translated, and in the matter of that jealous;^ which is sometimes felt 
 about the daili/ habits of life between man and man, we regard not our neigh- 
 hour with anger, if wejind him pleasing himself nor do we fix upon our faces 
 looks of illhuinour, which are annoying enough, though they injtict no actual 
 penal! I/. Cf. Grote. Somewhat similar is the general view ; but I perceive Kriig. 
 understands by dx^V^ova^, * spiteful and vexatious penalties,' such as those 
 mentioned by Xen. Ilell. iii. 1, q, iarddr) ttjv dffrrida ^x<^^ ^ ^ok€i ktjXU ehai rots 
 o-TrouSat'ois tujv Aa k e 5a ifxaviuv. Plato also suggests something of the kind, ^ 
 Tivas d/x6p(f>ovs ^Spas t) (TTaarets, 7) TrapaaTdaeis (Is ifpA iirl rd t^$ x^^pas ^<tx^'''°- 
 Pint. Legg. p. 885. In this case \virrjpds tj 6^et must mean acerbos visu, and 
 irpo(TTi.d€ixevoL dxdr)^6vas inflicting penalties. I prefer, however, the other inter- 
 pretation, and would with Popp. compare iii. 37, t6 Ka6' T)p.4pav dSc^j Kal 
 dvem^ovXevTov irpbs dWriXovs. 
 
 (c.) dvciraxBus. In a manner that is not burdensmne, i. e., vejcations. 
 8id Zios— through a principle of fear, a wholesome moral restraint. This is best 
 illustrated by Si>i>hocle8, Ajajc, \. 1053. dKpbacei ' obedient ia, cu^us signifi- 
 cationis alterum exemplum non novimus.' Popp. But surely the cognate 
 words all bear the meaning of 'listening,' in the sense of 'attending to,' which 
 is all that is required here. avrwv 6<roi — and of them especiallg such 
 
 as. KciVTat the regular terra, are enacted. &"Ypa4)oi 
 
 6vT€S- The reader will of course consult Arist. Hhet., i. 10, Koiubv Xiyu vbfxop 
 Baa &ypa<pa irapd irdcnv o/uLoXoyeTadaL doKel. See Dem. irepi 2]re0. § 3J7. 
 Plato Legg. 841 b., Soph. Antig. v. 450, Cic. pro Milone, § 10, de Invent, ii. 
 22; iv. 2. o.\(r\vyn\v <|)^pov<riv — bring with their violation confessed 
 
 disgrace. The words ' with their violation' must be considered as implied in 
 the whole sentence. But as (pepovaiv aiax^v-qv is not reverentiam efficere in its 
 ordinary usage, Meyer would here interpret it pudorem, i.e., infamiie timorem, 
 which is perhaps as unusual, for aiax^'^V can scarce mean more than a * sense 
 of shame.' 
 
 Chapter XXXVIII. — dvairavXas — somewhat archaic for dvaira^acis, re- 
 fnshments, or recreations. Cf. c. 75, Kar' dvairavXas, in relief parties. 
 Kriig. adds that the word is also used for 'a place of recreation;' and 
 quotes Plato, Legg. 653 d. We may add Arist. Ranee, V. 113. tq 
 
 'Yvwp.'jl- The Schol. explains r^ ^^xv ^ '''V si"'^<^ft. In the first case it is 
 the ordinary tlative — to the mind: in the second it is the instrumental dative, 
 by our wisdom. ayuxri )kiv yt. This form of expression seems 
 
 covertly to refer to the reproaches cast by the severer Dorians u^wn this part of 
 the social life of Athens. Ay/ even by those games of which they talk. 
 SurqcrCois — lasting throughout the year. This may well have been the case if 
 the Scholiast does not grossly exaggerate, for he says there were sacrifices on 
 every day of the year except one. Another grammarian, however, has ex- 
 plained, dvTL roO 5' ^rovs cloy Ka6' ^KaffToy ?toj. Qovk. kuI 'Apwrro^dj^s ; and 
 Popp. says that the word has this force in Dion. Hal. But merely * annivtrsary 
 festivals' were common everywhere, and would not be distinctive of Athens, so 
 
 that the former interpretation is preferable. If the latter were correct we 
 should at least have had, as Kriig. says, woXXals. vo|JLttovT€s. See 
 
 notes on i. 77; iii. 82. Am, originally interpreted the word making our custom 
 consist in, and so connected it with a dative. But this he subsequently, I think, 
 with justice questioned. I do not place any faith in the construction with a 
 dative, i. 77 has been ex[)lained; in this j)assage I would make dv<xiais the 
 instrumental dative in combination with iiropiffdfKda, and after vopii^ovTes I 
 would supply dvaias dieTifffiovs, we have provided recreation for our spirits, ay, 
 even by games and religious festivals, in the regular observance of them. Cf, Soph, 
 Elect. V. 47. d77e\Xe 5' Sp/cy irpocrrideis, announce with an oath, adding one. 
 For iii. 82, cf. ad locum. In Herod, iv. T17, (puvrj vofxl^ov(Ti IkvOlkt}, the 
 XprjcrdaL which has preceded must be repeated. See also note on iii. 59. 
 (peiffacrdai olKxt^ aibtppovi Xa(i6yTas. vop.ii'ouTes must be explained as equivalent 
 to ds voixl^ofJLiv. Cf. (Ed. Col. 1322. Homer II., ii. 774. Cat. Carm., 39, v. 
 385. 'Pater Divum templo in fulgente revisens,' sc, *quam revisere solebat.' 
 On the matter itself, see Xen, de Rep. Athen. iii. 2, 8. Kara- 
 
 <rK€vais- See note on i. 10, b. Here the words splendour of private establish- 
 ments would seem to imply what we should ourselves include under the term. 
 T| Wp^/is. 'Connect this with KaO' i^fiipav.' Kriig, But see note supra, 
 c. 36, b. rh Xvirr|p6v, I think refers to the painful character of 
 
 the social life of Sparta ; or it may mean the annoyances which in general 
 render life gloomy and disagreeable. Iirtwr^pxcrai — ' are imported. ' 
 
 T. K. A. without acknowledgment from Bloomf., who adds ' neut. for pass.' It 
 was hardly worth appropriating, for who does not see that such a version 
 destroys the rhetorical beauty of the passage, which, by a verb of active 
 meaning depicts in a lively manner, ' all the commodities of the world coming in 
 up to the very doors of the citizens day by day.' Cf, iii. 53. eTeKreveyKd/xevoi. 
 And see Xen. de Rep., ii. 11, and Isocrat. p. 6^. Plato, Legg., 949. 
 utTi8iv olKcioT^p<ji K. T. X. It is rather interesting to remark how in the ancient 
 autliors we find statements put in the converse way to that naturally adopted 
 by ourselves. We should say our enjoyment of foreign productions is not a ichit 
 less familiar and intimate than that of our own. Pericles says, our enjoyment 
 of our own is not more familiar than of that which comes from abroad. See 
 infra. Why T. K. A. should explain an enjoyment that is no less familiar, by 
 fw less peculiar, I cannot understand : peculiarity is, I apprehend, never hinted 
 at. The meaning of olKeioHpg. may be illustrated by the breakfast-table of the 
 Englishman, where the products of the extreme east and west (tea and sugar) 
 are as familiar as the products of his own fields (milk and bread). 
 
 Chapter XXXIX. — (a.) twv itoXciiikuv. The editors notice that rd 
 voXi/xLa is more common in Thuc. Here I think the former word is required 
 — our practice in matters relating to war. tuv TroXefiiuv as has been said might 
 be supposed to come from ol iroX^fJuoi. In what follows the tacit reference to 
 the Lacedaemonian government is obvious. i> pi^ Kpv<|>0^v dv k. t. X. 
 
 The editors here notice what I think holds good in many places where it is over- 
 looked, that the &v exerts a sort of double influence ; it in strictness refers to 
 u<peXr}6€i7], but is not without a modifying effect upon Kpv<f>6iv — which were he 
 to see without concealment, he might derive benefit. This generally holds true of 
 
190 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book II. 
 
 cases where the participle is to be resolved by a conditional clause, as here, /i^ 
 Kpv(f>div is equivalent to d fxr] Kpv<t>d€lr) : the relative 6 is of course dependent upon 
 tSojif. On the ^€VT]\a<r£a, see i. 144, and with respect to the t6 Kpvinbv of the 
 Lacedaemonian policy, v. 68, and Miiller's Dorians, vol. ii. p. 1^4. 
 
 (ft.) ^cWpxovrai. Go after^ make the object of their purmlt. Cf. i. 124. 
 dvcip.^vcD$. Cf i. ch. 6, a., and Eurip. Alcest. v. 198. tovs IcroiroXcis. 
 
 Tlie general way of taking this is, none the less on that account go to meet tqual 
 dangers^ i. e., equal to any confronted by our adversaries ; and this I cannot 
 but think correct. Kriig., however, prefers the version of Gottleber. Dangers 
 of a sort in which we are a match for our enemies. His argument is, that the 
 former rendering gives no account of the iraXcis. But surely this is to attach 
 too much importance to a mere termination. Compounds not unfrequently 
 loose in general usage the distinct notion attached to one of their component 
 parts. The word occurs again, iv. 94, and in Herod, and Plato. Mr. Grote 
 translates perils within the measure of our strength, making the word contain a 
 comparison within itself, for which use of it I know no authority. 
 AaKc8aip.dvioi. To the Athenian mind the ' Lacediemonians,' naturally enough, 
 represented the whole band of adversaries with whom they were engaged. 
 Tliey impersonated the opposite cause, and therefore the orator speaks of them 
 as a whole, the several parts of which are denoted by Kad^ eKdarovs. This 
 is also Aj-n.'s view, and I think renders unnecessary the substitution of 
 JleXoiropurjffioi for AaKfdaifjidvioi, or eai'xoi'S for eKaarovi, one of which finds 
 favour with most editors. avhrol — ice by ourselves; i. e., unaided by 
 
 auxiliaries from other states as the Spartans were. ir^pl t«v 
 
 oiKcCuv dfJivvop.^vovs — recalls the Homeric dinvvcadai irepi Trdrprjs. Tlie verb 
 everts its true middle force ; to ward off a person for ones own interest, and so 
 becomes nearly equivalent in construction to fxdxfffdai. 
 
 (c.) 4irl iroXXd — to many objects or enterprises. KaCroi. The 
 
 speaker sums up all the particulars before given at length, and draws his con- 
 clusion. pa0vfiC(j, corresponds exactly to our phrase * taking it easily^* 
 though so to tr. would not suit the dignity of the orator's style, tr. without 
 painful efforts ; it refers to dveifx^vcj^ Siairuifxeyoi. v6\nov is to be con- 
 nected with dv8pcCas ; bravery which is the result of institutions, i. e., such as 
 the Spartans laboriously produced by their educational training, and the laws 
 concerning milit ry service. W^opicv. The best MSS. read id^Xoifxty, 
 which would state the same thing hypothetically, and more modestly. But I 
 apprehend the orator means to speak with the utmost positiveness and confi- 
 dence, assuming as a fact, that they were ready to encounter danger. Bl. well 
 suggests that ed^Xoifiev arose from the ignorance of some copyists (which GoU. 
 seems to share), who took paOv/xlg, in a bad sense, an<l therefore would not 
 believe that Pericles asserted it directly of himself and his countrymen. 
 irtpiyCyvfrai. Seei. 144. and tr. : there results over and above — there is this 
 balance in our favour. irpoKd)iV«iv : distress ourselves before the time 
 at coming annoyances. The dative is connected with the verb in a sort of in- 
 strumental construction. See .^sch. Eum., v. 74. Kal fXT} trpbKaixve, and 
 compare i^firawewwon, V. 243. del }iox6ovvt€S. The Lacedcemonians, 
 whose city has been compared to a camp, might well have been described as 
 del pLOxdovvres, 
 
 Chap. 40.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 191 
 
 Chapter XL. — (a.) <^iXoKaXov^€v "yttp k. t. X. Mr. Grote has, I think, 
 well given the general sense of these words. We combine elegance of taste with 
 simplicity of life, and we pursue knowledge without being enervated. The 
 eureXe/a here spoken of must have had reference to private life, for, as Kriig. 
 remarks, their public life and public monuments exhibited much lavish magni- 
 ficence. But how does this correspond with the tS/atj KaracKevaLS evirpeTrecnv, 
 ch. 38 ? I apprehend the orator refers to their actual household expenses, 
 which were on a simple scale, cf. c.xvii. a., not comparable to the luxury of 
 Asia, or perhaps Corinth. See what is said about Pausanias, and contrast it 
 with the words of Demosth., ISlqi 5^ ovtoj <ru:<ppove<s fjaav — uxTre Triv'Api<TTei8ov, 
 Kal rr)v MtXridSou, koI tCov XapLirpQv oiKiav el rts &pa olSev vpidv oiroia ttot eariv, 
 bpq, r^s rov yelrovos ov8h <rep.voT^pav odaav, quoted by Arn. Olynth., iii. 
 p. 35. See, however, Miill. Hist Gr. Lit., p. •285. <pLXo(To<f)ovp.ev must 
 be understood to comprise all sorts of intellectual pursuits. That these are 
 accompanied by effeminacy is a notion common to all rude and military 
 societies like that of Sparta. Ip-yov Ka^pw. These words are the 
 
 predicate of irXoiTip, and iv, which is found in some MSS., is plainly an inter- 
 polation. Our wealth we use as an opportune means, or aid to action : then 
 follows the invariable antithesis, and not as a subject for ostentatious talking. 
 The form of expression is not more harsh than is often found in Thuc: cf. kuI 
 \6yov Kal fpyov /ca/py, ch. 43. b. The next sentence commences with rh 
 ir^V€<r0ai, because that is the main and prominent thought, antithetical to 
 irXovT(i). p.i?| 8ia4)€VY6tv — not to do our best to avoid it ; for n. b. 
 
 fiT) is used, not ov. Does the preposition denote a continuous and persevering 
 struggle to avoid poverty? Cf. 60. a. €vl tois avrois k. t.X. 
 
 * Those of us who discharge public offices do not neglect domestic duties, and 
 even that portion of our citizens whose business does not permit them to engage 
 in the administration of the state are not without a fair knowledge of politics.* 
 This seems to be the meaning of the whole. Cf. Arn.'s somewhat diffuse para- 
 phrase. Popp. describes the latter class as ' ^^res et his similes.' They were 
 generally employed as hired labourers, and were excluded from all political 
 offices. But it is not clear that Pericles did not mean to distinguish between 
 those engaged in the administration, and the general body of the citizens ; so 
 at least I infer from rbv pLT}8h ruvSe pLerix^vTa. irpbs ^P7a. 
 
 The word means business or employment. Cf. CL'dip. Tyran., v. 1124, ipyov 
 pLepipvQv TTolov, fj ^lov rlva ; hence its well known philosophical usage in the 
 Michom. Ethics of Arist. The Spartans proper were not permitted to engage 
 in any mechanical labour, merchandize, or agriculture. 
 
 {b.) ovK dirpa'YpKJva. Referring, says Kriig., to the stock charge of 
 iroXvTrpayp.o<Tvyr) brought against the Athenians. Grote tr. not as harmless but 
 cw useless. Perhaps it approaches more nearly to the spirit of the words to say, 
 not as a man who only minds his own business, but as one good for no business, 
 or nothing at all. In the same spirit was conceived the famous ordinance of 
 Solon. avToC. Some copyists, from want of understanding this, 
 
 introduced ol avrol. The speaker gracefully identifies himself with the mass 
 of his fellow-citizens. Kriig. narrows the meaning too much when he refers 
 merely to the orators who iffKep-pivoi '^kov, Dem. i. i . KpCvo\Uv ye. 
 
 The particle ^e being apparently derived from the root of ylvopai, the verb de- 
 
192 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book II. 
 
 noting existence, is naturally emphatic, and by connexion with any word or 
 clause, attracts attention to the existence of that which it expresses. Here, 
 therefore it insists emphatically upon the truth of Kpivofiev, whatever be thought 
 of ivdvfxovfxeda, can judge of at any rate, or criticise ; if ice cannot fomi the orif^i- 
 iial conception, Cf. for this usage of 7^, Arist. Eth. Nick., i. 8, h yi ti, ^ 
 vXelffTa KaTopdovv. I do not think there is any doubt about ivdvfxovfxcda, and 
 would compare 6 yitp ypovs Kai p.T) aatpds Sidd^as iv lat^ Kal ci /xtj iveOvfirjOfj. 
 Cf. also viii. 68. We should say, * if we cannot originate, we judge of,' but with 
 respect to the inverse way in which the statement is made, see supra, ch. 39. a. 
 Tovs Xd-yovs. A defence against the often repeated accusation that the 
 Athenians were <pi\6\oyoi. [See on the accent L. and S. Lex.] Not thiukiny 
 discussion any damaye to action, but rather that the damaye consists in not 
 haviny been previously enlightened by discussion, before proceed iny to foUo\o out 
 in action those matters to ichich we must of necessity address our stlns. 
 
 {c.) ToXjidv. Cf. the use of the word i. 70, Kriig. lKXoYite<rdai 
 
 may be simply to * e.r-cogitate,' or, as usual, 'to compute in full.' 6. This 
 
 was formerly explained by whereas, and the accusative of the relative accounted 
 for by understanding the prep, xard, a theory which received some su})port 
 from the Latin quod. Cf. Livy, xxx. 61, tjuod si possim, Ter. Phor., i. 33. 
 But now the editors incline to the principle of anacolouthon for explanation. 
 The whole clause I should suppose would have been arranged Kai t65c roh 
 dWois {dfxadias dpdffos (pepovarjs) 6kvov <pipei. But Kal rbhi becomes 6, and the 
 writer lets it stand, as preparatory to \oyiafi6s, which he introduces to make 
 the antithesis more plain and * piquant.' This is the opinion of Kriig. and 
 Poppo, and I suppose Arn. meant the same thing, for he says, * the verb which 
 should have followed 6 is omitted, and another construction substituted in its 
 place, which is irreconcileable with the former construction.' To understand 
 TovvdvTLov yiyverai after 8, seems to me singularly futile, for if that, why not 
 anything anywhere ? I am not sure whether after all I should not tr. in resptect 
 of which matter (i. e. the eflfect of previous deliberation upon courage), with the 
 rest of men, 'tis iynorance that produces boldness, while reflection brinys along 
 with it hesitation ; 6 then would stand like t6 nipecdai supra, and many other 
 accusatives at the commencement of a sentence to receive further elucidation 
 in its course. ot . . . yiyvairKOvrts Kal p,f| dirorpcirdpcvoi. The 
 
 same persons ; though rd is used in the same sentence of two ditiereut (incom- 
 patible) things. See Granville Sharp's Canon note, i. 18. a. tr. turn not aside 
 from (lit. out of) the danyer. i\Sia—are the sweets of peace, as Scivol 
 
 are the terrors of war, and dSea is quite a needless conjectUre. 
 
 {d.) dp€Tf|v. The popular explanation of dpen^, as given by Arist. Met., i. 
 9. 2, fonns the best explanation of this. 'Aper^ di iarl fiev 5vvap.is, ds 8ok€i 
 TTopiffTiKT) dyadQv Kai (pvXaKTiKT], Kai Svvafiis evepyeriKi^ ttoXXuu Kai jJnydXiav Kai 
 irdvTojv Trepi irdvra. So 'goodness' and *bont<^' have a special meaning wherein 
 they are nearly equivalent to kindness and liberality. Cf. German yiitiy. We 
 find of course a more scientific definition of dperii, Eth. Nich. ii. See the same 
 usage ii. 51. c, where the Schol. explains dp€T7)s, (piXapOpuirlas. 
 'i\vavr\.di\i.iBa. This says T. K. A. -we are opposed to; but does not this lose 
 sight of the fact that a process is denoted by the termination of the verb ? tr. 
 we have been made to entertain very opposite views, sc. by education, and the 
 principles of conduct generally accepted among us. The editors need not have 
 
 Chap. 41.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 93 
 
 remarked on the perfect, for it is the proper tense. PcPaiOTcpos h\ 
 
 K.T.X. tr. Now the doer of the favour (n. b. the indefinite participle) is the 
 more abidiny friend for the sake of keepiny it still owiny, in the shape of a debt 
 by continued kindness to the recipient, and so nearly Pop. Kriig., eiVotd rivos is 
 most properly as this version represents it, * benevolentia in aliquem ;' and 
 this meaning is also most suited to the argument, for the orator wants to convey 
 the impression that iC'voia most truly and permanently attaches to his country- 
 men, and this he proves by showing that it is to them a necessary means of re- 
 taining the benefit to be derived from their own liberality. The whole is well 
 illustrated and exj>lained by Arist. Nich. Eth. viii. 7, ol U evepyirai tovs 
 €V(py€Tr}devTat SoKovai fxdXXou (piXe'ip ij ol ed TradbvTis rovs hpdcavras : then 
 comparing the parties to debtors and creditors, he atlds, cutuj Kal tovs eixpyeTT)- 
 aavras ^ovXeadai duai tovs irddovTas, lus KOfjLLOfi^uovs rds x^ptras, tois d^ ovk 
 eli/at iiri^eX^s rb duTairodovvai. See Tacitus, Ayric. ch. 42. Peile i)refers in 
 order to keep it owing to him in the shape of good will on the jxirt of him to whom 
 he hath ^/rc»— considering that 5t' ei-mas explains dtpeiXo/jL^prjv. But both for 
 the sense and the Greek I prefer the former. Goll. seems to understand to 
 keep alive the obligation arising from his good mil in the mind of him whom 
 he has obliged, which would, T fancy, as Peile has suggested, require ol 
 €\jvoiav, or rather 5id t^v eifvoiav. Engelnian's ed. also, I observe, agrees witli 
 the version which I have given, 'urn durch Wohlwolhn geyen den wflchtm tr 
 sit verliehcn hat, sich den schuldigen Bank zu sichern.' The French version 
 has the usual vagueness, ' il la garde a son obliye comme une ditte 
 de bienreillance: AfipXvrcpos— rfw^/er in his feeliny. k^ X^piv— 
 
 by way of a free gift. dirodivauv is only applicable on the principle 
 of Zeugma, for it contains the notion of paying a debt. Cf. Shepi)Hrd'a 
 Theoph. p. 176. "riis i\€vBtpias tw TrCcrrip. We might tr. in all the con- 
 
 fidence of liberality, i. e. with that conjtdence which a truly liberal man feels ; 
 but most edd. prefer to tr. in the confident spirit of freedom, i.e. the confidence 
 which freedom bestows upon those who jiossess it, thus introducing a political 
 allusion. Cf. i. 68. a. dBcwsis, 2cithoutfcar of the consequences, and will 
 
 suit either interpretation, for we may suppose it to mean, without that fear of 
 future ingratitude and forgetfulness which characterize the recipients of favours 
 and so deter many from being liberal ; or again it may refer to political injury 
 resulting from measures undertaken in behalf of others. The proposed altera- 
 tion into ^5eu)$ ^mentioned by T. K. A.) seems to me singularly stupid. 
 
 Chapter XLI.— (a.) |vvA.«v. Lit. taking all together; hence summing up 
 in a word. So it is used i. 70, ad fin. irafScvo-iv. Grote con- 
 
 siders that the abstract word for Traidevrplap softens the affirmation. It is 
 doubtful whether there was any such intention. We should say ' The School 
 of Greece,' and so Zevort, * I'^cole de la Grfece.' KaO* ^Kao-rov. 
 
 The masculine gender, as respects our citizens regarded as individuals, lie- 
 mark how the writer varies his style, fxerd xap^rwv, evrpair^Xus and aCrapnes 
 where another would have used three adverbs. The position of Slv wliich 
 properly belongs to irapiXeadai, is not without its influence u})on 
 ZoKUv. "irap* i\)L<ov— going forth from among us. See note on the use of 
 
 irapd I. 29. c. Kriig. certainly explains, 'owing to our training and education, ' but 
 
 
 
194 
 
 NOTES ON TIIUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book II. 
 
 Chap. 42.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 ^95 
 
 he does not say, as T. K. A. makes him. that there is causal reference involved. 
 The useof Trapd * cum genitivo' denotes 'motion from alongside of an object,' 
 and thouo-h more may be implied, a causal notion is not necessary to the sense. 
 €irl irXetcTTa el'S-q, The expression is rather general. fZSossays Popp. is often 
 connected with rpdwov, and therefore he is i>robably right in explaining a/jcvdi 
 ratio. Kai unites iirl TrXeto-r' elSrj to /xaXiffra ei'rpaTrAws, though in translating 
 it is as well for our idiom omitted. Tfie mine man (foin«j forth from amovr/ ux, 
 could without requiriuff aid from others, address himself to the most varied rins- 
 situdes of arfimi, with the most (jraceful rersatilitf/. The use of (rwp.a n^ay in- 
 dicate that only hodibj accomplishments are intended ; and Kriig. seems to 
 assert as much — ' ffw^ia kann hier nicht fiiglich Person Bondcri^ nur Korper 
 heissen.' Cf. ii. 51.2.' The idea seems to be that the Athenian is ' in se totus 
 teres, atque rotundus,' and unless intellectual versatility be elsewhere implied, 
 it would hardly be omitted here. cvrpair^ws- Like our simjtfe, 
 
 and other words in perhaps all languages, passes from a good into an evil accep- 
 tation. Tlius, though originally, as here, and in Aristotle, it denotes a sportive 
 demeanour, it came to signify * scurrilous.' 
 
 {b.) dKofjs Kp€io-(rwv — superior to repute, i.e.^ its reputation. I cannot 
 ac»-ree with Kriig. in this instance, who tr. superior to any of which tradition 
 tills a meanint' which, he says, the absence of the article plainly indicates. 
 But does not dfcoTj, 'Fame,' 'Parlance,' belong to that class of words which, 
 under special circumstances, are used without an article. See the note, i. 8. a. 
 And as irupav is anarthrous, it is not surprising that aKO-q should be so also. 
 Cf. vii. 11. d'Yava.KTqoriv tyjti— contains in itself cause of indignation ; the 
 
 accusative has an objective siguihcation. Cf. ttjj' eiruvvfiiav ax^tv, i. 9, a. Popp. 
 also adduces KaTdfi€tJi\l/iv ^x^iy ; and ii. 61, aicBrjaiv, ii. 87, iv. 126; and a 
 similar objective usage of habeo, * Nam causam justi semper amoris habent.' 
 TibuUus i. 4, 10. v<^* o^wv — tcith respfrt to the sort of persons by 
 
 whom. Cf. with Knig. vii. 75. icoTdjt€jix|/iv. T. K. A. explains 
 
 a sense of dctjradafion, but this is not Greek. We must tr. occasion for depre- 
 ciation, i.e., not of themselves, but of us; and hence, matter for self reproach. 
 They are forced to acknowledge us a great nation, and such as it is no disgrace 
 to be governed by. <rr)[i€Cwv — accompanied by palpable proofs, i.e., the 
 
 facts of History, and the visible monuments of power ; then we might have 
 anticipated ovk Avev /xaprvpuv, but the principle of variety (i. 38, c.) comes in, 
 and the construction changes. See several instances in this ch., and especially 
 tQv 5^ ^pyojv, where 5^ unites a direct to a relative statement. The combina- 
 tion of 8t| Toi is as strong as pos.'^ible, as they are the two chief |)articles for 
 denoting affirmation, ye exerts its proper force, as explained supra. The 
 general notion is that they have inscribed their glory too palpably upon Greece 
 and her history to fear oblivion by posterity. Kal ov8iv. Tliis kuI couples 
 
 TTpoffSeofievoi to irapaffx^/JLevoi. The plur. Iir€<ri denotes poetry. Cf. Aavdovs 
 iu Tois lireai, i. 3. ^ttos is 'word' in prose only in particular combinations; 
 j^rljg rh ovtCko — for the immediate moment. Cf. iv. 107, vi. 57. 
 
 Oji^pov liraiv^TOv. Sine articulo. A Homer for a Panegyrist, or. to sing their 
 praises. rutv 8i tpytav— whereas the truth will damage the conception 
 
 formed of the facts. The exaggerated estimate of a thing, when con-ected by 
 the test of experience, is apt to depreciate its value in our notions. I look 
 upon all attempts to make out from the rhetorical usageof vir6voia, thatit is in this 
 
 place employed for a 'magnificent conception,' as founded upon a wrong view of 
 the requirements of the argument. KaKwv t€ Ka-yaOwv— /or good or for ill. 
 
 I do not see why Pericles might not have thus spoken, even if he had not meant 
 to confine the kukol to evils wrought upon their enemies, as most Ed. explain. 
 Cf. 45. b. Kriig. considers the exj)res8ion so *naive' that he conjectures the usual 
 formula KaXCof re KayadQv. IvyKaroiKCo-avTCS. The metaphor seems to be 
 
 taken from colonization, or perhaps the consolidation of a state. Grote, there- 
 fore, well nnulers having planted imperishable monuments. 8iKaiovvT€s 
 \L^ d(|)aipc6fjvai avWjv — asserting their right not to be robbed of it. It certainly 
 is an illustration of the principle, cpiXei fixas to eavrov ipyop, that Mr. Grote, 
 after having been told the right one, should retain his own strange translation 
 of these words, vindicating her just title to unimpaired rights. He naively 
 remarks that neither Popp., Goll., nor Arnold, notice the difficulty. They do not 
 do so, because there can be none to anyone who remembers that the verbs which 
 take a double accusative in the sing, have this construction in the passive. Cf. 
 infra, 44. b. Xciirop.^vwv, n. b. the present part. ' whom they are leaving 
 belli nd them.' 
 
 Chapter XLII. — (a.) irtpl to-ov— /or an equal stake. Kriig. cf. Dem. viii. 
 60. oux vir^p TU}u tffitjv v/jiiv re Kai rois &\\ois iad' 6 Klvdvvos. 
 tLti^kv trrrapx**- We have /xrjS^v rather than ov8^u, because the clause is de- 
 pendant upon IX7J (Ivai. i^' ots. Understand the antecedent tovtwv. The 
 preposition iwi indicates the local ])o.sition of the speaker; hence, iir-atvos, he- 
 cause spoken 07Tr the bodies of the dead, fM/ojry. Cf. 24. c. i;|AVTjo-a. Though 
 originally employed for poetic praises, the won! naturally passes into a rhetorical 
 usage, as Bl. has .shown by examples. l<r<Jppoiros— lit. equal in the 
 scales; hence, ' the just equivalent of their deeds.' 
 
 (6.) 8oK€i 8^ p.01 811X0VV K. T. X. There is some little difficulty here. 
 dvbpbt dpervv, as Popp. observes, cannot be alicujus horum defunctorum virtu- 
 tern; the genitive must therefore have an adjectival force, and the whole is 
 fortitudo virilis. So in the passage quoted by Bl. from Isoc. ix. 8, x^-'^^'^^v 
 iffTLv dvbpbs dper-qv 5ta X67to»' iyKWfud^eiv. We must, as Meyer has pointed out, 
 recognise a reference to two classes of persons : those whose previous life had 
 as yet given no indications of worth, and those who had long been distinguished 
 as valuable citizens, tr. Now what a man's worth is, this, the closing scene of 
 these mens life, apjmirs to me to show, whether now for the first time announcing 
 it, or coming as its final confirmation (lit. being the first to announce if). So 
 Peile tr., both in the case where it is the Jirst indication, and where it is the final 
 contirmation. Kriig. remarks upon the Euphemism contained in Karaarpoc^T}, 
 which was, he says, imitated by the later writere. irpoTCeco-Oai. 
 
 Popp. explains this fortitndincm pra se f err e, prof feri, ejrhibere, or, in magnd 
 laude poni. I am, however, inclined to think that the notion of holding before 
 as a screen is implied, meaning that their subsequent merit should exclude their 
 previous deficiencies from view ; or more sim])ly still, ' to put forward in the 
 first place,' so that their other conduct becomes a secondary matter. Here, 
 then, the word is used in a favourable sense; the unfavc arable sense is more 
 common, as iii. 64, iiri rip iKtlvwv KaK(^ dvSpayadiav irpoMeade. Cf. Tac. Uisi. 
 Y. 25, ilium domesticis mails excidium gentis opposuisse. 
 
 o 2 
 
ig6 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Hook II. 
 
 (c.) irXovTw, the reading of the best MSS., t;iken instrumentally with 
 ifjLaXaKiffOrj. Tf|v €tI air6\av<riv — the furt/itr enjoy me ut of it. 
 
 ircvias €Xir(8t. Here we have tiie true yetietic or genitive cane, cf. i, 23. d. — 
 hope tTKjendered by poverty, i. e., which poverty causes to spring up in the mind, 
 or, a.c acme say, 'the poor man s hope.' See, however, Jelf, § 898. 3. 
 irXovTT|<r€i€. I don't beheve T. K. A. is right in tr. tliis to become rich, to fjroio 
 rich, tliough, as usual, blindly following Kriig., who has 7'etch wtrdeii. The 
 word, I believe, implies ' being,' compoumled as it is with iu> ; so we say 
 in English, ' he hopes to be a rich man some day or other.' And similarly iu 
 the passages quoted by Kriig., e. y. Plat. Rep. p. 421, d. 7r\oyr/)<ras x^'''P^'^^ is 
 the potter ichen a rich man. See i. 107. c. dvapoXi^v — a putt in*/ off from 
 
 one's self, or shirking, if the word be not too inelegant. Cf. witli Kriig. 
 dya/3o\ds iirouLTO. Dem. 48, 20. avTciv, sc. t^s dTroXai/acws kclI 
 
 T^s AttiSos. XapdvTcs, here in reference to the mental grasp, or 
 
 conception. Cf. t6 K-qpvjfxa — biKaiov elvat iXdfijdavov, iv. 106, and note iii. 259. 
 Cf. ib. 38. d., 56. c. fi€T* avTov, sc. tov kiv5vvov. riav hk i^UarQai. 
 
 These words are also to be tjiken in close connection with fX€T aOrov, which is 
 the condition upon which the infinitives are predicated, not without this peril ; 
 so Kriig. * nur niit Bestehung der Gefalir.' This was the only condition upon 
 which they would consent to seek these objects. cXirCSi ft^v k. t. X. 
 
 — committinii to hope the uncertainty of future success, i. e., so far as future 
 success, a thing never certain, was concerned, they were content to hope for 
 the best. ^P"Y<i» ^ — ^"^ when once enyarjtd in action thinkiiiy it rnjht to 
 
 trust none other than themselves concerning what had met them face to face — lit. 
 before their eyes, i. e., the dangers of the combat, ^pyip stands as an adverbial 
 dative ; rod ijdT} bpojixivov is antithetical to rb d<f>av^^ tov KaropOibceiv, and d^iouKrcy 
 (X(p. avT. TTfTT. to eXiriSi tTrtr. Meyer, on the other hand, to whom Popp. assents, 
 makes ^pyifJ 5^ follow miroidevat, and a<pi<jLv avTois follow opu/jL^vov. Trust to 
 action in what was before their own eyes. This has the advantage of more 
 exactly balancing the antithesis, but the sense seems to me inferior ; atpicnv 
 aiTois, too, is weak in this way of taking it ; and should we not have had tov 
 a(j>l<nv avToh bpwix^vov ' kv avria—thereiji. to dpivveo-Oai Kal ira0€iv. 
 
 Said of the same act. Cf. Granville Sharp's canon, i. 18. a. — to fall in repelling 
 the enemy, contrasted with to cv8ovt€s o-w^€O-0ai — to secure safety by submis.'^ion. 
 See Jelf, § 678. The question then arises, what are we to make of piaAXov tiY^- 
 (rd}JL€voi ? An Englishman might betenipted to tr. having thought more of, i.e., 
 preferred, or, having more fancied ; TjyoC/xai would then be used with fxdWoy, 
 as fidWov d^iovv, and p-dWov ^ovXeadai. This agrees with Popp., who s.ays, 
 ' cum 7r>'f*<''^ctt interdum aequente infinitivo notionem (eqnum cen send i haheAt 
 (ut vofxi^eLv iv. 86), videtur sonare posse, praferre, malle.' This Am. calls the 
 *sensus praegnans' of Tfyrjadfiivoi,, and places it among the instances cited by 
 Lobeck ad. Phrynich. c. vi. p. 753. where i)yeiff6ai, oteffdai, and vofii^eiv, are 
 used in the sense of thinking right. To this it is objected that they are always 
 followed by an infinitive sine articulo. Am. replies by (pioting ii. 53, rd Trpoara- 
 XaiTwpetv oi'Seis irpbdvfxos fjv. But is this exactly parallel — with respect to the 
 taking much trouble, no one was zealous. However, Matthiie, § 543, has 
 collected numerous instances of the infin. with article, some of which are 
 n)ore appropriate, though many are otherwise explicable. Perhaps it might 
 lessen the difficulty to say for /id\. i}y. iu&tuad of thought more of, more ihouyht 
 
 Chap. 43.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 197 
 
 of '• ^-j .7«^"C more thought to, though even this is scarce consistent with the 
 common use of ijyovixaL. Another method of explanation is to consider that 
 the words sUmd elli])tically, for elyat ixdXXov tovto, that this more consisted in, 
 &c. , where by 'this' is meant rb (rrpiaiv avroh ireiroid^vai. Kriig. tr. they 
 therein more recognised {i.e., understood and accepted the necessity of), defence, 
 though accompanied with death, than self-preservation purchased by submission. 
 I do not exactly understand either T. K. A.'s explanation or his translation of 
 Kriig. Peile prefers the old reading r<^ to to, which he considers confirmed 
 by c. 43, iv r(^ dfivveffdai. and tr. and accounting that to consist in actually 
 defending themselves and suffering (/. e., at every cost, come what may), rather 
 than in seeking to save themselves by giving in. t6 (i^v alcr\pi)v k. t. X. 
 
 — Disgrace, indeed, to their reputation (lit. what would be said of them) they 
 fled from, but the brunt of battle with their bodies they bore, and at the very 
 briefest crisis of their fate (when the least thing might have turned the scale of 
 victory), they departed in the height of their glory rather than of their fears. 
 The aKfirj' seems to me to be applied by a sort of Zeugma to tov biovs, for 
 had the latter stood alone the orator would probably have used another word. 
 81* 4Xaxf<rT0u Kaipov tv^t^s, seems equivalent to the ' horeti momento cita mors 
 venit' of Horace, Meyer and Popp. doubt this, and tr. 'dum fortuna brevissi- 
 mam nacta erat opportunitatem,' meaning, I suppose, 'when fortune had for 
 a moment obtained an opportunity,' i.e., they had a chance for a moment of 
 distinguishing themselves, and did not let it slip. dirr]XXdYT]o-av — 
 
 were set free from, an euphemism as in Ileraclcido', v. 965. Keivovb' diraXXa- 
 \diirroi. So the Latin decesserunt, our departed, and the German Sie schieden. 
 
 Chapter XLIII. — (a.) irpoo-i^Koin-ws. D. welltr., ' as became the character 
 of their country.' dcr<|>aX€crTcpav. Certainly there is force in K. '3 
 
 objection, that d(r0. Stavoiai/ cannot Hv^miy a securer life. He therefore reads 
 neut. plur. da<f>aXiaTepa. But I am sure Thuc. would have sacrificed some- 
 thing for the antithesis which makes both adjectives predicates to biavoiav ; and, 
 after all, we say a safer policy, a safer line of action, meaning that which conduces 
 to safety. Cf. the well-known passages Soph. Aja^r, v. 550, and Virg. xii. 435. 
 o-KoirovvTas p.^ Xdyw |idvb). — considering not in icords alone ; or merely theoreti- 
 cally: it ismeant that they must show a practical senseof the fact by their actions. 
 Kriig. cf. (JaI. Col. v. 369. Xbyi^ aKoirovaL t7]u TrdXai yivovs <pdopdv. ^P74» 
 
 6c(i>p^vovs- The opposite notion to X6y(i} aKovovvTas : this latter, as Am. says, 
 means regarding a thing merely from the account givenof it, therefore the former 
 will be, viewing a thing in its reality, not trusting to report, but seeing it as in 
 fact it is. The antithesis makes this preferable to the tr. of Peile and others — 
 what she, (i. e., the state) does. 6l86Tas' Cf. supra, ch. 36. tr., 'if a man 
 
 were to enlarge on, it would be to persons as icell acquainted with it as himself.' 
 ^paoTTas ■yi'Yvojjicvovs, becoming its lorei's: make Athens your Mistress. A strong 
 personification, referring doubtless to certain personal relations fashionable at 
 the time and place. ToX|ici)VT€S Popp. says. i. e., ToXfxTjpoi, and Kriig. 
 
 renders * kiihne,' as roX/xdv often stands absolutely ; and of course T. K. A. 
 follows. But these translations do not show that ToXfiQures sine articulo is the 
 conditionalizing participle, expressing with the others the cause of iKT-rjcravTO — 
 ftv daring won. Cf. i. 9. a. •yuYvwo-KovTcs Ta 8€(5vTa, is, I think> 
 
 taking the troMe to acquaint themselves with their duty. See what is said i. 86. a. 
 
198 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book II. 
 
 Chap. 44.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 199 
 
 ai(r\vv6yL€V0\.—u'ith a keen sense of shame, or sense of honour : as Kriig., who 
 quotes alboixivwv dvdpwv irX^ovei <t6oi 77^ 7r^0avTai. II. v. 531. 
 8iroT€ (r4>aX€iT|(rav. Optative, because indefinite frequency. Cf. i. 70, d. 
 Spavov — a joint contribution ; the regular technical term, and of course quite 
 familiar to his auditors. For information see Diet, of Antiquities, Hermann. 
 Pol. Ant. of Greece, § 146-9, and Bceckh's P. E. of Athens, p. 245. E. T. 
 The society itself, and the money subscribers were each called ipavos ; the 
 members 'Epaviffrai, and their president an Eranarch. Demosthenes Cont. Mid. 
 § 27, &c., makes nmch use of the same metaphor, representing the state as a 
 sort of great benefit society, to which every citizen owes a contribution. 
 
 (6.) KOiVQ— 1» common with those who had not full en. Kriig. ^v ^ 
 
 Some understand Td<p(t), but Kriig. says it is the neuter, in the spot where. 
 irapd Tw €VTvxdvTi k. t. X. On every occasion, either for word or deed, which 
 from time to time may happen to present itself : referring to spoken panegyric, 
 and couimemoration by festivals, &c. Kriig. will not allow that ivrvxitvTL can 
 agree with Kaipy, which irapd with a dative would not allow, he therefore tr. 
 in his case who happens at any time to fall into the subject. I do not know 
 what his objection is, unless it be that irapd cum dativo indicates rest at a point, 
 or with a person. But upon the hypothesis that the occasion does occur, may 
 we not say that their glory certainly abides with it, is always to be found with 
 it? ird<ra yfj might be translated ^ erevy land;' but it may also be 
 
 the whole earth. So Lysias, ii. 15, dwaca lUXotrbwrico^. Kriig. 
 TTJs Y»'«(it]s puXXov ^ rov ipyov. * an unwritten memoricd of the heart, rather 
 than of a [(\y their {] material monument.' So D., and this is the usual translation. 
 Kriig. however argues that irap ' €Kd(TT<f} in itself implies a memorial of the mind, 
 and ToO ipyov is not a proper expression for a material thing. He would 
 therefore tr. the memory of their patriotic sentiment, rather than of the fight iu 
 which they fell. But surely the two would be indissolubly blended together, 
 and the names of the great Athenian battles were ever in their orators' mouth. 
 I believe roO ipyov is used much in the^ame way as it is a few lines previously, 
 i. e., what was actually done in the way of commemoration. The orator does 
 not intend to ej:clude such commemoration, but implies that even where this was 
 absent, their recollection would still dwell in the minds of their countrymen. 
 In justice to Kriig. 's argument, it should be noticed that the combats in which 
 these men fell were somewhat insignificant. Engelman's tr. agrees with Kriig. 
 — mehr ihrer Gesinnung als des Kampfes selbst. Cf. .^sch. cont. Ctes., 50 c. 
 ov yap (^ovTo deiv iv rois ypdfifjLaffi ri/idcrdai, d\\ ' iv ry fivi/fixrf rdv ei5 venovddTwv. 
 
 (c.) rh cv8ai|iov, and rh c<;\|ruxov are predicates, for tiie predicate takes the 
 article where it is represented to be coextensive with the subject. Happintst 
 IS freedom, and freedom courage ; — is meaning consists in. ircpiopd(r6c. 
 
 voce media, neglect to your own damage. Kriig. cf. i. ^4, 4, vi. 93, i. 
 KaKOirpa'yovvTcs in reference to the ivivovos doK-qas of the Lacedaemonians, 
 ch. 39, 2. Kriig. those who fare hard. This is probably, as Bl. says, antici- 
 pative of an objection likely to be urged by the rich, who might say, like the 
 soldier of Lucullus, that they ought not to risk their lives in the same way as 
 those who had nothing to lose. The argument is certainly a paradox, contra- 
 dicted by experience, however ingenious on the part of the speaker. 
 Tj €vavTta pcTapoX^. The change to the opposite w still a risk, or there is still a 
 
 risk of a change to the opposite. ^p6vr\iLa—high spirit. See i. 81, 
 
 and cf. ii. 62. ^ J^^to^ tov |jLaXaKto-0T]vai, kcikwo-is. Am. says 
 
 KdKujffis is milertf, wretchedness. This is scarcely exact enough ; it is really 
 'worsening,' were there such a word, i. e. that deterioration of character, or de- 
 gradation which follows upon (lit. accompanies) the having shown cowardice. 
 Before fierd rov in some MSS. stand iu ry, which is, I think, plainly a gloss 
 introduced from the margin. Kriig., however, retains the words, from the 
 notion that t6 fierd tov pLaXaKcadiivai may be one logical terra capable ot 
 declension like a substantive, and he assigns to it the meaning the state that 
 follows upon proved cowardice. But of such a phrase ' desiderantur exerapla.' 
 put\iy\— vigour, and so valour, which is from valeo. KO\.V'f\—hope 
 
 common to all, i. e., of coming safely out of battle; but hope for the common 
 good give*, as Krug. says, a loftier thought, and is not contradictory to the 
 idiom of the language. But may not the meaning be affected by its combination 
 with pti/i7;5 ? dvaC<reT]Tos * describes the speediness of the pang of death 
 
 when it comes in the heat of battle without the protracted suffering of disease.' 
 Am. If the meaning assigned by Krug. to koivv be correct, the hope of 
 benefiting their country is another element in rendering death uufelt, or pain- 
 less. Am. quotes similar usages of the word from Dem. Aris. JlheL, c. 6, § 4, 
 Plutarch, Demetrius, c. 29. 
 
 Chapter XLIV.— («•) 6\o^vpo^ai. Tlie fut. 6\o<t>vpovp.ai has been con- 
 jectured, but the present is more proper, because it relates to the actual state 
 of feeling which the orator was then expressing—/ am not as you see lament- 
 ing, but shall rather, &c. rh 8' cvtvx^S ol dv rfis cvtrpc^tcrraTTis 
 K. T. X. Peile tr. Happiness belongs to those who shall have obtained the most 
 glorious— death, as these men have now obtained, or affliction, as you. This 
 is, I think, correct, except that rb evrvx^s is-goodhap, not happiness, 
 evda^p-ouia ; and we should perhaps say, They shall be accounted to have had the 
 most fortunate lot. The whole, I fancy, means, ' your affliction, a« their death, 
 is the best of the sort that can befall a man.' But Peile and othei-s explain, 
 ' Death and affliction are the lot of all men. Human happiness is therefore 
 altogether comparative. Hence, they may be said to be happy, whose lot dis 
 to have the most glorious, as in the present instance these men have, death ; whilst 
 Vou have affliction: Kal ols • . . |vV€|i€TpT,0T|. This passage is of ac- 
 knowledged difficulty. ' In duabus rebus,' says Popp., * hic haereas. One is 
 the change of construction from oi dv Xdxwat, to oU ^vvefierpiidv : but this is 
 amply accounted for on the principle of variety so often mentioned of, 1. 3»» 
 c. ; the second is the force of the preposition iu, when it is not stated what 
 are tiie things in which they were happy. It seems to have escaped Popp., 
 that these verbs belong to a class compounded with iv, which in Eiighsh are 
 expressed by putting the prep, after the verb, and which stand almost inde- 
 pendently. £. g. Aristoph. Aves, v. 38. Kal rrdai Kotvijv ivawoTlffai XP^^ara, 
 open to all to spend their money in. Herod, ix. 65. oi5t€ iaeXdu^v is rb rifievos 
 ovT€ ivairodav^v. AviBt. Paj, v. 1156. ivairoirarelv yap iar iinriibeios irdvv, 
 Eurip. Bacchit, 508. ivbv<7Tvxi<Ta^. I should therefore interpret, whose life has 
 been dealt out to them to be happy in, equally as to die in ; or, inverting, to die iv, 
 equally as to be happy in, i. e. their death has been correspondent to the hap- 
 
200 
 
 NOTES OX THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book TI. 
 
 piness of their hfe. If you look at the happiness they e„joye<l in life, and at 
 the dose to which their life was brought, you will find them o^o/cus ,^werp.- 
 Oeura-dealt out in corresponding/ ratio. I subjoin other explanations which 
 the reader may perhaps prefer. Meyer has, * guonun vitce tenor ita congruit 
 uteadem re et feline, essent, et obirent, i. e. qxxS. in re vit* term in urn. 'in e^ 
 etiam fehcitatem invenerunt.' The close of their life was made to them hap- 
 piness. This I cannot think accordant with the usage of the verbs in Greek 
 Hermann-' quibus sic e,t traducfa vita, ut in ed pari et felicitate et ea:itu ute- 
 renfur. To this it is objected that e5 does not occur before iyrfXevTrjcai This 
 objection I think remedied by the vei-sion which I have ventured to give 
 reae~ivho hare had their life equally dealt out, so as for them to be happy in 
 tt to the same eutent, and to die in it, i. e. die simultaneously with their earthly 
 eiyoyment. Cf Eurip. Jlipp. ,069. . Cor. vii. 3. Krug., their good fortune 
 has been equalh, balanced [abyeschlossen) for them, so as in and with it to meet 
 their end. T. K. A., the accurate measurement of life (= space of life) 
 allows space enough for these two things, a happy existence, and death, but no 
 more. 
 
 {b.) TrfiQiivsc.TaiTa. Kriig. ingeniously suggests Tai^e?!/. cSv is 
 
 the raiisculine, having reference to an antecedent implied in what has gone be- 
 lore. n^h respect to persons of whom you will so often have things to put ,iou in 
 mind, hor the sentiments here expressed, Popp. cf. Isoc. Plat. § 19. ' Xen. 
 Cyrop. vii. 5 . 82. ir€ipao-d|i€Vos- deprived of before he has had an op- 
 
 portunity of experiencing. Krug. quotes Valla's version quibus nunguam 
 i>a/e/«;7/>nm»/«;. with approbation, adding that Tupacd^e.os the reading of 
 some M^i5. is inadmissible, because ' a man cannot be deprived of what he 
 has never had.' I suppose one might retort with reference to the future it is 
 no great de,,rivation to lose what you are never going to have. In fact'l be- 
 lieve the aor. part, to be very suitable, as conveying the idea without any limi- 
 tation of time— ^. e. .simply without experience of them. d4»aip«0fi. 
 tf. supni, 41. b. Here some accus. pronoun is understood as object to the verb 
 ArjBT,, oblinon, for the ground, or cause of oblivion. Popp. refers to iinaKeo^' 
 1. 52 : and dXcvac. 'IXt'ou. Phil. v. 61. though this is scarcely the .same thing ' 
 biXo9,v~.beneticial in two ways. T. K. A., or more accurately, benejff vill 
 accrue from two sources. ^voCcrci, has for its subject Hk.u^it^u ^oiuaSai 
 according to Popp. and Bl. KrUg. says it has no subject at all, or at nmst 
 irpayfia is to be supplied, which actually is so, Arist. Xubes, v. 594. So he also 
 explains Xen. Anab. vii. 8, 4 ; Andocid. i. 77 ; and Dem. ^l 66. kTepond- 
 6,Ti dv 5pu}(riu 'Adrjuaiois elvai ^tti t6 dpLeivov dvb tov injfiuov. 
 
 (r.) pov\€i;€<r0ai, contribute counsel to the state in any fair and equal way. 
 Trapapa\Xdfi€vos bringing forward, and expo»ing equalhf to risk Cf iii 14 
 On U rod o^ocoO. Cf. i. 143. c. napr^^i^Kar,. ' ^apd is here trans', 
 
 have got beyond the prime of life, and are therefore not likely r^KPwffi^ xouiadat. 
 K^pSos TJ-y€to-0€— con«/(/er as so much clear gain—* lucro appotiite.' That this is 
 a legitimate construction of iryov^ai may be readily shown. Cf. inter alia, 
 Td dynrdd' ov vOu irpCrrop rryoOfiai iTKiav. Eur. Med. 1224, and with Krug. 
 Dem. viii. 66. 7r6\6ws ttXovtov i-^i^e ijyov^ai avfifidxavs, irLaTiv, eHvoiav. 
 r6vU sc. ^iov, has its proper use, this which is to follow. rh 
 
 «|)tX(jTij«)v, * synonymous with ei?/c\fm, honour.' Kriig. and of course following 
 
 Chap. 45.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 201 
 
 himT. K. A. But is it not rather the love of honour contrasted with the love of gain, 
 both being regarded as passions of the human mind which are thought never to 
 become extinct ? Then we have to Kepdaiveiv opposed to t6 rifiaffdai., the getting 
 money, and the getting honour. tw axpeCw refers to incapacity for 
 
 active service, as may be seen from i. 93. tQu dxp^ioTdrwy dpK^aeiu tt\v <pv\aKr]v. 
 
 Chapter XLV. — (a.) rhv ayCiva— the struggle you will have to undergo in 
 attempting to rival their renown. tov -yap o<}k 6vTa k. t. X. Kriig. 
 
 quotes from Mimnennus apud Stob. 125. 12. deivoi yap dvdpi irdures iafxev 
 eiiKXett, i'CJvri (pdovrjaaL, Kardavdura 5' aiv^aai. The Horatian sentiment will 
 recur to the thoughts of every one. * Virtutem incoluraem {while if dwtlh with 
 us) odimus, Sublatam ex oculis quaerimus invidi.' KaO' vircpPoX^v 
 
 apcTHS— /» or by an excess of merit; even supposing that you reached tran- 
 srendent merit, would you be judged, I say not on a par with, but even a little in- 
 ferior to them. <|)9dvos "Y^P *^- '^- ^- ^^ ^^^^ ^^^ *® ^^ expressed in 
 English by saying, the living hare Envy to contend against as a rival? For 
 irpb% rb dvTlirakov is not, I think, rightly rendered by Meyer— propter 
 emulationem, i.e. the living are envied on account of rivalry ; nor by Popp. ab 
 (pmulis, making it equivalent to irpbs tCjv dvTiirdXujv, by their rivals; nor by 
 Goll. erga (emuhs, i. e. the living have a feeling of envy towards their rivals; 
 nor as Dale, the living are exposed to envy in their rivalry. Kriig. merely 
 Bays, * among the living envy dominates, whether enviers or envied.' It will 
 be seen that I make irpbs rb avriiraXov, 'for opposition,' i. e. to discharge the 
 function of an opponent : which sense it is I think capable of sustaining. Then 
 rb fir) ifiTToSuv— those who are in no one's way=oi ovk dvres (the neuter being a 
 general form of statement) are opposed to oi ^wvres ; and they are said to find 
 no such obstacle a^^ainst {wpbs) which it is necessary for them to struggle ; but 
 they are honoured with a good will which has no one to oppose it. 
 
 {b.) dpcTTJs.— ' // I must say anything on the subject of ironunis excellence.' 
 D. Tlie scholiast, says Kriig., is ungaliant enough to deny all virtues to the 
 sex, except that of ffutppoavvr}. ov yap dvdpeia, ij biKaioavvrj ij (ppbvrjffi^. Meyer 
 and Bl. refer this to ' chastity ;' Arnold to ' modesty and affcctionateness.' But 
 as there is no article, D. is right in referring it to nothing special (see i. 2. d.); 
 it simply means the sort of merit which is to be looked for from women on such an 
 occasion. That this, according to the Greek conception, was of a very negative 
 and passive character, is clear enough, even from what follows. 8<rai, of 
 
 course, has for its antecedent yvvaiKes contained in yvvaiKeias. Cf. Jelf, 819. i. 
 435. a. Tiis vtrapx- 4>v<r€a)s |x^ \dpo<ri -y^vco-Oai. An eloquent passage 
 
 occurs in one of the Oxford Prize Essays [ ' Domestic Virtues of the Greeks 
 and Romans,'] condemning the cold-heartedness of the orator who, on such an 
 occasion, could tell wives and mothers not to be worse than they were by 
 nature ! But this is surely seeing in words the meaning most suitable for our 
 argument. When the Greeks were exhorted, as they often were, twv iraTipwv 
 fir) xfipous ipavTJvai, ii. 62. d., cf. i. 122. 3 ; vi. 92. b., nothing unworthy was 
 implied of their ancestors ; on the contrary, the words were an exhortation not to 
 fall short of their valour. So here the orator means, * Do not deteriorate from 
 that character which Nature has given you ; we know you to be weaker thnn 
 the other sex, but do not extravagantly indulge in this weakness.' i\ ^6^0. 
 
202 
 
 NOTES ON TIIUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book II. 
 
 — the praise, i.e., which will result from such conduct. Kal 1(5, sc. fjicydXrj 
 
 7j 56^a, great, too, will be her praise, of whom among the other sex there is least talk 
 either for good or evil. Cf. Jelf, 819. b. The word kX^os is a ' nomen fi^aoy, ut non 
 raro apud poetas.' Popp., who cf. 86^a, 6vei8os (viii. 27), (Xirn and iXwi^ciu, i. i . 
 Wemi^ditalsocf. 'facinus/ 'famosus,' 'venenum,' and many other words. For the 
 sentimentcf, ^Esch. Agam. v. 61 1 . ' The two properly opposed notions would be 
 (i) merit, demerit; (2) praise, censure. But Thuc. gives us one of each pair, 
 merit and cew«are = conduct that is censured.' T. K. A. 
 
 Chapter XLVI. — (a.) Kal i\Lo\—*by me, as has been done by my predeces- 
 *^^^' Xdyw— ^p7({». The usual antithesis, as has often been pointed 
 
 out— the first is, so far as words are concerned; the second in respect of the 
 actual commemoration by deeds, i.e., regarding the subsequent support of the 
 children as part of the practical recognition of the ftither's merits. 
 pexpl ^iPTjs. To the age of eighteen says the Scholiast. From sixteen to 
 eighteen the young Athenian was educated in the Gymnasia. At eighteen the 
 youth was enrolled among the Ei)hebi, entered into the registry of his Demus, 
 and after taking the oath of a citizen, was armed in the presence of the public 
 assembly. From that time he was, in the eye of the law, of age, might marry, 
 appear before courts of law, and so forth ; but he had yet to do frontier duty 
 as TreptVoXos, before, on attaining his twentieth year, he entered upon the full 
 exercise of his civic rights, by participating in the general assemblies of the 
 people, from which fact we may understand why some have asserted that he 
 was not registered till then. Hermann, Pol. Antiq. of Greece, § 123. See 
 with Kriig., Plat. Mencj:. 22, Lysias ii. 75, ^schin. 3, 154, Arist. Pol. 2, 5, 4. 
 frri^o.vov~theriin proposing a prize, sc. which consists in this mafnte- 
 nance of children. tois U~to these I say, hi in apodosi. See the 
 
 grammars, Hermann ad Soph. Phd. ttj, and infra c. 65 c, and cf. Livy, iv. 35. 
 • Nihil non aggressuros homip.es, si magnis conatibus magna pr»mia proj)©- 
 nantur.' d'iroXo<j>vpd(iCvot— having brought your lamentations to a 
 
 close, such being sometimes the force of dirb in composition. Cf. d7ra\7r;<raj/Tas, 
 iiifra ch. 61, and Herod, ix. 31, us dfreKTjOivaai', rum tugere desieranf, where see 
 Yalckn. note ; and also ii. 40, iwedu diroTv^puyrai, xchcn they hare Jiuishid beat- 
 ing their own breasts. 6v irpojTTiKti iKacrros sc. oXoipOpaffdai. On 
 this mode of supplying the simple from the compound verb, KrUg. refers to his 
 own grammar, § 62, 4, i. 
 
 t 
 Chapter XLVII.— (a) irpwTov 2tos. For the little that had been achieved 
 during this year towards the final object of the war, v. Grote vol. vi. p. 206. 
 Even the relief of Potidaa had been no way advanced ; and while the expecta- 
 tions of the Corinthians and other instigators of the wju- were disappointed, the 
 anticipations of Pericles and Archidamus were fully justified ; i. 140, a. 
 CTcXcvra— * was drawing to a close.' The imperf. is used because ' ad rei ifectum. 
 qui permanebat respicitur.' P. ra 8vo y.ipr\, cf. ad c. x. Diod. 
 
 xii. 45. For the gramm. construction see Jelf, § 467, obs. 2, 478, a. 
 ApxCSap.os, cf. ad c. x. 
 
 {b.) T) v<5<ros. The description of this famous pestilence occupies eight 
 chapters, from XLVII. to LIV., which we may divide into three portions. 
 
 Chap. 47.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 203 
 
 The first (c. xlvii. viii.) describes its origin and causes. The second (xlix. 1.) 
 its character, symptoms, and physical effecte. The third (Ii. sq.) its effects on 
 the moral character and social life of the Athenians. 
 
 It may not be uninteresting to mention briefly the (Ecumenical Plagues, 
 whose ravages have been recorded. 
 
 I. The first is that of Athens, here described by Thucydidea, who has been 
 closely copied by Lucretius in the end of his sixth book. A similar one is 
 mentioned by Galen as occurring in the year a.d. 167—170, which he calls the 
 long plague (v. inf. and Clinton in an.). 
 
 II. The second is that which broke out in the reign of Vibius Gallus, and 
 Volusianus, A.D. 252, and is described in the letter of Dionysius quoted in 
 Eusebius, lib. vii. c. 22 (cf. Cyprian, de Mortal.), commented upon by Calvi- 
 sius, Ju.stus Lipsius {de Constantid ii.), and our own countrymen, Brightnian 
 and Mead, who interpret it to be the opening of the Fourth Seal of the Book 
 of Itevelations (vi. 8). It is said to have lasted fifteen years, and five thousand 
 persons are reported to have died daily. 
 
 III. The third broke out in the reign of Justinian, A.D. 54O, and is fully 
 described by Procopius in his Persica (lib. ii. 22, sq.). He is a close imitator 
 of Thucydides, as will be shown in many passages quoted from him. It is 
 also mentioned by Evagrius, Agathias, Gregory of Tours, and Paulus Diaconus, 
 who tells us it carried off Pope Pelagius, a.d. 580. It lasted fifty-two years ; 
 and in 583 appears to have extended its ravages to Britain. In Constantinople 
 it carried off 1000 persons daily. It is curious that the origin of all these 
 three plagues is tnvced to Egypt or Ethiopia, which, as Gibbon says (chap, 
 xliii.), have been stigmatized in every age as the original source and seminary 
 
 of the plague. 
 
 IV. The fourth commenced in the N.E. of Asia, in a.d. 1347, and in six 
 years overran the world with such violence, that Calvisius says two-thirds of 
 the population of Europe were swept away. Camden, in his Britannia, 
 describes its ravages in England in the following year, during which 50,000 
 persons are said to have been buried in the churchyard of the Charterhouse in 
 London. Hume, vol. ii. p. 448. It histed for six years, and is known by the 
 name of the 'black death.' This is the pestilence which made its appearance 
 in Florence in 1348, and is so graphically described by Boccacio in \n^ Di Came- 
 ron, and in the historical narrative of the brothers Matteoand Giovanni Villani. 
 Sismondi {Ilidoire dcs Fran^ais) relates its effects in France, and its horrors in 
 England are beautifully told in the novel of Rothdan. 
 
 The next famous pestilence is that of Milan in the year 1630, of which we 
 have a vivid picture in the Promessi Sposi of Manzoni, in the Storia dclia 
 Colonna Infame, and in the history of the Plague by Ripamonte. The most 
 striking events connected with it are the exertions of Cardinal Borromeo, and 
 the horrid practices of the Monatti and Untori. 140,000 persons are reported 
 to have died between April and September. The last and greatest plague made 
 its api)earance in London in the year 1664, and is well known to English readers 
 from the journal of Pepys and the narrative of Defoe, who, though not himself 
 an eye-witness of it, writes with all the force and trutlifulness of one. The 
 total number of deaths is given as 68,000. It is, as Mr. Grote observes, vi. p. 
 209, 'not one of the least of the merits of Thucyd. that his notice of the symp- 
 
204 
 
 NOTES OX TIIUCYDTDKS. 
 
 [Book II. 
 
 toms of this epidemic, given at so early a stage of medical science and obser- 
 vation, is such as to instruct the medical reader of the present age, and enable 
 the malady to be understood and identified.' It has consetjuently been the 
 sulvject of frequent disquisition at home and abroad. The following treatises, 
 among others, have appeared in Germany: by Eyerel, in 1810; Schoenck, 
 182 1 ; Grimm, 1829; Krauss. 1831; Meurs, 1843; and Brandeis, 1845: to 
 which we may add the general treatise by Haser, 1839; Littr<?'s introducti<in 
 to Hippocrates; and Dr. Mead's book, De Pfnte. Littr^ remarks that it is to 
 be regretted that Hippocrates, though an eye- witness, does not describe this 
 plague, as neither does (ialen that which he witnessed in the time of M. 
 Aurelius (the Pestis Antoniniana), and which was probably a renewal of this 
 plague of Athens. Diodorus also defers the description of it till its reappear- 
 ance in the fifth year of the war. xii. c. 58. (xrote speaks of it as * an 
 eruptive tyy)hoid fever, distinct from, yet analogous to, the small pox.' Niebuhr 
 thinks it was neither the Oriental plague nor the yellow fever, but something 
 between the two, vomiting of bile being riire in Oriental plague but common 
 in yellow fever : ulcers, which are general in Oriental plague, being extremely 
 rare in yellow fever. Scluxjnck considers it to have been a camp fever, and 
 Meister holds the same o])inion. Krauss maintains the opposite, and says that 
 the inguinal pestilence of Justinian was merely a degenerate form of the same. 
 It was distinct from the inguinal plague described l)v Procopius and Ripamonte, 
 and is believed (Littr^ says) to be now extinct. For three years it desolated 
 Athens, continuously during the entire second and third years of the war, after 
 which there was a marked abatement for a year and a half. It then revived, 
 and lasted for another year (the fifth) with the same fury as at first. It earned 
 off, Thucyd. tells us (iii. 87), 300 of the 1200 Hii>peis, the chief men of the 
 State, 4400 hoplites, and of the poorer population a number too great for com- 
 putation, di'e^ei'pcTo? apiBfxds. Diodorus says they lost 4000 ire^oL, 400 iinreU, 
 and of others, freemen and slaves, 10,000 (xii. 58), but this number is, as 
 Grote says, much below the mark. 
 
 Xry«5p.€vov. There is perhaps a confusion in Thucydides' mind as to v6ffOi, 
 and voarfixa, both which are used indiscriminately. In the following chapter he 
 uses the neuter throughout, as though v6ar)ixa had really preceded ; and so 
 Sophocles uses auxT; after v6ffr)fxa, as though vdaos had preceded, [ffxvf^o- ^poj 
 
 t6 ffVVibvVflOV.] 
 
 deivdv ye TovTrlcray/jLa rov voffri/xaTOS' 
 
 i^Kfi yap avTT] 5td xpivou. 
 
 Soph. Phtl, 755, 8. 
 Cf. Horn. Od. xii. 75, where v€<f>i\7j and vi(f)o% are similarly confounded. Or 
 it may be taken ahsolutely ; = though it was said : neuter part, like dedv k. t. \. 
 4'YKaTa(rKf]\(/ai.. Properly used of the descent of lightning, storms, &c., 
 therefore im[)lying violence and rapidity. Cf. c. xlix. e. A divine visitation. 
 It is here intransitive, as in xlix. the simpler form ; when transitively used it is 
 followed by a dative, or the accus. with ftj. v. Elmsley ad Eurip. Med. 93 ; 
 Eurip. Hipp. 1416 ; Herod, vii. 134, viii. 65; ^sch. Eumen. 83; Procop. 
 Pers. ii. 22. rols i^ ovpavov iirt(TKrjTrTovffiv' = iv^irfae ch. xlviii. 
 Af]fivov. Grote remarks that about sixteen years before there had been a 
 similar calamity in Rome, and in various parts of Italy. ov ^ivroi 
 
 Chap. 48.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 205 
 
 ^ A 
 
 Observe the transition to the oratio recta. K. compares Xen. Anah. iv. '2, 15. 
 ibffTe davixaarbv yevecrdai iraai Kal VTrwirTevov. <|>8opd ovtws. * To 
 
 such a degree.' K. cf. Xen. Ancd). vii. 4, 3. ^v di x^^*' ttoXXtj Kai xpvxos 
 ovTOJs u)<TT€ K. T. X., and Eurip. Ilipp. 999. 
 
 (c.) larpoC P. quotes Cantacuzen, iv. 8. oUre iaTpCov^i^i^pKei rix^n 
 ovSefiia. Cf. Ov. Met. vii. 5 26. * Pugnatum est arte medendi, Exitiuni 
 superabat opem.' Ov. Met. vii. 561. * Inque ipsos saeva medentes in-unipit 
 clades.' Liv. vii. 2. *Quum vis morbi nee humanis consiliis, nee 0})e 
 diving levaretur.' i'ipjcovv. v. Buttmann's Le:cilo(jus, pp. 162, 
 
 543. (Eng. Ed.) B. quotes Eurip. Ion, 952. 'AvdWicv ovoh i^pKriae. Here. 
 Fur. 500. Soph. Phil. 281, 339. v. Defoe, p. 40. * Not that it is any 
 derogation from the labour or application of the physicians to say they fell in 
 the common calamity : it rather is to their praise that they ventured their lives 
 so far as even to lose them in the service of mankind.' 8<ra> Kal 
 
 liuXiorra. v. Matth. § 462. ' Two superlatives in two different propositions 
 are compared with each other by the words roaoi/rc^ and 6ff<i}, to show that a 
 quality exists in the highest degree in one subject, in the same measure as 
 it is possessed by another in the highest degree.' v. Thuc. viii. 84. Ba-ip 
 /jidXiffTa Kal iXevdepoL . . . rocovrip Kai OpaavTara. So i. 68. 6<tij) koI piiytcTa 
 iyKX-qfiara ^x^l^^^- Herod, v. 29. Soph. Track. 312; (Ed. Col. 53, with 
 Wunder's note. Jelf, § 870, obs. i. irpos Upots iKeTevorav 
 
 For this use of irp6s at a point at rest, cf. Soph. Track. 371. 7rp6s pl^o-q 
 1! pax*'Vl(i3v ayopq^. (Ed. C. 12. irpb^ &\oecn.v BeQv. Thuc. iii. 81, e. ; viii. 
 98. Compare the Supplicationes of the Romans, (Liv. iii. 7, x. 23, xxxi, 9, 
 xxvii. 23, xxxvii. 3.) the Rogazioni of the Italians and the Middle Ages, 
 and the procession of the relics of Cardinal Borromeo, during tlie plague at 
 Milan, described by Ripamonte, lib. i. Boccacio says, * Nor was there more 
 j»rofit from the humble supplications made to God by devout persons, not once, 
 but often, both in formal processions and in other manners.' 
 ^avTcCois. The MSS. vary between p-avreiois and p-avTeiai^. 
 TcXcvTwvTCS. Frequently used for /««^^^, or at last. c. li. c. Cf. Soph. Aiit. 
 260. kSlv iyiyuero irXTjyij reXfurwcr'. Xen. Cyr. i. 6, 19; Plat. Hep. iv. p. 
 425. We may tr. ' tkey ended by leaving off.' So d/ax^/icj/os is put for 'at 
 first.' Matth. G. G., § 557, 4. Jelf, § 696, obs. i. b. 
 
 Chapter XLVIII. — (a.) I| AlGtoirCas. Nubia and Sennaar. See Gibbon 
 u. 8. Al-yvirTov. Lucr. vi. 1139. 
 
 * Nam penitus veniens -^gypti e finibus. ' 
 
 Gottl. quotes Am. Marcell. xix. 4. * Clades ilia abusque ferventi ^thiopiae 
 plaga paulatim proserpens Atticam occupavit.' Schonck, p. 14, sq. 
 iviirt(r€ = iyKaT^(rKr)\l/e. So Lucr. vi. 1141. ' Incubuit tandem populo Pan- 
 di«)i)is.' Ov. Met., vii. 522. * Dira lues ira populis Junonis iniquse Incidit.' 
 Liv. xxvii. 23. Plut. v. Pericl., p. 66. 17 \oipu:dr)s iu^ireae <pdopd. 
 kv Tw Ilitpaiit. Niebuhr notices this fact to show the difference between this 
 epidemic and the yellow fever, which generally follows the course of rivers. It 
 bef'an of course here first, being brought by sea. * The place of its first out- 
 breaking in Attica indicates that the contagion came from abroad. It may 
 
 
:o6 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Rook it. 
 
 Chap. 49.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 2C7 
 
 nevertheless have been connected, as Niebuhr believed (Vol. ii. p. 273^ in some 
 mysterious way, with the volcanic convulsions which were unusually frequent 
 and violent about the same time, though Attica was but slightly affected by them, 
 for the earthcpiakes felt at Athens are not said to have damaged any part of the 
 city ; and other regions of Greece which suffered much more from them do not 
 appear to have been visited by the pestilence.' Tliirl. iii. p. 135. Cf. Procop. 
 Bell. Pers. ii. 22, c. dp^afi^vri 5^ dei ^k t^? irapaXCas V v6<to^ ^5f ovtu St) is 
 TTjv iJ.€(r6yaiav avi^aive x^P^v. ij^aro twv dv0pwir«v. Kl says the 
 
 avdp. is not emphatic, as though animals h(id been previously attacked. But 
 it was clearly the opinion of the ancients that in pestilences animals were first 
 attacked. Cf. Horn. //. i. 150 ; Ov. Met. vii. 536. The sheep and cattle had 
 been conveyed to Euboea, and the atljacent islands, (c. xiv.) Cf. Grote, vi. p. 
 203. There may therefore be some force in the word: had the cattle been 
 attacked it would have been an aggravation of the calamity. Cf. Liv. iii. 66 ; 
 Dion. Hal. .4. R., x. 53. <|>dp}iaKa ^o-p€pXT|Kt>i€V h rd <j>p^aTa. 
 
 The Jews were accused of having poisoned the wells in the plague of 1348. 
 Thirlw. iii. p. 135, and comp. the account of the Untori in Ripamonte, lib. i. ; 
 Aretteus, p. i?, § 6. Ed. Kiihn. 66iv ovb' cLTreoiKbs iv ti^ Xoifu^ rep irWdrji'Tjffi 
 fxeT€^€Tipovs SoK^eiv is ra tppiara i/x^e^Xijadai <p6.pixaKa. Ov. Met. vii. 53'2, 
 ' Constat et in fontes vitium venisse lacusque.' So when the plague broke out 
 at Naples in 1656, the Spaniards were said to have suborned persons to 
 scatter poisone^l dust in the streets. Even the holy water was supposed to 
 have been poisoned at Milan. Knight, p. 77. A similar notion existed at 
 Paris upon the outbreak of the cholera for the first time in that city. The cre- 
 dulity of the lower orders may be excused when we find that even learned men 
 believed in the possibility of exciting pestilence by means half metlical, half 
 ma^'ical, i^p^ara are 'cisterns, tanks, or reservoirs.' 
 
 avTtJBi— /. €., in Piraeeus. The Kp-qvir) of Callirrhoe, mentioned above, was in the 
 Astu. 
 
 {h.) Xry^Tw 'ir€pl avToO. Either supply voffrnxaros ; or tr. simply * about 
 the matter.' Procop. Bell. Pers. ii. ■zi B. Xeyiru nh ol<v ibs ttt) ^Kaaros trepl 
 airruiv yivibffKei, Kal ffo<pi(TTy)S koL fieTCiopdXoyos' iyd) di bdev re ijp^aTo ij vScros f/5e, 
 Kal rpbiri^j Stj fir^; Toi'S avOpihirovs 5ii<pd€ip€v ipQv ^pxopLai. yiyvua-Kti, 
 
 * The opinion he forms— the judgment he arrives at.' * Urtheilt.' A'. 
 IStwTqs. In Aristotle's sense. Eth. Nic. iii. 8. 8. * The lay person (K.), the 
 non- professional man,' as opposed to the professed physician. Bl. compares 
 Plat. Po/. 433. Plut. Ser. Vind. Num. v. 4. Cf. Plat. Lef/. 933 d. I^ojh. 
 221 c. Phffflr. -258 D. Protag. 327 c. Proc. B. P. ii. 21. o6t€ yap iaTp<^ 
 o\}Te i8i(J}Trj ^vvipTj. \nra^o\r\s. * Respecting the causes which he 
 
 deems sufficiently powerful to have produced so great a revoluticm.' Grote, vi. 
 210. P. distinguishes properly between fxeTa^oXj] and /xcTdo-rao-is ; and shows 
 that there is no idle repetition here. fxera^oXr) is the ' act of change,' con- 
 versio. fierdaTacns * the altered state of circumstances,' conrerxu.s statu;*. The 
 passage quoted from lib. vi. -20, quite bears out this view, 7r6\e(s . . . oiJre Sfo/jiivas 
 fjLeTa^oXrjs, 77 dv rts ^s fxJLOJ pLerdaTaffiv x^^ponff. The ixfTdcrracris is explained by 
 the first .sentence of the following chapter. 'The change from an unusually 
 healthful to a pestilential state.' Demosth. Oh/nth. ii. 6. woXXrjv rV fieraffTd- 
 ffLV 5€iKT€ov. Cf. c. 43. c. jidXioT* &v txoi Ti iTpoctSws [i^ dYVO€iv. * Such 
 
 > 
 
 «,!. 
 
 matters as will furnish any man who lays them to heart, with knowledge and 
 the means of calculation beforehand.' Lit. 'from having acquired some previous 
 knowledge, not to be in a state of ignorance about the matter.' To record past 
 f^ts as a b.isis for rational provision in regard to the future ; the same senti- 
 ment which Thucyd. mentions (i. 22) as having animated him to the composi- 
 tion of his history, was at that time a duty so little understood, that we have 
 reason to admire not less the manner in which he performs it in practice, than 
 the distinctness with which he conceives it in theory,' Grote. For the gram- 
 matical construction, see Jelf, § 832. The optative with dv expressing a sup- 
 position or assumption depending on certain conditions ; hence a still more 
 indefinite {K)S8ibility. 
 
 Ch.\pter XLIX.— (rt.) lidXwrra 8f| kctvo. Cf. ad i. 13. 18. 118. 
 &VOO-OV. Hippocrates {Epidem. i. 8) says that the same was the case durino- 
 the epidemic at Thasos. dircKpierj. so c. Ii. ks tovto ireXevra, * deter- 
 
 mined in this.' P. compares Cantacuz. iv. 8, ■rrdi'Ta eis iKciuo KareXTjye t6 
 vdaijfxa ; and Krauss, p. 15. 'irpo«j>d<r€a)s, ' ostensible cause,' a word 
 
 frequently used by Hippocrates in this sense. Aretie. p. 43. So Procop. 
 B. P. ii. 27, dirpo<pa<Ti<rTU}s. Boccacio says of the plague at Florence, that 
 ' there was no fever or any incidental symptom.' OcppLat, an unusual 
 
 word (the later Attic form is dipfia. Arrian, An. ii. 4. 8. Menand. ap. 
 Phavorinum). Lucian, Dial. Marin, x'l.—dipfiri- 6 wvperds. Tim. Lex. u. v. 
 Kuhnken. So Tibull. iv. i r. 2, calor. Lucret. vi. 1143. 
 * Principio caput incensum fervore gerebant, 
 
 Et duplices oculos suffusa, luce rubenteis 
 
 Sudabant etiam fauces intrinsecus atro 
 
 Sanguine, et ulceribus vocis via septa coibat 
 
 Atque animi interpres manabat lingua cruore.* 
 
 IpvB^ttTa. Observe the plur. Lucret. u. s. Virg. Gcorg. iii. 505, of the 
 disease of horses : — 
 
 * Tum vero ardentes oculi.' 
 
 TTvcvjia droTrov Kal 8v<rw8«s ''|<|>Uf 'emitted an unnatural and fcetid breath.' 
 P. translates dTowov by ' tetrum,' as Lucr. v. 1152. * Spiritus ore foras 
 tetrum volvebat odorem.' Krliger says. Thucydides meant that besides being 
 
 * noisome' (B. ) the breath was unnatural from the extreme d[^culty of respira- 
 tion. So Virgil u. s. * attractus ab alto Spiritus interdum gemitu gravis.' Cf. 
 c. Ii. a. iroXXd Kal dXXa droirCas. 'f|<|>C6i- and d<f>UL are used indis- 
 criminately by Thuc. K. 
 
 (6.) irrop^bs" 'sneezing.' Plat. Stimp. p. 185. ppdyxos- 
 
 * hoarseness.' ' Humoris in fauces influxio, quam raucitatem vocat.' Csel. 
 Aur. vii. 2. ^paxeiv. Hesych. vxwf^i. i^o<prj<Tai- Foes. (Ec. p. 79. 
 
 pTlXos l<rxvpov— ' a hard cough: This meaning Foesius gives to ^rj^ simply. 
 KapStav— 'the cardiac extremity of the stomach.' L. and S. ' Os ventri- 
 culi.' Foes. Lucr. vi. T149, 
 
 * Inde ubi per fauces pectus complerat et ipsum 
 Morbida vis in Cor moestum confluxerat jegris.' 
 (TTTjpC^ai — in trans. P. diroKaddp(r€is xo^S — ' purgings of bile.' 
 
208 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book II. 
 
 Grote observes (p. 2ri), that 'in Thucyd.'s day speculation was active re- 
 specting the causes of this plague, according to the vague and fanciful physics 
 and scanty stock of ascertained facts which was all that could then be con- 
 sulted.' These very words air. x- k.t.X. seem to indicate that Thuc. was 
 familiar with the medical terminology, and was no stranger to the habits and 
 training of his contemporary Hippocrates, and the other Asclepiads of Cos. 
 8ee >[. Littr^'s note quoted by Grote. But, as has been well observed, many 
 words which have now become technical in medical science, were of ordinary 
 use in Greek conversation. Freind, Hist, of Med. pp. 416 — 20, ed. Lond. 
 ■n-dorai — differing in colour y smelly and taate. Kniuss. TaXaiirupfas 
 
 refers rather to mental depression and abandonment of all hope, such as Defoe 
 describes, than to physical distress { = advixLa, c. li.) the * anxius angor adsidue 
 comes.' Cf. Lucret. vi. 1156. (So Krauss, p. 17.) ^v-y^ kcv^ — 'an 
 
 ineffectual retching' So Lucr. vi. 1158, * Singultusque frequens ;' and Virg. 
 Georcf. iii. 506, ' Jmaque longo ilia singultu tendunt.' Cf. Aretaeua, p. 50, ed. 
 Kiihn. Nicand. Ther. 434 — \vyiJ.o2<n ftapvvo/x^poi dafie^ffaiv. ^^"Y^ 
 
 generally means 'hiccough,' and iw the term used for the hiccough of Aristo- 
 phanes in the well known passage of Plato's Symposium, p. 185. It is here 
 *an ineffectual retching.' * Qui nihil vomitione refunderet, nuUumque humorera 
 ejiceret.' Foes. 'Motus ventriculi irritus.' Krauss, p. 20. 
 
 (c.) airrofJL^vw — * to the outward touch.' So Lucret. vi. 1 163 — * tepidum 
 manibus proponere tactum.' Defoe mentions the same fact. For the con- 
 struction, see Matth. § 388. 6, and note ad i. 10. f. rb /x^aov ckottovvtl. So 
 c. li. (a) irapaXiirdtm. ovk d-yav 6cp(Ji<$v not over-nurm. Krauss, 
 
 p. ui, says this was a bad symptom. Procop. B. P. ii. 22. Kal rb ^ip cdfia 
 oi^Ti Ti dnr)\\aaa€ ttjs irporepa^ xP°'-^^t oiJ^f deppibv ^v, &t€ rrvpcTov (TnreadpTos. 
 o<}t€ x^'»*P<^v — * '*^^ pale ; but reddish, livid, hreakinff out uith small pustules 
 and ulcers.^ The * exanthema typhosum' of medicine. P. Fees, explains 
 ircXiSvov [ireXiTvdv) by ' color ad nigrum tendens ex rubro ; qualis sanguinis 
 sub cute, ex ictu aut plag& collecti,' * Livid or leaden colour — rb ixir^x^^ ^XP^' 
 TTfTOi Kal fxeXavias. Sch. to. ivrhs ovrws ^KaUro. Lucr. vi. 1166. 
 
 * lutima pars hominum vero flagrabat ad ossa ; 
 Flagrabat stomacho flamma ut fomacibus intus.' 
 
 T«v irdw kenrutv i^arUav. So Lucr. vi. 1168. 
 
 * Nil adeo posset cuiquam leve tenueque membris 
 Vertere in utilitatem.' 
 
 Ov. Met. vii. 558 :— 
 
 ' Non stratum, non ulla pati velamina possunt.' 
 
 ji^T* AXXo Tu f\ yv\kyoC. Jelf, § 895. 4. Brachylogy— ' a verb of a general 
 meaning is supplied from a following verb of special meaning ; as every par- 
 ticular verb implies the general verbal notion of action or state.' Pop. reads 
 Yu|iv<Jv sub. <rtD/xa. Cf. S. Marc. xiv. 51, Trept^e^XrjfjLdpos <Tiv56va iiri yvfivoG' 
 the art. omitted. K. says yv/nvol is correct, though the reading of inferior 
 MSS. ^jSurra tc dv ^s v8«p xjn^xp^v k. t. X. For the grammatical 
 
 construction of the infinitive with &v instead of the historic tenses, see Jelf 
 § 866. 2. P. says el rjfjLeXovvTo must be supplied. Procop. £. P. ii. 22 fty 
 vdup T€ oh vaparvxoi ifMireffeiv ijdeXov. 
 
 Chap. ^0.~\ 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 209 
 
 Lucr. vi. 1 1 70: — 
 
 ' In fluvios partim gelidoa, ardentia morbo 
 Membra dabant, nudum jacientes corpus in undas.' 
 Ov. Met. vii. 568 :— 
 
 ' Fontibus et fluviis puteisque capacibus haerent 
 Nee prius est extincta sitis quam vita bibendo.' 
 
 Diod. xii. 58 :—ol irXelaroi tCiv voaovvroiv ^ppnrTov eavrovs ets ra tppedra Kal ris 
 Kprjpai ^irievfxovvres eavrdv KaraxfyO^ai rd awpiara. Defoe (p. 105) says, * Some 
 broke out into the streets, perhaps naked, and would run directly down to the 
 river, and plunge themselves into water.' Kal ^8pa<rav— ' actually 
 
 did 80.' The common use of Kal in Thuc. For the ellipse after tovto, see 
 J«lf, § 895. 4. dirav<rT« ttj SCr]r(i. Observe that the adj. by stand- 
 
 ing before the article becomes the predicate. Larrey mentions the same fact 
 in the French invasion of Syria. |vv6x<Jhi€voi. Cf. S. Matt. iv. 24. 
 
 iroiKiXats v6(X0is Kal ^aadpois ^vuexofihov^. S. Luc. iv. ^S—avvexopi^prj TrvpeT(p 
 fi€ydX(i). aypv-trvia. Lucr. vi. 1179— Mumina vorsarent expertia 
 
 ^™"<'-' dKudtoi— the regular use of the optative. Jelf. 
 
 §843.1. 
 
 (rf.) ^varatoi. Lucr. vi. 11 95: — 
 
 ' Octavoque fere candenti lumine solis 
 Aut etiam nonA reddebant lampade vitam.' 
 P. quotes Wolmar. p. 39, and Liv. xli. 2r. 8ia(Spo(as aRpdrov— 
 
 either violent diarrhoea, as Port. Steph. Thes. and Poppo, or = d/xt/crot vypoTrjTos 
 v5aTu35ovi, as Galen. Lucr. vi. 11 98, ' nigram proluviem alvi.' 
 (t.) KOT^o-KT]irrc 7dp k. t, X. Lucr. vi. 1204 : — 
 
 * tamen in nervos huic morbus et artus 
 Ibat et in partes genitaleis corporis ipsas : 
 Et graviter partim metuentes limina leti 
 Vivebant : ferro privatei parte virili 
 Et manibus sine non nullei, pedibusque manebant, 
 In vita tamen, et perdebant lumina partim.' 
 
 Cf. Eyerel and Grimm ap. Pop. of the pestilence at Venice in 1576. Galen, 
 Schonck, and Krauss also speak of the disease attacking the hands and feet. 
 h aiSoia, parts of the body are frequently put without the article; (K.) on the 
 principle of familiar usage, i. 8, a. 12. b, 16. a. &c. Xtj0t]. Lucr. i2ri : 
 
 * Atque etiam quosdam cepere oblivia rerum 
 Cunctarum, neque se possent cognoscere ut ipsei.' 
 
 Schonck confirms this statement, and Defoe also mentions it. Tlie forgetful- 
 ness was only temporary. 
 
 Chapter L.— Kp€t<r<rov Xo^ov. * baffling all description.' K. cf. Xen. 
 Mem, iii. 11. i. Kpelaaop ^v Xbyov rb KaXXos t^s yvvaiKbi. So Herod, ii. 35. 
 ^pya Xbyov n^^io. and ii. 148. Soph. (Ed. T. 1374. Kpeiaaov' dyxovrjs. v. 
 ♦Jtilf, § 783, b. The whole thought contiacted into a single substantival notion, 
 put in the genitive after the comparative. Matth., § 451. 
 
2IO 
 
 NOTES OX TIIUCYDTDTIS. 
 
 [Book II. 
 
 XaXcirwWpws 'fj K. T. a. <|>. *heffif/er ah die menschllche Xntur erirageii lann.* 
 More grievously than human nature can endure. A', a common usage of 
 jcard — according to the proportion of. ^8T|Xw<rc. v. Jelf, § 373, i. 
 
 The subject being indefinite, is not expressed, as it may be easily supplied from 
 the context. Matt., § 549. |vvTp(54>wv = ru)v eJw^6Ta)»'. A'. That 
 
 which is familiar to man. Cf. Soph. Phil. 171. rd "ydp 6pv€a. 
 
 So Lucret., vi. 1215: — 
 
 * Multaque humi quom inhumata jacerent coqiora supra 
 Corporibus, tamen alituum genus attjue feranun 
 Aut procul absiliebat, ut acrem exiret odt)rem 
 Aut ubi gustarat languebat morte propinqud.' 
 
 Cf. Ov. Met., vii. 545, — 52 ; Stat. Theh. i. 624, xii. ^()^. ' Eminus ipsae Pabula 
 dira fene campumque odere volucres. Liv. xli. 2\. Nee Vulturium usquam 
 visum. Krauss., p. 26. Boccacio states that two pigs who tumeil uj) with 
 their snouts the rags of a man who had died of the plague, in a short time 
 after reeled about as if from the effects of poison and shortly died. During the 
 black death in England it was also observed that neither beast nor bird of j)rey 
 would touch the dkrcases. Knight, p. 64. TCKp.-i]piov 8^ without 
 
 the ykp following, is unusual. A', cf. Xen. A nab. i. 9, 29 ; Plat. Legg. p. 
 821. E. Cf. Matt., § 630. ^trCXeixl/is implies, as K. says, not 
 
 only that birds died from eating the corpses, but that they were observed to 
 keep aloof, v. Lucr. u. s. &XXcus. oOt AWus. Kot = alibi, as Arnold ex- 
 
 plains it, but = neque omnino. T.wepl toiovtov ovS^v, i.e., irepiTa dra<^a <ra»yuara. 
 Jacobs. Or we might say, neither otherwise employed, nor engaged about the 
 dead. 01 8i kvvcs. Lucr., vi. 1220. 
 
 'cum primis fida canClm vis 
 Strata viis animam ponebat in omnibus a-gre.' 
 
 Cf. Hom. //. i. 50; Sil. Ital., xiv. 594 ; Virg. Georg. iii. 496. 
 Tov diroPatvovTos — 'gave evidence of what the result would be.* P. But is it 
 not rather — of the thing resulting ; gave opportunity of observing the effect pro- 
 duced, i.e. J rb TfTpdiroda yevadfxepa 8ia<p6elpf(r6ai. Xen. Anab. iv. 6, 13; 
 Hell. vi. 8. fiTrws fir] ^avepbi etr) /xrjd' atffdrjaip Trap^x^'- 
 
 Chapter LI. — {a.) irapaXiircvri. As avTo/xhtf}. c. xlix. e. v. Jelf, § 599, 
 I. The dative expressing ' reference to, ' as avveXdvri. <rvvr(fx6in-i etireiv. So 
 Thuc, i. xxiv. a. iv 5e^iqL i<nr\iovTi. Herod., i. 14, 51, iii: 90, vi. 33. 
 aTomas. ^ peculiar character.' Seltsamkeit. K. So we say, * out of the way 
 character.* 8ia4>fpoVTws er. ir. €. y. irpos '4rtpov 
 
 belongs to 8ia<|>cp6vTws ; iripu is only used to give force to the antithesis. 
 I8^av. V. ad i. 109. (a.) For the accusative as a means of defining the 
 verbal notion, see Jelf, § 579, 2. Krauss, p. 26, translates it by * externum 
 speciem.* TrapeXvrrci. Cf. Xen. Anab. ii. 5, ig. K. The 
 
 preposition here retains its proper primitive force, of something accompanying 
 'alongside,' as it were. ^rcXcvra. Cf. xlix. a. Plat. Protag.\\. 
 
 35. 4, a. Tliuc. iii. 104. c. So Lat., ' desinere in aliquid.* Kal 
 
 irdw 6cpaircv6^€VOb. * with every attention that could be paid them,* as below. 
 
 Chap. 5 1.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 211 
 
 irdffv Siairri eepairevSfieva. ty ovSlv KaW<rTT) tafia. ' tJiere 
 
 was no established specific' 'Kein einziges Arzneymittel. ' So Lucret. vi. 1224. 
 
 * Nee ratio reraedl communis certa dabatur. 
 Nam quod ali dederat vitales aeris auras 
 Hocce aliis erat exitio letumque parabat.' 
 
 Procop. B. P. ii. 22. kuI rb ^v/xirav elirtiv oddefila fivx^vi] dpOpujTra) is ttjv 
 ffuiTTipLav i^€6p7)To. Comjiare the powerful language of Defoe. * The contagion 
 despised all medicine, death raged in every corner : men everywhere began to 
 despair— every heart failed them for fear ; people were made desperate through 
 the anguish of their souls, and the teiTors of death sat in the very faces 'of 
 the people.' p. 180. 
 
 (6.) a«TapK€s. K. comi»ares Herod, i. 32. dvdpuiwov trCofxa 'iv ovUv 
 aihapKis i(TTi. ^vnpci. 'swept off.' Kieb alles auf. Gottl. 
 
 Corripiebat. *Et velocitatem et vi,a morbi notat.' Bav. Cantacuz., p. 50, 
 uses KaOfipu. -fj t€ aAv^La. So Lucret., vi. 1228. 
 
 * Illud in his miserandum et magnopere unum 
 -^rumnabile erat, quod ubi se quisque videbat 
 Implicitum morbo, morbo damnatus ut esset, 
 Deficiens aninio masto cum corde jacebat 
 Funera rcspectans, anhnam et mittebat ibidem.' 
 
 Ov. Met. vii. 565 — 
 
 'salutis 
 Spes abiit, finemque vident in funere morbi 
 Indulgent animis, et nulla quid utile cura est.' 
 
 rh dvA-irvcTTOv ttJ yvdi^r^. Cf. lix. b. travTaxodev rfj yvu}fxri dwopoi. 
 irpoitvTO. 'gave themselves up,' abandoned theni.selves to despair. 
 dvTcixov. K. exi)lains by ' that moral resistence of the will that assists 
 recovery.' Moralischen Widerstande. 06pair€Cas dvairi|nrXd}JL€voi. 
 
 * catching the infection from attendance upon others.' * Contagione infecti.' 
 Ruhnken. Plat. Phml. p. 67 a. K. compares Plut. Per. xxxiv. ibairep 
 PoffKrifiara dvairl/xTrXaffdai <f)Oopds air* dWrjXwv. So Liv., iii. 6. ' Ministeria in 
 vicem ac contogio ipsa vulgabant morbos,' and xxv. 26, vi morbi repletos. Cf. 
 Ruhnken's Timaus, s. v. avdirXem, who gives many passages where dvairifi- 
 -n-Xaadai and Karavl/xTrXacrdai convey, besides filling, the collateral notion of 
 defiling; hence of infecting by contact. Cf. Arist. Nub. 1023. The Latin 
 m/j^eri has the same sense, v. Liv., iv. 30, * vulgatique contactu in homines 
 morbi, et prime in agrestes ingruerant servitiaque. Urbs deinde impletur.' 
 Monrcp rd irpdpaTo. Lucret., vi. 1234 
 
 'avidi contagia morbi 
 
 Lanigeras tanquam pecudes et bucera secla. 
 Juv. ii. 78. 
 
 * dedit banc contagio labem 
 Et dabit in plures : sicut grex totus in agris 
 Unius scabie pent, et porrigine porci.' 
 Hom. Od. A. 408 ; Virg. Oeorg. iii. 556. 
 
 (c.) ^96pov = ipdopd. xlvii. b. 'mortality,* usually applied to beasts of 
 
 P 2 
 
212 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Rook II. 
 
 Chap. 52.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 213 
 
 burden. Arrian, vi. xxv. i ; Procop. B. P. ii. 72. dirwXXvvro 
 
 cpT]poi. Liv. xxv. 26. 'Curatio ipsa et contactus apgronim vulgabat niorbos, 
 ut aut neglecti desertique qui incidissent niorerentur, aut assidentes curan- 
 tesque ea.dem vi morbi repletos secum traherent.* dpcTfjs tw 
 
 ji.€TaTroiov(ji€Vot = 0iXav<?pu>7rias, Schol. ' such as made any pretensions to good- 
 ness.' For this use of ap^Tri see the AristoteUan classification of virtues. 
 Rhet. i. 9, 2, and note 40, d. Arrfan copies the expression. A n. ii. xxvii. 6. 
 K. 'Qui hunianitatem quandam pra» se ferebant.' Gott. Cf. Dion. Halic. 
 Anfiq. vi. 91. Procop. B. G. i. 8. koL /xaXicrTo oU 8r] dp€Trjs ti /xeTairoidadai 
 ^vpeliaive. Lucret. vi. 124 1, sq. 
 
 ' Quei fuenint autem praesto contagibus ibant 
 Atque labore pudor quern tuni cogebat obire, 
 Optimus hoc leti genus ergo quisijue subibat.* 
 
 Ttiiv diro"Yi."yvoji6Vwv Cf, xxxiv. a. tcXcvtwvtcs. 'at last.' Cf, 
 
 xlvii. c. Xen. .4n .iv. V. 16. ^5*k*H^ov. '<jrni: wear ij of lamenting the 
 
 dead.' Xen. Iltll. vii. 5, 19. irdpov firjdeva diroKcifJU'dv. Plut. Sol. viii.; Lucr. 
 vi. 1246. 'Lacrymislassi luctuqueredibant.' Cf. Liv. xxv. 26. ¥ or 6\o<pvpff€ is 
 the accusative of equivalent notion, see Jelf, § 549 c. ii<m Kal 
 
 KT€£v€iv, 'so as to be fatal.' The fact is confirmed by modern medical 
 v»rriters. P. 
 
 {d.) hr\ trXiov. Cf. ad i. 9. c. * In Jioherm grade, K* lireXdp,- 
 
 pav€v — 'attacked.' So Herod, viii. 1 15, eTrtXa/Sojj' \oiiJ.6i rbu a-TpaTov. Thuc, 
 iv. 27, rrjv (pv\aK7)v 6 xf'M'*"' eVAajSe. tw irapaxp'nH-*^ 'ir€pixap€i — 
 
 'through their excessive Joi/ at the moment.* vir' dXXov vo<rT|(jLaTos — 
 
 i.e. not that they should never die ; but not be cut off by disease, but die of old 
 age. So Dio Cuss, xlvii. 44, KOv<pr]^. Is this renj slight, or vain, fond 
 hope J 
 
 Chapter LII. (a.) — cmco-c. So Lucr. vi. 1257. 
 
 'Nee minimam partem ex agris moeroris in urbem, 
 Confiuxit, languens queni contulit agricolarum 
 Copia : conveniens ex omni morbida parte 
 Omnia condebant loca tectaque.' 
 
 Plut. Per. c. 34. 
 
 f| ^vyKoiitSTi. Cf. Liv. iii.6, 'Auxerevim morbi, terrore populationis pecoribus 
 agrestiljusque in urbem acceptis ; ea conluvio mixtoruni omnis generis .... 
 urbanns et agrestem confertum in arcta tecta . . . augebat, &c. 
 ovx i^cr<rov tovs etrcXBovras. A /zeioxrij for fxaXXov. Cf. i. 82. d.. The de- 
 jection of mind consequent on the total loss of their property would render 
 them more obnoxious to the effects of contagion. Defoe mentions among the 
 aggravations of the plague of London, the great conflux of persons into tlie 
 metropolis in consequence of the recent restoration of the monarchy, to the ex- 
 tent of more than 100,000 persons, either for the purposes of business, or in 
 hopes of rewards for past services iu the royal cause, p. 20. 
 oiKiiov o\}\ vTrapxovo'wv. Cf. ad c. xvii. for the number of houses of Athens. 
 The number there given corresponds with th^ number of heads of families ob- 
 tained from the calculation of the divisions of tribes for pohtical and social 
 
 purposes. If each tribe contained three phratriae, each phratria thirty gentes, 
 and each gens thirty heads of families, we obtain 12 phratriae, 360 gentes, and 
 lo.Soo heads of families. The coincidence is observable. ^v 
 
 KaXv^ais irviYHpais. (Some MSS. read trvLyepah,) 'in stijling caUns.* 
 V. Thirlwall, iii. p. 137. 'The stifling closeness of the temporary cabins, and 
 the apartments in the towers, was more generally pernicious.' Cf. Arist. Equ. 
 789, quoted c. xvii. wpiji ^tovs. Gottl. shows to be applied pecu- 
 
 liarly to the summer season. Cf. Plut. Peric. x. ; Arr. Anah. i. xvii. 6. 
 ovScvl K<J<rpi(u. Proc. B. P. ii. 22, uses the same words. Jacobs translates 
 'ita ut nulla haberetur ratio ordinis et discipHnae publicae.' Cf. lib. iii. 108. c. 
 vii. 23. c. ; Polyb. iv. 71 ; Arr. An. i. 8. 8, veKpol iir' dWrjXois dirodurjaKovTes 
 HKeivTO. Cf. iv. 48, (popix-qUv iirl d/id^as iin^a\6uT€s. Procop. B. P. ii, 23, 
 TOVS veKpovs (TU}p7}86v ffieWov Btrrj Trapariixoi KOfil^eadai. ' TIte dying and the 
 dead lay mingled in masses,' K. Boccacio says, 'There they were stowed, 
 layer upon layer, like the merchandize in a ship ; each layer covered with a 
 little earth.' Virg. jEn. xi. 207. 
 
 'Caetera, confusaeque ingentem caedis acervum 
 Nee numero nee honore cremant. ' 
 
 Cf. Horn. II. vii. 336. dKpiros tv/x^os. Kal €v rats oSots. Lucr. vi. 1261. 
 
 ' Multa siti prostrata viam per, proque voluta 
 Corpora silanos ad aquarum strata jacebant 
 Interclusa anima nimia ab dulcedine aquarum 
 Multacjue per populi passim loca prompta viasque, &c. 
 
 rd T€ Upd, Lucr. vi. 1270. 
 
 * Omnia denique sancta Deftm delubra replerat 
 Corporibus Mors exanimis, onerataque passim 
 Cuncta cadaveribus coelestum templa manebant 
 Hospitibus loca quae complerant aedituentes.' 
 
 (6.) o,Tt 'Y^vwvTai — 'what is to become of them.' v. Jelf, § 427, 3 ; Matt. 
 § 488, Cf. Jisch. S. Thcb. 297. ts oXi-ywpCav €t. k. t. k, o. B. 
 
 says Upbs relates to the gods, otrtos to the republic. Cf. Lucr. vi. 1274. 
 
 * Nee jam relligio divom neque numina magni 
 Pendebantur : enim praesens dolor exsuperabat.' 
 
 P. translates it by 'Sacra et Religiosa;' ilia enim sunt diis consecrata, haec 
 legibus et consuetudinibus augusta,' Schom. de Com. ii. 10. Boccacio says, 
 ' In this affliction and wretchedness of the city, the respected authority of laws 
 both divine and human was almost entirely fallen to decay and dissolved.' 
 
 (c.) v6^oi T€ irdvTcs <ruv€Tapdx0T]o-av. Cf. Procop. B. P. ii. 23, iravTa re 
 iirepijlxpdr} t6t€ to. trepl rds Ta<pds v6p.Lp.a. Lucr. vi. 1276. 
 
 ' Nee mos ille sepulturse reraanebat in urbe 
 Quo pius hie populus semper consuerat humari.' 
 By the universal law of the Greeks, the burial of the body by the relations of 
 the dead was considered a religious duty. Even a stranger who found a dead 
 body was bound by law to throw earth upon it. Hor. i Od. xxviii. 36 ; 
 Quintil. Decl. 5. 6 ; c. ^lian, V. U. v. 14. And children who were released 
 
 \ 
 
214 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book II. 
 
 from all other obligations to unworthy parents, were nevertheless bound to 
 bury them by Solon's law, ^Esch. c. Timarcli. p. 40. Tlie neglect of this duty 
 is mentioned as a grave charge against the moral character of a man. Smith's 
 Diet. Ant. s.v. Funus. Cf. Cic. de Leg. ii. 26, with Turnebe's notes, and 
 Kirchmann de Funeribiis, i. cap. i. Xen. Anab. iv. 2, 23. The Athenians 
 always buried their dead with the feet to tiie west; v. ^lian. V. U. v. 14, and 
 the appeal to this custom by Solon, ib. vii. 19; Plut. Sol. 8. 9; Paus. i. 40. 5 ; 
 Strab. ix. p. 394. dvai<rxvvTovs 0T|Kas. Kei.ske conj. Ta<pds, which 
 
 A', adopts ; ' modes of burial.' di^Ka^ would imply the place of deposit of the 
 dead. Poppo shows that Arnold's translation of ^7)*caj * modes of burial,' is 
 quite inadmissible. Cf. Soph. El. 895. Why may it not mean, they put them 
 into places which, under other circumstances, decency would have forbidden ? 
 T. K. A. explains d»'ai<rx' properly as ' the want of shame, evinced in the 
 violation of all the usual modes prescribed by custom, founded on right feeling.* 
 Defoe, p. 66 — * The matter was not much to them, or the indecency to any one 
 else, seeing they were all dead, and to be huddled together in the common grave 
 of mankind. There was no other way of burials, for coffins were not to be had 
 for the prodigious numbers that fell.' cnrdvci t«v 4iriTT]8c£wv. Lucr, 
 
 vi. 1280. 
 
 *Multaque vi .subitA paupertas horrida suavit,* 
 
 'through lack of all tilings fit and proper for the burial,' P. ; ^ i.e. wool, gar- 
 ments, honey, ointments, perfumes,' Bl. Cf. Soph. El. 894. 
 
 veop'fiVTov^ 
 TTf^b.s ydXaKTOS, Kal irepiaTup^ KVKki^y 
 irdvTuv 8<t' icTLV dvdiit)v. 
 
 Dion. 10. 53 ; Herodian, viii. 5. 18, K. l-nX irvpds dXXoTptas. Cf. 
 
 Procop. B. P. ii. 22, Kal is dWorpias drjKas ipplirrovv rj \av6dvoPT€S ij ^iaj^6- 
 fxevoi. Lucr. vi. 1281. 
 
 ' Namque suos consanguineos aliena rogonim 
 Insuper instructa ingenti clamore locabant, 
 Subdebantcjue faces. ' 
 
 So Boccacio — 'The priests, with the assistance of the gravediggers. without 
 troubling themselves about any over long or solemn offices, laid the corpse as 
 quick as possible in the first burial place which they found unoccupied.' 
 TOWS VTJcravTas. The technical term for piling the wood for the pyre. Proc. 
 £. P. ii. 23, ^vuvriaavTts : Horn. Od. 0. 321 ; Herod, i. 50. 86, ii. 107 ; Arist. 
 Lys. 269 , Lucian, de Mort. Pereg. p. 560. riv cavrwv vcKpdv. 
 
 The distributive singular. P. who compares the analogous use of dXX^Xwv, 
 c. Ixx. 
 
 Chapter LIU. —{a.) irpwrov %\ y\p%i k. t. X. — *wa« the first commmeemei U 
 of.' 6.vo\i.las depends upon fip^f, not upon ivl vXebv. It has, 
 
 therefore, the force of dpxv W, as in cap. 12. b. i. 93. b, i/irrjpKTo avrov, and 
 i. 6, Tr^irairrat. Aristophanes and Plato furnish abundant evidence that about 
 this time a great change did take place in the manners and morals of the 
 Athenians. Tliis subject, which is one of great interest, is treated at consider- 
 able length in the preliminary discourse to Mitchell's Aristophanes. We are 
 
 -\ 
 
 Chap. S3-'] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 215 
 
 not to suppose that this total demoralisation was brought about, in the short 
 8})ace of a few months, by the influence of terror and recklessness. This was 
 but the crisis of the change. The pestilence determined the victory of an evil 
 influence which had long been spreading. The open practice of the new doc- 
 trines of the Sophists had been repressed by laws, and by the received opinion 
 of good and evil, but now that the insecurity of life and property banished 
 thought of the future, by alike extinguishing both hope and fear, and the 
 general disorder and distress removed all check of public opinion, the doctrines 
 of the Sophists sprung at once to maturity, and bore abundant fruit after their 
 kind.' — C. Knight. eroXpa tis- The indefinite used collectively; 
 
 hence, in the succeeding clause, we have the plural participle, opQvTes ; cf. 
 Pflugk ad Eurip. Here. F. 79. aircKpvirrcTO p.i?| Ka6* tiSov^jv ttoiciv. 
 
 Cf. xxxvii. 2. Ov. Met. vii. 564. ayxCtrrpo^ov ri\v |jL€TapoXT|V — 
 
 * the sudden change.* dyX' properly applies to that which is sudden or quick 
 in turning ; here perhaps, transposition, change of places. Procop. B. P. ii. 
 2 3. dfi(f>i<TTpo<f>ov TTiv /x€Ta^o\7)v. So yEliau. V. II. V. 1 3, Tr}v ovtus dyxicrTpo(pof 
 fx€Ta^oKrjv rod rpbirov el iiraipeiv XPV- Herod, vii. 13. raxcias xas 
 ^iravp^iTCis. diroXaiiffeis Kai i]dvTra6(ias. Sell, iiravpeais has the general sense, 
 
 * use, employment, usufruct,' 'genuss, ' therefore irpbs rb Tepirvbv becomes neces- 
 sary to qualify the meaning. Herod, vii. 158. 4<j>iqp.cpa. Cf. -.^sch. 
 
 P. r. 83. 
 
 (6.) TO TrpooTaXaiirwpciv, v. Jelf, § 670, i. Even when the preceding verb 
 is construed with a substantive or genitive, the nom. neuter of the article is 
 used, especially in tragedy, in emphatical or antithetical sentences, when the 
 infinitive is conceived as standing to the preceding verb in the relation of the 
 accusative, i.e., effect, operation, or intention, as the verbal notion may require. 
 For the use of the dative ry U^olvtl Ka\(^, see Jelf, § 596, i. The dativus com- 
 modi. Cf. Thirlwall, iii. p. 137 n. 'The only exceptions to the general all- 
 engrossing selfishness were some persons of extraordinary generosity, who, 
 from a sense of lionour, ventured their lives to attend upon their sick friends. 
 A striking contrast to the sublime charity which has made the plagues of Milan 
 and Marseilles bright spots in the history of religion and humanity.' 
 rb 4s avrb — thereunto profitable. KOiTi<m\—' was laid down to he, 
 
 as T. K. A. says, that was the place it was henceforth to occupy. 
 
 (c.) Ocwv 84 4>6pos ^ dvOpwTrwv v5|iOS, v. Luc. vi. 1274, quoted above ad 
 Iii. a. N.B. the absence of the article. ' Fear of God, or law of man, there 
 was none ichich restrained,' &c. So infra, 62. c. to [liv KpivovTcs, v. Jelf, 
 
 § 708, I. The nominative participle used absolutely, where we should expect the 
 gen. abs. Cf. Thuc. iv. 23, v. 70. Soph. Ant. 259, <^i/\a^ eXiyx^v <pvXaKa. 
 Matt. G. G. § 562. Compare the phrase c. xlix e, iv r^ bixol(^ KadeiaTrjKei.. 
 T«v 84 ajiopTHjidTwv, ' no one expecting that he had a chance of living until 
 judicial proceedings might be instituted, by which he might be called upon to 
 pay the penalty of his crimes.' The &v qualifies both the participle and infini- 
 tive. iroXv 84 \nilta ri\v i\ k. Observe that fiel^u from its position 
 becomes the predicate, and that the aorist l7riKp€|ia(r6-^vai implies the punish- 
 ment was suspended, ready to fall in due time. * The sentence which was 
 already pronounced against them, ready at any moment to be put into execu- 
 tion, was far greater than any that a human tribunal could award : and before 
 
2l6 
 
 NOTES OX THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book II. 
 
 it fell it was but fair, upon all human principles, that they should snatch some 
 brief enjoyment of life.' Ifiirco-civ = ^7KaTa(r/c^\^at. So Hor. iii. 
 
 Od. \. 17, 'Districtus ensis cui super inipia cervice pendet.' 'In no age or 
 place,' says ^Ir. Knight, *in which the Christian religion has been professed, 
 however corrupted in principle or depraved in practice (if we, perhaps, except 
 the account of the plague of Florence by Boccacio), do we find that that general 
 depravity which Thucydides describes has ensued in consequence of a similar 
 calamity. This difference can only be ascribed to the powerful effects produced 
 by the received belief of a future existence upon the minds even of those who, 
 under common circumstances, seemed regardless of such considerations. Among 
 the Athenians practicalbf no such belief existed ; it was the creed of their poets, 
 it was inculcated at their mysteries, but it was devoid of all authority to serve 
 as a rule of conduct.' Cf. Thirlwall, u. s. 
 
 Chapter LIV. — (a.) ir€pnr€<r<JvT€S" So c. Ixv. ■2, irepiireaStrre^ i(T<t>6.\-q(Tav, 
 used here rather in the sense of the cognate Trtpiir^Teca tlian as in I. c. xliii. 
 TrepnreiTTujKdTes' u. v. not. ^iri^ovTo, as c. Iii. iirUffe 5i . . . i] ^vyKOfiLdrj 
 
 — 2cei'e sore j>ressed. 
 
 (6.) 4y^v6to \i.kv Ipis . . . ftVj. P. says the passage is important as bearing 
 on the pronunciation of the Greek language. Bl. says, * not only are the sounds 
 similar but the ideas cognate, * Xi^bs being always followed by Xot/xij. Cf. Schol. 
 ad Arist. Equ. 727. <^d<rK0VTes 01 irpccrpvTipoi, a sort of nomina- 
 
 tivus {)enden3, as lib. i. 49, SeSiores oi ffTpaTTjyoL Abresch. explains it as an 
 Hypallage for dvafxvrjff Sevres . . . (tpaffKOv. Cf. supra Kpivovrcs. 
 €irl ToO -rrapivTos. Jelf, § 6^^, c. The genitive expresses that whence the 
 action springs, and ^irl represents the action as resting on the object. 
 AwptttKos. It was literally, as Bl. remarks, a war of races, Dorians against 
 lonians. KaToXdpr], cf. ad xviii. i. 
 
 (c.) \i-v-f]\t.y] . . . Tois ddoa-iv = dvdfxvrjats. dvciXc, the technical 
 
 term for the oracular answer. Cf. i. 1 18, where Thuc. gives the oracle. Cf. 
 Plut. de Pyth. Orac. p. 586. Xen. Anab. iii. i, 6. Hudson quotes Fab. 
 Paulinus, who arranges the answer in iambic trimeters. The connexion of the 
 pestilence with Apollo is of course familiar to every one from the first book of 
 the Iliad. 
 
 (d.) 8ti, d|iov Kal clirctv, at all events to an extent worth speaking of, for 
 Paus. viii. ^i, testifies that it did penetrate into the Peloponnese. Cf. sup. 
 u}(TT€ Kal KTeiveiv. iirwii^aro—' it ravaged* = iirrjXde. Hesych., 
 
 projierly of the ravages of wild beasts, conflagrations, and similar calamities. 
 It denotes pmsing into a neighbours ground, trespassing. See that remarkable 
 passage, ^sch. Agam, v. 466, 6 dijXvs 6pos iiriv^fxeTai. rd iroXv- 
 
 av9p4)Tr<JTaTa, v. Grote, vi. p. 219. Perhaps Chios; hardly Lesbos, or the 
 fact would have been noticed when the revolt of that island occurs. 
 
 Chapter LV. — ^tcjiov. For this use of the aorists, see Sheppard's 
 Theophrastus, p. -263, Appendix i. is ri\v IldpaXov Y^v— ' The 
 
 sea coast district' of Attica. A triangular piece of land of which the apex was 
 Sunium, and the two points the base of Brauron and the promontory Zoster. 
 It was hilly and barren, but contained the rich mines of Laurium. It derives 
 
 Chap. 57.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 217 
 
 its importance from the political division to which it gave rise. Cf. Herod, i. 
 59 ; Plut. V. Solon, xiii. So the ol vediaKol, Ar. Pol. v. 5. 9. from the ireUov 
 above, i.e. the plain immediately about Athens. AavpCov. Cf. 
 
 vi. c. 9r ; Paus. Att. i. i ; Cramer ii. p. 375. The miners, ThirlwHll says 
 (v (1. iii. p. 1 34), would probably take refuge with their property in Ana})hlystus. 
 Cf. Xen. Vectig. iv. 43. 5. opqi — spectat, or prospectat, looks towards, 
 
 P. says that (^Xiirei is the more usual })hra8e, while K. says Thuc. never uses 
 pX^neiv in this sense, but quotes four passages where opdv occurs. 
 wv Kal TOTC. The /cai rdre, as the Schol. remarks, may refer either to the former 
 or the latter part of the clause. 
 
 Chapter LVI. — (a.) ^v vavo-lv iTnra-yoj'Yois Trpwrov k.t.X. i.e. the old 
 galleys were now for the first time applied to the purpose of horse-transports. 
 Cf. Thirlw. iii. p. 103. In this counter-invasion, the object of Pericles may 
 partly have been to diminish the crowd accumulated in the city ; and perhaps 
 those who went aboard might consider it as a chance of escape to quit an in- 
 fected home, Grote, vi. p. 219. Cf. Diod. xii. 45. 
 
 (b.) 'EirCSavpov. Epidaurus, now Epidauro, the famous seat of the worship 
 of .<:E8culapius (v. Smith's Diet. Biog. s.v. ^scul.), lay on the eastern shore of 
 Argolis, nearly opposite yEgina and the harbours of Athens, from which it was 
 only distant six hours' sail. It lies on a small peninsula, protected on tlie land 
 side by mountains. It was at an early period a Dorian settlement (though 
 perhaps originally Ionian), and one of the most flourishing commercial cities of 
 the Peloponnese. Herod, i. 146 ; v. 83 ; vii. 99. Besides Cos, Calydnus, and 
 Nisyrus, it colonized ^gina, which soon surpassed its mother city in commer- 
 cial imj)ortance. In the thirteenth year of the war, we also find them suc- 
 cessfully resisting an attack of the Argives, lib. v. 53 sq. Cf. Strabo, viii. p. 
 374 ; Cramer, iii. p. 270; Smith's Geog. Diet. s.v. Miill. yEgin. i. 
 'irpo€)^wpT]a'€. Either supply t/ trpoa^oXT] or i] ireipa, or more probably consider 
 the verb used impersonally. Cf. Iviii. b. 
 
 (c.) ri\v 'AXid8a, v. not. ad i. 105 a. In the seventh year [iv. 45.] they 
 made a similar descent on this district. Cf. Herod, vii. 137 ; Cramer, iii. 
 p. ■258. Ilpao-ids. (Both the singular and plural forms of the 
 
 name occur, as of Plataea.) It lay on the sea- coast, near the foot of Mount 
 Thornax, and was the farthest place of the Eleuthero-Lacones on this part of 
 the coast. The name is said to have been derived from the noise of the waves 
 iPpd^eiv). It was again ravaged by the Athenians in the seventeenth year of 
 the war by the Athenians and Argives (vi. 105), and by the Athenians alone 
 in the eighteenth year (vii. 18). Hence Aristophanes says, 'Icu llpaaiai rpls 
 AdXiai, Pax, 242. Leake places it at S. Andrew, in the Thyreatis, but it 
 more probably stood at Tyro. Cf. Smith, O'cog. Diet, s.v.; Cramer, iii. p. 202. 
 
 Chapter LVII. — edirrovras ■n<r8dvovTo. edirTovra^, as Arnold observes, 
 is used for any form of performing funeral rites, whether by burning or other- 
 wise. Cf. Herod, v. 8, ddirTovcn KaraKavaavres, ij dXXus yrj KpvxpavTes. v. 
 Bahr ad loc, Oudendorp, ad Suet. Dom. xv. ; Tac. Ann. n. 73; ^lian, 
 N. A.x. 22; Bl. ad ^sch. S. c. Th. 1023. It may therefore either imply 
 here, perceived the smoke of the funeral pyres, or saw them burying in the ex- 
 
2l8 
 
 terior Ceramicua. 
 Cf. K. ad c.xiii. c. 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book II. 
 
 irXtlfrrov—' a lonf/er time than in any other invasion. 
 jidXicrra. So c.lviii. 6. v. not. ad lib. i. 13. 
 
 Chapter LVIII.-(a.) "Ayvi.y. Cf. lib. vi. 31, where he alludes to the 
 greatness of this expedition, when comparing it with the armament equipped 
 fur Sicily, iri iroXiopKovfi^vtiv. Cf. i. 64. 
 
 (b.) Tovs irpoWpovs. The .,000 under Callias. v. i. 61. 
 vocri|<rat airh—'fell »ick, havinrj taken the infection from. 
 
 Chapter LIX.— («.) t|XXoiu)vto. (Jrote translates by * di^ifractfd/ \i. p. 
 220. Bl. by 'chanf/ed their sentiments,' and compares Dio. Cass. p. 344. 22.* 
 So L. and S. It might also imi>ly tiieir being ' deranged in mind,' as Polyb. viii*. 
 xxix. 5; their being ' estranged in sentiment towards Pericles," or being changed 
 for the worse, as Xen. Cyr. iii. 3. 9, ' having lost their former high coura<'e and 
 determination.' The Sch. explains it by Mere^X^^r^cra... K. compares iv. ,06, 
 dWoidrepoi iyivovTo rds 7i.ct-/za5. P. says the pluperfect implies, ' that their 
 sentiments had become clianged, ami had continued so for some time ' 
 fv alTiij €lxov. So 5.' dpyijs ^x^cu. Cf. ad ii. 8. 'mpin^imoKSris. 
 
 ^'V'^" '^' , i^yX'^pi'^v—' to f/ire in, to submit.' ipbMmL. Sch. 
 
 ' Nachgcben / K. to come to terms by making concessions. Cf. c.lxvi. 
 irpc'o-pcis. Cf. Diod. xii. 45. 
 
 {b.) iravTaxoecv -'from the pressure of untoward circumstances on all sides. * 
 ^XinUv ' ( rpecfed,' as i. i. a. For the fact, see i. 140. a. 
 ^vXXo^ov— '«» extraordinari/ assembly,' which his position as crpaTt^-yb^ 
 enabled him to summon. Cf. ad c.xxii. c. «ti hk ctrrpaWiYct— 
 
 i.e. as Seidler says, had not yet been deprived of his generalship. Poth 
 Plutarch and Diodorus mention his removal from this otfice, Thucydides only 
 iixefine. Grote therefore is inclined to doubt the reality of the former event. 
 He imagines that the strategi were re-elected in Hecatoml)fEon ; that the 
 Peloponnesian army entered Attica about the end of March or beginning of 
 April, and remained forty days, i.e. till the first week in May. During the 
 interval that elapsed between this event and the time of his re-election, Pericles 
 convoked this assembly. When the period for his renewal of office arrived, 
 his enemies prevented his re-election ; which might in loose language be called 
 'taking aw:.y the office of general,' Vol. vi. p. 226. n. Cf. ThirKvall, iii. p! 
 '^-- dTravaYajv. K. explains by * ablenken,' * to divert.' Bl. 
 
 translates ' to divert the irritation of their feelings, and bring them to a calmer 
 and less dispirited state of mind.' -fimciTcpov refers to their feelings 
 
 towards himself dScc'crrcpov. The disheartened condition of their 
 
 own minds. 
 
 Chapter LX.— (a.) kuI irpocrStxofi^voi. One might be tempted to tr. 
 tV is even as I expected; but I think the e^litors are right in connecting Kal with 
 the Kai before (KK\ri<Tiai>. The dat. irpoo-Stxofi^vt}) stands as the dative in such 
 idioms as fiovXofiivoii iffri. Cf. t,^ irX-qOd ov (iovXofi^ix^ 9,v, ch. 3. b. 
 Ttt Tfis 6pyris. Kather more general than dpyri, perha[)8 indications of anr/er. 
 ji^Uxj/wfiai. As this is the reading of a large majority of MSS., it is quite 
 useless to read n^^l^ponal with Bekker, who indeed gives the subjunctive in a 
 similar collocation, viii. 109. 
 
 Chap. 60.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 219 
 
 (6.) 6p0ov^€VT]V. As the antithetical word is ccpaWoiJxvqv — tripped up, 
 overthrown, the metaphor here is not from a vessel proceeding in a straight 
 course, but from a person retaining an upright position. Cf. ii. Tim. ii. 15, 
 cum Comment. dpOoTOfioOvra. ^ Ka6* i^Kaarrov cvirpa-yovcrav — thamchen 
 
 prosperous in the case of individual citizens. Livy has a well-known imitation, 
 XX vi. 36. * Respublica incolumis et privatas res facile salvas praebet ; publica 
 prodendotua nequidquam serves.' KaXws <j>cp6p,6vos — when it (joes well 
 
 with him. T. K. A. rather, when he is (foiny on prosperously, like a vessel with a 
 favouring breeze. Cf. v. 15 and 16, and Xen. (Econ. v. 17, ei5 (pepopL^vrjs Trjs 
 yeujpyia^ippiovTaLKalal&WaLrlxvaiaiTraaat., quoted by Kriig. 8ia<r«^6Ta«. — 
 
 is enabled to carry out his own presai'ation. Cf. sup. ch. 40. a., Sia^eiryeti/. 
 
 (c.) oiroTC. Used .as we ourselves use 2chen for since. See Kriig. on Xen. 
 Anab. iii. 2. 2. rds l8Cas. If we do not, as Kriig. suggests, read 
 
 i5i(jt, tr. private calamities, i.e. calamities of its p>rivate citizens. We have 
 TO. I5ia 8id<popa, sup. ch. 37 ; but see i. 68, tQv i8t(f. 8ia<f>6po}v. 
 dfivvcLV, n. b. the active voice ivard off evil from her, come to her aid. The 
 junior student must carefully distinguish from dfjivveadai, 'from ourselves.^ 
 Kal (i-fj K.T.X. — and not do what you arc doing now, letting go your hold of, d'C. 
 d4>U(r0€ must not be altered as in some MSS. to dipieadaL ; for it is epexegetical 
 to bpare. Popp. refers to Hermann, ad Vig. p. 759; Xen. Cyrop. i. 6. 19 ; 
 Pflugk, ad Eurip. Ilec. v. 178. ivviyvotn. So used vii. 73, miited 
 
 with me in determining. Cf. ^^vv8Uypo)T€ infr. c. 64. a.; 5t' airias €X^re, cf. i. 
 18. a. 40. c. ; and 5t' 6/07^5 ^X^i-v, v. 29. 
 
 {d.) •yvuivai rd Scovra — to know what tJte interests of the state require. 
 Popp. has collected a large number of passages where a similar statement of 
 qualifications is found. The best illustration of the whole is supplied by Arist. 
 lihet.u. 1.3. 4)1X6^0X1$ — patriotic. * Some grammarians have 
 
 objected to this word, as not Attic. Duk. ad vi. 92, has shown that it is. 
 Popp. For some most interesting remarks on the nature of ancient Patriotism, 
 Bee Comte Franz de Champagny's Les Cesars, vol ii. p. 391. yjii'x\^6.roiV 
 
 Kpdcra-mv, a somewhat elliptical form of speaking. Superior to the iitjiaeace of 
 bribes. The converse xPV'^'^t'^^ iicraojv occurs Arist. Pint. v. 362. 
 iv t<r(o IotIv Kal |ii?| el — perinde ac si non, is in just the sameposition as if he had 
 never had the conception: on 4v€9v(jlt|6i], cf. supra 40. b. d|i4>6T€pa — 
 
 both qualifications. ovK&vopoiws- ^c.ib(nr€p€i<f)CK6iro\L%dt). oiKCtws 
 
 ■ — convenienter, e re cirifatis, Popp. and others. I think the use of the word is 
 to be explained by what is said i. 70, rij yvibpLri oiKaoTdrrj is rb irpdaffeivTi vir^p 
 -airriji {ttjs irbXeojs) xP'^^o-^ \ ^"^ here, therefore, oiKeiws will mean 'as if they 
 belonged to it, and took its interests to heart ; loyally, dutifully.' 
 Tov St— i.e. Tou (Cvov ry irdXei, which is also the subject of viKUfx^vov, at 
 least I do not see the use of introducing an avrou with some editors. Similarly 
 irijjXoiTo is passive ; all would be bartered for this one thing, sc. xP'ni^T^^- The 
 genitive is that of price, which is correctly explained, as in Latin, by the ellipse 
 of 'pretio.' tov -yc d8uK€iv = fo have injured, T. K. A. Why 
 
 BO? This sort of comment seems to me to introduce unnecessary confusion 
 and uncertainty into the student's mind. It means to be a wrong-doer, to 
 stand to you in the position of a wrong-doer. See note supra on xXour^creie. 
 42. c. 
 
220 
 
 NOTES ON TIIUCYDIDKS. 
 
 [Book II. 
 
 Chapter LXI. — (a.) Kal -ydp. *The connexion is, I am innocent, for 
 circumstances forced us into war,' Kriig. atpco-is YCY^VT^rai — * when 
 
 the choice between peace and war has been offered to them.' ti 8i 
 
 dva-yKa^ov i^v puts the case liypothetically, with an assumption of its occurrence. 
 Hat say that it was necessary either to f/iveway at once, and submit to ones neiyh- 
 hours, or at the expense of peril to come successfully out of the contest — the par- 
 ticiples without the article as usual indicate the condition under which the fol« 
 lowing verb is predicated. 6 ^vyuiv—why then in that case the man who 
 
 has shrunk from the danger, is more censurable than the one who has stooil to 
 face it. 
 
 (b.) 6 avrbs eljii — the same in opinion, sc. t-q yv(hfx% as iii. 38, where 
 the words are found. ovk c^i(rTa|iai — / do not withdraw from it. 
 
 |A€TapdXX€Te, sc. tt]v ypu/xi^v, lit. transfer your opinion to the other side : you 
 (emjihatic) it is who change. Krlig. cites as another instance of ficTajidWu) 
 without an expressed object, Isoc. iv. 125, to<toutov ixiTa^(^\r}Ka<ji.v Cbare 
 rats iroXiTiiais TroXefiovffi. Cf. Plat. Rep. 564. a. aKcpatois. Some- 
 
 what poetical — scatheless, t^ vfieHpii), Kriig., from Lobeck ad Sophoc. Ajax, 
 p. 74. remarks that v/jLirepos generally is rendered conformaule in construction 
 to the governing word: tr. your injirmify of purpose. %xtt., pain is in 
 
 possession of each mans feeling, D. I should prefer understanding ?x^i as it 
 has been previously explaii»ed, i.e. nearly e( univalent to irapix^i. Cf. ch. 41. b, 
 and tr. the annoyance makes itself felt in each mans case. rh 
 
 XvTTovv is not * pain' in the abstract, but that which is now paining you. 
 |i€TapoXT]s — a great reverse of fortune, and that too all of a sudden. 
 Tairetv^. See note on dXiyai duvvciv, i. 50. e., and tr. not bold enough to persist 
 in; hut iyKaprepelv also implies the notion of endurance— endure to the end. 
 We should have rather expected oU than ct, as the figure called Attic attraction 
 generally has place in such collocations. But Popp. tiuotee hw-qaovrai & b.v 
 yvCiaiv iyKaprip€LV. 
 
 (c*.) Tw irXttcrTU) TrapaXo'yb) iy^^oXvov—tJiat which occurs with the greatest con- 
 tradiction to our calculations ; the greatest unlikelihood. So we have toO rroX^/xov 
 rbv TrapdXoyov, i, 78. infra, 85. a. I see no occasion for Kriig. 's conjecture, irXeiffTi^ 
 "^V- irpbs Tois dXXois. This refers to the devastation of their lands, 
 
 and their crowded condition in the city. ^p6vy\y.a,. Cf. 
 
 supra, and ch. 6i, enclaves a high spirit. dvrnrdXois — 
 
 that are a Jine match ; here, of correspondent character. 
 d^Cidcriv. As in i. 69, ii. 37, and cf. d^iw/^aros d<payfli;i, ch. 37, sup. ch. 
 virapxcvo-Tis 8d^T]s. This gen. depends upon iXXdirei. feee note on vvap- 
 Xovarjs (pvaeoji, ch. 45, that reputation which is properly his, i.e. which at- 
 taches to him as a property, and which we look for naturally in him. So r^y 
 fiT] TpoffTjKova-qs is that to which he has no claim. diroX'yirio'avTas. 
 
 See note on diroXo(pvpdiu.€voi, c. 46 ad Hn., and tr. having done with griif about 
 your private affairs. dvTiXa|ipdv€<reai. Sc. xp^cov—lay hold of 
 
 instead ; i.e. address yourself instead to. The word is used in the LXX. for 
 taking the feeble by the hand. See also dvriXati^dvovrai, supr. ch. 8. 
 
 Chapter LXII. — (a.) rhv ircJvov. This would formerly have been de- 
 scribed as an accus. absolute ; and indeed even now in tr. we are compelled to 
 
 Chap. 62.] 
 
 NOTES ON TIIUCYDIDES. 
 
 'X'il 
 
 ! 
 
 say that with regard to your labour in the war; yet it is best to consider with 
 Popp. and Kriig. that the words are in grammatical combination wiih ciTr^Set^a 
 vTroTTTevd/jLfvov, as if no such parenthetical statement as dpKeiru) iv oh had inter- 
 vened. We should say 6 irdvo^ vxoTTTeveTai /xi] yivyjrai noXm, as well as 
 vTroTTTfikTai fjLTi 6 rrdvos yivrjTai, ttoXvs, and therefore diriSet^a rbv irdXe/jLov ovk 
 dpdQi viroTTTevd/xevov is a legitimate way of speaking. Kal €K€iva — 
 
 even thai to go no further. Cf. with this way of speaking, Virg. Ucl. iii. 50, 
 
 Audiat haec tantum, — vel qui venit ipse Palaemon. 
 
 8T]Xw(ru) 8i Kal To8€ k.t.X. — / will also put before you this fact, that you possess 
 a circumstance, <Cr., T. K. A. As it is not very clear to me what 'the fact of 
 possessing a circumstance' may be ; I should prefer to make the construction 
 driXibau t65c virdpxov. I will show that this advantage attaches to you. The 
 next words, /xeyidov^ "f^pl, follow rather awkwardly, but I take them quite 
 parenthetically (on the score of extent), i.e. pointing out what is implied in the 
 T65f, and standing as a sort of epexegesis to it : then es Apxi" is for dominion, 
 or for empire, i.e. for maintaining it. Others, as T. K. A., interpret fieyedovs 
 Trepi, connected with the extent of your empire. ovr iy<a. Popp. 
 
 supplies ivedv/xijdTjv, but surely Pericles did not mean to say that, great states- 
 man as he was, he had never considered so plain and patent a fact before. 
 Besides the adjunct, iv roh trplv Xbyot.^ points to something else. We must 
 therefore understand ixfiva-d/xriv, or some notion contained in it, have in no 
 former speech availed myself of it as a means of persuading you. And why? 
 Because the pretension ichich it involves is somewhat of a boastful character. 
 Surely these words are sufficient to show that he had had the conception in his 
 mind. See note on ivedv/xrjdri, ch. 40. b. 
 
 (6.) (icpwv. Those parts of the world open to man's use. So viii. 46. He 
 speaks of to t^s 6aXd<T(n)S fxipos. There is no necessity to conjecture KxijaLv, 
 The expression is quite general, and probably one of common parlance. 
 v^fi€<r0c. Cf. i. 2, a. 
 
 {c.) pao-tXcvs, and ^0vos stand in contrast, and are more emphatic sine 
 articulo. There is no one, be it king or be it nation. See supra, 53, c. dXXo is 
 used as it very commonly is, in the sense of besides. Kara x.pe{av — in 
 respect of the use of ; tr. this power is not to be found in your having the use of 
 your houses or your land, which you think great things to have been deprived of 
 or KarcL may denote comparison, is not a thing you should compare icith. 
 
 {d.) avTwv. for the sake of them. Matth., § 368, and Jelf, § 488, 3. 
 *Mo8t of these genitives of the cause or aim of the action, were formerly 
 explained by an ellipse of ^v€Ka or X'^P'-^' fidXXov V\ ov. A good 
 
 instance of the idiom called redundant negative. See i. 95. Popp. quotes 
 Hermann, ad. ^ Vig. p. 799 ; Hartung. de Part. ii. p. i 70 ; Matth. § 455, 3, 
 to which we may add Jelf, § 749, 3. But perhaps the best discussion upon the 
 subject is to be found in Buttmann's able appendix to his edition of the 
 Meidias, Excursus xi. p. 149. His principle is,--* Ratio hujus usus commode 
 in plerisque videatur explicari ita, ut respuctu verbi negantis infinitivus iste (or, 
 as here, it need not be an infinitive) cum negatione non sit instar objecti, sed 
 a<ljectu8 tantum ad exprimendum effect um •" i. e., when the result is negative, 
 a negative is associated with it, even where a negation belongs to it from the 
 
222 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book II. 
 
 previous part of the aentence. So in the French idioms cited by Jelf, § 749, 
 — * il n'^crit pas mieux cette ann^e-ci qu'il ne faisait I'aniK^e pass^e. 
 KT^irCov. It has been supposeil that tliis refers to a particuhir way of dressing 
 the hair. The French tr. of Zevort has ' la parure et Vonu'vient.' The more 
 usual interpretation is a rfarden, or pleasure f/ronnd. The German tr. ein 
 Lustniirtchen. Popp. s.ay.s *noti Athenis recentioribus temporibus amopni 
 Epicuri hortuli, et aUi.' This is true, but only of * recentiora temporal On 
 the want of taste for the picturesque, and its imitation by horticulture, &c., 
 among the Athenians, see note on ktitto^, Sheppard's T/teophratstus, p. 164; 
 Bekker's Charkles ; Kitto's Pahsthie, p. 26 ; Card. Wiseman's Lecture on the 
 subject. lYKaXXwirio-ixa is, says Bl., a very rare word, which I have not 
 
 observed except in the later historians (Procopius, &c.). Probably their adoption 
 of it arises from an imitation of the present i>assage. Bl. tr. f/a]/ emhdluhinent. 
 irpos. Of. Jelf, § 638. irpoo-KCKTr^ji^va. So the majority of MSS. 
 
 Others, however, read 7rpo\'eACTT;jU^ca. In fact MSS. vary so continually between 
 these two ]>repositions when found in composition, that I should generally have 
 little scruple in adopting that which gave the best sense. The latter would here 
 mean what he has been ptossessed of before his reduction to slaren/, and this Kriig. 
 and Engelman's edition give. Popp. and Bl. retain the former, and explain 
 whatever we are possessed of in addition to freedom ; but I believe the expression 
 may imply no more than acquisitions. Bekk. edits irpoatKTrj^iva, from an old 
 Tonic perf. cKTrj/jiai, on the ground I suppose, that copyists would not have in- 
 vented such a form ; but in a case where so many variations are known to 
 occur, this looks like hypercriticism. |if| x€£povs. Cf supra, ch. 45. b. 
 
 KaT au<|)(JT6pa, /. e., as explained afterwards, KaraTO Karaax^it^ nal Siaffwaam-es 
 troLpahiZovai. That Kareaxov means retained their hold upon — maintained^ 
 seems clear from the elements of which the word is composed, and from the 
 passages quoted by Popp, 
 
 (c.) KTW|i^vovs. Note the distinction from KCKTrjixlvov^^ and tr. fail in the 
 attempt to acquire. <^povT|ftaTi--KaTa4>povTjjiaTi. Of course the 
 
 play upon the words is obvious, but I have seen no very successful attempt to 
 keep it up in translation. Not only uith spirit, but also irith a spirit of con- 
 tempt. 1). Non seulement avec conjiance, mais avec didain. Zevort. Nicht 
 nur mit Selhstachtung, sondern auch mit Vcrachtunf/. Engelman. Disdain la, 
 I think, the nearest English word to Karatpphvyjixa, as here used. Dionys. 
 Hal. reprehends the verbal jingle. Certainly it scarcely suits the dignity of 
 historical composition, but these words were supposed to be addressed to an 
 audience of very mixed character, and carry a genuine air with them. 
 oiJx-qfia. Kriig. well has ' prahlerische Keclheit,* It is not easy to render into 
 English, but the word contains the idea of a braggart, or boastful confidence. Cf. 
 vii. 66* ^wiA-jj irto-Tcvrj. has a confidence grounded upon judgment. 
 
 KaTa<|>p6vT]<ris. It certainly is possible to supply iKciv<f} with the Scholiast as 
 the antecedent to 6s ; but it is more, I think, in accordance with the style of 
 Thuc. to tr. as Kriig., but it is contempt, when a man, &c. Cf Jelf, § 829, 1. 
 dirb TT]s opioCas tux'HS — ichere fortune is the same on one side as the other ; 'a 
 fair stage and no favour.' For awb see i. 91, 6, and compare ^k tov ofioiov, iv. 10, 
 with fK TOV i'irip(f>povos, which I suppose means proceeding out of a spirit which 
 disdains the foe ; having its origin in a disdainful spirit, according to the true 
 
 Chap. 6^1 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 223 
 
 meaning of the preposition. D. has with a high spirit. Ixypuripav 
 
 "f^o-P^X^rai ' guarantees boldness {as in such cases) more secure.* cXirtSt 
 
 TCK.T.X. See this translated i. 9. a. d7rJ> twv virapxovTwv. Tr. proceeding 
 
 from, i.e., grounded upon existing resources. Popp. writes, 'to, virapx6vTa esse 
 praesentem rerum copiam, opes prcfsenfes, pluribus docet Gail.' I would not 
 therefore, with D., render present realities. 'Trp6voia. forecast. 
 
 Chapter LXIII. — (a.) tw ri\ua\L(v(a Tt]s iroXews. the honour received by the 
 Mtate. Cf. note on ry fiT] fieXcrQvri, 1. 14, 2, and Jelf, § 436. 7. 
 ^Sircp &7ravT€s. One good MS. hjis <^ virep diravTas, which Kriig. does not dis- 
 approve, and which the German translator has adopted. jn^Sc vofjLi<rai k. t. X. 
 nor consider the struggle to be about one matter simply, whether you are to have 
 slavery instead of freedom, but that it also respects the loss (lit. deprivation of) 
 of empire, and peril on account of the animosities which you have incurred in its 
 exercise, i. e., with most nations it might be a simple struggle whether they 
 were to be freemen by victory or slaves on defeat ; but to the latter you would 
 have two aggravations: (i) tlie loss of a dominant position; (2) the peril 
 which arises from the animosity engendered by it. <Sv is certainly neuter. 
 Upon this usage of dTrex^^dvofMai see a good note by Wunder, (Ld. R. v. 259 ; 
 Jelf, § 483, 4. 
 
 (6.) ToSc. Since this must refer to t6 ^KaTTJvaL r^s dpxv^, it cannot be 
 goveme<l by SeStcis. I should therefore take 5f Sitbs independently and connect 
 rdde with dudpayadi^erai, if in his jire^nt alarm, anyone is for playing the good 
 quiet man, in this way. The passages quoted by Popp. do not at all prove that 
 dvdpayii€<rdai cannot take an accusative; I interpret Kara rode in respect of 
 this point, nor does it seem to me necessary to read T<p5e. Cf. iii. 40. 
 
 (c.) fa)S TvpavvtSa. Because Cleon, iii. 37, repeats the sentiment without 
 wj, Dobree would strike the wortl out here. But, as the Editors observe, 
 Pericles would probably put forward the notion less coarsely than Cleon. 
 ol ToiovToi K. T. X. The sentence is somewhat elliptical, ttoXlv diroX^aeiav 
 belonging to both clauses. * People of this sort (sc. oi dvdpayadi^6/xevoi rdde), 
 either when living where they could influence others {i. e., when members of a 
 community like Athens), or when independent and left to their own devices 
 (as in a colony), would most speedily play mischief with the fortunes of a 
 state.' rb "ydp dirpa^fiov K. t. X. For quiet is not maintained excejjt when it 
 
 has the power of action for an au:riliary, (met. from the disposition of military 
 forces) nor is it in a dominant city that it is of any use, but in a subject one to 
 insure security in ones submission, or unmolested submission. Tliis I believe to 
 be the force of this somewhat difficult passage : t6 dirpayfiov is the subject of 
 ^vn4>^pei, for we cannot, as might seem natural, make the subject to be d(T(pa\uj^ 
 SovXeveiv without very much constraining the meaning of these words. What 
 would be d<7-^XuJs dovXeveiv in an dpxovaa wdXis ? Gottleber quotes from 
 Dem. ovK TjSvvTjdr] iriSjiroTe Tr}v irdXiv ovSels ix vam-bs tou xP^^o^ ireiffai. toI% 
 IffX^ovcTL fi^v, fiTj diKaia di irpaTTOvai, trpoadefiivrjv dacpaXQs SovXeveiv. p. 18, 203. 
 
 Chapter LXIV. — (a.) 'rapd-yco-Bc. The preposition, as often, may exert 
 the same force as the Latin se, aivay from, i. e. what is right : hence tr. seduced. 
 Or it may mean be not brought over to their way of thinking. Cf. i. 29. c. 
 
224 
 
 NOTES ^^^' THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Hook II. 
 
 |vv8t€'YVcDT€. Cf. II. 60. €l KttC — if, Qs hos tumed out to he the case, true 
 
 thoifjh it be that, <tr. Popp. considers that these words continue to exert tlieir 
 force on iTnyfy^vrjTai Tf. I am inclined, however, to think that the latter is 
 quite an independent clause ; had it not been so, Krug. contends Thuc. would 
 have written Kai, not re. cXirCSos. Cf. i. i. On the whole 
 
 Bloomf. well compares Tacit. Agric. -27. ' Iniquissima haec bellorum conditio 
 est : prospera omnes sibi vindicant, adversii uni imputantur.' 
 
 (6.) ji^pos Tt. Cf. i. 74. Jelf, § 579. 4. H-oXXov, sc. still more 
 
 than had you only been exasperated by the loss of your land. 
 dva-YKatws— as a necessity, as a thing that cannot be helped. On this particular 
 usage of the adverb, 8eenoteoniii.40 ; and on the sentiment, Soph./*/t/7.v. 1316. 
 iv ^6€t ^v —teas the way of this state; teas habitual to it. Kriig. cites iv 
 TovTip T(p r/)67rv 6vt€s, i. 8 ; and now let it not find any impediment in you, 
 i. e. let not the continuance of the good custom meet with an obstacle in you. 
 Nothing is gained that I can see by the conjectures KoXovdfj or KaraXvO^. 
 
 {c.) is tti8iov. This occurs again, iv. 63, but is, as Kriig. remarks, rare. 
 It belongs to the somewhat poetic tone into which an orator naturally falls 
 when excited. vvv irort — * nunc tandem uliquando.' Popp. 
 
 iircvSwiiiv. The Schol. explains uTroxaXdcrw/iei', (jire way a little. 
 Kttl €Xa<r<rov(r6ai, i. e. as well as to experience the opposite. * All human 
 things wane as well as wax.' KaroXcXci^'CTai. On these 
 
 so called Paulo-p. Futures, seeMatth. § 498. Roat, § i 16. 9, and Jelf, § 407. i. 
 *EXXf|vwv. The construction passes from the participle to 6ti, as sometimes, 
 from the infinitive, and vice versa from 8ti to the infinitive. See Popp. here, 
 and on i. 87 ; or with Kriig., we may consider that the clause follows /xutj/xt}, 
 as explanatory of what is implied in it, i. e. the memory that we as Greeks over 
 Greeks hare held the largest sway. On the Athenian Empire, see i. 80. Bloomf. 
 from want of appreciating the true aoristic force of ijp^aficv would refer these 
 words to a peri(xl twenty-seven jeai-s before the war. But Pericles did not 
 mean to speak of the power and glories of Athens as in any way past, and, as 
 has been remarked, even if -{jp^aficv were strictly here a past tense, it might 
 have been used in reference to the future /caraXeXet^erat. irpos rt 
 
 Ivfiiravras Kal Ka0* CKatTTOvs. Against all collectively or severally; an in- 
 stance of the disjunctive t<? KaL, as c. 64, h^povs re Treiadtn-fs, Kal k. r. X. Two 
 cases are supposed, and these happen to differ. It is hyperbolical to say that 
 they had ever fought the Greeks collectively, though such language might well 
 be used by an orator respecting the Peloponnesian league. Buttmann quotes 
 this passage in his lexicographical notice of Kara (Dem. Midias, p. 185) as an 
 instance of the fact that such phrases as Kad' eKaarovs become almost substan- 
 tival in their nature, and therefore stand in clauses as nouns, and with the 
 government of nouns ; e. g. hie, Kad* eKdaTovs pendet a pnepositione irpbs ; 
 nam si sine ilia jungas verbo. hoc dicjus * singulatim ipsi restitimus.' See the 
 other cases there quoted, and cf. lariu oh, and similar phrases. T. K. A. in 
 this pas.sage mistpiotes Poppo's Greek, and referring to Buttmann without ex- 
 amination, informs the reader that the latter considers the words to stand for 
 Kal TOj>s /ca^' eKdcTTovs I cviropwTaTqv — most thoroughly furnished with 
 
 all thinqs. y.i'^ifm\y. Popp. observes has reference not merely to extent 
 
 and number of houses, but also to population. It is well known that in Xen. 
 
 Chap. 65.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 225 
 
 Mem. iii. 6. 14, the houses of Athens are estimated at 10,000. This, counting 
 the inmates of each house, inclusive of slaves, as \i, gives 120,000 inlia- 
 bitants. The average number of free citizens in classical times was 20,000. 
 See Boeckh, P. E. of Athens, i. p. 46; and Clinton, Fasti Hellenici, p. 387; 
 Wachsmuth, ii. i. 2, § 32. 
 
 (d.) Ka^Toi. If we are to retain the usual force of this word we must, with 
 Hartung and Krug. (not as T. K. A. says, 'with Popp.,' who argues on the 
 other side), suppose that it refers to the contrasted notion contained in 6 ok 
 Spav K. T. X. ; and yet while the easygoing man finds fault with all this, he, on 
 the contrary (5e) who is anxious to be up and doing ; or, anxious to effect some- 
 thing, will of himself i. e. without being urged by me— emulate if. It must, I 
 think, be from want of duly considering this that Popp. insists upon attaching 
 the unusual meaning atqui, but now, to the word in this place. See Jelf, § 
 772. I. rh |it<rct<reai. Cf. vi. 16. ^rcpoi is added, as 
 
 Krug. seems to hint, for the purpose of indicating that the dominant race pre- 
 serve their distinct nationality, and are not to be confounded with the van- 
 quished, ^irl fi^YWTTois, for the most exalted objects : Caesar's 
 favourite sentiment, referred to by Arn., will recur to most minds; etirep yj,p 
 d8iK€iif xpT) TvpavpL^oi iripL KdWiffTov dbiKelv. Eurip. Fhoen. v. 524. 
 1^ Xa)iirp5TT]s .... Siga. See note on Granville Sharp's canon. The occur- 
 rence of T€ after the first noun makes it perhaps uncertain whether this pas- 
 sage comes under the rule. One MS. omits the re, in which case certainly the 
 meaning will be, our present splendor which will form our future glory ; or 
 even if the re be retained I am not sure that we may not tr. that which is at 
 once both our splendor at the present, and our glory for the future. 
 
 (<?.) -irpoYVo'vTes. This is parallel to the expression ^ TrpovoLa avrov i) is top 
 TdXefxop, c. 65, and is well rendered by Am. providing in your decision for 
 your future glory ; then is rb ai'rka /xtj alaxp^v is a sort of litotes, what cer- 
 tainly is not disgraceful for the present. He would insinuate, that though the 
 immediate result of such conduct may appear less brilliant, owing to the suffer- 
 ing it entails, yet brilliant it will be, as securing certain glory for the future. 
 This seems to me better than to say with all the editors — ' rb /jLeWov kuXSv ad 
 Tr)P (ireira Sj^av ; et rb avrUa firj aicrxpbv ad rriv irapavriKa XafnrpSrrjTa 
 respicit.* What sort of a XapLirpbT-qs would that be which was only ovk 
 alffxpd ? 
 
 Chapter LXV.— (a.) avrbv. We might have anticipated avrov, but practi- 
 cally the Athenians may be considered the subject, and we have therefore avrbv 
 in reference to them. irapoXvciv t^s ^pYfjs. The aec. is more 
 
 common ; Krug. Bl. says the gen. is only imitated by Dio Cassius. May it 
 not be a sort of partitive gen. remit somewhat of their anger? Cf. inf c. 75. d. 
 Or may it not have airroi' understood, so that the construction will be like irapa- 
 \v€iv (TTpaTTftrjs, Herod, vii. 38, to remit from military service, and 01; irapeXvaav 
 TTJs dpxv^, Thucyd. vii. 16, did not e.vcuse from his command? Cf the same phrase, 
 viii. 54. op\i.ui\i.tvos— having less to start from. Cf our phrase, a start 
 
 in life, and see note on i 144, a. olKo8o|iiais, i. e., oiKiaLs. Popp. 
 
 But does it not imply all the buildings upon the premises, just as we speak of 
 • farm buildings ?' The Edd. connect these datives with /caXd. On /carao-zceuats, cf. 
 
 
226 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book II. 
 
 i. 10 b, and ii. i6. Jelf, § 604. Arn. remarks that though they might have 
 removed much of their furniture, &c., they would practically have lost the use 
 of it, and that indeed the term would include the colonnadta round their houses 
 which were of course destroyed by the enemy. 
 
 (6.) ov |t^vTOt yt. A second statement o]>po8ed to avcirctdovTO, the first 
 being /5t^ 5^ iXvTToOuTO. Popp. Hr^^iuxrav xpi\\iaa-iv— mulcted him 
 
 in a sum of money. The dative is instrumental. Cf. <pvyrj ^j^^fxiuaay, iv. 65., and 
 « pecunia mulctatos,' Livy, xxi, 61. According to Plutarch those who give the 
 lowest estimate say 15, those who give the highest say 50 talents. It is not 
 very likely that they were exacted. Dioilorus speaks of 80 talents, and says 
 that he was dismissed from his office ; this is, however, quite in the tone of the 
 later exaggerations. Thucyd. would certainly have mentioned the fact if it 
 had been'true. ^-n-cp <|)tX€i irouiv. Thucyd. repeats the sentiment, 
 
 V. 28 c, and viii. i. iirirpi^av-turned all their affairs over into 
 
 hU hands. They made him supreme over the nine other ZTpaTrj-nol. Like 
 fiist Lord of the Admiralty, says Arn. Kriig. cf. r/ffiuv avTOKpdrwp- Xen. 
 J/ellm. \. 4, 20, said of Alcibiades. ^v^i. e., tovtuu &. 'The 
 
 gen. governed by dfx^XvT^poi, less sensitive, like t^s -^pufirj^ dp^Xvpfceai, 11. 87, 
 ?,' Popp. ; but, says Krug., the two places are something different, and he 
 accordingly conjectures wipi post casum, supplying Kara ravra before the second 
 &v. Popp. also suggests that u:v may depend upon i^Xyci, a view of the case 
 adopted by L. and S. Lex. in voce, but this construction seems to be confined 
 to poetry. tq €lpT|Vt|, generally understood of the thirty years' truce 
 
 which followed the revolt of Euboea. 
 
 {e.) |i€Tpi«s €5t]7€ito. Popp. quotes Aristid. ii. p. 126, tovto iarlv ivavriov 
 rod /^laiojs /cai TrXeoveKTLKUs. This must not, I think, be understood merely of 
 personal violence and avarice. Thucyd. rather refers to the moderation of his 
 national policy, in not seeking territorial aggrandisement, &c. 
 do-4>aXttS -««/e from trips and overthrows. Cf. i. 69, ad finem, and i. 84, iv. 
 jg Itt' Udvov— under him, i. «., his administration. Cf. Herod, 
 
 iv. 114, oiV^w/xev fTr* ijfx^uv avrC^v, and the passages quoted by Jelf, § 633 ; or 
 it may' be in fiis time, as inl Aapeiov iy^uero ttX^w kokA t^ 'EXXaSi, Herod, vi. 
 gS. Cf. Jelf, ibid. KaWcmi. Cf. KadiffTap.hov i i. a. 6 8i. Cf. 
 
 iii. c8 a. This is 5^ in apodosi— i/^-, then I say. But, says Krtig., this form of 
 speeLh is more Ionic than Attic. It was, however, again taken up by the later 
 writers, as, for instance, Anian ; it resembles the to?? 5^. to these I say, sup. 
 p 5 ' irpcyvovs t^v 8vva|iiv— /mrm// taken a far-siyhtcd view of 
 
 if.i lyower, i. e., discerned beforehand what its true nature consisted in. 
 ktri^U—he o^rr lived it. See the same expression, v. 76. 
 
 i^d.) ecpaircvovras. Bl. remarks that this use of the word is unusual. But 
 it is, as Krug. says, very graphic, being equivalent to the German phrase 
 ' he«ren und pflegen '—to cherish a/irf make muck of. Indeed, it might be well 
 employed of the°feeling of Englishmen toward their own navy. Cf. also, the 
 use of the word, i. 9, redepairevKdres rh irXridos, and ibid. c. 137, and iv. 67, 3. 
 Kal apxV ^ "^^ ^- — «*«^'"5' ^^ attempts to acquire additional do^minion while 
 they still had the war upon their hands, nor perilling their country upon a cast. 
 4v T<i iToX^pw is equivalent to &/ia iroXffiovvTfi i. I44» »• 5 ""^1 irdXu is the 
 instrumental' dative denoting the stake with which they played. Cf. viii. 45, 4. 
 
 Chap. 65.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 227 
 
 d^iovffi Kai ToU a-ivfiaai Kal to?s xP'^I^°-(^'-v AXXovs virkp r^s CKeivuv iXevOcpiai 
 Ki.v5uv€i'>€iv, and again, rots eroifiois KLvdvuevetu, vi. 9. Latin^, periclitari aliqu^ 
 re. Cf. Liv., xxxviii. 25. I|w rov iroX^^ov. This seems a sort of 
 
 technical phraseology, if one might so express it, 1. e., belonging to such 
 phrases as ^^w roO trpdyfiaros in the Metoric, iii. § I4, and frequently in 
 Demosthenes and the Orators, which seemed to have nothing to do with the war. 
 Thucydides alludes, as Arn. says, to ii. 85, the mission of the squadron to 
 Crete which ought to have reinforced Phormion, the preliminary expeditions to 
 Sicily, the attack upon Melos, and perhaps to the expedition against Boeotia 
 which terminated in the defeat at Delium. Kara rds I8tas <|>iXoTi}iias 
 
 — * in prosecution of their private ambitious views.* 4iroX(T€v<rav — 
 
 they conducted their polity, or as Arn. tr., adopted unwise measures. 
 KaOfoTaTo pXa^T] — constituted itsilf a damage, i. e., were a positive damage. 
 
 {€.) dSa^psraTos- Kriig. remarks that for &5u}pos, dScjpodoKrjTos is more 
 frequent in Attic Greek, Jelf, ^ 629. 2. cXcvO^pxs — indepen- 
 
 dently, i.e. uninfluenced by the popular clamour, Kriig.; others, as Bl. and 
 Popp., compare 37, and tr, in such a way as comported with individual 
 liberty. ^yrro — ^yt. Cf. with Kriig., Plat., Phcedrus, 94. E. 
 
 8td rh }if| KTw(i€vos — while he made no attempt to acquire, such is the force of 
 thepres. part. ; cf. ch. 62. e. ; this would be unnecessary perhaps to notice had 
 not Bl. tr. because he had not acquired. irpbs t|8ov'^v -irpos 
 
 ^pYi^v. These two stand correlatively, and must be rendered alike — the first 
 is to please them, the second, to make them angry. For the first cf. 7rp6$ r^bovqv 
 XiyiLV, Sophoc. Elect. 921. ^X*^" — having it in his poicer, by standing 
 
 upon the reputation in which he was held, even in some respects to contradict 
 them in a way to make them angry, i. e. he could afford to brave their anger, 
 because he knew they would relent or give in ; cf. the commencement of the 
 ch. I cannot persuade myself, with Bl., Coll., Kriig., and T. K. A.'s editor, 
 to translate * cum ird 'with heat.' Why should Pericles have made it any 
 object to contradict them with heat and asperity? Is such conduct consistent 
 with what we know of the calmness of his character ? The above is I see nearly 
 Arn.'s view ; it may be some slight coiToboration that I had quite indepen- 
 dently arrived at the conclusion before consulting any commentator. 
 
 (/). Karitr\r\a-<riv lirX rh <}>oPctcr6ai — beat down their confidence so far as to 
 create alarm. ' Quare Athenai ejus terrorem timuisse dicuntur,' Cic. Brut. c. 
 1 1. § 44, Popp. iyiyv€ro—it amounted to during his time, n. b. 
 
 imperfect. irteh follows a verbal noun, as it would a passive 
 
 verb. Cf. i. 130. a. avrol p.dXXov k. t. X. — being more on a par 
 
 themselves with one another ; instead of avToi irpbs eavrovt — on a par amovg them- 
 selves. ^TpdirovTO K. T. X. — betook themselves to permitfing even 
 public affairs to go just as suited the whims of the multitude, Kriig. cf. for 
 irpbs r)8ovriv. Soph. El. 1 503 ; Prom. V. 261. rd irpdYiAara — 
 public measures. The word is preceded by Kai because Thuc. inii)lies that they 
 moulded these, as well as their speeches, in conformity with the current humour 
 of the people ; for iv8i8ovai, cf. ivSLbouai rriv toXiv, iv. 66. c, and avroU rd 
 irpdyfiara, v. 62. Bl. less rightly, I think, tr. they took to gratifying the people, 
 to as to give up to them the administration, &c. 
 
 {g.) iroXXd T|}taprq0Tj — many blunders were made, and more especially the 
 
 Q 2 
 
228 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book 1 1. 
 
 blunder of the Sicilian expedition. There is no valid objection to this way of 
 speaking, as may be seen fr. Popp. quotations, afiaprd/xtva fpya, iii. 67 ; 17 
 i^a/naprofx^vrj Trpd^ii, Plat. Protarj. p. 357. e. ; why not then tXoOs ijfiapTTjdr) 1 
 ov TocrovTov K T. X, — not so inuch an error of judgment in respect of the persons 
 against whom they went, as that those who sent them forth did not follmo the 
 matter up by decreeing what icas requisite for the departed armament. An 
 English writer would have balarced the sentence by some noun answtring 
 d,adpr77,ua, but this unsymmetrical construction is introduced upon the princijde 
 of variety so frequently noticed. Cf. i. 38. With rots olxop.^vois, cf. rCv 
 oixon^i'ojv, said of the Persians who had gone upon the exptdition to Greece, 
 ^-ch. Per. V. i. Some difficulty has been felt about Itnyiyvda-Kovrts, but I 
 believe the above to be the true meaning here fnnn i. 13^, /xt] iiriyvi^ ; i. 70, rd 
 ifirdpxovra ffw^eiv Kal ixiyvuivai p.r,5(v. The force of the prep, is less obvious in 
 other cases, iii. 57. SiaPoXds — cabals, such as are recorded by 
 
 Andt)cides. Perhaps Thuc. particularly refers to t! e intrigues which terminated 
 in the recall of Alcibiades. tcL ircpl ri^v TrdXiv. Kriig. considers 
 
 that allusion is made to the factions which in Olymp. xcii. i broke out in the 
 army itself. Trpwrov. Not I think certaiidy for the first time since 
 
 the Pisistratid(e, hut frst began the internal troubles which subsequently reached 
 such a heiglit. Cf. vi. 53. 
 
 (h.) cr<}>aX€VT6S irapao-KtvTJ. Cf. vi. 10, a(f>a\^vTU}v d^idxpfV Svvdpietj 
 Popp. Tpta (irr\. It is not clear what three years are intended. 
 
 Arn. understands the three ye;irs which elapsed from the arrival of Cyrus in 
 Asia Minor to the surrender of Athens to Lysander, B c. 407 — 4. Of tiiis 
 Popp. says * prorsus ferri non potest.' Kriig., in his chronological work, esti- 
 mates the time as included between the commencement of the seditions in the 
 city till the arrival of Cyrus at Sardis, i e. from the early part of B.C. 41 1 to 
 the spring of B.C. 408. To this Popp. objects that if rpia fikv hr) dme^xo^ 
 were meant to be opposed to KvpCfi re {icrepov, these words would have been 
 written vcrrepov re or 5^. He does not himself give any other explanation, but 
 seems to regard with favour Haack's conjecture, A^/ca for rpia, which is, he 
 thinks, slightly confirmed by Isocrat. Panath. § 57. Bao-iX^u;s 
 
 vav8i. Son of Darius Nothus, the son of Artaxerxes. irpoo^ycvop-ivb) — 
 
 coming upon them in addition to all their other enemies. 
 
 (?'.) iv <r4>£<ri. Popp. well cf. iv roh SiKaaraU ovk ifiol to5' ia<f>d\rj, Soph. 
 Ajax, V. 1 137 ; but as TrepiiriirTeiv should be followed by an objective dative, 
 cf. i. 43 d., ii. 54. 59, he supplies avraU from 5ia(popd$, which Kriig. consiilers 
 mehr als hart. Kriig. also directs attention to apiffip withtiut avrQv, reflected 
 back to the nearest subject, which is an Ionic usage, and refers to ii. 76. a, ; 
 iv. 8. a. 103. c. ; v. 14, a. ktri^La-cnva-i. This verb denotes the 
 
 existence of a superfluity, and indicates that the spirit which tie Athenians 
 showed in their difficulties, and their protracted resistance, was so much over 
 and above what Pericles had calculated upon, and corsequently a proof that 
 his calculation was a sound one, and would have been verified had they not run 
 counter to his policy. d<j>* wv avrbs Trpo^^vw — from the resources 
 
 of which from his own perspicacity he had foreknowledge. Arn. explains 
 aiiTOi by his own mere ability, before experience proved it to the world. Op 
 IIcpvKXcs cf. Jelf, § 597. 
 
 Chap. 67.] 
 
 NOTKS ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 229 
 
 I 
 
 Chapter LXVI.— ZdKweov. The name of the island was derived, ac- 
 cording to Pausanias (viii. -24. 2), from Zacynthus, son of Dardanus, an 
 Arcadian chief. According to a very ancient tradition, the Zacynthians, in 
 conjunction with the Rutuli of Ardea, founded Saguntum, in Spain. [Liv. 
 xxi. 7.] It was here that Demaratus took refuge from the persecution of his 
 enemies. Herod, vi. 70. Not long before the Peloponnesian war it was reduced 
 by Ttdiuides, the Athenian geuHrai, and from this time became dependent on 
 Athens. (Diod. Sic. xi. 84.) Cf. Thuc. vii. 57, Its modern name is Zante. 
 vavapxos- This office at Sparta lasted for one year. (Cf. ad c. Ixxx., where 
 we fiud it continued to him for another year.) Xen. JJell. ii. i, 7. ov vop-o^ 
 avro^s 5(5 rdv avrov vavapx^iv. (Manso. ISx^arta, ii. p. 382. P.) 
 ^W€X(^povv. Cf. ad lix. (b.) 
 
 Chapter LXVII.— (a.) 'Apwrrevs. Cf. ad i. 60. 'Av^pwrros Kal 
 
 NiKoXaos. Aneristus, son of Sptrthias, and Nicolaus, son of Jhdis, the 
 Spartans who volunteered to go to Susa to atone for the murder of the Persian 
 heralds. Herod, vii. 134— 8. Thirlwall, iii. p. 163, n. ' The romantic and 
 tragical coincidence' of these persons being the sons of the envoys whose lives 
 were spared by Xerxes ceases, Mr. Grole says, when we remember that the 
 functions of herald at Sparta were the privilege of a particular gens: every 
 herald was ex ojicio the son of a herald. These two, therefore, being the sons 
 of men who had been to Susa before, had probably talked a great deal about 
 it, and had derived great glory from the unaccepted offer of their lives in 
 atonement, would be the men whom the Spartans would most naturally fix 
 upon, in preference to any others, to fulfil this dangerous mission : Grote, vi. 
 p. 245, note, who also thinks that Aneristus had distinguished himself in the 
 capture of the fishermen on the coast of Peloponnesus by the Lacediemonians. 
 'ApY€U>s ISCij. n<iXXis. Cf. Thirlwall, iii. p. 163. * Pollis had no commission 
 from liis own city, but probably represented the wishes of a. party :' Argos, as 
 a state, being favourably disposed towards Athens, v. Schol. For the pri- 
 vateering of the Lacedaemonians, cf. Thuc. v. 115. Xen. Hell. v. 1. 29. 
 itfs ^ao-iX^a. Darius Nothus, Gottleber says : but Darius Nothus did not 
 come to the throne till B. c. 4'24. It was Artaxerxes Longimanus, whose 
 death Thuc. records in the Archontate of Stratocles, iv. 50. Cf. Wess. ad 
 Diod. Sic. xii. 64. SitoXktjv. Cf. ad c. xxix. 
 
 ct iro)? TTiCcriiav. Cf. i. 58, // possible persuade, hence el ttws, with the opta- 
 tive, means to * try to do something,' like the epic el k€, atKC. Jelf, §877, 
 obs. 5. 81 cK€ivov iropcvOfivai" i.e., they applied to him for a 
 
 safe escort to the banks of the Hellespont. Their main object (yT'ep cbpfirjuTo) 
 being to get to Persia. Cf. c. vii. a. Pharnaces was satrap of Dascylitis. Cf. 
 i. 129, a. 
 
 (6.) irapaTvx<$vT«s — ' who happened to be resident at the court of Sitalces.' 
 Tfjv IkcCvov irdXiv rh p^pos- Sadocus, having been admitted to the rights of 
 Athenian citizenship, would be supposed to participate in any injury done to 
 the state of which he now formed an integral part ; upon the principle that if 
 one member suffer, all the members suffer with it. By the exaggeration of 
 his ridicule Aristophanes testifies to the fact of an Athenomania, as Thirlwall 
 calls it (iii. p. 161, n.), on the part of Sitalces and his son Sadocus, the new- 
 
230 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book II. 
 
 made citizen, v. Ackam. 141, sq. Tliis seizure, tlierefore, of Aristeus and 
 his companions was, as Grote observes, ' a testimony f^ zeal in his new cha- 
 racter of Athenian citizen ;' and this interpretation is fully borne out by Aris- 
 tophanes' words, Kal rbv irarep TJvri^oXet ftorjdetv r(j irdrpij, Ach. 147. It has 
 been made a question whether rd fxipos means * so far as in them lay/ or 
 whether it refers to ir6\iv, and implies a partial participation by Sadocns in 
 Athenian citizenship. Popp. setms to prefer the latter, and tr. eavi urban, 
 quce ipsius pro rain parte easet. So too Goll. urbem qucv ipsius eu- parte sit. 
 Haack, Am. and Kriig. adopt the former view, and cei*tainly the ordinary 
 usage of fiipoi appears to be in their favour. Am. f. g. quotes i. 74 and 127. 
 We may add Soph. CEd. Tyr. tolvtuv ipifjfxovi, irXrjv 6<rov t6 ffbv fi^pos, v. 1509; 
 (Ed. Col. ovK Slv fjv, t6 crov pi^pos, v. 1368, and similiter Avtig. v, 1049. 
 Nor is the idiom confined to poetry. Plato has, ol xorSes rb abv n^pos, 6 ri 
 Slv Ti'XW(rt, tovto rrpd^ovai. Criton, § 45. It certainly does not seem that the 
 other interpretation is so well supported by usage ; or indeed by the sense, for 
 why qualify his citizenship at a moment when he was most strenuously 
 asserting it ? 
 
 (c.) ircpaiwflreiv — sc. ^ai'rous used here intransitively, = irfpadtCfcr^at. L. and 
 S. Thomas M. remarks it as a peculiarity of Thucydides. K. from Duker. Cf. 
 'trajicere.' |vXXap.pdvci, at Bisanthe. on the Hellespont. Herod, vii. 137. 
 
 ((/.) 4><ipaYY<^S. P. says that the use of the plural shows that the specific 
 ^dpadpov (VVachsra. Ant. ii. i. p. 254) is not inten«led. Cf. Arist. Nub. I450; 
 Plat. Govg. 516 E. ; Sch. Arist. PL 431 ; Thuc. i. 134; Paus. Mess. iv. xviii. 
 3. The fidpadpov at Sparta was called KatdSas or *fe<£5o$. v. Paus. I. c. for 
 the story of Aristomenes. Cf. Buttm. Lea:, s. v. Krjruifffaa. Harpocration 
 8. V. pdpadpov, and 6pvyp.a. Arist. Plat. 431 ; Fischer's note. Hence the 
 Athenian executioner was called 6 iiri t(^ dpi'yfj.ari. tois ailrois 
 
 d|iLvvc<r6ai — * as a reprisal for the ciiptured seamen slain by the Lacedaemo- 
 nians.' Grote, vi. p. 245. Cf. ad i. 42 (a.) Soph. Ant. 6.\^: — 
 
 «s Kal Tov ix^pbv dvTap.vuwvTat, KaKoh. 
 
 In lib. i. 30, and iii. 32, we find similar instances of the killing prisoners of 
 war. irdvTas 8^ — all without exception. Cf. i. i, b. 
 
 (e.) Tovs (iTj84 |A€0* €T^pwv, lit. thosc neither with one nor the other; * the 
 neutrals,' c. Ixii. i, Ixii. 2 ; VI. xliv. d. Grote (vi. 243) says, * these persons 
 were probably slain as the best way of getting rid of them and thus suppresbivg 
 evidence — since to dismiss them, or se!l them as slaves, would have given pub- 
 licity to a piratical capture, and provoked the neutral towns.* 
 
 Chapter LXVIII. — (a.) 'A|xirpaKtwTai. Ambracia was an important city 
 on the north of the Ambraciot gulf, or lagoon, which took its name from the 
 city. Its legendary founder was Ainbrax, whom the tradition represented as 
 son of Thesprotus ; but it was made a Greek city by a colony of Corinthians 
 who settled here in the time of Cypselus ; c. B.C. 635 : Gorgus, a son or brother of 
 Cypselus being the ktktttjs. It soon became a flourishing city, and the chief 
 of the Corinthian colonies in these parts, furu'shing seven ships in the war 
 against Xerxes [Hero<l. viii. 45], and twenty-seven to Corinth in their war with 
 Corcyi-a, B.C. 432. Thuc. i. 46. Its territory, watered by the Aracthus, on 
 
 Chap. 68.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 23] 
 
 the east bank of which the city stood, extended along the coast for 120 stadia. 
 The valley of the Aracthus was extremely fertile, producing excellent corn 
 in abundance. As a Corinthian colony, it sided of course with the Lacedaemo- 
 nians. It became in after times the capital of Pyrrhus, king of £i)iru8. v. 
 Smith, Geog. Diet. s. v. It is now called Arta. PapPdpwv. The 
 
 earliest inhabitants of this province, according to Hecataeus of Miletus, and 
 Aristotle (as quoted by Strabo, vii. p. 321), were the barbarous Leleges, 
 Curetes, and Teleboaj, who occupied several other parts of Greece before the 
 Pelasgi. dva(rTrj(ravTis — * quum excivissent, ad expeditionera 
 
 evocassent.' Cf. iii. 7, iv. 77, 80. P. * aufljieten zum feldzuge.' K. The 
 * solicitare' of Caes. ^. G. pass. "ApYos to *Aji<|)wXox>'k6v. Tlie 
 
 accounts differ as to the founder of this city, Thucyd. representing it to have 
 been founded by Amphiiochus, son of Amphiaraus, on his return from Troy, in 
 consequence of the discontent he felt at the state of affairs in Argos, owing, 
 says the Scholijvst (ad c. cii.), to the murder of his mother Eriphyle, by Alc- 
 mteon, son of Amphiaraus. By others Amphiiochus is called the son of 
 Alcniaeon, and therefore grandson of Amphiaraus. Ephorus, quoted by 
 Strabo (vii. p. 326 ; cf. ApoUod. iii. 7 ; Scymn. Ch. 454), says it was founded 
 by Alcmaeon, who called it after the name of his brother, whom the legend, 
 quoted by Thucyd. ii. 102, represented as having colonized the Echinades, islands 
 at the mouth of the Achelous. (v. Cramer, ii. p. 10.) The city lay on the 
 river Inachus, now Ariadha, which tradition represented to be identical with 
 the river of the same name, near Argos, in Peloponnese. [See the fragment of 
 the Inachus of Sophocles, quoted in tue Oxford Strabo, vol. i. p. 39'.] It 
 was twenty-two miles from Ambracia (Li vy, xxxviii. 10, or 180 stadia; Polyb. 
 xxii. 1 3). The ruins of an ancient city, the walls of which were about a mile in 
 circumference, are still visible at the modern village of Neokhori. v. Leake's 
 N. Greece, quoted in Smith's Diet. Geog. s. v., and Thuc. iii. 105. The expedi- 
 tion of Phormio here alluded to, probably took place B.C. 452. * Phormio 
 was sent to Chalcidice about October or November of that year (i. 64), 
 and the expedition against Argos probably occurred between that event and 
 the naviil conflict of Corcyraeans and Athenians against the Corinthians, with 
 their allies, Ambraciots included, which conflict had happened in the preceding 
 spring.' Grote, vi. p. 162. Karao-Tao-ci — the existing state of 
 
 things— the constitution. i^p^aTO irpwrov. Cf. xxxvi. (a.) dp^o/xai 
 
 5i wp^rov iv. 87. dp^al TpCoToi, Xeii. Cyr. i. 5. 6. 
 
 (6.) OVK dpco-K^iJicvos- Cf. ad i. 35, a. * dissatisfied,' followed by the dative, 
 and lib. viii. 84, d. 
 
 (c.) ^X\T]vi<r8Tf]<rav. Lobeck's correction for iWrjuiadrjaav without the 
 augment, p. 380. The language they used before was a more Pelasi^ic 
 dialect : the original dialect as spoken in Argos and Southern Greece after the 
 Trojan war (rd TpojtKd ; so rd MrySi/cct, cf. i. 3). But see the note on i. 3 (d.) 
 yXuiva'av. The accusative * of equivalent notion.' Jelf, § 548, c. 579. 1. 
 
 {d.) irpoo-KaMo-avTcs hk' dvauTairodoTov. P. /cat K. says couples 5i56a<nv 
 and aipouffL. But cf iii. 55, vi. 64. d<j)iKoiJi^vou 8i. Then 1 say upon the 
 
 arrival of Phorniion, he in apodosi. |L€Td 8i tovto, and it was in> 
 
 consequence of this. 
 
 (e.) Jlx^pav i%. Cf. Herod, v. 81. i} ixOprj is'AdrjvcLvs. Cf. vi. 65. 
 
 
232 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book II. 
 
 I Chap. 71.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 ^33 
 
 Chapter LXIX. — bpykU\k€vo^—' taking up his station — making his head 
 quarters.' Cf. ad i, 64 b ; Diod. xii. 47. ^kitXiiv. c. xciii. d. 
 
 Kpitrafov KtJXirov. Properly the inner sea from the promontories of Rhium 
 and Antirrhiuin to the Isthmus of Corinth, but see chap. Ixxxvi. 
 doYupoXcywori. Cf. iii. 19; iv. 50, * to collect the tribute, or raise money.* 
 These ships were called i^aus dpyvpuXoyoi. So baa/jLoXoye'tv, Isocr. iv. 132. 
 TO XT](rTiKdv. Grote vi. p. 243. 'Though the Peloponnesians were too in- 
 ferior in maritime force to undertake formal war at sea against Athens, their 
 single privateers, especially the Megarian privateers from the harbour of Nisiea, 
 were active in injuring her commerce.' Cf. Thuc. v. 115 ; Xen. JJell. v. i. 29. 
 4>a<rTJXi8os. A maritime town of Lycia, on the Pamphylian Gulf. (Strabo 
 xiv. p. 667.) It was a Dorian colony (Herod, ii. 178), situated on a headland, 
 and conspicuous to those sailing from Cilicia to Rhodes. It possessed three 
 harbours, and was an independent state. [Cf. Thuc. viii. 88. 9 : Polyb. xxx. 
 9 ] Becoming in later times a haunt of pirates, it was attacked and taken by 
 8ervilius Isauricus. Cf. Liv. xxxvii. 23. The light sailing vessels called 
 * phaseli' were said to have been invented here ; hence the coins of the town 
 bear an image of such a boat. It is now called Tekrova. v. Smith's Geog. 
 ^cf- 8-v. TTjs ^K€i0€v T|irc(pov— j.tf. -^gypt, especially. Cf. viii. 
 
 35, P. 
 
 Chapter LXX. — (a.) ov8^v p.dXXov airavCtrraa-av—' failed in their object 
 of making (he Athenians raise the siege.' Herod, vi. 133; ix. 86. The death 
 of Ai isteas also deprived them of their last hope. avroBi — (opposed 
 
 to the former part of the sentence, which refers to wliat was done in Pelojjon- 
 nese), ' in Potidaea.' <j8t] implies as usual that 'matters had come 
 
 to such a pitch.' Ppwo-€u>s irtpi avayKaias — ' ic it h regard to the 
 
 distress for food,' i.e. what their extremity had forced them to eat ; 'in Bezug 
 auf Dinge welche die Noth zu genicssen zwang,' K. cf. i. 61, b. 84, c. Bl. ex- 
 plains it * the supply of necessary food ;' but then fipw/uLara would be used, not 
 ppuiais. Compare dvayKo^ayla, * the compulsory diet of the Athletes,' Arist. 
 Pol. viii. 4. 9, and the comic word dvayKdairos, ' the Parasite who eats anything 
 he can get.' Cf. too dvayKaioTdrov v\povs, i. 90, and see note there. 
 dXXT|X(uv — i.e. the dead bodies of their comrades (reciprocals and reflexives are 
 constantly interchanged). Cf. Herod, iii. 25, d\\ir]\o<payiy]. [Arist. //. id . viii. 
 3. 17.] Bl., forgetting the siege of Samaria, says that this is the first instance 
 on record of the eating of human flesh, viz,, the expedition of Cambyses into 
 a^thiopia, 4"y6vovTO. v. Jelf, § 537, followed by the partitive genitive. 
 ovT4>8^. Cf. i. 131. X^-yovs 7rpoo-<^^pov<ri. Cf. iii. 109. irpofftp^pei 
 
 Xoyou Tre pi airovdwy Kal dvax<^pw^^^ ^7]p.oa6iv€i, i. 57. 
 
 (/>.) \i\.^ip\yiif—' bleak, cold, inclemtnt.' Cf. Grote's note, vi. p. 257. The 
 sufterings of the Athenians may be understood from the preparations made by 
 the Lacedaemonians for their blockade of Plataja, c. 78. 8i<rx£Xia 
 
 TuXavra. Isocr. wepi 'AvrtS. xv. 113, says the siege cost 2400 talents. 
 Diolorus says (xii. 46) that before the departure of Agnon (v. s. Iviii.) more 
 than 1000 talants had been expended. Thucyd., iii. 17, says each hoplite 
 received two drachmae a day; one for himself and one for his servant. The 
 
 assailant force had never been less than 3000 hoplites during the entire two 
 years of the siege ; and for a portion of the time considerably greater. 
 ^S iroXiopKCav. The absence of the article makes it equivalent to xPV/^o-to, 
 iroXiopKTjTiKd, without specifying the locality, P. |vv €vl iparup. 
 
 Cuui singulis vestimentis. (Liv. iv. 10, of the siege of Ardea.) For similar 
 instances see Pans. ix. 1.9; App. i. 400 ; Polyaen. vii. 48. As the women 
 always wore two garments (Herod, ii. 36), it was equivalent to allowing them 
 one suit apiece, B. 
 
 {c.) ^irgTidcravTo. ' Were displeased at the indulgence shown, since a little 
 additional patience would have constrained the city to surrender at discretion 
 (17 ijSovXouTo) : in which case the expense would have been partly made good by 
 selling the prisoners as slaves, and Athenian vengeance probably gratified by 
 putting the warriors to death.' We find, however, that Xenophon was ap- 
 pointed to command in Chalcidice the next year, iii. 17. v. Grote, vi. p. 247. 
 ^irotKOVS. Diod. xii. 46, eh x^Xtoi^s oiK-qropa^ i^lTr€p.\pav nai tt]v re ttoKlv Kal 
 Tqv x'^po." KaTeK\yipovxy)(rav. It was to convey these settlers tiiat the expe- 
 dition related c. 79 was fitted out. to 8€VT€pov ^tos. In these 
 phrases Thuc. generally omits the article. 
 
 Chapter LXXI.— (a.) ovk €<r€paXov. For fear of the plague, and from 
 the strong desire of the Thebans to be revenged on Plata^a. KaOCoras. 
 
 Cf. vi. 66, and iv. 93, vii. 82 ; Eur. Jhracl. 664. It is also used transitively 
 
 in Homer, Plato, and Aristophanes. The penultima is common. Cf. ixpi^a, 
 Buttm. Cat., s. V. 
 
 (6 ) ' ApxiSafic. See Grote, vi. p. 248, for an excellent translation of the 
 speeches in this and the following chap. €X6u9€pii><ras diro. v. 
 
 Jelf, §531. obs. 3. ^vvdpaorOai tov k£v8vvov. This verb is 
 
 generally construed with the genitive. Cf. iv. 10, v. 28 ; Eurip. Orest. 757 ; 
 ^-Esch. Pr. V. 652. ('X€v6cpiu>. Diod. xi. 29, mentions an dyujv 
 
 iXevdipios to be instituted at Plataa. (Cf. Paus. ix. 2. 5.) These solemnities 
 were to be celebrated every Jifih year, the victors being rewarded with chaplets. 
 [dyw*' yvfiviKdi ^T€<pavLTT]s, Strab. ix. p. 266.J Delegates [Trp6^ov7\oi Kai 
 Oeupoi] were to assemble from all the Greek States at Plataea every year to cele- 
 brate the Eleutheria. Cf. Thirlwall, ii. p. 253, &c. ; Paus. ix. 2. 4. This 
 annual solemnity continued to be observed till the time of Plutarch (r. Arist. 
 xxi. ; cf. Thucyd. iii. 58), and the image of Zeus Eleutberius was still standing 
 in the time of Pausanias. Cf Harpocration, p. 145. dx€8t8ov. 
 
 Inasmuch as the city had been held by the Persians, and the land around in 
 the occupation of the confederate army. Note the imperfect — he was for 
 granting, he proposed to grant — as contrasted with ibocav, ediKaiuaeu. 
 KTTpaTCvorai supply frai^e, or some similar verb, P. Plut. Arist. xxi. ; 
 llXaracis d7vXov% Kal iepovs d^eiffdat T(p 0e<p. cirl 8ovXc£qi. Sed 
 
 tantum ^irl dfivvg Kal ripiupiq., P. el h\ (irj. Cf. n. ad c. v. 
 
 (c.) dpcTTJs Kal irpoOup.Cas. Cf. Herod, viii. i, ijvb di dpeTrjs re Kal irpo- 
 dufxiss HXarai^es direipoi riji vuvtlk^s ijvres ffvveirXrjpovv toI<tl ' AdrjpaioicrL rds 
 v^aj. Tovs opKbvs. Diod. xi. 29, gives the fonnula of the oath 
 
 taken by the confederate troops at the Isthmus before marching northwards 
 
234 
 
 NOTES OX THUCYDIDKS. 
 
 [Book II. 
 
 Cf. Lvcurjr. c. Leocrat. p. 149; Plut. Milt. Cf. ad i. 71. (d.) 
 
 iy\*tip(.ov^—i. e. Juno reXela. Minerva 'Apela, P., from Paus. ix. 2. 5 ; iv. 
 
 I [so Dii Patrii Jndigetes.] Soph. Arit. 185. Bothe. 
 
 Chapter LXXII. — (a.) viiroXaPwv — 'having cut them short in their speeehf 
 when they wished to add much more,' Ducaa. Gottl. quotes many passagts. 
 
 (6.) jiT^Si fic0' €T€'pu)V. Cf. Ixxii. e. Grote considers that the Lacedamo- 
 nians had previously sent a summons to the I latieans to remain neutral. (Cf. 
 lib. iii. 68.) Vol. vi. p. 250. Tbirpdrepov, hut when this took p'ace, Thucydides 
 has not informed us. ^irl iroX^iKu. As iirl dovXeiqi in c. Ixxi. 
 
 rdSe Tjfjiiv dp^crK€i — ' with this we will be satiafied.' So Steph. and Huds. and 
 Duk., but GoUer P. and K. prefer apK^aci. 
 
 (c.) a-^Ccriv ovk ^iriTpc'irwo-tv — 'would not permit them to carry out their 
 neutrality,' IvopKoi 6vt€S k. t.X. fvopKOL = hatrovhoi^ P. The 
 
 expression is rather involved. ivopKoi ought to agree with ol 0r/3atot, whereas 
 it is the Platieans who, by an oath of neutrality, would be bound to admit the 
 Thebans who might then make a fresh attempt to seize on their city. 
 ap(.B\na~-ljy talt. , Sus &v 6 irdXc^ios ^. Cf. -^Esch. Ag. i435> ^w5 
 
 d^ aid-g irvp iw' ^(xxapas ifjirjs AiyiffOos. ?ws is used with the conjunctive when 
 a present action is conceived as possibly continuing during another action, over 
 an indefinite space of time. In this construction it always takes &v. * As 
 long as the war Umts, hoicever long that may be,' J elf, § 847. 3. 
 
 (d.) irapaKaTa6V)KT]v. 'In the interim we will hold it in trust, keep it in 
 cultivation, and pay you such an allowance as shall suffice for your wants,' 
 Grote. Even Mr. Grote admits that the offer of the Spartans was (air and 
 tempting ; and the Athenians, had they been perfectly generous allies, might 
 well have granted their consent to the Plateeans' accepting it, for tiie forces of 
 Platiea counted for little as a portion of the aggregate strength of Athens, 
 nor could the Athenians possibly ])rotect it against the superior land 
 force of their eneujies. In fact, they nerer even tried throughout the whole 
 course of the long subsequent blockade, Grote, vi. p. 251. 
 
 Chaptek LXXIII.— (&.) iv als cIkos f^v KO(ii<r0f,vai. Allowing them a 
 fair and reasonable time for going to Athens and returning. 
 
 (c.) ^v Tw -rrpoTOv. During ninety-three years, which the alliance had 
 la.sted. Cf. iii. 68. irpb? t«v opKwv — ' They adjure you, by (he 
 
 oaths which your fathers swore.* ^irio-K-^irTovcri. Cf. iii. 69. d. — 
 
 * obtestantur.' 
 
 Chapter LXXIV.— (a.) cl Set. ' // so it must be.' The present is used 
 because the Platwans well knew what mu.st be the immediate consequence of 
 their rejection of the offer of Archidamus, not the opt., which would imply 
 
 * if need should be.' t«v iyxupLtv. Cf. Ixxi. d. eirifiaprvpla, 
 obtestation, ' a solemn appeal to the Gods,' an unusual word. Cf. Dio. Cass. 
 914, 51, Bl. ^uvbo-ropc's «a'Tc. Either indicative or imperative. 
 
 * Ye are, or be ye my witnesses.' Cf. Soph. Philoct. 1292; Ant. 1^47 ; Eurip. 
 Supp. 1174. K. prefers the indie, sense. to ^vvwp.OTov — 'the 
 oath of confederacy' = 17 ^vpufioaia. P. • Beschworner bund.' K. 
 
 Chap. 75.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 ^35 
 
 cvp.cvf) ^va'YwvCoracrOai — * a favourable field to fight in.' Cf. Xen. Anab. iv. 
 6, 12 ; Herod, vi. 102. In the sense of * gluckbringend,' as K. translates it. 
 Cf. Eurip. Phatn. 938, cf. note on ivairodvf}<TK€Lv, iii. 104, b. 
 Iv'YYVwji.ovcs 8^ i<rT€. From the primary meaning of this word * fellow feeling,' 
 and hence ' pardon,' the transition is simple to * indulgence or favour.' It is 
 here equivalent to * favourably hear our prayers, and grant that . . . .' This 
 seems to be more in accordance with the usual meaning of the word than Mr. 
 Grote's translation, * be ctmsenting parties ;' or Dr. Arnold's explanation, 
 * assent to the aggressors being punished.' K. explains it by gewahrt, ' vouch- 
 safe.' The infinitive follows as the object of the verb, marking also more clearly 
 the notion of the efect. v. Jelf, § 664, 3. dSiKtas. Verbs of requital, 
 
 revenge, &c., take a genitive of that whence the desire of recjuital or revenge 
 arises. Jelf, § 500. For the attraction in the dative virdpxovat, in conse- 
 quence of the ^up in ^uyyvibpioves, where we should expect virdpxoi'Ta^, see 
 Jelf, § 674. irpoT€pois —the praedicate, who were the aggressors. K. 
 
 Tois i-iri^ipovcrx. vo\ii\i.(»%. ' Those who are aiming to inflict penalty righte- 
 ously.' Grote. * Qui ultionem petant, ut fas est.' P. 
 
 Chapter LXXV. — (a.) Tooravra €'irt0<i,d<ras. 'Having made this 
 solemn appeal to the Gods,' i. e. having concluded the einixapTvpia of the pre- 
 ceding chapter. Cf. viii. c. 53, b., where, in the case of the return of Alci- 
 biades, Thucydides speaks of the Eumolpidae and Ceryces as p.apTvpop.iv(av 
 Kai ltr\.diia(,6vTtiiV and vii. 75, in the disastrous retreat from Sicily; ovk &v€v 
 i-KLdeiacpiCiv d.TroXeLirdp.epot. Cf. Blomf. ^£sch. Cho. 843 ; Buttm. Lex. s. v. 
 6ad<T<T€ii' -iiTLded^eiv is the more usual form in this sense. KaQCcrrr] 
 
 4s ircJXejtov. Cf. adc. i., I. a. inpu<rravpua-iv—' invested the city 
 
 with a palisade.' Thirlw. iii. p. 145. The forming regular lines of circum- 
 vallation is expressed by TrepiTeixl^^ty' u. inf. c. 78. tois SevSpco-tv— 
 
 1. e. the fruit trees cut down in laying waste the land. (Cf. Grote, vi. p. 253.) 
 |vXa is the heavy timber obtained from the forests of Cithaeron. Cf. iv. 69, 
 for the same distinction. 8iv5pos it may be observed is the Ionic and poetic 
 form. ^Ko4/av N.B. change of subject from the general to his soldiers. K. 
 Xwjia i\ovv. Cf. Herod, i. 162, of Harpagus in Asia Minor, x^'f^°-'^°- X^^ 
 ■wpbs ra reixea. eirbpdee. Arrian, E. A. i. xviii. Cf. Jerem. vi. 6. 'Hew ye 
 down trees and cast a mount against Jerusalem.' So Joab 2. Sam. xx. 
 15, and Sennacherib, 2 Kings, xix. 32 ; for the construction, see Jelf, § 571. 
 T^|jLVOVT€S €K. Like the analogous phrases Kadi^ecv is, &c., * felling the wood 
 on the mountain, and fetching it thence.' 
 
 {b.) Tov KL0atpMvos. The summit of Cithaeron is still crowned with 
 forests of fir ; hence its modern name of Elatea. Eurip. Phcen. 809, 
 C) ^adl<av ir€Td\(t}u iro\v9rjp6raTou vdiros . . . KidaipJ.v. 
 ^op)kr\Bhv—' like basket or wattled work.' (Cf. iv. 48, of the bodies of the 
 Corcyrieans, where the lower tier was placed lengthways, and the others 
 piled across them.) Thirlwall says, ' It was i)iled up with earth and rubbish, 
 wood and stones, and was guarded on either side by a strong lattice-work 
 of forest timber, the growth of Cithaeron.' (iii. p. 145.) ' Oross palings 
 of wood were carried on each side of it, in parallel Unes at right angles 
 to the town wall, for the purpose of keeping the loose mass of materials be- 
 
236 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book II. 
 
 tween them together.' Grote, p. 253. [Cf. Herod, viii. 71, the description of 
 the wall at the Isthmus.] ' Kreuzweis.' K. iivvrtiv—likeli/ to 
 
 be effective. Infra, c. 76. a. Kar avatravXas * in relief parties.' Cf. iv. 
 
 i f, dvawavoirres. Tlie first meaning is 'rest.' v. Soph. Phil. 878 ; cf. Hen>d. i. 
 '81. ol ^€va70i = ^^i^wj' <7T/)aria/)xot. Xen. Hell. iv. 2, 19; v. i, 
 
 7 ; Be Rep. Lac. xiii. 4. The Lacedaemonians who commanded the contingents 
 of the allies, v. Thirlwall, u. s. The generals whom the allies sent with their 
 troops were subordinate to these Spartan ^evayoi ; though they attended the 
 council of war, as representatives of their respective countries, v. Smith, Diet. 
 Ant. a. V. ; and cf. Thuc. v. 54. Arnold compares the * Prsefecti Sociorum' 
 in the Roman annies ; twelve of whom were appointed by the consuls. Lobeck 
 remarks that the Doric dialect is retained in words of a military or musical 
 character; as, ovpayos, x'^P^l^^i \oxo.y6%' ad Phryn. p. 430. 
 
 (e.) IvXivov T€txos — * a superstructure of brick, secured in a framercorl of 
 timher, and shielded from fiery missiles by a curtain of raw hides and skins.' 
 Thirlwall, iii. p. 145. Grote supposes it to have been supported by brickwork 
 lehind, p. 254. |vv8c<rfjLOs. ' Bindemittel.' V. ' Emfassung.' K. 
 
 acted an a bindin//. Arriaii, £. A.\. 18. S^p^cis Kal Zi.^9ipas— 'hides and 
 
 drexsed .skins.' Cf. Caps. B. V. ii. 9. sq., the account of the siege of Marseilles, 
 where Ciesar describes a wall very similar in construction to the one mentioned 
 here. Cilicia\»W\e word used by Livy (xxxviii. 7) for these skins. Caesar uses 
 Coria or Centones, 1. c. Cf. Arrian, u.s. who couies this passage very closely. 
 
 {d.) 'irup4>5pots olo-Tois. The 'malleoli' of the Romans (v. Festus, p. 135, 
 ed. Mull. Nonius, p. 556). Cf. Liv. xlii. 64. • Faces taedamque et malleolos 
 stuppae inlitos pice parari jubet.' Caps. B. G. ii. 11. 'Cupas taeda et pice 
 refertas incendunt : eas de muro in musculum devolvunt.' 
 SicXovTcs Tov Tc^xo^S" Any verb whose operation extends only to part of the 
 objec 8 signified by the objective substantive, maybe followed by a partitive 
 genitive, so t^s 7^? (rcfiov. Thuc. i. 30; and again 6i(\<hy relxovs. v. 2. 
 ^vyKa\i(TavTas tCjv oirXtriZv. Xen. An. iv. i, 26. Jelf, § 533, 3. 
 t5 Trpoo-eVtirrc tj x<«»F^* -' where the n)oun<l abutted on the wall, they made an 
 aperture and conveyed away the earth, &c., inwards.' Cf. Liv. u. s. 
 
 Chapter LXXVI. — (a.) h rapo-ois KaXd^ov irriXcv ^vctXXovTcs— * rollivg 
 gf iff clay in wattled reeds,' Grote. rapaoi are crates or frames of basket- wtjrk. 
 Herodotus mentions the use of these rapcol xaMfiuv, in the building of the 
 wall of Babylon (i- 179. u. v. Bahr's note. Cf. Ar. Aub. 226.) 
 KaXdjiou. Sing, for plur. an Kcpap-ov, c. iv. Iv(CXXovtcs = inipri- 
 
 mentes, infercientes, P. Siaxcdjicvov. The neuter of the participle 
 
 is used, K. says, to comprise the notion of rapaol and irr}\6^, or it may refer to 
 X^ip-a. understood. tovto kiriayjiv. Cf. v. 46. 63 ; vii. 33, for 
 
 similar uses of the accusative instead of gen. after this verb. Jelf, § 642. 
 «• b. virovop.ov — *o mtii«,* Cuniculus. Cf. Liv. xxxviii. 7, 
 
 ' Cuniculum occultum, vineis ante contecto loco, agere instituit: etaliqu«mdiu 
 non solum sub terrA fodientes, sed egerentes etiam humum, fefellere hosteni,' 
 Caes. B. G. iii. 21, 'Cuniculis ad aggerem actis ;' vii. 22, 'Aggerem cuniculis 
 subtrahebant.' 5^VT€KfiT]pdp.€voi— * calculating both the distance 
 
 and direction, so as to bring the mine right under the enemy s mound.' The 
 
 CuAP. 76.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 ^vv, as K. says, implies ' the result of many calculations.' 
 X«Jta. K. refers rather to opu^avres than ^ui/TCK/JLrjpdfjLfuoi. 
 
 Humus aggesta, x^f^°- agger., P. 
 
 iirh rh 
 Xovs. 
 
 f <r<rov dvvTciv. Their labour 
 
 did not progress as they knew it ought to have done from the quantity of 
 material heaped on the mound. dvvTfiu is trans, to forward the work, ' fordern,' 
 K. as above, el rt &\\o dvureiv fiiWoi. llavovros—' constantly 
 
 settling down.' 
 
 (6.) TO Kara rh xdY-o.— ' directly in front of the mound, over against.' 
 Tov Ppax^os Tcixovs. From the low, i.e. the original wall. Cf. lib. vii. 29. 
 b. of the wall of Mycalessus, as r6 (i^ya relxo^ is the part they had added 
 to rb fi^ya oiKod6fn}fia. }jlt]vo€i8^s. * They built a new portion of 
 
 wall in the interior, in the shape of a crescent taking its start from the old 
 t .wn wall on each side of the mound,' Grote, vi. p. 255. Most of the English 
 commentators, and Dr. Thirlwall among them, infer that it follows that tlie 
 walls of Plataea were straight, but surely a semicircle could be described on the 
 arc of a circle. 
 
 {c.) iv dpt<|>tpoXw— * 6g exposed to a cross fre.' Cf. iv. 32. 
 pdXXov. ' More than when only one wall existed,' K. Kara to 
 
 XWfta — 'along the mound,' i. e. up the inclined plane. cirl u^va— 
 
 ' greatly, violently. ' It is perhaps better to translate it thus simply, with Grote, 
 than couple it wi*.h roO p.€y. oik. as Dr. Arnold does, who translates 'as mucli 
 as a great part of the raised wall.' The instances which he quotes from ii. 97, 
 and iv. icx>, are not exactly parallel. We might add eiri /xe^d dwdfieus, i. 48. 
 b. ToO jxey. oIk. had better be simply taken as the genitive of direction. 
 dv^KXwv. Bdtant explains ' sursum attollendo convellere,' and L. and S. 'to 
 break short off.' K. thinks it cannot imply more than breaking their force. 
 Cf. vii. 25. d. ; App. Mith. 74 ; Dio. Cass. 66. 4. .So Gdll. 'avertebant non 
 frangebant.' 8okous fic-ydXas dpTT|<ravT€s k.t.X. ' They prepared 
 
 heavy wooden beams on the wall, each attached at both ends by long iron 
 chains to two poles projecting at right angles from the wall, by means of which 
 poles it was raised up and held aloft,' Grote, p. 255. rou.ix is pro- 
 
 perly 'the end left after cutting ;' hence ' the stump of the tree,' as Hom. 11. 
 J- ■2.^5> ^ttccSt; ir/>wra to/latjj' iv dpeaffi XiXoivev, 'the place from which a lock of 
 hair has been cut,' as ^sch. Ch. 230, ' the square cut ends of stones,' Thuc. 
 i. 93, therefore here 'the ends of the beam.' Cf. Sch. Kcpaiat 
 
 are yard arms, ' cornua antennarum,' Virg. ^n. Vu. 549, ^sch. Finn. 5C6, 
 or ' the projecting beams of a crane.' Here ' spars or poles resting on the wall, 
 and inclined at an angle to it,' L. and S. ' Sie hingen an zwei uber die Mauer 
 gelegte, und Uber die Mauer hinausragende Balken,' K. Cf. Liv. xxiv. 34. 
 
 Tollenoyes super murum eminentes. c'yKdpo-ios transvcrsus. 
 
 They raised them by means of these chains in a direction oblique to the line of 
 wall. Veget. de R. M. iv. 23, ' Laqueis captos arietes in obliquum trahunt.' 
 Liv. xxxvi. 23, 'Laqueis exceptos declinabant ictus.' Caes. B. C. vii. 22, 
 ' Laqueis falces avertebant, quas cum destinaverant, tormentis introrsus re- 
 ducebant.' ov 8id x<ipos ^\0VTts~' letting them go with a run," 
 
 as our sailors say. diroKavXitciv— * to break off by the stalk or stem,' 
 
 as the head of a plant or flower. Eurip. Supp. 717. Appian imitates the 
 passage, i. 751. B. 
 
238 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book II. 
 
 Chapter LXXVII.— (a.) t2> avTiTeixttrKo- 'And the counterwork rose 
 
 ftf^ainst them,' i.e. 'the crescent wall,' P. and K. dirb t«v irapc'vrwv 
 
 8€ivwv. ' With their present means of offence,* Dale ; * prseaentibus terroribus,' 
 
 Port.; Terriculamentis, T. K. A.; ' Schreckzwangsmittel,' P ; uvder their 
 
 present circumstances of difficvlty is Valla's interpretation, approved by Krug., 
 
 who would however much prefer to strike out btivdv altogether, or substitute 
 
 another word for it. trpbs t^v -trtpirii\\.<r\,v ir. t. Prepared to 
 
 turn the siege into a blockade. oC<rav ov jii'yaXi^v. Some of the 
 
 commentators propose to strike out the negative, as the present state of the 
 
 ruins seems to contradict the statement of Thucydides. But though the circuit 
 
 of the walls may be traced near the small village of Kokhla, to the extent of 
 
 about two miles and a half in circumference, these are probably the remains 
 
 of the city as restored by Philip after the battle of Chaeroneia, B.C. 338 ; the 
 
 ancient city being probably confined to the southern extremity, where Col. 
 
 Leake discovered the more ancient masonry, N. G. ii. p. 325. 
 
 8airdvTjs. We find above that the Idockade of Potidaa had cost Athens 2000 
 
 talents. Hudson considers this an instance of Hendiadys, 'an expensive 
 
 blockade.' <|)aKc'Xovs. The commentators seem to be nearly equally 
 
 divided as to whether this word should be spelt with one X or two. P. Wassa 
 
 incline to the latter. Casaubon, Hesychius, Ammonius, Ducker, Oudendorp, 
 
 and Gottleber, to the former. In Herod, iv. 62. 67, the best MSS. have one 
 
 X, which the metre requires in Eur. Cycl. 242. They first laid these faggots 
 
 side by side (v. P. ad loc.) letting them down from the mound into the space 
 
 that intervened between it and the semicircular wall. Am. explains Trapo/SdXXw 
 
 to throw beside ; hence to throw up, to heap up ; but is not the notion of placing 
 
 objects heside each other, quite contrary to that of placing thera upon one 
 
 another? May it not mean * they placed the faggots side by side along the 
 
 extent of the wall?* \TTpiax'^<^^'i is here equal to wpoax^l^o- > >" c- J0^> it is 
 
 used for the alluvial deposit of the Achelous. Cf. .rEsch. P. V. 849:] and 
 
 then threw them as far as they could reach into other parts of the city beyond. 
 
 *So viel sie irgend auch von der ubrigen Stadt (d. h. Stadtmauer) bereichen 
 
 konnten,' K., which seems the simplest and best interpretation. 
 
 lir4x««'V- Cf. i. 48, and iii. 107. vXtj Tpi<))0ei<ra— 6y attrition. 
 
 Cf. Suid. v. Spvfibs. Lucret. i. 896. 
 
 *Atssepe in magnis fit montibus, inquis ut altis 
 Arboribus vicina cacuniina summa terantur 
 Inter se, validis facere id cogentibus Austris, 
 Donee fulserunt flammae fulgore coorto.' 
 
 air* avrov — therefrom, sc. Arb rod Tpi<p6^uai, l\a\Crrov cS^o-c. 
 
 Tovro is the subject. For this use of the privative genitive, see Jelf, § 529. i. 
 So Xen. Anab. i. 5. 15, avroi) dXiyov SerjaavTos KaTaXtvad^vai. 
 4ir£4>opov. Cf. iii. 74, et' Avf/J-Oi ^ireyivero t^ <f>\<yyl ^iritpopos. 
 \J8«p ii ovpavov. Thucyd., as Grote observes, evidently discredits this story 
 of the opportune thunderstorm. (Cf. the story of Cropsus, Herod, i. 87.) 
 Xen. uses the same jdirase for rain, Anab. iv. 1. 7. So Hor. iii. Od. x. 30, 
 * aqua coelestis.' 
 
 Chap. 79.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 239 
 
 Chapter LXXVIII. — ircpuTiCx^tov. * There now remained no other 
 resource but to build a wall of circunivallation round Plataea, and trust to the 
 slow process of famine,' Grote, p. 256. ircpl * ApKTovpov ciriToXds. 
 
 It is not often, Grote remarks, that Thucydides gives us any fixed marks to 
 discriminate the various periods of the year. The time mentioned here is the 
 Heliacal rising of Arcturus ; i. e. the period when Arcturus rises immediately 
 before sunrise (after the forty days during which it had been invisible, as rising 
 after the sun), sometime between the 12th and F7th of September, accordino- 
 to Grote and Giiller, or the 18th according to Ideler, i. 247. Cf. Grote u. s. 
 Giill. ad loc. ; Virg. Georg. i. 68. 204, with Forbiger's note ; Columell. xi. 2. 
 63; Plin. //. JV. ii. 47 ; xviii. 31. 74; Fh.\it. prol. Rud. 71. Hippocrates 
 also employs the appearances of certain stars to indicate time in medical cases, 
 probably, as Grote says, because the Greek months, being lunar, varied in 
 different cities from the necessity of intercalation, and therefore afforded no 
 one standard of time. Hudson cf. Scaliger ad Maniliwni. ^irt- 
 
 ToXaC. Cf. Lobeck, Phryn. p. 124. sq. rh dxpctov. Cf. ad c. 
 
 vi., dxpftoTctrous. o-iToirotoC. [Cf. vi. 22. 44.] Not that their 
 
 duties were confined exclusively to the preparation of food. They no doubt 
 acted as nurses, dressed the wounds, and tended the sick, and performed many 
 offices for the rest, such as carrying provisions, arms, &c., to the ramparts. 
 T. K. A. compares Eurip. Ilec. 366; T/oarf. 494 ; Herod, vii. 187. The 
 usual proportion was one woman to four men, but at the siege of Babylon 
 (Herod, iii. 150), we find a woman allowed to eacti man. In the Sicilian ex- 
 pedition the aLToiroioi we may observe are males. At Rome the preparation of 
 food was confined to females. Even down to the year u c. 580, there were no 
 bakers at Rome, * Ipsi panem faciebant Quirite.s, mulierumque id opus erat,' 
 Plin. //. .V. xviii. 11. Cf. Plant. Merc. ii. 3. 62 ; Terent. Adclph. v. 3. 60; 
 Feith, Ant. Horn. iv. 3. KaTco-Kcvao-BT] — * such were the permanent 
 
 arrangements made for the siege' — not simply ' jn-ejiarations' [see note ad i. 10. 
 on the difference between /farao-KCuiJ and TrapaaKcvr}, Thuc. viii. 5 (a.)]; but 
 *HUch means as would be taken by men anticipating a tedious 8ind jirotracted 
 blockade.' These Thuc. describes lib. iii. 21, * They consisted of two walls, 
 with sixteen feet of intemiediate space all covered in, so as to look like one 
 very thick wall ; there were moreover two ditches out of which the bricks for 
 the walls had Vjeen taken, one on the inside towards Plataea, and the other on 
 the outside, against any relieving force. The interior covered space served as 
 permanent quarters for the troops left on guard,' Grote, p. 257. 
 
 Chapter LXXIX. — (o.) tq Toiv nXaraUuv k'tri<rrparii(^. Tlie objective 
 or causative genitive. So ^t'Ty^tcr/ia Meyap^wv. The decree against the 
 Megarians, Jelf, § 464 ; Matth., § 367. See i. 103, c. 108, c. 
 4<rTpdT€v<rav. The object of this expedition was partly to convoy the Athenian 
 Cleruchi, who were going to settle in the land ceded by Potidaea. 
 dK|idl^ovTos Tov o-Crov. Cf. c. xix. a. S6vo<|)wv. Cf. ad. ch. 70. 
 
 rplros ai>ros, Thirl wall, iii., p. 159, n. The two others were Calliades and 
 Phanomachus. Plut. Nic, p. 348; Diod. xii. 47. 
 
 (6.) S-rrdpTwXov, a Chalcidic fortress, north of Olynthus, in the direction 
 of Potidaea. It is mentioned (v. 18) as one of the cities which was to be 
 
240 
 
 NOTES ON TIIUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book II. 
 
 neutral, under the conditions of the truce. [Cramer, vol. i., p. 253.] 
 Bottiaea was the name anciently given to a narrow space of country lyincf 
 between the rivers Haiiacmon and Lydias. From this district, however, the 
 Bottiajans were early expelled by the Macedonian princes (Thuc. ii. 99), and 
 retiring across the Axius about Tlierme an<l Olynthus, formed a new settlement 
 with the Chalcidians, another people of Tliracian origin. Herod, vii. 127; 
 viii. 12'j; Thuc. i. 77; Polyb. v. 97; Liv. xxvi. 25. Cf Cramer v. i, p. -220. 
 irpo<rx«pT|0"€iv virh. Cf. Jelf, 359, 3 — would come over through the cooperation 
 of a part II inside the citij. i% ^i^\t\v Ka0C<rTavTai. Cf. ad i. i. a. 
 
 So h 4>b^ov, is (pvyifiu KaraaTTJuai, and supra c. 65, c. 
 
 {c. ) ircXracrrds. ' These peltasts, a species of troops between heavy armed 
 and light armed, furnished with a pelta or light shield, and short spear or 
 javelin, a])pear to have taken their rise among these Chalcidic Greeks : being 
 equipped in a manner half Greek and half Thracian : we shall find them here- 
 after much improved and turned to account by some of the ablest Greek 
 generals.' Grote vi., p. 258. Cf. Xen. Anub.y v. 1. 17 where the \l/i\ol and 
 TcXracTTal are distinguished. Kpov<ri8os. Tlie line of coast betwet n 
 
 Tliessalonica and Olynthus seems to have borne this name. Herodotus vii. 123, 
 calls it Crossjea, Kpoffffairj, and enumerates the cities it contained, one of which 
 was Gigonus, mentioned by Thucydides, i. 61, c. ; Ste|ih. Byz. calls it Kpovats, 
 and Dionys. Halicarn. calls the inhabitants Crussei ; Kpouaatot, i. 49 ; v. 
 Cramer, i., p. 242 ; Smith Dirt., s. v. Grote, iv. p. 32. 
 
 (d.) 0apcrT|o-avTcs Tois irpoo-yi'YVoji^vois. ^Encouraged hy this addition to 
 their numbers.' N, B., the pres. |);irt. which implit-s as they kept coming up — 
 the new comers. dvax*»pov<ri. ol 'AdT]vaioi. Schol. 
 
 Td^«iS- Cf. iii. 87, c. iv. 4. Xen. Ayiab. iv. 16, iv. 4. 8. ■fj 80K01. 
 
 So c. 100. e. 6'7n7 SoKot. iii. 16. a. 
 
 (e.) irpi^av tovs 'A0T]vaiovs. Cf. Plut. Nic, p. 348. g. 
 
 (f.) Tpoiraiov 'i(m\a-av. The more usual form would be iffT-fjaavro. The 
 active is said to be used oi generals who erect a trophy ; the middle of an army. 
 But probably when the cases are examined they will be found to depend on the 
 distinctive uses of the active and middle voices ; the first being used where the 
 action comes directly from the agent, the second where some intermediate 
 agency, or ulterior object in reference to the subject, is implied. So the lawgiver 
 is said deivai v6/xov ; the people who vote it are said Oiffdai. Cf. c. 86. c. 
 
 Chapter LXXX. — (a.) rdv dirb GaXdoron^s = twi/ irapd ttjv ddXaaffav 
 oIkovvtoiv. JEm. Port. G. p<j8t«s &v <rx<JvT€$. Here a i* gives a 
 
 contingent force to the participle. Peile well compares forte as used by Livy. 
 * Ne penes ipsos culpa esset cladis /or/^ bello Gallico accepto.' v. 36. On &v 
 with a participle see Jelf, § 429, i. 90, ii. 39. a. Donaldson New Crat., p. 325. 
 K€<|>aXXT]v{as. Cf. c. 30. The Edd. seem divided as to whether this word 
 should be spelt with one X or tuo. Cf. Ducker, n. ad i. 27. In Homer, 
 Strabo, Polybius, Xenoplion, and Pausanias, it is generally doubled. 
 6|xoi.os- So c. Ixxxi. ovK Siv (ti ff^lffi Tovs " EWrjvas ofjLolus irpoaeXdeiv. 
 cXiriSa 8' civai. A similar collocation of moods occurs, sup. 13 — irporjySpeve 
 — 6ti — etr] — ov fxivroi yevotro — dtpirjaiv — ylyvtadai. Cf. Dem. de falsd Leg., 
 §213, where Mr. Shilleto observes; — * In oratione obUqull perinde est wj 
 
 Chap. 80.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 241 
 
 [s. irt] cum optai. cum indicat. cui omiss^ particula infinit. sequatur, Cf. 
 Thuc. viii. 51.' 
 
 (6.) vavapxov tr\, ^vra. Cf. n. ad c. Ixvi. So c. lix. (tl S'ia-TpaT-qyei. 
 See Arnold's note, and Xen. If ell., i. 6, 4, where we find the Spartans com- 
 plaining that as soon as their admirals had begun to learn a little of their profes- 
 sion {Apr I ^vviivT(j}v rd vavTiKo.) they were removed from office. I have more 
 particularly referred to this passage, as Professor Cobet of Leyden, one of the 
 most brilliant of living scholars, in some remarks with which he has favoured 
 me, expresses an opinion that it is unintelligible, and ought to be amended. 
 But surely the present participles ^vvUptup and yiyvuc k6vt(i}v point to the 
 meaning which I have suggested. ircpiT)yY€uXav. Cf. 85 b. iv. 8. 
 
 A€VKd8a. Leucas, now the island of Sta. Maura, once formed part of the 
 continent, but was afterwards separated from it by a narrow cut. Livy, xxxiii. 
 17, says in his time it was an island, but in the Macedonian war it had been a 
 peninsula. The cut was called Dioryctus (Plin. iv. 2 ; Polyb. v. 5). Thucydides 
 more than once describes the Peloponnesian fleet as having been conveyed 
 across the isthmus. Cf. note iii. 81, iv. 8. It was occupied by 1000 Corinthian 
 colonists from the settlements of Ambracia and Anactorium. 
 *AvaKTop(ov. Anactorium was the first town in Acarnania, after Actium 
 (which was included in its territory, i. 29), on entering the Ambracian gulf 
 from the Ionian sea. It was founded, together with Leucas and SoUium, by a 
 Corinthian colony, in the middle of the 7th century, B.C., when the original 
 inhabitants were driven into the interior. These seem to have been the Taphii, 
 or Teleboae, Leleges, and Curetes. It appears from Thuc. i. 55, that the 
 Corcyrajans shared in the colony, but the Corinthians obtained sole possession 
 of the settlement. It remained in their hands till B.C. 425, when they were 
 expelled by the Athenians and Acarnanians conjointly, who occupied the place. 
 Cf. iv. 49, vii. 31. Augustus transferred its inhabi tints to Nicopolis, which he 
 founded on the opposite coast, and it ceased to be a town. Strabo x., p. 45 r . Its 
 present site must be looked for on the promontory which now bears the 
 name of C. Madonna, v. Smith, Did. Geog., s. v., Anactorium and Actium. 
 Cramer ii. p. 7. 
 
 (c.) <i>op|i(wva. For the high estimation in which Phonnio was held at 
 Athens see the compliment paid to him by Aristophanes. Eqult. 562, with 
 the note of the Schohast. (Cf. Clinton in an.) ircpl NaviraKTov. 
 
 Cf. ad c. Ixix. iir* irr]<r{M irpooTao-t^j €K tov d. 7 — ^ on the 
 
 ground of the annual presidency (or chieftainship) which they, as being of the 
 royal gens, enjoyed.' ivi assigns the reason why these two persons had the 
 command. On this force of iwi cf. Jelf, § 634, 3. c. Steph. Byzant. would 
 read iirerricrLi^. a word from Hom., and repeated by Dio Cassius. Kiiig. 
 asserts that the naked dative would be objectionable, which Engelmann's tr., 
 who inclines to the reading, will not concede. It was their year of office: 
 each vpoffrdT'ns (cf. iii. 75, 8?) being bound at the expiration of his period of 
 office to resign in favour of another member of the royal gens. G oiler compares 
 the privileges of the Alcmaeonidae at Athens, Bacchiadae at Corinth, and the 
 Aleuadse and Scopadae in Thessaly. Cf. Cramer i., p. 93. * The Chaones 
 differed from their neighbours in being subject to an aristocratical and not a 
 monarchical government ; their annual magistrates being always chosen from a 
 
24Z 
 
 NOTES ON THITCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book II. 
 
 particular family.' The exact limits of Chaonia were not ascertainable even in 
 Strabo's time. Its seaboard line probably extended from the Acroceraunian 
 promontory to the harbour of Buthrotum, opposite Corcyra. The thaones 
 were once the most warlike and powerful people of Epirus (cf. Strab. vii., p. 
 324); Thuc. i. 46; Arist. Equ., 72; Schol. 
 
 (d.) 0€<nrpa)To£. The Thesproti extended along the coast from the Thyamia 
 
 to the confines of the Cassopsei, and in the interior to the boundaries of the 
 
 territories of Dodona, which was in ancient times regarded as part of Thesprotia. 
 
 The Chaones, Thesproti, and Molossi, were the three chief Epirote tribes. 
 
 MoXoo-o-ovs. The Molossi, who became subsequently the rulers of Epirus, 
 
 originally inhabited only a small strip of country extending from the Ambracian 
 
 gulf, between the Cassopaei and Ambraciotae, northwards as far as the Dodonaei. 
 
 *ATiVTdvas. The Atintanes were an Illyrian tribe bordering on the ParavaBi. 
 
 V. inf. ©apvrros. This 'Hiaryps (called also Tharypas, or Arrhybas) was 
 
 the son or grandson of Admetus, the Molossian king to whom Themistocles 
 
 addressed himself as suppliant. [Thuc. i. 136.] He was a minor, had been 
 
 educated at Athens, and is said to have been the first to introduce among his 
 
 subjects Hellenic civilization. [Cf. Paus. i. xi. i. ; Justin xvii. 3 ; Plut. Pyrrh. 
 
 i.] The Molossians retained their kingly form of government, Alexander, 
 
 the brother of Olympias, wife of Philip of Macedon, at length extending his 
 
 dominion over most of the Epirot tribes. IlapavaCovs. The 
 
 Paravffii wereofThesprotian origin, and bordered on the Oresta?, and Atintanes, 
 
 and the Macedonian district of Elymiotis. They took their name from the 
 
 Aous (now Voiusa), on whose banks they were situated. The Orestae lay to 
 
 the south of the Lyncestae. Their country was of small extent, and contained 
 
 but few towns. Steph. Byz. says they were a Molossian tribe. They occupied 
 
 the district now known as Castoria, with its lake and the rugged mountains 
 
 beyond. * This large and diverse body of Epirotic invaders (a new phenomenon 
 
 in Grecian history, and got together doubtless by the hope of plunder,) proves 
 
 the extensive relations of the tribes of the interior with the city of Ambracia.' 
 
 Grote vi., p- 260. * Op^oTot. The Orestae were situated api)arently 
 
 to the south-east of the Lyncestae, and, like them, were originally independent 
 
 of the Macedonian kings, though afterwards annexed to their dominions. 
 
 Steph. Byz. terms them a Molossian tribe. Their country was also of small 
 
 extent and contained but few towns : it was called Orestis, or Orestias, and 
 
 is represented by the modem districts of Gramista, Anaselitza, and Kastoria. 
 
 [Leake's N. Greece, ap. Smith Diet. G. s. v. ; Cramer i., p. 197; Polyb. xviii. 
 
 30; Strabo vii., p. 326; Liv. xxvii. 33, xxxi. 40, xxxiii. 34.] 
 
 Koviba Twv * A6T]vaCa>v. Since he was nominally at peace with them. v. c. xxix. 
 
 ^<mpov — 'too late to take any part in the affair.' 
 
 le.) * Apyiias—i. c, the territory of Amphilochian Argos. Palmerius from 
 iii. lois, would read' A7pofaj. v. Cramer ii., p. 9. Ai|&vaCav— ' a 
 
 frontier village territory' (Grote) at the south-east corner of the Ambracian 
 gulf, between Anactorium and Argos, at the foot of Mount Thyamus. Thuc. 
 mentions it again, iii. 106. Cramer places its site at Loutraki; Col. Leake, 
 with greater probability, at Kerbaser^, in the vicinity of which there is a marsh, 
 two miles in length, from which Limnaea probably derived its name. [Cf. 
 Polyb. V. 5 ; Cramer ii., p. 9, 37 ; Smith s. v.] ZTpdrov— so called i3. 
 
 Chap. 8 1.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 243 
 
 supposes, as being 'the camp or place of muster for the armed population of 
 Acarnania. ' Their enmity with their formidable neighbours the Ambraciots 
 rendering an armed confederacy necessary, (v. Cramer, ii., p. 4.) It lay on 
 the right bank of the Achelous, about 200 stadia from its mouth, the river 
 being navigable as far as its walls. (Strab. x., p. 450.) Xenophon speaks of 
 it as the capital of the province, at the time of the expedition of Agesilaus into 
 Acarnania. [Xen. Hell. iv. 6. 4.] Pouqueville says its ruins are still to be seen 
 on the site called Porta, v. Cramer ii., p. 30, sq. pa8{b>s &v 
 
 irpoo^«pTJ<rciv K. admits the correctness of the use of Slv with the fut. inf. ; 
 so Kuhner and Hartung. Madvig says wherever it occurs it is an error 
 of the editions. P. quotes Thuc. v. 82, vi. 66, viii. 25, 71. Cf. Matth. 
 § 598, 9- 
 
 Chapter LXXXL— (a.) oih-i— tc. On the use of oi^re followed by re (or 
 more rarely xat), see Jelf, § 775. obs. B. a. ; Herod, v. 49, vii. 8. i ; 
 Soph. Phil., 1 32 1. Xo-yois -2p7<{). See the remarks on 
 
 this antithesis, i. 22. a. 69. d. Here it must be admitted to be somewhat 
 forced. 
 
 (i.) \t.(a-ov. ' So definite in describing a position, as not to need the article,' 
 B. cf. Xen. A7iab. i. 8. in several places. (So of time ti^aov rnx^pa^, Xen. 
 Anah. iv. 4. i, &c.) P. cf. i. 8. a. 12. b. 16. a. 48. a. 52. b., see iv. 31. 96. 
 So we sometimes use * riyht,' * left' ot pcrd. tovtwv. The 
 
 (Eniadae, says Haack from the following ch., but Bl. is most probably right in 
 saying that tl)ey only joined Cnemus after his repulse at Stratos. 'The 
 Perioeci of the Leucadian peninsula,' Arn., who adds, there was scarce in 
 Greece a town which had its Periceci. See his note. 
 
 (c.) Tcra-yft^voi. 'This fact shows,' Grote says, 'the great inferiority of 
 the Epirots to the Greeks, and even to the less advanced portion of the Greeks 
 in the qualities of order, discipline, steadiness, and power of co-operation for a 
 joint purpose. Confidence of success with them is exaggenited into childish 
 rashness, so that they despise even the commonest precautions either in march 
 or attack, while the Greek divisions on their right and left are never so elate as 
 to omit either,' vi. p. 271. 8td <{>vXaKf]s Ix^^^^S — ^keeping con- 
 
 stantly on their guard i lit. in a state of guard. See note i. 17. a. 40. c. 
 42. c. iv l'rT\.nr\hiL(ii. Even for a single night the Greeks and 
 
 Romans chose the spot for their encampment with great care and precaution. 
 See Caesar pass, for the equivalent phrase, e.g. B. C. i. 61, 'Nactus idoneum 
 locum ;' and he says of the Spaniards who had served under Sertorius, that 
 they had learnt ' consuetudine populi Romani loca capere, castra munire,' B. 
 Gall. iii. 23. d^iovjicvoi. d^iot Kpivdfxevoi, SchoL ' They enjoyed 
 
 the high reputation of being esteemed the '>nost warlike, ' <kc. On the uses of 
 i^iuxTii and d^iufia, see i. c. 130, ii. 34. 64. 88, vi. 15. iTri<r\ov. 
 
 There is a V. L. iiricxovro ' non se retineri passi sunt, se retinuerunt,' as vii. 
 33. ol 'LvpaKovffioi . . . iiriffxovro . . . roh ' kd-qvaioi^ ivixeipeiv, and Gottl. 
 adopts this reading. P. tr. ' neque morati sunt (substiterunt) ut castra occu- 
 parentj'and says ^Wx^^*' with the inf. means in Herod, dehberare, sibi pro- 
 ponere tanquam metam. K. explains it ' Sie hielten sich nicht ein lager 
 aufzuschlagen.' T. K. A. 'did not turn their minds to.* 'Neither forbore so 
 
 B 2 
 
244 
 
 NOTES ON TIIUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book II. 
 
 far as to occupy,' Hubbes. 'They would not halt to encamp,' Grote, vi. p. 
 252. Gull, iakes no notice of the difficulty. Cf. Soph. Phil. 349. 539. 
 KaTaXap€iv is a military term. See i., here it means 'take up (/round for a 
 camp ; cf. infra d., and I apprehend the construction is t6 KaraXa^uv as t6 
 iKipo^rjffai, infr. 87. a. pvjiTj. For the old reading ^(ojix|. Tiie 
 
 two words are constantly interchanged. See c. 76, where we have pvfxji, 
 meaning impetus, which suits the sense here. avro^oiL. avrri pof}~ 
 
 the very shout of onset. For the orthography see n. on c. i. K. says Thuc. is 
 the only Attic writer who uses the word. He quotes Bekker, Anecd. 214. 
 465, avro^oei, raxf'ws. Kol &|ta r^ iroXcfiiKw dXaXa-yfiw. 
 
 So Liv, i. II, 'primo impetu et clamore ;' vi. 4, * primo clamore atque 
 
 impetu.' 
 
 Id.) avTwv TO ^p*Yov -Y^vco-Oai — * the achievement would be their own.* avrdv 
 for ain-Civ is fr. Bekker. ojjloCws -i.e. a« they had intended. So Ixxx. 
 
 a., 6 TepiirXovs ovkItl ^<toito' Adrjvaioii ofioios. "jrpoXoxCXova-i ^vcSpais. 
 
 Kriig. 'besetzen mit hiuterhaltzposten,' tr. occupy the environs with ambuscades. 
 'Planting ambuscades in convenient places, and suffering the Epirots to 
 approach without suspicion near to the gates ; they then suddenly sallied 
 out and attacked them, while the troops in ambuscade rose up and assailed 
 them at the same time,' Grote, vi. p. 252. Cf. iii. 112 and 119; Herod, v. 
 121. b)i.6<rt. So 'cominus,' Lat. Cf. Horn. Jl. xii. 24, xiii. 
 
 337 ; Aristoph. Lys. 451 ; Xen. Anab. iii. 4. 4; Symp. ii. 13. Hence tro- 
 pically Plat. £uth. 294. D, 6iJ.6<x€ Uvai toU ipurr-qixaai. — to grapple with, L. 
 
 and S. 
 
 («.) €V€'K€tVTo. P. tr. 'broke in upon,' fuga effusA in eos ferrentur : rare of 
 an army in Hight, being the usual term to signify ' pursuit of a flying army.' 
 dvcXd^Pavov — received them into their ranks. Arnold tr. rallied them, i. e. the 
 Chaoniaiis ! is airopCav Ka6. — reducing to distress. 
 
 dv€v BirXwv. A circumstance very annoying to Greek soldiers, who 
 laid aside their shields and defensive armour when they halted, T. K. A. 
 For illustration of the fact, see Xen. Anab. iii. c. iii. touto 
 
 TTOictv <• c. airo6€v a<p€vdovay, harassing heavily-armed troops by this sort of 
 guerilla fighting. 
 
 Chapter LXXXII.— "Avairov. Tlie Anapus flows into the Achelous on 
 the right bank, a little below Metropolis. It is called in Modern maps Artos 
 [see Cramer, ii. p. 32]. OlviaSwv. Cf. c. ci. c. 
 
 Chapter LXXXIII. — (a.) KpLo-aCov. Tlie whole of the inner sea now 
 known as the Sea of Lepanto, east of the promontories of Rljium and 
 Antirrhium, was called originally the Crissaean Gulf, 6 Kpiaaios kSXtos. [See 
 the Homeric hymn to Apollo, 431, Kpiarjs koXtto^ dTreipojv.] And this continued 
 to be its designation even down to the time of Stiabo, who gives this specific 
 name to this portion of the Corinthian gulf (viii. p. 335). But soon after the 
 time of Thucyd., it went more generally by the name of the Gulf of Corinth. 
 Xen. Hell. vi. 2. 9, koXttos KopivdLaKos ; Polyb. v. 3 ; Liv. xxvi. 26, Sinus 
 Corinthiacus, xxviii. 7. 8, Sinus Corinthius. Pliny (iv. 2) confines the name 
 to the small gulf running up to Cirrha, now known as the Gulf of Salona. It 
 
 Chap. 83.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 245 
 
 took its name from Crissa, which lay inland a little S.W. of Delphi, at the S. 
 end of a projecting spur of Parnassus (its ruins may still be seen near the 
 modern village of Chryso). Cirrha was subsequently built at the head of the 
 bay, at the mouth of the Pleistus, and rose into a town from being the port of 
 Crissa. Between the two lay the famous Cirrha^an or Crisaean plain, bounded 
 on the N. by Parnassus, on the E, by Cirphis, and on the W. by the moun- 
 tains of the Ozolian Locrians. The Homeric hymn quoted above, gives the 
 legendary histoiy of the foundation of Crise, which was ascribed to Apollo 
 himself, and hence the city is called Kpiaa i^ader}, Hom. II. ii. 520. In fact 
 in the earlier writers Crise is identified with Delphi, the name afterwards givei 
 to the sanctuary of Pytho. The town of Cirrha is famous for the two sacrec 
 wars carried on against it by the Amphictyons. (For the authorities, see Cramer, 
 ^•- P' '55 ; Smith s.v.). 6 28ci irapa^^veo-Oai — which ought to have 
 
 been at hand, i. e. ' which was intended to co-oi)erate with Cnemus, and to 
 prevent,' &c. Cf. h. I. v. a. Ixxxiv. c. xcii. d. xcv. c. &v« — 'into 
 
 the interior of the country.' -^iva-yKdo-Biiorav. Observe change of 
 
 number [(xxw^- """P^^ "'"^ (rr}fj.aiu6iJi€vov], i. e. the Corinthians, &c., implied in rb 
 vavTiKhv. So Tpoiav eXbvTfs S^ttot' ' kpydiav arSXas, yEsch. Ag. 588. 
 irepl rds avrds T||ji€pas xfjs H^o-XI^. K. cf. Xen. Anab. vi. 2. 9; Pol. iii. 
 45. 6, ix. 5. 7. 
 
 (6.) T^ €upux<*>pi<f. 'The Peloponnesians had not yet made actual trial of 
 Athenian maritime efficiency, at the point of excellence which it had now 
 reached ; themselves retaining the old unimproved method of working ships at 
 sea, they had no practical idea of the degree to which it had been superseded 
 by Athenian training. If we revert to the battle of Salamis, we find that 
 narrowness of space was at that time accounted the best of all protections for a 
 smaller fleet against a larger. But such had been the complete change of 
 feeling, occasioned by the system of manoeuvring introduced since that period 
 in the Athenian navy, that amj^itude of sea room is now not less coveted by 
 Phormio than dreaded by his enemies,' Grote, vi. pp. 263. 274. Cf. c. 
 Ixxxix. e. irapairX^ovras ^|w tov koXttov — * as they were coasting 
 
 along so as to steal if possible outside the strait.' v. P. in loc. 
 ^T^pci 'kept watching.' 
 
 (rTpaTUi>TlKa)T€pOV . 
 
 The triremes 
 
 were fitted out more as transports for numerous soldiers than with any view 
 to naval combat,' Grote, p. 263. ovk &v olo|i€vow — 'not dreaming 
 
 of the probability of the Athenians venturing, isc' The hv, which properly 
 belongs to roX/A^trat, is attracted to the participle : Madvig, quoted by 
 T. K. A. 
 
 (c.) irapoL ^iiv o-(|>wv Kop.ito^^V(i>v — i. e. as the Schol. rightly explains it, 
 'while the Corinthians, dbc, were coasting along the Peloponnesian shore.' See 
 Jelf, § 710. a., 'We sometimes find the genitive absolute where we should 
 expect the participle to agree with the subject of the verb.* Cf. Thuc. iii. 13. 
 70 ; Herod, i. 178 ; Xen. Cyr. i. 4. 20, and a remarkable instance S. Luc. xiv. 
 32. Cf. also Matth. § 561. In this case, Madvig observes, the genitive absolute 
 usually in Thucyd. precedes the principal sentence, and serves to give more 
 prominence to the participial clause as a special circumstance. Like this is 
 i. 10. 4, dia^e^7fK6Tos llepiKX^ous — rjyy^Xdrf avT<^, for the simpler construction, 
 dia^e^rjKdri II. i)yyiXdrj, which illustrates Madvig's remark, see T. K. A., 
 
2J^6 
 
 NOTES OX THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book II. 
 
 and chap. viii. e. 8taPaXX<5vT«v. According to the general use 
 
 of the present, which is also the participle imperfect, implies 'purposing to 
 cross, i.e. making the attempt without carrying it out,' v. Poppo. Cf. vi. 30. 
 XoXkCSos. a look at the map will show that the Athenians had considerably 
 outstript the Lacedemonians with a view to intercept them. From i. 108. c. 
 we learn that the Athenians had taken Chalcis after their victory at (Enophyta, 
 when Tolmidas sailed round Peloponnesus. It was being then used by the 
 Corinthians as a naval station, as well as Molycrium and Sollium. It was one 
 of th« five yEtolian towns mentioned by Homer (//. ii. 640), and lay at the foot 
 of the mountain of the same name, whence it is also called yiroxaXKis. It waa 
 a little to the east of the Evenus, now the Fidhari, and is probably represented 
 by the modern Ourio-Kestro.the mountain being called Varassova. Leake, 
 N. Greece, i. p. i .0. ap. Smith, s.v. Ev^vov. The Evenus rises 
 
 in the highest summit of Mount (Eta, and runs into the sea about 120 stadia 
 from the promontory of Antirrhium. In winter it becomes a very considerable 
 river, receiving several mountain torrents, and flowing with great rapidity, and 
 bearing along great stones in its coui-se. Hence * Eveni rapid* undae,' Ov. 
 Met. ix. 104. In mythology it is famous for the death of the Centaur Nessus, 
 who is said to have been killed here by Hercules for offering violence to Dejanira 
 as he carried her across the river. Col. Leake supposes its modern name to be 
 a corruption of the Romaic from 6(pis, and that it retains a vestige of the 
 ancient people the Ophieis in whose territory the river rose. {N. Greece, ii. p. 
 625 ; Smith. D. Georj. s.v.). Cf. Soph. Track. 557. oi&k rXaOov 
 
 vvKTbs v4>opfit<rdjJi€voi. The difficulty of completely comprehending this de- 
 Bcription is well known. In the first place the Scholiast explains ixpopfMLffdfxevoi 
 i\a9ou by or A^Tj^aioi; but Haack, Poppo, Arnold, Gciller, and indeed most mo- 
 dern commentators, adopt the opinion expressed by Grote, that 'the natural struc- 
 ture of the sentence as well as the probabilities of fact, point to ol lUXoirofuifiaioL as 
 the nominative case to the verb. This is however not all, for even those who 
 agree as to the persons denoted by ixpopficffafxevoi are at variance respecting the 
 operation described by that word. The most common view, based upon 
 Arnold's note, is well given in Engelman's German tr. 'The Peloponnesiana 
 were sailing along the coast of Peloponnesus, out of the Corinthian Gulf, with 
 tlie intention of crossing over to Acarnania as soon as they got past the town of 
 Ehium. They had brouglit to during the night in the harbour of Patrse, a 
 circumstance which they had in vain endeavoured to conceal from the Athenians 
 [ouAc iXadov]. When then they were attempting to cross from Patrre to the 
 other side, Phormion, who had been on the watch for this moment, came rapidly 
 down upon them from Chalcis, met them in mid-passage, and forced them to 
 come to action.' Grote objects that the Peloponnesians did not wish, and could 
 not hope to conceal from Phormio tlie spot where they put to for the night, and 
 make him suppose they were west of Patrae when they were really in the place, 
 which is what Dr. Arnold supposes. He urges too that the battle was fought 
 in mid-channel, and lery little after daybreak, which is inconsistent with the 
 supposition th:it they passed the night in the harbour of Patne. Acconlingly 
 he interprets v«j>opjti(rd|i€voi— Aar/nr; taken up a simulated, or imperfect night- 
 tation. I have great doubt whetlier this exact force can belong to virb, but 
 find that the explanation which I had myself attempted in a projected Review 
 
 Chap. 83.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 247 
 
 of Arnold's first volume somewhat resembles this. ' It is impossible to sup- 
 pose that there can have been time enough for the Peloponnesian fleet to have 
 regularly entered the harbour of Patra?, as Arnold suggests, and also to have 
 been in a position to fight a battle early next morning (iirl ttjv ew) half-way 
 between the two coasts. The ' dodge,' if we may use the word, attempted by 
 Machaon was that so frequently practised by the * chase' in the pursuit of slavers 
 and the like. As long as daylight lasted, he continued his course parallel to 
 the enemy ; when night came on he tried to lay to without their seeing him 
 [inr6 — clam Athenienses], in the hopes that they would sail past him. When 
 he thought Phormion far enough onward, he turned sharply at right angles to 
 his former course, steering N. instead of W. But Phormion had been too 
 much on the alert, and stopping while the enemy stopped, was down upon them 
 in the first light of morning before they had time to escape. This too explains 
 the reason why the Peloponnesians had not the same chance of keeping away 
 from their enemy as they had enjoyed all the previous day. They had 
 come into disagreeable proximity during the night. v<j)opp.it€a6ai may 
 originally have meant 'clam appellere ad litfus,' because this was the only way 
 in which the first mariners did ' lie to.' But as navigation improved, and ships 
 were brought to, as occasion required, at sea, the term would naturally be re- 
 tained. And it is ridiculous to suppose that the Peloponnesian admiral, whose 
 object it was to reach the Acarnanian coast with all possible speed, would 
 retrace his way to the opposite shore, thereby doubling the distance to be 
 traversed, and the chance of interruption from Phormion.' I do not know that 
 anything which I have seen has much modified the opinion here expressed. 
 We may add that the words dirb rr\s XaXKtSos do not necessarily mean, as 
 some apparently suppose, that the Athenians had just left the harbour of 
 Chalcis that very morning ; drrb denotes the direction from which, as ^ttl the 
 direction towards trhich a movement takes place, cf. sup. 80. a. On the aorist, 
 as applicable to an action not carried into effect, see remarks in the appendix 
 on Soph. Ajajc, vv. 1105 — 6. 
 
 ME. StAcaia yap rbvh' ei>Tux«»' KTcivavrd fie. 
 TET. KTCivavra, heivov 7' ciTras d kol ^ijs davwv. 
 
 The whole will then mean- -when their attempt to laij to in the night unTcnown to 
 the enemy did not pass undetected. Those who make i/^op. refer to the Athenians, 
 might I suppose tr. when the fact that the Athenians had brought to during the 
 night became jterceptible, but this is I think very questionable. There is a V.L. 
 marg. Cam., i<f>opixi.adix€voi., and probably it is to this reading that the Schol. 
 refers when he supplies oi ' Adrjfaioi to iXadov. But for the same reason this is 
 not quite satisfactory ; ov Xavddvw means ' I do not succeed in escaping detec- 
 tion when I make some attempt intended to be secret.' This might be said of 
 the Athenian fleet, but the furtive efforts of the others to escape were evidently 
 prominent in the writer's mind. ovt« 8-q. Cf. ad i. 131. 
 
 {d.) <rTpaTT)"yoV. Cf. f. 46. b. irap€<rK€vdtovTO — ' who con- 
 
 tributed to the equipment of this fleet," K. kvkXov. Cf. iii. 78, 
 
 and note. \Ji\ 8i86vt€s BUKirXovv. Cf. i. 49. c. * The Athenian 
 
 rowing through the intervals of the adversary's line, and thus getting in their 
 ' 1^^ turned rapidly and got the opportunity before the ship of the adversary 
 
248 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book II. 
 
 could change its position, of striking it either in the stern, or in some weak 
 part. The success of course depended on the extreme rapidity and precision of 
 the movements of the Athenian vessel,' Grote, vi. p. 267, see the rest of the 
 note. This manoeuvre could only be executed by ships that had the superiority 
 in speed and management. Compare the account of the battle of Arginusae, 
 Xen. Hell. i. 6, where the balance of naval skill is .>n the side of the Lacedae- 
 monians, and Xenophon speaking of the Athenian ships says (§ 31), oihit} 6' 
 irdxGy)<Ta.v tva firj SUKirXovv biSoUv, x^'^po** y^P ^^rXcoi' (where see Schneider's 
 valuable note). Toi. Xcirra irXota — * the amall craft' — i. e. the store 
 
 vessels. Cf. vii. 40. e. ; cf. Duk. ad iv. 116. b., P. 810L ppax^os = 
 
 Si 6\tyov. 'Exiguo ex intervallo,' P. irapaYi-yvojAcvoi. Obs. 
 
 change of gender — i.e. the creics. Kard. ^vv€<riv. Cf. i. no. d. 
 
 Chapter LXXXIV. — (a.) Kard jiCav vavv T€Ta-Y(JL/voi— '/orwi^-rf in line of 
 hattle a-head* as it is technically called, cf. Xen. lltU. i. 6, 29, 31. ol Sd/itot 
 ZlKa vavalv iwl ^laj Terayfxhoi. Poppo cf. c. xc. d. Kara fiiav iirl K^pujs, 
 which confirms this translation. Of course /card filav mUjht also mean one 
 deep, V. ad xc. a. ^VT^-yov 4s 6\(.yov~' kept forcing them to con- 
 
 tract their circle.' Iv xp« acl 'Trapa'rrX^ovT€S. dirb fieratpopdi rijs 
 
 Kovpdi ttJs dxP* '^^^ XP'^^^^ yiyvofi^vov. Schol. ' Htrictim.' Haas cf. Herod, 
 vi. 1 1 ; Soph. Aj. 797. Procopius imitates the passage, ii. £. 0. 7. Gottleb. 
 iffpUirXei. Kal €lw0€i. Observe the change of subject. 
 
 (6.) €<|)' tavTw. The affair would then be as we say in hi» otcn hands, to 
 attack when he pleased. Cf. iii. 12 ; iv. 29 ; vii. 12. Matth. § 586. 
 ^vS^va xpdvov. n. b. not firiSeva ; perhjips we may give the same idiomatic force 
 by saying, * no time,' as a sort of single tense — cf. ov6iv crr^yovcrai — * unsect- 
 worthy,' ch. 94. See what is said on the use of ov as a particula infinitans, i. t, 
 a. 5, b. 17, a. ; and the remark of Hermann on Vitjer, No. 309, * ouarctissim^ 
 conjungi cum verbo debet, ita ut hoc verbo conjunctum, unam notionem con- 
 stituat, cujusmodi est, ovk olSa, nescio.' KaXX£<rTnv. Kriig. 
 
 suggests /cd\Xt(Tr Av, but needlessly. Cf. the old English usage of handsome; 
 a handsome beating. 
 
 (c.) KaT(j€i" qy more violently than usual? The prep, seems to imply this. 
 See ad c. xxvi. c. irpoo-^iriirrc. Wass cf. ^sch. Ag. 659 : — 
 
 vavs yap irphi a.\\ri\-qai QprjKiai irvoal 
 -IfpeiKOV al 5^ KepoTvirovpievai /3i^ 
 XCt/xwJ't. K. T. X. ( 
 
 XoiSopC^.. Wass quotes Horace, i Sat. v. 11. Eur. Ilec. 
 
 iv ykp fxvpiif} ffTparevfiaTi 
 d/c6Xa<rT05 6x^^^> vavriKT] r dvapxi-CL 
 Kpeiaawv Tcvpbs. 
 
 KcX€v<rTwv. Duk. quotes Scheffer de Mil. nav. iv. 7. These were called by 
 the Romans * hortatores et pausarii.* Mr. Grote has a good note on the pas- 
 sage, vi. p. 269, where he shows from the structure of the trireme how im- 
 portant the functions of these officers were, the voice of the kejeustes being the 
 only thing that kept the 1 70 rowers to good time in their strokes. He refers 
 
 Chap. 85.] 
 
 NOTES OX THUCYDIDES. 
 
 249 
 
 to Arnold's note and Plant. Merc. iv. 2, 5, and Asin. iii. i. 15. Cf. Thuc. vii. 
 70. Ovid, Met. iii. 618 :— 
 
 * Qui requiemque modumque 
 Voce dabat remis, aniniorum hortator.' ^ 
 
 He carried in his hand a hammer or truncheon to keep time with, called ' por- 
 tisculus.' See Plaut. u. s. and Rich's Diet. s. v. dva4)^p6iv— 
 
 * cimld not get their oars clear of the water.' Grote. ' die Ruder bey unge- 
 stiimer See aufheben.' Gottl. ' Remos ad se reducere, et attollere suspensos.' 
 P. ' referre.' K. ' recover their oars.' L. and S. KvPcpvTJrats. 
 
 We learn from i. 143, a. the importance of this office, and the stress laid on 
 the fact of having Athenian steersmen. 8U<|)0€ipov (see Poppo), 
 
 means frequently * spoilt,' i. 29, c. and here is simply disabled ; i. e. for the 
 time. dirXovi €Troi7]<rt. Diod. Sic. xii. 48; so Karadveip' i. 50, h. 1. 90, e. 
 92, b. ; vii. 41, viii. 34, cf. note ad i. 29, a. IldTpas. Patrae, one 
 
 of the twelve Achfvan cities (Herod, i. 145), lies on the Corinthian gulf on one 
 of the spurs of Mount Panachaicus. The Achaean hero Patreus was its ei)ony- 
 mus. After the Macedonian wars it was one of the four cities that revived the 
 federal league. After the battle of Actium, Augustus planted a considerable 
 colony there, placing the neighbouring towns under its domini<m. Pausanias, 
 who visited it, gives a long description of its buildings and statues. It retains 
 its name in the modern Patras. Av\i.y\v. Dyme, also one of 
 
 the twelve Achsean cities (v. llerod. u. s.), is said to have derived its name 
 from being the most westerly of them all {dirb Svff/xQv). Its ancient name, 
 according to Strabo, was Stratus. It was one of the four cities which revived 
 the Achaean League. Pompey colonised it with a number of Cilician pirates, 
 and Augustus placed it under the authority of Patrip. Its remains are to be 
 seen near the modern town of Karavostdsi. Leake, Murea, ii. p. 160. 
 h AXk^v Tpdir€<r0ai. K. explains by se mettre en defense, and cf. Hom. II. xv. 
 «>64 ; Herod, ix. 70 ; Thuc. iii. 108, a. He says d\K^ is not used by other 
 Attic writers in "this sense of resistance. It is in fact rigorous fghting ; and 
 so, to betake themselves to vigorous fighting, in such circumstances, means, to 
 make resolute defence. 
 
 (jd.) dv«X<J|icvoi— * took prisoners, and transferred to their oicn ships.' 
 vavv dvaS^VTcs. Cf. Schetf. de Mil. nav. iv. 2 ; Ifuds. Herod, viii. 121 ; 
 Procop. B. G. iv. 22, Gottl. KvXXt|Vtiv. Cyllene was the sea- 
 
 port of EUs, from which it was distant about 120 stadia, and is mentioned in 
 very early times in connexion with the legendary history of the Peloponnese. The 
 Corcyr^ans burnt it because it had supplied ships to the Corinthians, v. Thuc. 
 i. 30. It was the principal port on this part of the Peloponnesus. Cf. Thuc. 
 vi. 89 ; Diod. xix. 66, 87 ; Polyb. v. 3 ; Liv. xxvii. 32. Leake assigns its 
 position to the modern Glarentza, but there appears reason to doubt the 
 identity, v. Smith, s. v. al ^KttOev vfjcs. Cf. i. 61, c, for the 
 
 fact see c. Ixxx. c. Leucas was the rendezvous for the fleet. 
 
 Chapter LXXXV.— (a.) 5v|iPovXovs. Apparently here mentioned for 
 the first time in the Peloponnesian war. Ten were sent to Agis after his 
 failure at Argos (v. 63). Astyochus was accompanied by eleven (viii. 39). 
 
250 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book II. 
 
 V. Grote vi. p. 272, ' Commissioners, to assist by their advice and exertions.' 
 P. compares Hermann, Gr. Ant. § 45, 4 ; Thuc. iv. 79, v. 63 ; and Sch weigh. 
 ad A pp. iii. p. 305, for a similar cuetom among the Romans. 
 TijJioKpaTT]v— for his fate, see c. xcii. b. Karao-Kcvdtco-^ai. Cf. 
 
 c. Ixxviii. c. iv. 75 ; and Poppo's note. vir' 6\i^uiv — ' by an in- 
 
 ferior number of ships.' So conversely, TrX^^os is used for superiority in num- 
 bers. Cf. i. 106, 2, 125. irpuTov — t. c. in this war. Schol. 
 iropdXoYos. Cf. ad i. 78, a., and ii. 61, c. ; 66, a. ; 91, c. ; vii. 28; tr. the 
 unreuisoiiableuess ; the contradict iott to all rational calculation was great. 
 
 (6.) dvTi6€VTcs. Cf. iii. 56, c. on its use with a genitive. P. Kurip. Iph. 
 Taur. 358, TTiv iuddd' \v\iv avridiica ttJs fVel. ^k iroXXov' for the 
 
 fact, see i. 142, g. 8t dXC^ov. Cf. i. 77, f. ; 124, b. 
 
 {c.) KO0' T|(i€pav dcC. Cf. iv. 66, a. ad Kara (to% I^Kaarov. Soph. Phil. 
 780, with Wiinder's note. t<J» KO(i£tovTi. ' Nicias.' 
 
 {d.) Fopriivios. (iortyn (afterwards n)ore usually called Gortyna, and not 
 to be confounded with Gortys in Arcadia) was, next to Cnossu.s, the most im- 
 portant city in Crete. It was anciently called Larissa, and was therefore in 
 all probability a Pelasgic town. [Cf. Craujer, iii. p. 384. We find also a 
 Gortyuia in Macedonia, Thuc. ii. 100, probably also Pelasgic] In early times 
 it was leagued with Cnossus, and the two cities together held the rest of Crete 
 in subjection. Afterwards, dissensions having arisen between them, they were 
 engaged in continual hostilities, [v. Strabo, x. p. 478, who reckons the circuit 
 of the city at fifty stadia.] It stood on the river Lethsens, about nine miles 
 from the sea, where it had two harbours, Lebena and Metallum. Mr. Pashley 
 fixes its site at the modem Hagius Dheka, where the ten saints of Gortjna are 
 said to have suffered martyrdom in the persecution of Decius. See Pashley's 
 Crete, i. p. 295. irpolcvos. Cf. ad c. 29, a., and iii. 70, d., where 
 
 for the difference between Proxenus and Epiproxtnus, see Arnold's note. 
 KvSuvCav. One of the mo.st ancient and important cities of Crete. It pro- 
 bably existed very long before the time of Polycrates, and was only enlarged 
 and adorned by the Samian colonists, and not founded as Herodotus supposed, 
 iii. 44, 59. A considerable portion of its citizens were -.'Eginetjin colonists. 
 Olymp. Ixv. 2 ; hence their especial hatred for Athens. See Miiller's jEyine- 
 tica, p. F13. It was 1000 stadia, according to the Schol., or 800 according to 
 Strabo (x. p. 479) from Gortyna, lying on the sea looking towards Laconia. 
 Mr. Pashley identifies it with the modern Khania (v. i. p. 15). Tlie quince 
 was indigenous to this district, and took its name from it. [Plin. xv. 11.; cf. 
 Smith, Oeof/. Diet. s. v. ; Miill. Dor. i. p. 30.] IIoXixviTais. The 
 
 territory of Polichne bordered on Cydonia, The site of the town has not been 
 ascertained, v. Smith, in v. ; and Herod, vii. 170. vtrb dv^p.u)V. 
 
 The causal use of the prepos., see Jelf, § 639, i. 2, b. dTrXo/a is used for any- 
 thing that stops navigation ; either adverse winds, or the absence of wind ; but 
 as Poppo observes, it is more likely that the former meaning is the correct one, 
 as vessels propelled by oars would not be detained by a calm. See viii. 99, 
 Engelman's tr. remarks on virb d-rrXoias, ' Wenn die Priipositionen acht ist, 
 kann dirXoia nur die in der Uebersetzung au.sgedriickte Bedeutung, ' Wind- 
 stille' haben ;' but v. /Esch. Ag. 188, where the context shows that foul winds are 
 meant, irvoai dirb '^Tpv/j.ovos /JLoXoOcai ; so Eurip. Iph. J. 88; Herod, ii. 119. 
 
 Chap. 87.] 
 
 NOTES OX THUCYDIDES. 
 
 25 A 
 
 There is therefore no reason to believe with Kriig. that vtt dv^/xuv is a gloss : 
 the better plan is with some inferior MSS. to strike out the second Oirb, and 
 thus make dwXoias a sort of epexegesis to vv' dv^fiwi/. 
 
 Chapter LXXXVI. — (a.) irapeo-Kcvao-ficvoi ws eirl vav|iax£av. Not as 
 before, c. 78, 8, aTpaTLUTiKuiTtpov irapeffK, Ildvop^ov tov 
 
 'AxaiKov. [To distinguish it from Panormus in Sicily (vi. 2), and Panormus 
 in Milesia (viii. 24) ]. It lay fifteen stadia to the east of the promontory of 
 Khiuin. The bay is now called Tekieh, from a Tekieh or tomb [6rjKv] of a, 
 Turkish saint which formerly stood upon it. v. Smith, s. v. irap^irX€v<r€ 
 
 84 Kal 6 #. ' coasted along from Nau[)actu8 {i. e. of course in a contrary direc- 
 tion to the Lacedagmonians) to Molycrium, so as to get outside the Strait into 
 broad water. 
 
 (/>.) *Ptov. The towns on both sides of the Strait bore tliis name. To dis- 
 tinguish them the south town was called r6 ' Axal'icdv (now the castle of the 
 Jdorea) ; the lujrth town 'Viou to MoXvKpiKov or 'Avrippiov (now the castle of 
 Kumili). These two promontories formed the entrance to the Corinthian gulf. 
 The distiince between them is variously stated. Thucyd. makes it seven stadia 
 (ii. 86) ; Strabo, five (pp. 335, 6) ; Pliny about a Roman mile (iv. 6). But both 
 Dodwell and Leake make it a mile and a half (v. Smith, Diet. s. v. Achaia). 
 Dodwell, p. 171; Leake's il/orca. ii. p. 148. 'irpoa-t^€^or\Q7\Kii. 
 
 Cf. ad i. 134, d. P. clSov sc. op/xia-afi^vovi. P. 
 
 (c.) irpbs CKcCvwv — ' in favour of the Lacedcemonians.' irpos or w-po-Ti is, 
 according to Dr. Donaldson, only a lengthened form of irapd, containing in 
 itself the notion of onward, — adversus : ol irpbs pLTjrpbs — a matre versus me 
 coffnati — ' motion towards that which is before the subject.' JH. Crat. p. 302. 
 From this he deduces the various usages of irpbs, though without special men- 
 tion of the present one. Jelf appears to classify this usage among those which 
 denote * properties belonging to the subject from which the action is supposed 
 to arise,' § 638. Matthias, g 590, a. places it after the case of neuters, re- 
 presented as produced by something. ^Lov ^iCsvai irpbs dvOpdoiroiv. In other 
 cases also as ilvai irpbs tIpos, stare ab aliquo, cf. Herod, i. 124.' It is, I think, 
 most simple to explain the usage from such a phrase as 6 debs irpbs ijfiQv iariv 
 iv. 92 ; that which sUmds by our side, and acts from that position, being sup- 
 posed to make in our favour. 
 
 {d.) ri\v vav^a\Cav iroifjO-at. Observe the difference between the active 
 and middle voices, 'Activum de ducibus ponitur, qui auctores sunt ut pugna 
 fiat.' Cf. iv. 91, v. 59, 80, P. Compare the phrases vop-ov ddvai. and deaOac, 
 TpoTralov arijcai and ffTijaacrdai (v. ad c. 79, f.) dirb twv 
 
 *A0T]vaCwv. Cf. ad i. no b. 
 
 Chapter LXXXVII.— (a.) fipa. See note on i. 75. a., and the article 
 referred to in the Classical Museum, and tr. if as it seems. o^X^ 
 
 SiKaCav K. T.X. — does not afford, or bring with it, arty just ground of inference, 
 that it should alarm you, i.e. gives you no reason for drawing such a conclusion 
 as wouhl alarm you. r^KixapaLV, Kriig. calls the object-accusative, and rb iK<po- 
 ^rjaat the resultative accusative. His interpretation does not differ from the 
 above. Keiske's notion that rb iK<po^7j(rai is the immediate object, and 5ik. 
 
252 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book II. 
 
 TfAT/i, the predicative accusative, though mentioned by the editors, is not, I 
 think, to be approved. He would tr. ' has not the fact of its having alarmed 
 you as a just ground of inference.' Jelf, § 670, remarks that the article 
 would naturally be attached to the substantive infinitive, when e8|>ecial em- 
 phasis was to be laid upon the notion which it expresses, and as this infin. 
 always stands to the preceding verb in the relation of the accusative, this article 
 is always the neuter r6. On ^x^* ^or irapfx^i, cf. ii. 41, dyat^aKTriaiy Ix^h »• 9» 
 i. 47. b., iv. 126. is vav^ax^av (idXXov. Cf. Tac. Jlist. ii. 40, 
 
 * Xon ut ad pugnam, sed ut ad bellanduni profccti,' l*opp. 
 ia-<^'t]\€V— (ripped us up, or laid us by the heels, i.e. was the cause of our 
 failure. 
 
 (6.) TT]s YvwuT^s TO ji'fi Kara Kpdros vikt]8^v. There is considerable variety 
 of opinion about this passage. Am. tr. nor ought our sjtirits, ichich, so far 
 from having been fairly beaten, have that within them which still bids defiance to 
 the enemy, to lose their edge from the result cf chance. This is right in the 
 main, but yvu/xr} is not Ov/ulSs or spirit (an usage of which I find no example), 
 it should rather be * will,' in the sense of a resolved purpose, cf. i. 32. Such is 
 its freiiuent force in the P. V., see e. g. "yvui^irj aro/xiuiv Arcp evOvviav, v. 295. 
 The whole then will mean, that part of our resolution which has not been I'an- 
 quished in an overmastering way, but still retains within a defiance for the foe, 
 should not be cowed by tchat is the result of nothing but accident, or by the result 
 of mere accident at any rate, for such is the effect of ye, and the phrase differs 
 much from the Schol. exjdanation, tt} diro^darj ^vp.<f>6pq., quoted by most of the 
 editors. We have rrjs yvu/jLrjs rb /jltj k. t. \. instead of 17 yurj Kara Kparos yiKij- 
 6€i(Ta yvuifxri, because the orator would not be so unreasonable as to ascribe no 
 moral effect to defeat ; he insinuates that while any part of the old heroic 
 resolve is still left, it ought to hold out against the caprice of fortune. 
 ifxov Tiva dvTiXo'yiav I think expresses the state of one who is not entirely 
 silenced by his adversary, but has still a word to give him in reply. Cf. i. 31. 
 d. and v. 76, yevofi^urjs iroW^s avTiXoy ias, viii. 53. voWi^v dvTiXoyiau xal 
 ax^'^^'-o-ffy^bv, where the word plainly imj)lie8 a violent dispute between two 
 parties. It is possible that Popp.'s meaning, * Rechtfertigungstgriinde,' counter 
 •plea, or argument in excuse, justification, may be correct. Kriig.'s interpre- 
 tation would differ from the above in making rb jxt) ViK-qdiv t^s yv<J:fir}s the 
 accusative coming after dfi^XOveffdai, and following the analogy of dfjL^Xvvfadai 
 TTjv yvufiTjv, and similar phrases. In this case the i}/J.di, which is the subject of 
 dfx^Xvpcadai, is again supplied without change before vofiiaai. 
 ivh€\t<r9ai. See i. 124. 140, and iv. 18. e. Toiis avTovs is made 
 
 by Am. the predicate, the brave should always be the brave, the same persons, 
 and we may quote in confirmation 6 ai>r6s «>t tj yvw/xy, iii. 38, and v. 75, as 
 well as CEd. Tyr. v. 557, auros ilyn t<^ ^ovXevfxari. But it is also possible to 
 make rot's aurovs the subject, 'tis right to hold that those who remain unchanged 
 in purpose are brave men rightly so called (or as Kriig. has it gebuhrender weise 
 i.e. as is seemly they should), and not to think that they can while still retaining 
 courage (or claiming to be brave men) by putting forward inexperience as an 
 excuse with any show of reason show the white feather in any respect. The 
 adverbs ciV6tws and 6p6u)s seem to be contrasted, and are used in a somewhat 
 pujuliar manner. Cf. note upon (piXLus ov voXefxLus, iii. 65. The metaphor 
 
 Chap. 88.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 253 
 
 contained in irpoPoXXofi^vovs is 'shielding themselves behind inexperience as a 
 pretext.* 
 
 (c.) |ivV||iTiv here seems to be the faculty of recollection. Krug. quotes 
 fX€fivf)(Tdui dyad6s €hai, Xen. Anab. iii. 2. 39. Aycv ev^o^x^as. This 
 
 is a sort of fallacy not uncommon in practice, though not noticed in the rheto- 
 rical treatises, where the speaker covertly implies the incompatibility of two 
 qualities, and argues from the presence of one the absence of the other. See 
 for illustration Mr. Macaulay's remarks upon Montagu and Harley, Vol. iv. 
 UtrXi^a-a-ii-frighteyis out. Cf. rb Xvir-qpbv iKTrX-f^aaei, ii. 38, and Aristotle's 
 iKKpoiei rriv ivepydav. upbs p^v rh 4|i7r€ip<jT€pov K.r. \-against 
 
 their superiority in practice, place your superiority in courage. 
 Tvx€iv. With no expressed participle. Cf. i. 32. b. 
 
 (d.) irtpiyiyvtrai—fhere results as a balance in your favour, i.e. after the 
 calculations just recommended, as the verb is used ii. 39. Tiie meaning arises 
 from the force of wepl, 'over and above,' i. 2. b. See a somewhat remarkable 
 combination of the prep, with dfii, vi. 55, ttoXX^ tc^ tt^pLovtl, and again viii. 
 46, iK ireplovTos, ej^-abundanti. 'tr\r]eos~superior numbers. Cf 
 
 supra i. 106. b. 125, and infra 89. a. rd TroXXd, adverbiallv as 
 
 i. 13. a. So Napoleon said, Providence generally favours the strono- 
 battalions. a{rra ravra k. t. \.— the fact that these very mishaps 
 
 have befallen us will teach us better for the future. In accordance, as Am. 
 says, with the proverb TraOrmaTa fiadiqfxaTa. 
 
 {e.) rh KaO' tavrov—so far as concerns himself, Krug. rather in his own 
 imrticular department, or duty. x«pav. I have pointed out in a note 
 
 upon A'lach. Agam. 11. (Terminalia ii.) that this is the technical military word 
 for 'station.' Cf iv. 126. e., i. 28, iii. 22, vii. 49, viii. 71. Xen. ^wa6. iv. 8. i-. 
 <^v— PovXt^Oiq. On ^j/, as distinguished from el, see note i. 120. c, and on Kal 
 to be rendered by an emphasis on the auxiliary verb, see i. 15. b. 
 TipT|o-ovTat. We have the regular passive form, rL/xrjerja-oirrai, vi. 80, but on 
 these middle for passive forms, see i. 68. c. 81. b. The instrumental dative 
 in this case makes it more difficult to give the middle sense— shall win honour 
 for themselves by means of the rewards, d:c. 
 
 Chapter LXXXVIII.— (a ) rh irXT]0os. Cf. supra, 87. d. 
 |vvio~rtt|i€voi. Haack rightly remarks that this is equivalent to Kara ^vardaeLS 
 yiyv6/j.(voi, sup. 27. 2, forming into groups among themselves. ^ 
 
 TM irapovTi. There is doubtless, as Krug. notices, a sort of reference to 
 Trpbrepov—dnder the existing circumstances. ^ryc. Note the im- 
 
 perfect of continuous action ; he/.ept telling them, or, it was his wont to tell them. 
 Kriig. says ws may be simply attached to (Xeye, and the woi-ds TpoTrapeaKe^^afe 
 rds yvivfias considered as a bid fx^aov. But it is in reality attached to both 
 verbs, for the plain reason that irpoTrapeffKeOai^e is a sort of epexegesis to ^Xeye. 
 It was by what he said to them that he prepared them to adopt the notion tr. 
 
 prepossessed their minds with a notion. avrots avToic The 
 
 repetition is awkward, but the first avrois is the dative, as in the common usage 
 Quid mihi Celsus agit—for them, i.e. which they might meet with. See remarks 
 on ch, 89. c. 
 
 (6.) 5x^ov— (nroxwpctv. One of the cases where a neuter verb passes into 
 
254 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book II. 
 
 an active one, because it expresses some action commonly described by an 
 active verb ; as it has an active sense it takes an active construction. So 
 V7re|eX^6»T€S rovrovi, iii, 34, and iv. 28, i^av^x^P^'-T^ elprjfi^va — was for backing 
 out of what he had said. Cf. in Latin 'egredi urbem,* and similar phrases. 
 Popp. refers to Pflugk ad Eur. Bee. v. 812. See Jelf, § 548. ob. The word 
 6x^os is used with somewhat of contempt. Remark the absence of the ai*ticle 
 with'A^77i'atoi and UeXoirovvTjalwv, conveying, as it does, the reason of the fact 
 implied in the verb. vir<J|ivT^<riv— tov daporctv. This is not, I 
 
 think, as Dale and some others have understood it, to put them in mind of the 
 confidence they once felt, but it is simply, as Kriig. has it, an exhortation to con- 
 fidence, as iv. 17. b., virdfivTjffiv rov KaXQi ^ovXevcaaOai. So too fii/j.v7)ffKCcrdai 
 is by no means always recordari, but sometimes merely mentionem facere, 
 i. 10, dWwj/ incy^dovi iripi ovk ifimfjadrj, i. 37, ii. 45. b., iii. 90. It is, however, 
 easy to see how one idea runs into the other. 
 
 Chapter LXXXIX.~{a.) rh irXfi0os. Cf. ch. 87. d. That the interpre- 
 tation there given is correct seems clear from the fact, that the contrary notion 
 is here expressed by ovk airb rod tffov — not on an equal scale. This, at least, I 
 believe to be the meaning of the words, from such phrases as fxrj dirb duTnrdXov 
 irapaaKevTJ^, i. 91 ; and dirb rov (aov, i. 77, 99, 136, I43, where see note ; iii. 
 10, 1 1 ; dirb rov taov bfiiXovtn-ei, and many others, as dvb tCjv bfioioiVy viii. 89. 
 Kriig., however, inclines to the interpretation, with inferior means for prepor 
 ration. 
 
 (6.) Iircira w p-aXwrra, k. t. X. I should be inclined to tr. this controverted 
 passage — ^ And then with regard to the point upon which they principally place 
 their reliance in coming foricard to the combat, as though it were a peculiar pre- 
 rogative of theirs to be brave men, they feel confident for no other reason than 
 on account of their general success, which they owe to their experience in land 
 service, and they fancy it will do the same for them at sea.' The relative <^ has 
 for its antecedent either tovto simply (Arn. Kriig,), or we may assign it to the 
 class of cases mentioned by Madvig, Gr. Gr. — 'A preceding relative sentence, 
 with a relative in the neuter, occasionally assigns merely the action, opinion, or 
 utterance, upon occasion of which something is remarked in the principal sen- 
 tence, and signifies with regard to.' In this case, the clause in apposition is 
 ws irpoariKovdvai. The verbs olovraL and ddpaovaiv are, despite what Arn. says, 
 simply connected by the conjunction. As for the subject of toi^<x€iv, it seemti 
 to me in vain to dispute whether it be rrfv i/xireiplav k. t.X., or the rb dvbpuov 
 implied in the tovto, which is antecedent to <^, for both are possible, and neither 
 can be disproved. The last, as nearer, looks more probable. rh 8^ 
 
 .... ircpi^oTai — But this in all justice, %. e., rb avrb, — that is to pay, the suc- 
 cess, rb Karopdovv, implied in KaropdovvTes, — will, as things are, turn out (come 
 round) to be ours. This appears simple and unobjectionable. But other Editors, 
 as Goll. and Am., refer rb 5^ to Tto-rei/ovrej trpoffipxovTai, and make it the 
 confidence of victory ; TrepUarai — will be as balance in our favour. Cf. Ttpi- 
 ylyverai, supra, ch. 87 d. Their principal argument is, that we have ix toO 
 biKalov, and not iK tov eUbros. But to say, that the expectation of what is pro- 
 bable is a 'just expectation,* is surely natural in all languages. Cf. ch. 87. a, 
 biKalav TTjv T^Kfiapaiv. Popp., on i. 51 b, has collected a great number of similar 
 
 Chap. 89.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 ^55 
 
 adverbial phrases— ^/c rov 4>avepov, iK tov ofiolov, &c. ; etirep—if we grant for 
 the sake of argument. iy Udvia—in that other case; i. e. by land. 
 
 T«I) 84 K.r.\. — but in what we either of us possess superior experience, therein 
 we posses,i superior courage. If ri be read before ifiwupbrcpoL, it may either 
 be a mere qualification, at all, or it may mean more experience in any matter, 
 whatever it be. 
 
 {c.) 8iA T^v o-<|)€T€pdv Uiav—for their own glory's saTce, i.e., upon purely 
 selfish princi|>le8, without regard to the interest of the allies—' bid hie valet 
 tv€Ka ut iv. 102, y. 53,' Popp. See Jelf, § 627. ovk dv ^irc- 
 
 X«ipT]<rav K.T.X. i. e., if not subjected to some compulsion of the kind. 
 irapa iroXv. ^ Cf. i. 29 c. irKtrriri^ov—' one for which there is 
 
 more ground.' ovk Slv ^Yovvrai— by hyperbaton for rjyovvTai. dv 
 
 avdiaTaffdai. The usage is to be explained upon the same principle as the 
 double dv. When anything contingent is to be stated, the Greeks prepare the 
 hearer for it at once by bringing forward, even out of its place, or at the risk of 
 repetition, the particle used to denote such contingency. See e.g. infra c. 94. a. 
 Arn. compares the German practice of placing the auxiliary verb at the com- 
 mencement, and reserving the principal verb for the close of the sentence. 
 TOV irapd iroXv. These words might certainly stand for a noun, like to TrapaOriKa, 
 iii. 4 b. ; Ti^irap Air/5a, iv. 62. Most editors, however, supply i/ej/i/c77/f^j/ai from 
 the preceding TrpoveviKrjKivai—worthy of the very signal victory ichich you hare 
 gained; and this seems confirmed by i. 29, ivlKrjaav irapd TroXi), and rjaffrjeivTes 
 irapd woXif just above, to which the article may refer. On rrapd, see i. 29 c, 41 c. 
 {d.) dvrCiraXoi. * Dubitatur utrum haec vox hie significet, pares viribus 
 an adversarios j^^ffnam committentes.' Popp. But says Krug. dvTlirdXoi. 
 never signifies enemies, in Thuc. ; and surely this is true. The collocation 
 shows the word to be contrasted with ^k iroXXi^ VTrobeearipuv, and therefore to 
 mean fairly matched in point of resources, tr. now 'tis when fairly matched in 
 externals that men in the generality of cases (as the Lacedcemonians now) go forth 
 against the foe, relying more on might than policy ; but those who on very un- 
 equal terms, yet entirely of their own free will, do the same thing ; these I sarj, 
 dare to meet the foe, because the assurance in their own minds is something very 
 powerful indeed — i. e. they must have some very powerful assurance in their own 
 minds to give them courage to meet the foe. In most of the cases where you 
 find men in battle trusting to strength and courage, rather than calculation, 
 they are at least upon equal terms with the foe ; where, therefore, you find 
 them doing the same thing upon very unequal terms, you may be sure they 
 are supported by a superabundance of vigour and resolution. This is one of 
 those passages which is easily slurred over, but becomes difficult upon exami- 
 nation. The above is, I think, the right interpretation. Of course after oi 5' 
 we must supply iT€px6p.€voi. TrCo-vvoi— the word recurs, v. 14. 
 
 Dionysius reckons it among the yXurrTudTj of Thuc. Kriig. remarks that it is 
 not found elsewhere in Gr. prose, but in Arist. Nub. v. 949. tw ovk- 
 
 cIkoti — that which is contrary to all reasonable expectation, improbability. We • 
 may tr. are more afraid of us owing to the very unreasonableness of our con- 
 duct, than if we had met them with the proportionate preparation ; or commensu- 
 rate preparations calculated according to reason. The article ry is used be- 
 cause the writer means the sort of preparation commonly found in such cases. 
 
256 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book II. 
 
 This is, I think, a fair answer to Krug.'s objection founded on the need of 
 its absence. He himself tr. our calculable force, the force which they can 
 calculate, but surely of /cara X670J' thus used * desiderantur exempU.' For 
 the sentiment, cf. vi. 34. 
 
 (c.) iroXXa 84 KoX—and further a^a/n— I^St) as frequently, ere nmc, cf. 77, 
 c. ; and with Kriig. TroXXd 175?; arpaTdireda 5ta tt)v Toiavrrjv apvayr]v dwwXfTO. 
 Plat. Rep. p. 469. Iirco-cv. Haase, according to a style of criticism 
 
 more popular formerly than at present, altered this word to firTaiafv, because 
 he did not find the verb TrtVTw so used in Tliucyci. But we have tt]v fieydXrjv 
 dvvaiJ.iv TT?5 7r6Xe«s ireirTujKviav, vii. 77 ; and there is no reason in the nature of 
 things, so fiir as I can see, why a similar metaphor should be inapplicable here. 
 Indeed, as Kriig. remarks, the connexion of the virb with firTai<T€v would form 
 a greater difficulty. The argument is implied rather than expresseil, and some- 
 what resembles that noticed above, 87, c. * Though the Peloponnesian force is 
 greatly superior, we may still hope to defeat it, for greatly superior forces have 
 frequently succumbed to inferior ones from inexperience or want of spirit. 
 These qualities don't attach to us. but we can't presume so much for them.' 
 UoiV €lvai. This phrase, it is well known, expresses a sort of reservation upon 
 the simple Uuiv—wilUnfjly if I can help it. I agree with Am. in thinking it 
 a relic of that early stage of language, when expletive clauses were as connnon 
 as they now are in the conversation of the vulgar. These garnish their dis- 
 course with many such unnecessary words and phrases, if so he, to he sure, and 
 the like, without much care for their grammatical coherence. The dvat here 
 resembles the former of the above expletives in meaning, the latter in absence 
 of construction. Jelf, § 667, explains— £/cwi' dvai^UCiv ovciav, ' according to 
 his real nature,' i. e. really. Madvig, § 151, says, ' The infinitive flvai stands 
 in a restrictive sense with the adjective (Kiov in negative sentences— <o he 
 tciUing, i. e. at least williivily ; rarely in affirmative sentences, and that 
 willinyly.' Tliis I consider nearer the truth. Rost's explanation, § 185, 5, does 
 not materially differ ; he classes it with such cases as the parenthetical ws eiireiy, 
 w$ e/xot 5oK€lv ; remarking that such infinitives are usually preceded by u>5 or 
 6ffov, but that they may be omitted. See also, i. 2 1, b. and Herni. Opusc. i. 227. 
 
 (/.) ^pipoX^v. The impact with the (fx^oXov, i. e. the rostrum or heak of 
 the ship, cf. vii. 34, 36. Krug. quotes jEsch. Pers(P, lyu/SoXatj xf^^'^oa-rdfioii 
 Traiovrai, v. 407. irpoo-o^fiv Bekker reads irpodrpiv, perliaps 
 
 ric'htly says Kriig. cf. iv. 29, d. It has been already remarked how hoi)ele88 
 i8 the confusion of these prepositions in MSS. U iroXXov— /rom a 
 
 distance, i. e. the 8i>ace necessary to give impetus for the charge, iv. 32, a. ; 
 jQQ ^j tv 8^0VTu— when in need, when in a position that required it. 
 
 I do not think that it is, as Popp. states, exactly equivalent to Uovrui^. So in 
 the passage quoted by Kriig. from Dem. iv. iO—rovru}v ovd^vi twtotc iy 
 be6vTt KiKXP'n<^^^- On an occasion requiring it, SUkttXoi. See i. 49, b. 
 
 6.vaLiTrpo^ai—tcheelinf/ back again, i. e. when the enemy's line had been broken 
 by the SiexTrXoi/s. If the line was but a short distance from the shore, like the 
 French fleet at Aboukir, this would be im])os8ible for want of room in which to 
 turn after passing through the hostile ships. I do not think Arn. is right in 
 confounding avacr po<p-n with the dfd/cpoi'crts, which was backing water after 
 having struck an enemy with the fix(3o\ov, in order to repeat the blow. Thit 
 
 Chap. 90.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 '57 
 
 would be possible if the enemy were ever so near the shore, because the attack- 
 ing ship would have the same space to back in, as it had to advance riiy 
 irpovolav-the provision, tr. I will make the necessary provision. ' 
 
 KaBC<rraa-eai— constitute itself a regular landfght. 
 
 (g.) irapd rats vavo-C-' contrary to the sense and the grammar.' Krii^r 
 It IS, however, retained by Popp. The objection is, I suppose, that rrap^ 
 cum dativo denotes rest near a person, or personified object. See Madvig 
 ^75, 2, who however only says usually with persons. Jelf, § 646 e remarks 
 that this constructio praegnans, i. e. of motion terminating in rest, is rare with 
 rapa and the dative, but quotes Uva. xapd T.<rcra0^^m, to go and stay u:ith 
 Ttssaphernes. Xen. Anab. ii.5,27. If ^apd stands here I would tr. ^0 «/^ ^.at^ 
 quretly by your ships. After rats in five good MSS. t€ is found : it is exnli 
 cable upon the principles expounded, i. 9. a. i.e. -.rap. vavci p.hovres, is a sort of 
 cumulative clause, repeating the idea contained in eHraKroi. Popp. tr ordinem 
 servantes et apud narem remanentes. -rrapar^cXXd^cva- Is there 
 
 not a special force in the present participle-^^e words of command as they are 
 girenf 6^4»s, like i. 70, 6^^u,s ^ircvoijcrac and iii. 82, rb e/XTrXT^/crcuj d^d 
 
 denoting quickness, or sharpness of apprehension. 8t' 6\Cyov equivalent 
 
 to „^ iK TdWov, supi-a (f.), and the same phrase, iii. 21, where it is, at a short 
 interval, cf. vii. 36, 71. l<t»opft^(r€«s. The word, as Arn. shows is pro 
 
 perly employed of a bhckade, as iii. 33, vi. 48, &c., but this it is said implies the 
 close observation of the blockading squadron. Phomiion might welt describe 
 the watch he had been keeping over the Peloponnesian fleet in these terms and 
 therefore the regular meaning of icpdpfivacs is applicable here. I do not think 
 Krug. 18 right in rendering with Heilmann, Anlauf the onset; or der Standort 
 der Feinde, the post from which the enemy is observing us. In fact as Arn 
 says, the word may apply to both parties, tcatching each other as we are at 
 a short distance. B h tc. So Bekker, and the other editors from a 
 
 conjecture of Stephens. The MSS. had ^are, for which some give u>s re but 
 inappropriately here. |v,x<|>^pa is. ' As iv. 26, 3; with an imper- 
 
 sonal dat. 1. J 23, a. ^s 8aov tois pvv ^vfM<p^pei, which is unusual. Cf. also Xen 
 Nell. vi. 2, 19. S^ep i^KLcra eis fidxw ^'M0^/)ft. The KaL which some ^rood 
 MSS. insert before ^vfi(p4p€i is unendurable.' Krug. 
 
 (h.) b &Y<iv. The struf/gle, containing within itself the idea of the issue of 
 the struggle, tr. great is that for which you hare now to fight, i. e. either the break 
 ing up of all the hopes which the Peloponnesians found upon their fleet or the 
 bringing more hom^ to the Athenians their fears respecting the sea; rbv d>6Bop 
 because it refers to what would then be a definite source of peril and appre' 
 hension. ad, either 'again,' with reference to what has been said" 
 
 § b. Popp. ; or, on the other hand, i. e, ' though you have a great struggle before 
 you.' Kriig. h^ola.\.— equal to what they were before. Cf i 3c, 
 
 oi'x oixoia r, dWorpluaii, and ii. 80, iii. 40, c. €0^Xovo-iv— literallv 
 
 do not choose to he, tr. are not readily; there is a similar Homeric usage- f,[jupul 
 ovK mX^ffKov ivdvTLOP. 11. xxi. 366, and somewhat similarly— rd Uvhpo. ovdeu 
 p.' mXei. dcddiXKeiv. Plat. Phcsd. 230, D. Cf. the more common analogous use 
 of <piX^u}. 
 
 Chapter XC. —iraptKfXiviro.—'cohortaius est; Cses. Cf. Xen. Anab, 
 
 B 
 
258 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book TT. 
 
 j^ ^ jf^ ^irl T€0-<rap«v. — 'Four abreast.* Of course, if iirl 
 
 fjLiaii rerayfxivoi means *in single line,' as Popp<i observes (or, as it is called tech- 
 nically, * in line of battle ahead') , irl T€<r<r. must mean four abreast, iirl fiids 
 is equivalent to the 6peioi \6xos of land warfare. Cf. Xen. Anab. iv. u. 8., 
 and Mailer's Dor. ii. p. 246 ^Eng. ed.). * Matth. {Gr. § 584) quotes this passage 
 of Thuc. to show that iirl reaa. means four deep ; but it is to be recollected 
 that a column four abreast, when turned into line, becomes four deep.' v. 
 Grote, vi. p. 277 n. ; Thirlw. iii. p. 155. ^'^^ J^*' cavTwv y^v.— 
 
 See this passage discussed, Appendix ii. 8<^w K^p<|i Tj-yovji^vw— 
 
 * the right squadron under Timocrates led the van.* Tlie circumstantial or nicxlal 
 dative. Jelf, § 603-4, 699 ; cf. Matth. § 405. ^irl 8' avr^ 
 
 qy in it ; in the right wing. Apa— ' if, as they had every reojfon 
 
 to suppose, Phonuio should suspect Naupactus to be the object of the attack.' 
 irX€($VTa ^irtirXovv. The expression appears so strange that Krug. would adopt 
 Bobree'.-? conjecture rX^ovre^ ; others quote ' tanti belli impetus navigavit.' Cic. 
 de imp. Cn. Pomp. § 34. We must tr. in mid course. I|« tov 
 
 cavTwv K^pws- To illustrate this by an analogy frt)m land-fighting, compare 
 Xenophon's account of the two lines at Cunaxa, Anab. i. 8, 13, roixovrn) y6.p 
 irXrjdei. irepiijv ^aaiXevs ioffre fxiffov rb iavTOv ^x^v tov Kupou evuivvfiov i^U) fjv. 
 Observe that (T(t>Cov and iavrCjv refer to the same subject, as viii. 76, P. 
 
 (c.) ^p-^fjwo 6vTt = dj/^pwTrwj/ oifK hbvTuiv. Ch. 25 a., undefended; as the 
 Messenians were marching along shore. Kara jiCav itr\ K^p«s. The 
 
 complete plirase: Kara fxiav alone might mean one deep; cf. vi. 32. Both toge- 
 ther mean in siwjle file. Cf. Herod, vi. 12 ; Liv. xxxvii. 29, 25. 
 irpbs ri\ >(r[— close off shore. iuria'in\h6v—' adversis front ibus,' 
 
 P. ; junctis frontibus, Goll. ; ra /i^rwira irap€ixov roh ivavrloi^, Schol. P, cf. 
 Liv. xxxvii. -23, 'In frontem directas habebant naves, et in frontem dirigebant;' 
 Hac conversione unum ilium (ttIxov quem ivl K^pws tX^ovtcs efficiebant, muta- 
 verunt in unum ^'761'. P. cf. Mull. Eumen. The word is itself an 8.Tra^ Xey. 
 in Thucyd. ; but we have t6 iffu niruirou, ' (he inner frorU of tlu wall,' iii. 
 
 11. Thuc. v. 10. 
 
 {d.) ws elx« Tdxovs.— V. Jelf, § 528. liri<rTpo<|>^v— VAc 
 
 mdden tacking round,' as we should say. It is used for any rapid evolution 
 or manoeuvre in war ; see Soph. a'd. Col. 1045. Reisig. cvpvx«piav, not 
 
 'open sea,' but cmnparatively open, mid-channel. i^iua-av, Duker says, 
 
 is the technical plu^se for driring an enemy's ship on shore. Cf. vii. 36, 52; 
 viii. 104-5. 8U4»0eipav — disabled, cf. i. 49-50- 
 
 v'iro<|>€v'Yov<ras— ' cw they were endeavouring to escape.' ava8ovp.€vot 
 
 — 'lashing them and towing them astern.' Cf. Xen. Hell. v. i, 21 ; and i. 50, 
 o&x elXKOv dvabovfxcvoi. avTOis avSpdon. v. Matth. § 405 ; Jelf, 
 
 § 604, I, iv. 14, I. l-irco-paCvovTCS. Cf. iv. 14 b, /cat Hia^al- 
 
 voPT€i is T^jv ddXaaaav ^vv tois 67r\ot$ dvd^iXKOv 6.vTi.Xap.^avbp.ivoi. tCiv vewv. 
 Wading, heavy anned as they were, into the sea, and having boarded the ships, 
 they fought from the decks, and recovered the ships while in the very act {iidr}) 
 of being carried off. 
 
 Chapteb XCT. — (a.) 4>0<lvovoriv.— 'A^r;j'afot, so. Observe the change of 
 subject. t<rxov<''*'' dvT(irp«poi k. t. 'A. — forming, close in shore, 
 
 Chap. 92.] 
 
 NOTES OX THUCYDIDES. 
 
 259 
 
 y- >»• ». U, vu. 34, 36, 40, viu. 53; Herod, viii. ii • Diod xii 6i • Wp« k 
 d,vvov,.vov. Observe the change of gender. We have 4 1, j'u.l tefofe' 
 
 have «a<».r<ra. followe<i by l3ouU^.e.oT ' *'" *''''• ^^ •"'»"' ^^ 
 
 Vn the y. L. ^ra,u,..^. and ^Ta.d^.fo., see note, ad i. 50, and Wessel ad 
 
 Lued 1: obeli^ed by Bek t Tnd oZTrT '"^ ""T""''''''^^'' <^»- 
 ^ - .1 , ; , '^P' ""•'• performing the evolution called 
 
 «^.Xo«, the whole ben.g equivalent to ^»d.aaa iiar, .ep„X,0.a. 
 
 (e.) .«p« Uyov. Cf. c.85 b. ,^e«/a. rA, K<5™s-.rf, 
 
 mm,, reus / Uv. xxxvi. 44, ■ holdina water ' as we sav ;w.l - ^ ! 
 
 ■.o,r>e. a^r .„, • Cf. Matth. g 35.' 5 ; j^.ulir "''''^;;:;^ 
 
 rm pern,ao>a,n. cf u 3, ; literally ■ inu,Ue,< by m./..«. 8^ quotes 
 an early .nstanoe from Hes. 0;>. et Die,, ^aX' d.,*^^,., ^,„ ^^„,, / The 
 Lat n., use ' mut.hs' m the same manner. See Heusing. ad Cic de Of Hi V 
 quoted by P.; and so dx..ro. Horn. «. ii. ,69; cf! Stallb. ^^ pft. "^ // 
 334 A. aXvffiTeXrjs, Polyb. iii. ti6 ; Hebr. xiii 17 j, "! 
 
 fjultXrlllir '"'r'"'" ^"^" hostis'exbrevi spatio in T/sa! e^^I 
 lacturus, Por<. a.^^e^VM>;cr.. has no connexion in signif. with ^06^^^^,/ in c 80 
 wh,ch .mphes .«i.,,, a position from which they could watch one7nother from 
 6p,i.. lh.s .s fron. op,d.. [So we have in the next sentence i.' 'JZ 
 
 Z7Ti~ '"f; "7 "'•'' " ''"' '""^"^^ '''' ^^^-"--« --e from them 
 so that they could make an mstantaneous charge upon them.' i^ 6Xiyo., of "' 
 
 IX. 338 , Tao. Ann.,. 70, iv. 33. «KuXav, here intransitive, ^ ran 
 
 aground. In ,v. 26 e, ,t is used transitively, and so i^oKiXXuu, 26. P. & K^ 
 
 Chapter XCII.-(a.) dirj, kvh% K€X€t;o-^aTos.-'The Athenians were beyond 
 measure elated by the incident, so that a single word from Phormio sufficed to 
 put them m active forward motion.' Grote, vi. p. 28 V cf c no r- 'a 
 crj^dov Ms, Soph. Aj 704, Lobeck. ^ ^ ' ^"^ "^^ '^'^^ 
 
 (6.) 8ta4>0€(povT€s dv€8Vj<ravT0. Cf. 90 d. vi 'ir€pl t^v oX AS 
 
 KaW8v. An elliptical, but very intelligible expression-' Which was sunk bv 
 the manoeuvring [^epc^Xovs] of the Athenian ship round the merchantman ' 
 iiiiT,a;y-.' delatus est ; vel proprie a mart eject us est.' iKTrlTruv is commonly 
 used mtlie sense of being cast on shore (so iK<pipeaeac, of fragments of wreck 
 
 IATk.'"" '^' "' """"''"• ""'' "' ''' ^"^- '' ^- = '^^^^ve7; 
 
 (c) «<m,<rav Secv. Another elhptical form- ' erected their trophy at the 
 spot from which they had put to sea.' Cf. with Bl. vi. 68, e^ -^s Kparelu dec 
 vavdyia The younger student may observe the difference between .avayla 
 ^miuavdyia,-the former meaning a shipwreck, the latter /ra^mm^. of wreck 
 &V€(\ovro-recorered, Ht. picked up; cf. i. 54. Cf. Xen. Jlell. i. vii 4 in the 
 famous passagedescribingthebattle of Arginuss*, didrcoMueiXouro rom mvdyovs, 
 
 a 2 
 
26o 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book II. 
 
 Tpoiratov Tfts Tooinjs &s K.T.X.-sub. roiv ..eJi.'. v. Steph. ap. Pop. ; cf vn. 54 ; 
 Lobeck ad Soph. Aj. .54. ^v^^.o-av. Cf. 84 c. ; i. e., to Poseulon, 
 
 whose temple stood there ; cf. Strab. viii. p. 3.VS. Tlie promontory seems to 
 have been called Drepanum, from its shape. Gottl. 
 
 id ) virh vvKra— at nvjhtfall, or under cover of night. als ib€t. 
 
 K says the dat. is naturally used here : -The ships with which they were t<> 
 have co-operated; cf. 83, a. and i. 116. &c. P. supplies avrovs, and says this 
 is an isolated instance of ^5ct with a dative. Cf. Matth. ^391. 
 
 Chapter XCIII.-8iaXi)<rai. Transitive— ' Before Cnemus and Brasidas 
 allowed the combined fleet to disperse.' Diod. xii. 49. x"K»vos.— 
 
 October. Thirl w. hihoJ^avnav- at the surf fjest ion. diroir€ipao-at. 
 
 Cf. vii. 43, diroireipaaai rov Tra^aretx^tr/iaros, and i. 61 d. P.; and iv. 135, 
 dreireipaceu 6 Bpaffiba^ llonSaias. d<^i''\a/cTO$, cf. c. 13, f- dKX^lo-ros. 
 
 See below, 94 c. rh iiriKpanlv. ' Such was the confessed superi<.nty 
 
 of the Athenians at sea, that while they guarded amply the coast of Attica 
 against privateers, they never imagined the possibility of an attack upon their 
 own main harbour, ' Grote vi. p. .86. rh v^p4<rtov- ' mttmg cloth.' 
 
 Grote who thus follows the Schol., who explains it as r6 K«ias ^5 ^Trt/ca^rj.'rai ol 
 ip^ffffovre^ 6id t6 m avurpi^eadai aOrQu rds irvyds, a very intelligible explana- 
 tion to any boating man. They had doubtless a second object, viz. to provide 
 ac^ainst the loss of force in the stroke which takes place when the oarsman sit^i 
 upon a slippery surface. See the Appendix to Am. Thucyd. by Dr. Bishop. 
 The jokes, however, in Aristophanes upon the subject, seem to indicate that the 
 skin of the Athenian seamen was rather more sensitive than the worthy Dr. 
 imacrines. Cf. Ar. Banrr, v. 223. Bl. quotes Plut. Them, iv., Ge/itaroAcX^s els 
 i^nZ^ffiOV fcai Kihirf)v ffvu^areiXe rhv rdv ' kdi^vaioiv bijfxov ; and Isocrat. p. 688. 
 Thirl wall (iii. 15") siipposes that the sailors made these virvp^aia, neat covers, also 
 available for sleeping on at night. [Cf. Virg. aeorg. iii. 3 '3, Usum in castro- 
 rum et miseris velamina nautis.] It is used for a saddle-cloth or riding-pad, 
 Diod. XX. 4. TpoirwTfipa— * the loop whereby the oar was fas- 
 
 tened to the oar-hole in the side, and thus prevented from slipping.' Grote, 
 u 8 who says that, especially with the oars of the Thranit^e, some thong must 
 have been required to prevent the oar from slipping downwards, whether the 
 fulcrum of the oar was formed by a thowell or notch on the gunwale, or by 
 a perforation in the ship's side. * Lorum quo remus ad scalmum (s. paxillum) 
 allicatur ' Cf. Bl. ad iEsch. Pers. 382. Leake {Att. p. 1 39) describes a similar 
 thong used in the moilem Greek galleys. P. Ruderririg, Heilin. Thirlwall 
 (u s ) calls it the thong for fastening the oar to the peg of the rotclock. Ht»mer 
 calls them Tpoiroi ; Od. iv. 782, iiprvvavTO 5' ip^rfxii rpoiroh iv SepfiaTiuoiaiu (a 
 line repeated, viii. 53) . They appear to have been also called arpoipol, corrupted 
 in Latin into ' struppus.' [Mr. Kich (s. v.) gives a drawing of the manner of 
 fastening the oars in a Mediterranean galley of the i6th century, and quotes 
 Vitruv. X. 3, 6, and Liv. ap. Isodor. Orig. xix.4, 9] ; v. Schol. ad Arist. Ach. 523. 
 liTcl oiJr' dirb tov irp- k. t. X.—' Nam nee aperte eos ausuros esse (adnavigare) 
 (luiete {i.e. se rem non prohibentibus), neque si in animum inducerent, se non pr»- 
 sensuros,' P. [But it is also very probable that KaS' 7)avxiav may mean 
 * quietly' in the sense of deliberately, in cool blood.] For dirb rod rrp. cf. i. 35 d. ; 
 
 Chap. 94.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 261 
 
 for Kad' vavxlap, in the sense of ' quiete,' see i. 83, iv. 22, 117, vii. 40, 73-4, 
 vni. 27. On the use of ji^ dv in a conditional proposition, see Jelf 810 i 
 814 ; Matth. § 520-3. On ToXjiTJo-ai after iyrei, Jelf, 889. The infinitives 
 seem to depend upon some verb signifying 'expectation,' to be supplied from 
 irpoaSoKla. Bekker corrects om-ou5^ (apparently with reason, though without 
 MSS. authority) into oCre-oihe. Kal 4x"povv. Kai, in its usual 
 
 meaning of carrying into eifect a preconceived plan. (So ch. 49, Kal iSpaaau 
 they actually did it.) Kal retains this sense in the form u Kal, Kal drj with the 
 p.p. &c. K. cf. iv. 8, vii. 60. viii. I, 3, 27 ; of. Jelf, 761-3. 
 Xiyira, implies (;is elsewhere in Thucyd.) that it was not his opinion that this 
 was the real cause of their abandoning their original intention. 
 rh dKpon^piov-t. c, povdopou, as we learn from the next chap. This waa the 
 western promontory of Salamis, only three miles distant from Nis^a The 
 fortress which stood on the peninsula bore the same name. (It is sometimes 
 written /3ot;5u,po., Steph. Byz. s. v.) Cf. iii. 51 ; Diod. xii. 49 ; Strab. xi. 446. 
 «|>yAaK^. Cf. oh. 69. 'A squadron maintaining a strict blockade to prevent 
 all imports and exports' (/x^ iairXelu fir,8' iKirXelv fx-qb^v). 
 
 Chapter XCIV.-(a.) k^ rds 'Ae^vas. to convey the intelligence to 
 f ^^'^"f • 4>pvKToC uoX^^ioi. ' War-beacons, ' to distinguish them 
 
 from those used in peace. Cf. iii. 22, 80. From the long note of the Scholiast 
 It appears that they resembled those used in the middle ages, and which are 
 figured in most works on heraldry. The peace signal was borne quietly 
 [r,pe^.ovvr,s\ Schol. The war signal was shaken [K.vovure,], in token of alarm. 
 Diod xii. 49, 4, expresses it by the word irvpa.itLv. Cf. Xen. Anah. vii. 8 
 15 ; Eunp. El. 694 ; Polyb. x. 43. The classical passage, in illustration, is of 
 course the commencement of the Agamemnon of ^schylus. Cf. Herod vii 
 182. IX. 3. So <f,pvKTu>pia. Soph. Tr. 379; Arist. Av. 1,61 : and the passive 
 form <PpvKru,pdaeac. Time. iii. 80. go-ov o^k. v. Jelf, 823 
 
 f"^' *• •*'*^»' *''«»'«>«• I^ale tr. at was not a wind which would 
 
 have prevented them.' There is a sort of irony implied. Tr. therefore 
 ' always supposing of course that the whid had not prevented them.' See note 
 on Xiy^rac in the previous chap., and K. Engelman tr. has ' der Wind wurde 
 $te nicht gehindert hahen.' 
 
 (c.) IcTTi 7dp 5,Ti- to a certain extent. The reading now adopted for the 
 old fan yap Sre, from Abresch's emendation. <rr4yova-aK ' not 
 
 being waier-tiyht.' ' Quai aquarum vim ferre non poterant.' P. of. ^sch S 
 Th. 204 (with Blomfield's note), l^y, Supp. 135, HXa <jTiyu,v. Eur. Fr. Inc. 9 • 
 /A^., 888; Plat. /?.;,., 621 A. ^.joi. On foot The objections 
 
 of Popp. and Krug., who would read ^.^V, are quite nullified by Trefoils nopevo. 
 fiipovi. VII. 75, 7 . Said also of sailors proceeding by land. Crit. iii. D. ; 
 Plut. Philop. 14. iidXXov. ' more diligently,' as often in Thuc. ' 
 
 Aiji^wv KXrj^iriK-harhour-shutting, and other kind of precaution. For the 
 indefinite plur. X.;.<?.a,.. Cf. ad i. 93, b. Cf. Thuc., iv. 8, c. Diod., u. s., 
 Tb, 5^ nupa^a KXeiepocs Kal <pvXaKacf Uamcs 5m\a/36i.res (custodiis opportunis 
 locis collocatis^ d^xOp^^aau. Hcsych. in Z^a. ?x« 5^ 6 Hetpat.^s Xcp^i.as rpeh 
 -^^^<^rov,. Gottl. See Leake, A then., p. 338, gq. P. Qrote vi., p. .88. 
 The lesson was salutary to the Athenians ; from henceforward Peiraeus was 
 
 ^ I 
 it 
 
262 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book II. 
 
 furnished with a chain across the mouth, and a regular guard down to the end 
 of the war. Forty years afterwards, however, we shall find it just as negli- 
 gently watched, and surprised with much more boldness and dexterity by the 
 Lacedaemonian captain, Teleutias.' Cf. Xen. Bell. v. i, 19. 
 
 Chapter XCV. —(a.) The following episode is of great value (ch. 95-101). 
 Thucyd. himself descended from a Thracian ancestor, living at the time he wrote 
 his history in Thrace, and having considerable possessions and large influence 
 in the country would have ample means of acquiring full information on the 
 subject which he treats. [Cf. Thuc. iv. 104; Herod, v. 16. Marcellin. in vH 
 Grote vi., p. 293. n. With regard to Macedonia, on the other hand, both 
 Miiller {Dor. i. 454, E. T.) and Gatterer consider the accounts of Herodotus to 
 be more accurate than those of Thucydides. (Gatt. diss, de Uerodoti tt 
 Thucyd. Thracid, quoted bv Mull.) For the Thracians generally see Herod. 
 V. 3, 9, vii. no, viii. 116, ix. 119; Thuc. ii. 100, vii. 29, 30; Xen. Anab.^ vu. 
 1, 38, and the seventh book generally. Grote, iv., p. -28. x^^K-"^®'- 
 
 Thirlwall places this expedition in October. Dodwell {Ann. Thuc.) in October, 
 or Mamaktaion. Grote in November or December. (Observe that Clinton 
 identifies M(emakterion with November. Diss, on Attic months, vol. ii., p. 326.) 
 The Athenians complained of the dilatoriness of Siulkes, who ought to have 
 coumienced his invasion at a better season for military operations, but, as Grote 
 observes, the number of independent chiefs over whom he had not even nommal 
 control, rendered this very difficult, if not im[>ossible. SitoXki]?. 
 
 Cf. ad chap. 29. *08pv<rTis. The Odrysae seem to have belonged 
 
 to that northern swarm of barbarians who invaded Thrace after the Trojan 
 war, and their name is often found interwoven with the ancient myths. Thus 
 the Thracian singer Thamyris is said to have been an Odrysian (Pau-s. iv. 33, 4), 
 and Orpheus is represented as their king. In Herod, iv. 92 (see Bahr's note), 
 we find them on both sides the Artiscus (now Arda) ; and the Hebrus itself is 
 said to have had its sources in their country. Their name first occurs in the 
 account of the Scythian expedition of Darius Hystaspis. While the south parts 
 of Thrace were overrun by the Persians, the Odrysians, protected by their 
 mountains, retained their independence. Teres was hence enabled to incorporate 
 many Thracian tribes with his subjects, and to extend his kingdom to the 
 Euxine, in spite of a signal defeat which he sustained in that quarter from the 
 Thyni. [Xen. Anab. vii. 2, 22.] In subsequent times they were completely 
 sulrjugated by Philip of Macedon. v. Cramer, vol. i., p. 286, sq. Smith's 
 IHct. Geog. s. v. 8vo viro<rx(<rti%. Tlie accusative absolute. 
 
 ffxw<i Kad' 6\ou Kui fiipos. * We sometimes find an accusative without any 
 verb on which it directly depends, followed by two other accusatives of its pai-ts, 
 each with its proper verb, on the joint notion of which it depends.' Cf. Soph. 
 Ant. 21; Jelf, §581, 4; Matth.,§288;tr. of two promises, wishinf/ to exact the 
 fulfilment of one,\nd himself to fulfil the other: Engel. tr. neatly gives the 
 sense : * Von zwel Versprechungen, die eine einzufordern, die andere selbst zu 
 erf alien: Bl. cf. Hebrews vi. 18. 
 
 (6.) avTw viro<rxofievos. tr. 'having made him certain promises: what the 
 nature of these promises was Thuc. has not told us. SioXXA^cvcv. 
 
 Cf. chap. 29. He had done so. *CXiinrov. Perdiccas ought to 
 
 ♦\ 
 
 Chap. 96.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 263 
 
 have given a certain portion of his kingdom to Philip and to Derdas. [Cf. 
 Mailer's Dor. i. 468; Thuc. i. 57, n., vi. 7.] From Thuc. words (chap 100 c, is 
 TTiv 4>i\iinrov irpbrepov oCaav apx^J" ) Poppo thinks he had actually been put in 
 possession and reigned, but had been expelled by Perdiccas. He was now 
 probably dead, as Sitalces purposes to restore, not him, but his son Amyntas : 
 KaTaydyoi stems also to confirm this view. ^irl pao-iXcC^. Matt., 
 
 § 586, with a view to placing him upon the throne. ovk cirercXci 
 
 wasnot for fulfilling. The imperf. implies that he 'showed no disposition or 
 intention to fulfil his promise.: 
 
 . (c.) "AYvwva. Most of the modern German editors read this word with an 
 aspirate. This was the founder of Araphipolis, B.C. 437. v. Schol. [Cf. iv, 
 102, i. 57, ii. 58. For Amphipolis, see Clinton, F. H. ii. 261.] Cramer, i. 
 291 ; Thuc. i. loc; Arist. Eth.N. v. 7 ; Paus. Att, 29; Plin. //. iV., iv. 10; 
 Actsxvii. 1. ««t. Cf. ch. 83. a. The delay of Sitalkes pre- 
 
 vented their sending them. 
 
 Chapter XCVI.— (a.) kvicrrr^a-xy. Cf. ch. 68. a, 'ex sedibus evocat: 
 6pp,wn€vos has here its primary meaning, * setting out from ;' not the usual one 
 in Thuc, 'taking up his head quarters at: See note, i. 54. b. 
 At(iov. Cf. ch. xix. 6. Mr. Grote (chap, xxv., note) remarks that we learn 
 from the researches of modern travellers and geologists that the ideas of the 
 direction and ramifications of this great range entertained up to the present 
 time are very erroneous. It was considered to be a great belt extending from 
 the Adriatic to the Euxine, running nearly parallel with the coast of the -:Egaean, 
 and with spurs branching off in a southerly direction, forming the water-shed 
 of the Hebrus, with its tributaries Artiscus, Agrianes, Contadesdus, Tearus, 
 &c., the Nestus and Strymon. The ancients considered it as the highest range 
 with which they were acquainted, though Polyltius thought the elevation less 
 than that of the Alps (xxxiv. 10, 15). It was said that from its summit could be 
 seen at once the Euxine, Adriatic, the Danube, and Alps, and to see this view, 
 Philip, last king of Macedon, made the journey described by Livy (xl. 22). 
 PHny, iv. 10, estimated its height at 6000 paces. Modem travellers consider 
 the great Balkan to be 3000 feet high. Haemus proper, like the modern 
 Balkan, extends from Mount Scomius to the Euxine. It is also known by the 
 name of Emineh Dagh. Horn. Il.xiv. 227; Herod, iv. 49; Theoc. Id. vii. 76; 
 Strab. vii. p. 313; Virg. Georg. i. 491, ii. 489; Ov. Met. vi. 87. v. Cramer 
 i., p. 318; Smith, Diet. Geog, s. v. 0aXdo-<rTjs €s tov Eiigetvov 
 
 irdvTov. Popp. says this is added because EC^. tr. was also used for 'the 
 countries bordering on the Euxine.' Cf. Xen. Anab. v. i, i. fi^xP'-^ ^"""^ 
 6d\aTTav rrjy iv t<^ Ev^dvii) Tr6vT(^. v'ir€ppdvTi. The dat. of reference 
 
 rather curiously employed. See Jelf, § 599, i; Thuc. i. 24. a., ii. 49, c. ; 
 Herod, i. 14, 51, iii. 90, vi. 53, &c. V-h^- 7^"^- ^dvQv dr]\ov6Ti. 
 
 Schol. Hence Poppo would rather read yivrf or idurj. K. sees no need of 
 change, and cf. Acts ii. 10. For Kar(UKT]To see i. 120. b. P. 
 
 "Icrrpov TTOTafiov. For the account of the Thracian rivers see Herod, iv. 48, 
 
 (6.) r^Ttti. Cf. Herod, iv. 93. ol iOavarl^ovTes. The Getae lay between 
 the Haemus and the Danube, occupying the modem Bulgaria and part of Servia, 
 
264 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book II. 
 
 and were equipped like their Scythian neighbours on the other side of the river, 
 with bow and arrow, on horseback. They were reckoned by the ancients 
 among the Thracian group of nations, a notion which is supported by Schafarik, 
 who has written on Sclavonian antiquities. The theory which identified them 
 with the Goths of Scandinavia has been exploded. After the days of Phihp of 
 Macedon they extended over the couniries now known as Wallachia and Mol- 
 davia, and became known to the Romans under the formidable name of Daciaos. 
 Mannert even thinks they stretched as far as Transylvania and Hungary. See 
 the valuable note of Bahr, on Herod, u. s. Smith's Diet. Geog. s. v. Dacia. 
 o^oo-Kcvoi. * Cult u similes.' P. cf. iii. 95. t«v ^pcivwv . . . 
 
 avTov6p.(i)v. In ch. ci. we read of the Autonomous inhabitants of the plain. 
 Aloi. Cf. vii, 27, where we read of 1300 of this race {rov AiaKoO yivovi) who 
 arrived too late to take part in the expedition of Demosthenes against Sicily. 
 Xen. Ct/r. vi. 2, 10 ; Lips, ad Tac. Ann. iv. 46. Ovid, speaking of these 
 regions, says [Trist.y. 7, 19], — 
 
 Dextera non segnis fixo dare vulnera cultro, 
 Quern vinctum lateri barbarus omnis habet. 
 
 {c.) *A"Ypiavas Kal AaiaCovs. (v. Herod, v. 16.) The Paeonian Agrianea 
 were a considerable tribe in point of territory and population. Strabo says 
 that the Strymon had its source in their country. They were therefore probably 
 located near the foot of that part of Hamus known to the ancients as Scomius 
 and Ilhodope. They were not molested by the Persians when the great removal 
 of the PjEonians took place under Darius. (Herod, u. s.) In the time of 
 Alexander the Great they were under the rule of their native princes, and did 
 him good service in repressing the incursions of the Triballi, who lay on their 
 north frontier. (Arr. ^. .4. i. 5.) They formed excellent light-armed troops, 
 and are frequently mentioned in the campaigns of Alexander. (Diod. Sic. xvii. ; 
 Q. Curt. i. 12, 14, ii. 12, 10 ; Polyb. ii. 65, v. 79.) v. Cramer, i. p. 274, who 
 says that this is the only passage where the name of the Lsesei occurs. They 
 were probably to the east of the Strymon. Smith, Diet. Geog. s. v. 
 2tcop,£ov. P. reads iKbix^pov (and so Heysch.). Scopius in Pliny, H. N. iv. 
 10 ; Scombrus; Arist. Meteor, i. 13. Cramer, i. p. 273, considers Scomius to 
 be the Ixhodope of Herodotus, both being, in fact, summits of the same great 
 central chain. H-^P^ FpaaCwv. It seems certain from the context 
 
 that the Graieans were the subjects of Sitalces, and accordingly fitxp'i cannot 
 mean, as usually, * up to a certain point of time, or place objectively.' From 
 this passage therefore, and some others, I am induced to believe that it sometimes 
 has the force of coextensive with, i. e., with that which the succeeding genitive 
 specifies. Here then it implies his empire went just so far as the Grao'ans went^ 
 and no farther. So in i. 71, c. (where see note), ti^xpt- ^ovSe is, just so far as 
 this goes, and no further. Cf. i. 51, 90, c, and especially ^fXP^ ^^O SiKaiov, iii. 
 82. Would not this interpretation entirely simplify that difficult passage, Rom. 
 v, 13 ? Axpf- vbfJLOv d/xapria fjv iv Kdfffiq) is tr. * until the law sin was in the world,' 
 though the apostle's argument is, — there is no sin without law: there is sin 
 wherever there is law ; a meaning exactly given by dxpl in the above sense — 
 ' s^in was coextensive with laic,' both nouns being anarthrous. I would suggest 
 a similar interpretation for another well-known passage, which has puzzled all 
 
 Chap. 97.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 265 
 
 the commentators, and is altered as corrupt by Hermann and others. Ar. Poet. 
 § 1 2. i) n^ o!fu iTTovdua rfj Tpay(^3U(f. /xexpl fi6vov fxiTpov fiera \6yov fiiix-qcns elvai 
 CTovbalu)!/ 7iKo\ovd7)a€v, tr. ' The epos has gone along with tragedy only in this 
 one point of being the imitation of exalted characters in metrical language.' 
 This interpretation is, I think, confirmed by another passage in the same treatise, 
 del fih 6 Mci'fwv, fxexpi rov avvdrfXa^ dvat, KaWluv iari, where fiexpi is clearly 
 inclusive. Tr. ' the longer a plot be, the better it is, provided it be at the same 
 time clear.' fxex- t. a. €. = coincident with clearness. oi wpClero. 
 
 * apud quos populos.' P. fjSt). ' Having crossed the boundary, you 
 
 are at once in the territory of the autonomous Paeonians.' ifd-q usually marks the 
 point of time : here the limit of space. In fact, the two are mixed together. 
 The primary notion is retained in the verb iapL^ero. K. compares v. 67, vii. 4, 
 viii. Id ; and so Eurip. liippol. \. 200, 
 
 irpb^ TTovTov ij5T) KUfxivr) HapcovLKdv. 
 {d.) TptpaWovs. The Triballi, as we have seen above, lay to the N. of 
 the Agrianes. They bordered also on the Paeonians, and reached to the 
 Danube, * extending, as far as can be detennined, from the plain of Kossovo 
 in modern Servia, northwards towards the Danube,' Grote, xii. p. 31. At the 
 time of Alexander's accession, they were by far the most numerous and power- 
 ful people of Thrace. Alexander began his reign by invading their territory, 
 and having defeated them, pursued them across the Danube, and made them 
 sue for peace. They had previously defeated and wounded his father, Philip 
 (Grote, xi. p. 639). It was while fighting against the Triballi that Sitalces was 
 afterwards killed. Cf. Bahr n. ad Herod, iv. 49 ; Arist. Aves, 1528, 1626. 
 'Oo-kCov. Gatterer (in his treatise quoted above) considers that the proper 
 name of this river is "Ho-Artos, or "EaKios, which is retained in the modern Ischar 
 or Isker River, near the Danube, and Mannert follows his view. The edd. of 
 Herod. 8i>ell it ii/ci^s and KToj or Kids. In Strab. xiii. p. 590, we find iKaids, 
 Plin. H. N. iii. 29, (Escus. Hudson reads '0<tkIov, and so Poppo, Kriiger, 
 and Giiller. Herod, represents it as rising in Mount Rhodoj)e, amongst the 
 PiEonians, and dividing Haemus in half, iv. 49. Cf. Cramer, i. 273, who spells 
 it Escius. N^cTTos Kal 6 "Eppos. Both these rivers are men- 
 
 tioned as taking their rise in Mount Scomius or Rhodope. In the time of 
 Philip, the Nestus was the boundary of Thrace and Macedonia, and continued 
 to be so under the Roman government. It is spelt both Nestus and Nessus. 
 In the middle ages it was corrupted into Mestus, and is still called Mesto, 
 or Carasou (Black river) by the Turks, v. Cram. i. p. 308 ; Herod, vii. 109, 
 126 ; Plin. iv. ir ; Liv. xlv. 29. The Hebrus, now Maritza, is the principal 
 river of Thrace: rising in the junction of Scomius and Rhodope, it receives 
 many tributaries (v. Herod, iv. 89. 92), and falls into the ^.gean near ^nus, 
 forming an estuary called by Herod. Stentoris, vii. 58; Cramer, i. p. 316; 
 Smith's Did. Geog. s.v. ^prjjiov. Cf. Herod, i. 117, ^p-qixov ovpos. 
 
 The epithet implies that species of wildness and desolation which arises from 
 the absence of human habitations. Bl. of. the Latin secretus, and supposes 
 that Milton used a Latinism when writing by the secret top of Horeb, &c. 
 
 Chapter XCVII.— (a.) 'ApS^pwv. Cf. chap. 29. a. ivi ddXaaaav kut^- 
 Kovaa — taking tlce litie of sea-coast = t6 irapd ddXaa. Herod, ii. 6. 
 
266 
 
 KOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book II. 
 
 avrt] ircpCirXovs ccrrlv t| -yt]. irepinXovi may be used adjectively, or substan- 
 tively. The Schol. takes the fonner view, and so Abresch. A', inclines to the 
 latter, and cf. Herod, ii. 29, to x^P^o'' '^^^^ ^*^^t ^^^ w^pa^ r^acfpas irX6os. 
 (We find the adj. wpQirUos, vi. 44.) Kara irpvjivav. Cf. S<iph. 
 
 Phil. 1431. {<rrryra\.— stand, i.e. be permanently fixed in that 
 
 quarter during the voyage, if there be no foul winds. vilt (rrpcy- 
 
 yuXx). Merchantmen continued their route during the night, the men-of-war's 
 men generally landed and slept on shore, cf. ch. 93. a. n. ; Herod, iv. 86. 
 ciJtwvos. €v<XTa\T]S, Kal KoO^oj, Kal p-riUv ix^v rb ifiirobi^ov, Sch. cf. Herod. 1. 
 74. 103, ii. 34, iv. loi [where the day's journey is computed at 200 sUdes], 
 vi. 49, 97 ; ken. Anab. iv. ii. 7, iii- vo. 6hi^-itinere terrestri, P. 
 
 V. Jelf, § 603. 2. avvatti. = TfXet above. The idea implied is that 
 
 oi accomplishiivj with dispatch. Cf. Dionys. Perieg. 985. 
 
 r6aaov AvevOev ICjv 6aov ^^Sofiov fifxap bhiv<xa% 
 l(pdi.p.o<i Kal Kpaiirvbs dvrjp (xvv<T€i€V oSItt/s. 
 
 vpo(rf\l<xv— brought in. The first aorist is very rare, P. cf. Lobeck Phryn. 
 187. We find the first aor. midd. in Horn. 11. viii. 545, iK TrbXios 5' &^avTo 
 ^6as Kai t<pia /xrjXa. ScvOov. iv. loi. This Seuthes must not be 
 
 confounded with the Tliracian king at the time of the return of the Ten Thou- 
 sand, Xen. Anab. vii. 2. 17, iii. 7- TrrpaKO<r£«v raXdvTwv. Diod. 
 [xii. 50], with his usual amplification, fixes the revenue of Sitalcesat more than 
 1000 talents. |idXi<rTa 8vva|Avs— ^/ic sum total. Cf. v. 20. c. 
 a xpva-oi Kal dpYvpos cKt]. ' So viel davon {too (f>6pov) Gold und Silber war.* 
 P. eiri the opt. of indefinite frequency, 'quod de (?uo^a««j«redeuntibus pecuniis 
 sermo est,' Haack. Madv. App. § 234 ; Matth. § 528 ; Jelf, § 831. 4- a. Kriig. 
 and Bernhardy Sgnt. p. 406, give the meaning of uncertainty, may perhapt 
 come in. Others read i^'ft. v<|)avTd t€ Kal Xcia. vfpavri, as P. 
 observes, are properly woven fabrics of any sort of texture ; but here, when 
 opposed to Xfla, they must mean embroidered or brocaded stuffs— he therefore 
 tr. Textilia acu picta et levia. The barbarian chiefs, as Mr. Grote remarks, 
 learnt at length to appreciate the woven fabrics, the i)olished and carved me- 
 tallic work, the tempered weapons, and the pottery which issued from Grecian 
 artisans. He compares them to the v<pdap.ae' Upd, and to the x^Ptapa" reKrbvu>v 
 5ai5a\a, offered Jis presents to the Delphian God, Eurip. Ion. 1141; Pindar, 
 Pyth. V. 46 ; Grote, iv. p. 8. n. * The Circassians of the present day weave 
 mats of very great beauty, which find a ready market in Turkey and Russia,' 
 Clarke's Travels, quoted by Grote, ib, p. 9. For the actual custom of offering 
 these presents, see Xen. Anab. vii. 3. 27; Grote, vi. p. 292. n. For X«ia, cf. 
 L. and S. v. Xtra, and Horn. II. viii. 441. Grote [ix. p. u,6. n.] compares the 
 splendid * regia textili:^' and abundance of gold and silver vessels captured by 
 the Roman general, Paulus yEmilius, along with Perseus, last King of Mace- 
 donia, V. Liv. xlv. 33-5. Cf. Xen. Anab. vi. i. 2. Karao-Kci&T,. 
 Cf. ii. 14. 'Geriithe mancherlei Art die zur hiiuslichen einrichtung dienen,' 
 K. irapaSvvaoTcvovo-i. Many tr. qui apud regent valebant, com- 
 paring i. 138, -yiyviTaL Trap airn^ fiiyas. But there seems reason in Am.'s ob- 
 jection that this is to confound bwaarevetv and Svvaadai ; * regidi infra regem, 
 positi; GiiU. Cf. Seuthes, c. loi. * Nebenherrschen,' Krug. ; * Sdnen, 
 
 Chap. 97.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 267 
 
 Vasallen,' Engel. tr. For the fact, see Xen. Anab. vii. 3. 16. K. compares 
 Soph, ap Stob. 10. 25. 
 
 tpiXdpyvpov fikv irdv rb ^ap^dpuv yivos. 
 
 {d.) KaT6<mfj<ravTo TOvvavrCov . . . IIcpo-wv. This contrast between the 
 Thracians and the Persians is illustrated by what Xenophon says respecting 
 the habits of the younger Cyrus. AnaJb. i. 9. 22. Cf. Cyrop. viii. 14. 31, 2 ; 
 Grote, vi. p. 292. Xa}ipdv€iv. P. prefers translating by * sumere.' 
 
 Thirlwall thinks the remark of Thucydides more singular than the custom of 
 the Thracians. Bl. considers that among the Thracians, contrary to the practice 
 in Persia, these gifts were exacted with the utmost avarice and rapacity, and 
 tiiat Thucydides is here speaking sarcastically, and with an intent to reproach 
 the Thracian nobility. The remark is consequently not so strange. 
 kirX ttX^ov. r<^ I'o/xy fidWov rCjv dWwv Qpg.KQy ol 'Obpvaat, ixP'*"^TO> Schol. 
 * Though the custom existed among other Thracians also, the Odrysae practised 
 it more extensively. mo-tc — with indicative, actual result in a given 
 
 case, see i. 119. a. 
 
 (e.) 'loviov K<JX7rov. Cf. i. 24. The name probably dates from a very 
 early period, when the lonians still inhabited the shores of the Corinthian gulf, 
 and that part of Peloponnese, known subsequently as Achaia. The name is 
 first used by u^schylus {Prom. V. 840), no trace of the name being found in 
 Homer. Herod, and Thucyd. use the term as synonymous with the Adriatic, 
 but in the latter it always applies to the narrow gulf or inlet at the entrance of 
 the Adriatic, vi. 30. 34, vii. 33. It was considered to commence from the Acro- 
 ceraunian promontory on the coast of Epirus, and the lapygian promontory on 
 that of Italy, Cramer, i. p. 5. See the whole question as to its extension discussed 
 in Smith's Diet. Geog. s.v. Sevr^pa. P. translates longe secundum 
 
 ab imperio Scytharum, i.e. secundum quidem k Scythico, sed tameu longe eo 
 inferius. So in Virgil, * Longo sed proximus intervallo.' Were it not thus 
 emphatic, we should have simply bevr^pa ttjs rdv ^Kvduiv. Blomf. thinks 
 otherwise, but brings forward no argument of weight. Engel. tr. also has bci 
 iceitern in zweiter Linie gegen das der Scythen. ravTr\ Sk dSvvaTa 
 
 ^^••O'ovo-Oat. Herod, v. 3, el 8i vtt' evbs &pxoiro ^ (ppoveot Kara, roivrb, d/xaxbv 
 T dv drj, Kal To\\<^ KpdriffTov xdvTuv eOv^ijJv Kara yviofirjv Tr]v i/xriv. * The na- 
 tural state of the Thracian tribes— in the judgment of Herodotus permanent 
 and incorrigible — was that of disunion and incapacity of political association ; 
 were such association possible, he says, they would be strong enough to van- 
 quish every other nation, though Thucydides considers them as far inferior to 
 the Scythians. The Odrysian dominion had probably not reached, at the period 
 when Herod, made his inquiries, the same development which Thucydides de- 
 scribes in the third year of the Peloponnesian War, and which imparted to these 
 tribes an union partial indeed and temporary, but such as they never reached 
 either before or afterwards,' Grote, vi. p. 290. cv8aip.ovCa includes 
 
 all the external adjuncts of national prosperity, Herod., iaTiv iv iraay evbac- 
 pLoviij, V. 4, and cf. Xen. de Rep. Lac. i. 22. ovx Sti. v. Jelf, 
 
 762. 3. Itv irphs iv. Cf. Herod, iv. 50, v8u)p ye iv irpbs iv av/x- 
 
 ^dWciv. The expression is here used to exclude comparison with Persia, which 
 contained many separate subordinate nationalities. ov |ii?|v ov8^ — 
 
268 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book II. 
 
 nor yet again, as in Xen. passim, Vig. vii. 8, Hoogev. de Partic. p. 486, not 
 that either I mean to say they are on a par with the rest of the world in all other 
 points of good counsel and sagacity, d'C. oi'x o/j-otovvTai — as a ;/t€/o«/« for 'are 
 superior to,' is intolerable both in respect of tlie Greek and the sense. 
 
 Chapter XCVIII.— («.) croijia— w/t< » things were ready. Cf. eh. 3. c, 
 ivel 8i ws iK tQv dvuarojy erolfia ^v, cf. i. 88. a. &pas- For the 
 
 use of this verb, as applied to land forces, see i. c. ii. 3. c, 10. a., 56. a., &c. 
 MaK€8ov{av. The name applied to the country occupied by the tribes dwelling 
 northward of Thessaly and Mount Olympus, eastward of the chain by which 
 Pindus is continued, and westward of the river Axius. Though it afterwards 
 received greater extensions, the original country known by this name was but 
 small, and its population peculiar. The Eponymous ancestor of mythological 
 times was Macednus, son of Lycaon, ancestor of the Arcadians, or Macedon, 
 son of yEolus. Herodotus identities the Macedonians with the Doric race in a 
 passage which Miiller has examined at some length [i. 56; Miill. JJor. i. 3. 
 &c.]. These are merely attempts to form a genealogical connexion between this 
 semi-barbarous people and the rest of the Hellenic race. From the resemblance 
 of some of their customs to the Illyrians (cf. Strab. vii. p. 327), and on other 
 grounds, Miiller, by the process of exhaustion, arrives at the conclusion that 
 they were of Illyrian descent. Mr. Grote and the writer of the article in 
 Smith's Oeog. Diet, maintain the contrary, vol. iv. p. 14: n. Mannert agrees 
 with Miiller. It is clear, as Miiller shows, that though their language differed 
 from the Illyrian (v. Polyb. xxviii. 8) and from the Greek, it contained many 
 forms commonly called yEolic, together with Arcadian and Thessalian words, 
 and many which, though not found in Greek, have been preserved in the cog- 
 nate Latin. The race preeminently known as the Macedonian, had their ori- 
 ginal centre at /Egae or Edessa, the modern Vo«lhena, and finally absorbed the 
 other sectional races, as the Eleimiotap, Lyncestae, OresUe, &c., Grote, iv. p. 
 16. 'The Macedonians of the seventh and sixth centuries B.C., were an 
 aggregate only of rude inland tribes, subdivided into distinct y>etty principali- 
 ties, and separated from the Greeks by a wider ethnical difference even than 
 the Epirots, to whom they were anal«»gous in character and civilization ; they 
 had some few towns, but were chiefly village residents (v. Thuc. ii. 100, iv. 
 124). The original seats of the Macedonians were in the regions east of the 
 chain of Skardus, north of the chain called the Cambunian Mountains, which 
 connects Olympus with Pindus, and which forms the north-west boundary of 
 Thessaly, but they did not reach so far eastward as the .Thermaic Gulf, appa- 
 rently not farther eastward than Mount Bermius, or about the longitude of 
 Edessa and Berrhoia. Tliey thus covered the upper portions of the course of 
 the rivers Haliakmon and Erigon, l)efore the junction of the latter with the 
 Axius, while the upper course of the Axius, higher than this point of junction, 
 appears to have belonged to Paeonia, though the boundaries of Mace.lonia and 
 Pseonia cannot be distinctly marked out at any time,' Grote, iv. p. 11. Mace- 
 donia, in its proper sense, did not touch upon the sea, and must be distinguished 
 into upper and lower ; the former inhabited by people about the west range of 
 mountains extending from the north as far as Pindus ; the latter about the rivers 
 which flow into the Axius, only extending, however, as far as Pella. From this 
 
 Chap. 98.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 269 
 
 district the Macedonians extended themselves, partially driving back the original 
 inhabitants, just as we find in later times the armed hordes of the Sclavonians 
 driving the descendants of these peoples into the Chalcidic peninsula, or the low 
 grounds near the sea. The subdivisions of Macedonia will be noticed as they 
 occur in the following chapters. The Cambunian mountains, which form the great 
 south boundary of the country, are the watershed of various rivers, whose wide 
 alluvial basins forme<l the homes, as they modified the character, of the several 
 tribes who peopled their banks. From them flow northwards the Aous, now Vo- 
 iussa (see Wordsworth's Greece, p. 9), whence the Parausei took their name 
 (Cramer, i. p. 9), and the Haliacmon (now Inje kara). To the south, the Achelous, 
 now Aspropotamo (see chap. 102. b.). Peneus {^alempria) and Aracthus {Arta). 
 The west spur of the Cambunians forms the Pindus chain, and the east terminates 
 in Olympus [cf. Wordsworth's Greece, p. 4]. The other rivers of Macedon are 
 the .4<:straeus (now Vistritza), flowing by Edessa and Pella, along the banks of 
 which ran the Via Egnatia, leading from Epidamnus, through Thessalonica and 
 Amphipolis, to the Euxine [v. Cramer, i. p. 80. 280 : for the pass, through 
 which the Via Egnatia, and the modern road from Durazzo to Betolia led into 
 Macedon, see Grote. iv. p. 3. n.], the Axius, now the Vardar [a corruption 
 from the Bardare.s of Tzetzes and Anna Comnena, hence the Vardariot cohorts 
 of the Imperial guard (Smith's Z»<W. Geog. p. 236; Miill. Dor. i. p. 451)!, 
 with its great tributary the Erigon, now Kutchuk. The country therefore 
 contains three wide alluvial basins, of great extent and fertility, viz., those of 
 the Axius, the Erigon, and the upper Haliacmon, which form a great contrast 
 as to their capacity for cultivation with the plains and valleys on the Albanian 
 or west side of Greece. These are represented respectively by the modem dis- 
 tricts of Tettovo, Bitolia, and Grevena. On the rivers of Macedon, see 
 Cousinery, quoted by Biihr. Herod, v. iii. p. 826. On the present state of our 
 knowl-dge of the geography of these regions, see Crete's long note at the be- 
 ginning of his twenty-fifth chapter, and the quotations throughout the chapter 
 from the travels of Col. Leake, Bou^, Grisebach, Pouqueville. 
 KepK^VT^s. Now Tchengel Dagh, is the watershed of the streams which flow 
 into the Cercinitis palus (now I^ake Takinos) above Amphipolis, throuf^h which 
 flows also the Strymon, v. Thuc. v. 7; Arrian. Exp. Alex. i. ; Cramer, i. p. 
 289 ; and Walpole ap. Cramer, i. p. 295. 2ivt«v. The Sinti lived 
 
 on the banks of the Strymon, north of the Siropaeones. Strabo says they once oc- 
 cupied the island of Lemnos, thus identifying them with the Sinties of Homer. 
 
 iyda fi€ livTiei dvdpes d<pap KOfiLcravro Trcffdvra. 
 
 Ill 593; Odys, viii. 294; Strabo, Epit. vii. 331, x. 457, xii. 549. Livy 
 places them on the right bank of the Strymon, xlv. 29. Their chief town was 
 Heraclea, fifty miles from Piiilippi. Cf. Gatterer, quoted by Cramer, i. p. 305 • 
 Liv. xlii. 51, xlv. 29 ; Plin. iv. 10; Midler's Dor. i. p. 470. 
 ITaiovtov. The Pjeonians once occupied the greatest part of Macedonia, and 
 even a considerable portion of Thrace, extending alonf; the coast of the ^gean 
 as far as the Euxine. It was probably the general name of the whole of 
 Northern Macedonia, from the source of the Erigonus to the Strymon. ' We 
 are not to suppose that the whole territory between Axius and Strymon was 
 continuously peopled by them : continuous population is not the character of 
 
70 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book TI. 
 
 the ancient world. The Paeonians in their north-west tribes bordered upon the 
 Macedonian Pelagonia ; in their north tribes upon the lUyrian Dardani and 
 Autariatse : in their east, south, and south-east tribes, upon the Thracians and 
 Pierians, i.e. upon the second seats occupied by the exj^elled Pierians under 
 Mount PangJEUs,' Grote, iv. p. 70. Homer mentions them among the allies of 
 Priam, and places them on the banks of the Axius (//. B. 849). Herodotus 
 says they were a colony of the Teucri who came from Troy (v. 1 3, where see 
 Biihr's note). Livy also says that the Dardani of Illyria once exercised domi- 
 nion over the whole of Macedonian Pteonia. Hence Niebiihr supposes them 
 to be of Pelasgian race, Rom. Hist. i. p. ^i. Tliey were divided into several 
 tribes, each probably governed by a separate chief, cf Herod, iv. 12, v. 98, 
 vii. 20. ^"tI Ila^ovas. The date and circumstances of this expe- 
 
 dition are unknown. 
 
 (6.) MaiSous. N. E. of the Sinti. This tribe is not mentioned by Herodotus; 
 but they are, perhaps, to be identified with the Thracian tribe near the Ister, 
 whom he calls the Sigynnse, whom he understood to refer their origin to the 
 Medes of Asia: the probability being that they were the Maedi of Tl\race. 
 Strabo calls them Maedo-Bithyni. Herod, v. 9: Strab. vii. p. 295. 316; 
 Plin. iv. II ; Liv. xxvi. -25, xl. 12, xliv. 26 ; Cramer, i. p. 306. 
 Aop-qpov, is probably the spot now called Doiran: (v. Cramer, i. p. 276; 
 Miill. Dor. p. 460.) a Pieonian town on the frontier of Macedonia, at the foot 
 of Mt. Cercine, a branch of the great central chain of Khodope, perhaps 
 identical with the Orbelos of Herodotus (v. 16). Cramer identifies the Lake of 
 Doiran with Lake Prasias, of which Herodotus gives such a curious account 
 in the passage quoted above: (see Gatterers note quoted in Cramer, u. s.). Cf. 
 Herod, vii. 113. tkirr^lyyvro — his army suff end no diminution^ 
 
 did not fall aivay. Verringerung. K. Cf. chapter 34 a, 5 r c. Here the expres- 
 sion, though somewhat strange, is introduced for the sake of the verbal anti- 
 thesis— ' A>/«en Ahyang, wokl aber rid Zugang," Eng. Tr. 
 4<|)' apiroYnv. The dat. is more usually found (after ^7rt) in this meaning, 
 v. Matth. § 585, 6. Perhaps after verbs of motion, when the substantive 
 denotes the action which is the end of our going, the accusative would be more 
 correct, as Uvai iirl vSiap, Herod, iii. 14. Uvai iwl B-ripav, i. 37. 
 (S)<rre k. t. X. On the fact, cf. Ar. Ach. 148, 6ffov rd XPW°- Trappdruv irpoa^p- 
 Xcrat, K.r.\. ircvTCKa£8<Ka pvpidSiuv. v. Diod. xii. 50. 
 
 (c.) |iaxtt»'Po4><>poS 3£ the Dii. Cf. chap. 96, b. 4>oPcpwTaTos. 
 
 Cf. ad chap. 3, c. 
 
 Chapter XCIX. — (a.) |vvT]0poftovTo Ivt. A. AsK. observes, the prep, h 
 after a verb of collecting or assembling^ bears reference to the place of assem- 
 bly ; iv to the fact of the completion of the union : see i. 6, c. 23, d. 51, b. 
 Sttus ^orpaXov<riv. On the future indie, after 6iru)i following verbs of 
 caring, providing, considering, &c. See Matth. § 623. 2. It is in fact = 6Ty 
 rpbin^. So Thuc. vi, 11. CKOViiv 6t(^ Tpbin^ rb fftpircpou iirpeirii eiJ diiaovrai, 
 Cf. Soph. El. 1296: Phil. 54; Ajajc, 557, with Wiinder's note; Xen. Anah. 
 i. 1.4, vii. 3, &c. The idiom arises metaphysically from the tendency to vivid 
 narration and objective representation which characterizes the language, 
 
 Chap. 99.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 271 
 
 another development of which is found in the usage of cL-s, tva, &c. cum indi- 
 cativo. The grammarians have not as yet sufficiently noticed the bearing of 
 this objective tendency upon the idioms of the language. Kara 
 
 Kopv^^v— keeping along the height. With the genitive it would be down the 
 height, Cf. Kark tQv Kprjfxvuv, vii. 44. 6 IIcpS^KKas. Perdiccas I. 
 
 was the son and successor of Alexander L, called the Philhellene. For his 
 previous history in connexion with this war see i. 57, 59, 61, 63 ; ii. 29, 80 ; 
 Diod. xii. 34. In B. c. 424, we shall find him instigating Brasidas to invade 
 Macedon and Thrace (cf. iv. 79), but subsequently making peace with Athens 
 (iv. fin.), then secretly joining the league against her, but again forming an 
 alliance with Athens : siding, in fact, with either of the belligerent parties as 
 suited his interest for the time being (v. 80, 3 ; vi. 7 ; vii. 9). Clinton fixes his 
 death in the Archonship of Fisander, B. c. 413 ; 01. xciii. 3. The date of his 
 accession is doubtful, as very different periods are allotted to his reign by 
 ancient writers, v. Clinton, F. H., vol. ii. p. 223. Cf. Tab. in an. 414. 2. 
 Av7Kii<rTa£. One of the four subdivisions of Upper Macedonia. Lyncestis com- 
 prehended the modem district of Filurina, and all the south pari of the basin 
 of the Erigon. The district went by the names of Lyncestis and Lyncus. 
 In Livy, however, the latter appellative stands for a city on the Bevus. It lay 
 to the south of the Pelagones, and between them and the Eordaei. It w^as once 
 an independent kingdom, and probably became an appanage of Macedon by 
 marriage. [Cf. Time. iv. 83, 124 ; Strabo, vii. p. 326 ; Liv. xxxi. 33, xxvi. 25, 
 xxxii. 9.] As the Temenidae claimed their descent from Argos, and the Kings 
 of the Epirotic Molossi pretended to a descent from the heroic ^acid race of 
 Greece, so the Princes of Lyncus claimed the Bacchiadae of Corinth for their 
 ancestors. One of these, Arrhibaeus, was on the throne when Brasidas invaded 
 Lyncus: v. Cramer, i. p. 193; Grote, iv. p. 15, 22. ' EXijiitSrai. — 
 
 Elimeia, another of these subdivisions, comprehended the modern districts of 
 Grevena, Venja, and Tjersemba. It lay to the East of Stymphalia, and was 
 originally an independent state like Lyncus, but was afterwards conquered by 
 the Macedonian Kings, to whom it became a very important acquisition, from 
 the fact that the passes to Epims and Thessaly led through this province. 
 From the latter it was separated by the Cambunian mountains. We read in 
 Xenophon of a Derdas, Prince of Elimeia, probably a son of the Derdas men- 
 tioned here. Cf Thuc. i. 56 ; Xen. Ilell. v. 2, 28 ; Liv. xlii. 23 ; Cramer, vol. 
 i. p. 200 ; Miill. Dorians, i. p. 458. AXXa ^Ovt],— g. g., the Orestse. 
 
 P. Ka6' avrd — separate and independent kingdoms. 
 
 (6.) *AX^^av8pos, son of Amyntas I., and loth King of Macedon (v. Clinton, 
 V. ii. p. 22 1), succeeded his father probably soon after the subjugation of Thrace 
 byMegabazus, which took place B.C. 507, and was still living B.C. 463, when Cimon 
 recovered Thasos. He probably lived on till B.C. 454. He is known in history 
 for his murder of the Persian envoys, his good services to the Greeks, though 
 nominally in the train of Xerxes, and his proving his Greek descent when he pre- 
 sented himself as a competitor at the Olympic games, [v. Herod, v. i7-'22, 
 vii. 137, viii. 136-40, ix. 44 ; cf. Justin, vii. 2.] He no doubt added very con- 
 siderably to the dominions of his predecessors, advancing his frontiers along the 
 sea coast, and to the interior. But ' to suppose that Alexander, son of Amyntas, 
 made aU these conquests, is an error which is even refuted by the words of 
 
272 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book II. 
 
 Tliucyd. ; although it is very possible that this prince, who began his reign 
 about B.C. 488, at the time of the Persian power, and was the brother-in-law of 
 a Persian general, added considerably to the territory which he had inherited. 
 Consequently the story that Xerxes gave Alexander all the country between 
 Mounts Olympus and Haemus (Justin, vii. 4) is not entirely fabulous. During 
 the interval between the Persian and Peloponnesian wars, the territory of Ma- 
 cedon was not much enlarged.' Miill. Dor. i. p. 464. 
 
 (6.) TT)}i€vt8ot. On the Argive origin of the Royal gens of Macedonia, see 
 Bahr ad Herod, v. 22, who quotes the following authorities, Isocr. Philip. 
 pp. 88. 103, 4 ; Paus. vii. 8. 5 ; Thuc. ii. 99, v. 80 ; Epist. Socrat. xxviii. ; 
 Max. Tyr. xx. 8 ; Liv. xxvii. 30, to which we may a^ld Mull. Dorians, i. 172, 
 463. cf. Herod, vii. 173, viii. 137, 8> ix- 44- 'The origin of the Macedonian 
 family, or Argead*, from Argos, appears to have been universally recognised 
 by Grecian enquirers.' Grote, iv. p. 21. ^pao-CXtvo-av— e«/a- 
 
 Uished their sorereifjnty over. K. Ilupfas. Pieria lying to the 
 
 east and south-east of Eordaa and Elimeia, wjis one of the most interesting 
 parts of Macedonia, as being the traditionary birth-place of Orpheus, and first 
 seat of the Muses, and on account of the important historical events which 
 subsequently occurred there. It fonns the slope of the range of mountains of 
 which Olympus is the highest peak, and is separated from Magnesia by the 
 Peneus. It coincides with the modem district of Katerina. [Cf. Herod, vii. 
 131. The name was known to Homer, //. xiv. 226, where Hera passes from 
 Olympus through Pieria and .Emathia to Thrace.] It was watered by the 
 Haliacmon, and contiiined the famous towns of Pydna and Methone, and the 
 poetical localities of Libethrus and Pimplea. v. Cramer, i. pp. 204—220. 
 ♦Between the Thermaic gulf and the eastern counterforts of Olympus and 
 Bermius, there exists a narrow slip of plain land, or low hill, which reaches 
 from the mouth of the Peneius to the head of the Thermaic gulf; it there 
 widens into the spacious and fertile plain of Salonichi, comprising the mouths 
 of the Haliacmon, the Axius, and the Echeidorus : the river Ludias, which 
 flows from Edessa into the marshes surrounding Pella, and which in antiquity 
 joined the Haliacmon near its mouth, has now altered its course so as to join 
 the Axius. This narrow strip between the mouths of the Peneius and the 
 Haliacmon was the original abode of the Pierian Thracians, who dwelt close to 
 the foot of Olympus, and among whom the worship of the Muses seems to have 
 been a primitive characteristic : Grecian poetry teems with local allusions and 
 epithets which appear traceable to this early fact.' Grote, iv. p. 17. 
 Xla-yyaiov Pangreum (now called Pandhar Dagh, or Castarjnetz,) is a spur 
 of Khodope and Ha?mu8, branching off in a south-east direction, lying between 
 the Strymon and the Nestiis, and forming a boundary line between Macedon 
 and Thnice, and hence assigned indiscrim'nately to either. It was famous for 
 its gold and silver mines, which were worked by the Pieres, Odomanti and 
 Satrse ; v. Herod, vii. 112, hence called xpi'<r6/Jw\o»' X^raj by Euripides {Jihes. 
 019.) Of these metals no traces are said to be found in modern times. See 
 Biihr ad Herod, v. 16, and the authorities quoted. They are said to have 
 first attracted the attention of the Thasians. Diod. Sic. xvi. Pangaeura is often 
 mentioned by the poets, v. Pind. Pyth. iv. 319; ^sch. Pers. 500; Eurip. 
 Jihes. u. 8. and 972 , Virg. Georg. iv. 462 ; Lucan, Ph. i. 680. Philippi stood 
 
 Chap. IOO.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 273 
 
 at Its foot. V. Cramer, i. 301, ,. ^i, ^ ^ 
 
 P^ .97, who quotes Strab. Epit. vii. p. 331 ; Scylax, Perlp. 99 ; Steph. Byz. s.' v*. 
 
 Herodotus also, vn. 1,2, speaks of it as one of the two fortresses of th; 
 
 lanT'v T A < l^^""^^' ?^^^''""^- ^' Wlied to any sinuous tract of 
 and V. L. and S. See Xenophon, Hist. vi. 5, 17. ^aSe .rparo.eSevad^^.os 
 
 Bl. has I perceive this ref., and also one to Plin. Hist. N. iii. ,6. ' Padus 
 gremio montis Vesuli profluens.' 
 
 (c.) "Altov, now Vardar. See sup. c. 98, n. on Macedonia. Horn // 
 11. 849. Liv xxxix. 54. <rTevV,v-a narrow strip of 
 
 land Scottic^. ♦« Strath.^ Bl. frequently found in composition, as Strath- 
 eden, St^thmore, Strathfieldsay. 'HS^vas. The Edonians Uy 
 
 beyond he nver Axius, at the lower part of its course. They were a large and 
 powerful tribe : hence their name is constantly used by the poets as synonyn.ous 
 with Thrace generally. 'EopSCas. Eord.a was one of the four Z 
 
 divisions of Upper Macedonia before alluded to, and comprehended the 
 modem districts of^a^A Sarighiul, and Ostrovo. It was contiguous to 
 Ehmeia ; north o the Bemiius, east of Lyncus, west of Edessa, in fact, the 
 basm of the Ludias, now Cara Asrnac, v. Muller's DoHans, v. i p .cq • 
 Ci^mer, i. p .01 ; Smith, Geog. Diet. p. 236. Cf. Herod, vii. 185 (B^h's 
 no^) ; Thuc. iv. ,28 ; Polyb. xviii. 6; Liv. xxxi. 39. Ptolemy was a native 
 of Eorda^a, according to Arrian, E. A. vi. 28. ^pa^v = f.c.p6u. 
 
 Cf.,4.not. 4><nrKav. v. MuU. Z)or. i. 458. Between Strymon 
 
 and Axius. See Grote, iv. p. .3. ^AX^^nCas. Almopia or 
 
 Almonia was an ancient settlement of the Minyans. v. Mull. Dor. i. Js 60 
 Plm H. A^ IV. n, on the confines of Macedonia and Tliessaly, apparently' not 
 far from Pieria : whether they were of Macedonian race is difficult to say 
 i-rote, IV. p. 14, 23. Cramer places Almopia near the sources of the Ericronus 
 on the borders of Illyria, i. e. rather to the north-west of the locality assigned 
 
 ^TaH K ?^r V'-''^'^ Tpr^^^vCa. is s'aid tl be 
 
 the Atttc Kpr,ar<,ylas the lomc orthography. P. Herod, places it near the 
 sources of the Echeidorus. Kruse says it is called now Christonia. Hellas i 
 p. 435, ap. Pop. Cf. Herod, i. 57 (Bahr's note), v. 3, vii. 124, 7, viii. 116. ' * 
 .BuraXrCav. B.saltia includes the maritime district west of the Strymon and 
 the land to the interior, v. Miill. Dor. i. 454. Thucyd. however makes 
 Mygdoma reach as far as the Strymon. Herod, makes the Persians enter 
 liisaltia immediately after crossmg the Strymon, viii. 115. Cf. viii. 116. Grote, 
 
 CHAPTEii C.-(a.) ^irCovTos. The genitive absolute implying cause. Cf 
 en. 8. Jelf, §710, 6. -Apxaaos. Archelaus succeeded his 
 
 latner, B.C. 413; he reigned fourteen years, and was assassinated, b. c 300 ' 
 m the archonship of Laches. Cf. Diod. xiv. 35, 7- Plato calls him spurious! 
 and an usurper, and saj s he was a son of a slave of Alcetas, named Simiche! 
 ^org.p.^yi,A. V. Clinton, ii. p. 223. Cf. Miill. jT^or. i. 483. 
 lT€|i€ The proper word for road making, v. Wesseling ad Herod, iv. 136. 
 Td 4XXa 8i€Ko<rjit,<r«. Bl. says there is an ellipse of riju x^pa., referring to 
 en. 15. Td T€ dXXo duKdfffivae r^v x^P^v, /cat. k. t. X. 6kt« Cf 
 
274 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book II. 
 
 CHiJ*. 10 1.] 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 Clinton's dissertation on the Kings of Macedonia, vol. ii. p. a 20. Herod, viii. 
 139, gives the line of Macedonian Kings. The three first usually given are 
 considered by Clinton to be merely mythical. The predecessors of Archelaus 
 will therefore be Perdiccas I., Argaeus, Philippus I., Aeropus, Alcetas, 
 Amyntas I., Alexander I., Perdiccas II., MUU. Dor. i. p. 463 ; Grote, iv. 
 
 (6.) ElSoHt^VTiv. MuUer, from the Itineraries, places Idomene fifty- three 
 miles from Therraa. [Dor. i. p. 474-] It was on the borders of Pseonia, on 
 the road leading from Stobi to Thessalonica. In some modem maps we see a 
 spot marked Idomini in this locality. Cramer, i. 230. TopTwCav 
 
 is placed by Ptolemy in iEmathia, south of Idomene, he writes the name 
 Gordenia. Cramer, i. p. 230 ; MuU. u. s. 'AToXdyTTiv : from a 
 
 passage in Steph. Byz. Dr. Arnold proposes to read Allante, cf. Phn. iv. 10, 
 35, but Miiller, Spruner, and Cramer all read AUlanta. Evpam<i|r 
 
 is^placed by Pliny on the Axius. [H. N. iv. 10.] Nothing further is known 
 of its history, than that it appears in a list of towns in the seventh century. 
 
 Cramer, i. p. 2^1. j , , . , ..• r vr 
 
 (c.) II^ilS. Pella, one of the most ancient and celebrated cities of Mace- 
 donia, stood at the disUnce of I70 stadia from the mouth of the Ludias, to 
 which point the river was navigable. It was on the borders of Botticea and 
 ^mathia; Herodotus assigning it to the former (vii. 123), Ptolemy to the 
 latter (p. 82). Philip considerably enlarged and embellished it as being his 
 native city (cf. Dem. de Cor. 83), and here Alexander also was born. (Hence 
 ' Pellffius juvenis.' Juv. x. 169 ; Lucan, iii. -233)- I^s situation is exactly 
 described by Livy, xliv. 46, xlv. 29 [probably from Polybius, xxix. 3]. It was 
 afterwards colonised by Julius Csesar. Its ruins are still visible near the 
 modem Palatisa. Euripides probably resided here under the patronage of 
 Archelaus, and the scenery in its neighbourhood is supposed to have suggested 
 some passages in his Baccha:. Cramer, i. p. ^23. ' Though in later times the 
 residence of the kings was transferred to marshy Pella in the mantime plain 
 beneath, yet Edessa was always retained as the regal burial-place, and as the 
 hearth to which the religious continuity of the nation (so much reverenced in 
 ancient times) was attached.' Grote, iv. p. 16. K{i^^, a place 
 
 of no great importance, except from its being sometimes confounded with the 
 Cyrrhus in Syria. The town of Palceokastro, about sixteen miles north-west of 
 Pella, very probably represents the site of Cyrrhus. See Leake, N. G., quoted 
 in Smith, Diet. Oeog. s. v. and Cramer, vol. i. p. 119 ; Mull. Dor. i. p. 458, n. 
 ^irTiSoKOi. Cf. chap. Ixxix. f. K. says must be taken with <?(r^i3a\Xoi'—M7Afr«?«r 
 it seemed Jit. ia-i^aXkov, a rare word for a charge of cavalry. K. 
 
 iirb irXTjeovs. The sentence is very much involved. P. seems inclined to refer 
 it to the Thracians, as though it were ' encumbered by their own numbers.' 
 K. would strike out avrovs and read KaO^araaau. I believe it is an elliptical 
 way of speaking—' brought themselves into great peril when they did fight, 
 and therefore soon left it ofif.' (On 7r,pLK\v6fi€voi, cf. Caesar, B. C. iii. 30, ' ne 
 duobus circumcluderetur exercitibus'). 
 
 Chapter CI.— (a). X<J"yovs iirouiro = X670UJ rpo<T^<f>fpe, i. 57» agebat. P. 
 leganio ni^gotiatc Unterhandelte, K. o« iropi^rav rats vav<r£v. Ct. 
 
 '^75 
 
 ch. 95, c. and Grote quoted ther^^. d^tcrrovvrcs ^% k.t.X. Here we have 
 
 an Illustration of the redundant negative, which may be expressed in somewhat 
 vulgar English—* being doubtful that he would not come. ' Tciv^ofic 
 
 a rare word in Attic Greek. K. cf. Thuc. iv. .5; Herod, i. 162 f Xen 
 ^eu. V. 3, 1, tr. having made tJum take refuge in their fortifications. Cf our 
 expression of putting persons in a state of siege. Havaioi- k t X 
 
 These obscure tribes of P.onian and Thracian origin must be placed near thi 
 btrymon ; but their exact locality cannot be determined. The Odomanti were 
 contiguous to, and apparently intermixed with, the Edones, Ptolemy identi- 
 fymg Edonis with Odomantice. ' They were probably settled upon the whole 
 of the great mountain Orbelus. extending along the north-east of the lower 
 Strymon.c plain from about Meleniko and Demarissar to Zikhna inclusive 
 where they bordered on Pang^us, the gold and silver mines of which the; 
 worked with the Pieres and Satrae.' Smith, Diet. G. s. v. Herodotus says 
 they were Paonians, and were not conquered by the Persians, v. 6. Thuc (v 
 6) speaks of PoUes, their independent prince. Dribescus (Thuc. iv 102) was 
 probably one of their towns. The Pan^i are also called Edonians by Steph 
 Byz who places them near Amphipolis. The Ders^i are also mentioned by 
 Herodotus. [Herod^ vii no, cf. v. ,1, with Bahr's notes on both passages] 
 The Droi some think to be the same as the Ders^i. Cramer, i. p 30/ sq 
 [Mr. Grote pUces them in the plains north-east of the Stiymon. near Mouni 
 I'angapus, and not far from Amphipolis, vi. p. 295]. 
 
 , iu''^ r^7* Xd7ov--«praebuit occasionem nimoris.' Huds. gave rise to 
 talk ; afforded matter of d^scussion. Dale. Bl. quotes an example, Xen 
 
 ?^T;^ U' '' ';• "^'^^'^ *'• ^"'' "''""'^ '' « '•^^°^'- ^^^'^^ ^^en reached 
 
 to {iTl) those who were enemies of the Athenians. »^_« 
 
 whetheritmightnotbepossiblethat, &c.,'cf. Xen. .Inai iv 2 13 ^^ "" 
 
 Kara TO ^|ipaxiK6v in accordance with the terms of the alliance existing be 
 
 tween them. Cf. chap. 22, c. i»/v^.« "k- + w . 
 
 ,,. , J T> . €'n-€x«v. K. translates by 
 
 tiberschummend. P. by occupatam tenere. The Schol. explains it by irc- 
 K€lfiepos. But this sense of the word, though common in Homer and Herod 
 IS never, P. says, found in Thucydides. We have it as 'halting there/ Xen 
 Cyr^.iv.2,6;v.4,38. Cf. Acts, xix. .2. a^^. So Xen.' 
 
 Anab. I. 7, 20, t6 5^ toU air^ dyarerapayfiiuou iiropeiero. It is the dative 
 of the object more remotely affected by the action of the verb. The want of 
 provision affected him through the army. It is equivalent to the constmction 
 where the want would be expressed as the subject of some verb having rhv 
 ffrpardav for its direct, and airr^ for its remote object. Therefore I believe 
 Am. s tr. to be a good one, though Bl. disputes it-' when he found thai the 
 army had no provisions.' S^apSdKov. Cf. Herod, iv. 80 
 
 Poppo prefers this reading to HirapidKov or ZrapaddKov. 
 •nponroitirai— wins over to his views. Cf. chap. 85, d. ' rpulKovTa 
 
 ^S udcras V^pas. v. Jelf, § 454. Cf. Thuc. iii. 66. .^es al ^aaac Se^a 
 ilerod. vii. 4. ftaac\,vaayra rd irdirra (rea (^ Kal rpc^Koura. So o^nnino in 
 l^t. i.xB. B. a iv. sS. EaBduoomninocivitatesobsidesmisemnt. 'Macedonia 
 then (t. e at this time) contained the elements of a great power afterwards 
 deveoped by Archelaus and Philip, though one scattered and feeble.' 
 Thirlwall. 
 
 T3 
 
2']6 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book II. 
 
 Chapter CII.— (a.) ol 8i Iv NavirdKT<p. The narrative is resumed from 
 ^^ ^^ 'Ao-rdKOv, cf. ad ch. 30, a., where we learn that the 
 
 Athenians expelled their tyrant Euarchus. dTropdvTcs |s. P. 
 
 couples the ^s with iaTpdrevaay, and this punctuation is ad<.pted by Coll. Arn. 
 ;gl^jj„f T€TpaKO<rCois. Thesc P. thinks were the cUmarii from 
 
 the forty triremes, ten iTi^aTai to each being the usual complement. 
 SrodTOV V. n. ad ch. 80, e. Kop<JvT«v, a small town lying pro- 
 
 bably between Metropolis and old .Enia. Its probable remains were seen by 
 Colonel Leake on a hill about a mile from Pr<5dhromo. 01& BoKOvvTas 
 
 B^pafovs-' dubkejtdei: Cf. v. 43. e. Duk. KvvriTa. He had 
 
 probably been expelled by the opposite party, v. Cramer, 11. p. 33 ; Grote, 
 
 (6.) OlvidSas. The siege of this place was the great object of the expedi- 
 tion ; as this great and powerful town had from time immemorial (dd wore) 
 sided against the rest of Acarnania and Athens. Cf. ch. 82. i. 111, c. 
 *A\tK^os. The largest and most celebrated of Grecian rivers, equally famous 
 in mythical and historical times, takes its rise in Mount Pindus, near a village 
 now called Khaliki, probably a corruption of Chalcis. [v. Dion. Perieg. 496]. 
 After flowing through the mountainous district of the Dolopians and Agra^ans, 
 it entered the plain of Acarnania and ^tolia, near Stratus, and discharged 
 itself into the Ionian sea, near (Eniadae. Its waters are of a whitish yellow or 
 cream colour, hence its epithet in Hesiod'AxcXv6»' r dpyvpoSivrjp, Theo<j. 340 
 (copied by Diouys. Perieg. 433), and its modern name of Aspro-potamo or the 
 ' White River.' Homer only mentions it once, but calls it the King of Rivers. 
 [11. xxi. 194]. Dr. Wordsworth says, 'That the Achelous should have betn 
 generally considered in Greece as the symbol and synonyme of water is pro- 
 bably to be ascribed to its superiority in magnitude to the other streams of the 
 Greek continent.' [Greece, p. \i]. Cf. Virg. Georg. i. 9, * Poculaque inventis 
 Acheloia miscuit uvis.' (So our own poet Lovelace says, ' When flowing cups 
 pass quickly round, with no assuaging Thames.') For the classical passages in 
 illustration of this symbolic use, see Macrob. Saturn, v. 18, and Elmsley ad 
 Eurip. Bacch. 519. In mythology, Achelous, as a river god, received especiiil 
 honours ; he is also celebrated for his rivalry with Hercules for the possession 
 of Deianira ; the horn wrenched ofi" from the ' Tauriformis' god by Hercules, 
 being metamorphosed into the Coniucopia. Cf. Apollod. ii. 7 ; Soph. Track. 
 
 9. 507 ; 
 
 Diod. Sic. iv. 35 ; Paus. iii. 18, 9 ; Ov. Met.ix. i, 90, &c. ; Sen. Here. 
 CEt. 300. dvw0ev |i4v. ' The only way of removing the difficulty is to 
 
 Bupply ptwj/ from the preceding, and to take dvudtv with Am. as standing for 
 B.v(ji * mperne; high up the river, as we find it. iv. 108. We may tr. with Goll. 
 *8uperne quideiii Stratum urbem, ubivero in mare ivjluit, (Eniadatf praterjiuens.* 
 ■gj ir€piXi|ivdtwv—«urrou »(////// icith water, so cw to insulate the 
 
 city. Strabo mentions three marshy lakes in this neighbourhood. The ques- 
 tion as to whether these are alluded to by Thucyd. here is discussed by Colonel 
 Leake. N. Greece, iii. p. 573- ^^- Arrian, A nab. vi. 14, 5. Bl. cf. the 
 description of Venice, Livy, x. 2. 
 
 {€.) *Ex''Vd8«v. These islands are said to have derived their name from 
 the Echinus, or sea-urchin, in consequence of their sharp and prickly outlines. 
 Homer calls them ix'ivai, 11. ii. 625, and speaks of them as inhabited, and 
 
 Chap. 102.] 
 
 NOTES OX THUCYDIDES. 
 
 277 
 
 sending a contingent of forty ships to the Greek force against Troy, under a 
 distinguished warrior named Meges. Later writers mention them as rugged 
 and desolate. The chief of them was Dulichium ; Horn. Od. i. 245, ix. -24, 
 x'v. 397, &c. ; Strabo, x. 456^; which some writers identify with Dolicha ; which 
 appears, however, to be too small to answer the description of Homer. Nor does 
 tlie position tally with the island as described by Homer. Dodwell supposes it to 
 have been submerged by a violent convulsion of nature, and says some Greek 
 sailors told him of an island seven miles long, which was submerged by the 
 ocean. Herodotus [ii. 10] alludes to the fact of their being gradually united to 
 the mainland. Cf. Paus. viii. 24, 11 ; Ov. Met. viii. 588. But both of these 
 writers were ignorant of the fact, knovs^n to modem writers on physical 
 geography, that, after a certain point, this junction of the islands off" the mouth 
 of a river to the mainland ceases, the superfluous alluvial deposit being swept 
 away (as at the mouths of the Nile and Danube) by the irresistible force of the 
 deep sea. Pliny (iv. 12, 19) enumerates nine of the Echinades, other writers men- 
 tion only four, as Ovid. Strabo calls them * very numerous. ' ov8^v dtr^- 
 Xov<rai. Cf. ovbiva xp^vov. Supra, c. 84, a. irpotrxot deC. — is constantly 
 iiuiking alluvial deposit. clo-i twv vtjo-«v aV ■fiircCpwyrai. — and some 
 of the islands have been united with the mainland, lit., continentalized, made into 
 continent. Cf. Herod, ii. 10, /cai ovk TjKiaTa'Ax^'^^^ov, 8s p4o}v Zl' * kKapvavirjs 
 Kal e^teis ^s ^dXacraai' rcDj''Ext''ci5wj' vrjotjjv rds rifiiffcas ^St; -ffxeipov TretrolTjKe. 
 The verb lias been employed by the imitators of Thucydides, vide BL 
 IKiris Si Kal irdoras, k. t. X. ' There is every reason for believing that this may 
 be the case with all, after no very great lapse of time.* On this use of iXiris cf. 
 i- I, a. TTJs Trpotrxwo-cws k. t. X. v. Jelf, § 898, 3. 
 T<^ \ki\ (TKcSdvyvo-Oai ^vvSco-^ioi -y^-yvovTai. — 'mutually serve to connect the 
 alluvium, in consequence of its not being dispersed.' K. and D. P. prefers the 
 reading t^ /xr/, but Madvig observes, where the infinitive thus used expresses 
 the consequence and not the cause, it should properly /oZ/om; the verb. Cf. ch, 
 75. c. ^yj'SfO'yuoj 5' ^v avToU TO. ^v\a. 'The woodwork served as a frame 
 to hold the bricks together.* I believe myself that the collocation shows rrjs 
 ir/ootrxuxrews to be the latter of two nouns, whereof T(^-pLT)-(TKeMvvv<TdaL, is {i, e. 
 stjinds for) the former; and that the dative is simply an instrumental one. Tr. 
 are, from the non- dispersion of the alluvial deposit, bound together as in a chain. 
 irapaXXdl. — ' obliquely,' in a sort of quincunx order ; '.*.'.* * schriige gegen 
 einander.' K. Cf. Lobeck ad. Soph. Aj., 1087, whereas /caret aroixov is in 
 parallel lines, '.','..'. 6t6 8f| dXd(r6ai avrov. ' When as the 
 legend goes,* &c. For this use of 87] see supra. Cf. Arist. Lysist. 523. The 
 verb refers to actual wandering, not, I think, as some have suggested, to mental 
 hallucination, though the latter meaning may be supported. Soph. Aj. v. 23. 
 Sci^idrwv. For the best comment on this phrase see the opening of jEsch. 
 Eumenides. Cf. Thuc. vii. 80. vircCirovra, obscure significantem. 
 ^JTis, not fj, is used, because no particular spot is specified, * a country such 
 that.' For this peculiar force of 5<rTis, in introducing the especial attribute of 
 the object, its real property, or differentia, see Jelf, § 816. b. For irpiv di'see 
 Jelf, § 848, So Madvig ; irplv Sw is only used in this way after a negative ex- 
 pressed or implied. (ji^irw — not of^Trw, because it is the command 
 itself which is as it were here quoted, which would be of course expressed by 
 
2jS 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 [Book II. 
 
 AtijTW. Cf. Soph. Phil. 1409. n^TTu ye rpXv kv rCtv ijfieT^puv dtvs fivewv, 
 Tttt UolavTos. }i«p,i,a<r|i4vT|s — rendered unclean for him to be in. 
 
 SCaiTa— a place aufcient to support life. For this sense of Slaira, nearly 
 equivalent to our * home,' see Arist. £th. Nic. i. vi. ; Thuc. ii. 16. A. cf. 
 Philost. V. Herod. 562, Sfatra rep ffufxari iwtTrjdela. Compare the use of rpoiff^ 
 in Soph. (Ed. Col. 362 ; Phil. 3a, &c. .ihvviumvtn— founded a 
 
 dominion. \ry6[uva, i.e. , Thucyd. does not vouch for the story. See what 
 
 is said supra, c. 23, and cf. Herod, vii. 152. iyo) 5^ 64>€L\u\^ytiv rd \ty6fuvaf 
 Hideadai yi fi^u Sfv ov TraindTaaiv 6<p€i\u). 4irwKu|tttt. KovpiJTii was 
 
 its ancient name according to the Scholiast. Cf. Strabo, x. 2, 8 and 3. 
 
 Chapter CIII. — iWjp dvr* dvSpds. The first instance of such an exchange 
 says Bl. The first recorded instance. K. P. cf. v. 3, where a similar ex- 
 change is mentioned. He observes also that iXtvdipovi implies that the slavet 
 were sold. 
 
 APPENDIX 1. 
 
 On Book II. c. 90. ivl ttjv iavrwv yijv. 
 
 The controversy which this passage has excited would fill a moderate volume. 
 Mr. Grote alone has devoted to it ten octavo pages of very small print. Under 
 these circumstances, I can merely give what appears to be the most plausible 
 interpretation, and reply to the objections which have been urged against it. 
 I should tr. * The Peloponneaians getting under weigh at daybreak, directed their 
 course in a column four abreast upon their own coast, inward, in the direction 
 of the gulf, with the right wing leading, in which order also they had been lying 
 at their moorings.' Mr. Grote, on the other hand, interprets iirl ttjv eavruv yijv 
 as the Athenians' own land, meaning thereby the northern shore of the gulf, 
 in the neighbourhood of Naupactus. No one, I imagine, would naturally 
 adopt this view. It is only tolerable if the objections against the other be 
 fatal. Let us examine them. 
 
 (i.) 'Though the Scholiast explains ivL by irapd, it is impossible for it to 
 have any such meaning. With an accusative iiri must mean against, with 
 hostile intent, and this meaning is inconsistent with the above interpretation.* 
 I have already intimated my belief that hostile intent is a secondary not a 
 primary meaning of iirl with the accusative [i. 30, a. 54. a]. The primary 
 meaning is * motion on to a fixed point.' The secondary notion flows from this, 
 and is connected with the actual meeting or confronting that which is hostile 
 to us ; the actual coming into contact with opposition. That iiri followed by 
 an accusative does not of necessity connote ' hostile purpose,' may be seen by 
 many examples furnished by the Lexicons and grammars. In the present case 
 we need not go far for an instance very much to the point. Fiom the eighty- 
 sixth chapter we learn Trap^irXevae 5^ Kal 6 ^opfiim' iirX rb'Piov rb MoXoKpiKdp 
 . . . ^v 8i rovro pikv t6 'Floy <)>CXkOv ro2%' kdrivalois. I do not therefore at all 
 accept the necessity for any such meaning as * hostile purpose.' The prepo- 
 sition I believe has its original meaning, and I compare to it our own military 
 usage of the preposition 'upon,' which does not mean * on the top of anything,* 
 as a foreigner might suppose, but in the direction of — e. g. ' the advanced guard 
 will move upon Quatre Bras. ' It is here employed rather than irapd, because 
 the coast, as the map shows, makes a sweep upward to the north. Conse- 
 quently the fleet in advancing, iffu) toO KbXirov, would naturally seem to be 
 advancing upon it, rather than parallel to it ; just as Phormion, c. 86, ad- 
 vanced upon the promontory of Rhium. There was also more occasion to 
 employ the accusative, as the genitive was wanted to express the general 
 direction, the ultimate object of their course iau toO KdXvov, 
 
28o 
 
 APPENDIX. 
 
 Arnold has weakened his own case greatly by referring to ^tI cum dativo. 
 He does not, however, by any means say what Mr. Grote puts into his mouth ; 
 neither does he 'assign to iiri with an accusative a sense which he himself 
 admits it only has with a dative.' On the contrary, he claims for iiri with an 
 accusative a ' mixed notion,' of which iirl with a dative forms part. On the 
 other hand, he shows no clear perception of the distinction between 'motion 
 upon a point' [the accusative] and ' rest at a point, [the dative]. 
 
 (2.) * Arnold explains ttji* iavrOiv y^v by Sicyon and Corinth, because some 
 of the ships came from these places. They are too distant ; the explanation is 
 far fetched and improbable ; besides it is true of only part of the Peloponnesian 
 fleet.' Here again Arn. damages his own case. Surely a Peloponnesian fleet 
 might consider Peloponnesus as 7? eai/TuJv yrj, without descending into particu- 
 lars. At any rate, it was quite as much so as the northern coast could be ^ 
 eavTuiv 777 to the Athenians. Things are not described in ordinary narrative as 
 in a catalogue or inventory. In ch. 39, we have the whole Peloponnesian 
 party described as oi AaKeSai/idvioi, because, as I have there said, ' the Lace- 
 dsftmonians' stood for, and symbolized to the Athenian mind the aggregate of 
 their adversaries. So we speak of the French invasion of Russia, though it 
 was largely participated in by Germans and Italians. A somewhat similar 
 way of speaking is quite excusable here. 
 
 (3.) * If the Pelojwnnesian coast had been 'hugged' by the enemy's fleet, 
 Phormion could have had no cause for alarm concerning Naupactus.' Why 
 not ? Phormion was outside of the straits, Naupactus within them. Suppose 
 him to have remained outside, and the Peloponnesian fleet to have continued 
 their course to Panormus, what was to hinder them from making a sudden 
 dash across before he could double the promontory of Antirhium and come to 
 the rescue ? Besides, a glance at the map will show that a fleet sailing from 
 Rhium, upon the Achaean coast, i. e. towards Drepanum, would steer nearly 
 N.N.E. One or two more points of northing would put their heads in a direct 
 line for Naupactus. Phormion might well then suppose {vofxiffas) that they 
 would probably make for that place. Had they been making straight for 
 Naupactus, it would, despite of what Mr. Grote says, have been a case of 
 ' seeing,' not ' believing.' If a French flotilla were seen to quit Boulogne and 
 *raove upon,' 'make for' {TrXelv iiri), Cape Grisnez, I conceive that an English 
 fleet stationed opposite them, might well be alarmed for the safety of Dover, 
 and would not be justified in remaining at anchor. This would be particularly 
 the case if the enemy's fleet consiste 1 of screw steamers, to which the ancient 
 triremes may be considered in some respect analogous' on account of their 
 power of rowing against the wind. 
 
 These are I believe the most important objections which can be urged 
 against the interpretation of the passage which I have given. On the other 
 hand, the meaning advocated by Mr. Grote is so incompatible with the ordinary 
 usage of iavrQp that he has endeavoured to fortify it by a very large collection 
 of what he appears to consider similar instances. I cannot agree that the large 
 majority are at all similar. With all proper deference, I must say Mr. Grote 
 seems to have mistaken the real point at issue. It is not whether the reflexive 
 iavrQv may not be referred to more than one sort of antecedent, but whether 
 it is ever found where the antecedent would properly demand the demonstrative 
 
 APPENDIX. 
 
 281 
 
 pronoun mstead. In the present case, Mr. Grote himself would readily sub- 
 stitute airrwy or iKebuv ; in most of the cases cited by him it would be utterly 
 impossible to do so— e.g. iv. 97, el to6 tIs nva tdoi ix^pdu eavrov : ii. 95, 
 UepdlKKas ainn^ VTro<rx6ti€vos, fl'AerjvaloiidiaXXd^euuiavTbp: Anab. iv. 7. 13.' 
 Auuias—ldibp TLva Biovra lij l^Lyj^ovra eavrdu, iTrcXafi^duerai cis avrop KwX^atou': 
 Mem. IV. 3. 14, 6 ijXios oi>K iTTiTpiirei roh dvdpihwoi^ eavrov aKpc^ujs bpav &c 
 In these cases if Mr. Grote alters the reflexive pronoun into the demonstrative 
 he wiU obtain either no meaning at all, or one directly contrary to what the 
 author mtended. But here, upon his hypothesis of the author's intention 
 accordmg to his own showing, a similar alteration would give the meaning with 
 certainty and clearness. In short, we want to know whether we can have the 
 reflexive pronoun in cases where we should have anticipated the demonstrative 
 Nothing IS proved in favour of the affirmative by producing cases where it is 
 impossible to expect the demonstrative at all. 
 
 One class of instances adduced by Mr. Grote it is perhaps desirable to notice 
 because they involve a principle important to the younger scholar, which is not 
 very prominently brought forward in grammars and commentaries. Mr. Grote 
 justifies his loose way of taking eavrO^v here, by the fact that eavrov and ^Keluov 
 are sometimes found in the same sentence, in reference to the same person. 
 This is true ; but a very cursory examination of Mr. Grote's passages will show 
 that they do not prove much in favour of his conclusion. The first is ii. 13, 
 lUpLKXr,, iriroTOir^o-as, firt Wpxl^ano, ain^ ^iuo, &u ervyx^ue, /jl^ woXXdiKis, ij 
 airrds ISlg. (iovXdfiepos xa/>^recr0at rovs dypoi>i avrov jrapaXiwrj Kal p.^ dvibari, fj 
 Kal AaKeoacfioulu^u KeXevaduruu eV2 dca^oXf rjj 4avTov y^pvrat rovro, ib^wep 
 Kal rd Ayr} iXa6peiv irpociirov ^peKa Uiivov, Trpovydpeve k.t.X. But here all is 
 quite regular. Anyone acquainted with the genius of the language, will per- 
 ceive that the introduction of the word vpoelxop completely changes the point 
 of view from which the person is regarded, and with it the pronoun by which 
 he is designated. 6 {nroroiri/iaas must have the reflexive, because both refer to 
 the same person ; oi wpoeiTropres on the contrary would naturally speak of him 
 as iKeipos. 
 
 ^ Again iv. 99, 01 U Botwrot direKplpavro, el ph iv rfj Boiwrlqi elaip [ol' Adyj- 
 vatoi], dTTtoirray U t^j kavrtav diroipipeadai rd ff<piTepa- el 5i ep rrj ^kcCvwv, 
 oi)roi)s yiyp(l}<7Keip rb ■Koi.j)riop. In this most interesting passage [see' Commen- 
 tary ad locum], the whole thing turns upon the fact that the dispute about 
 locality is described strictly from the Boeotian point of view. The Boeotian 
 herald had orders to say if Delium was theirs {eavrC;>p) the Athenians might 
 depart on certain terms ; if it belonged to the other party {eKeipwp), they of 
 course could do as they chose with their own. 
 
 In Xen. UelL i. i. 27, eavrCop refers to the generals as regarded by them- 
 selves, and Ueipuip to the same generals, as regarded by those who had to elect 
 them. The pronouns could not be interchanged without violating the sense, 
 and neither this, nor either of the two previous passages, aflford the least 
 countenance to such a misapplication of the reflexive pronoun, as Mr. Grote's 
 translation of the present one appears to me to exhibit. 
 
APPENDIX II. 
 
 Ok the Gbssk Aorist. 
 
 In a work published some time ago,* I endeavoured to give such an explanation 
 of the Greek Aorist as might make the subject intelligible to the young scholar. 
 I did not imagine that I was advancing any novel doctrine, or, in fact, doing 
 more than expanding and applying the principle of which the very name of 
 the tense is significant. But though some scholars of reputation have given 
 a general assent to the theory which I then maintained, others have kindly 
 favoured me with the statement of their doubts and difficulties upon the whole 
 matter. It has, therefore, for some years been my object to weigh very carefully 
 all usages of the Aorist presenting any peculiarity which my somewhat scanty 
 reading has supplied. I hope to be enabled hereafter to treat the whole subject 
 in an extended form. At present I am only anxious to give my general conclu- 
 eions, so far as they are necessary for the understanding of those allusions to 
 the subject which the foregoing notes contain. 
 
 I would propose then to arrive at the meaning of the Aorist, as a tense of the 
 Greek Verb, by the process of exhaustion. 
 
 We can only comprehend the true mutual relation of the tenses, or times, ex- 
 pressed by the verb, by regarding them from one fixed point of view. 
 
 Such a central stand-point in time, as the individual himself is in space, is 
 found in the j^resent. 
 
 All other temes or <mc«must take up their position on one side of this or the 
 
 other. 
 
 First then of those behind it: — 
 
 (I.) One denotes an action simply past in reference to this pomt : the past 
 in reference to the present. This is the proper perfect. 
 
 (2.) Another denotes an action past in a complex or two-fold way: i.e., past 
 in reference to some point of time, which is itself past in reference to the present. 
 The past in reference to the past. This is the pluperfect. , 
 
 (3.) Another denotes an action in a state of passing, and arrested at some 
 given point, which point is either the present, or past; perhaps, strictly speaking, 
 always the last. This is the imperfect. 
 
 We have next to consider those times which lie at the other side of the 
 
 present. 
 
 (i.) One denotes an action future in respect of the present, without standing 
 in determinate relation to any other point of time. Future in reference to the 
 present. The future, commonly so called. 
 
 • Theophrasti Characteres. With Notes, psychological and critical. Longman and Co, 
 1852. 
 
 APPENDIX. 283 
 
 (1.) Another denotes an action future in respect of the present, but past in 
 reference to some determinate point which is itself future in respect of the 
 present. The future in reference to the present, but past in reference to future 
 time. The second future, or future perfect. 
 
 This is an exhaustive analysis of the notion of time, or tense, as employed in 
 the description of action, and yet we have not included the Aorist. 
 
 Or, again, to take another method of analysis: — 
 
 Every action is either complete or incomplete. 
 
 Complete or incomplete in present time. Perfect ["I have"], or present. 
 
 Complete or incomplete in past time. Pluperfect, or imperfect. 
 
 Complete or incomplete in future time. Future perfect, or future. 
 
 Here then we have a complete apparatus of tense or time for describing any 
 action in its temporal relation to any other action. When such is our object we 
 employ one of the above forms. But we may also merely mean to declare the 
 occurrence of an action without any object of the sort. Most languages employ 
 for that purpose one of the same tenses as would have been employed had the 
 expression of a temporal relation been required. The Greeks, I believe, " far 
 more accurate speakers and thinkers than ourselves," seeing that a tense 
 properly connoting a special temporal relation, ought not to be used where none 
 Buch is implied, adopted a narrative tense, to serve simply as such, without any 
 connotation of the relations of time at all. This tense was the Aorist, or in- 
 definite, indeterminate tense ; and they made use of it when they merely wanted 
 to say that something had happened, without stopping to give any special infor- 
 mation concerning the relation in time of this something to anything else ; 
 when, in short, the fact was prominent in their mind, and the time of the fact 
 altogether subordinate. 
 
 To this usage belong the great mass of Aorists which encounter us in narrative. 
 It is needless to give examples ; some few have been pointed out in the foregoing 
 notes. 
 
 But there are several particular usages of the Aorist which so strongly illus- 
 trate the principle, that it may be instructive to refer very briefly to them. 
 
 First then, we have that common and acknowledged use of the Aorist, wherein 
 it is said to resemble the imperfect, and is predicated of anything 'wont to happen.' 
 e. g. ^/3Xa^e 56^a. Eur. Med. yrjpqL rb <l>povtLv ibiba^av Antig., last line, al bk 
 fivpiai irbXeiK, kSlm ePrts oUy p^tSiws Kadv^piaav. (Ed. Col. 1535. fiei^ovs 5' dras 
 Srav dpyiffdrj balfiuv otKoii drr^buiKev. Med. v. i^O. firavffe. Ibid. 2^^,. iKoifiiae. 
 Ajojc, V. 674. Instances, indeed, are quite innumerable. Now to consider these 
 identical with the notion of habitual or continued action described by the imper- 
 fect, seems to me altogether fallacious and unphilosophical. They describe what 
 has happened, is happening, and will happen again. To limit the action or event 
 to any particular time would destroy the whole force of the expression. No 
 special time is connoted, and therefore we have the true Aorist, or indetermi- 
 nate tense. The Latins conveyed the same force more clumsily by the perfect. 
 Mollivit aversos Penates. Deduxit corpore febres. Horace. Illius immensae 
 ruperunt horrea menses. Virgil, Georg. i. 49, where Forbiger observes, ' signi- 
 ficatione Aoristi Graeci pro 'rumpere solent,' quod ita explices. 'Jam aliquoties 
 ruperunt, ideoque eddem rerum conditione redeunte, etiam nunc rumpunt, et 
 posthac rumpent. 
 
 1 1 
 
284 
 
 APPENDIX. 
 
 In close connexion with this we have another usage of the Aorist, which is 
 said to be nearly equivalent to the present. This occurs where the connotation 
 of pure past time is clearly inappropriate, and where the action described by 
 the Aorist is generalized so as to take in the notion of the present. Thus Dr. 
 Pf^ile explains ?/co^a, Ckoeph. v. 410, — 'I am in the predicament of one that 
 ' -jfore now has beaten — and hence, a beater, or one that heats' We may com- 
 pare iirrri^a dvfxov (Ed. Col. 1465. 'I am in a state of tem)r.' iirr}V((Ta. 
 Ajax, V. 536; Elect. 1322; Alcest. 1047; (rfv^a; S. C. T. 835. (<ppi^a, Ajax, 
 674, and Track. 1044. Rost. § 151, notices this class of cases as one expressed 
 in all other languages by the present, and rightly I think translates them iy^Xaca, 
 * Ich muss lachen.' (pfJ-u^a, * Ich muss seufzen,' &c. 
 
 From this indefinite acceptation of the tense, refusing, as it were, to connote 
 any exact temporal relation, we find grammarians and commentators telling us 
 that it stands first for one tense, then for another, as e. g. for the Pluperfect, 
 Buttmann, Large Gr. Gr. Of this no further proof is requisite than an 
 examination of that carefully edited and popular school-book, Xenophon's 
 Anabasis, by Macmichael, Grammar School Classics, 1851. There we find, 
 without advancing beyond lib. i. the aorist said to be put for the future [i. ■2. 2.], 
 for the pluperfect [i. 4. 5], for the perfect [i. 6. 6], indiflferently with the 
 imperfect [i. 9. 19]. Now, it is impossible to conceive that the Greeks can 
 have interchanged their tenses in this wild way. What we should say is, that, 
 in any of the above cases, had the writer wished accurately to connote the time 
 of the fact, and not simply to mention it, he might have used the perfect instead 
 of the aorist, &c. It is from the wide circumference of meaning which this 
 indeterminate sense of the aorist embraces, that it seems to trespass upcm the 
 province of the other tenses. Nay, it does so even with regard to the future, 
 which is a source of no small ditticulty and vexation to those commentators 
 who persist in fixing upon it a definite connotation of past time. Such, for 
 instance, is its employment after verbs of promising, with an obviously future 
 force, e.g., uirotrxo/ifyosairrotj/iTj irpbadiv iravaacrBai, irplvavTovs Karaydyoi of/caSe, 
 Xen. Anah. i. 2. 2. koI irepl fiiv tovtuu vir^ffx^Td fioi /SouXeucroa^ai, Ibid. ii. 
 3. 20. ovK ovv XPV rov davdrov r^ ^VP-iq. -triffTfixTavrai x^'po" fiovXcvffaffdai, 
 Thuc. iii. 46, said of the still pendant decision. €iKbs 5^ dvai iroXXovs diroX-q- 
 <t>Orivai l^u), vi. 49, of a probable case, upon which Goll. remarks: 'Aoristus pro 
 futuro post eu6s, iXiris et similia frequens est.' ij firfrrjp vvv ^h oUrai Tvxbvra. 
 fie tQv diKaiiov trap vfilv viro54^a(r6aL [Reiske e conject. vrrob^^eadat] Kal Tr)v 
 dbeX<py)v e\5a><retj', Dera. p. 842. 21. Here we have of two future events, the 
 aorist and future infinitives in conjunction. In a similar, manner direp ydp re 
 Kal avTiK 'OXvfjLinos ovk ir^Xeaaeu, ix re Kal 6\pi TcXct avv re /irydXy dir^Tiorav, 
 //. A. 160, we have both tenses together, and as the fact denoted by the last 
 depends upon the first, it is absurd to say tliat it is more certain. And in the 
 other moods, we may remark the same connexion with the future, e. g. ireiddv 
 5enrvr}<TuiJL€v, Anab. iv. 6. 17, is said of a problematical event. I believe that a 
 similar absence of temporal connotation is found sometimes with respect to the 
 aor. part. tQv ^vp.YroXcp.^a-avrcdv Trpoiixoin-ej, Thuc. i. 18, must, in its collo- 
 cation, be nearly equivalent to ^u/x/idxwi'. From this it follows, not that 
 the aorist is indifferently substitutable for any other tense, but that it may 
 stand for any tense, where the notion of the time connoted by that tense is 
 
 APPENDIX. 
 
 285 
 
 absent from the writer's thoughts. No tense limiting action to time would 
 seem so proper as the i56^affa, John, xvii. 4, or ol firj ISdm-es Kal TTLffTevaavres 
 XX. 29. 
 
 From the absence of all connotation of time properly so called, comes that 
 very curious use of the aorist, to express, so to speak, acts not defined as 
 happening at any time at ail. These could not properly be described by any 
 tense specifying an actual time of occurrence, and it strongly supports ou' 
 theory of the aorist to find that the aorist alone is employed for the purpose. 
 We find it accordingly in the description of unfulfilled purposes, and intended 
 though incomplete, actions. See e.g. Soph. Aj. 1105-6. 
 
 MEN. 5iKaia ydp t6v5' evrvx^ti' KTcivavra fxe ; 
 TETK. KTc^vavra, dtivdv y eliras h Kal ^^s davuv. 
 
 Here the aorist has the sense of 'was my slayer,' i.e., in intention, though not 
 in fact. The usage perfectly agrees with our theory of the aorist. That of the 
 great Hermann does not seem very intelligible : * Prapsens prohibitum esse 
 facere, Aoristus /ecme sed sine effcctu signijicat.' How to kill a man without 
 effecting his death, seems rather a difficulty. Elmsley [Heraclidce, loooj 
 dogmatically asserts — 'Aoristus ej usque participium banc significationem 
 respuunt.' But cf. (Kreiva a tvra, addressed to living person, Jon, v. 1291, 
 KTeivaaa, Andromeda, v. 811, KX^^as, (Ed. Col. v. 1008, said of an actioi«, 
 attempted, but never carried into execution. In Xen, Anab. ii. 6. 4, we find 
 idavaruidt) said of a person still alive, in fiict, only sentenced to death ; and 
 Herod, vii. 10. 2, supplies us with a very curious instance, ovk dv dixiporeprj 
 c<pl i\<Sipr]a-f said of what is future and hypothetical. 
 
 The general conclusion, therefore, at which we arrive is, that the aorist is 
 properly a narrative tense, not connoting any one particular determinate notion 
 of time, and that accordingly it is employed of actions or events occurring 
 under all sorts of relations of time. Hence the attempt to assign to it any 
 special temporal connotation tends to confound it with other tenses, and obscure 
 the true metaphysical conception of its nature. This is, I think, the fault of Butt- 
 mann' s theory, so generally accepted, that the aorist signifies momentary action. 
 It is very true that, generally, the aorist is used to describe momentary actions. 
 But this must be so from the nature of the case, where the act is not determined 
 either in its occurrence or progress by defining its temporal relation to other 
 actions. Momentary, in the sense of lasting for a moment ^ cannot be assigned 
 as its essential signification to the aorist. Many actions described by the 
 aorist last for a long tinu, and many actions lasting only for a moment, are 
 described by the other tenses. Want of space forbids the enumeration of passages 
 which I had selected in illustration. It is enough to quote Buttmann's own 
 translator, who cites Jl. A. 437-8, where the acts described by the aorist are ef 
 as long duration as those described by the imperfect. Cf. note on irpo^ra^e Kal 
 iK^Xevc, Thuc. iii. 112. Shnilarly, I do not think it right to assign, as Jelf, 
 and Mr. Shilleto [De Falsd Legatione, p. 181), to the aorist, as its distinctive 
 sense, a meaning which is admitted to be proper to the perfect, i.e., to hare 
 completed an action. The latter, e.g. tr. Thuc. vi. 23, iKirXeiv .... iKTrXevaai, 
 to commence the voyage, to huve finished the voyage. What then is iKireTrXev- 
 Kivat. ? Why should not the first mean now to be sailing, and the second speak 
 
286 
 
 APPENDIX. 
 
 merely in general terms, to sail f Indeed, in the second passage quoted by 
 Mr. Shilleto, he seems to adopt a similar principle of explanation, e. g. viii. 46, 
 where he translates Afu^epoCv, 'to liberate, ' iXcvOepwaat, not to apply the principle 
 in liberating. It is to be wished that Mr. Shilleto would turn his attention to 
 the subject, as he is of all persons best qualified to elucidate it. There are 
 many subordinate questions which would be benefited by such an investigation. 
 I do not, for instance, think the common rules about /xri with the imperative 
 pres. and aor. subjunctive, quite satisfactory. Can it be proved that the first 
 is always general, and the latter particular f It may be particular, when fol- 
 lowed by some particular objective case, but is it so universally ? What, then, 
 are we to make of Soph. Elect, w. 383-4, 
 
 vpbs TttOra (ppd^ov, Kdfxe fiyj iro6* ijarepou 
 
 Is not fiT] kK^tttc rather don't be stealing now, Hibernic^, don't be after 
 stealing, and ^it; vXe^t??, 'don't steal,' and, don't steal same particular thing, 
 when that particular thing is mentioned ? 
 
 By way of conclusion, I would remark that we may answer the old stock 
 question [Elmsley ad Medea, 78] very easily on the above principles. 
 irplv Seiiryeiw — * before I am supping,' i.e., before I go to supper. 
 rpiv deSeLvvTjK^vai — 'before I have done supper,* i.e., before supper is over. 
 irplv beivvTJffai — perfectly general. Before supper time. 
 
 ADDENDA ET CORRIGENDA. 
 
 LIB. I. 
 
 Chapter 
 
 I. (a.) quce unquam gesta sunt. The ref. is Bloomfield's. But the 
 parallelism is removed if we tr. ' which have ever been waged.' 
 VI. (a.) iy ToU TTpuToi may perhaps stand as a nominative, the whole 
 three words having coalesced into one from habit, and being 
 so declined ; cf. iariv 6t€ and similar phrases. 
 (&.) for * distinctus,' leg. *discinctu8.* 
 
 {d.) yet one Schol. has aUkov aimf rijs fJTTT|s iyiuero. It is not 
 easy to see how. 
 X. (a.) for 'participle,' leg. 'particle.* 
 XIII. (c.) after Bl. read *take Trore with 5^ and tr. 'always, as 1 
 suppose for certain, had a mart.' 
 XXIX. (6.) for ^€v^ayT€s, leg, ^ev^ayres — the ^ has slipped in more than 
 once. 
 XXXII. (6.) ad fin., 'cf. by all means. Dem, de Cor. p. 277, els rV 
 
 iiriovffay irvXaiav K.r.\.' 
 XXXIV. (6.) ad fin., *or perhaps we may refer 5eo/A^voi5 to the speakers, — 
 'so that you may not in a matter of deceit be led astray by them, 
 and in a matter of open request refuse us assistance.' ' 
 XLII. (c.) ad fin., 'rb does not, of course, appertain to the infinitive, but 
 t6 irX^oy is the object of ^x^**'*' 
 L. (a.) ad fin., 'perhaps, after all, the term is intentionally technical; 
 * performing the operation of the dieKirXovs upon the dispersed 
 ships ; — charging them over and over again.' * 
 LXVI. (a.) for fu/5/Jw<rw, leg. ^uppibccru), and /or ^v^prjaio, leg. ^v^pTjaau. 
 LXIX. (c.) ad fin., for ' supra a,' leg. 'supra b.' 
 LXXVIII. (6.) for rjdij, leg. ijdv, and ibid., ciii. (6). 
 XC. (c.) for fiexP^ ov, leg. oC. 
 XCVII. (6.) after * importance,' add see Appendix II. 
 CVIL (6.) after KuXvaeiy, transpose 'and ifieWov, &c.,* to the end of 
 the sentence. 
 CVIII. (6.) leg. * in all amounting to.* 
 
 End of the Fibst Volume. 
 
LOXDOK: 
 
 8AVILL AHD SnWARDS, PBI5TBRS, CHAHDOS nBIBT 
 
 COYBNT GABDSX.